AI Tipiṭaka Translations

Hide English Translation

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Homage to the Blessed One, the Arahant, the Perfectly Enlightened One.

Vinayavinicchayo

Vinayavinicchaya

Ganthārambhakathā
Introductory Discourse to the Text

1.

1.

Vanditvā sirasā seṭṭhaṃ, buddhamappaṭipuggalaṃ;

Having bowed with my head to the most excellent Buddha, the matchless individual;
To the Dhamma that destroys becoming, and to the Saṅgha, free from taints.

2.

2.

Bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīnañca, hitatthāya samāhito;

For the benefit of monks and nuns, being of composed mind;
I will explain concisely the Vinayavinicchaya.

3.

3.

Anākulamasaṃkiṇṇaṃ, madhuratthapadakkamaṃ;

Unconfused, unmixed, with sweet meaning and phrasing;
This supreme Vinaya arrangement brings about understanding.

4.

4.

Apāraṃ otarantānaṃ, sāraṃ vinayasāgaraṃ;

For those crossing the boundless, the essence of the Vinaya-ocean;
For monks and nuns, it becomes a delightful ship.

5.

5.

Tasmā vinayanūpāyaṃ, vinayassavinicchayaṃ;

Therefore, listen to me attentively, as I speak,
On the method of Vinaya, the Vinayavinicchaya, with an undistracted mind.

Bhikkhuvibhaṅgo

Bhikkhuvibhaṅga

Pārājikakathā

Pārājikakathā

Paṭhamapārājikakathā
First Pārājikakathā

6.

6.

Tividhe tilamattampi, magge sevanacetano;

In a threefold way, even sesame-seed size, with the intention of enjoying in the path;
Entering the sexual organ in an accessible place, he is defeated (pārājita).

7.

7.

Pavesanaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ vā, ṭhitamuddharaṇampi vā;

Whether entering, having entered, remaining, or even withdrawing;
A monk who approves of it, still under training, except for the act, is defeated.

8.

8.

Santhatenaṅgajātena, santhataṃ vā asanthataṃ;

With a covered sexual organ, whether covered or uncovered;
Indeed, entering the path is the same, even with an uncovered one.

9.

9.

Upādinnenupādinne, anupādinnakena vā;

With what is living, or not living, or with what is non-sentient;
Rubbing against what is non-sentient, if he approves of it there.

10.

10.

Hoti pārājikakkhette, paviṭṭhe tu parājito;

It is in the field of pārājika, but defeated when entered;
In the field, he incurs a thullaccaya, and a dukkaṭa is also specified.

11.

11.

Mate akkhāyite cāpi, yebhuyyakkhāyitepi ca;

With a corpse, or one identified, or one largely identified;
A man who engages in sexual intercourse is pārājika.

12.

12.

Yebhuyyakkhāyite cāpi, upaḍḍhakkhāyitepi ca;

Even with one largely identified, or one partially identified;
There is an offense of thullaccaya, in the remainder, an offense of dukkaṭa.

13.

13.

Nimittamattaṃ sesetvā, khāyitepi sarīrake;

Leaving aside only the sign, even with the body identified;
In that sign, even engaging in sexual intercourse is a defeat.

14.

14.

Uddhumātādisampatte, sabbatthāpi ca dukkaṭaṃ;

When contact with an inflated corpse occurs, in all cases, there is a dukkaṭa;
What is identified and not identified, all is in a dead body.

15.

15.

Chinditvā pana tacchetvā, nimittuppāṭite pana;

But having cut, or having carved, or having uprooted the sign;
From the contraction of the wound there, engaging touches a thullaccaya.

16.

16.

Tato methunarāgena, patitāya nimittato;

Then, with sexual passion, from the fallen sign;
To her who is attempting, a dukkaṭa for the lump of flesh.

17.

17.

Nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇepi, maṃse nhārumhi vā sati;

Even with a nail-sized piece of flesh, or sinew being there;
Engaging in sexual intercourse, with a living being, he is defeated.

18.

18.

Kaṇṇacchiddakkhināsāsu, vatthikose vaṇesu vā;

In the ear-hole, eye, nostrils, bladder, or wounds;
Entering the sexual organ, with lust, he touches a thullaccaya.

19.

19.

Avasesasarīrasmiṃ, upakacchūrukādisu;

In the remaining body, in the armpits, thighs, etc.;
If lust is present, he incurs a dukkaṭa while engaging.

20.

20.

Assagomahisādīnaṃ, oṭṭhagadrabhadantinaṃ;

In horses, cows, buffaloes, camels, donkeys, elephants;
In the nostrils, bladders, he touches a thullaccaya while engaging.

21.

21.

Tathā sabbatiracchānaṃ, akkhikaṇṇavaṇesupi;

Similarly, in all animals, in the eyes, ears, wounds;
In the remaining bodies, he incurs a dukkaṭa while engaging.

22.

22.

Tesaṃ allasarīresu, matānaṃ sevato pana;

In their fresh bodies, when dead, if engaging;
There may be a threefold offense, if there is a threefold field.

23.

23.

Bahi methunarāgena, nimittaṃ itthiyā pana;

Externally, with sexual passion, at the female sign;
For him touching with a sign, there would be a thullaccaya.

24.

24.

Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena, nimittena mukhena vā;

With passion for bodily contact, with the sign or the mouth;
For him touching the female sign, it would be a grave offense.

25.

25.

Tathevobhayarāgena, nimittaṃ purisassapi;

Likewise, with passion for both, the sign of a male;
For him touching with a sign, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.

26.

26.

Nimittena nimittaṃ tu, tiracchānagatitthiyā;

The sign with the sign, of a female animal;
Touching incurs a thullaccaya, from sexual passion.

27.

27.

Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena, tiracchānagatitthiyā;

With passion for bodily contact, of a female animal;
Touching the sign with the sign is considered a dukkaṭa.

28.

28.

Aṅgajātaṃ pavesetvā, tamāvaṭṭakate mukhe;

Having inserted the sexual organ, into the mouth, making it a circle;
Having made it go into the air there, he incurs a dukkaṭa when withdrawing.

29.

29.

Tathā catūhi passehi, itthiyā heṭṭhimattalaṃ;

Likewise, with the four sides, the lower surface of a woman;
Without touching, having entered, he incurs a dukkaṭa when withdrawing.

30.

30.

Uppāṭitoṭṭhamaṃsesu, bahi nikkhantakesu vā;

In the flesh of the uprooted lip, or in the hairs coming out;
Or in the teeth, attempting, he would incur a thullaccaya.

31.

31.

Aṭṭhisaṅghaṭṭanaṃ katvā, magge duvidharāgato;

Having made bone contact, in the path, from twofold passion;
Whether semen is released or not released, he incurs a dukkaṭa while attempting.

32.

32.

Itthiṃ methunarāgena, āliṅgantassa dukkaṭaṃ;

Embracing a woman with sexual passion incurs a dukkaṭa;
The same principle applies to hand-holding, caressing, kissing, etc.

33.

33.

Apade ahayo macchā, kapotā dvipadepi ca;

Snakes without feet, fish, pigeons even with two feet;
Iguanas with four feet below, these are the grounds for pārājika.

34.

34.

Sevetukāmatācittaṃ, magge maggappavesanaṃ;

The mind desiring to engage, the entry of the path into the path;
These two elements are stated for the first and last ground.

35.

35.

Dukkaṭaṃ paṭhamasseva, sāmantamiti vaṇṇitaṃ;

A dukkaṭa is described as being adjacent to the first;
But for the remaining three, a thullaccaya is declared.

36.

36.

‘‘Anāpattī’’ti ñātabbaṃ, ajānantassa bhikkhuno;

"There is no offense," should be understood for a monk who does not know;
Likewise, for one who does not approve, but for one who knows and approves, there is an offense.

37.

37.

Vinaye anayūparame parame;

In Vinaya, in the cessation of wrong, in the supreme;
In the guidance of the good, in guidance;
He is skilled, devoted to effort, not delighting;
Here, one delights in what is essential in his own opinion.

38.

38.

Imaṃ hitavibhāvanaṃ bhāvanaṃ;

This thought of benefit, thought;
Has known, a joy arisen, arisen;
May he, with the teaching of Māra's snare, teaching;
Be equal to the protector, with protection.

Iti vinayavinicchaye paṭhamapārājikakathā niṭṭhitā.

Thus ends the First Pārājikakathā in the Vinayavinicchaya.

Dutiyapārājikakathā
Second Pārājikakathā

39.

39.

Ādiyanto harantova-haranto iriyāpathaṃ;

Beginning, ending, taking, or taking in the mode of conduct;
Spoiling likewise from the place, or causing to move, he is defeated (pārājita).

40.

40.

Tattha nānekabhaṇḍānaṃ, pañcakānaṃ vasā pana;

There, due to the many kinds of goods, the five;
These ten removals should be understood by the discerning.

41.

41.

Sāhatthāṇattiko ceva, nissaggo atthasādhako;

By one's own hand, command, and cession, purpose being achieved;
Abandoning the burden, this is the fivefold by one's own hand.

42.

42.

Pubbasahapayogo ca, saṃvidāharaṇampi ca;

Prior association, and also taking by arrangement;
Symbolic action, omen, the fivefold beginning with prior association.

43.

43.

Theyyapasayhaparikappa-paṭicchannakusādikā;

Theft, force, contrivance, concealed straw, etc.;
These five removals should be understood by the wise.

44.

44.

Vatthukālagghadese ca, paribhogañca pañcapi;

Object, time, value, and use, these five;
Having known these, judgment should be made by the wise.

45.

45.

Dutiyaṃ vāpi kuddālaṃ, piṭakaṃ pariyesato;

Seeking a second spade or basket;
Going with the thought of theft incurs a dukkaṭa from prior association.

46.

46.

Tatthajātakakaṭṭhaṃ vā, lataṃ vā chindato pana;

Cutting wood or a creeper that grows there;
A dukkaṭa in both cases is stated from simultaneous association.

47.

47.

Pathaviṃ khaṇato vāpi, byūhato paṃsumeva vā;

Digging the earth, or removing dust;
Touching a pot, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.

48.

48.

Mukhe pāsaṃ pavesetvā, khāṇuke baddhakumbhiyā;

Having placed a noose in the mouth, or a pot tied to a stump;
The difference in place should be known, by one who understands, based on the bindings.

49.

49.

Dve ṭhānāni panekasmiṃ, khāṇuke baddhakumbhiyā;

Two places in one, a pot tied to a stump;
Or a ring, placed at the root of a tree, or made so.

50.

50.

Uddharantassa khāṇuṃ vā, chindato saṅkhalimpi vā;

For him who is removing the stump, or cutting the chain;
A thullaccaya, then if he moves the pot from its place, he is defeated.

51.

51.

Paṭhamaṃ pana kumbhiṃ vā, uddharitvā tathā puna;

First, having removed the pot, then again;
If he moves the stump or the chain from its place, the same principle applies.

52.

52.

Ito cito ca ghaṃsanto, mūle sāreti rakkhati;

Scraping from here and there, protecting, taking away at the root;
He is defeated as he makes the ring go into the air there.

53.

53.

Jātaṃ chindati ce rukkhaṃ, dukkaṭaṃ kumbhimatthake;

If he cuts a tree that has grown, a dukkaṭa on the pot's head;
Cutting near it, there is a pācittiya, it is said.

54.

54.

Antokumbhigataṃ bhaṇḍaṃ, phandāpeti sace pana;

If he shakes goods inside the pot;
Or moves it around there, there would be a thullaccaya for him.

55.

55.

Haranto kumbhiyā bhaṇḍaṃ, muṭṭhiṃ chindati attano;

Taking away goods from the pot, he cuts his fist;
Or having gone into a container, the monk is defeated.

56.

56.

Hāraṃ vā pana pāmaṅgaṃ, suttāruḷhaṃ tu kumbhiyā;

A necklace or a garland, attached to the pot with a thread;
If he shakes it, according to the object, he is defeated if he moves it from its place.

57.

57.

Sappiādīsu yaṃ kiñci, pivato pādapūraṇaṃ;

Drinking ghee, etc., whatever it may be, filling a foot;
With a single attempt, he is defeated when it is drunk.

58.

58.

Katvāva dhuranikkhepaṃ, pivantassa punappunaṃ;

Having made an abandonment of the burden, drinking again and again;
Even if he drinks the entire pot, there is no defeat.

59.

59.

Sace khipati yaṃ kiñci, bhaṇḍakaṃ telakumbhiyaṃ;

If he throws something, a little item, into an oil pot;
That oil, worth a foot, he drinks surely that much.

60.

60.

Hatthato muttamatteva, theyyacitto vinassati;

As soon as it is released from the hand, the thought of theft is destroyed;
Even without pulling out the pot, if he pours out the oil, it is the same.

61.

61.

Telassākiraṇaṃ ñatvā, khittaṃ rittāya kumbhiyā;

Having known the scattering of oil, thrown into an empty pot;
The oil that is drunk and that item, he is defeated as he removes them.

62.

62.

Tattheva bhindato telaṃ, chaḍḍentassa tatheva ca;

Breaking the oil there, throwing it away in the same way;
Burning it or making it unusable, there is a dukkaṭa.

Bhūmaṭṭhakathā.

Ground-level Story.

63.

63.

Ṭhapitaṃ pattharitvā ca, sāṭakattharaṇādikaṃ;

Having placed, or spread out, a cloak, a covering, etc.;
Having wrapped and removed, he is defeated when released from the place.

64.

64.

Orimantena vā phuṭṭha-mokāsaṃ pārimantato;

The opportunity touched by the near side, from the far side;
If he pulls beyond what incurs a pārājika, even directly.

Thalaṭṭhakathā.

Platform Story.

65.

65.

Purato mukhatuṇḍañca, kalāpaggañca pacchato;

The mouth and beak in front, and the end of the tail feathers in the back;
The wings on the two sides, and the toenails below likewise.

66.

66.

Uddhañcāpi sikhagganti, gagane gacchato pana;

And also upward, the tip of the crest, when going in the sky;
For a peacock, there are six boundaries, which should be understood by the discerning.

67.

67.

Bhikkhu ‘‘sassāmikaṃ moraṃ, gahessāmī’’ti khegataṃ;

A monk, "I will seize the peacock belonging to an owner," in the sky;
He stretches out his hand, or stands in front of it.

68.

68.

Moropi gagane pakkhe, cāreti na ca gacchati;

The peacock moves its wings in the sky, but does not go;
There is a dukkaṭa for obstructing the going, and also for touching it.

69.

69.

Ṭhānā moramamocento, phandāpeti sace pana;

If he disturbs the peacock from its place, if he shakes it;
In such a shaking, a thullaccaya is declared.

70.

70.

Aggahetvā gahetvā vā, hatthena pana attano;

Not having taken hold, or having taken hold, with his own hand;
If he moves the peacock from its place, he himself is defeated from that place.

71.

71.

Phuṭṭhokāsaṃ mukhaggena, kalāpaggena vā pana;

The opportunity touched by the tip of the beak, or by the end of the tail feathers;
Or the monk with the end of the tail feathers, touched by the tip of the beak.

72.

72.

Atikkāmeyya yo moraṃ, ṭhānā cāveti nāma so;

Whoever exceeds the peacock, he is said to move it from its place;
The same principle is shown for the feet, crest, and wings.

73.

73.

Gagane pana gacchanto, kare moro nilīyati;

When going in the sky, the peacock hides in the hand;
Caressing it only in the hand, is called shaking.

74.

74.

Sace gaṇhāti taṃ moraṃ, itarena karena so;

If he takes that peacock feather with the other hand, the monk is fallen from his place due to moving it from its location.

75.

75.

Itaraṃ pana morassa, upaneti sace karaṃ;

But if he brings his hand near the other peacock feather, there is no offense; having flown up, it hides itself.

76.

76.

Disvā aṅge nilīnaṃ taṃ, theyyacittena gacchato;

Seeing it hidden in the limbs, if he goes with the intention of stealing, he incurs a thullaccaya for the foot, and a parajika for the second.

77.

77.

Bhūmiyaṃ ṭhitamorassa, tīṇi ṭhānāni paṇḍito;

For a peacock feather standing on the ground, the wise one should explain three locations: the feet and the handle.

78.

78.

Tato kesaggamattampi, moraṃ pathavito pana;

Then, even if a hair-tip's worth of the peacock feather is (lifted) from the ground, there is a pārājika for that monk who lifts it.

79.

79.

Chijjamānaṃ suvaṇṇādiṃ, patte patati ce pana;

If gold or other (valuables) being cut fall into the bowl, there is a pārājika for him when lifting it with his hand.

80.

80.

Sace anuddharitvāva, theyyacittena gacchati;

If, without lifting it, he goes with the intention of stealing, he should declare a pārājika at the second footstep.

81.

81.

Eseva ca nayo ñeyyo, hatthe vattheva matthake;

This same method should be understood for (something in) the hand, cloth, or on the head; that is its location, wherever it is situated.

Ākāsaṭṭhakathā.

Ākāsaṭṭhakathā.

82.

82.

Theyyacittena yaṃ kiñci, mañcapīṭhādisuṭṭhitaṃ;

Whatever is on couches, chairs, etc., with the intention of stealing, a dukkata for touching whether touched before or not.

83.

83.

Saṃharitvā sace vaṃse, ṭhapitaṃ hoti cīvaraṃ;

If a robe is placed, having been gathered up, on a bamboo (frame), having made the near and far sides a single load.

84.

84.

Cīvarena phuṭṭhokāso, ṭhānaṃ tassa pavuccati;

The space touched by the robe is called its location; but the entire bamboo frame for robes is not considered so.

85.

85.

Orimantena okāsaṃ, phuṭṭhaṃ tamitarena vā;

If the near side is touched by the space, or the far side, or the far side is touched, or again the near side.

86.

86.

Dakkhiṇantena phuṭṭhaṃ vā, vāmantenitarena vā;

Or the right side is touched, or the left side, falling away is when he transgresses the place touched by the left side.

87.

87.

Uddhaṃ vā ukkhipantassa, cīvaraṃ pana vaṃsato;

Furthermore, when lifting the robe up from the bamboo (frame), when a hair-tip's worth is lifted, there is a pārājika for him.

88.

88.

Rajjukena ca bandhitvā, ṭhapitaṃ pana cīvaraṃ;

But when the robe is placed having been tied with a string, there is a thullaccaya when untying it; when it is freed, it touches a pārājika.

89.

89.

Veṭhetvā ṭhapitaṃ vaṃse, nibbeṭhentassa bhikkhuno;

For the monk unwinding (a robe) placed wrapped on a bamboo (frame), the same method (applies) when breaking a ring or releasing (it).

90.

90.

Cīvarassa pasāretvā, ṭhapitassa hi vaṃsake;

For a robe spread out and placed on a bamboo frame, when it is gathered up and taken away, the decision is like (taking away) the robe itself.

91.

91.

Sikkāya pakkhipitvā yaṃ, laggitaṃ hoti bhaṇḍakaṃ;

Whatever goods are placed, having been put into a string bag and hung up, falling away is when taking that from the string bag, or together with the string bag.

92.

92.

Kuntādiṃ nāgadantesu, ṭhitesu paṭipāṭiyā;

On a spear, etc., (or) on elephant tusks, when (items) are placed in order, when taking hold of the tip or the base and dragging (it away).

93.

93.

Pārājikaṃ phuṭṭhokāsaṃ, atikkāmayato siyā;

There is a pārājika when transgressing the space touched; when lifting directly upwards, the pārājika is with a hair-tip.

94.

94.

Pākārābhimukho ṭhatvā, ākaḍḍhati sace pana;

But if he stands facing a wall and pulls (it), falling away is when transgressing the space touched by the near side to the far side.

95.

95.

Tatheva parato tassa, pellentassāpi bhikkhuno;

Likewise, for that (item) on the far side, when that monk pushes (it); this same method (applies) when it is placed leaning against a wall.

96.

96.

Cālentassa ca tālassa, phalaṃ vatthu hi pūrati;

When shaking a palm tree, the fruit fulfills the item (value); when it is freed by that bond, there is a pārājika in that.

97.

97.

Piṇḍiṃ chindati tālassa, sace pārājikaṃ siyā;

If he cuts a cluster of palm fruits, there is a pārājika; this same method (applies) for the remaining trees, flowers, and fruits.

Vehāsaṭṭhakathā.

Vehāsaṭṭhakathā.

98.

98.

Gacchato hi nidhiṭṭhānaṃ, padavārena dukkaṭaṃ;

When going to the location of the treasure, there is a dukkata with each footstep; likewise in deep water, and in diving, etc.

99.

99.

Tatthajātakapupphesu, yena pupphena pūrati;

Among the flowers born there, the flower by which the item (value) is fulfilled, he should declare a pārājika for cutting that flower.

100.

100.

Ekanāḷassa vā passe, vāko uppalajātiyā;

On the side of a single stalk (of) water lilies (uppala), it is not cut off from there until it protects it.

101.

101.

Sāmikeheva pupphesu, chinditvā ṭhapitesupi;

Even if the owner has cut off and placed the flowers, the decision should be understood according to the method stated earlier.

102.

102.

Bhārabaddhāni pupphāni, chasvākāresu kenaci;

Flowers tied in a bundle, by any of six modes, if he moves those from their place by any mode, it is lost.

103.

103.

Ṭhapitaṃ pana pupphānaṃ, kalāpaṃ jalapiṭṭhiyaṃ;

But when a cluster of flowers is placed on the surface of the water, if, having moved (it), he removes the flowers from their place in the water, he falls.

104.

104.

Parikappeti ce ‘‘ettha, gahessāmī’’ti rakkhati;

If he intends, "I will take (it) here," he protects (it); when lifting (it) from the place it was, he is said to be ruined.

105.

105.

Accuggatassa taṃ ṭhānaṃ, jalato sakalaṃ jalaṃ;

For that which is highly elevated, the location is the entire water; but when uprooting the flower from there and lifting it straight up.

106.

106.

Nāḷante jalato mutta-matte pārājikaṃ bhave;

When it is freed from the water at the end of the stalk, there is a pārājika; if it is not freed from the water, a thullaccaya is declared.

107.

107.

Pupphe gahetvā nāmetvā, uppāṭeti sace pana;

But if, having taken hold of the flower, he bends (it) down and uproots (it), the water is not its location; it is lost at the moment of uprooting.

108.

108.

Yo hi sassāmike macche, theyyacittena gaṇhati;

Whatever fish belonging to an owner, he takes with the intention of stealing, even with a hook, or a net, or by hand, or with a trap.

109.

109.

Tassevaṃ gaṇhato vatthu, yena macchena pūrati;

When he takes (them) thus, the item (value) is fulfilled by whatever fish; when that is merely lifted from the water, there is a pārājika.

110.

110.

Ṭhānaṃ salilajānañhi, kevalaṃ sakalaṃ jalaṃ;

The location of aquatic beings is, indeed, the entire water; when releasing (it) from the water, there is a pārājika from the water.

111.

111.

Nīrato uppatitvā yo, tīre patati vārijo;

A water creature that has risen from the water and falls on the shore, when taking that, one should determine the offense by the value of the goods.

112.

112.

Māraṇatthāya macchānaṃ, taḷāke nadiyāpi vā;

For the purpose of killing the fish, in a pond or even a river, having put "fish poison" in a low-lying area and gone away.

113.

113.

Pacchā macchavisaṃ macchā, khāditvā pilavanti ce;

Later, if the fish, having eaten the fish poison, float, there is a pārājika when taking the dead fish with the intention of stealing.

114.

114.

Paṃsukūlikasaññāya, na doso koci gaṇhato;

When taking with the perception of paṃsukūlika, there is no offense at all; when they are being brought by the owners, it is declared to be the giving of goods.

115.

115.

Gahetvā sāmikā macche, sace yanti nirālayā;

If the owners, having taken the fish, go away without protection, when taking those remaining, there is a dukkata with the intention of stealing.

116.

116.

Amatesu anāpattiṃ, vadanti vinayaññuno;

Those skilled in the Vinaya say there is no offense in the undrinkable; this same method (applies) to the remaining aquatic creatures, such as turtles, etc.

Udakaṭṭhakathā.

Udakaṭṭhakathā.

117.

117.

‘‘Nāvaṃ nāvaṭṭhaṃ vā bhaṇḍaṃ, thenetvā gaṇhissāmī’’ti;

"I will steal a boat or goods in a boat," offenses are stated for the lifting of the feet of a monk going thus.

118.

118.

Baddhāya nāvāya hi caṇḍasote;

For a boat tied in a swift current, the tying is considered the single location; for a monk, when that is merely released, the wise say there is a pārājika for him.

119.

119.

Niccale udake nāva-mabandhanamavaṭṭhitaṃ;

In still water, the tying is the location of the boat; when dragging (it) forwards, backwards, or sideways.

120.

120.

Ekenantena samphuṭṭha-mokāsamitarena taṃ;

Transgressing the boat, (i.e.) the space touched and contacted by one side to the other side, there is a pārājika for him.

121.Tathā –

121.Thus –

Uddhaṃ kesaggamattampi, udakamhā vimocite;

Even a hair-tip's worth lifted upwards, freed from the water; and the bottom of the boat touched by the gunwale.

122.

122.

Bandhitvā pana yā tīre, ṭhapitā niccale jale;

But when tied and placed on the shore in still water, the tying and the standing space are considered the two locations of that (boat).

123.

123.

Hoti thullaccayaṃ pubbaṃ, bandhanassa vimocane;

There is a thullaccaya first, in releasing the tying; afterwards, if he moves (it) from its location by some means, he falls.

124.

124.

Cāvetvā paṭhamaṃ ṭhānā, pacchā bandhanamocane;

Having moved (it) from its location first, afterwards releasing the tying, this same method is stated for a monk with the intention of stealing.

125.

125.

Ussāretvā nikujjitvā, ṭhapitāya thale pana;

But for a boat raised up, turned upside down, and placed on land, the space touched by the gunwale is the location of the boat.

126.

126.

Ñeyyo ṭhānaparicchedo;

The demarcation of the location should be understood by five modes; when moving (it) from anywhere, a person incurs a pārājika.

127.

127.

Eseva ca nayo ñeyyo, nāvāyukkujjitāyapi;

This same method should be understood for a boat turned upside down; and for a boat placed on top of small supports.

128.

128.

Theyyā titthe ṭhitaṃ nāvaṃ, āruhitvā sace pana;

If, with the intention of stealing, having boarded a boat standing at a landing place, there is a pārājika when propelling (it) with an oar or a paddle.

129.

129.

Sace chattaṃ paṇāmetvā, ussāpetvāva cīvaraṃ;

If, having raised up an umbrella, or having lifted up a robe, having made (it) similar to an ornament, he causes the wind to take (it).

130.

130.

Āgamma balavā vāto, nāvaṃ harati ce pana;

If a strong wind comes and carries the boat, the boat has been carried by the wind alone; there is no offense at all.

131.

131.

Sayameva ca yaṃ kiñci, gāmatitthamupāgataṃ;

Whatever, by itself, comes to a village landing place, if, without moving that from its location, he buys (it) and flees.

132.

132.

Avahāro na bhikkhussa, bhaṇḍadeyyamudīritaṃ;

There is no removal for the monk, it is declared to be the giving of goods; but if he moves (it) from its location when it is going by itself, he falls.

Nāvaṭṭhakathā.

Nāvaṭṭhakathā.

133.

133.

Yānaṃ nāma ratho vayhaṃ, sakaṭaṃ sandamānikā;

A vehicle (yāna) is a chariot, a conveyance, a cart, a handcart; (thinking) "I will remove a vehicle" or "a vehicle item."

134.

134.

Gacchato dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ, dutiyaṃ pariyesato;

Going is said to be a dukkata, searching a second (dukkata); there is a pārājika when the opportunity to move (it) from its place exists.

135.

135.

Yānassa dukayuttassa, dasa ṭhānāni dīpaye;

One should explain ten locations of a yoked vehicle; when driving that vehicle, having sat on the yoke.

136.

136.

Thullaccayaṃ tu goṇānaṃ, pāduddhāre viniddise;

A thullaccaya should be determined for the lifting of the feet of the oxen; when the standing space of the wheels is transgressed, there is ruin.

137.

137.

Ayuttakassāpi ca yānakassa, dhurenupatthambhaniyaṃ ṭhitassa;

And for a vehicle not yoked, standing supported by the yoke, there are only three locations, based on the supports and the wheels.

138.

138.

Tathā dhurena dārūnaṃ, upariṭṭhapitassa ca;

Likewise, when wood is placed on top of the yoke, and likewise, when it is placed on the ground with the yoke.

139.

139.

Purato pacchato vāpi, ṭhānā cāveti ce pana;

If he moves (it) from its place forwards or backwards, there is a thullaccaya for each of the three; there is a pārājika for moving (it) from its place.

140.

140.

Apanetvāna cakkāni, akkhānaṃ sīsakehi tu;

Having removed the wheels, for one standing with the heads of the axles, one should determine two locations for the wood on top.

141.

141.

Kaḍḍhanto ukkhipanto vā, phuṭṭhokāsaccaye cuto;

Falling away is when dragging or lifting (it), transgressing the space touched; for whatever else is placed on the ground.

142.

142.

Akkhuddhīnaṃ dhurassāti, pañca ṭhānāni dīpaye;

One should explain five locations for the axles, the yoke, etc.; if, having taken hold of it in the sockets, he moves (it) from its place, he falls.

143.

143.

Ṭhapitassa hi cakkassa, nābhiyā pana bhūmiyaṃ;

For a wheel placed (with) the hub on the ground, there would be only one location; and the demarcation is fivefold.

144.

144.

Phusitvā yaṃ ṭhitaṃ bhūmiṃ, nemipassena nābhiyā;

The two locations of that (wheel) touching the ground with the rim's side and the hub; ruin is when those are transgressed.

145.

145.

Disvā yānamanārakkhaṃ, paṭipannaṃ mahāpathe;

Having seen an unprotected vehicle set out on the highway, having boarded (it) without asking, it is permissible to buy (it) and go.

Yānaṭṭhakathā.

Yānaṭṭhakathā.

146.

146.

Sīsakkhandhakaṭolamba-vasā bhāro catubbidho;

A load is fourfold: (carried) on the head, shoulder, carrying pole, and in the arms; of these, there is a dukkata for touching a load on the head.

147.

147.

Ito cito ca ghaṃsanto, theyyacittena yo pana;

But if, with the intention of stealing, he slides (it) this way and that way, right on the head, there is a thullaccaya for him.

148.

148.

Khandhaṃ oropite bhāre, tassa pārājikaṃ mataṃ;

If he puts down the burden and then steals it, that is considered a pārājika offense for him; even if he dislodges so much as a hair from the head, he is defeated.

149.

149.

Bhāraṃ pathaviyaṃ kiñci, ṭhapetvā suddhamānaso;

Having placed some burden on the ground with a pure mind, if he later lifts it with the intention of stealing, he is defeated.

150.

150.

Ettha vuttanayeneva, sesesupi asesato;

Here, as in the manner stated, in all the remaining instances of burdens, the judgment should be understood with mindful intelligence.

Bhāraṭṭhakathā.

Bhāraṭṭhakathā.

151.

151.

Dukkaṭaṃ muninā vuttaṃ, ārāmaṃ abhiyuñjato;

A dukkata offense is stated by the Sage for one who lays claim to a park (ārāma); he is defeated by practicing a contrary Dhamma, if he is defeated.

152.

152.

Vimatiṃ janayantassa, tassa thullaccayaṃ siyā;

For him who causes doubt, there would be a thullaccaya offense; he also is defeated by practicing a contrary Dhamma himself.

153.

153.

Sāmino dhuranikkhepe, ‘‘na dassāmī’’ti cattano;

If the owner relinquishes responsibility, and he says, “I will not give it,” a pārājika offense occurs for him and for all the false witnesses.

Ārāmaṭṭhakathā.

Ārāmaṭṭhakathā.

154.

154.

Vihāraṃ saṅghikaṃ kiñci, acchinditvāna gaṇhituṃ;

If he seizes and takes away something from a Saṅgha monastery (vihāra), it is not accomplished, since there is no relinquishment of responsibility by all.

Vihāraṭṭhakathā.

Vihāraṭṭhakathā.

155.

155.

Sīsāni sāliādīnaṃ, nirumbhitvāna gaṇhato;

Having removed the awns of rice and other grains and taking them, either by shaving them off with a knife or by cutting them off with his hand,

156.

156.

Yasmiṃ bījepi vā vatthu, sīse pūreti muṭṭhiyaṃ;

If in any seed or plant, he fills his fist with the awns, when that is freed from its binding, a pārājika offense occurs for him.

157.

157.

Acchinno pana daṇḍo vā, taco vā appamattako;

But an uncut stalk, bark, or even a small amount of a long blade of rice, he protects without extracting it.

158.

158.

Sace so parikappeti, ‘‘madditvā panidaṃ ahaṃ;

If he intends, “Having crushed this, I will winnow it, and having threshed it, I will take the grain from here,” and protects it,

159.

159.

Maddanuddharaṇe natthi, doso papphoṭanepi vā;

There is no offense in crushing and extracting or even in threshing; but a pārājika offense occurs when he puts it into his own vessel.

160.

160.

Jānaṃ kesaggamattampi, pathaviṃ parasantakaṃ;

Knowingly, even so much as a hair’s tip of another’s land, if he moves a boundary marker with the intention of stealing, it is a pārājika offense.

161.

161.

Tañca kho sāmikānaṃ tu, dhuranikkhepane sati;

But that is so when there is relinquishment of responsibility by the owners; this land is said to be invaluable, therefore it is spoken thus.

162.

162.

Gahetabbā sace hoti, dvīhi khīlehi yā pana;

If it must be taken, which is with two boundary markers, first there is a thullaccaya offense for those, and the second is a pārājika offense.

163.

163.

Ñāpetukāmo yo bhikkhu, ‘‘mamedaṃ santaka’’nti ca;

The bhikkhu who wishes to make known, “This is my property,” and stretches out a rope or drops a stick incurs a dukkata offense.

164.

164.

Yehi dvīhi payogehi, attano santakaṃ siyā;

With whichever two actions, it would become his own property, first there is a thullaccaya offense for those, and in the second, a pārājika offense.

Khettaṭṭhakathā.

Khettaṭṭhakathā.

165.

165.

Khette vuttanayeneva, vatthuṭṭhassa vinicchayo;

In the field, as stated, is the judgment for the site of a building; it should also be stated in the village, there is nothing unprecedented.

Vatthuṭṭhagāmaṭṭhakathā.

Vatthuṭṭhagāmaṭṭhakathā.

166.

166.

Tiṇaṃ vā pana paṇṇaṃ vā, lataṃ vā kaṭṭhameva vā;

Grass or leaves or vines or even wood, it should be dealt with according to the value of the item, when taking what grows there.

167.

167.

Mahagghe pana rukkhasmiṃ, chinnamattepi nassati;

But in the case of a very valuable tree, it is lost even when merely cut down; a tree that has been trimmed and placed is not to be taken by anyone.

168.

168.

Chinditvā ṭhapitaṃ mūle, rukkhamaddhagataṃ pana;

Having cut and placed it at the root, but halfway into the tree, it is permissible to take it, saying, “It has been abandoned by the owners.”

169.

169.

Lakkhaṇe challiyonaddhe, na doso koci gaṇhato;

There is no offense for one who takes what is marked with lac or connected with ropes, or what is dwelt upon, or made, or what is perishing.

170.

170.

Yo cārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ patvā, katvā kammaṭṭhānādīni;

He who, having reached a place of protection, having done meditation subjects and so forth, while thinking in his mind of something else, there would indeed be a penalty for the item.

171.

171.

Varāhabyagghacchataracchakādito;

From boars, tigers, bears, hyenas, and so on; for the sake of escaping danger;

172.

If he thus goes beyond that place, there is no offense, but a penalty for the item.

Idamārakkhaṇaṭṭhānaṃ, garukaṃ suṅkaghātato;

This place of protection is significant due to avoiding customs duties; therefore, a dukkata offense is specified for one who leaves that place.

173.

173.

Etaṃ pariharantassa, theyyacittena satthunā;

For one avoiding this, with the intention of stealing, a pārājika offense is specified by the Teacher, even when going through the air.

174.

174.

Tasmā ettha visesena, satisampannacetasā;

Therefore, here especially, a bhikkhu who is dear and virtuous should be conscientious and mindful.

Araññaṭṭhakathā.

Araññaṭṭhakathā.

175.

175.

Toyadullabhakālasmiṃ, bhājane gopitaṃ jalaṃ;

In a time when water is scarce, water stored in a container, having drawn it out and poured it in, or even having made a hole,

176.

176.

Vāpiyaṃ vā taḷāke vā, bhājanaṃ attano pana;

In a well or pond, if he brings his own container, it should be specified according to the value of the item.

177.

177.

Chindato mariyādaṃ tu, adinnādānapubbato;

For one who cuts a boundary, prior to the act of theft, along with beings, a dukkata offense is declared.

178.

178.

Anto ṭhatvā bahi ṭhatvā, chindanto ubhayatthapi;

Standing inside, standing outside, cutting in both places, it should be done from the outside to the inside, from the inside to the middle.

Udakakathā.

Udakakathā.

179.

179.

Vārena sāmaṇerā yaṃ, dantakaṭṭhamaraññato;

By turns, the novices bring tooth-cleaners from the forest, and if they also bring them to their teachers,

180.

180.

Chinditvā yāva saṅghassa, na niyyādenti te pana;

Until they hand over to the Saṅgha what they have cut, all that they have brought is their own property.

181.

181.

Tasmā taṃ theyyacittena, gaṇhantassa ca bhikkhuno;

Therefore, for a bhikkhu who takes that with the intention of stealing, since it is a valuable item of the Saṅgha, defeat occurs according to the value of the item.

182.

182.

Yadā niyyāditaṃ tehi, tato paṭṭhāya saṅghikaṃ;

When it is handed over by them, from then on it belongs to the Saṅgha; there is no offense of theft for one who takes it.

183.

183.

Arakkhattā yathāvuḍḍha-mabhājetabbatopi ca;

Because it is unprotected, not to be divided according to seniority, and common to all, this is not like something else.

Dantakaṭṭhakathā.

Dantakaṭṭhakathā.

184.

184.

Aggiṃ vā deti satthena, ākoṭeti samantato;

He either sets fire or beats it all around with a weapon; or he beats it with poison, called maṇḍūkaṇṭaka.

185.

185.

Yena vā tena vā rukkho, vinassati ca ḍayhati;

By whatever means the tree perishes or is burned, everywhere a penalty for the item is declared for that bhikkhu.

Vanappatikathā.

Vanappatikathā.

186.

186.

Sīsato kaṇṇato vāpi, gīvato hatthatopi vā;

From the head or from the ear or from the neck or from the hand, either having cut or removed it, he takes it with the intention of stealing.

187.

187.

Hoti mocitamattasmiṃ, sīsādīhi parājayo;

A pārājika offense occurs as soon as it is removed from the head and so forth; a thullaccaya offense occurs for one who is pulling and tugging.

188.

188.

Hatthā anīharitvāva, valayaṃ kaṭakampi vā;

Without taking the bracelet or armlet from the hand, he keeps rubbing and moving the upper arm back and forth.

189.

189.

Tamākāsagataṃ coro, karoti yadi rakkhati;

If a thief makes that go into the air and protects it, that is not like a bracelet at the base made of animate matter.

190.

190.

Nivatthaṃ pana vatthaṃ yo, acchindati parassa ce;

If he snatches the garment that someone is wearing, but the other person, out of shame, does not immediately release it.

191.

191.

Ākaḍḍhati ca coropi, so paro tāva rakkhati;

And the thief pulls, and that other person protects it; a pārājika offense occurs as soon as the garment is released from the other person’s hand.

192.

192.

Sabhaṇḍahārakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ, nentassa paṭhame pade;

For one who carries an item with its container, at the first step, there is a thullaccaya offense; if he goes beyond that, he would fall on the second step.

193.

193.

Pātāpeti sace bhaṇḍaṃ, tajjetvā theyyacetano;

If, threatening, with the intention of stealing, he causes an item to fall, a pārājika offense occurs as soon as the item is released from the other person’s hand.

194.

194.

Athāpi parikappetvā, pātāpeti va yo pana;

Or else, having planned it, he causes it to fall; a dukkata offense is stated for him who causes it to fall, and also for one who touches it.

195.

195.

Phandāpeti yathāvatthuṃ, ṭhānā cāveti ce cuto;

If he makes it tremble according to the object, and moves it from its place, he falls; there is no offense for one who says, “Stay, stay,” even if it is dropped.

196.

196.

Āgantvā theyyacittena, pacchā taṃ gaṇhato siyā;

Having come with the intention of stealing, he later takes that; a pārājika offense occurs for him upon removing it, when the owners have gone to the storehouse.

197.

197.

Gaṇhato sakasaññāya, gahaṇe pana rakkhati;

For one who takes it with recognition, there is protection in the taking; there is a penalty for the item when taking it with the perception of refuse rags.

198.

198.

‘‘Tiṭṭha tiṭṭhā’’ti vutto ca, chaḍḍetvā pana bhaṇḍakaṃ;

And he, having been told, “Stay, stay,” having dropped the item, having thus relinquished responsibility, flees in fear of the thieves.

199.

199.

Gaṇhato theyyacittena, uddhāre dukkaṭaṃ puna;

For one who takes it with the intention of stealing, there is a dukkata offense in removing it again; a pārājika offense occurs for one who does not give what should be given.

200.

200.

‘‘Kasmā? Tassa payogena, chaḍḍitattā’’ti sādaraṃ;

“Why? Because it was dropped by his action,” it is stated respectfully in the Mahāaṭṭhakathā, but it does not appear in other commentaries.

Haraṇakathā.

Haraṇakathā.

201.

201.

Sampajānamusāvādaṃ, ‘‘na gaṇhāmī’’ti bhāsato;

For a bhikkhu who speaks a deliberate lie, saying, “I did not take it,” because of the initial act of theft, there is a dukkata offense.

202.

202.

‘‘Raho mayā panetassa, ṭhapitaṃ kiṃ nu dassati’’;

“Perhaps he will give what was secretly placed by me for him,” in this way, when doubt arises, there would be a thullaccaya offense for him.

203.

203.

Tasmiṃ dāne nirussāhe, paro ce nikkhipe dhuraṃ;

When there is no enthusiasm for giving that, if another relinquishes responsibility, when both have relinquished responsibility, the bhikkhu is defeated.

204.

204.

Cittenādātukāmova, ‘‘dassāmī’’ti mukhena ce;

Intending not to give it in his mind, if he says, “I will give it” with his mouth, a pārājika offense occurs when the owner relinquishes responsibility.

Upanidhikathā.

Upanidhikathā.

205.

205.

Suṅkaghātassa antova, ṭhatvā pāteti ce bahi;

Standing inside the customs boundary, if he causes it to fall outside, if it certainly falls from his hand, a pārājika offense occurs as soon as it is released.

206.

206.

Taṃ rukkhe khāṇuke vāpi, hutvā paṭihataṃ puna;

Having become stuck on that tree or stump, or even being struck back by the wind, he protects it if it falls inside.

207.

207.

Patitvā bhūmiyaṃ pacchā, vaṭṭantaṃ pana bhaṇḍakaṃ;

Having fallen on the ground, if that item then rolls and enters inside, a pārājika offense occurs for him.

208.

208.

Ṭhatvā ṭhatvā pavaṭṭantaṃ, paviṭṭhaṃ ce parājayo;

If, having stopped and stopped, it rolls and enters, there is a pārājika offense; if it enters having rolled without stopping, there is protection.

209.

209.

kurundaṭṭhakathādisu;

In the Kurunda Commentary and so on; that should be taken from the essence, and it appears fitting.

210.

210.

Sayaṃ vā yadi vaṭṭeti, vaṭṭāpeti parena vā;

If he himself rolls it, or if he causes it to be rolled by another, that which is rolling without stopping, having gone, is destructive.

211.

211.

Ṭhatvā ṭhatvā sace anto, bahi gacchati rakkhati;

If, having stopped and stopped, it goes outside from inside, there is protection; it rolls and rolls by itself, having been placed with a pure mind.

212.

212.

Gacchante pana yāne vā, gaje vā taṃ ṭhapeti ce;

If he places that on a vehicle or elephant that is moving, for the sake of taking it outside, there is no offense even when it is taken out.

213.

213.

Ṭhapite ṭhitayāne vā, payogena vinā gate;

When it is placed on a stationary vehicle, if it moves without his action, even if there is the intention of stealing, there is no offense.

214.

214.

Sace pājeti taṃ yānaṃ, ṭhapetvā yānake maṇiṃ;

If he makes that vehicle move, having placed a jewel on the vehicle, there would be a pārājika offense for him when the boundary is crossed.

215.

215.

Suṅkaṭṭhāne mataṃ suṅkaṃ, gantuṃ datvāva vaṭṭati;

In the customs station, it is proper to go having given the customs duty that is due; the rest of the path of the story here is similar to the Arañña Commentary.

Suṅkaghātakathā.

Suṅkaghātakathā.

216.

216.

Antojātaṃ dhanakkītaṃ,dinnaṃ vā pana kenaci;

A slave born in the house, bought with wealth, or given by someone, or brought from Karamarā, there is a pārājika offense for one who takes him.

217.

217.

Bhujissaṃ vā harantassa, mānusaṃ mātarāpi vā;

There is no offense for one who takes a freeman, a human being, even if placed by his mother or father.

218.

218.

Taṃ palāpetukāmova, ukkhipitvā bhujehi vā;

Wishing to make him flee, having lifted him up with his arms, if he moves him slightly from his standing place, it is a pārājika offense.

219.

219.

Tajjetvā padasā dāsaṃ, nentassa padavārato;

Having struck a slave with his foot, preventing him from going where he wants; the offenses declared for him are thullaccaya, etc.

220.

220.

Hatthādīsu gahetvā taṃ, kaḍḍhatopi parājayo;

Even dragging him after grasping his hand, etc., is defeat; this same method applies to saying, "Go away, flee!"

221.

221.

Vegasāva palāyantaṃ, ‘‘palāyā’’ti ca bhāsato;

If someone is already fleeing with speed, and he says "flee"; there is no offense entailing expulsion for the bhikkhu.

222.

222.

Saṇikaṃ pana gacchantaṃ, sace vadati sopi ca;

But if he speaks to one going slowly, and that one then goes quickly; expulsion occurs by his words.

223.

223.

Palāyitvā sace aññaṃ, gāmaṃ vā nigamampi vā;

If, after fleeing to another village or town; he sees him gone from there, and then chases him away, it is defeat.

Pāṇakathā.

Account of living beings.

224.

224.

Theyyā sappakaraṇḍaṃ ce, parāmasati dukkaṭaṃ;

If, with the intention of stealing, he touches a box with a snake in it, it is a dukkata; if he makes it move according to the circumstance, he is expelled by moving it from its place.

225.

225.

Ugghāṭetvā karaṇḍaṃ tu, sappamuddharato pana;

But if he opens the box, then when he is about to take out the snake; defeat occurs when it is freed from the bottom of the box, or from the tail.

226.

226.

Ghaṃsitvā kaḍḍhato sappaṃ, naṅguṭṭhe mukhavaṭṭito;

If, having hissed and pulled the snake out by the tail from the mouth rim; expulsion occurs as soon as it is freed from that snake box.

227.

227.

Karaṇḍaṃ vivaritvā ce, pakkosantassa nāmato;

But if, having opened the box, he calls it by name; if that snake comes out, then it would be a pārājika for him.

228.

228.

Tathā katvā tu maṇḍūka-mūsikānaṃ ravampi vā;

Having done likewise, or with the sounds of frogs or mice; if they come out when he calls them by name, it is defeat.

229.

229.

Mukhaṃ avivaritvāva, karontassevameva ca;

Even without opening the mouth, if he makes a sound like that; if a snake comes out by any means, it would be a pārājika.

230.

230.

Mukhe vivarite sappo, sayameva palāyati;

If the snake flees on its own when the mouth is opened; if he does not call it, it is declared to be an offense requiring forfeiture.

Apadakathā.

Account of beings without feet.

231.

231.

Theyyacittena yo hatthiṃ, karotāmasanādayo;

Whatever a person does to an elephant with the intention of stealing, such as providing food; for him, there are offenses, such as the three kinds of dukkata.

232.

232.

Sālāyaṃ ṭhitahatthissa, antovatthaṅgaṇesupi;

For an elephant standing in a shed, even in the inner courtyard; the place, the shed, the site, and the courtyard are all included.

233.

233.

Abaddhassa hi baddhassa, ṭhitaṭṭhānañca bandhanaṃ;

The standing place and the tether are for both an untethered and a tethered elephant; therefore, a wise person should arrange for the elephant to be taken away under their control.

234.

234.

Nagarassa bahiddhā tu, ṭhitassa pana hatthino;

But for an elephant standing outside the city; the standing place should be regarded as the place, and he should arrange it by the path of the feet.

235.

235.

Nipannassa gajassekaṃ, ṭhānaṃ taṃ uṭṭhapeti ce;

For an elephant lying down, that is one place, if he makes it get up; as soon as it has gotten up in that place, it would be a pārājika for him.

236.

236.

Eseva ca nayo ñeyyo, turaṅgamahisādisu;

This same method should be understood for horses, buffaloes, etc.; nothing at all needs to be said about bipeds or multipeds.

Catuppadakathā.

Account of quadrupeds.

237.

237.

Paresanti vijānitvā, paresaṃ santakaṃ dhanaṃ;

Having recognized that (something) belongs to another, if with the intention of stealing, he moves heavy wealth from its place, he is expelled by the removal.

238.

238.

Anāpatti sasaññissa, tiracchānapariggahe;

There is no offense if he has the perception of ownership, in the case of animals; in the case of taking something on temporary trust or taking something belonging to a ghost.

239.

239.

pāḷimuttavinicchayo;

The judgment freed from the Pali; we will discuss that from another source, in the miscellaneous section.

240.

240.

Parājitānekamalena vuttaṃ;

That second pārājika, spoken by the Conqueror; which is free from many defilements; its meaning has been spoken concisely by me; who is capable of speaking of it completely?

Iti vinayavinicchaye dutiyapārājikakathā niṭṭhitā.

Thus ends the account of the second pārājika in the Vinayavinicchaya.

Tatiyapārājikakathā
Account of the Third Pārājika

241.

241.

Manussajātiṃ jānanto, jīvitā yo viyojaye;

Knowing (it to be) a human being, whoever separates (him) from life; or throws a weapon at him, or speaks in praise of death.

242.

242.

Deseyya maraṇūpāyaṃ, hotāyampi parājito;

Or describes a means of death, he also is defeated; he should be known as irreparable, like a stone split in two.

243.

243.

Vuttā pāṇātipātassa, payogā cha mahesinā;

The six modes of incitement to the taking of life have been spoken by the Great Sage; namely, doing it himself (sāhatthika), ordering another (āṇattika), throwing (nissaggiya), setting up a trap (thāvara), etc.

244.

244.

Tattha kāyena vā kāya-paṭibaddhena vā sayaṃ;

Therein, doing it oneself (sāhatthika) is considered to be doing it personally, either with one's own body or with something connected to the body.

245.

245.

‘‘Evaṃ tvaṃ paharitvā taṃ, mārehī’’ti ca bhikkhuno;

The method of ordering another (āṇattika) is (like this): "Having struck that person in such a way, kill him," (said) by a bhikkhu.

246.

246.

Dūraṃ māretukāmassa, usuādinipātanaṃ;

The method of throwing (nissaggiya) is the dropping of an arrow, etc., with the intention of killing from a distance.

247.

247.

Asañcārimupāyena, māraṇatthaṃ parassa ca;

This (mode) is setting up a trap (thāvara), by a means that cannot move, for the purpose of killing another.

248.

248.

Paraṃ māretukāmassa, vijjāya jappanaṃ pana;

Chanting a mantra with psychic power (vijjāmaya) with the intention of killing another; is considered the fifth mode.

249.

249.

Samatthā māraṇe yā ca, iddhi kammavipākajā;

That psychic power (iddhimaya) that is capable of killing, which arises from kamma and its result; is declared to be the (sixth) mode.

250.

250.

Ekeko duvidho tattha, hotīti paridīpito;

Each one therein is declared to be twofold; that is, specific and non-specific; this, however, is the difference between them.

251.

251.

Bahusvapi yamuddissa, pahāraṃ deti ce pana;

Even when there are many, if he delivers a blow aiming at one; he is bound by that kamma through the death of that very one.

252.

252.

Anuddissa pahārepi, yassa kassaci dehino;

Even in a non-specific blow, if there is death of any living being; expulsion occurs due to the blow being the cause.

253.

253.

Mate pahaṭamatte vā, pacchā mubhayathāpi ca;

Whether he dies as soon as he is struck, or later, or both; the killer is bound by that kamma in the very striking.

254.

254.

Evaṃ sāhatthiko ñeyyo, tathā āṇattikopi ca;

Thus, the doing it oneself (sāhatthika) should be understood, and likewise the ordering another (āṇattika); with this much, two modes have been shown concisely.

255.

255.

Vatthu kālo ca deso ca, satthañca iriyāpatho;

Object, time, place, weapon, posture; and the specific act of doing: these six are the determinants in ordering.

256.

256.

‘‘vatthū’’ti pavuccati;

"Object" is said (to be the person); time is the youth, etc., of beings.

257.

257.

Desogāmādi viññeyyo,satthaṃtaṃ sattamāraṇaṃ;

Place should be understood as village, etc.; weapon is that which kills beings; posture is.

258.

258.

Vijjhanaṃ bhedanañcāpi, chedanaṃ tāḷanampi vā;

Piercing, splitting, cutting, or striking; the specific act of doing (is this).

259.

259.

‘‘Yaṃ mārehī’’ti āṇatto, aññaṃ māreti ce tato;

If, having been ordered, "Kill that one," he kills another; or having been told, "Having struck (him) in front, kill (him)."

260.

260.

Pacchato passato vāpi, paharitvāna mārite;

If, having struck (him) behind or to the side, he kills (him); there is a discrepancy in the object ordered, but the originator is freed.

261.

261.

Vatthuṃtaṃ avirajjhitvā, yathāṇattiñca mārite;

Without transgressing that object, if he kills according to the order; for both, at the appropriate time, it is declared that they are bound by kamma.

262.

262.

Āṇatto ‘‘ajja pubbaṇhe, mārehī’’ti ca yo pana;

The one who is ordered, "Kill (him) today in the forenoon"; if he kills (him) in the afternoon, the originator is released.

263.

263.

Āṇattasseva so vutto;

That one is said to be ordered; the Great Sage (says he is) bound by kamma; discrepancy in time; that fault belongs to the one who does not obey the order.

264.

264.

‘‘Ajja mārehi pubbaṇhe, svevā’’ti aniyāmite;

"Kill (him) today in the forenoon or tomorrow"; when it is not specified; if he does not kill (him) at any time in the forenoon, there is discrepancy.

265.

265.

kālabhedesusabbaso;

In all kinds of time differences; the specific and the discrepancy, should be understood by one who distinguishes.

266.

266.

‘‘Imaṃ gāme ṭhitaṃ veriṃ, mārehī’’ti ca bhāsito;

Having been told, "Kill that enemy who is in this village"; if he kills (him) standing anywhere.

267.

267.

Natthi tassa visaṅketo, ubho bajjhanti kammunā;

There is no discrepancy for him, both are bound by kamma; having been ordered "only in the village," or with certainty in the forest.

268.

268.

‘‘Vaneyevā’’ti vā vutto, gāme māreti cepi vā;

Or having been told "only in the forest," if he kills (him) in the village; the discrepancy should be understood, the originator is released.

269.

269.

sabbadesesubhedato;

In all kinds of place differences; the specific and the discrepancy, should indeed be understood by the wise.

270.

270.

‘‘Satthena pana mārehi, āṇatto’’ti ca kenaci;

Having been ordered "kill (him) with a weapon" by someone; if he does not kill (him) with any kind of weapon, there is discrepancy.

271.

271.

‘‘Iminā vāsinā hī’’ti, vutto aññena vāsinā;

"Kill (him) with this knife"; or (having been told), "Kill this enemy with the sharp edge of this sword".

272.

272.

Iti vutto sace veriṃ, dhārāya itarāya vā;

Having been told thus, if he kills the enemy with the other edge; or with the blunt end, there is indeed discrepancy.

273.

273.

sabbāvudhakajātisu;

In all weapon categories; the specific and the discrepancy, should be understood in particular.

274.

274.

‘‘Gacchantamenaṃ mārehi’’, iti vutto parena so;

Having been told by another, "Kill him while he is walking"; if he kills him sitting, there is no discrepancy.

275.

275.

‘‘Nisinnaṃyeva mārehi’’, ‘‘gacchantaṃyeva vā’’ti ca;

"Kill (him) only sitting," or "only walking"; having been told, he kills (him) walking or sitting, in due order.

276.

276.

Visaṅketanti ñātabbaṃ, bhikkhunā vinayaññunā;

Discrepancy should be known by the bhikkhu who knows the Vinaya; and in all postures.

277.

277.

‘‘Mārehī’’ti ca vijjhitvā, āṇatto hi parena so;

Having been ordered by another, "Kill (him) by piercing (him)"; if he kills him by only piercing (him), there is no discrepancy.

278.

278.

‘‘Mārehī’’ti ca vijjhitvā, āṇatto hi parena so;

Having been ordered by another, "Kill (him) by piercing (him)"; if he kills (him) by cutting (him), there is discrepancy.

279.

279.

karaṇesupi;

Even in acts of doing; the judgment about the specific and the discrepancy, should be understood.

280.

280.

Dīghaṃ rassaṃ kisaṃ thūlaṃ, kāḷaṃ odātameva vā;

Long, short, thin, fat, black, or even white; having been ordered without specification, "kill (him)" by someone.

281.

281.

Sopi yaṃ kiñci āṇatto, sace māreti tādisaṃ;

That one who has been ordered, if he kills someone like that; there is no discrepancy there, expulsion occurs for both.

282.

282.

Manussaṃ kiñci uddissa, sace khaṇativāṭakaṃ;

If, aiming at a certain human being, he digs a ditch; for the one digging, when there is a fall into it, the offense is dukkata.

283.

283.

Dukkhassuppattiyā tattha, tassa thullaccayaṃ siyā;

When suffering arises there, there would be a thullaccaya for him; if, having fallen, he dies there, there would be a pārājika for him.

284.

284.

Nipatitvā panaññasmiṃ, mate doso na vijjati;

If, having fallen, (he dies) in another (place), there is no fault; if, however, the pit has been dug without specifying (anyone).

285.

285.

‘‘Patitvā ettha yo koci, maratū’’ti hi yattakā;

"Whoever falls here, let him die"; however many die having fallen, there are that many offenses for him.

286.

286.

Ānantariyavatthusmiṃ, ānantariyakaṃ vade;

In the case of an immediately effective cause, he should declare an immediately effective offense; likewise, for thullaccaya and the others, there are thullaccaya and the other offenses.

287.

287.

Patitvā gabbhinī tasmiṃ, sagabbhā ce marissati;

If a pregnant woman falls into it, and she dies with the fetus; there are two instances of taking life, but only one if it is just the destruction of the fetus.

288.

288.

Anubandhettha corehi, patitvā ce marissati;

If he chases thieves there, and having fallen, (someone) dies; it seems that there is a pārājika for the one who dug the pit.

289.

289.

Verino tattha pātetvā, sace mārenti verino;

If, having caused enemies to fall there, the enemies kill (them); or if they kill (them) having fallen there, or if, having taken (them) outside.

290.

290.

Nibbattitvā hi opāte, matā ce opapātikā;

If, having created a pit, beings born spontaneously die; or if they are unable to get out, in all cases there is defeat.

291.

291.

Yakkhādayo panuddissa, khaṇane dukkhasambhave;

In the digging with the intention of (harming) yakkhas, etc., when suffering arises; dukkata (is the offense), (but if there is) death, thullaccaya, etc., according to the object.

292.

292.

Manusseyeva uddissa, khate opātake pana;

But in a pit dug with the intention of (harming) human beings; there is no offense even if yakkhas, etc., die having fallen (into it).

293.

293.

Tathā yakkhādayo pāṇe, khate uddissa bhikkhunā;

Likewise, when the bhikkhu digs with the intention of (harming) beings such as yakkhas; this same method applies even if human beings die having fallen (into it).

294.

294.

‘‘Pāṇino ettha bajjhitvā, marantū’’ti anuddisaṃ;

If, not specifying (any particular) "living being, let them die having been trapped here"; he sets a snare there, if living beings are trapped.

295.

295.

Hatthato muttamattasmiṃ, tassa pārājikaṃ siyā;

As soon as it is released from his hand, there would be a pārājika for him; in the case of an immediately effective cause, it is indeed an immediately effective offense.

296.

296.

Uddissa hi kate pāse, yaṃ panuddissa oḍḍito;

In a snare made with specification, when (the snare) is set without specification; with regard to trapping others besides those (specified), it is declared that there is no offense.

297.

297.

Mūlena vā mudhā vāpi, dinne pāse parassa hi;

If a snare is given to another, with or without the binding cord; it is determined that the originator is indeed the one bound by kamma.

298.

298.

Yena laddho sace lopi, pāsamuggaḷitampi vā;

If he, by whom even a noose has been loosened or removed, makes it firm again, that is a binding of the deed for both.

299.

299.

Yo pāsaṃ uggaḷāpetvā, yāti pāpabhayā sace;

If someone, having removed the noose, goes away fearing evil, and another, seeing that, sets it up there again.

300.

300.

Baddhā baddhā maranti ce, mūlaṭṭho na ca muccati;

If those trapped die while trapped, the one who set the original trap is not freed; only by removing the snare-stick from where it was placed is he freed.

301.

301.

Gopetvāpi na mokkho hi, pāsayaṭṭhiṃ sayaṃkataṃ;

Even guarding it, there is no release from the snare-stick made by oneself; if another takes it up again and sets it up.

302.

302.

Tappaccayā marantesu, mūlaṭṭho na ca muccati;

Because of that, when beings die, the one who set the original trap is not freed; only by destroying it completely or burning it is he freed.

303.

303.

Ropentassa ca sūlaṃ vā, sajjentassa adūhalaṃ;

Planting a stake, fixing a double-pointed goad, or with a pitfall or a snare, the decision is similar.

304.

304.

Anāpatti asañcicca, ajānantassa bhikkhuno;

There is no offense for a bhikkhu who is unintentional, unknowing, or of unsound mind, or who has the intention of death, or after death, or for one who is insane.

305.

305.

Manussapāṇimhi ca pāṇasaññitā;

Consciousness of a being in a human being, the intention is connected with death, the attempt to kill and the destruction by that attempt: these five factors are involved in killing a human being.

Iti vinayavinicchaye tatiyapārājikakathā niṭṭhitā.

Thus concludes the Third Pārājika Account in the Vinayavinicchaya.

Catutthapārājikakathā
Fourth Pārājika Account

306.

306.

Asantamattassitameva katvā;

Having created the state of non-attainment, and while behaving by depending on becoming, and without true knowledge, he might declare a distinction of jhāna and so on by indirect means.

307.

307.

Kāyena vācāyapi vā tadatthe;

Through body or speech, or for that purpose, known in the path of communication, he is incapable, just as a palm tree whose head is cut off is incapable of growing again.

308.

308.

Asantamevattani yo parassa;

Whoever reveals to another a jhāna, etc., that he does not possess, if he knows (that he doesn't possess it) he falls (from the Sangha); if he does not know, he incurs a thullaccaya.

309.

309.

‘‘Yo te vihāre vasatīdha bhikkhu;

If it is said, "The bhikkhu who lives in your dwelling is a gainer of jhāna," and if he knows (that he doesn't possess it), he incurs a thullaccaya; if he does not know, he incurs a dukkaṭa.

310.

310.

Asantamevattani dhammametaṃ;

If one says, thinking that this Dhamma exists in oneself when it does not, due to false pride, then the rule is no offense; but if one does not wish to speak, or is of such a nature (e.g., insane).

311.

311.

Pāpicchatā tassa asantabhāvo;

Having evil desires, the state of non-attainment of it, the communication to a human being, not by indirect means, and knowing that very thing: these five factors, the wise say.

312.

312.

Paṭhame dutiye cante, pariyāyo na vijjati;

In the first, second, and last, there is no verbal command; the verbal command is only in the second and third, not in the others.

313.

313.

Ādi mekasamuṭṭhānaṃ, duvaṅgaṃ kāyacittato;

The beginning is of single origin, twofold, from body and mind; the remaining are of triple origin, their factors are seven.

314.

314.

Sukhopekkhāyutaṃ ādi, tatiyaṃ dukkhavedanaṃ;

The beginning is associated with pleasure and equanimity, the third with painful feeling; the second and fourth are said to be of three feelings.

315.

315.

Paṭhamassaṭṭha cittāni, tatiyassa duve pana;

The first has eight cittas, the third has two; the second and fourth have ten cittas.

316.

316.

Tasmā sacittakaṃ vuttaṃ, sabbametaṃ catubbidhaṃ;

Therefore, all this fourfold is said to be with intention; action, perception, release, and worldly fault are declared.

317.

317.

Idamāpattiyaṃyeva, vidhānaṃ pana yujjati;

This rule is fitting only in the offense; therefore, it should be taken as only in the offense by the discerning one.

318.

318.

Mudupiṭṭhi ca lambī ca, mukhaggāhī nisīdako;

Mudupiṭṭhi, Lambi, Mukhaggāhī, Nisīdako: these four are analogous to the pārājikas.

319.

319.

Bhikkhunīnañca cattāri, vibbhantā bhikkhunī sayaṃ;

And four for bhikkhunīs; a bhikkhunī who is deranged herself, as well as the eleven incapable ones: all these are twenty-four.

320.

320.

Ime pārājikā vuttā, catuvīsati puggalā;

These pārājikas, twenty-four individuals, are said to be incapable of bhikkhu-hood, like a head severed from life.

321.

321.

Paṇḍako ca tiracchāno, ubhatobyañjanopi ca;

A paṇḍaka, an animal, one with both sets of organs, these three are inherently defective, with causeless rebirths.

322.

322.

Pañcānantarikā theyya-saṃvāsopi ca dūsako;

The five deeds with immediate result, one in communion with a thief, a defiler, one gone over to another sect: these ten are ruined by their actions.

323.

323.

Vinicchayo yo pana sārabhūto;

This decision, which is the essence, has been spoken by me regarding the pārājikas; by following that, a wise person can understand the remainder completely.

324.

324.

Piṭake paṭubhāvakare parame;

In the Piṭaka, which makes intelligence arise, in the supreme Vinaya, endowed with various methods, one desiring the ultimate meaning should constantly study this.

Iti vinayavinicchaye catutthapārājikakathā niṭṭhitā.

Thus concludes the Fourth Pārājika Account in the Vinayavinicchaya.

Saṅghādisesakathā

Saṅghādisesa Account

325.

325.

Mocetukāmatācittaṃ, vāyāmo sukkamocanaṃ;

The mind of wanting to ejaculate, the effort of semen emission; except in a dream, that is a saṅghādisesa.

326.

326.

Parenupakkamāpetvā, aṅgajātaṃ panattano;

If, by causing another to make an effort, he emits semen from his sexual organ, a grave offense is indicated for him.

327.

327.

Sañciccupakkamantassa, aṅgajātaṃ panattano;

A thullaccaya is specified for one intentionally making an effort on his sexual organ, if semen is not emitted.

328.

328.

Sañciccupakkamantassa, ākāse kampanenapi;

A thullaccaya occurs for him who intentionally makes an effort, even by shaking in the air, if semen is not emitted.

329.

329.

Vatthiṃ kīḷāya pūretvā, passāvetuṃ na vaṭṭati;

It is not allowable to fill a syringe with liquid and cause it to flow; for one playing with the genitals with his hand, there is a dukkaṭa.

330.

330.

Tissannaṃ pana itthīnaṃ, nimittaṃ rattacetasā;

For one looking at the genitals of three women with a lustful mind, whether from the front or the back, there is a dukkaṭa.

331.

331.

Ekenekaṃ payogena, divasampi ca passato;

When looking each time with a separate effort, even throughout the day, the opening and closing of the eyes are not factors in an offense.

332.

332.

Amocanādhippāyassa, anupakkamatopi ca;

No offense is declared for emission in a dream, without the intention of emission and without making an effort.

Sukkavisaṭṭhikathā.

Account of Semen Emission.

333.

333.

Āmasanto manussitthiṃ, kāyasaṃsaggarāgato;

Touching a woman, with lust through bodily contact, with the perception of "woman," there is a saṅghādisesa.

334.

334.

Lomenantamaso lomaṃ, phusantassāpi itthiyā;

Even if he touches a single hair of a woman with the end of a hair, with lust through bodily contact, an offense occurs for the bhikkhu.

335.

335.

Itthiyā yadi samphuṭṭho, phassaṃ sevanacetano;

If a woman is touched, with the intention of sexual intercourse, and he tries to enjoy it, there is a saṅghādisesa.

336.

336.

Ekena pana hatthena, gahetvā dutiyena vā;

If he holds with one hand and touches here and there with the other, a single offense is declared.

337.

337.

Aggahetvā phusantassa, yāva pādañca sīsato;

If he touches without grasping, from the head down to the foot, without removing his hand from the body, even for a whole day, it is only one offense.

338.

338.

Aṅgulīnaṃ tu pañcannaṃ, gahaṇe ekato pana;

But if five fingers are grasped together, there is only one offense; it should not be by sections (of the fingers).

339.

339.

Nānitthīnaṃ sace pañca, gaṇhātyaṅguliyo pana;

If he grasps five fingers, not of a woman, but of a paṇḍaka etc., then five saṅghādisesas occur for that bhikkhu.

340.

340.

Itthiyā vimatissāpi, paṇḍakādikasaññino;

Even with a woman of doubtful gender, or with the perception of a paṇḍaka etc., touching the body connected to a woman's body.

341.

341.

Paṇḍake yakkhipetīsu, tassa thullaccayaṃ siyā;

If he excites a paṇḍaka, there is a thullaccaya for him; a dukkaṭa for bodily contact with an animal-woman.

342.

342.

Bhikkhuno paṭibaddhena, kāyena pana itthiyā;

For a bhikkhu, with his body connected to a woman, if he touches a body that is connected (to her body), there is a dukkaṭa.

343.

343.

Itthīnaṃ itthirūpañca, dārulohamayādikaṃ;

For women, a woman's form, made of wood, iron, etc., their clothes and ornaments, touching them incurs a dukkaṭa.

344.

344.

Tatthajātaphalaṃ khajjaṃ, muggādiṃ tatthajātakaṃ;

Local fruits, edibles, beans, and other local products, all grains, touching them incurs a dukkaṭa.

345.

345.

Sabbaṃ dhamanasaṅkhādiṃ, pañcaṅgaturiyampi ca;

All kinds of fragrances, and the five types of musical instruments, and all gems, touching them incurs a dukkaṭa.

346.

346.

Sabbamāvudhabhaṇḍañca, jiyā ca dhanudaṇḍako;

All weapons and equipment, the bowstring and the bow stave: all this is not to be touched, as well as nets and arrow shields.

347.

347.

Suvaṇṇapaṭibimbādi, cetiyaṃ ārakūṭakaṃ;

Golden images, etc., a cetiya, a tooth relic shrine...

348.

348.

Sabbaṃ onahituṃ vāpi, onahāpetumeva vā;

All covering up or causing to cover, causing to play, or playing, is not allowed.

349.

349.

‘‘Karissāmupahāra’’nti, vuttena pana bhikkhunā;

By a bhikkhu who has said, "I will make an offering," an offering to the Buddha should be made, it should be said by the wise one.

350.

350.

Sayaṃ phusiyamānassa, itthiyā pana dhuttiyā;

For a woman, being touched by a flirt, without effort, and the knowing of the touch by the body.

351.

351.

Anāpatti asañcicca, ajānantassa bhikkhuno;

There is no offense for a bhikkhu who is unintentional, unknowing, or with the intention of release, as well as for one who is insane.

352.

352.

Paṭhamena samānāva, samuṭṭhānādayo pana;

The origin, etc., are similar to the first; for lust through bodily contact, as well as for semen emission.

Kāyasaṃsaggakathā.

Account of Bodily Contact.

353.

353.

Duṭṭhullavācassādena, itthiyā itthisaññino;

With the taste of coarse speech, to a woman with the perception of woman, regarding the description of the merits and demerits of the two sexual organs.

354.

354.

Methunayācanādīhi, obhāsantassa bhikkhuno;

For a bhikkhu who makes suggestive remarks with requests for sexual intercourse, etc., to an intelligent woman, even by a hand gesture, it is a grave offense.

355.

355.

‘‘Sikharaṇīsi, sambhinnā, ubhatobyañjanā’’ti ca;

Even with abusive words, "You are a sikharaṇī, a hermaphrodite, one with both sets of organs," it is a grave offense to the one hearing it.

356.

356.

Punappunobhāsantassa, ekavācāya vā bahū;

For one repeatedly making suggestive remarks, either with one utterance or many, a grave offense occurs for each of the women (addressed).

357.

357.

Sā ce nappaṭijānāti, tassa thullaccayaṃ siyā;

If she does not acknowledge it, there is a thullaccaya for him; and in mentioning the beginning, the area above the ankle, the middle of the knees, and the chin.

358.

358.

Ubbhakkhakamadhojāṇu-maṇḍalaṃ pana uddisaṃ;

When mentioning the area above the chin, below the knee joint, in describing the merits etc., and in connection with the body, there is a dukkaṭa.

359.

359.

Thullaccayaṃ bhave tassa, paṇḍake yakkhipetisu;

There is a thullaccaya for him if he excites a paṇḍaka; a dukkaṭa for paṇḍakas etc. in the area below the chin and above the knee.

360.

360.

Ubbhakkhakamadhojāṇu-maṇḍalepi ayaṃ nayo;

This rule also applies to the area above the chin and below the knee joint; a dukkaṭa is stated everywhere for an animal-woman.

361.

361.

Atthadhammapurekkhāraṃ, katvā obhāsatopi ca;

Even when making suggestive remarks with the intention of Dhamma and meaning, there is no offense, by prioritizing instruction.

362.

362.

Tathā ummattakādīnaṃ, samuṭṭhānādayo nayā;

Likewise, for those who are insane etc., the modes of origin etc., are similar to those of taking what is not given; the feeling here is considered to be twofold.

Duṭṭhullavācākathā.

Account of Coarse Speech.

363.

363.

Vaṇṇaṃ panattano kāma-pāricariyāya bhāsato;

When describing one's own beauty for the sake of sexual service, if she knows it at that very moment, there is a grave offense.

364.

364.

No ce jānāti sā yakkhi-petidevīsu paṇḍake;

If she does not know, or if it is a yakkhī, a petī, a devī, or a paṇḍaka, there is a thullaccaya for him; in the remaining cases, an offense of dukkaṭa.

365.

365.

Cīvarādīhi aññehi, vatthukāmehi attano;

When describing one's own qualities with robes etc., and other desirable things, there is no fault for describing it for the sake of sexual service.

366.

366.

Itthisaññā manussitthī, pāricariyāya rāgitā;

Perception of woman, a human woman, lustful for sexual service, suggestion with that lust, knowledge at that moment.

367.

367.

Pañcaṅgāni imānettha, veditabbāni viññunā;

These five factors should be understood here by the wise; its modes of origin etc. are considered similar to the immediately preceding one.

Attakāmapāricariyakathā.

Account of Requesting Sexual Service for Oneself.

368.

368.

Paṭiggaṇhāti sandesaṃ, purisassitthiyāpi vā;

If he accepts a message for a man or a woman, if he investigates, there is a grave offense; if he delivers it, then.

369.

369.

‘‘Yassā hi santikaṃ gantvā, ārocehī’’ti pesito;

Having been sent, "Go and tell it to whomever," without seeing that person, if he tells it to another, he is necessarily a messenger.

370.

370.

‘‘Ārocehī’’ti vatvā taṃ, paccāharati ce pana;

"Tell her," having said this, if he retracts it, that bhikkhu is not freed from the Saṅghādisesa for acting as a go-between.

371.

371.

‘‘Mātarā rakkhitaṃ itthiṃ, gaccha brūhī’’ti pesito;

Being sent, "Go, tell the woman protected by her mother," or speaking vaguely about another protected by her father,

372.

372.

Paṭiggaṇhanatādīhi, tīhi aṅgehi saṃyute;

When acting as a go-between is complete, joined with three factors, such as acceptance, it incurs a grave offense.

373.

373.

Dvīhi thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ, paṇḍakādīsu tīhipi;

A thullaccaya is stated with two, with three in the case of a paṇḍaka, etc.; and everywhere with just one, there is an offense of dukkata.

374.

374.

Cetiyassa ca saṅghassa, gilānassa ca bhikkhuno;

When going on business for a cetiya, the Saṅgha, or a sick bhikkhu, no offense is declared.

375.

375.

Manussattaṃ tathā tassā, nanālaṃvacanīyatā;

Being human, the fact that she is not marriageable, and the acceptance etc., are considered to be five factors.

376.

376.

Idañhi chasamuṭṭhānaṃ, acittakamudīritaṃ;

This is six-ways-originated, said to be unintentional, or when not knowing that she is unmarriageable or not knowing the rule (paññatti).

377.

377.

Gahetvā sāsanaṃ kāya-vikārenūpagamma taṃ;

Having taken the message, approaching her with bodily gestures, scrutinizing it and conveying it, a grave offense arises from the body.

378.

378.

Sutvā yathānisinnova, vacanaṃ itthiyā puna;

Having heard the woman's words, just as he sits, again, conveying them to the one who has just arrived there, arises from speech.

379.

379.

Ajānantassa paṇṇattiṃ, kāyavācāhi taṃ vidhiṃ;

Not knowing the rule (paññatti), doing or conveying that method by body and speech, a grave offense arises from body and speech.

380.

380.

Jānitvāpi karontassa, garukāpattiyo tathā;

Even knowing it, when doing so, grave offenses arise thus, they originate with three intentional origins.

Sañcarittakathā.

Account of Acting as a Go-Between.

381.

381.

Sayaṃyācitakeheva, kuṭikaṃ appamāṇikaṃ;

Building a hut without measurement, only by requesting himself, for his own sake, with the site thus undesignated,

382.

382.

Honti saṅghādisesā dve, sārambhādīsu dukkaṭaṃ;

There are two Saṅghādisesas, a dukkata for engaging, etc.; if it's a single dilapidated one, there is a single grave offense.

383.

383.

Purisaṃ yācituṃ kamma-sahāyatthāya vaṭṭati;

It is permissible to ask a man for help with work; a dukkata for asking as if it were a root offense (mūlacchejja).

384.

384.

Avajjaṃ hatthakammampi, yācituṃ pana vaṭṭati;

It is permissible to ask for blameless manual labor; manual labor is not a thing that can be owned by others, for it is nothing at all.

385.

385.

Goṇamāyācamānassa, ṭhapetvā ñātakādike;

A dukkata is specified for him who asks for a goṇa, except for relatives, etc.; even with them it is a root offense (mūlacchejja).

386.

386.

‘‘Goṇaṃ demā’’ti vuttepi, gahetuṃ na ca vaṭṭati;

Even when it is said, "We will give a goṇa," it is not permissible to accept it; it is permissible to accept a cart because it is wooden.

387.

387.

Vāsipharasukuddāla-kuṭhārādīsvayaṃ nayo;

The same principle applies to axes, adzes, mattocks, hatchets, etc.; it is also permissible to have everything not used for dwelling carried away.

388.

388.

Valliādimhi sabbasmiṃ, garubhaṇḍappahonake;

In all things such as vines, which are capable of being heavy goods, an offense of dukkata arises, if it belongs to another.

389.

389.

Paccayesu hi tīsveva, viññatti na ca vaṭṭati;

Requesting is not permissible for these three requisites; intimations, allusions, and hints can be obtained in the third.

390.

390.

‘‘Adesite ca vatthusmiṃ, pamāṇenādhikaṃ kuṭiṃ;

"I will make a hut larger than the measurement on a site not designated," having thought this, and even when going to the wilderness,

391.

391.

Pharasuṃ vāpi vāsiṃ vā, nisentassāpi dukkaṭaṃ;

Even for sharpening an adze or an axe, there is a dukkata; for cutting down a tree, there is a dukkata, together with a pācittiya.

392.

392.

Evaṃ pubbapayogasmiṃ, kuṭikārakabhikkhuno;

Thus, in the preliminary effort, the wise in Vinaya should specify the offense appropriate to the effort of a bhikkhu constructing a hut.

393.

393.

Yā pana dvīhi piṇḍehi, niṭṭhānaṃ tu gamissati;

But that which will be completed with two piṇḍas; there is a thullaccaya in these, grave in the first and second.

394.

394.

Anāpatti sacaññassa, deti vippakataṃ kuṭiṃ;

There is no offense for one who knows it, gives a dilapidated hut; likewise, leveling the ground, and even demolishing that hut.

395.

395.

Guhaṃ leṇaṃ karontassa, tiṇapaṇṇacchadampi vā;

When making a cave or a dwelling, or even a covering of grass and leaves; having set aside a dwelling, or likewise for the sake of another.

396.

396.

Desāpetvāva bhikkhūhi, vatthuṃ pana ca bhikkhuno;

Only after having the site designated by bhikkhus, the action arises for the bhikkhu; for one who makes it without measurement.

397.

397.

Adesetvā karontassa, taṃ kriyākriyato siyā;

When making it without having designated, that is doing and not-doing; the rest, such as origination, are considered similar to acting as a go-between.

Kuṭikārasikkhāpadakathā.

Account of the Training Rule on Hut Construction.

398.

398.

Adesetvā sace vatthuṃ, yo kareyya mahallakaṃ;

If, without having the site designated, he makes a large dwelling for his own residence, a grave offense is specified for him.

399.

399.

Pamāṇātikkamenāpi, doso natthi mahallake;

There is no fault in a large dwelling, even with exceeding the measurement; therefore, one should understand the absence of origination of action.

400.

400.

Pamāṇaniyamābhāvā, ekasaṅghādisesatā;

Because of the absence of a rule on measurement, there is a single Saṅghādisesa; the rest, such as origination, are considered the same as the preceding.

Mahallakakathā.

Account of a Large Dwelling.

401.

401.

Pārājikāni vuttāni, catuvīsati satthunā;

Twenty-four pārājikas were stated by the Teacher; nineteen of them are appropriate for a bhikkhu.

402.

402.

Amūlakena codeti, hutvā cāvanacetano;

He accuses without grounds, intending to cause him to fall away; whether pure or impure, in one of these cases.

403.

403.

Garukaṃ tassa āpattiṃ, katokāsamhi niddise;

A grave offense is specified for him in a suitable circumstance; likewise in an unsuitable circumstance, together with an offense of dukkata.

404.

404.

‘‘Koṇṭhosi ca nigaṇṭhosi;

"You are a Koṇṭha, and a Nigaṇṭha;
You are a Sāmaṇera, an ascetic;
Likewise you are a householder, and an elder-
ascetic, and an upāsaka.

405.

405.

Dussīlo pāpadhammosi, antopūti avassuto’’;

You are immoral, of evil principles, rotten inside, leaking away"; a grave offense is specified for him who speaks thus.

406.

406.

Sammukhā hatthamuddāya, codentassapi taṅkhaṇe;

Even for one who accuses to his face with a hand gesture, at that very moment, if that other person understands, there is an offense for the bhikkhu.

407.

407.

Garukaṃ sammukhe ṭhatvā, codāpentassa kenaci;

A grave offense is specified for one who, standing face to face, has someone accuse another; for one who has someone accuse him with his words.

408.

408.

Atha sopi ‘‘mayā diṭṭhaṃ, sutaṃ vā’’ti ca bhāsati;

Then if he also says, "I have seen it, or heard it," for both of them there is a Saṅghādisesa, there is no doubt.

409.

409.

Dūtaṃ vā pana pesetvā, paṇṇaṃ vā pana sāsanaṃ;

But sending a messenger, or a letter with a message, it is declared that there is no offense for one who has someone accuse him.

410.

410.

Tathā saṅghādisesehi, vutte cāvanasaññino;

Thus, when intending to cause to fall away, having spoken with Saṅghādisesas, there is an offense of pācittiya, a dukkata for the remaining offenses.

411.

411.

Akkosanādhippāyassa, akatokāsamattanā;

For one who speaks with the intention of abuse, with an unsuitable circumstance, there is a dukkata for him together with a pācittiya.

412.

412.

Asammukhā vadantassa, āpattīhipi sattahi;

For one who speaks not face to face, with seven offenses; likewise, when doing an action, there is an offense of dukkata.

413.

413.

Na dosummattakādīnaṃ, hoti pañcaṅgasaṃyutaṃ;

There is no offense for the insane, etc.; it is joined with five factors: being ordained, in that person, recognized as pure.

414.

414.

Pārājikena codeti, yena tassa amūlatā;

He accuses of a pārājika, by which there is no grounds for him; and accusation face to face, intending to cause him to fall away.

415.

415.

Taṅkhaṇe jānanañceva, pañcaṅgāni bhavanti hi;

Knowing at that very moment, these are indeed the five factors; this is three-ways-originated, intentional, with painful feeling.

Duṭṭhadosakathā.

Account of Accusation.

416.

416.

Lesamattamupādāya, bhikkhumantimavatthunā;

Seizing upon a mere trifle, he accuses a bhikkhu with an ultimate basis, a grave offense, if intending to cause him to fall away.

417.

417.

Codeti vā tathāsaññī, codāpeti parena vā;

He accuses, or likewise thinking thus, has another accuse; there is no offense, the rest is considered the same as the preceding.

Dutiyaduṭṭhadosakathā.

Account of the Second Accusation.

418.

418.

Samaggassa ca saṅghassa, bhedatthaṃ vāyameyya yo;

He who strives for the division of a harmonious Saṅgha; or seizing upon a cause of division, would stand proclaiming it.

419.

419.

So hi bhikkhūhi vattabbo, ‘‘bhedatthaṃ mā parakkama’’;

That bhikkhu should be spoken to, "Do not strive for division"; thus, "Do not stand for the division of the Saṅgha, seizing a cause of division."

420.

420.

Vuccamāno hi teheva, nissajjeyya na ceva yaṃ;

If, when being spoken to in these three ways, he does not relinquish it, he should be formally admonished; the offense that arises is a grave one.

421.

421.

Parakkamantaṃ saṅghassa, bhikkhuṃ bhedāya bhikkhuno;

Seeing, hearing, or knowing that a bhikkhu is striving for the division of the Saṅgha, there is a dukkata for one who does not speak.

422.

422.

Gantvā ca pana vattabbo, addhayojanatādikaṃ;

Having gone, he should be spoken to, even at a distance of a league; even a great distance should be gone, if he is able to do so.

423.

423.

Tikkhattuṃ pana vuttassa, apariccajatopi taṃ;

Even when spoken to three times, for not relinquishing it; and there is a dukkata for sending a messenger or a letter.

424.

424.

Ñattiyā pariyosāne, dukkaṭaṃ paridīpitaṃ;

A dukkata is proclaimed at the end of the motion; with the two Kammavācās, there are two thullaccayas.

425.

425.

Yya-kāre pana sampatte, garukeyeva tiṭṭhati;

But when the "yya" (non-relinquishing) is reached, a grave offense remains; dukkata, etc. come to rest on even the third bhikkhu.

426.

426.

Akate pana kammasmiṃ, apariccajatopi ca;

But when the action is not done, for not relinquishing it, there is no offense for him with a Saṅghādisesa.

427.

427.

Ñattito pana pubbe vā, pacchā vā taṅkhaṇepi vā;

From the motion, either before or after, or at that very moment, without the "yya" (non-relinquishing) being reached, even for one who relinquishes it.

428.

428.

Paṭinissajjato vāpi, taṃ vā samanubhāsato;

Likewise, for the insane, etc., there is no offense, either for one who relinquishes it or for one who is formally admonished.

429.

429.

Yañhi bhikkhumanuddissa, macchamaṃsaṃ kataṃ bhave;

Whatever fish or meat is made not specifically for a bhikkhu, all of that is permissible for him in which he has no doubt.

430.

430.

Samuddissa kataṃ ñatvā, bhuñjantasseva dukkaṭaṃ;

A dukkata for eating knowing that it was made specifically; likewise, even for eating improper meat without knowing.

431.

431.

Hatthussacchamanussānaṃ, ahikukkuradīpinaṃ;

The meat of human beings killed by hand, snakes, dogs, leopards, lions, tigers, and bears is improper.

432.

432.

Thullaccayaṃ manussānaṃ, maṃse sesesu dukkaṭaṃ;

A thullaccaya for the meat of human beings, a dukkata for the rest; intentional when made specifically, the rest unintentional.

433.

433.

Pucchitvāyeva maṃsānaṃ, bhikkhūnaṃ gahaṇaṃ pana;

Having asked about the meats, the bhikkhus' acceptance is what those established in practice say, the wise in Vinaya say.

434.

434.

Idamekasamuṭṭhānaṃ, vuttaṃ samanubhāsanaṃ;

This admonishment is said to be one-way-originated; bodily action, verbal action, inaction, painful feeling.

Saṅghabhedakathā.

Account of Division of the Saṅgha.

435.

435.

Dutiye saṅghabhedasmiṃ, vattabbaṃ natthi kiñcipi;

In the second division of the Saṅgha, there is nothing that need be said; its origination, etc., are considered the same as the first.

Dutiyasaṅghabhedakathā.

Account of the Second Division of the Saṅgha.

436.

436.

Uddesapariyāpanne, bhikkhu dubbacajātiko;

A bhikkhu who is by nature difficult to speak to, being included in the teaching, makes himself unadmonishable, a grave offense arises.

437.

437.

Dubbacepi panetasmiṃ, saṅghabhedakavaṇṇane;

Even in this case of one difficult to speak to, in the description of the divider of the Saṅgha, the judgment should be understood entirely in accordance with the method stated.

Dubbacakathā.

Account of One Difficult to Speak To.

438.

438.

Yo chandagāmitādīhi, pāpento kuladūsako.

He who, through partiality to a group, etc., harms a family, incurs a grave offense when that action is being done.

439.

439.

Cuṇṇaṃ paṇṇaṃ phalaṃ pupphaṃ, veḷuṃ kaṭṭhañca mattikaṃ;

Powder, leaves, fruits, flowers, bamboo, wood, and earth, for the sake of gaining the favor of a family, for himself or for another.

440.

440.

Santakaṃ dadato hoti, kuladūsanadukkaṭaṃ;

Giving what belongs to the Saṅgha, there is a dukkata for harming a family; it should be done at the price of the goods, theft from what belongs to the Saṅgha or another.

441.

441.

Saṅghikaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ vā, senāsananiyāmitaṃ;

Giving heavy goods belonging to the Saṅgha or senāsana-designated, just by ownership, he incurs a thullaccaya.

442.

442.

Haritvā vā harāpetvā, pakkositvāgatassa vā;

Having brought or had brought, for the sake of gaining the favor of a family, for one who has come when summoned, giving flowers, there is a dukkata.

443.

443.

Haritvā vā harāpetvā, pitūnaṃ pana vaṭṭati;

Having taken or had (flowers) taken, it is allowable for his father; but it is allowable to give a flower to another relative who has come.

444.

444.

Tañca kho vatthupūjatthaṃ, dātabbaṃ na panaññathā;

And that should be given for the purpose of honoring an object, not otherwise; or for the purpose of honoring deities like Siva, but it is not allowable for decoration.

445.

445.

Phalādīsupi sesesu, bhikkhunā vinayaññunā;

In regard to fruits and other remaining things as well, a bhikkhu who knows the Vinaya should understand the judgment in the same manner as stated for flowers.

446.

446.

Pupphādibhājane koci, āgacchati sace pana;

If someone comes for flowers, etc., it should be given to him with consent, having informed the other.

447.

447.

kurundiyaṃ;

Kurundi;
Furthermore, in the Mahāpaccari.

448.

448.

Gilānānaṃ manussānaṃ, dātabbaṃ tu sakaṃ phalaṃ;

His own fruit should be given to sick people, even to one who lacks the means of expenditure but possesses wealth and property.

449.

449.

Saṅghārāme yathā yatra, saṅghena katikā katā;

In a Saṅghārāma, wherever an agreement has been made by the Saṅgha, having made a designation of fruit trees, even to one who has come there.

450.

450.

Phalaṃ yathāparicchedaṃ, dadato pana vaṭṭati;

It is allowable to give fruit according to the designation, saying, "The trees should be shown," and "Take fruit from here."

451.

451.

Sayaṃ khaṇitvā pathaviṃ, mālāgacchādiropane;

For him, there is a pācittiya for digging the earth himself for planting flower plants, etc., and a dukkata for corrupting a family.

452.

452.

Akappiyena vākyena, tathā ropāpanepi ca;

By means of an unallowable expression, and likewise in having it planted, a dukkata is stated everywhere for a bhikkhu who corrupts a family.

453.

453.

Ropane dukkaṭaṃyeva, hoti kappiyabhūmiyaṃ;

There is only a dukkata in planting in allowable ground; likewise, it is stated that there is a dukkata in having it planted in both cases for a bhikkhu.

454.

454.

Sakiṃ āṇattiyā tassa, bahūnaṃ ropane pana;

In planting many with one instruction, there is a dukkata with a pācittiya, or it could be only a dukkata.

455.

455.

Kappiyeneva vākyena, ubhayattha ca bhūmiyā;

By means of an allowable expression, in both cases and in the ground, there is no fault in planting for the sake of use.

456.

456.

Kappiyabhūmi ce hoti, sayaṃ ropetumeva ca;

If it is allowable ground, and also for planting himself,
Furthermore, in the Mahāpaccari.

457.

457.

Ārāmādīnamatthāya, sayaṃ saṃropitassa vā;

It is indeed allowable for bhikkhus to use that fruit which has been planted by themselves for the sake of ārāmas, etc.

458.

458.

Siñcane pana sabbattha, sayaṃ siñcāpanepi ca;

In sprinkling everywhere, both in sprinkling himself and in having it sprinkled, there is a pācittiya for a bhikkhu with unallowable water.

459.

459.

Kulasaṅgahaṇatthañca, paribhogatthameva vā;

For the purpose of gaining favor with families and for the purpose of use, there is a dukkata along with a pācittiya for him who sprinkles.

460.

460

Tesaṃyeva panatthāya, dvinnaṃ kappiyavārinā;

For the purpose of those same (families), with allowable water, a dukkata is stated in sprinkling, and likewise in having it sprinkled.

461.

461.

Kulasaṅgahaṇatthāya, pupphānaṃ ocināpane;

For the purpose of gaining favor with families, in picking flowers, there is a pācittiya with a dukkata, also in picking them himself.

462.

462.

Pupphānaṃ gaṇanāyassa, pupphamocinato pana;

For him who counts flowers, there is a pācittiya offense from picking flowers; if it is for the sake of a family, it is with a dukkata.

463.

463.

Ganthimaṃ gopphimaṃ nāma, vedhimaṃ veṭhimampi ca;

Ganthima, gopphima, vedhima, veṭhima, pūrima, and vāyima are the six kinds of flower arrangements.

464.

464.

Tattha daṇḍena daṇḍaṃ vā, vaṇṭenapi ca vaṇṭakaṃ;

Therein, joining stalk to stalk with a stick or with a small stalk, is called "ganthima."

465.

465.

Gopphimaṃnāma gopphetvā, suttādīhi karīyati;

Gopphima is made by stringing together with threads, etc.; a garland with stalks on one side or stalks on both sides.

466.

466.

Vedhimaṃnāma vijjhitvā, bundesu makulādikaṃ;

Vedhima is said to be a garland-variant pierced with needles, etc., covered with buds, etc., in bunches.

467.

467.

Veṭhimaṃnāma veṭhetvā, kataṃ mālāguṇehi vā;

Veṭhima is called that which is made by wrapping or bound with strands of garlands or with bark, etc.

468.

468.

Pūrimaṃpana daṭṭhabbaṃ, pupphamālāhi pūraṇe;

Pūrima should be regarded as filling with garlands of flowers; it is found in surrounding Bodhi trees, flower cloths, etc.

469.

469.

Vāyimaṃnāma daṭṭhabbaṃ, puppharūpapaṭādisu;

Vāyima should be regarded as flower-shaped cloths, etc., woven with strands of garlands.

470.

470

Sabbametaṃ sayaṃ kātuṃ, kārāpetuṃ parehi vā;

All this, whether doing it oneself or having it done by others, is not allowable for bhikkhus, bhikkhunīs, or even a Buddha.

471.

471.

Tathā kalambakaṃ kātuṃ, aḍḍhacandakameva vā;

Likewise, to make a kalambaka or a half-moon shape, or to weave a flower-cloth filled by others.

472.

472.

Piṭṭhakācamayaṃ dāmaṃ, geṇḍupupphamayampi ca;

To make a garland of baked clay, a garland of geṇḍu flowers, or a garland of kharapatta flowers, all is not allowable.

473.

473.

Kaṇikārādipupphāni, vitāne baddhakaṇṭake;

For one who pierces kaṇikāra flowers, etc., on thorns fixed in a canopy for the sake of pennants made of hīra, etc., there is a dukkata.

474.

474.

Kaṇṭakādīhi bhikkhussa, ekapupphampi vijjhituṃ;

For a bhikkhu to pierce even one flower with thorns, etc., or to insert a flower into flowers, is not allowable.

475.

475.

Asokapiṇḍiādīnaṃ, antare dhammarajjuyā;

There is no fault in inserting flowers in the space between Ashoka garlands, etc., with a thread of Dhamma.

476.

476.

Ṭhapitesu pavesetvā, kadalicchattabhittisu;

For one who pierces flowers even on thorns in erected banana-leaf canopies and walls, there is a dukkata.

477.

477.

Kappiyaṃ pana vattabbaṃ, vacanaṃ vatthupūjane;

An allowable expression should be spoken for honoring an object; the indications, suggestions, and implications are declared to be allowable.

478.

478.

Na kevalamakattabbaṃ, kuladūsanameva ca;

Not only should things that corrupt families not be done, but also medical work, etc., should never be done.

479.

479.

Kātabbaṃ pana bhesajjaṃ, pañcannaṃ sahadhamminaṃ;

But medicine should be made for five fellow-Dhammā; even having made it without a request, what to say of one's own wealth?

480.

480.

Tathā mātāpitūnampi, tadupaṭṭhākajantuno;

Likewise, for mother and father, and the being who attends on them, for a sick person himself, and for one who does service.

481.

481.

Jeṭṭhabhātā kaniṭṭho ca, tathā bhaginiyo duve;

Elder brother, younger brother, and two sisters, younger mother, younger father, elder mother, elder father.

482.

482.

Pitucchā mātulo cāti, dasime ñātayo matā;

Pituccā and maternal uncle—these ten are considered relatives; it is allowable for a bhikkhu to do (medical work) for these ten also.

483.

483.

Sace bhesajjametesaṃ, nappahoti na hoti vā;

If medicine is not sufficient or does not exist for these, and they request it from that bhikkhu, it should be given for a temporary period.

484.

484.

Sace te na ca yācanti, dātabbaṃ tāvakālikaṃ;

If they do not request it, it should be given for a temporary period, having made an agreement, saying, "These will give it back to me."

485.

485.

Etesaṃ tu kulā yāva, sattamā kuladūsanaṃ;

Up to the seventh generation from the family of these, there is a corruption of family; the offense of making medicine or requesting it does not arise.

486.

486.

Bhātujāyāpi vā hoti, sace bhaginisāmiko;

Or there is a brother's wife, or the husband of a sister; if these are relatives, it is allowable to do (medical work) for them also.

487.

487.

Aññātakā sace honti, bhātuno anujāya vā;

If they are not relatives, or for a younger brother's wife, a wise man should say, "Give it in your family's place of consumption."

488.

488.

Atha tesampi puttānaṃ, katvā dātabbameva vā;

Or even having done (medical work) for their sons, it should be given, saying, "Give it to your parents," by one who knows the Vinaya.

489.

489.

Aññopi yo koci panissaro vā;

Or anyone else who is a master,
Or a thief or one defeated in battle,
Or a newcomer who has exhausted his supplies,
Or a helpless person abandoned by his relatives.

490.

490.

Etesaṃ pana sabbesaṃ, apaccāsīsatā satā;

For all of these, without expecting anything in return, a bhikkhu should frequently show hospitality with mindfulness.

491.

491.

Parittodakasuttāni, vutte dethāti kenaci;

If someone says, "Give me protective water-threads," having stirred the water with his hand, and having kneaded the thread.

492.

492.

Dātabbaṃ bhikkhunā katvā, tesameva ca santakaṃ;

It should be given by the bhikkhu, having made it for their own use; if he gives his own water or thread to them, there is a dukkata.

493.

493.

Anāmaṭṭhopi dātabbo, piṇḍapāto vijānatā;

Unconsecrated alms-food should be given by one who knows (the rule) to two, to parents and to the one who attends on them.

494.

494.

Issarassāpi dātabbo, coradāmarikassa ca;

It should be given even to a master, a thief caught in a snare, to a sick person himself, and to one who does service.

495.

495.

Dātuṃ paṇḍupalāsassa, thālakepi ca vaṭṭati;

It is allowable to give even a dry leaf in a dish; having placed it, it is not allowable for his father, let alone another.

496.

496.

Gihīnaṃ pana dūteyyaṃ, jaṅghapesaniyampi ca;

Messengership for laypeople, and also going on errands, is stated by the Teacher to be a dukkata at every step for one who does it.

497.

497.

Bhaṇḍumātāpitūnampi, veyyāvaccakarassa ca;

It is allowable to carry a message for a sick person's parents, for one who does service, and for fellow-Dhammā.

498.

498.

Kuladūsanakammena, laddhaṃ aṭṭhavidhenapi;

What is obtained by means of the eight kinds of family-corrupting actions, it is not allowable to use for the five fellow-Dhammā.

499.

499.

Ajjhohāresu sabbattha, dukkaṭaṃ paridīpitaṃ;

A dukkata is declared everywhere in transgressions; this is the same method in the remaining cases, only as regards use.

500.

500.

Katvā rūpiyavohāraṃ, abhūtārocanena ca;

Having made monetary transactions and by unfounded accusations, all the arising conditions are declared to be equal.

501.

501.

Viññattinuppadānañca, vejjakammamanesanaṃ;

Non-generation of request, seeking medical work, doing the work of a messenger, mudga soup, knowledge of objects.

502.

502.

Jaṅghapesaniyaṃ dūta-kammañca kuladūsanaṃ;

Going on errands, messenger work, and corrupting families, unfounded accusation—avoid what the Buddha has condemned.

503.

503.

Na dosummattakādīnaṃ, paṭinissajjatopi taṃ;

There is no fault for those who are mad, etc., even in expulsion from it; all the arising, etc., is considered equal to schism in the Saṅgha.

Kuladūsanakathā.

Account of Corrupting Families.

504.

504.

Jānaṃ yāvatihaṃ yena, chāditāpatti bhikkhunā;

For as long as a bhikkhu knowingly conceals an offense, he should live under parivāsa for that long unwillingly.

505.

505.

Āpatti ca anukkhitto, pahu cānantarāyiko;

And the offense is not abandoned, he is able and there is no obstacle, and he is aware of all four (factors), and he desires to conceal it.

506.

506.

Chādananti panetehi, dasahaṅgehi bhikkhunā;

"Concealment" means that by these ten factors, an offense is concealed by a bhikkhu, and that offense is said to be concealed when the dawn breaks.

Dve bhāṇavārā niṭṭhitā.

Two recitations are finished.

507.

507.

Tividho parivāso hi, tividhāpetacetasā;

There are three kinds of parivāsa, with three kinds of thoughts: paṭicchanna, suddhanta, and samodhāna are explained.

508.

508.

paṭicchanna-parivāsopakāsito;

Paṭicchanna-parivāsa is declared;
It should be given for a concealed (offense), according to the kind of offense.

509.

509.

Vatthugottavasenāpi, nāmāpattivasena vā;

The Kammavācā should be done according to the object, lineage, kind, name, or offense; it should be given to him accordingly.

510.

510.

‘‘Vattaṃ samādiyāmī’’ti, ‘‘parivāsa’’nti vā puna;

Having undertaken, saying, "I undertake the practice" or "parivāsa," it should be announced to the Saṅgha from the beginning.

511.

511.

Punappunāgatānampi, ārocentova rattiyā;

Even to those who come again and again, he should announce it; he should always live without making a break or a change of practice during the night.

512.

512.

Parivāso visodhetuṃ, na sakkā tattha ce pana;

If it is not possible to purify the parivāsa there, that practice should be set aside and lived by that bhikkhu.

513.

513.

Tattheva saṅghamajjhe vā, puggale vāpi nikkhipe;

He should set aside the practice either there in the midst of the Saṅgha or to an individual, saying, "I set aside the practice" or "parivāsa."

514.

514.

Evamekapadenāpi, padehi dvīhi vā pana;

Thus, the practice should be set aside with one word or with two words; this is the same method in undertaking it.

515.

515.

Nikkhittakālato uddhaṃ, pakatattoti vuccati;

From the time of setting aside, he is called "pakatatta"; again, at dawn, together with one bhikkhu.

516.

516.

Parikkhittavihārassa, dve parikkhepato bahi;

Of a delimited monastery, outside the two delimiters; from a suitable place for delimitation, outside the undelimited.

517.

517.

Leḍḍupāte atikkamma, okkamitvā ca maggato;

Having passed beyond a clod of dirt falling, having stepped off the path; whether by a thicket or a fence, or by staying in a covered place.

518.

518.

Tena antoruṇeyeva, vattamādāya viññunā;

In that case, even before dawn, the wise monk, taking the observance, having announced it at that dawn, when it has dawned near him.

519.

519.

Nikkhipitvā tato vattaṃ, gantabbaṃ tu yathāsukhaṃ;

Having put down that observance then, one should go as one pleases; a monk having gone within the dawn to anyone at all.

520.

520.

Ārocetvāva taṃ vattaṃ, nikkhipe puna paṇḍito;

Having announced that observance, the wise man should put it down again; and he should discern it by the Samuccaya Commentary.

521.

521.

Āpattīnañca rattīnaṃ, paricchedaṃ na jānati;

He does not know the limit of offenses and nights; he is called "suddhanto."

522.

522.

Eseva parisuddhehi, suddhanto duvidho mato;

That same suddhanto, by the thoroughly pure, is considered twofold; named Cūḷasuddhanta and named Mahāsuddhanta.

523.

523.

Duvidhopi ayaṃ ratti-paricchedaṃ ajānato;

This twofold suddhanto is for one who does not know the limit of nights; either some or all should be given to one who is in doubt.

524.

524.

samodhāna-parivāsotidhā mato;

Samodhāna-parivāsa is considered threefold; Odhānasamodhāna, agghamissakapubbaka.

525.

525.

Āpajjitvāntarāpattiṃ, chādentassa hi bhikkhuno;

For a monk who, having committed an offense in between, conceals it; when a day has been completed, it is cleansed and given.

526.

526.

Purimāpattiyā mūla-divase tu vinicchite;

When, on the initial day, the root offense has been determined; having consolidated the offense committed later, according to the rule.

527.

527.

Yācamānassa saṅghena, dātabbo pana bhikkhuno;

It should be given to the monk by the Saṅgha, when he is requesting; this is declared to be odhānasamodhāna-parivāsa.

528.

528.

Tathā sambahulāsvekā, dve vā sambahulāpi vā;

Likewise, one of many, or two, or even many; whichever have been long concealed, according to their value.

529.

529.

Āpattīnaṃ tato ūna-paṭicchannānameva yo;

Then, of offenses that are less concealed; having consolidated, whatever is to be given, is called parivāsa.

530.

530.

Nānāvatthukasaññāyo, sabbā āpattiyo pana;

But all offenses, with different grounds and perceptions; having made all those into one, the mixed one is considered to be given.

531.

531.

Parivutthaparivāsassa, mānattaṃ deyyamuttari;

To one who has completed parivāsa, further mānatta should be given; six nights are concealed, two are based on non-concealment.

532.

532.

Tattha yā apaṭicchannā, hoti āpatti yassa tu;

Therein, whatever offense is not concealed for him; is called apaṭicchannanāmaka.

533.

533.

Yassāpatti paṭicchannā, parivāsāvasānake;

Whose offense is concealed, at the end of parivāsa; is called "paṭicchanna".

534.

534.

Gantvā catūhi bhikkhūhi, paccūsasamaye saha;

Having gone with four monks, together at dawn; to the place specified in the parivāsa, and to that place.

535.

535.

‘‘Vattaṃ samādiyāmī’’ti, ‘‘mānatta’’miti vā pana;

Saying "I undertake the observance," or "mānatta"; having undertaken that from them, the expert should announce it.

536.

536.

Nikkhipe santike tesaṃ, vattaṃ tesu gatesu vā;

He should put down the observance near them, or when they have gone; having announced it to a monk seen previously, he should put it down.

537.

537.

Tassa dānavidhānañca, ratticchedādiko nayo;

The manner of giving it, and the method beginning with the cutting of nights; is according to the Samuccaya Commentary and Pāḷi.

538.

538.

Puna taṃ ciṇṇamānattaṃ, saṅgho vīsativaggiko;

Again, that mānatta having been observed, the Saṅgha of twenty; should absolve the monk according to the rule, one who has become pure again.

539.

539.

Chādentiyāpi āpattiṃ, parivāso na vijjati;

Even for one concealing an offense, there is no parivāsa; nor is there an offense for a bhikkhunī concealing her own offense.

540.

540.

Chādetvā vāpi āpattiṃ, acchādetvāpi vā pana;

Having concealed an offense, or even not having concealed it; it is only called merely observing, pakkhamānatta.

541.

541.

Vinayanayamatibuddhidīpanaṃ;

Illuminating the way of Vinaya and intelligence; this excellent Vinaya-decision; those who approach it with various methods and rules; they approach proficiency in the way of Vinaya.

Iti vinayavinicchaye saṅghādisesakathā niṭṭhitā.

Thus ends the Saṅghādisesakatha in the Vinayavinicchaya.

Aniyatakathā

Aniyatakathā

542.

542.

Raho nisajjassādena, mātugāmassa santikaṃ;

Sitting down in private with delight, near a woman; intending to go, he makes her sit, applies eye-salve, and eats.

543.

543.

Payoge ca payoge ca, hoti sabbattha dukkaṭaṃ;

In each and every endeavor, there is everywhere a dukkaṭa; for one going by the series of steps, and having gone, for one sitting down.

544.

544.

Nisajjāya ubhinnampi, payogagaṇanāya ca;

For sitting down, for both; and for the counting of endeavors; for him there is a pācittiya, for many among many.

545.

545.

Samīpepi ṭhito andho, antodvādasahatthake;

Even a blind man standing nearby, within twelve hatthas; does not cause non-offense, even if there are hundreds of women.

546.

546.

Cakkhumāpi nipajjitvā, niddāyantopi kevalaṃ;

Even a man with sight, lying down, merely sleeping; at the door of a closed room, even sitting, he does not protect.

547.

547.

Anandhe sati viññusmiṃ, ṭhitassārahasaññino;

When there is a wise man who is not blind, standing with the perception of a secret place; there is no fault due to sitting, for one with a distracted mind.

548.

548.

Na dosummattakādīnaṃ, āpattīhipi tīhipi;

There is no offense for the insane, etc., by three offenses; the originations, etc., are equal, by the first and last basis.

Paṭhamāniyatakathā.

First Aniyatakathā.

549.

549.

Anandhābadhiro viññū, itthī vā purisopi vā;

A wise man who is not blind or deaf, whether woman or man; standing within twelve hatthas, could cause non-offense.

550.

550.

Andho abadhiro vāpi, badhiro vāpi cakkhumā;

A blind man or a deaf man, or even a deaf man with sight; does not cause non-offense, this is a three-origination.

Dutiyāniyatakathā.

Second Aniyatakathā.

Iti vinayavinicchaye aniyatakathā niṭṭhitā.

Thus ends the Aniyatakathā in the Vinayavinicchaya.

Nissaggiyakathā

Nissaggiyakathā

551.

551.

Khomaṃ kappāsakoseyyaṃ, sāṇaṃ bhaṅgañca kambalaṃ;

Linen, cotton, silk, hemp, and wool; a robe is said to be sixfold, but by origin it is allowable.

552.

552.

Dukūlañceva pattuṇṇaṃ, cinaṃ somārapaṭṭakaṃ;

Dukūla and also fine wool, Chinese silk brocade; born of psychic power and given by a deity, that is suitable for it.

553.

553.

Ticīvaraṃ parikkhāra-coḷañca mukhapuñchanaṃ;

The three robes, the equipment-cloth, and the face-wiper; he should determine the sitting-cloth and also the spread-cloth.

554.

554.

Ekāhampi vinā bhikkhu, na vaseyya ticīvaraṃ;

Even for one day, a monk should not live without the three robes; he should not live with the sitting-cloth determined, for four months.

555.

555.

Rajitvā kappiyaṃ binduṃ, datvā tattha ticīvaraṃ;

Having dyed it and given an allowable dot, there in the three robes; being endowed with the measure, that should be determined.

556.

556.

Pacchimantena saṅghāṭi, dīghaso muṭṭhipañcakā;

The Saṅghāṭi is five fist-widths long on the lower edge; and three fist-widths across, that is the upper edge.

557.

557.

Satthuno cīvarūnāpi, vaṭṭatīti pakāsitā;

It has been declared that it is fitting even if the Blessed One's robe is smaller; this same measure has been shown for the upper robe.

558.

558.

Muṭṭhipañcakaṃ dīghantaṃ, pamāṇaṃ tiriyantato;

Five fist-widths is the long measure, from the crosswise measure; one and a half or two hatthas, in the remaining under-robe.

559.

559.

Ahatāhatakappānaṃ, saṅghāṭi diguṇā matā;

For those which are uncut and unacquired, the Saṅghāṭi is considered double; the upper robe is a single piece, so is the under-robe.

560.

560.

Utuddhaṭānaṃ pana cīvarānaṃ;

But for robes that have been taken up from rubbish heaps; the Saṅghāṭi of a monk is fourfold; the remaining two are said to be double; paṃsukūla is fitting as one pleases.

561.

561.

Tīṇipi dvepi cekaṃ vā, chinditabbaṃ pahoti ce;

Three, two, or even one, should be cut if there is enough; if there is not enough in all, one should give even more in addition.

562.

562.

Acchinnaṃ vā anādinnaṃ, dhārentassa ticīvaraṃ;

For a monk wearing three robes that are uncut or unacquired; a dukkaṭa is said, and when using them with lack of control.

563.

563.

Kusiṃ aḍḍhakusiñcāpi, maṇḍalaṃ aḍḍhamaṇḍalaṃ;

A kusi, or a half-kusi, a maṇḍala, or a half-maṇḍala; uncovered, covered, and also bāhanta for a monk.

564.

564.

Dassetvāva vidhiṃ sabbaṃ, pañcakādippabhedakaṃ;

Having shown all the rule, with various kinds beginning with five; a three-piece robe, cut appropriately for a renunciate, should be made.

565.

565.

Dānenacchijjagāhena, vissāsaggahaṇena ca;

By giving, by not acquiring, by taking with confidence; even by a lesser turning, and by abandoning the training.

566.

566.

Paccuddhāravināsehi, liṅgassa parivattanā;

By disavowal and destruction, by a change of gender; all determination is broken, if the three robes have a hole.

567.

567.

Kaniṭṭhassaṅgulasseva, nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇakaṃ;

Even the measure of the back of the nail of the smallest finger; a hole pierced through destroys the determination.

568.

568.

Eko tantupi acchinno, adhiṭṭhānaṃ na bhindati;

Even one thread uncut does not break the determination; even when being whitened, or when being washed by a dyer.

569.

569.

Paṭhamaṃ aggaḷaṃ datvā, pacchā chindati rakkhati;

Having given a bolt first, he cuts later and protects; having joined two edges together, he cuts later and protects.

570.

570.

Caturaṭṭhaṅgulā oraṃ, ekadvinnaṃ tirīyato;

Four or eight fingers widthwise, one or two lengthwise; a hole lengthwise of three, indeed breaks it with a vidatthi.

571.

571.

Nisīdanassa dīghena, bhavanti dve vidatthiyo;

Two vidatthi of the Sugata are the length of the sitting-cloth; and one and a half is the width, by the Sugata's vidatthi.

572.

572.

Honti kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi, tiriyaṃ dve vidatthiyo;

The kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi is two vidatthi across; and four is the length, by the Sugata's vidatthi.

573.

573.

Dīghato sugatasseva, bhavanti cha vidatthiyo;

The vassikasāṭikā is six vidatthi in length, just like the Sugata's; and one and a half is the width.

574.

574.

Muninā tīsu etesu, karontassa taduttariṃ;

When making them in these three, exceeding that by the Sage; cutting off more for him, is declared a pācittiya.

575.

575.

Mukhapuñchanacoḷassa, paccattharaṇakassa vā;

The measure of the face-wiper cloth, or the spread-cloth; has not been specified by measure or without measure.

576.

576.

Sadasaṃ adasaṃ sabbaṃ, paccattharaṇacīvaraṃ;

All spread-cloth and robes, with or without a border; large, small, single, or multiple, are fitting.

577.

577.

Mukhapuñchanacoḷekaṃ, dvepi vaṭṭanti sabbathā;

One or two face-wiper cloths are fitting in every way; the sitting-cloth is with or without a border, like the spread-cloth.

578.

578.

Adasā rajitāyeva, vaṭṭatādinnakappakā;

The kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi is said to be fitting only when dyed, like acquired and allowable ones; so is the kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi, and likewise the vassikasāṭikā.

579.

579.

Gaṇanaṃ vā pamāṇaṃ vā, na parikkhāracoḷake;

There is no counting or measure in the equipment-cloth; experts in tradition say that it exceeds measure and counting.

580.

580.

Sugataṭṭhaṅgulāyāmaṃ, caturaṅgulavitthataṃ;

The last robe is eight Sugata-fingerbreadths in length, four fingerbreadths in width; not subject to disjoining.

581.

581.

Parissāvapaṭaṃ patta-potthakatthavikādikaṃ;

A straining cloth, a leaf-book-cover, etc.; he should determine the equipment-cloth, the last robe.

582.

582.

Bahūni ekato katvā, adhiṭṭhātumpi vaṭṭati;

It is fitting even to determine many having made them into one; there is no fault in having kept them for the sake of mother, etc.

583.

583.

Vassamāse adhiṭṭheyya, caturo vassasāṭikaṃ;

He should determine a rain-bathing cloth for four months in the rainy season; having disavowed that again, he should disjoin it after that.

584.

584.

Tāva kaṇḍuppaṭicchādiṃ, yāva rogo na sammati;

So long as the disease does not subside for the kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi; having determined it, from then on, having disavowed, he should disjoin it.

585.

585.

‘‘Imaṃ kaṇḍuppaṭicchādiṃ, imamantaravāsakaṃ;

"I determine this kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi, this under-robe"; he should determine it thus, this is the method for the rest as well.

586.

586.

‘‘Imaṃ kaṇḍuppaṭicchādiṃ, eta’’nti ca asammukhe;

"This is the kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi, this," and not in its presence; having said this, he should disavow it thus, the wise man should do so for the rest as well.

587.

587.

Ābhogaṃ manasā katvā, kāyena phusanākataṃ;

Having made an intention with the mind, done by touching with the body; and determined by speech, determination is considered twofold.

588.

588.

Iti sabbamidaṃ vuttaṃ, tecīvarikabhikkhuno;

Thus all of this has been said for a monk with three robes; likewise, having said it, he should determine that equipment-cloth.

589.

589.

Ticīvaraṃ parikkhāra-coḷaṃ kātumpi vaṭṭati;

It is permissible to make the three robes into a parikkhāra-coḷa; having been said in this way when urged, the assistance is pointless.

590.

590.

Na, tecīvarikasseva, vuttattā tattha satthunā;

No, because it was said by the Teacher there only for one who has three robes; therefore, everything is permissible for that parikkhāra-coḷa.

591.

591.

‘‘Adhiṭṭheti vikappeti, anāpattī’’ti ettha ca;

And here, in "He determines, he makes an exception, there is no offense"; the making of an exception is only for what should be determined.

592.

592.

Bhikkhussevaṃ karontassa, na doso upalabbhati;

No fault is found for a bhikkhu doing thus; and if so, why not things like a face-cloth?

593.

593.

Mukhapuñchanakādīnaṃ, tesaṃ kiccavidhānato;

Because of the rule for the uses of face-cloths, etc.; determination is appropriate for what is not a necessity and not owned.

594.

594.

mahāpaccariyaṃpana;

However, in the Mahāpaccariya it was said, and so it cannot be rejected by one who knows the Vinaya.

595.

595.

Cīvaraṃ paripuṇṇanti, nidānuppattitopi ca;

"The robe is complete," also from the arising of the nidāna; the discerning one should understand that this is the entrance to the nidāna.

596.

596.

Kusavākādicīrāni, kambalaṃ kesavālajaṃ;

A thullaccaya for wearing robes made of kusa grass, vākā grass, etc., blankets, haircloth, lūkapakkha and animal hide.

597.

597.

Kadalerakadussesu, akkadusse ca potthake;

A dukkaṭa for garments of kadalera cloth, bark cloth, and akka cloth, and in a book; a dukkaṭa also for tiriṭa, and for a wrapping and a jacket.

598.

598.

Sabbanīlakamañjeṭṭha-kaṇhalohitapītake;

A dukkaṭa also for all blue, madder, black, red, yellow, mahānāma, mahāraṅga, and red colors.

599.

599.

Acchinnadasake dīgha-phalapupphadasesu ca;

Here, for an uncut fringe, long fringes, and flower fringes, there is nothing unacceptable for an uncut robe.

600.

600.

Adhiṭṭheti vikappeti, vissajjeti vinassati;

He determines, he makes an exception, he gives up, it is lost; no offense is declared if he trusts it for up to ten days.

601.

601.

Kathinaṃ nāma nāmena, samuṭṭhānamidaṃ pana;

But this arising called kathina is said to be without intention and without action, with three intentions and three feelings.

Paṭhamakathinakathā.

The First Account of the Kathina.

602.

602.

Gāmādīsu padesesu, tipañcasu ticīvaraṃ;

In villages and other such places, a bhikkhu having placed his three robes for even one night, in groups of three or five, without the Saṅgha's consent.

603.

603.

Bhikkhuno pana tenassa, vippavatthuṃ na vaṭṭati;

That bhikkhu should not be separated from them; if separated, at the rising of dawn there is a nissaggiya.

604.

604.

Cīvaraṃ nikkhipitvāna, nhāyantasseva rattiyaṃ;

Having put down his robe to bathe during the night, what should that bhikkhu do if dawn rises?

605.

605.

Dukkaṭaṃ muninā vuttaṃ, nissaggiyanivāsane;

A dukkaṭa was said by the Sage; if he wears it, there is a nissaggiya; but if, fearing that, that bhikkhu goes naked, there is a dukkaṭa.

606.

606.

Acchinnacīvaraṭṭhāne, ṭhitattā pana bhikkhuno;

But because the bhikkhu is staying in a place where robes are uncut, there is nothing unacceptable for him at all.

607.

607.

Nigāsetvā gahetvā ca, gantvā bhikkhussa santikaṃ;

Having rinsed it and taken it, and gone to the presence of a bhikkhu, having given it up, the offense should be declared by one who is wise.

608.

608.

Parassa nissajjitvā taṃ, dukkaṭaṃ paribhuñjato;

There is a dukkaṭa for one who gives it up to another and uses it; and for each effort in wearing etc.

609.

609.

Anāpatti tamaññassa, bhikkhuno paribhuñjato;

There is no offense for another bhikkhu who uses it; there is a dukkaṭa explained if he does not give what has been given up.

610.

610.

There ca dahare maggaṃ, gacchantesu ubhosupi;

Among elders and young monks who are walking on a road, if the younger one puts down the bowl and robe.

611.

611.

Asampatte garuṃ tasmiṃ, uggacchatyaruṇo yadi;

If dawn breaks when he has not reached the elder, the robe is a nissaggiya, the dependence is not settled.

612.

612.

Muhuttaṃ vissamitvāna, gacchante dahare pana;

But if the younger one rests for a moment and then walks on, the robe is a nissaggiya, and the dependence is settled.

613.

613.

Sutā dhammakathā yasmiṃ, uggacchatyaruṇo yadi;

If dawn breaks when a talk on the Dhamma is being heard, the robe is a nissaggiya, and the dependence is settled.

614.

614.

Paccuddhāre anāpatti, laddhasammutikassapi;

There is no offense in re-collecting it, even for one who has received consent; or he gives it up or it is lost just before dawn.

615.

615.

Paṭhamena samānāva, samuṭṭhānādayo nayā;

The ways of arising, etc., are just like the first; here, not re-collecting is specified as without action.

Dutiyakathinakathā.

The Second Account of the Kathina.

616.

616.

Akālacīvaraṃ māsa-paramaṃ nikkhipe sati;

He may keep an unseasonal robe with mindfulness for a maximum of one month; it is not permissible to keep it longer than that in expectation.

617.

617.

Dasāhātikkamoyeva;

Just exceeding ten days;
In the first kathina here;
Exceeding a month is said;
The rest is considered the same as that.

Tatiyakathinakathā.

The Third Account of the Kathina.

618.

618.

Bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā bhuttaṃ, vatthaṃ aññātikāya yo;

If a bhikkhu has a robe that has been used by a bhikkhunī, who is not a relative, washed, dyed, or beaten.

619.

619.

Tassa nissaggiyāpatti, paṭhamena pakāsitā;

For him a nissaggiya offense is declared with the first; likewise, a double dukkaṭa is shown with the remaining two.

620.

620.

Sikkhamānāya vā hatthe, dhovanatthāya deti ce;

Or if he gives it into the hand of a sikkhamānā for the purpose of washing; that is the way if she becomes fully ordained and washes it afterwards.

621.

621.

Sāmaṇeraniddesepi, liṅgaṃ ce parivattati;

Also, if the gender changes for a sāmaṇera or a novice; if she is fully ordained as a bhikkhunī and washes it, there is a nissaggiya.

622.

622.

Daharānañca bhikkhūnaṃ, hatthe vatthe niyyādite;

Likewise, for young bhikkhus, when a robe is entrusted into their hands; that is the way it is considered when the gender is changed for them.

623.

623.

Tathā bhikkhuniyā hatthe, dinne ‘‘dhovā’’ti cīvare;

Likewise, if he gives a robe to a bhikkhunī, saying "Wash it"; if she washes it when the gender has changed, it is permissible.

624.

624.

‘‘Dhovā’’ti bhikkhunī vuttā, sace sabbaṃ karoti sā;

If a bhikkhunī is told "Wash it," if she does everything; just because of the act of washing, for him there is a nissaggiya.

625.

625.

‘‘Imasmiṃ cīvare sabbaṃ, kattabbaṃ tvaṃ karohi’’ti;

"You should do everything to this robe;" there is a nissaggiya and a double dukkaṭa for the one who says it.

626.

626.

Ñātikāñātisaññissa, paccattharanisīdanaṃ;

There is a dukkaṭa for one who has a seat-cloth or sitting cloth, which belongs to another, washed when he perceives it as a relative or a non-relative.

627.

627.

Ekatoupasampannā, bhikkhunīnaṃ vasena yā;

Also, there is a dukkaṭa offense if he has it washed by a bhikkhunī who was fully ordained along with a group.

628.

628.

Avuttā paribhuttaṃ vā, aññaṃ vā yadi dhovati;

There is no offense if she washes another one that was not mentioned, or one that has been used; the ways of arising, etc., are the same through association.

Purāṇacīvaradhovāpanakathā.

The Account of Having Old Robes Washed.

629.

629.

Vikappanupagaṃ kiñci, pacchimaṃ pana cīvaraṃ;

When receiving any later robe that is subject to being made an exception, there is an offense, except for setting aside a robe for exchange.

630.

630.

Payoge gahaṇatthāya, dukkaṭaṃ pariyāputaṃ;

There is a dukkaṭa explained for the effort in taking it; for him, the nissaggiya offense is declared with the taking.

631.

631.

Sace anupasampanna-hatthe peseti cīvaraṃ;

If he sends the robe into the hand of one who is not fully ordained, it is permissible to take it, except for an exchange.

632.

632.

Ñātikāyapi aññāti-saññissa vimatissa vā;

There is a dukkaṭa if he takes it from the hand of a relative, or when he perceives her as a non-relative, or when he is in doubt, or when she was fully ordained along with a group.

633.

633.

‘‘Dassāmī’’ti ca ābhogaṃ, katvā vā pārivattakaṃ;

There is no fault in taking something for a short time if he makes an invitation, saying "I will give it," or if he makes an exchange.

634.

634.

Aññaṃ pana parikkhāraṃ, na doso hoti gaṇhato;

There is no fault in taking another requisite; this arising through association is said to be with and without action.

Cīvarapaṭiggahaṇakathā.

The Account of Receiving a Robe.

635.

635.

Cīvaraṃ viññāpentassa, aññātakāppavāritaṃ;

There is a nissaggiya offense for a bhikkhu who asks for a robe from a non-relative who has not been invited, except at the proper time.

636.

636.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, tatheva dvikadukkaṭaṃ;

A triple pācittiya is said, and likewise a double dukkaṭa for one who perceives a relative as a non-relative, and for one who is in doubt about that.

637.

637.

Samaye viññāpentassa, ñātake vā pavārite;

There is no offense for one who asks at the proper time from a relative or one who has been invited, or for the sake of another from a relative or one who has been invited.

638.

638.

Anāpattīti ñātabbaṃ, tathā ummattakādino;

It should be known that there is no offense, and likewise for one who is insane, etc.; all the ways of arising, etc., are considered the same through association.

Aññātakaviññattikathā.

The Account of Asking from a Non-Relative.

639.

639.

Appavāritamaññātiṃ, cīvaraṃ tu taduttariṃ;

There is a nissaggiya offense for a bhikkhu who asks for a robe exceeding that from a non-relative who has not been invited.

640.

640.

Yassa tīṇipi naṭṭhāni, dve vā ekampi vā pana;

If he has lost even three, two, or one; nothing at all should be acquired by him with two or even one.

641.

641.

Sesakaṃ āharantassa, dinne nacchinnakāraṇā;

It should be known that there is no offense for one who brings a remainder, when it is given because there is no cutting; or with wealth belonging to relatives, etc., or even with his own wealth.

642.

642.

Anāpattīti ñātabbaṃ, tathā ummattakādino;

It should be known that there is no offense, and likewise for one who is insane, etc.; all the ways of arising, etc., are considered the same through association.

Tatuttarikathā.

The Account of Exceeding That.

643.

643.

Kalyāṇakamyatāhetu, āpajjati vikappanaṃ;

If, because he wishes for what is good, he undertakes to make an exception for a robe, the gain of that becomes a nissaggiya.

644.

644.

Mahagghaṃ dātukāmamhi, appagghaṃ viññāpeti yo;

No offense is declared if he asks for something of little value when one intends to give something of great value, when it belongs to relatives, etc.

645.

645.

Ñātakeññātisaññissa, dukkaṭaṃ vimatissa ca;

A dukkaṭa for one who perceives a relative as a non-relative, and for one who is in doubt; the ways of arising, etc., are said to be the same through association.

Paṭhamopakkhaṭakathā.

The First Account of Making an Offer.

646.

646.

Dutiyopakkhaṭe yasmā, vattabbaṃ natthi kiñcipi;

Since there is nothing to say in the second account of making an offer; therefore the judgment is similar to the one immediately before.

Dutiyopakkhaṭakathā.

The Second Account of Making an Offer.

647.

647.

Raññā vā rājabhoggena, bhikkhumuddissamābhataṃ;

It is not permissible to take gold and other unacceptable things that are brought for a bhikkhu by a king or with royal property.

648.

648.

Rajataṃ jātarūpaṃ vā, attano vā parassa vā;

It is not permissible to take any silver or gold that is given for his own or another's sake.

649.

649.

Aññassatthāya niddiṭṭhaṃ, bhikkhuno paṭiggaṇhato;

For a bhikkhu who receives what is specified for another's sake, in the Mahāpaccariya.

650.

650.

Netvā akappiyaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ, itthaṃ koci sace vade;

If someone brings unacceptable goods and says thus: "I will give this to the Saṅgha, to an individual, or to a group.

651.

651.

Ārāmaṃ vā vihāraṃ vā, cetiyaṃ vā karohi’’ti;

Or make an ārāma, a vihāra, or a cetiya"; it is not permissible for all to accept that object.

652.

652.

Anāmasitvā saṅghaṃ vā, gaṇaṃ vā puggalampi vā;

Without consulting the Saṅgha, the group, or the individual, if they say "We will give it to the cetiya or the vihāra."

653.

653.

Taṃ hiraññaṃ suvaṇṇaṃ vā, nisedhetuṃ na vaṭṭati;

It is not permissible to refuse that silver or gold; it should be said to the ārāmikas, "These people are speaking thus."

654.

654.

Rajataṃ jātarūpaṃ vā, saṅghassa paṭiggaṇhato;

There is a nissaggiya offense for one who receives silver or gold for the Saṅgha, and a dukkaṭa for using it.

655.

655.

Taḷākassa ca khettattā, sassuppattinidānato;

It is not permissible for a bhikkhu to take or use a pond, because it is a field, because it is a source of grain production.

656.

656.

‘‘Cattāro paccaye saṅgho, gaṇo vā paribhuñjatu’’;

It is all permissible if he speaks thus and gives it: "Let the Saṅgha or the group use the four supports."

657.

657.

Kārāpeti ca kedāre, chindāpetvā vanaṃ pana;

And he has rice-fields made, and having cut down a forest; he also takes what is extra in the old rice-fields.

658.

658.

Aparicchinnabhāgasmiṃ, navasassepi ‘‘ettakaṃ;

If, in an unapportioned share, he says "Give such and such a share" even in new grain, and he collects kahāpaṇas.

659.

659.

Vatvā akappiyaṃ vācaṃ, ‘‘kasatha vapathā’’ti ca;

Having spoken unacceptable words, "Plow and sow"; everything produced by all of them becomes completely unacceptable.

660.

660.

‘‘Ettako nāma bhāgoti, ettikāya ca bhūmiyā’’;

If he establishes land, saying "Such and such is the share, for such and such a piece of land," without saying "Plow," etc.

661.

661.

Sayameva pamāṇassa, jānanatthaṃ tu bhūmiyā;

He himself measures the field with a rope or a stick to know the size or to know the area.

662.

662.

Khale vā rakkhati ṭhatvā, khalatopi tato puna;

Or, standing in the threshing floor, he guards the grain, and then again from the threshing floor, he has the rice removed; this is unacceptable for him.

663.

663.

‘‘Ettakehi ca vīhīhi, idaṃ āharathā’’ti ca;

If he says, "Bring this much with this much rice," and they bring it as he has said, that is unacceptable for him.

664.

664.

‘‘Ettakena hiraññena, idamāharathā’’ti ca;

If he says, "Bring this with this much money," and they bring what he has said, that is unacceptable for all.

665.

665.

Pesakārakadāsaṃ vā, aññaṃ vā rajakādisu;

Giving a messenger-slave or another in the launderer's group, in the name of the ārāmikas, it is allowable to accept.

666.

666.

‘‘Gāvo demā’’ti vuttepi, gahetuṃ na ca vaṭṭati;

Even if it is said, "We give cows," it is not allowable to accept; it is allowable if it is said, "We give (cows) for the purpose of enjoying the five products of a cow."

667.

667.

Ajikādīsu eseva, nayo ñeyyo vibhāvinā;

This same method should be understood by the wise one regarding goats and so on; it is allowable to accept everything with acceptable language.

668.

668.

Hatthiṃ vā mahisaṃ assaṃ, goṇaṃ kukkuṭasūkaraṃ;

If humans offer an elephant, a buffalo, a horse, a bull, a chicken, or a pig, it is not allowable to accept.

669.

669.

Paṭisiddhepi saṅghassa, datvā gacchati ce pana;

Even if, having given to the Sangha, he leaves despite the prohibition, it is allowable for some to accept by giving the original (item) to the Sangha.

670.

670.

‘‘Khettaṃ vatthuṃ taḷākaṃ vā, dema goajikādikaṃ;

Even if it is said, "We give a field, a site, or a pond, or cows, goats, etc., to the monastery," it is not allowable to refuse.

671.

671.

Tikkhattuṃ codanā vuttā, chakkhattuṃ ṭhānamabravi;

The accusation is said three times, the basis was spoken six times; if he accuses six times, the accusation is doubled in its basis.

672.

672.

Anāpatti acodetvā, laddhe ummattakādino;

There is no offense for not accusing, having received (something) from an insane person, etc.; all the originations, etc., are considered equal to sañcaritta.

Rājasikkhāpadakathā.

Rājasikkhāpadakathā.

Cīvaravaggo paṭhamo.

Cīvaravaggo paṭhamo.

673.

673.

Ekenāpi ca missetvā, santhataṃ kosiyaṃsunā;

Even by mixing with one part of interwoven silk, there is an offense entailing forfeiture for the bhikkhu who has it made.

674.

674.

Paratthāya karontassa, kārāpentassa santhataṃ;

For one having a santhata made while acting for the sake of another, and for one using (a santhata) obtained after it was made by another, there is a dukkata.

675.

675.

Anāpatti vitānaṃ vā, bhūmattharaṇameva vā;

There is no offense for one making an awning or a floor covering, or a cushion or a pillow, or for one who is an initial doer.

Kosiyakathā.

Kosiyakathā.

676.

676.

Kāḷakeḷakalomānaṃ, suddhānaṃ santhataṃ sace;

If one makes a santhata of pure black wool or pure wool of another color, there is an offense for him; the remainder is like the first.

Suddhakāḷakakathā.

Suddhakāḷakakathā.

677.

677.

Anāpatti tulaṃ vāpi, bahuṃ vā sabbameva vā;

There is no offense for one making (a santhata) of an equal amount, a large amount, or all of white or brown wool, having taken it.

678.

678.

Anukkamena etāni, santhatāni ca tīṇipi;

Having forfeited these three santhata in due order, and even having obtained them again, there is a dukkata for one who uses them.

679.

679.

Samuṭṭhānādayo sabbe, sañcarittasamā matā;

All the originations, etc., are considered equal to sañcaritta; but for these three, the third is kriyākriya.

Dvebhāgakathā.

Dvebhāgakathā.

680.

680.

Channaṃ orena vassānaṃ, karontassa ca santhataṃ;

For one having a santhata made within six years, there is an offense entailing forfeiture, except by establishing the bhikkhus' agreement.

681.

681.

Anāpatti paratthāya, kārāpeti karoti vā;

There is no offense for one having it made or making it for the sake of another, or for one obtaining and using what was made by another.

682.

682.

Chabbassāni karontassa, taduddhampi ca santhataṃ;

For one making (a santhata) for six years, and also for one (making it) beyond that, having forfeited it in an awning, a wall hanging, or a screen, and also having made it.

Chabbassakathā.

Chabbassakathā.

683.

683.

Anāpatti anādāya, asante santhate pana;

There is no offense if a santhata is not taken and there is no santhata, for having (one) made for the sake of another, and for using what has been made.

684.

684.

Anādānavasenassa, sugatassa vidatthiyā;

This kriyākriya was spoken by the Teacher through the non-acceptance, by the sugata's span, and by the making.

685.

685.

Samuṭṭhānādayo sabbe, sañcarittasamā matā;

All the originations, etc., are considered equal to sañcaritta; no difference is found even in the immediately preceding one.

Nisīdanasanthatakathā.

Nisīdanasanthatakathā.

686.

686.

Gacchante pana yāne vā, hatthiassādikesu vā;

If, while going in a vehicle, or on elephants, horses, etc., he places hairs (there) without the owner's knowledge.

687.

687.

Tiyojanamatītesu, tesu āpatti bhikkhuno;

If they go beyond three yojanas, there is an offense for the bhikkhu; if they do not go, the same method applies to placing them there.

688.

688.

Yāne pana agacchante, asse vā hatthipiṭṭhiyaṃ;

But if, in a vehicle that is not going, or on the back of a horse or elephant, having placed (hairs) and then mounting, he drives (it), it is allowable.

689.

689.

kurundaṭṭhakathāyahi;

According to the Kurundī commentary, having someone else carry it contradicts (the rule).

690.

690.

Kaṇṇacchiddesu lomāni, pakkhipitvāpi gacchato;

It is said that if, having put hairs in the ear holes, he goes, there is an offense, depending on the number of hairs.

691.

691.

Suttakena ca bandhitvā, ṭhapitaṃ pana vaṭṭati;

But it is allowable if (the hairs are) tied with string and placed; an offense is declared for one carrying (the hairs) having made a braid.

692.

692.

Suṅkaghātaṃ anuppatvā, corādīhi upadduto;

If, having encountered a customs barrier, or being troubled by thieves, etc., or whatever else is done, there is an offense if he goes (further).

693.

693.

Tiyojanaṃ harantassa, ūnakaṃ vā tiyojanaṃ;

For one carrying (hairs) for three yojanas, or less than three yojanas, likewise for one carrying (them) back, it is those same three yojanas.

694.

694.

Nivāsatthāya vā gantvā, harantassa tato paraṃ;

For one going for lodging, carrying (hairs) beyond that, or for one obtaining and carrying what was cut off or discarded.

695.

695.

Harāpentassa aññena, harato katabhaṇḍakaṃ;

It is declared that there is no offense for one having (hairs) carried by another, for one carrying a katabhaṇḍa, and likewise for the insane, etc.

696.

696.

Idaṃ pana samuṭṭhānaṃ, kāyato kāyacittato;

Now, this origination is from the body, from body-and-mind, without mind, bodily action, three minds, and three feelings.

Eḷakalomakathā.

Eḷakalomakathā.

697.

697.

Samuṭṭhānādinā saddhiṃ, lomadhovāpanampi ca;

The washing of goat's wool, along with the originations, etc., is considered equal to the washing of an old robe.

Eḷakalomadhovāpanakathā.

Eḷakalomadhovāpanakathā.

698.

698

Gaṇheyya vā gaṇhāpeyya, rajataṃ jātarūpakaṃ;

He should not accept or have accepted silver or gold; having forfeited it, the bhikkhu must declare (the offense).

699.

699.

Rajataṃ jātarūpañca, ubhinnaṃ māsakopi ca;

Silver, gold, and even a māsaka of both: this fourfold item brings about forfeiture.

700.

700.

Muttā maṇi silā saṅkho, pavāḷaṃ lohitaṅkako;

Pearls, gems, stones, conch shells, coral, red arsenic,

701.

701.

Khettaṃ vatthuṃ taḷākañca, dāsidāsādikaṃ pana;

masāragalla, grains, and the seven (kinds of animals) beginning with cows and buffaloes;

702.

702.

Muggamāsādikaṃ sabbaṃ, sappiādīni taṇḍulā;

fields, sites, ponds, and slaves, male and female: these items are declared by the great sage (to entail) only a dukkata.

703.

703.

Tatthattano panatthāya, vatthuṃ nissaggiyassa hi;

All (kinds of beans) beginning with green grams and kidney beans, ghee, etc., rice, thread, cloth, plows, plowshares, and allowable items, etc.:

704.

704.

Saṅghādīnaṃ tamatthāya, gaṇhato dukkaṭaṃ tathā;

the bhikkhu who accepts an item for his own sake which (is subject to) forfeiture, there is forfeiture for him.

705.

705.

Sace kahāpaṇādīnaṃ, sahassaṃ paṭigaṇhati;

Likewise, there is a dukkata for one accepting (an item) for the sake of the Sangha, etc.; even an item of dukkata is a dukkata for every purpose.

706.

706.

Tathā sithilabaddhesu, thavikādīsu rūpato;

If he accepts a thousand of kahāpaṇas, etc., the reckoning of the offenses is the reckoning of the items.

707.

707.

‘‘Idaṃ ayyassa hotū’’ti, vutte vā pana kenaci;

Likewise, regarding money in loosely or tightly bound purses, etc., according to the Mahāpaccariya,

708.

708.

Paṭikkhittepi taṃ vatthuṃ, ṭhapetvā yadi gacchati;

if someone says, "Let this be for the venerable one," even if he wants to accept, he should certainly refuse.

709.

709.

‘‘Āharedamidaṃ gaṇha, idaṃ dehīdha nikkhipa’’;

Even if, having refused, he leaves that item (there), it should be protected in such a way that it is not destroyed.

710.

710.

Ṭhapetvā rūpiyaggāhaṃ, nissaṭṭhaparivattitaṃ;

It is not allowable for a bhikkhu to say, "Bring this, take this, give this, put this here," (if it is) unacceptable.

711.

711.

Attano pattabhāgampi, paṭiggāhakabhikkhuno;

Except for accepting money that has been forfeited and exchanged, all should use (it), having divided (it), such as ghee, etc.

712.

712.

Yaṃ kiñci pana sambhūtaṃ, paccayaṃ vatthuto tato;

It is not allowable to take even the portion of almsbowl of the bhikkhu who accepts (the money), or to use (anything) obtained from elsewhere.

713.

713.

Ajjhārāme anāpatti, tamajjhāvasathepi vā;

Whatever arises from that item as a requisite, there is an offense of dukkata for the bhikkhu who uses (it).

714.

714.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, rūpiyanti arūpiye;

There is no offense in the vicinity of a monastery or in that vicinity of a dwelling, for a bhikkhu placing (money), having accepted it or having had it accepted.

715.

715.

Samuṭṭhānādayo sabbe, sañcarittasamā matā;

In the case of money, a triple pācittiya was spoken in regard to what is non-money; there is an offense of dukkata for one who is certain or doubtful.

Rūpiyapaṭiggahaṇakathā.

Rūpiyapaṭiggahaṇakathā.

716.

716.

Vatthuṃ nissaggiyassāpi, vatthuṃ vā dukkaṭassa ca;

Whatever item (is subject to) forfeiture, or whatever item (entails) a dukkata, or whatever item is allowable, (if one exchanges it) with an item (subject to) forfeiture.

717.

717.

Vatthunā dukkaṭassāpi, vatthuṃ nissaggiyassa vā;

or with an item of dukkata, or an item (subject to) forfeiture, (if one exchanges it) with an allowable item,

718.

718.

Dukkaṭassa ca vatthuṃ vā, vatthuṃ vā kappiyassa ca;

or whatever item (entails) a dukkata, or whatever item is allowable, (if one exchanges it) with an item of dukkata, there is a dukkata.

719.

719.

Vatthunā kappiyassāpi, tathā dukkaṭavatthukaṃ;

Whatever item is allowable, likewise (if one exchanges) an item involving dukkata, there is an offense of dukkata for him who exchanges it.

720.

720.

Vatthuno dukkaṭassāpi, tathā nissaggiyassa ca;

The acceptance of an item of dukkata, likewise of an item (subject to) forfeiture, was previously prohibited; with this is the exchange.

721.

721.

Rūpiyanti ca saññissa, vimatissa arūpiye;

For one who is certain regarding money, or is doubtful regarding what is not money, there are two dukkata for him who intends to give money.

722.

722.

Arūpiyanti saññissa, anāpatti arūpiye;

There is no offense for one who is certain regarding what is not money; likewise, for one saying, "Take this and give (that)," with the five.

723.

723.

Sesaṃ anantareneva, samuṭṭhānādikaṃ samaṃ;

The remainder is the same as the immediately preceding origination, etc.; this is the origination of action, this alone is the distinction.

Rūpiyasaṃvohārakathā.

Rūpiyasaṃvohārakathā.

724.

724.

Kappiyaṃ kappiyeneva, parivattayato pana;

For one exchanging an allowable item with an allowable item, there is an offense entailing forfeiture, except for co-religionists.

725.

725.

Akappiyassa vatthussa, teneva parivattanaṃ;

It is stated that the exchange of an unacceptable item with that same item does not occur, including buying and selling.

726.

726.

Tasmā mātāpitūnampi, vatthuṃ yaṃ kiñci kappiyaṃ;

Therefore, for one saying to his parents, "Give this with that," regarding whatever allowable item (they have), there is a dukkata.

727.

727.

Sakaṃ vā deti ce bhaṇḍaṃ, evaṃ vatvāna mātuyā;

If, having said thus to his mother, he gives his own goods, or if he himself takes goods from his mother in that way, there is a dukkata.

728.

728.

Sahatthaṃ parabhaṇḍasmiṃ, parahatthañca attano;

When another's goods come into his own hand, and his own goods come into another's hand, forfeiture is declared.

729.

729.

‘‘Gahetvā vā idaṃ nāma, bhuñjitvā odanaṃ imaṃ;

It is not allowable to say, "Having taken this, having eaten this rice, do this."

730.

730.

Vighāsādamathaññaṃ vā, ‘‘bhuñjitvā odanaṃ imaṃ;

For one saying, "Having eaten this rice, after the leavings," or, "Bring bark, or a creeper, or a piece of wood, or just wood,"

731.

731.

Āharā’’ti vadantassa, vatthūnaṃ gaṇanāvasā;

depending on the number of items, there are offenses for that bhikkhu in buying and selling.

732.

732.

‘‘Imañca yāguṃ piva bhuñja bhattaṃ;

“Drink this gruel, eat this rice; You have eaten, you will eat, eat this; Rice, do this work with this name;” It is indeed proper to say thus.

733.

733.

Bhūmiyā sodhane vāpi, limpane vatthadhovane;

Also in cleaning the ground, plastering, washing clothes; Here, even if there is no other, an article should be discarded.

734.

734.

Nissaggiye ca vatthumhi, naṭṭhe bhuttepi vā yathā;

When an object subject to Nissaggiya is lost or consumed, The offense must be confessed, so must this one be confessed.

735.

735.

‘‘Imināva imaṃ nāma, gahetvā dehi me’’iti;

“Take this and give it to me with this name;” He indicates no offense, except the owner of the goods.

736.

736.

‘‘Idaṃ mamatthi attho me, iminā’’ti ca bhāsato;

“This is mine, I have a need, with this;” The rest is the same, without interruption, from arising, etc.

Kayavikkayakathā.

Discourse on buying and selling.

Kosiyavaggo dutiyo.

The Second Chapter on Kosiyas.

737.

737.

Mattikāyomayā pattā, kappiyā jātito duve;

Earthenware or iron bowls, two are allowable by origin; Three colors of the bowl, excellent, medium, and inferior.

738.

738.

Dvinnaṃ taṇḍulanāḷīnaṃ, bhattaṃ magadhanāḷiyā;

Rice from two nāḷis of rice grains, by the Magadhan nāḷi; And a quarter part for eating, and relish suitable to that.

739.

739.

Ukkaṭṭhonāma so patto, yo taṃ sabbaṃ tu gaṇhati;

Excellent is that bowl, which holds all that; Medium is half of that, and inferior is half of that.

740.

740.

Ukkaṭṭhassa ca ukkaṭṭho, tassevomakamajjhimā;

Of the excellent, the excellent, then the inferior and medium; Thus, among the medium and inferior, there are indeed nine bowls.

741.

741.

Ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭhako tesu, apatto omakomako;

Among those, the excellent-excellent is unsuited, the inferior-inferior is unsuited; Therefore, they do not go to determination, nor to assigning.

742.

742.

Sesaṃ sattavidhaṃ pattaṃ, pattalakkhaṇasaṃyutaṃ;

The remaining seven kinds of bowls, endowed with the characteristics of a bowl; Having determined and assigned them, the wise one should use them.

743.

743.

Dasāhaparamaṃ kālaṃ, dhāreyya atirekato;

For a maximum of ten days, he may keep it in excess; When he exceeds that, the bowl becomes subject to Nissaggiya.

744.

744.

Yaṃ pattaṃ na vikappeti, yaṃ nādhiṭṭheti vā pana;

The bowl which he does not assign, or which he does not determine; That bowl is described as excess by those skilled in the Vinaya.

745.

745.

Vattabbaṃ tu ‘‘imaṃ pattaṃ, adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti sammukhe;

It should be said, “I determine this bowl,” in its presence; “This bowl” from a distance, this is the method even in retracting.

746.

746.

Ābhogaṃ manasā katvā, katvā kāyavikārakaṃ;

Having made a mental occupation, having made a bodily change; Determination of the bowl is declared even by the body.

747.

747.

Patto jahatidhiṭṭhānaṃ, dānabhedakanāsato;

The bowl abandons determination, by the destruction of giving; By bewilderment, lifting, direct change, and seizing.

748.

748.

Kaṅgusitthappamāṇena, khenādhiṭṭhānamujjhati;

By a hole the size of a kaṅgu seed, determination is removed; Having covered it, he should determine it, with iron powder or varnish.

749.

749.

Yo hi nissaggiyaṃ pattaṃ, anissajjeva bhuñjati;

He who uses a bowl subject to Nissaggiya without relinquishing it; A dukkaṭa offense is specified for him, having eaten, washing, and in washing.

750.

750.

Suvaṇṇamaṇipatto ca, veḷuriyaphalikubbhavo;

A bowl of gold, jewels, beryl, or crystal; A bowl made of bronze or glass, or also of tin or lead.

751.

751.

Tathā dārumayo patto, tambasajjhumayopi ca;

Likewise, a bowl made of wood, or made of copper and solder; Eleven kinds of bowls are mentioned, which are the basis for a dukkaṭa offense.

752.

752.

Ghaṭasīsakaṭāho ca, tumbaṃ cassānulomikaṃ;

A pot, a skull, a potsherd, a gourd, and something suitable for straining; Among those made of copper, a tray is allowable.

753.

753.

Phalikakācakaṃsānaṃ, taṭṭikādīni kānici;

Certain things made of crystal, glass, or bronze, such as stands; Are not allowable for an individual, but are allowable for a lay community or the Sangha.

754.

754.

Yaṃ kiñci sodakaṃ pattaṃ, paṭisāmeyya dukkaṭaṃ;

For any bowl with water, there is a dukkaṭa offense if he receives it back; Having made it suitable, without water, the wise one should receive it back.

755.

755.

Bhikkhuno sodakaṃ pattaṃ, otāpetuṃ na vaṭṭati;

It is not allowable for a bhikkhu to heat a bowl with water; It should not be placed in heat, for one who places it, there is a dukkaṭa offense.

756.

756.

Miḍḍhante paribhaṇḍante, ṭhapetuṃ na ca vaṭṭati;

It is not allowable to place it among rubbish or sundries; But it is allowable if the rubbish or sundries are spread out.

757.

757.

Dāruādhārake patte, dve ṭhapetumpi vaṭṭati;

It is also allowable to place two bowls on a wooden support; The same method applies to supports for staffs and on the ground.

758.

758.

Taṭṭikāyapi coḷe vā, potthake kaṭasārake;

On a stand, or in a bag, a book, or a container of lac; Or even if it is among sundries, or on the ground or in the sand.

759.

759.

Tathārūpāsu suddhāsu, ṭhapetuṃ pana vaṭṭati;

It is indeed allowable to place it on such pure surfaces; For one who places it on a dusty or rough surface, there is a dukkaṭa offense.

760.

760.

Daṇḍe vā nāgadante vā, laggetumpi na vaṭṭati;

It is not allowable to hang it on a stick or a peg; For one who places it on an umbrella, a cot, or a seat, there is a dukkaṭa offense.

761.

761.

Aṭanīsu hi bandhitvā, olambetumpi vaṭṭati;

It is also allowable to hang it by tying it to the crossbars; It is also allowable to place it, having tied it, around the cot.

762.

762.

Mañcapīṭhaṭṭake pattaṃ, ṭhapetuṃ pana vaṭṭati;

It is indeed allowable to place the bowl on a cot or seat support; But it is not allowable to place it, even if full of rice, on an umbrella.

Tayo bhāṇavārā niṭṭhitā.

Three recitations are completed.

763.

763.

Kavāṭaṃ na paṇāmeyya, pattahattho sace pana;

He should not open a door, if he has a bowl in his hand; If he opens it with any part of his body, there is a dukkaṭa offense for him.

764.

764.

Na nīhareyya pattena, calakānaṭṭhikāni vā;

He should not take out movable bones with a bowl; Or even leftover water, for one who takes it out, there is a dukkaṭa offense.

765.

765.

Pattaṃ paṭiggahaṃ katvā, dhovituṃ hatthameva vā;

Having made the bowl a receptacle, to wash it or his hand; It is not allowable to place what is taken out of the mouth into the bowl.

766.

766.

Anāpatti dasāhassa, antoyeva ca yo pana;

There is no offense for ten days, and within that time; He determines, assigns, relinquishes, or it perishes.

767.

767.

Paṭhamassa hi pattassa, paṭhamena mahesinā;

For the first bowl, by the first great sage; All the arising, etc., are considered the same as with the Kathina.

Paṭhamapattakathā.

Discourse on the First Bowl.

768.

768.

Pañcabandhanaūnasmiṃ, patte sati ca yo pana;

When there is a bowl with less than five bonds, if he Should ask for a new bowl, it is subject to Nissaggiya for him.

769.

769.

Bandhanaṃ ekamuddiṭṭhaṃ, dvaṅgulāya ca rājiyā;

One bond is specified, with a two-finger-width line; And four bonds, with an eight-finger-width line.

770.

770.

Pañca vā rājiyo yassa, ekā vāpi dasaṅgulā;

He whose bowl has five lines, or even one ten fingers wide; This bowl is not considered unsuited, beyond that he may ask.

771.

771.

Ayopatto anekehi, lohamaṇḍalakehi vā;

An iron bowl, with many iron rings; Bound, it is allowable if it is smooth, with iron powder or varnish.

772.

772.

Pattaṃ saṅghassa nissaṭṭhaṃ, tassa nissaggiyaṃ pana;

A bowl relinquished to the Sangha, is subject to Nissaggiya for him; If he does not accept it out of compassion, there is a dukkaṭa offense.

773.

773.

Dīyamāne tu pattasmiṃ, yassa so na ca ruccati;

When a bowl is being given, if it is not pleasing to him; He does not take the bowl out of frugality, it is allowable.

774.

774.

Apattassa tu bhikkhussa;

To a bhikkhu who is unsuited;
It is shown that it should not be given;
There, whatever bowl accessory there is;
That should be given to that bhikkhu.

775.

775.

Sace so taṃ jigucchanto, appadese ṭhapeti vā;

If, disgusted with it, he places it in an inferior place; Relinquishes it without occupation, or uses it, there is a dukkaṭa offense.

776.

776.

Naṭṭhe bhinnepi vā patte, anāpatti pakāsitā;

When the bowl is lost or broken, no offense is declared; Or if he takes it, with wealth, for his own relatives, etc.

777.

777.

Sañcarittasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kriyaṃ paṇṇattivajjakaṃ;

Arising from intention, not violating the ordinance; Bodily action, verbal action, three thoughts, and three sensations.

Dutiyapattakathā.

Discourse on the Second Bowl.

778.

778.

Sappiādiṃ purebhattaṃ, bhesajjaṃ paṭigayha hi;

Having accepted ghee, etc., as medicine before the meal; And also with meat before the meal, it is allowable to consume.

779.

779.

Tato paṭṭhāya sattāhaṃ, taṃ vaṭṭati nirāmisaṃ;

From then on, for seven days, it is allowable without meat; When seven days have passed, it is declared subject to Nissaggiya.

780.

780.

Pacchābhattampi gaṇhitvā, katvā sannidhikārakaṃ;

Having also taken something after the meal, and having made it a stored item; It is allowable to consume it without meat for seven days.

781.

781.

Purebhattampi pacchā vā, sayamuggahitaṃ pana;

But what is taken by oneself, either before or after the meal; Should be taken for the body's use, it is not allowable to consume.

782.

782.

Navanītaṃ purebhattaṃ, bhikkhunā gahitaṃ sace;

If fresh butter is taken before the meal by a bhikkhu; And an unordained person heats it and gives it, it is allowable with meat.

783.

783.

Sayaṃ tāpeti ce bhikkhu, sattāhampi nirāmisaṃ;

If the bhikkhu himself heats it, even for seven days without meat; The heating of fresh butter is not considered cooking with meat.

784.

784.

Pacchābhattaṃ gahetvā ce, yena kenaci tāpitaṃ;

Having taken it after the meal, if it is heated by anyone; That ghee is indeed allowable, even for seven days without meat.

785.

785.

Khīraṃ dadhiṃ cāpi paṭiggahetvā;

Having accepted milk and yogurt;
If he then prepares it himself before the meal;
The ghee before the meal for him;
That is allowable for the bhikkhu without meat.

786.

786.

Pacchābhattakato uddhaṃ, taṃ na vaṭṭati sāyituṃ;

From after the meal onwards, it is not allowable to consume; Because the bhikkhu has taken the ghee with an object.

787.

787.

Sattāhātikkamepissa, na doso koci vijjati;

When seven days have passed, there is no fault; Because it was said by the great sage, “Having accepted those things.”

788.

788.

Yathā kappiyasappimhi, nissaggiyamudīritaṃ;

As Nissaggiya is declared for ghee that is allowable; Likewise, a dukkaṭa offense is described for ghee that is unallowable.

789.

789.

Sabbākappiyamaṃsānaṃ, vajjetvā maṃsameva ca;

Having avoided all unallowable meats, and also just meat itself; Milk, yogurt, ghee, and fresh butter are allowable.

790.

790.

‘‘Yesaṃ kappati maṃsañhi, tesaṃ sappī’’ti kiṃ idaṃ?

“Ghee is allowable for those for whom meat is allowable,” what is this? Even for choice foods, likewise in the seven-day period.

791.

791.

Nissaggiyassa vatthūnaṃ, paricchedaniyāmanaṃ;

The rule is a restriction on the objects subject to Nissaggiya; And ghee, etc., are not prohibited for unallowable meats.

792.

792.

Navanītepi sappimhi, gahituggahitādike;

In fresh butter and also in ghee, in taking, receiving, etc.; The entire judgment should be understood in the manner stated.

793.

793.

Telabhikkhāya bhikkhūnaṃ, paviṭṭhānaṃ upāsakā;

When bhikkhus have entered for an oil begging-round, lay followers; Sprinkle oil, or fresh butter, or ghee.

794.

794.

Bhattasitthāni vā tattha, taṇḍulā vā bhavanti ce;

If there are grains of rice left over from the meal, or rice grains; Mixed with the sun's heat, it is allowable for seven days.

795.

795.

Tilasāsapatelaṃ vā, madhukeraṇḍatelakaṃ;

Sesame or mustard oil, or castor or ingudi oil; What is taken before the meal, with or without meat.

796.

796.

Pacchābhattakato uddhaṃ, sāyitabbaṃ nirāmisaṃ;

From after the meal onwards, it should be consumed without meat; When seven days have passed for those, the fat is subject to Nissaggiya.

797.

797.

Eraṇḍamadhukaṭṭhīni, sāsapādīni cattanā;

Castor seeds, ingudi seeds, mustard seeds, etc., are husked; Even oil made by taking those, is allowable for seven days.

798.

798.

Yāvajīvikavatthuttā, tesaṃ tiṇṇampi bhikkhuno;

Because it is an item allowed for life, for those three bhikkhus; When he takes it with an object, there is no offense in any case for him.

799.

799.

Attanā yaṃ kataṃ telaṃ, taṃ vaṭṭati nirāmisaṃ;

Oil that is made by oneself, is allowable without meat; When seven days have passed for that, it is subject to Nissaggiya.

800.

800.

Dukkaṭaṃ sāsapādīnaṃ, telatthāyeva bhikkhunā;

A dukkaṭa offense for a monk regarding mustard and other seeds is incurred by a monk if kept for the sake of oil;
But if having taken and kept it, seven days pass, it becomes an offense. (pāci. 239)

801.

801.

Nāḷikerakarañjānaṃ, telaṃ kuruvakassa ca;

Oil from coconuts, karañja, and kuruvaka trees;
Oil from nimba, kosamba, and bhallātaka trees.

802.

802.

Iccevamādikaṃ sabbaṃ, avuttaṃ pāḷiyaṃ pana;

All these and others, though not mentioned in the Pali;
A dukkaṭa offense is incurred if, having taken and stored them, the allotted time passes.

803.

803.

Yāvakālikabhedañca, yāvajīvakameva ca;

Knowing the difference between yāvakālika and yāvajīvika;
Understand the rest here as similar in principle to ghee.

804.

804.

Acchamacchavarāhānaṃ, susukāgadrabhassa ca;

The fat of bears, fish, boars,
Alligators and donkeys; the oil of these five fats becomes five types.

805.

805.

Sabbameva vasātelaṃ, kappiyākappiyassa ca;

All fat-oil, whether allowable or unallowable;
Except for human fat-oil, it is permissible to store.

806.

806.

Vasaṃ paṭiggahetvāna, purebhattaṃ panattanā;

Having received fat, if it is cooked before the meal, with or without seasoning;
It is permissible for even seven days if without meat.

807.

807.

Sace anupasampanno, katvā taṃ deti vaṭṭati;

If an unordained person makes it and gives it, it is permissible;
Even with meat before the meal, after that, without meat.

808.

808.

Paṭiggahetuṃ kātuṃ vā, pacchābhattaṃ na vaṭṭati;

It is not permissible to receive or make it after the meal;
The rest should be understood by the discerning one in the manner already stated.

809.

809.

Gahitañhi purebhattaṃ, madhuṃ madhukarīkataṃ;

Indeed, honey taken before the meal, made by honeybees;
Is permissible before the meal, whether with or without meat.

810.

810.

Pacchābhattakato uddhaṃ, sattāhampi nirāmisaṃ;

After the meal, it is permissible for seven days without meat;
After seven days, there is an offense, depending on the enumeration of the items.

811.

811.

Ucchumhā pana nibbattaṃ, pakkāpakkaṃ ghanāghanaṃ;

That which is produced from sugarcane, cooked or uncooked, thick or not thick;
That juice and so on, all that is called "phāṇita".

812.

812.

Phāṇitaṃ tu purebhattaṃ, gahitaṃ pana vaṭṭati;

Phāṇita, if taken before the meal, is permissible;
Even with meat before the meal, after that, without meat.

813.

813.

Asaṃsaṭṭhena ucchussa, rasena kataphāṇitaṃ;

Phāṇita made from the unmixed juice of sugarcane;
If taken before the meal, it is without meat on that very day.

814.

814.

Ucchuṃ paṭiggahetvāna, katepesa nayo mato;

If having received sugarcane, it is made, this principle is accepted;
After the meal, it is not permissible to taste it.

815.

815

Gahitattā savatthussa, sattāhātikkamepi ca;

Because it was taken together with the sugarcane, even after seven days;
There is no offense for him, even if made after the meal.

816.

816.

Saṃsaṭṭhañca purebhattaṃ, gahitaṃ tamupāsako;

If a lay follower, having taken the mixed one before the meal,
Makes it and gives it on that very day, it is permissible even with meat.

817.

817.

Saṃsaṭṭhena purebhattaṃ, gahitena sayaṃkataṃ;

If, having taken the mixed one before the meal, he makes it himself;
Even if made after the meal, it is permissible for seven days without meat.

818.

818.

Kataṃ madhukapupphānaṃ, phāṇitaṃ sītavārinā;

Phāṇita made from madhuka flowers with cold water;
Is permissible even with meat before the meal, after that, without meat.

819.

819.

Sattāhātikkamepissa, dukkaṭaṃ paridīpitaṃ;

If it passes seven days, a dukkaṭa offense is declared for him;
Milk into which it has been mixed is considered yāvakālika.

820.

820.

Phalānaṃ pana sabbesaṃ, yāvakālikasaññinaṃ;

For all fruits, known as yāvakālika;
Phāṇita is declared to be just yāvakālika.

821.

821.

Pacchābhattampi bhikkhussa, paccaye sati kevalaṃ;

Even after the meal, for a monk, if there is a valid reason;
The kālika ones are permissible, before the meal as he pleases.

822.

822.

Labhitvā pana nissaṭṭhaṃ, taṃ tu sattāhakālikaṃ;

Having obtained and renounced it, that is a seven-day kālika;
It is not permissible to smear it on aruā etc., or to taste it.

823.

823.

Aññassa pana bhikkhussa, kāyabhoge ca vaṭṭati;

But for another monk, it is permissible for personal use;
Having given it up, without attachment, it is permissible to taste it again.

824.

824.

Anāpatti adhiṭṭheti, vissajjeti vinassati;

There is no offense if he determines it, gives it away, it is destroyed;
Or if, without trust, he takes it from an insane person, etc.

825.

825.

Samuṭṭhānādayo sabbe, kathinena samā matā;

All the arising, etc., are considered the same as with the kathina;
By the Teacher from the very beginning, with a constant kathina mind.

Bhesajjasikkhāpadakathā.

Bhesajjasikkhāpadakathā.

826.

826.

Māso sesoti gimhānaṃ, pariyeseyya sāṭikaṃ;

When one month of the hot season remains, he should seek a robe;
When half a month remains, the wise man having made it, should wear it.

827.

827.

Katvā pana satuppādaṃ, vassasāṭikacīvaraṃ;

Having made an initial effort, for a monk who is producing a rains-bathing cloth robe;
At the time approved in the Piṭṭhi (back).

828.

828.

Hoti nissaggiyāpatti, ñātakāññātakādino;

A nissaggiya offense occurs, from relatives or non-relatives;
Likewise, in making a request to them and producing it in that way.

829.

829.

Katvā pana satuppādaṃ, samaye kucchisaññite;

Having made an initial effort, for a monk who is producing cloth at the time approved in the kucchi (belly);
From a non-relative.

830.

830.

Tassādinnakapubbesu, vattabhedena dukkaṭaṃ;

In those cases that were not previously given, a dukkaṭa offense due to the difference in practice;
If he makes a request there, a nissaggiya is declared.

831.

831.

Ovassāpeti ce kāyaṃ, naggo satipi cīvare;

If he exposes his body, naked even though he has a robe;
At the end of bathing, a dukkaṭa offense in an open space.

832.

832.

Ūnake pana māsasmiṃ, atirekoti saññino;

In less than a month, thinking it is extra;
For one who is doubtful about that, a dukkaṭa offense occurs.

833.

833.

Acchinnacīvarassāpi, anāpattāpadāsupi;

There is no offense for one whose robe is torn, even in times of danger;
Or for a monk bathing in bathing houses and ponds.

834.

834.

Sañcarittasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kriyaṃ paṇṇattivajjakaṃ;

Arising from movement, an action that violates the rule;
Bodily action, verbal action, three minds and three feelings.

Vassikasāṭikakathā.

Vassikasāṭikakathā.

835.

835.

Sāmaṃ tu cīvaraṃ datvā, acchindantassa taṃ puna;

If, having given a robe himself, he then takes it back;
With his own recognition, a nissaggiya offense occurs for that monk.

836.

836.

Ekāyeva panāpatti, ekamacchindato siyā;

There is only one offense, if he takes back one item;
Or likewise, if he takes back many items tied together.

837.

837.

Visuṃ ṭhitāni ekeka-māharāpayato pana;

But if he has separate items brought back one by one;
The number of offenses is counted according to the number of cloths.

838.

838.

‘‘Mayā dinnāni sabbāni, āharā’’ti ca bhāsato;

If he says, "Bring back all that I have given,";
With one utterance, many offenses occur.

839.

839.

Āṇāpeti sace aññaṃ, bhikkhuṃ gaṇhāti cīvaraṃ;

If he orders another monk, and he takes the robe;
For the one ordered taking many, there is one pācittiya offense.

840.

840.

‘‘Mayā dinnāni sabbāni, gaṇhā’’ti vadato pana;

But if he says, "Take all that I have given,";
For him, with one utterance, many offenses occur.

841.

841.

‘‘Saṅghāṭimuttarāsaṅgaṃ, gaṇha gaṇhā’’ti bhāsato;

If he says, "Take the saṅghāṭi, take the uttarāsaṅga,"
For each utterance, a dukkaṭa offense occurs for the one ordering.

842.

842.

Vikappanupagaṃ kiñci, ṭhapetvā pacchimaṃ paraṃ;

Having set aside the last item that is not subject to distribution;
A dukkaṭa offense occurs if he has another belonging taken back.

843.

843.

Ṭhapetvā upasampannaṃ, aññesaṃ cīvarādikaṃ;

Having set aside a fully ordained monk, a dukkaṭa offense occurs;
Even if he takes back robes, etc., from others.

844.

844.

Evaṃ anupasampanne, upasampannasaññino;

Thus, regarding one who is not fully ordained, thinking he is fully ordained;
For one who is doubtful about that, a dukkaṭa offense occurs if he takes it back.

845.

845.

So vā deti sace tuṭṭho, duṭṭho vissāsameva vā;

If he gives it back willingly, or out of anger, or just to give trust;
There is no offense for the one taking it back, likewise for an insane person, etc.

846.

846.

Adinnādānatulyāva, samuṭṭhānādayo nayā;

The principles of arising, etc., are just like those for taking what is not given;
Except that here the feeling is painful feeling.

Cīvaracchindanakathā.

Cīvaracchindanakathā.

847.

847.

Viññāpetvā sace suttaṃ, chabbidhaṃ sānulomikaṃ;

If, having requested thread, of six kinds, according to the rule;
He has cloth woven by weavers, it is not permissible.

848.

848.

Sāmaṃ viññāpitaṃ suttaṃ, akappiyamudīritaṃ;

Thread requested by oneself is declared unallowable;
A weaver who has been requested, likewise a non-relative, etc.

849.

849.

Viññattatantavāyena, suttenākappiyena ca;

If a robe is woven with thread requested by a requested weaver;
A nissaggiya offense is declared.

850.

850.

Vidatthimatte dīghena, hatthamatte tirīyato;

If it exceeds one span in length and one hand's breadth in width;
A nissaggiya offense is stated, for both the frame and the plank.

851.

851.

Teneva kappiyaṃ suttaṃ, vāyāpentassa dukkaṭaṃ;

A dukkaṭa offense occurs for having allowable thread woven by that;
Likewise, for unallowable by an allowable weaver.

852.

852.

Ekantarikato vāpi, dīghato vā tirīyato;

Or if there is a difference of one finger-width, either in length or in width;
A dukkaṭa offense occurs for having allowable and unallowable threads woven.

853.

853.

Kappiyākappiyeheva, tantavāyehi ve kate;

If, when allowable and unallowable weavers have done it;
He mixes allowable and unallowable thread, a dukkaṭa offense occurs for him.

854.

854.

Sace akappiyaṃ suttaṃ, vāreneva vinanti te;

If they weave unallowable thread only in the weft;
Having shown the limit, regarding the unallowable weft.

855.

855.

Pācittiyaṃ pamāṇasmiṃ, tadūne dukkaṭaṃ siyā;

A pācittiya offense occurs if it is over the measure, if it is less, a dukkaṭa offense occurs;
In the other case, regarding the woven cloth, a dukkaṭa offense occurs in both cases.

856.

856.

Dvepi vemaṃ gahetvā vā, ekato vā vinanti ce;

If they take two wefts, or weave from one;
A dukkaṭa offense is declared for him for each frame.

857.

857.

Eteneva upāyena, bhede sabbattha sādhukaṃ;

With this very method, in all the different cases;
The different offenses should be understood well by the wise one who knows the Vinaya.

858.

858.

Kappiyo tantavāyopi, sace suttampi kappiyaṃ;

If the weaver is allowable, and the thread is also allowable;
No offense is declared for having the robe woven.

859.

859.

Anāpatti parissāve, āyoge aṃsabaddhake;

There is no offense in straining, in binding the warp;
All the arising, etc., are considered the same as those arising from movement.

Suttaviññattikathā.

Suttaviññattikathā.

860.

860.

Appavāritañātīnaṃ, tantavāye samecca ce;

If, without being prevented, a monk makes an agreement regarding cloth;
With weavers who are not relatives, he incurs an offense, it is not permissible.

861.

861.

Dīghāyatappitatthāya, suttavaḍḍhanake kate;

For the sake of lengthening the length or width, if there is an increase in the thread;
The monk incurs a nissaggiya offense, there is no doubt.

862.

862.

Bhikkhuno ñātakādīnaṃ, tantavāyesu attano;

For the relatives, etc., of the monk, among weavers;
No offense is specified, if it is for the sake of another person with their own wealth.

863.

863.

Vāyāpentassa appagghaṃ, mahagghaṃ kattukāmino;

For one who is having it woven, wanting to make something of little value, of great value;
Likewise for an insane person, etc., the rest is as stated in the preceding.

Pesakārakathā.

Pesakārakathā.

864.

864.

Vassaṃvuṭṭhe yamuddissa, bhikkhū dīyati cīvaraṃ;

The robe that is given to monks, aiming at the end of the rains;
Before the Invitation (Pavāraṇā), that is called an emergency robe (accekacīvara).

865.

865.

Pure pavāraṇāyeva, bhājetvā yadi gayhati;

If, having divided it before the Invitation (Pavāraṇā), it is taken;
The end of the rains should not be broken, if he makes it the property of the Saṅgha.

866.

866.

Anāpatti adhiṭṭheti, antosamayameva taṃ;

There is no offense if he determines it, within the proper time;
If he gives it away, distributes it, it is destroyed, or it burns.

867.

867.

Tassaccāyikavatthassa, kathine tu anatthate;

For that emergency item, when the kathina is not spread;
One month or ten days at most is considered the limit.

868.

868.

Atthate kathine tassa, pañca māsā pakāsitā;

When the kathina is spread, five months are declared for that;
The allowance by the Lord of Sages is ten days at most.

869.

869.

Samuṭṭhānādayo sabbe, kathinena samā matā;

All the arising, etc., are considered the same as with the kathina;
With an initial non-action mind, three minds, and three feelings.

Accekacīvarakathā.

Accekacīvarakathā.

870.

870.

Vasitvā pana ce bhikkhu, pubbakattikapuṇṇamaṃ;

If a monk, having stayed until the full-moon day of the Kattika month;
Keeps a robe in a village, when there is such a reason.

871.

871.

Chārattaparamaṃ tena, vasitabbaṃ vinā tato;

He should stay only six nights without that;
If he stays longer, there is an offense, without the Saṅgha's consent.

872.

872.

Kattikeyeva māsasmiṃ, paṭhamāya pavārito;

If he is invited on the first day in the Kattika month;
According to the later reckoning, when he is connected with a doubtful agreement.

873.

873.

Senāsane vasantova, ṭhapetuṃ ekacīvaraṃ;

Residing in a dwelling, he may keep an extra robe;
With the convergence of four factors, it is declared allowable.

874.

874.

Yaṃ gāmaṃ gocaraṃ katvā, bhikkhu āraññake vase;

Having made a village his alms-resort, a bhikkhu dwells in the forest;
In that village, it is proper to keep it for a month.

875.

875.

Aññattheva vasantassa, chārattaparamaṃ mataṃ;

For one dwelling elsewhere, six nights at most is the accepted limit;
This is its meaning, declared in a concealed way.

876.

876.

Senāsanamathāgantvā, sattamaṃ aruṇaṃ pana;

Having come to a dwelling, for a bhikkhu unable,
Due to being far away, to put it away by the seventh dawn.

877.

877.

Gāmasīmampi vā gantvā, vasitvā yattha katthaci;

Or having gone to the village boundary, and having stayed just anywhere;
Having learned of the availability of robes, it is proper to go.

878.

878.

Evañcāpi asakkonto, ñatvā tattheva paṇḍito;

Even while being unable in this way, having known, the wise one there;
Should quickly take it back to the place, for he remains with an extra.

879.

879.

Vissajjeti anāpatti, vinassati ca ḍayhati;

Relinquishing it, there is no offense; or it perishes, or it is burned;
Or by robbery, or trust, or even by the bhikkhus’ agreement.

880.

880.

Samuṭṭhānādayo sabbe, kathinena samā matā;

All the arising, etc., are considered equal to the kaṭhina;
By the second, the Sage, therefore it is deemed liable to doubt (sāsaṅka).

Sāsaṅkakathā.

Account of Doubt (Sāsaṅka).

881.

881.

Jānaṃ pariṇataṃ lābhaṃ, bhikkhusaṅghassa yo pana;

Knowing of a gain intended for the Bhikkhu Sangha,
Whoever directs it to himself, for him there is Nissaggiya.

882.

882.

Sace ‘‘aññassa dehī’’ti, pariṇāmeti bhikkhuno;

If he directs it to a bhikkhu, saying "Give it to another";
If it is pure and with a pure mind, a pācittiya is declared.

883.

883.

Cīvaraṃ vā parasseka-mekaṃ vā pana attano;

A robe or something of another, or something of his own;
If he directs them together, there would be two pācittiyas.

884.

884.

Saṅghassa pana yaṃ dinnaṃ, taṃ gahetuṃ na vaṭṭati;

But what is given to the Sangha, it is not proper to take;
It should be given to the Sangha alone; for one not giving, there is defeat.

885.

885.

Cetiyassa ca saṅghassa, puggalassapi vā pana;

To a Cetiya, or to the Sangha, or even to an individual;
Or directing a possession to another, there is a dukkaṭa.

886.

886.

Yo panantamaso bhikkhu, sunakhassapi oṇataṃ;

Whatever bhikkhu directs even a trifle,
Owned by a dog, to another dog, there is a dukkaṭa.

887.

887.

Idañhi tisamuṭṭhānaṃ, kriyaṃ saññāvimokkhakaṃ;

This has three ways of arising, is inaction and relinquishment of perception;
It is bodily action, verbal action, three minds, and three feelings.

Pariṇatakathā.

Account of Intended (Pariṇata).

Pattavaggo tatiyo.

The Third Chapter on Bowls.

888.

888.

Tenekavatthuggataraṅgamālaṃ;

Through this, with its waves of instances regarding a single thing,
Taking up virtue, offense, and misfortune;
They cross the great ocean of judgments,
Those who cross over this discernment.

Iti vinayavinicchaye nissaggiyakathā niṭṭhitā.

Thus ends the Nissaggiya Account in the Vinaya Discernment.

Pācittiyakathā

Pācittiya Account

889.

889.

Sampajānamusāvāde, pācittiyamudīritaṃ;

In intentional lying, a pācittiya is declared;
For one babbling or chattering, there is no offense; nor for the insane, etc.

890.

890.

Aññatthāpattiyo pañca, musāvādassa kāraṇā;

In other ways, there are five offenses as reasons for lying;
All the arising, etc., are equal to those of taking what is not given.

Sampajānamusāvādakathā.

Account of Intentional Lying.

891.

891.

Jātiādīsu vuttesu, dasasvakkosavatthusu;

When speaking of birth, etc., in the ten grounds for abuse;
Whether by truth or untruth, by whatever thing.

892.

892.

Yāya kāyaci bhāsāya, hatthamuddāya vā pana;

By whatever bodily speech, or even by a hand gesture;
One not liable to Pārājika, or even a bhikkhu who is liable.

893.

893.

Aññatraññāpadesena, omasantassa bhikkhuno;

For a bhikkhu abusing another, by way of insinuation;
There, a pācittiya offense is declared by the Buddha.

894.

894.

Tehevaññāpadesena, pāḷimuttapadehipi;

Likewise, by way of insinuation, even with words outside the Pāḷi;
Everywhere, for abusing one not fully ordained, there is a dukkaṭa.

895.

895.

Anakkositukāmassa, kevalaṃ davakamyatā;

For one not wishing to abuse, but merely desiring to babble;
Everywhere, for one speaking thus, Dubbhāsita is declared.

896.

896.

Paviṭṭhānupasampanna-ṭṭhāne idha ca bhikkhunī;

Here, a bhikkhunī, having entered a place for the unordained;
Is without offense, if she puts forward the teaching about the meaning and the Dhamma.

897.

897.

Vadato pana bhikkhussa, samuṭṭhānādayo nayā;

But for a bhikkhu speaking, the ways of arising, etc.;
Are stated to be equal and without interval, the feeling here is painful.

Omasavādakathā.

Account of Abuse.

898.

898.

Āpatti bhikkhupesuññe, duvidhākārato siyā;

An offense in tale-bearing among bhikkhus, may occur in two ways;
For one desiring his own affection, or even wishing for the division of others.

899.

899.

Akkosantassa pariyāya-pāḷimuttanayehi ca;

For one abusing by way of circumlocution or with words outside the Pāḷi;
In the combination of speech, there is a dukkaṭa offense.

900.

900.

Tathā anupasampanna-akkosaṃ haratopi ca;

Likewise, for one repeating the abuse of one not fully ordained;
Here, a bhikkhunī stands in a place for the unordained.

901.

901.

Na ceva piyakāmassa, na ca bhedatthinopi vā;

And not for one desiring affection, nor even wishing for division;
For a bhikkhu speaking for the purpose of disparaging the wicked.

902.

902.

Tathā ummattakādīnaṃ, anāpattīti dīpitā;

Likewise, for the insane, etc., it is declared there is no offense;
All the arising, etc., are similar to those of taking what is not given.

Pesuññakathā.

Account of Tale-Bearing.

903.

903.

Ṭhapetvā bhikkhuniṃ bhikkhuṃ, aññena piṭakattayaṃ;

Having excluded a bhikkhunī and a bhikkhu, for another reciting the Tipiṭaka;
Together with the Dhamma, for him there is a pācittiya.

904.

904.

mahāpaccariyādisu;

Except those not established in the Mahāpaccariya, etc.;
Reciting together is productive of offense, indeed.

905.

905.

Dukkaṭaṃ hoti bhikkhusmiṃ, tathā bhikkhuniyāpi ca;

There is a dukkaṭa for a bhikkhu, and likewise for a bhikkhunī;
For a bhikkhu thinking of one not fully ordained, or for one in doubt.

906.

906.

Ekato uddisāpeti, sajjhāyaṃ vā karoti yo;

Whoever causes one to learn the text together, or makes a recitation;
And whoever causes one reciting fluent texts to falter.

907.

907.

Tassa cānupasampanna-santike gaṇhatopi ca;

For him and for one taking the text in the presence of one not fully ordained;
There is no offense in learning, therefore, in reciting together.

908.

908.

Vācato ca samuṭṭhāti, vācācittadvayāpi ca;

It arises from speech, and also from speech and mind together;
This arising is stated, and is known as Pada Sodhamma.

Padasodhammakathā.

Account of Pada Sodhamma.

909.

909.

Sabbacchannaparicchanne, nipajjeyya sace pana;

If he lies down in a dwelling entirely covered and enclosed;
Or in one mostly enclosed, or in a covered dwelling.

910.

910.

Tissannaṃ pana rattīnaṃ, uddhaṃ yo pana rattiyaṃ;

For one sleeping more than three nights, in any night;
Having excluded a bhikkhu, for another, for him there is a pācittiya.

911.

911.

Vatthuṃ yaṃ pana niddiṭṭhaṃ, methunassa pahonakaṃ;

Whatever thing is designated, suitable for sexual intercourse;
By that, there is an offense even with a beast.

912.

912.

Nipanne upasampanne, itaro ce nipajjati;

When one fully ordained has lain down, and the other lies down;
Or when the other has lain down, and the bhikkhu lies down.

913.

913.

Ubhinnaṃ uṭṭhahitvā vā, nipajjanapayogato;

By the act of lying down after both have arisen;
There may be an offense in counting the unordained.

914.

914.

Sace pidhāya vā gabbhaṃ, nipajjatipidhāya vā;

If he closes the room and lies down, or it is closed;
The offense occurs on the fourth day after sunset.

915.

915.

Diyaḍḍhahatthubbedhena, pākāracayanādinā;

That which is surrounded by a wall or a pile of bricks, etc.,
Of one and a half hands in height, all that is called enclosed.

916.

916.

Bhikkhussantamaso dussa-kuṭiyaṃ vasatopi ca;

Even for a bhikkhu dwelling in a canvas hut;
An offense of sleeping together occurs, it is clearly stated.

917.

917.

Sabbacchannaparicchanna-yebhuyyādippabhedato;

Seven pācittiyas here, should be seen by the wise,
Through the distinctions of being entirely covered, enclosed, mostly, etc.

918.

918.

Aḍḍhacchannaparicchanne, dukkaṭaṃ paridīpitaṃ;

A dukkaṭa is declared for half-covered and enclosed;
And fivefold through all the small enclosures, coverings, etc.

919.

919.

Anāpatti dirattaṃ vā, tirattaṃ vasato saha;

There is no offense for dwelling together for two or three nights;
Before dawn, indeed, of the third night.

920.

920.

Nikkhamitvā vasantassa, puna saddhiñca bhikkhuno;

For a bhikkhu departing and dwelling together again;
Likewise, for all the enclosed, all the covered, etc.

921.

921.

Evaṃ anupasampanne, nipannepi nisīdato;

Thus, even for one not fully ordained, lying down or sitting;
The remaining arising, etc., are equal to those of sheep's wool.

Sahaseyyakathā.

Account of Sleeping Together.

922.

922.

Sace tadahujātāya, api yo mānusitthiyā;

If he intends to sleep together, even with a human female;
Who is born on that very day, for him there is a pācittiya.

923.

923.

Dissamānakarūpāya, yakkhiyā petiyā saha;

Whoever lies down for the night with a visible-formed;
Yakkha female, or a spirit female, or a goddess, or a eunuch.

924.

924.

Methunavatthubhūtāya, tiracchānagatitthiyā;

For him, in counting the things, that are the object of sexual intercourse;
With a beast female, there is a dukkaṭa offense.

925.

925.

Idhekadivaseneva, āpatti paridīpitā;

Here, the offense is declared for a single day;
The remaining discernment is similar to that stated immediately before.

Dutiyasahaseyyakathā.

Second Account of Sleeping Together.

926.

926.

Uddhaṃ chappañcavācāhi, viññuṃ purisaviggahaṃ;

For a bhikkhu speaking Dhamma to a woman, above five or six words;
Who is intelligent and possesses human form, without a (male) companion, there is a pācittiya.

927.

927.

Gāthāpādo panekova, ekavācāti saññito;

A single line of a verse is known as one word;
Pada Sodhamma is designated, or a Dhamma commentary.

928.

928.

Channaṃ upari vācānaṃ, padādīnaṃ vasā pana;

For one explaining above six words, depending on lines, etc.;
There is an offense in counting lines, etc.

929.

929.

Nimminitvā ṭhitenāpi, saddhiṃ purisaviggahaṃ;

Even with one created, and standing with human form;
Or with a yakkha, or a spirit, or even a beast.

930.

930.

Ṭhitassa mātugāmassa, dhammaṃ yo pana bhāsati;

Whatever bhikkhu speaks Dhamma to a standing woman;
Above six words, for him there is a pācittiya.

931.

931.

Purise itthisaññissa, vimatissa ca paṇḍake;

For one thinking a male is a female, or for one in doubt, or for a eunuch;
For one speaking more than six words, there is a dukkaṭa.

932.

932.

Itthirūpaṃ gahetvāna, ṭhitānaṃ bhāsatopi ca;

Likewise, for one speaking to those who have taken a female form;
There is a dukkaṭa for yakkha females, spirit females, and beast females.

933.

933.

Purise sati viññusmiṃ, sayaṃ uṭṭhāya vā puna;

When there is an intelligent male, for one rising up himself;
To explain to a woman while seated, or likewise.

934.

934.

Aññissā puna aññissā, itthiyā bhaṇatopi ca;

Likewise, for speaking to one woman about another;
There is no offense with five or six words declared.

935.

935.

Padasodhammatulyāva, samuṭṭhānādayo matā;

The arising, etc., are considered equal to those of Pada Sodhamma;
This alone is the distinction, this is action and inaction.

Dhammadesanākathā.

Account of Teaching Dhamma.

936.

936.

Mahaggataṃ paṇītaṃ vā, ārocentassa bhikkhuno;

For a bhikkhu announcing great or excellent (qualities);
Having excluded a bhikkhunī and a bhikkhu, if it is true, there is a pācittiya.

937.

937.

No ce jānāti so vuttaṃ, ārocentassa bhikkhuno;

If he does not know what is said, for a bhikkhu announcing;
For him in speaking circumlocutions, there is a dukkaṭa offense.

938.

938.

Anāpatti tathārūpe, kāraṇe sati bhāsato;

There is no offense if speaking when there is such a reason;
Or for speaking of the first virtue, etc., for one just beginning.

939.

939.

Ummattakapadaṃ ettha, na vuttaṃ tadasambhavā;

The condition of insanity is not stated here, due to its impossibility;
This arising is considered the Account of Announcing Truths.

940.

940.

Kāyato vācato kāya-vācato ca tidhā siyā;

It may be threefold: from body, from speech, from body and speech;
With skillful and indeterminate, two minds and two feelings.

Bhūtārocanakathā.

Account of Announcing Truths.

941.

941.

Āpattiṃ pana duṭṭhullaṃ, ārocentassa bhikkhuno;

For a bhikkhu announcing a serious offense;
An offense to one not fully ordained, having excluded the Bhikkhu Sangha’s agreement.

942.

942.

Saṅghādisesamāpanno, mocetvā asuciṃ ayaṃ;

Having become subject to Saṅghādisesa, having been freed from impurity;
By arranging an offense by means of a thing, there is fault in speaking thus.

943.

943.

Idha saṅghādisesāva, duṭṭhullāpattiyo matā;

Here, serious offenses are considered as Saṅghādisesa;
Therefore, for one speaking of a serious offense of one who is pure, he incurs a pācittiya.

944.

944.

Aduṭṭhullāya duṭṭhulla-saññino vimatissa vā;

For one announcing a serious offense of one not having a serious offense, or for one in doubt;
Or even offenses that are remaining, there is a dukkaṭa.

945.

945.

Tathā anupasampanne, duṭṭhullaṃ pañcadhā mataṃ;

Thus, for one not yet fully ordained, a serious offense is considered fivefold;
It is not permissible to report a serious offense that is not an act of misconduct.

946.

946.

Vatthuṃ vā pana āpattiṃ, ārocentassa kevalaṃ;

If, however, one is merely reporting the basis or the offense,
It should be understood that there is no offense, according to the agreement of the Sangha.

947.

947.

Evamummattakādīnaṃ, samuṭṭhānādayo nayā;

Thus, for the insane, etc., the principles regarding origin, etc.,
Are just like those for taking what is not given, and feeling is painful feeling.

Duṭṭhullārocanakathā.

The Discourse on Reporting Serious Offenses.

948.

948.

Khaṇeyya vā khaṇāpeyya, pathaviṃ yo akappiyaṃ;

Whoever digs or has [earth] dug, unsuitably,
And causes [it] to be split or splits [it] himself, for him there is a pācittiya.

949.

949.

Sayameva khaṇantassa, pathaviṃ pana bhikkhuno;

For a bhikkhu himself digging earth,
For each stroke, a pācittiya is declared.

950.

950.

Āṇāpentassa ekāva, divasaṃ khaṇatopi ca;

If one orders [someone to dig], it is only one [offense], even if he digs for a day;
But for repeatedly ordering, there is [an offense] for each utterance.

951.

951.

‘‘Khaṇa pokkharaṇiṃ vāpiṃ, āvāṭaṃ khaṇa kūpakaṃ’’;

"Dig a pond or a well, dig a pit, dig a small well";
For one speaking thus, there is no fault.

952.

952.

‘‘Imaṃ khaṇa ca okāsaṃ, idha pokkharaṇiṃ khaṇa;

"Dig this place, dig a pond here,
Dig in this place," it is not permissible to speak thus.

953.

953.

‘‘Kandaṃ khaṇa kurundaṃ vā, thūṇaṃ khaṇa ca khāṇukaṃ;

"Dig a bulb or a kurunda, dig a post or a stump,
Dig a root or a palm tree," it is permissible to speak thus.

954.

954.

‘‘Imaṃ mūlaṃ imaṃ valliṃ, imaṃ tālaṃ imaṃ naḷaṃ;

"Dig this root, this creeper, this palm, this reed,"
It is not permissible to speak, specifying thus.

955.

955.

Ussiñcituṃ sace sakkā, ghaṭehi tanukaddamo;

If it is possible to bail out thin mud with pots,
It should be removed by the bhikkhu, but thick [mud] is not permissible.

956.

956.

Bhijjitvā nadiyādīnaṃ, patitaṃ toyasantike;

If a bank has fallen near the water of a river, etc., due to collapsing,
It is permissible to repair the bank for even four months.

957.

957.

Sace patati toyasmiṃ, deve vuṭṭhepi vaṭṭati;

If it falls into the water, it is permissible even if rain falls;
If four months have passed, the rain will fall into the water.

958.

958.

Pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ soṇḍiṃ, khaṇanti yadi tattha tu;

If they are digging a cavity on a stone surface,
And dust falls first, and then rain falls later.

959.

959.

Sodhetuṃ bhindituṃ anto-cātumāsaṃ tu vaṭṭati;

It is permissible to clean and split [it] within four months;
It is not permissible to repair [it] after four months have passed.

960.

960.

Vārinā paṭhamaṃ puṇṇe, pacchā patati ce rajaṃ;

If it is first filled with water, and then dust falls,
It is permissible to repair it, as the rain will fall into the water.

961.

961.

Allīyati phusāyante, piṭṭhipāsāṇake rajaṃ;

If dust adheres to the surface of a stone slab,
Even then, it is not permissible to repair it after four months have passed.

962.

962.

Sace akatapabbhāre, vammiko pana uṭṭhito;

If an anthill has risen in an uncovered area,
One may repair it as one pleases, even after four months have passed.

963.

963.

Abbhokāse sace vaṭṭho, cātumāsaṃ tu vaṭṭati;

If [something] has fallen in an open space, it is permissible for four months;
The same principle applies to the soil of epiphytes, etc., on a tree.

964.

964.

Mūsikukkara gokaṇṭa-gaṇḍuppādamalesupi;

This same principle is stated for the dirt of mice, dogs, gokaṇṭa insects, and earthworms;
[These are] unconnected to the earth.

965.

965.

Teheva sadisā honti, kasinaṅgalamattikā;

Kasiṇa earth and plow earth are similar to these;
[If] unbroken, connected to the earth, it would be considered natural earth.

966.

966.

Senāsanampi acchannaṃ, vinaṭṭhachadanampi vā;

If a dwelling is uncovered or has a ruined roof,
It is not permissible to remove what has fallen after four months have passed.

967.

967.

Tato ‘‘gopānasiṃ bhittiṃ, thambhaṃ vā padarattharaṃ;

But it is permissible to take [it] with the intention, "I will take a rafter, a wall, a pillar, or a covering."

968.

968.

Gaṇhantassiṭṭhakādīni, sace patati mattikā;

If earth falls while taking bricks, etc.,
There is no offense; there is an offense if one takes the earth.

969.

969.

Atinto mattikāpuñjo, antogehe sace siyā;

If a pile of earth that is not damp is inside a house,
And not rained on, it is always allowable for the bhikkhus.

970.

970.

Vuṭṭhe puna ca gehasmiṃ, gehaṃ chādenti taṃ sace;

But if rain falls in the house again, and they cover the house with it,
If four months have passed, all of it becomes impermissible if it is damp.

971.

971.

Yattakaṃ tattha tintaṃ tu, tattakaṃ hotyakappiyaṃ;

As much as is damp there, that much is impermissible;
Whatever is not damp there, that much is permissible.

972.

972.

Temito vārinā so ce, ekābaddhova bhūmiyā;

If it is moistened with water, and it is all connected to the earth,
It is considered natural earth, and after that, it is not permissible.

973.

973.

Abbhokāse ca pākāro, ovaṭṭho mattikāmayo;

If a mud wall in the open air has been rained on,
After four months have passed, it is called "natural earth."

974.

974.

Tattha laggaṃ rajaṃ saṇhaṃ, aghaṃsantova mattaso;

If fine dust clinging to it is gently scraped off,
And one takes it, sprinkling it with a damp hand, it is permissible.

975.

975.

Sace iṭṭhakapākāro, yebhuyyakathale pana;

If a brick wall is mostly level,
And stands firmly in place, one may repair it as one pleases.

976.

976.

Abbhokāse ṭhitaṃ thambhaṃ, cāletvā panito cito;

It is not permissible to move a pillar standing in the open,
And then take it, having damaged the earth.

977.

977.

Aññampi sukkharukkhaṃ vā, khāṇukaṃ vāpi gaṇhato;

The same principle and fault apply when taking another dry tree or stump,
But not if one lifts it straight up.

978.

978.

Pāsāṇaṃ yadi vā rukkhaṃ, uccāletvā pavaṭṭati;

If a stone or a tree falls after being lifted up,
There is no offense for one with a pure mind, even if the earth is broken.

979.

979.

Phālentānampi dārūni, sākhādīni ca kaḍḍhato;

The same principle is stated for one splitting wood and pulling branches, etc.,
On the ground, [if done] with a pure mind.

980.

980.

Kaṇṭakaṃ sūcimaṭṭhiṃ vā, khilaṃ vā bhūmiyaṃ pana;

It is not permissible for a bhikkhu to drive a thorn, needle, bone, or stake
Into the ground by hammering [it] in.

981.

981.

‘‘Ahaṃ passāvadhārāya, bhindissāmī’’ti mediniṃ;

It is not permissible for a bhikkhu to urinate
With the intention, "I will break the earth with a stream of urine."

982.

982.

Anāpatti karontassa, sace bhijjati medinī;

If the earth breaks while one is not intending [to break it],
It is not permissible to level it or smooth it out.

983.

983.

Pādaṅguṭṭhena vā bhūmiṃ, likhitumpi na vaṭṭati;

It is not permissible to scratch the ground with a toe,
Or to walk about breaking [the ground] with the feet.

984.

984.

Pathaviṃ allahatthena, chupitvā sukhumaṃ rajaṃ;

It is permissible to wash the hand after gently patting the earth
With a damp hand, without rubbing, and then taking [it].

985.

985.

Sayaṃ dahati ce bhūmiṃ, dahāpeti parehi vā;

If one burns the ground oneself or has others burn it,
A bhikkhu who is burning incurs an offense touching the limit.

986.

986.

Ṭhānesu yattakesvaggiṃ, deti dāpeti vā pana;

In as many places as a bhikkhu sets or has set a fire,
In that many places, he incurs pācittiya offenses.

987.

987.

Ṭhapetuṃ bhikkhuno aggiṃ, bhūmiyaṃ na ca vaṭṭati;

It is not permissible for a bhikkhu to place a fire on the ground;
It is permissible to place [it] on a potsherd or a cooking pot.

988.

988.

Aggiṃ upari dārūnaṃ, ṭhapetuṃ na ca vaṭṭati;

It is not permissible to place a fire on top of wood;
If it burns and goes, burning the ground.

989.

989.

Eseva ca nayo vutto, iṭṭhakāvāsakādisu;

This same principle is stated for brick kilns, etc.;
It is permissible to place [the fire] on top of bricks, etc.

990.

990.

Kasmā panāti ce? Tesa-manupādānabhāvato;

Why is that? Because they are not [objects of] clinging;
It is not permissible to set fire to a stump or a dry tree.

991.

991.

Anāpatti tiṇukkaṃ tu, gahetvā pana gacchato;

There is no offense for one who takes a firebrand
And lets it fall to the ground when it is burning in his hand.

992.

992.

Puna taṃ patitaṭṭhāne, datvā tassa panindhanaṃ;

If he then puts fuel on it in the place where it fell,
[It is] stated in the Mahāpaccariya.

993.

993.

Tassāpathaviyaṃyeva, pathavīti ca saññino;

Regarding that very earth, if he perceives it as earth,
And [there is] doubt or uncertainty in either case, a dukkata is incurred.

994.

994.

Anāpatti ‘‘imaṃ jāna, imamāhara dehi’’ti;

There is no offense for one saying, "Know this, bring this, give [this],"
If one is unmindful, and [the offense is] of threefold origin.

Pathavīkhaṇanakathā.

The Discourse on Digging the Earth.

Musāvādavaggo paṭhamo.

The First Chapter, [on] False Speech.

995.

995.

Bhavantassa ca bhūtassa, bhūtagāmassa bhikkhuno;

For a bhikkhu who destroys a being that has come into existence or is coming into existence,
There is a pācittiya, for the sake of something that can be drunk.

996.

996.

Udakaṭṭho thalaṭṭhoti, duvidho hoti so pana;

That [being] is of two kinds: aquatic and terrestrial;
Among these, [there are] sesame seeds, etc., with leaves or without leaves.

997.

997.

Udakaṭṭhoti viññeyyo, sabbo sevālajātiko;

The aquatic [being] should be understood as all kinds of algae;
For one who destroys all of that, there is a pācittiya.

998.

998.

Viyūhitvā tu hatthena, nhāyituṃ pana vaṭṭati;

But it is permissible to part [the algae] with the hand in order to bathe;
For him, all of that place is entirely water.

999.

999.

Udakena vinā cecca, taṃ panuddharituṃ jalā;

But it is not permissible for a bhikkhu to lift it up from the water without water,
For that is a change of location.

1000.

1000.

Udakenukkhipitvā taṃ, pakkhipantassa vārisu;

It is stated in all the commentaries,
That it is permissible for one to lift it up with water and drop it into the water.

1001.

1001.

Jale vallitiṇādīni, uddharantassa toyato;

For a bhikkhu who lifts up creepers, grass, etc., from the water,
Or destroys [them] there, there is a pācittiya.

1002.

1002.

Parehuppāṭitānettha, vikopentassa dukkaṭaṃ;

For one who destroys those uprooted by others, there is a dukkata;
Because they are included in the category of seed-beings.

1003.

1003.

Thalaṭṭhe chinnarukkhānaṃ, ṭhito haritakhāṇuko;

A green stump standing on land
Of a tree that has been cut, which is growing upwards, is included in the category of being-beings.

1004.

1004.

Nāḷikerādikānampi, khāṇu uddhaṃ na vaḍḍhati;

The stump of coconut trees, etc., does not grow upwards;
Therefore, its [destruction] is included in the category of seed-beings.

1005.

1005.

Tathā kadaliyā khāṇu, phalitāya pakāsito;

Likewise, the stump of a banana tree is declared [to belong to the category of seed-beings] if it has borne fruit;
The stump of one that has not borne fruit is considered a being-being.

1006.

1006.

Phalitā kadalī yāva, nīlapaṇṇā ca tāva sā;

A banana tree that has borne fruit is considered a being-being as long as the leaves are green;
The same decision [applies] to reeds, bamboo, and grass.

1007.

1007.

Aggato pana paṭṭhāya, yadāyaṃ veḷu sussati;

But from the moment when the bamboo dries up,
It is then included in the category of seed-beings by name.

1008.

1008.

Indasālādirukkhānaṃ, bījagāmena saṅgaho;

The destruction of Indasala trees, etc., [is included] in the category of seed-beings;
But this should be understood by one skilled in the Vinaya, [when the trees are] cut and placed [aside].

1009.

1009.

Maṇḍapādīnamatthāya, nikkhaṇanti ca te sace;

If they dig [them] up for the sake of pavilions, etc.,
[Their destruction] is included in the category of being-beings when the root or leaf has emerged.

1010.

1010.

Mūlamattepi vā yesaṃ, paṇṇamattepi vā pana;

But even if only the root or only the leaf
Has emerged, their [destruction] is included in the category of seed-beings.

1011.

1011.

Sakandā pana tālaṭṭhi, bījagāmoti vuccati;

Rhizomes, palm stumps, are called seed-beings;
[But] when a new leaf shoot is blue, it is not [a seed-being].

1012.

1012.

Nāḷikeratacaṃ bhitvā, dantasūcīva aṅkuro;

When a shoot like a tooth-pick pierces the husk of a coconut,
Then that [coconut] is called a seed-being.

1013.

1013.

Migasiṅgasamānāya, satiyā pattavaṭṭiyā;

Even when a root has not emerged, if there is a new leaf shoot
Resembling a deer's horn, it is called a being-being.

1014.

1014.

Na honti haritā yāva, vīhiādīnamaṅkurā;

As long as the sprouts of rice, etc., are not green,
Even when leaves have emerged, [their destruction] is included in the category of seed-beings.

Cattāro bhāṇavārā niṭṭhitā.

The four Bhāṇavāras are complete.

1015.

1015.

Ambajambuṭṭhikādīna-meseva ca vinicchayo;

The ruling applies to mangoes, rose-apples, and so on;
Also creepers or anything else that grows on a tree.

1016.

1016.

Rukkhovassa siyā ṭhānaṃ, vikopetuṃ na vaṭṭati;

The tree is the location; it is not proper to damage it;
The same ruling applies to rootless creepers and so on.

1017.

1017.

Pākārādīsu sevālo, aggabījanti vuccati;

Moss on walls and so on is called a plant that propagates from the tip;
As long as two or three leaves have not yet arisen, it is not.

1018.

1018.

Pattesu pana jātesu, vatthu pācittiyassa so;

But when leaves have arisen, it is an object of a pācittiya;
Having scraped it off, it is not proper to remove it from there.

1019.

1019.

Sevāle bahi pānīya-ghaṭādīnaṃ tu dukkaṭaṃ;

For moss, a dukkata for water pots and so on outside;
Inside, it is not permissible, also a little bit on cakes and so on.

1020.

1020.

Pāsāṇadaddusevāla-seleyyappabhutīni ca;

Rock-lichen, ringworm-lichen, seleyya and so on;
Are objects for a dukkata; they are said to be not an offense.

1021.

1021.

Pupphitaṃ tu ahicchattaṃ, abbohārikataṃ gataṃ;

A flowering mushroom is considered as not permissible;
If it is a bud, it is an object for a dukkata.

1022.

1022.

Rukkhe tacaṃ vikopetvā, tathā pappaṭikampi ca;

Having damaged the bark of a tree, and likewise the outer layer;
And also the resin from a palmyra palm, it is not proper to take.

1023.

1023.

Nuhiādīsu rukkhesu, tālapaṇṇādikesu vā;

On trees like the nuhi, or on palm leaves and so on;
One should declare a pācittiya for writing on things that grow there.

1024.

1024.

Pupphaṃ paṇḍupalāsaṃ vā, phalaṃ vā pakkameva vā;

A flower or a yellowed leaf, or a fruit whether ripe or not;
A pācittiya is declared for one who causes it to fall or move.

1025.

1025.

Nāmetvā phaliniṃ sākhaṃ, dātuṃ vaṭṭati gaṇhato;

It is proper to give a fruit-bearing branch, having bent it down, when taking it;
If he himself wishes to eat, it is not proper to give it like that.

1026.

1026.

Ukkhipitvā paraṃ kañci, gāhāpetumpi vaṭṭati;

It is proper to lift up something and have someone else take it;
This is the ruling for one who is picking flowers.

1027.

1027.

Yesaṃ ruhati rukkhānaṃ, sākhā tesampi sākhinaṃ;

For those trees whose branches grow, even for those with branches;
Having made it allowable, there is a dukkata for damaging it.

1028.

1028.

Ayameva nayo alla-siṅgiverādikesupi;

This same method applies to fresh ginger and so on;
A dukkata for seed-plants, since it was specified by the great seer.

1029.

1029.

‘‘Rukkhaṃ chinda lataṃ chinda, kandaṃ mūlampi uddhara;

It is proper to say without restriction, “Cut down a tree, cut down a creeper,
Dig up the bulb, the root; pull it up.”

1030.

1030.

‘‘Ambaṃ jambumpi nimbaṃ vā, chinda bhinduddharā’’ti vā;

Or having taken the name, “Cut, break up, pull up a mango, rose-apple, or nimba tree,”
It is proper without restriction.

1031.

1031.

‘‘Imaṃ rukkhaṃ imaṃ valliṃ, imaṃ challiṃ imaṃ lataṃ;

It is not proper to specify, "Cut, break up this tree, this creeper, this bark, this vine.”

1032.

1032.

Pūretvā ucchukhaṇḍānaṃ, pacchiyo āharanti ce;

If they bring loads, having filled them with pieces of sugarcane;
It is all considered done, when the making allowable has been done for one.

1033.

1033.

Ekato pana baddhāni, ucchudārūni honti ce;

But if pieces of sugarcane are bound together on one side;
When making it allowable, it is proper to pierce the wood.

1034.

1034.

Valliyā rajjuyā vāpi, yāya baddhāni tāni hi;

Indeed, those which are bound with a vine or a rope;
Since they are similar to a container, it is not proper to pierce that.

1035.

1035.

Bhattaṃ maricapakkehi, missetvā āharanti ce;

If they bring rice, having mixed it with peppercorns;
Even for a single grain of rice, it is proper to pierce it.

1036.

1036.

Ayameva nayo vutto, tilataṇḍulakādisu;

This same method was stated for sesame seeds, rice grains, and so on;
For kapittha fruits bound together, one should make it allowable on the husk.

1037.

1037.

Kaṭāhaṃ yadi muñcitvā, anto carati miñjakaṃ;

If, having released the husk, the pulp moves inside;
Having broken up that kapittha fruit, one should have it made allowable.

1038.

1038.

Abhūtagāmabījesu, bhūtagāmādisaññino;

For seeds of what is not a living plant, with the perception of a living plant and so on;
There is an offense of dukkata even for one who is doubtful about it.

1039.

1039.

Atathāsaññino tattha, asañciccāsatissa ca;

For one who has a different perception there, and for one who is unintentional and inattentive;
And for the insane and so on, non-offense has been declared.

1040.

1040.

Idañca tisamuṭṭhānaṃ, kriyaṃ saññāvimokkhakaṃ;

And this is three-arising, action and release from perception;
Bodily action, verbal action, and also three cittas and three feelings.

Bhūtagāmakathā.

The Bhūtagāma Discourse.

1041.

1041.

Kate saṅghena kammasmiṃ, aññavādavihesake;

When an action has been done by the Saṅgha, to one who disputes and harasses;
For one who does that again, there is a double pācittiya.

1042.

1042.

Tikapācittiyaṃ dhamme, adhamme tikadukkaṭaṃ;

A triple pācittiya for Dhamma, a triple dukkata for non-Dhamma;
For one who speaks about an action that has been imposed, there is a dukkata.

1043.

1043.

Āpattiṃ vāpi āpannaṃ, ajānantassa, ‘‘bhaṇḍanaṃ;

For one who does not know that he has committed an offense, if he perceives, “There will be strife,”
There is no fault for the sick.

1044.

1044.

Adinnādānatulyāva, samuṭṭhānādayo nayā;

The arisings and so on are just like those for taking what is not given;
This is said to be inaction and action, feeling is painful feeling.

Aññavādakathā.

The Disputing Discourse.

1045.

1045.

Ayasaṃ kattukāmova, sammatassa hi bhikkhuno;

Just like one wishing to do harm, a monk consented to;
Speaking about an ordained one, he scorns and is annoyed.

1046.

1046.

Tasmiṃ vatthudvaye tassa, hoti pācittiyadvayaṃ;

For him, with respect to those two objects, there is a double pācittiya;
A triple pācittiya for Dhamma, a triple dukkata for non-Dhamma.

1047.

1047.

Avaṇṇaṃnupasampanna-santike pana bhikkhuno;

But to speak disparagingly about a monk in the presence of one who is not ordained;
To anyone at all who is speaking about a monk who is not consented to.

1048.

1048.

Sāmaṇerassa vā vaṇṇaṃ, sammatāsammatassapi;

To speak well of a novice, even of one who is consented to or not consented to;
There is a dukkata to anyone at all in whose presence.

1049.

1049.

Chandādīnaṃ vaseneva, karontaṃ bhaṇato pana;

There is no offense for one who does it because of desire and so on, one who speaks;
The remaining action is considered to be uninterrupted and continuous.

Ujjhāpanakathā.

The Scorn Discourse.

1050.

1050.

Ajjhokāse tu mañcādiṃ, attano vā parassa vā;

Having spread out in the open air a couch and so on, for his own sake or for another’s;
Or even having had it spread out.

1051.

1051.

Nevuddhareyya saṅghassa, uddharāpeyya vā na taṃ;

If he does not remove it himself or have the Saṅgha remove it;
If he departs, there is a pācittiya for that monk.

1052.

1052.

Vassike caturo māse, sace devo na vassati;

If the god does not rain for four months in the rainy season;
It is not proper to also place it in the open air.

1053.

1053.

Yattha vassati hemante, cattāro aparepi ca;

Where it rains in the winter, for four more months;
It is not proper to place a couch and so on there for eight months.

1054.

1054.

Kākādīnaṃ nivāsasmiṃ, rukkhamūle kadācipi;

Never at the foot of a tree, at the dwelling place of crows and so on;
It is not proper to place a couch and so on belonging to the Saṅgha.

1055.

1055.

Aññassatthāya yaṃ kiñci, santhataṃ yadi saṅghikaṃ;

Whatever has been spread out for the sake of another, if it belongs to the Saṅgha;
In whatever place, by whichever monk.

1056.

1056.

Yāva so na nisīdeyya, ‘‘gacchā’’ti na vadeyya vā;

Until he sits down, or says “Go away,”
The burden is said to be the responsibility of the one who spread it out.

1057.

1057.

Sace taṃ sāmaṇerena, santharāpeti santhataṃ;

If he has a novice spread out what has been spread out;
The burden is explained to be an encumbrance for the monk who had it spread out.

1058.

1058.

Santhataṃ bhikkhunā taṃ ce, bhāro tasseva tāva taṃ;

If a monk spread it out, it is his burden;
Until the one who ordered it comes and sits down there.

1059.

1059.

Bhikkhuṃ vā sāmaṇeraṃ vā, ārāmikamupāsakaṃ;

Having sent away a monk or a novice, a park-attendant or a lay follower without asking;
A dwelling place belonging to the Saṅgha.

1060.

1060.

Leḍḍuppātamatikkamma, gacchato paṭhame pade;

A dukkata at the first step when going beyond the distance of a clod of dirt;
A pācittiya is declared at the second time.

1061.

1061.

Ṭhatvā bhojanasālāyaṃ, vatvā yo sāmaṇerakaṃ;

Having stood in the dining hall, saying to some novice:
"Spread out a couch in such-and-such a daytime dwelling place.”

1062.

1062.

Nikkhamitvā sace tasmā, ṭhānā aññattha gacchati;

If, having left from that place, he goes elsewhere;
That monk is explained to be made to do penance (pāduddhāra).

1063.

1063.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, tikātītena satthunā;

A triple pācittiya was stated by the Teacher for what is past, likewise;
A triple dukkata was declared by him for what is individual.

1064.

1064.

Cimiliṃ taṭṭikaṃ cammaṃ, phalakaṃ pādapuñchaniṃ;

Cimili, mat, hide, plank, foot-wiper;
Or a ground-covering, or also an upper covering.

1065.

1065.

Dārumattikabhaṇḍāni, pattādhārakameva vā;

Wooden and clay utensils, or just a bowl-stand;
There is a dukkata for leaving that, having placed it in the open air.

1066.

1066.

Sace āraññakenāpi, anovasse ca no sati;

If even a forest-dweller is not mindful when it is not raining;
Having hung it on a tree, one should go as one pleases.

1067.

1067.

Yathā upacikādīhi, na khajjati na lujjati;

Having done everything in such a way that it is not eaten by ants and so on, and is not ruined;
It is proper to go after doing it like that.

1068.

1068.

Anāpattuddharāpetvā, āpucchitvāpi gacchato;

There is no offense for a monk for having it removed, or for going after asking leave;
When his own property is locked up, or in times of danger.

1069.

1069.

Samuṭṭhānādayo sabbe, kathinena samā matā;

All the arisings and so on are considered to be the same as for the kathina;
This is said to be inaction and action, this is the distinction.

Paṭhamasenāsanakathā.

The First Senāsana Discourse.

1070.

1070.

Bhisicimilikā bhūma-ttharaṇaṃ uttarattharaṃ;

A lotus-fiber mat, a cimilikā, a ground-covering, an upper covering,
A mat, a piece of hide, a covering to spread over, and a seat.

1071.

1071.

Santhāro tiṇapaṇṇānaṃ, seyyā dasavidhā siyā;

A spread of grass and leaves: there are ten kinds of beds;
For whichever monk, in a dwelling that is entirely covered and enclosed.

1072.

1072.

Etaṃ dasavidhaṃ seyyaṃ, santharitvāpi vā sayaṃ;

Having spread out that ten-fold bed himself;
If he departs without removing it, without asking leave.

1073.

1073.

Ārāmassūpacāraṃ vā, parikkhepaṃ panassa vā;

A dukkata at the first step, a pācittiya at the second;
For going beyond the vicinity of the monastery, or its boundary.

1074.

1074.

Senāsanassa seyyāya, ubhayesaṃ vināsato;

A pācittiya is described for going away, having spread out a bed for the dwelling-place,
In an inner chamber, due to the destruction of both.

1075.

1075.

Upacāre vihārassa, dukkaṭaṃ maṇḍapādike;

A dukkata for going beyond the vicinity of the monastery, in a pavilion;
For going away, having spread out just a bed, due to the destruction.

1076.

1076.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, saṅghike dasavatthuke;

A triple pācittiya was stated for ten objects belonging to the Saṅgha;
Likewise, a triple dukkata was declared by him for what is individual.

1077.

1077.

Anāpattuddharitvā vā, āpucchaṃ vāpi gacchato;

There is no offense for one who goes after removing it, or after asking leave;
Or when it is an encumbrance for another, or even when it is his own property.

1078.

1078.

Sāpekkhova ca gantvā taṃ, tattha ṭhatvāpi pucchati;

And having gone dependent on it, he asks after staying there;
All the arisings and so on are considered to be uninterrupted and continuous.

Dutiyasenāsanakathā.

The Second Senāsana Discourse.

1079.

1079.

Yo pubbupagataṃ bhikkhuṃ, jānaṃ anupakhajja ca;

If, knowing a monk who has previously arrived, he does not go around;
If he has a bed made in a dwelling place belonging to the Saṅgha, it is a pācittiya.

1080.

1080.

Pādadhovanapāsāṇā, pavisantassa bhikkhuno;

For a monk who is entering, as far as the stone for washing the feet;
Or for one who is leaving, as far as the couch or chair.

1081.

1081.

Mañcapīṭhakato yāva, passāvaṭṭhānameva tu;

From the couch or chair as far as the place for urinating;
In between here, this place is called the vicinity.

1082.

1082.

Tattha bādhetukāmassa, upacāre tu bhikkhuno;

For a monk who wishes to obstruct there, in the vicinity;
There is a dukkata for spreading out one of the ten beds.

1083.

1083.

Nisīdantassa vā tattha, nipajjantassa vā pana;

There is a double pācittiya for one who sits down there, or lies down;
Likewise, for one who does both.

1084.

1084.

Punappunaṃ karontassa, payogagaṇanāvasā;

A triple pācittiya was stated, according to the calculation of efforts,
For doing it again and again; a triple dukkata for what is individual.

1085.

1085.

Vuttūpacāraṃ muñcitvā, seyyaṃ santharatopi vā;

Having abandoned the vicinity that was stated, or even for spreading out a bed;
In the vicinity of the monastery, or even in the open air.

1086.

1086.

Santharāpayato vāpi, tattha tassa nisīdato;

When one prepares a seat or sits there for her,
A dukkaṭa is stated in every case, and dwelling is also prohibited.

1087.

1087.

Anāpatti gilānassa, sītāduppīḷitassa vā;

There is no offense for one who is sick, or afflicted by the cold;
Or for a bhikkhu in danger, or likewise for one who is insane, etc.

1088.

1088.

Samuṭṭhānādayo sabbe, paṭhamantimavatthunā;

All the arisings, etc., through the first and last object;
Should be understood as similar, this is painful feeling.

Anupakhajjakathā.

The Discourse on Not Creeping Up.

1089.

1089.

Vihārā saṅghikā bhikkhuṃ, nikkaḍḍheyya sace pana;

If a bhikkhu should forcibly evict a bhikkhu from a monastery belonging to the Saṅgha,
Or angrily have him evicted, there is a pācittiya for him.

1090.

1090.

Bahubhūmāpi pāsādā, payogenekakena yo;

Even in a multi-storied building, if he evicts (him) with a single effort,
For him, a single pācittiya is declared.

1091.

1091.

Ṭhapetvā ca ṭhapetvā ca, nikkaḍḍhantassa antarā;

While repeatedly placing (him) and repeatedly evicting (him) in between,
According to the number of doorways, there are pācittiyas.

1092.

1092.

‘‘Nikkhamā’’ti vadantassa, vācāyapi ayaṃ nayo;

This same method (applies) when saying "Leave!";
At the moment of ordering, there is a dukkaṭa for one who orders (it).

1093.

1093.

Sace so sakimāṇatto, dvārepi bahuke pana;

If he, once ordered, passes through many doorways,
There is only one (offense), but if (he passes through) many and many.

1094.

1094.

Tassūpaṭṭhānasālādi-vihārassūpacārato;

From the service hall for him, to the boundary of the monastery,
By body and also by speech, likewise in eviction.

1095.

1095.

Vihārassūpacārā vā, vihārā vāpi cetaraṃ;

From the boundary of the monastery, or from a different monastery,
For one who evicts all the requisites as well, there is a dukkaṭa.

1096.

1096.

Asambaddhesu bhikkhussa, parikkhāresu paṇḍito;

For the requisites of a bhikkhu that are unconnected,
The wise one should declare a dukkaṭa according to the number of objects.

1097.

1097.

Antevāsimalajjiṃ vā, tathā saddhivihārikaṃ;

For evicting a probationer (antevāsi) or a novice (malajji), or likewise a co-resident (saddhivihārika),
Or one who is insane, or for one who is himself insane.

1098.

1098.

Attano vasanaṭṭhānā, tathā vissāsikassa vā;

From one's own dwelling place, or likewise from that of a confidant,
And for their requisites, no offense is declared.

1099.

1099.

Saṅghārāmāpi sabbasmā, tathā kalahakārakaṃ;

From any Saṅghārāma whatsoever, likewise for one who causes quarrels,
This has three arisings, and the feeling is painful feeling.

Nikkaḍḍhanakathā.

The Discourse on Eviction.

1100.

1100.

Majjhimāsīsaghaṭṭāya, vehāsakuṭiyūpari;

For a bhikkhu (sitting or lying down) on a medium-sized head-knocking aerial hut,
Or on a sprung footrest, a bench, or a stool.

1101.

1101.

Nisīdantassa vā tasmiṃ, nipajjantassa vā pana;

For one sitting or lying down on that,
According to the calculation of efforts, there are pācittiyas for him.

1102.

1102.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, puggale tikadukkaṭaṃ;

A triple pācittiya is stated, a triple dukkaṭa for an individual,
Below, without use, or for knocking the head.

1103.

1103.

Avehāsavihāre vā, attano santakepi vā;

In a non-aerial dwelling, or even in one's own property,
Or in a dwelling of a confidant, there is no offense for one who is insane, etc.

1104.

1104.

Yattha paṭāṇi vā dinnā, tattha ṭhatvā lageti vā;

Where cloths are given, or standing there, he attaches (it);
This is considered equal in arising to the eḷakaloma (rule).

Vehāsakuṭikathā.

The Discourse on the Aerial Hut.

1105.

1105.

Yāva dvārassa kosamhā, aggaḷaṭṭhapanāya tu;

Up to the door socket, for placing the bolt,
It should be plastered or have plaster applied by a bhikkhu.

1106.

1106.

Ñeyyo ālokasandhīnaṃ, parikammepyayaṃ nayo;

This same method should be understood for the window openings,
And for the preparatory work; for roofing, two or three layers; (and) while standing on something green.

1107.

1107.

Adhiṭṭheyyaṃ tato uddhaṃ, adhiṭṭheti sace pana;

One may intend (to stop) there; if he intends above that,
There is a pācittiya for him, a dukkaṭa for standing there.

1108.

1108.

Piṭṭhivaṃse ṭhito koci, chadanassa mukhavaṭṭiyā;

Someone standing on the back frame, at the mouth-rim of the roof,
In which place he is standing, a bhikkhu looking down does not see (him).

1109.

1109.

Tasmiṃ ṭhāne pana ṭhātuṃ, neva bhikkhussa vaṭṭati;

It is not proper for a bhikkhu to stand in that place;
For that is a place for a falling monastery, from the place of falling.

1110.

1110.

Ūnakadvattipariyāye, atirekoti saññino;

In less than two or three layers, with the perception of exceeding,
For one who is in doubt about that, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.

1111.

1111.

Na doso dvattipariyāye, leṇe tiṇakuṭīsu vā;

There is no offense in two or three layers, in a cave or a grass hut;
All the arisings, etc., are considered equal to the wandering (rule).

Dvattipariyāyakathā.

The Discourse on Two or Three Layers.

1112.

1112.

Jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ toyaṃ, tiṇaṃ vā mattikampi vā;

If one knowingly pours water with living beings, grass, or even soil,
There is a pācittiya, or has (it) poured by others.

1113.

1113.

Acchinditvā sace dhāraṃ, mattikaṃ siñcato pana;

If, without interrupting the stream, one pours soil,
In even one pot, one pācittiya is declared.

1114.

1114.

Vicchindati sace dhāraṃ, payogagaṇanāvasā;

If he interrupts the stream, according to the calculation of effort;
Even when doing (it) in front, while the soil is flowing.

1115.

1115.

Ekāva ce siyāpatti, divasampi ca sandatu;

There would be only one offense, even if (it) flows for a day;
For one who binds (it) here and there, there would be a calculation of effort.

1116.

1116.

Sace sakaṭapuṇṇampi, mattikaṃ tiṇameva vā;

If even a cartload of soil or grass,
One throws into the water, there is one pācittiya at one time.

1117.

1117.

Ekekaṃ pakkhipantassa, payogagaṇanāya ce;

For one who throws (them) in one by one, according to the calculation of effort;
If the water becomes depleted or turbid in such a way.

1118.

1118.

‘‘Siñcāhī’’ti vadantassa, hoti āpatti dukkaṭaṃ;

For one who says, "Pour it!", there is an offense of dukkaṭa;
For one order, one (offense), even if (he) pours for a day.

1119.

1119.

Appāṇe udake suddhe, sappāṇamiti saññino;

In pure water without living beings, with the perception of (having) living beings,
Everywhere, for one who is in doubt, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.

1120.

1120.

Sabbatthāpāṇasaññissa, asañciccāsatissa vā;

Everywhere, for one with no perception of living beings, unintentionally, or unmindful,
For one who does not know, there is no offense, likewise for one who is insane, etc.

1121.

1121.

Sappāṇakattaṃ toyassa, sappāṇanti vijānanaṃ;

The condition of having living beings in water, knowing that there are living beings,
Without the intention to kill, the watering of grass, etc.

1122.

1122.

Cattārevassa aṅgāni, niddiṭṭhāni mahesinā;

These four factors have been specified by the great sage;
The methods of arising, etc., are just like those of taking what is not given.

1123.

1123.

Idaṃ paṇṇattivajjañca, ticittañcāti dīpitaṃ;

This is declared as an offense by regulation and a three-citta (offense);
This alone is specified here, that is its distinguishing feature.

Sappāṇakakathā.

The Discourse on (Water) with Living Beings.

Senāsanavaggo dutiyo.

The Second Chapter on Lodgings.

1124.

1124.

Bhikkhussāṭṭhaṅgayuttassa, bhikkhunovādasammuti;

The agreement of a bhikkhu to advise bhikkhunīs, possessing eight qualities,
Is here allowed by the Great Sage with a motion and three announcements (ñatticatuttha).

1125.

1125.

Yo tāyāsammato bhikkhu, garudhammehi aṭṭhahi;

That bhikkhu who is authorized in this way, by the eight garudhammas,
To advise one, several, or even the entire community of bhikkhunīs.

1126.

1126.

Osārentova te dhamme, ovadeyya sace pana;

If, while explaining those dhammas, he should advise,
At the conclusion of the advice, there is a pācittiya for him.

1127.

1127.

Aññena pana dhammena, ovadantassa dukkaṭaṃ;

For one who advises with a different dhamma, there is a dukkaṭa;
Likewise for one who is fully ordained, or with the garudhammas.

1128.

1128.

Bhikkhūnaṃ santikeyeva, upasampannabhikkhuniṃ;

For a fully ordained bhikkhunī in the presence of bhikkhus;
Likewise, in a change of gender, a pācittiya is declared.

1129.

1129.

Sammatassāpi bhikkhussa, dukkaṭaṃ samudīritaṃ;

For a bhikkhu who is authorized, a dukkaṭa is declared;
For speaking with a different dhamma, without instructing in the advice.

1130.

1130.

‘‘Samaggamhā’’ti vuttepi, aññenovadato tathā;

Even when (it) is said, "From the united (Saṅgha)," for one who advises with a different (dhamma) likewise;
Even when (it) is said, "From the divided (Saṅgha)," there is a dukkaṭa regarding the garudhammas.

1131.

1131.

Agaṇhantassa ovādaṃ, apaccāharatopi taṃ;

For one who does not accept the advice, or for one who does not retract from it;
Except for a fool, one who is sick, or one who is traveling, there is a dukkaṭa.

1132.

1132.

Adhamme pana kammasmiṃ, adhammanti ca saññino;

In an unlawful act, with the perception of unlawfulness;
In a divided community of bhikkhunīs, there is a triple pācittiya.

1133.

1133.

Tathā vematikassāpi, dhammakammanti saññino;

Likewise, for one who is in doubt about that, with the perception of a lawful act;
Nine pācittiyas are stated, and just as many in a united (Saṅgha).

1134.

1134.

Navakānaṃ vasā dvinnaṃ, aṭṭhārasa bhavanti tā;

Depending on the nine, there are eighteen for the two (Saṅghas);
In a lawful act, there would be seventeen kinds of dukkaṭa.

1135.

1135.

‘‘Osārehī’’ti vutto vā, pañhaṃ puṭṭho katheti vā;

Or one asked (to), "Explain the garudhammas," or asked a question, tells (them);
There is no offense for a trainee (sikkhamānā), or for one who is insane, etc.

1136.

1136.

Vācuggatāva kātabbā, paguṇā dvepi mātikā;

Two mātikās should be mastered verbally, thoroughly;
And four bhāṇavāras from the Suttanta are declared.

1137.

1137.

Eko parikathatthāya, kathāmaggo pakāsito;

One (is) the path of discussion, declared for the purpose of preliminary talk;
Three are the kinds of approval, for the purpose of auspiciousness and inauspiciousness.

1138.

1138.

Uposathādiatthāya, kammākammavinicchayo;

The determination of what is an act and what is not, for the purpose of uposatha, etc.;
Likewise, one meditation subject (kammaṭṭhāna), leading to the supreme goal.

1139.

1139.

Ettakaṃ uggahetvāna, pañcavasso bahussuto;

Having learned so much, a five-year-old, very learned (monk);
Releasing dependence, at will, is able to dwell independently.

1140.

1140.

Vācuggatā vibhaṅgā dve, paguṇā byañjanādito;

Two vibhaṅgas mastered verbally, thoroughly from the aspect of the letters;
In the four Nikāyas, or one book as well.

1141.

1141.

Kammākammañca vattāni, uggahetabbamettakaṃ;

And the acts and duties, so much is to be learned;
If he is ten years old in the very last section.

1142.

1142.

Bahussuto disāmokkho, yenakāmaṃgamo siyā;

Very learned, free to wander in any direction, he is able to go wherever he pleases;
He is able to obtain a following (parisa), able to establish (it).

1143.

1143.

Yassa sāṭṭhakathaṃ sabbaṃ, vācuggaṃ piṭakattayaṃ;

For whom the entire Tipitaka with its commentary is mastered verbally;
He is called very learned, (and) may be an advisor of bhikkhunīs.

1144.

1144.

Assāsammatatādīni, tīṇi aṅgāni dīpaye;

One should show these three qualities, such as being authorized;
The methods of arising, etc., are just like those of phrase-by-phrase (recitation) of the dhamma.

Ovādakathā.

The Discourse on Advice.

1145.

1145.

Pācitti garudhammehi, dhammenaññena vā pana;

There is a pācittiya for advising a bhikkhunī with the garudhammas, or with another dhamma;
When the sun has set.

1146.

1146.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, sammatassāpi bhikkhuno;

A triple pācittiya is stated for a bhikkhu who is authorized;
For advising one who is fully ordained, there is a dukkaṭa.

1147.

1147.

Tathānatthaṅgate sūriye, gate atthanti saññino;

Likewise, when the sun has not set, with the perception that (it) has set;
For one who is in doubt about that, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.

1148.

1148.

Uddesādinayenassa, anāpatti pakāsitā;

No offense is declared for him according to the method of recitation, etc.;
The remaining methods of arising, etc., are similar to the immediately preceding (rule).

Atthaṅgatasūriyakathā.

The Discourse on When the Sun Has Set.

1149.

1149.

Bhikkhuniṃ ovadantassa, gantvā bhikkhunupassayaṃ;

For advising a bhikkhunī, having gone to a bhikkhunī residence;
Except for the garudhammas, it is a pācittiya out of season.

1150.

1150.

Sace asammato hoti, hoti pācittiyadvayaṃ;

If he is not authorized, there are two pācittiyas;
If he speaks when the sun has set, (there are) even three.

1151.

1151.

Aññena pana dhammena, vadato dukkaṭadvayaṃ;

For one who speaks with another dhamma, there are two dukkaṭas;
There is one pācittiya for the bhikkhu due to the night.

1152.

1152.

Sammatassāpi bhikkhussa, hoti pācittiyadvayaṃ;

For a bhikkhu who is authorized, there are two pācittiyas;
Because the garudhammas are the cause, due to the authorization being absent.

1153.

1153.

Tassevaññena dhammena, ovadantassa dukkaṭaṃ;

For him, advising with another dhamma;
There is a dukkaṭa due to being authorized, no offense, one pācittiya at night.

1154.

1154.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, dukkaṭaṃ itaradvaye;

A triple pācittiya is stated, a dukkaṭa in the other two cases;
For advising one who is fully ordained, there is a dukkaṭa.

1155.

1155.

Tathā aññena dhammena, gantvā bhikkhunupassayaṃ;

Likewise, with another dhamma, having gone to a bhikkhunī residence;
All the arisings, etc., are considered similar to the robe-cloth (rule).

Bhikkhunupassayakathā.

The Discourse on the Bhikkhunī Residence.

1156.

1156.

Cīvarādīnamatthāya, ovadantīti bhikkhuniṃ;

For a bhikkhu who is authorized, for saying to a bhikkhunī "Advise for the sake of robes, etc.";
There is a pācittiya for him.

1157.

1157.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, tatheva tikadukkaṭaṃ;

A triple pācittiya is stated, and likewise a triple dukkaṭa;
There is a dukkaṭa for speaking to a bhikkhu who is not authorized by the Saṅgha.

1158.

1158.

Tathevānupasampannaṃ, sammataṃ vā asammataṃ;

Likewise, there is no offense for advising or speaking to one who is not fully ordained, whether agreed upon or not, for the sake of material gain.

1159.

1159.

Tathā ummattakādīnaṃ, anāpatti pakāsitā;

Similarly, no offense is declared for the insane, etc.; here, this is of three origins, and the feeling is painful feeling.

Āmisakathā.

Account of Material Gain.

1160.

1160.

Sace bhikkhuniyā bhikkhu, dadeyya pana cīvaraṃ;

If a bhikkhu were to give a robe to a bhikkhuni who is not a relative, it is a pācittiya offense, except for an exchange.

1161.

1161.

Cīvarassa paṭiggāha-sikkhāpadasamo nayo;

The same rule applies as in the training rule regarding receiving robes; the remainder is to be understood along with the origin, etc.

1162.

1162.

Tattha bhikkhuniyā dinnaṃ, cīvaraṃ idha bhikkhunā;

Here, a robe given to a bhikkhuni by a bhikkhu; there, a nissaggiya offense is indicated, here a pure pācittiya.

Cīvaradānakathā.

Account of Giving Robes.

1163.

1163.

Cīvaraṃ yo hi sibbeyya, sibbāpeyya parena vā;

If a bhikkhu sews a robe, or has it sewn by another, for a bhikkhuni who is not a relative, it is a pācittiya offense.

1164.

1164.

Yaṃ vā nivāsituṃ sakkā, yaṃ vā pārupanūpagaṃ;

Whatever can be worn, or whatever is suitable for covering, is what the great sage intended by "robe" here.

1165.

1165.

Sayaṃ sūciṃ pavesetvā, sibbantassa ca bhikkhuno;

When a bhikkhu sews, having inserted the needle himself, a pācittiya offense is declared for him when removing the needle.

1166.

1166.

Satakkhattumpi vijjhitvā, sakiṃ nīharato pana;

Even if having pierced it a hundred times, but removing it once, a single pācittiya offense is stated, but many due to the effort.

1167.

1167.

‘‘Sibbā’’ti pana āṇatto, avisesena bhikkhunā;

If a bhikkhu, without specifying, orders "Sew!", if he completes everything, there would be a single pācittiya offense.

1168.

1168.

‘‘Yamettha cīvare kammaṃ, bhāro sabbaṃ tavā’’ti hi;

If a bhikkhu orders, saying, "Whatever work there is on this robe, all the burden is yours," and he completes everything,

1169.

1169.

Bhikkhussāṇāpakasseva, ekāyāṇattiyā pana;

Just as with a bhikkhu who is an order-receiver, with a single order, there are pācittiya offenses at each of the many places where orders are received.

1170.

1170.

Punappunāṇāpentassa, anekāṇattiyaṃ pana;

But when repeatedly ordering, with repeated orders, what need is there to say? There would be a trika-pācittiya.

1171.

1171.

Ñātikāya ca aññāti-saññissa vimatissa vā;

For a relative, or for one who perceives a non-relative, or for one who is uncertain, sewing a robe that is fully ordained, there would be a dukkata offense.

1172.

1172.

Ṭhapetvā cīvaraṃ aññaṃ, parikkhārañca sibbato;

No offense is specified for sewing anything other than a robe, or for sewing requisites, or for a sikkhamānā, etc.

1173.

1173.

Sañcarittasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kriyaṃ paṇṇattivajjakaṃ;

It is of mobile origin, an action that is an offense by regulation, a bodily action, a verbal action, of three minds, and of three feelings.

Cīvarasibbanakathā.

Account of Sewing Robes.

1174.

1174.

Bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ, saṃvidhāya panekato;

If a bhikkhu and a bhikkhuni were to agree and proceed together on a road, except for a valid reason,

1175.

1175.

Gāmantarokkame vāpi, addhayojanatikkame;

Whether leaving the village boundary, or exceeding half a league, or in an uninhabited forest, there is an offense for the bhikkhu.

1176.

1176.

Etthākappiyabhūmaṭṭho, saṃvidhānaṃ karoti yo;

Here, one who makes an agreement while standing on permissible ground, a dukkata offense is declared for him as an indication of the agreement.

1177.

1177.

Saṃvidhānaṃ karontassa, ṭhatvā kappiyabhūmiyaṃ;

For one making an agreement, standing on permissible ground, there is no dukkata offense if not speaking as an indication of the agreement.

1178.

1178.

Ubhayatthāpi pācitti, gacchantasseva bhikkhuno;

In both cases, there is a pācittiya offense for the bhikkhu only when going, when crossing the boundary of the immediately adjacent village.

1179.

1179.

Tatrāpi paṭhame pāde, dukkaṭaṃ samudīritaṃ;

There too, a dukkata offense is declared at the first step; a pācittiya offense is declared at the second step.

1180.

1180.

Antarā saṃvidhānepi, bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ siyā;

Even in an intervening agreement, there would be a dukkata offense for the bhikkhu; if there is an intimation at a crossroads, an offense is stated.

1181.

1181.

Asaṃvidahite kāle, vidahitoti saññino;

At a time when there is no agreement, if he perceives there is an agreement, there is a dukkata offense for the bhikkhu in the arrangement itself.

1182.

1182.

Samaye vidahitvā vā, visaṅketena gacchato;

Having agreed upon a valid reason, or going without intimation; no offense in emergencies, or for the insane, etc.

1183.

1183.

Idaṃ catusamuṭṭhānaṃ, kāyato kāyavācato;

This is of four origins, from the body, from body and speech; it arises from body and mind, and from the combination of body, speech, etc.

Saṃvidhānakathā.

Account of Agreement.

1184.

1184.

Ekamujjavaniṃ nāvaṃ, tathā ojavanimpi vā;

If a bhikkhu were to board a single ferry boat or a pleasure boat with a bhikkhuni, it is a pācittiya offense.

1185.

1185.

Sagāmatīrapassena, gāmantaravasena vā;

When traveling along the bank of a village, or through an intervening village, or along the bank of a non-village, if it is half a league,

1186.

1186.

Tathā yojanavitthiṇṇa-nadīmajjhena gacchato;

Likewise, when traveling through the middle of a river that is a league wide, there are pācittiya offenses reckoned by half a league.

1187.

1187.

Yathāsukhaṃ samuddasmiṃ, sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu hi;

As one pleases in the ocean, in all the commentaries; the offense is considered only in the river, not in the ocean.

1188.

1188.

Titthasampādanatthāya, uddhaṃ vā nadiyā adho;

If, for the purpose of reaching a landing place, they are carried upstream or downstream on the river, no offense is declared.

1189.

1189.

Tathā saṃvidahitvā vā, tiriyaṃ taraṇāya vā;

Likewise, having agreed, or for crossing directly; the exception in emergencies is considered the same as in the previous case.

Nāvābhiruhanakathā.

Account of Boarding a Boat.

1190.

1190.

Ñatvā bhikkhuniyā bhattaṃ, bhuñjato paripācitaṃ;

Knowing that food has been cooked by a bhikkhuni, if a bhikkhu eats it, abandoning domestic preparation, it is a pācittiya offense.

1191.

1191.

Bhojanaṃ pañcadhā vuttaṃ, gahaṇe tassa dukkaṭaṃ;

Food is stated in five ways; there is a dukkata offense in receiving it; in all acts of swallowing, there are pācittiya offenses for him.

1192.

1192.

Santakaṃ ñātakādīnaṃ, gihisampāditampi vā;

If it belongs to relatives, etc., or is prepared by a householder, there is no offense for eating it when cooked without a bhikkhuni.

1193.

1193.

Paripācitasaññissa, bhikkhussāparipācite;

For a bhikkhu who perceives it as cooked, but it is not cooked, or if he is uncertain about both, there is a dukkata offense in all cases.

1194.

1194.

Ekatoupasampanna-paripācitabhojanaṃ;

For one who eats food that has been cooked by one who is fully ordained, there is a dukkata offense only through the act of swallowing.

1195.

1195.

Aññaṃ vā pana yaṃ kiñci, ṭhapetvā pañcabhojanaṃ;

Whatever else there is, except for the five kinds of food, there is no offense for eating it, such as gruel, snacks, or fruit, etc.

1196.

1196.

Samuṭṭhānādayo tulyā, paṭhamantimavatthunā;

The origin, etc., are the same as in the first and last subject; this is an offense by regulation, of three minds, and of three feelings.

Paripācitakathā.

Account of Cooked Food.

1197.

1197.

Dutiyāniyateneva, dasamaṃ sadisaṃ mataṃ;

The tenth is considered similar to the second indeterminate rule; this training rule is entirely similar in terms of origin, procedure, etc.

Rahonisajjakathā.

Account of Secluded Sitting.

Bhikkhunivaggo tatiyo.

The Third Chapter on Bhikkhunis.

1198.

1198.

Eko āvasatho piṇḍo, agilānena bhikkhunā;

A single dwelling, a single alms portion, should be eaten by a bhikkhu who is not ill; beyond that, there is a pācittiya offense for eating.

1199.

1199.

Anodisseva paññatte, yāvadattheva bhikkhunā;

In a place designated without specification, a bhikkhu should eat only as much as he needs at one time; beyond that, it is not allowable.

1200.

1200.

Dutiye divase tattha, gahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ mataṃ;

On the second day, there is considered a dukkata offense for taking it there; in all acts of swallowing, there are considered pācittiya offenses.

1201.

1201.

Kulenekena paññatte, saha nānākulehi vā;

In a place designated by one family, or together with various families, only one portion is allowable in different locations.

1202.

1202.

Nānāṭṭhānesu paññatto, yo ca, nānākulehi vā;

Whatever is designated in various places, or by various families, there is no offense for eating in all places in sequence.

1203.

1203.

Paṭipāṭimasesena, khepetvā puna bhuñjato;

Having completely exhausted the sequence, if he eats again, it is not allowable for the bhikkhu, starting from the beginning.

1204.

1204.

Anāpatti gilānassa, āgacchantassa gacchato;

No offense for one who is ill, for one who is coming or going, or for eating once in a place designated with specification, if it is limited.

1205.

1205.

Yāguādīni niccampi, bhuñjituṃ pana vaṭṭati;

It is always allowable to eat gruel, etc.; it is the same as sesame cakes in terms of origin, etc.

Āvasathakathā.

Account of Dwellings.

1206.

1206.

Aññatra samayā vuttā, pācitti gaṇabhojane;

A pācittiya offense is stated for eating in company, except for a valid reason; "a company" is defined as four or more.

1207.

1207.

Yaṃ nimantanato vāpi, laddhaṃ viññattitopi vā;

Whatever food is obtained from invitation or solicitation, one of the five kinds of food is meant here.

1208.

1208.

Bhojanānampi pañcannaṃ, gahetvā nāmameva tu;

Having taken the names of the five kinds of food, if he invites bhikkhus, whether four or more,

1209.

1209.

‘‘Odanaṃ bhojanaṃ bhattaṃ, sampaṭicchatha gaṇhatha’’;

"Accept, receive rice, cooked rice, food," either in these synonymous terms, or in another language,

1210.

1210.

Tato tassa ca te bhikkhū, sādiyitvā nimantanaṃ;

Then those bhikkhus, having agreed to the invitation, whether going individually or together, receive it together.

1211.

1211.

Sabbesaṃ hoti pācitti, gaṇabhojanakāraṇā;

There is a pācittiya offense for all, due to eating in company; receiving together here is the cause for eating in company.

1212.

1212.

Ekato nānato vāpi, gamanaṃ bhojanampi vā;

Going individually or together, or the food itself, is not said by the wise to be the cause for eating in company.

1213.

1213.

Sacepi odanādīnaṃ, gahetvā nāmameva vā;

Even if, having taken the names of rice, etc., or simply naming them, they solicit people individually or together,

1214.

1214.

Nānato vekato gantvā, sace gaṇhanti ekato;

If, going separately or together, they receive it together, even this is described as eating in company.

1215.

1215.

Duvidhassāpi etassa, paṭiggahaṇakāraṇā;

Due to the act of receiving in both these ways, there is a dukkata offense; a pācittiya offense is declared in the acts of swallowing.

1216.

1216.

Samayesu anāpatti, sattasvapi pakāsitā;

No offense in the seven valid reasons stated; likewise, for two or three who have received together and are eating.

1217.

1217.

Muninānupasampanna-cāripattānimantitā;

The Blessed One has declared that making one out of four, when unordained persons, wanderers, or those not invited, are present, constitutes a break in the company.

1218.

1218.

Neva samayaladdhānaṃ, vasenapi hi sabbaso;

A break in the company is to be understood by the discerning, in all ways, even without the valid reasons.

1219.

1219.

Bhojanānañca pañcannaṃ, vasena gaṇabhojane;

Regarding eating in company, based on the five kinds of food, there is no uncertainty; it is possible with gruel, etc.

1220.

1220.

Gaṇabhojanasaññissa, bhikkhussāgaṇabhojane;

For a bhikkhu who perceives it as eating in company, but it is not, or if he is uncertain about it, there is a dukkata offense.

1221.

1221.

Bhojanāni ca pañceva, ṭhapetvā yāguādisu;

It should be known that there is no offense for anything other than the five kinds of food, such as gruel, etc., or in cases of fixed meals, etc.

1222.

1222.

Tathā ummattakādīnaṃ, samuṭṭhānādinā pana;

Likewise for the insane, etc.; this is declared to be similar to the sesame cake in terms of origin, etc.

Gaṇabhojanakathā.

Account of Eating in Company.

1223.

1223.

Bahūhi yo bhikkhu manussakehi;

If a bhikkhu, invited by many people with the five kinds of food, without foregoing the previous invitation,

1224.

1224.

Pacchā nimantitaṃ bhattaṃ, tathā uppaṭipāṭiyā;

Were to eat the subsequently invited food, even a single mouthful, in that reversed order, there would be a pācittiya offense for him.

1225.

1225.

Bhojanānaṃ tu pañcannaṃ, yena kena nimantito;

Having been invited with any one of the five kinds of food, if he eats another food, setting that aside,

1226.

1226.

Tesameva ca pañcannaṃ, bhojanānaṃ mahesinā;

That consecutive meal of those same five kinds of food has been described by the great sage as "paramparā".

1227.

1227.

Yattha khīraṃ rasaṃ vāpi, ākiranti sace pana;

Wherever they sprinkle milk or flavoring, if the food is soaked with it, it would all be of a single taste.

1228.

1228.

Koṭito pana paṭṭhāya, saṃsaṭṭhaṃ paribhuñjato;

From the tip onwards, for one who eats mixed food, this is the mahāpaccariya.

1229.

1229.

Paramparanti saññāya, aparamparabhojane;

Perceiving it as "paramparā", when eating non-paramparā food, or if he is uncertain about it, there is a dukkata offense for eating.

1230.

1230.

Sakalenapi gāmena, pūgena nigamena vā;

There is no offense in a constant meal invitation, even if invited by an entire village, a guild, or a town.

1231.

1231.

Samuṭṭhānādayo sabbe, kathinenādinā samā;

All offenses beginning with samuṭṭhāna are the same as those beginning with kathina; this is said to be doing and not doing, and the food is without apportionment.

Paramparabhojanakathā.

Account of Food Received in Succession.

1232.

1232.

Pūvā paheṇakatthāya, paṭiyattā sace pana;

If cakes (pūva) are prepared for the purpose of a gift, or gruel (manthā) for the purpose of provisions, then by the bhikkhu there,

1233.

1233.

Dvattipattā gahetabbā, pūrā pūvehi sattuhi;

two or three bowlfuls should be taken, full of cakes or parched grain flour (sattu); if he takes more than that, there is a pācittiya for taking it.

1234.

1234.

Gahetvā nikkhamantena, ‘‘dvattipattā mayā idha;

When leaving after taking, the wise bhikkhu, seeing another bhikkhu, should say, "Two or three bowlfuls of cakes have been taken by me here."

1235.

1235.

‘‘Mā kho tvaṃ paṭigaṇhā’’ti, avadantassa dukkaṭaṃ;

There is a dukkaṭa for the one not saying, "Do not accept;" and for the one taking, having heard that, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.

1236.

1236.

Ūnakadvattipattesu, atirekoti saññino;

For one who perceives an excess when there are less than two or three bowlfuls, and also for one who is doubtful about that, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.

1237.

1237.

Yena tattha tayo laddhā, pattapūrā tato pana;

If three bowlfuls are obtained there by someone, then two should be given to the Saṅgha; if two, one should be given, not kept all to oneself.

1238.

1238.

Apaheṇakapātheyyaṃ, avasesampi vā tato;

There is no offense in giving the remainder after taking away gifts or provisions to one's relatives, etc., or to those who are less than them.

1239.

1239.

Gaṇhatopi anāpatti, tathā ummattakādino;

There is also no offense for the one taking, or for one who is insane, etc.; all offenses beginning with samuṭṭhāna are considered the same as those concerning wandering.

Kāṇamātukathā.

Account of Kāṇamātā.

1240.

1240.

Aññena pana pañcannaṃ, bhojanānaṃ pavārito;

If, having been invited for five kinds of food by another, he eats additional food again, there is a pācittiya.

1241.

1241.

Asanaṃ bhojanañceva, hatthapāsābhihāratā;

Eating and food, bringing within arm's reach, rejection by body or speech: invitation is done with these five factors.

1242.

1242.

Odano sattu kummāso, maccho maṃsanti sabbaso;

Cooked rice (odana), parched grain flour (sattu), barley gruel (kummāsa), fish, and meat: food is considered fivefold, definitively specified without elaboration.

1243.

1243.

Odanotattha sattannaṃ, dhaññānaṃ odano mato;

Cooked rice (Odana) there is considered to be cooked rice made from seven kinds of grain; "sattū" is what is called parched grain flour.

1244.

1244.

Kummāsoyavakummāso,macchovuccati odako;

Barley gruel (Kummāso) is barley gruel; fish is called water; meat is allowable meat; this is the decision here.

1245.

1245.

Sāli vīhi yavo kaṅgu, varako godhumo tathā;

Sāli rice, vīhi rice, barley, kaṅgu millet, varaka millet, wheat, and also kudrūsa grain are these seven grains spoken of as dhañña grain.

1246.

1246.

Sāmākāditiṇaṃ sabbaṃ, kudrūseneva dīpitaṃ;

All wild rice (sāmāka) grass is shown by kudrūsa; wild rice (nīvāra) is called sāli rice, varakacoraka is in varaka millet.

1247.

1247.

Sattannaṃ pana dhaññānaṃ, odano yāgu vā pana;

Cooked rice or gruel from seven kinds of grain, joined with the accomplishment of factors, generates invitation.

1248.

1248.

Hatthena gahitokāse, odhiṃ dasseti yā pana;

When the limit is shown in the space grasped by the hand, all gruel (yāgu) here is called cooked rice.

1249.

1249.

Abbhuṇhā pana yā yāgu, uddhanoropitā tanu;

But any freshly boiled gruel, thin when taken off the fire, if it does not show a limit, it does not generate invitation.

1250.

1250.

Puna sā sītalībhūtā, ghanabhāvaṃ gatā sace;

If that, having become cold again, has reached a thick state, it shows a limit; its former thin state does not protect it.

1251.

1251.

Takkadhaññarasādīni, āropetvā bahūnipi;

Having put in many things such as buttermilk, grain juice, etc., and having put in fruits, leaves, and sprouts there,

1252.

1252.

Taṇḍule muṭṭhimattepi, pakkhipitvā pacanti ce;

if they cook it having put in even a handful of rice grains, and if it shows a limit, it generates invitation.

1253.

1253.

Rase dhaññarase khīre, vākiritvāna odanaṃ;

Having scattered cooked rice in juice, grain juice, or milk, if they give it saying, "Take gruel, gruel,"

1254.

1254.

Kiñcāpi tanukā hoti, sañjaneti pavāraṇaṃ;

even though it is thin, it generates invitation; if they give it having cooked it, it is included as gruel.

1255.

1255.

Chupanti macchamaṃsaṃ vā, tanukāyapi yāguyā;

They season fish or meat with even thin gruel; if even mustard-seed size is apparent, there is invitation.

1256.

1256.

Macchamaṃsaraso suddho, saṃsatto rasayāgu vā;

Pure fish or meat juice, mixed juice-gruel, or also meat that is not allowable does not generate invitation.

1257.

1257.

Ṭhapetvā vuttadhaññānaṃ, odanaṃ pana sabbaso;

Having set aside cooked rice from the mentioned grains entirely, cooked rice from bamboo seeds, etc., does not cause invitation.

1258.

1258.

Puthukā vā tato tāhi, katabhattampi sattupi;

Puffed rice (puthukā) or food made from it, or also parched grain flour (sattu), if pure, but not cakes (pūva), never cause invitation.

1259.

1259.

Kharapākena bhaṭṭhānaṃ, vīhīnaṃ taṇḍule pana;

Having roasted vīhi rice with fierce heat, and having pounded the grains, they give that flour; it is considered included as parched grain flour (sattu).

1260.

1260.

Bhajjitānaṃ tu vīhīnaṃ, na pavārenti taṇḍulā;

Unroasted vīhi rice grains do not cause invitation; but the flour of those does generate invitation.

1261.

1261.

Kharapākena bhaṭṭhānaṃ, vīhīnaṃ kuṇḍakampi ca;

The husks of vīhi rice roasted with fierce heat, or also a ball of parched grain flour (sattu), generates invitation.

1262.

1262.

Samapākena bhaṭṭhānaṃ, sukkhānaṃ ātapena ca;

The husks of vīhi rice roasted with even heat, dry and in the sun, do not generate invitation.

1263.

1263.

Lājā vā pana teheva, katabhattampi sattu vā;

Puffed grain (lājā) or food made from it, or also parched grain flour (sattu), or also pure snacks do not generate invitation.

1264.

1264.

Pūritaṃ macchamaṃsehi, taṃ janeti pavāraṇaṃ;

That which is filled with fish or meat generates invitation; any fried dough, if pure, does not cause invitation.

1265.

1265.

Yavehi katakummāso, pavāreti, na cāparo;

Barley gruel (kummāso) made from barley causes invitation, but not another kind; what should be said about fish and meat is not found because it is obvious.

1266.

1266.

Khādanto kappiyaṃ maṃsaṃ, nisedheti akappiyaṃ;

While eating allowable meat, he forbids unallowable meat; he is not invited by that, it is shown as being without substance.

1267.

1267.

Tathevākappiyaṃ maṃsaṃ, khādanto kappiyaṃ sace;

Likewise, while eating unallowable meat, if he forbids allowable meat, he is invited; it is described as having substance.

1268.

1268.

Maṃsaṃ pana ca khādanto, kappiyaṃ vā akappiyaṃ;

But while eating meat, either allowable or unallowable, he is invited if he forbids some allowable food.

1269.

1269.

Sace akappiyaṃ maṃsaṃ, khādantova akappiyaṃ;

If, while eating unallowable meat, he does not forbid unallowable meat, he is not invited, likewise with other unallowable things.

1270.

1270.

Sace ajjhohaṭaṃ hoti, sitthamekampi bhikkhunā;

If even one grain of cooked rice is brought near by the bhikkhu, it exists as food in the bowl, in the hand, or in the mouth.

1271.

1271.

Pavāraṇapahonaṃ ce, paṭikkhipati bhojanaṃ;

If he rejects food that is sufficient for invitation, he is invited; if it is not sufficient, he is not invited anywhere.

1272.

1272.

Gilitvā ca mukhe bhattaṃ, sesamādāya gacchati;

Having swallowed the food in his mouth, and taking the remainder, he goes away; if he forbids in between, he is not invited by the food.

1273.

1273.

Mukhe ca bhattaṃ gilitañca hatthe;

Food in the mouth, and having swallowed, in the hand;
Food in the bowl, wanting to give to another;
Food in the bowl, wanting to give again;
He who rejects is not invited.

1274.

1274.

Asanassa upacchedā, na pavāreti soti hi;

The great in wisdom say that he is not invited by the interruption of eating, knowing cause and non-cause.

1275.

1275.

Gaṇhato pacchimaṃ aṅgaṃ, dadato purimaṃ pana;

The last factor is for the one taking, but the first for the one giving; if they both have one and a half, without the hand extended.

1276.

1276.

Tasmiṃ abhihaṭaṃ ṭhāne, pavāraṇapahonakaṃ;

Only he who, while eating such food that is brought to that place and is sufficient for invitation, forbids it, is invited.

1277.

1277.

Hatthe ādhārake vāpi, pattaṃ ūrūsu vā ṭhitaṃ;

If a bhikkhu, having brought the bowl standing on his hand-support or on his lap, says, "Take the food,"

1278.

1278.

Anantare nisinnova, taṃ paṭikkhipato pana;

since there is no bringing near for him who rejects it without interruption, there is no invitation for him.

1279.

1279.

Bhattapacchiṃ paṇāmetvā, ṭhapetvā purato ‘‘idaṃ;

Even when the rice-carrier is moved away and placed in front, and it is said, "Take this," this same decision applies.

1280.

1280.

Anantarassa bhikkhussa, dīyamāne panetaro;

When it is being given to the bhikkhu without interruption, if another covers his own bowl with his hands, he is not invited.

1281.

1281.

Kāyenābhihaṭaṃ bhattaṃ, paṭikkhipati yo pana;

If he rejects food brought near by the body, either by body or by speech, there is invitation for him.

1282.

1282.

Eko abhihaṭe bhatte, pavāraṇabhayā pana;

If one, fearing invitation when food is brought near, says, "Sprinkle it, pound it, pound it, fill it up,"

1283.

1283.

Sace vadati tassāpi, na panatthi pavāraṇā;

even if he says that, there is no invitation for him; mahāpaduma by name.

1284.

1284.

Samaṃsañhi rasaṃ netvā, gaṇhathāti rasaṃ vade;

Having brought near juice with meat, if he says "Take the juice," he who, having heard that, forbids is never invited.

1285.

1285.

‘‘Gaṇha maccharasaṃ sāraṃ, gaṇha maṃsarasa’’nti vā;

If it is said, "Take fish juice, essence, take meat juice," or "Take this," there is invitation upon rejection.

1286.

1286.

Sace maṃsaṃ visuṃ katvā, ‘‘gaṇha maṃsarasa’’nti vā;

If, having separated the meat, he says, "Take the meat juice," if there is meat there, there is invitation upon rejection.

1287.

1287.

Odanena ca pucchantaṃ, ‘‘muhuttaṃ āgamehi’’ti;

When he is being asked with cooked rice, "Wait a moment," for one who places it down for the purpose of taking, there is never invitation for him.

1288.

1288.

Kaḷīrapanasādīhi, missakaṃ macchamaṃsakaṃ;

Mixed with sprouts, jackfruit, etc., and fish and meat, "Take the sprout soup, jackfruit curry," or

1289.

1289.

Vadanti ce paṭikkhepe, neva hoti pavāraṇā;

if they say that, there is never invitation upon rejection, because of the naming of the causes of non-invitation.

1290.

1290.

‘‘Macchasūpa’’nti vā vutte, ‘‘maṃsasūpa’’nti vā pana;

If it is said, "Fish soup," or "Meat soup," or "Take this," there is definitely invitation.

1291.

1291.

Eseva ca nayo vutto, ñeyyo maṃsakarambake;

This same method is said, it should be known in the case of meat mixtures; this method applies in all mixtures of fish and meat.

1292.

1292.

Bhattasammissitaṃ yāguṃ, āharitvā sace pana;

If, having brought gruel mixed with cooked rice, when it is said, "Take the gruel," he does not invite when forbidding.

1293.

1293.

‘‘Bhattaṃ gaṇhā’’ti vutte tu, pavāreti paṭikkhipaṃ;

But when it is said, "Take the cooked rice," he invites upon rejecting, because of the existence of that by which he was asked.

1294.

1294.

‘‘Yāgumissakaṃ gaṇhā’’ti, vutte tattha ca yāgu ce;

When it is said, "Take the gruel mixture," if the gruel there is equal or more abundant, he surely does not invite.

1295.

1295.

Mandā yāgu, bahuṃ bhattaṃ, sace hoti pavāraṇā;

If the gruel is weak and the cooked rice is abundant, there is invitation; this reason is specified everywhere, but it is difficult to see.

1296.

1296.

Rasaṃ bahurase bhatte, khīraṃ vā bahukhīrake;

Having separated juice in cooked rice with much juice, or milk in much milk, and they give it saying "Take," there is no invitation.

1297.

1297.

Gacchanteneva bhottabbaṃ, gacchanto ce pavārito;

It should be eaten while walking; if he is invited while walking, it should be eaten while standing still; if he is invited while standing.

1298.

1298.

Udakaṃ vāpi patvā so, sace tiṭṭhati kaddamaṃ;

Having reached water, if he is standing in mud, having removed the excess, it should be eaten again thereafter.

1299.

1299.

Pīṭhake yo nisīditvā, pavāreti sace pana;

If he invites while sitting on a stool, it should be eaten comfortably without moving the seat.

1300.

1300.

Sace mañce nisīditvā, pavāreti tato pana;

If, having sat on a couch, he invites, it is not permissible to move even a little from here to there.

1301.

1301.

Tena mañcena naṃ saddhiṃ, vaṭṭataññatra nenti ce;

If they take him, along with that seat, elsewhere, it is allowable;
Thus, in all cases, should it be understood by the wise, the expert in the Vinaya.

1302.

1302.

Nipajjitvāva bhottabbaṃ, nipanno ce pavārito;

Having reclined, one may eat; if one is invited while reclining,
Having become a squatting-inviter, one should eat just so.

1303.

1303.

Athālametaṃ sabbanti, vattabbaṃ tena bhikkhunā;

Then, "Enough of all this," should be said by that bhikkhu;
When causing an excess, having inclined the bowl.

1304.

1304.

Kappiyaṃ pana kātabbaṃ, na patteyeva kevalaṃ;

But a kappiya should be made, not only in the bowl itself;
In a basket or even a pot, it is allowable to make it in a receptacle.

1305.

1305.

Pavāritānaṃ apavāritānaṃ;

For those who are invited and those who are uninvited;
But this is indeed allowable for others;
Having set aside what has been made excessive;
Just that same one should consume.

1306.

1306.

Kappiyaṃ pana kāretvā, bhuñjantasseva bhikkhuno;

But for a bhikkhu who is eating, having had a kappiya made,
If relish or anything at all, is sprinkled into his bowl;

1307.

1307.

Atirittaṃ tu kāretvā, bhuñjitabbaṃ tathā puna;

Having caused an excess, one should eat again thus;
That by which it was not done, or that which should be done, one should do that separately.

1308.

1308.

Kataṃ akappiyādīhi, atirittaṃ tu sattahi;

What is made with non-kappiya things, and an excess with seven;
And an excess for the sick, that is not an excess.

1309.

1309.

Yopi pātova ekampi, sitthaṃ bhutvā nisīdati;

Even one who, having eaten a morsel, sits down in the morning;
One can make what is brought near and offered, kappiya.

1310.

1310.

Āhāratthāya yāmādi-kālikaṃ paṭigaṇhato;

When accepting yāmālika, etc., for the sake of food;
If it is non-āmissa, there is a dukkata for him who consumes it.

1311.

1311.

Tathā anatirittanti, saññino atirittake;

Likewise, for one with the perception of "not excess," in what is excess;
Even for one who is doubtful about that, a dukkata is declared.

1312.

1312.

Anāpattātirittaṃ tu, kārāpetvāna bhuñjato;

There is no offense for one who, having had an excess made, eats;
Or an excess for the sick, likewise for the insane, etc.

1313.

1313.

Samuṭṭhānādayo sabbe, kathinena samā matā;

All the arising, etc., are considered similar to the kaṭhina;
And the making of kappiya, and eating, are actions and non-actions.

Paṭhamapavāraṇakathā.

The First Invitation Story.

1314.

1314.

Yo panānatirittena, pavāreyya pavāritaṃ;

Whatever bhikkhu should invite one who is invited, with what is "not excess;"
Knowing, expecting acquisition, for eating, there is a pācittiya for him.

1315.

1315.

Dukkaṭaṃ abhihāre ca, gahaṇe itarassa hi;

A dukkata for offering, and for acceptance by the other;
In all the applications of intimation, there is also a dukkata.

1316.

1316.

Bhojanassāvasānasmiṃ, pācitti paridīpitā;

At the end of the meal, a pācittiya is declared;
For the offering bhikkhu, all is shown to be for him alone.

1317.

1317.

Pavāritoti saññissa, bhikkhusmiṃ apavārite;

For one with the perception of "invited," towards a bhikkhu who is uninvited;
For one who is doubtful in both cases, a dukkata is declared.

1318.

1318.

Anāpattātirittaṃ vā, kārāpetvāva deti ce;

There is no offense if, having had an excess made, he gives it;
Or what remains for the sick, or gives it for another's sake.

1319.

1319.

Sesaṃ sabbamasesena, anantarasamaṃ mataṃ;

All the remainder is considered equal in sequence;
The modes of arising, etc., are just like the omitted clause and the statement of blame.

Dutiyapavāraṇakathā.

The Second Invitation Story.

1320.

1320.

Khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā;

Whatever bhikkhu should, at the wrong time,
Eat or consume any edibles or food;
That one incurs the fault spoken of by the Conqueror.

1321.

1321.

Yamāmisagatañcettha, vanamūlaphalādikaṃ;

Herein, what is included in āmissa, roots, tubers, fruits, etc.;
This should be understood for the sake of non-confusion regarding kālika.

1322.

1322.

Mūlaṃ kandaṃ muḷālañca, matthakaṃ khandhakaṃ tacaṃ;

Root, bulb, lotus-stalk, shoot, trunk, bark;
Leaf, flower, fruit, kernel, flour, sap as well.

1323.

1323.

Mūlakhādanīyādīnaṃ, mukhamattanidassanaṃ;

The mere indication of the mouth of root-edibles, etc.;
Understand the meanings of the names for the sake of the bhikkhus' reading.

1324.

1324.

Mūlakaṃ khārakañceva, vatthulaṃ taṇḍuleyyakaṃ;

Radish, khāraka, vatthula, taṇḍuleyyaka;
Tambaka, jajjharika, caccu, and vajakalī as well.

1325.

1325.

Mūlānievamādīnaṃ, sākānaṃ āmise pana;

Roots such as these, and of greens, in āmissa indeed,
Go to inclusion here, for they pervade for the sake of nutriment.

1326.

1326.

Chaḍḍenti jaraṭṭhaṃ chetvā, yaṃ taṃ vajakalissa tu;

They discard the old by cutting, that which is of the vajakalī;
That is said to be yāvajīvika, the rest is yāvakālika.

1327.

1327.

Haliddi siṅgiverañca, vacattaṃ ativisaṃ vacaṃ;

Turmeric, ginger as well, vacatta, ativisa, vaca;
Usīra, bhaddamutta as well, likewise kaṭukarohiṇī.

1328.

1328.

Iccevamādikaṃ aññaṃ, pañcamūlādikaṃ bahu;

Many other roots such as these, five-rooted, etc.,
Roots of various kinds, should be known as yāvajīvika.

1329.

1329.

Masālupiṇḍalādīnaṃ, vallīnaṃ āluvassa ca;

Of masālupiṇḍala, etc., of creepers, and of the arum;
Bulb of the lily species, likewise of the lotus species.

1330.

1330.

Kadalīsiggutālānaṃ, māluvassa ca veḷuyā;

Of banana, siggu, palm, of māluva and of bamboo;
Of satāvari, kaseru, bulb of ambāṭaka as well.

1331.

1331.

Iccevamādayo kandā;

Bulbs such as these;
Are shown to be yāvakālika;
That bulb of the milky creeper,
Is said to be washed in āmissa.

1332.

1332.

Adhoto lasuṇañceva, khīrakākoliādayo;

Unwashed garlic as well, milky kākoli, etc.;
Bulbs beyond the path of expression, should be known as yāvajīvika.

1333.

1333.

Puṇḍarīkamuḷālañca, muḷālaṃ padumassa ca;

White lotus stalk as well, the lotus stalk of the lotus as well;
The lotus-stalk is yāvakālika.

1334.

1334.

Tālahintālakuntāla-nāḷikerādisambhavaṃ;

Arising from tāla, hintāla, kuntāla, coconut, etc.;
The lotus stalk of turmeric and ginger, is yāvajīvika.

1335.

1335.

Tālahintālakuntāla-kaḷīro ketakassa ca;

The sprout of tāla, hintāla, kuntāla, kaḷīra of ketaka as well;
Shoot of the radish as well.

1336.

1336.

Khajjurerakavettānaṃ, ucchuveḷunaḷādinaṃ;

Of date palm, eraka, rattan, sugarcane, bamboo, reed, etc.;
The sprout of the seven grains indeed, and of mustard as well.

1337.

1337.

Iccevamādayoneke, matthakā yāvakālikā;

Many shoots such as these are yāvakālika;
Other shoots of turmeric, etc., are yāvajīvika.

1338.

1338.

Tālakuntālakādīnaṃ, chinditvā pātito pana;

But what is cut off and dropped from tāla, kuntāla, etc.;
That which is an old stump, goes to the inclusion of yāvajīvika.

1339.

1339.

Khandhakhādanīyaṃ nāma, ucchukhandho pakāsito;

Trunk-edible is named, the sugarcane trunk is declared;
The trunk of the sālakalyāṇī, likewise that which has gone into the earth.

1340.

1340.

Evamuppalajātīnaṃ, daṇḍako yāvakāliko;

Likewise, the stalk of the lily species, is yāvakālika;
All the leaf-stalks of lily, etc., of the lotus species.

1341.

1341.

Yāvajīvikasaṅkhātā, karamaddādidaṇḍakā;

The karamadda-stalks, etc., are reckoned yāvajīvika;
In Barks, the sugarcane-bark alone, with sap, is yāvakālika.

1342.

1342.

Mūlakaṃ khārako caccu, tambako taṇḍuleyyako;

Radish, khāraka, caccu, tambaka, taṇḍuleyyaka;
Vatthula, Chinese-gram, ummā, vajakalī likewise.

1343.

1343.

Jajjharī kāsamaddo ca, sellu siggu ca nāḷikā;

Jajjharī, kāsamadda as well, sellu, siggu and nāḷikā;
Varuṇa, aggimantha as well, jīvantī, sunisannaka.

1344.

1344.

Rājamāso ca māso ca, nipphāvo migapupphikā;

Rājamāsa as well, māsa as well, nipphāva, migapupphikā;
Vaṇṭaka, bhūmiloṇī, thus many others.

1345.

1345.

Pattakhādanīyaṃ nāma, kathitaṃ yāvakālikaṃ;

Leaf-edible is named, it is said to be yāvakālika;
The other, mahāloṇi, is declared to be yāvajīvika.

1346.

1346.

Yāvakālikamicceva, kathitaṃ ambapallavaṃ;

Just so, yāvakālika, is spoken of the mango sprout;
The leaf of the neem, kuṭaja as well, and sulasiyā as well.

1347.

1347.

Kappāsikapaṭolānaṃ, tesaṃ pupphaphalāni ca;

Of cotton and paṭola, their flowers and fruits as well;
The leaf of phaṇijjaka and kajjuka, that is yāvajīvika.

1348.

1348.

pupphaṃnipphāvakassa ca;

Flower of the nipphāva as well;
Likewise the flower of karīra, the flower of varuṇaka as well.

1349.

1349.

Pupphaṃ kaserukassāpi, jīvantī siggupupphakaṃ;

The flower of kaseru as well, jīvantī, siggu-flower;
The pistil of the lotus and lily species as well.

1350.

1350.

Nāḷikerassa tālassa, taruṇaṃ ketakassa ca;

Of coconut, palm, the young ketaka as well;
Flowers such as these, many, are yāvakālika.

1351.

1351.

Yāvakālikapupphāni, ṭhapetvā pana sesakaṃ;

Having set aside the yāvakālika flowers, but the remaining;
All flowers are declared to be yāvajīvika.

1352.

1352.

Tilakamakulasālamallikānaṃ;

Of tilaka, makula, sāla, mallikā;
Of kakudhaka, pitthaka, kundaka, kaḷī;
Of kuravaka, karavīra, pāṭalī;
These blossoms are indeed yāvajīvika.

1353.

1353.

phalañca panasassa ca;

Fruit also of jackfruit;
The fruit of mātuluṅga and wood-apple, the fruit of tamarind as well.

1354.

1354.

Tālassa nāḷikerassa, phalaṃ khajjūriyāpi ca;

The fruit of palm, coconut, date-palm as well;
Of labuja and cocassa, of mocassa and madhuka as well.

1355.

1355.

Badarassa karamaddassa, phalaṃ vātiṅgaṇassa ca;

The fruit of jujube and karamadda, the fruit of eggplant as well;
The fruit of white gourd and cucumber, the fruit of eḷāluka as well.

1356.

1356.

Rājāyatanaphalaṃ pussa-phalaṃ timbarukassa ca;

The fruit of rājāyatana, pussa-fruit, timbaruka as well;
Many fruits such as these are yāvakālika.

1357.

1357.

Tiphalaṃ pipphalī jāti-phalañca kaṭukapphalaṃ;

Three fruits, long pepper, nutmeg-fruit, and kaṭukapphala;
Goṭṭhaphala, bilaṅga, takkola, and peppers as well.

1358.

1358.

Evamādīni vuttāni, avuttāni ca pāḷiyaṃ;

Fruits such as these, that are spoken of, and not spoken of in the Pali;
Go to the inclusion of yāvajīvika.

1359.

1359.

Panasambāṭakaṭṭhīni, sālaṭṭhi labujaṭṭhi ca;

Jackfruit, ambāṭaka seeds, sāla seeds, labuja seeds as well;
Tamarind, wood-apple seeds, and lotus seeds entirely.

1360.

1360.

Khajjūriketakādīnaṃ, tathā tālaphalaṭṭhi ca;

Date palm, ketaka seeds, etc., and palm fruit seeds as well;
Seeds such as these go to the inclusion of yāvakālika.

1361.

1361.

Punnāgamadhukaṭṭhīni, sellaṭṭhi tiphalaṭṭhi ca;

Punnāga, madhuka seeds, sella seeds, three-fruit seeds as well;
Seeds that are unspecified are non-āmissa.

1362.

1362.

Sattannaṃ pana dhaññānaṃ, aparaṇṇānameva ca;

Flour of the seven grains indeed, and also of other grains;
Flour of jackfruit, sāla, labuja, jambāṭaka as well.

1363.

1363.

Tālapiṭṭhaṃ tathā dhotaṃ, piṭṭhaṃ yaṃ khīravalliyā;

Tāla flour, likewise washed, the flour of the milky creeper;
Many such as these are said to be yāvakālika.

1364.

1364.

Adhotaṃ tālapiṭṭhañca, piṭṭhaṃ yaṃ khīravalliyā;

Unwashed tāla flour as well, the flour of the milky creeper;
Assagandha flour, etc., is that which is yāvajīvika.

1365.

1365.

Niyyāsoucchunibbatto, eko sattāhakāliko;

Sap produced from sugarcane, one is sattāhakālika;
The remaining sap, asafoetida, etc., is yāvajīvika.

1366.

1366.

Mūlādīsu mayā kiñci, mukhamattaṃ nidassitaṃ;

I have shown merely the mouth of some roots, etc.;
The remainder should be known by the discerning, in accordance with this itself.

1367.

1367.

‘‘Bhuñjissāmi vikāle’’ti, āmisaṃ paṭigaṇhato;

For one who accepts āmissa, thinking "I will eat at the wrong time;"
For one with the perception of kāla in vikāla, and for one who is doubtful in kāla.

1368.

1368.

Dukkaṭaṃ, kālasaññissa, anāpatti pakāsitā;

There is a dukkata; for one with the perception of kāla, no offense is declared;
This is similar to eḷakaloma, with arising, etc.

Vikālabhojanakathā.

The Story of Eating at the Wrong Time.

1369.

1369.

Bhojanaṃ sannidhiṃ katvā, khādanaṃ vāpi yo pana;

Having made a store of food, or edibles as well, whatever bhikkhu
Should eat or consume, for him there would be a pācittiya.

1370.

1370.

Bhikkhu yaṃ sāmaṇerānaṃ, pariccajatyanālayo;

If a bhikkhu unattachedly relinquishes to the novices;
If, having stored it, they give it to him again, it is allowable.

1371.

1371.

Sayaṃ paṭiggahetvāna, apariccattameva yaṃ;

Having received it oneself, and not relinquished it;
If that is put away on the second day, it is not allowable.

1372.

1372.

Tato ajjhoharantassa, ekasitthampi bhikkhuno;

For a bhikkhu consuming even a single grain of that;
A pure pācittiya is declared by such a one with a pure mind.

1373.

1373.

Akappiyesu maṃsesu, manussasseva maṃsake;

Among unallowable meats, in the case of human meat;
A pācittiya by way of a thullaccaya, with a dukkaṭa for other meats.

1374.

1374.

Yāmakālikasaṅkhātaṃ, pācitti paribhuñjato;

When consuming that which is reckoned as yāmakālika;
Along with an offense of dukkaṭa, when consuming it for nourishment.

1375.

1375.

Sace pavārito hutvā, annaṃ anatirittakaṃ;

If, having been invited, he eats food that is not leftover;
For him who does (so), a double pācittiya occurs.

1376.

1376.

Thullaccayena saddhiṃ dve, maṃse mānusake siyuṃ;

Two, along with a thullaccaya, if it is human meat;
In the remaining unallowable meat, two along with a dukkaṭa.

1377.

1377.

Yāmakālikasaṅkhātaṃ, bhuñjato sati paccaye;

When consuming that reckoned as yāmakālika, with a reason;
Two with meat in the mouth, just one without meat.

1378.

1378.

Tamevajjhoharantassa, āhāratthāya kevalaṃ;

When consuming just that, solely for the purpose of nourishment;
In those three alternatives, the dukkaṭa increases.

1379.

1379.

Vikāle bhuñjato suddhaṃ, sannidhipaccayāpi ca;

For consuming at the wrong time purely, and also because of storing;
There is a double pācittiya indeed for eating at the wrong time.

1380.

1380.

Maṃse thullaccayañceva, dukkaṭampi ca vaḍḍhati;

A thullaccaya increases with meat, and also a dukkaṭa;
In the case of human meat and the rest, two in due order.

1381.

1381.

Natthevānatirittampi, vikāle paribhuñjato;

There is certainly an anatiritta, when consuming at the wrong time;
The fault in all the alternatives is on account of that for the bhikkhu.

1382.

1382.

Vikālapaccayā vāpi, na doso yāmakālike;

There is no fault due to wrong time, in the yāmakālika;
When receiving the sattāhakālika and yāvajīvika.

1383.

1383.

Āhārasseva atthāya, gahaṇe duvidhassa tu;

But for the purpose of nourishment itself, in the receiving of the two kinds;
In the acts of consuming and using, the dukkaṭa is indeed in the case of no meat.

1384.

1384.

Atha āmisasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ, gahetvā ṭhapitaṃ sace;

Then, if having received what is mixed with meat, it is put away;
When consuming it again, just a pācittiya is declared.

1385.

1385.

Kālo yāmo ca sattāhaṃ, iti kālattayaṃ idaṃ;

Time, a watch, and a week, this is a threefold time;
For one who exceeds it, the fault is for that time, that which is kālika.

1386.

1386.

Attanā tīṇi sambhinna-rasāni itarāni hi;

One’s own three mixed flavors, and the others indeed;
Bringing (them) to (one's) own nature, (is) the yāvakālika.

1387.

1387.

Evameva ca sesesu, kālikesu viniddise;

Just so, it should be specified for the remaining kālikas;
But in all these four kālikas.

1388.

1388.

Kālikadvayamādimhi, antovutthañca sannidhi;

Storage within (the time limit) in the first two kālikas;
Both do not occur in the last two kālikas.

1389.

1389.

Akappiyāya kuṭiyā, vutthenantadvayena taṃ;

By dwelling in an unallowable dwelling, that with two limits;
What is received on that day or earlier, the former two are not allowable.

1390.

1390.

Mukhasannidhi nāmāyaṃ, antovutthaṃ na kappati;

This called mukhasannidhi, storage within is not allowable;
But in the Mahāpaccariya.

1391.

1391.

Na doso nidahitvāpi, paṭhamaṃ kālikattayaṃ;

There is no fault even having stored away the first three kālikas;
When consuming without exceeding each of their own times.

1392.

1392.

Tathā ummattakādīnaṃ, anāpatti pakāsitā;

So too, for the insane, etc., non-offense is declared;
This (is) with the same heap of salt, by origination, etc.

Sannidhikārakathā.

Account of Storing.

1393.

1393.

Bhojanāni paṇītāni, agilāno panattano;

One who is not ill, having requested fine foods;
There is a pācittiya when consuming (them).

1394.

1394.

‘‘Sappinā dehi bhattaṃ me, sasappiṃ sappimissakaṃ;

"Give me rice with ghee, rice with ghee mixed, mixed with ghee;
Give me rice with ghee," for one requesting (this), there is a dukkaṭa.

1395.

1395.

Viññāpetvā tathā taṃ ce, dukkaṭaṃ paṭigaṇhato;

Having requested it thus, if he receives it, there is a dukkaṭa;
When consuming it again, a pācittiya is completed.

1396.

1396.

Suddhāni sappiādīni, viññāpetvāna bhuñjato;

When requesting pure ghee, etc., and consuming (them);
Requesting even in the Sekhiya (rules), a dukkaṭa is revealed.

1397.

1397.

Tasmā paṇītasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ, viññāpetvāva bhuñjato;

Therefore, having requested what is mixed with fine things and consuming it;
For rice made of seven kinds of grain, a pācittiya should be declared.

1398.

1398.

Sace ‘‘gosappinā mayhaṃ, dehi bhatta’’nti yācito;

If, having been asked, "Give me rice with cow's ghee";
He gives without specifying with goat's ghee, etc.

1399.

1399.

‘‘Sappinā dehi’’ vutto ce, navanītādikesupi;

If, having been told, "Give me ghee," even with fresh butter, etc.;
He gives with another, it is declared (as) without specifying.

1400.

1400.

Yena yena hi viññattaṃ, tasmiṃ mūlepi tassa vā;

Indeed, by whatever he has requested, in that source, or even his;
Having obtained it, it is indeed obtained, not otherwise.

1401.

1401.

Ṭhapetvā sappiādīni, āgatāni hi pāḷiyaṃ;

Having set aside ghee, etc., that have come in the Pāḷi;
For requesting with others, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.

1402.

1402.

Sabbehi sappiādīhi, viññāpetvāva ekato;

Having requested all the ghee, etc., together;
Consuming (them) having made (them) into one flavor, nine pācittiyas are understood.

1403.

1403.

Akappiyena vuttepi, sappinā deti tena ce;

Even when told with what is unallowable, if he gives with that;
In the receiving and in the using, a dukkaṭa is revealed.

1404.

1404.

Gilānassa gilānoti, saññino vimatissa vā;

For one who is ill, thinking (he is) ill, or for one who is doubtful;
A dukkaṭa is stated by the Sage, a non-offense is declared.

1405.

1405.

Gilānakāle viññatta-magilānassa bhuñjato;

When one who is not ill consumes what was requested during illness;
Or what is left over from the sick person, or just for relatives, etc.

1406.

1406.

Idaṃ catusamuṭṭhānaṃ, kāyato kāyavācato;

This (is) a fourfold origination, from the body, from body and speech;
From body and mind, and also from body, speech, and mind together.

Paṇītabhojanakathā.

Account of Fine Foods.

1407.

1407.

Adinnañhi mukhadvāraṃ, āhāraṃ āhareyya yo;

One who takes food through the mouth, not given indeed;
Having omitted a toothpick and water, for him there is a pācittiya.

1408.

1408.

Hatthapāsobhinīhāro, majjhimuccāraṇakkhamo;

The range of the hand, capable of a moderate utterance;
A human or non-human gives by body, etc., in three ways.

1409.

1409.

Paṭiggaṇhāti taṃ bhikkhu, dīyamānaṃ sace dvidhā;

If a bhikkhu receives that which is being given in two ways;
Thus in the conjunction of five factors, the receiving matures for him.

1410.

1410.

Dāyako gaganaṭṭho ce, bhūmaṭṭho cetaro siyā;

If the giver is in the sky, and the other is on the ground;
And with the head of one on the ground, to the giver in the sky.

1411.

1411.

Yamāsannataraṃ aṅgaṃ, orimantena tassa tu;

Whichever limb is nearer, with the nearest part of that;
To give or even to receive, without the hand extended.

1412.

1412.

Hatthapāso minetabbo, nagaṭṭhādīsvayaṃ nayo;

The hand's range should be measured, the same method on a tree, etc.;
But having stood in such a place, if he gives, it is allowable.

1413.

1413.

Pakkhī vā mukhatuṇḍena, hatthī soṇḍāya vā pana;

A bird, either with its beak, or an elephant with its trunk;
If it gives any flower or fruit, it is allowable.

1414.

1414.

Bhattabyañjanapuṇṇāni, bhājanāni bahūnipi;

Vessels full of rice and curry, even many;
Having taken (them) on (her) head, having gone to the presence of a bhikkhu.

1415.

1415.

Īsakaṃ pana onatvā, ‘‘gaṇhā’’ti yadi bhāsati;

Having slightly bent down, if she says, "Take (them)";
Having extended the hand there, the lower vessel indeed.

1416.

1416.

Paṭicchitabbaṃ taṃ eka- desenāpi ca bhikkhunā;

It should be received by the bhikkhu, even with a part;
With just this much, all of those are indeed taken.

1417.

1417.

Tato paṭṭhāya taṃ sabbaṃ, oropetvā yathāsukhaṃ;

Then, having taken down all of that as is convenient;
Having opened (them) then, it is allowable to take what is wanted.

1418.

1418.

Pacchiādimhi vattabba-matthi kiṃ ekabhājane;

What should be said about a bundle, is there (anything) in a single vessel?
If bringing food for a task, having bent down, he gives, it is allowable.

1419.

1419.

Tiṃsahattho siyā veḷu, antesu ca duve ghaṭā;

There would be a thirty-cubit bamboo, with two pots at the ends;
Of ghee, when one is taken, all of it is indeed taken.

1420.

1420.

Bahupattā ca mañce vā, pīṭhe vā kaṭasārake;

Many bowls placed on a bed, or a seat, or a mat frame;
If the giver stands within hand's reach and gives.

1421.

1421.

Paṭiggahaṇasaññāya, mañcādīni sace pana;

With the intention of receiving, if he sits on the bed, etc.,
Touching (it), and whatever is given in the bowls.

1422.

1422.

Gahitaṃ tena taṃ sabbaṃ, hotiyeva na saṃsayo;

All of that is indeed taken by him, there is no doubt;
If (he thinks), "I will receive," the bed, etc., indeed.

1423.

1423.

Gahitaṃ hoti taṃ sabbaṃ, āruhitvā nisīdati;

All of that is taken, (when he) climbs up and sits;
Having knocked belly against belly, the bowls standing on the ground.

1424.

1424.

Yaṃ yaṃ aṅguliyā vāpi, phusitvā sūciyāpi vā;

Whatever, having touched with a finger, or even with a needle;
Sitting there and there, it is allowable to give.

1425.

1425.

Kaṭasāre mahantasmiṃ, tathā hatthattharādisu;

On a large mat frame, and so too on a hand-stretcher, etc.;
It is allowable to receive when it exists within hand's reach.

1426.

1426.

Tatthajātakapaṇṇesu, gahetuṃ na ca vaṭṭati;

It is not allowable to receive on leaves born there;
For these are not bound to the body.

1427.

1427.

Asaṃhārimapāsāṇe, phalake vāpi tādise;

On an immovable stone, or also on such a plank;
Or on a bed fastened to a stump, the receiving does not mature.

1428.

1428.

Tintiṇikādipaṇṇesu, bhūmiyaṃ patthaṭesu vā;

On tamarind leaves, etc., or (leaves) spread on the ground;
Because of being unable to support (it), the receiving does not mature.

1429.

1429.

Hatthapāsamatikkamma, dīghadaṇḍena deti ce;

Having exceeded the hand's range, if he gives with a long stick;
The server should be told by the bhikkhu, "Come and give."

1430.

1430.

Sace patte rajo hoti, dhovitabbo jale sati;

If there is dust in the bowl, it should be washed if there is water;
If there is none, having wiped (it), it should be taken entirely.

1431.

1431.

Piṇḍāya vicarantassa, rajaṃ patati ce pana;

When one is wandering for alms, if dust falls;
Having received the alms, it should be taken by one who knows.

1432.

1432.

Appaṭiggahite bhikkhuṃ, gaṇhato pana dukkaṭaṃ;

For a bhikkhu who takes (it) not having received (it), there is a dukkaṭa;
There is non-offense having received (it), afterwards when consuming it.

1433.

1433.

‘‘Paṭiggahetvā dethā’’ti, vutte taṃ vacanaṃ pana;

When (he) is told, "Having received (it), give (it)";
If he gives not having heard that word, or without paying attention to it, there is no dukkaṭa.

1434.

1434.

Pacchā paṭiggahetvāva, gahetabbaṃ vijānatā;

Having received (it) afterwards, it should be taken by one who knows;
If a great wind blows dust from here and there.

1435.

1435.

Na sakkā ca siyā bhikkhaṃ, gahetuṃ yadi bhikkhunā;

If it is not possible for the bhikkhu to take the alms;
It is allowable to take (it) wishing to give (it) to another.

1436.

1436.

Sāmaṇerassa taṃ datvā, dinnaṃ vā tena taṃ puna;

Having given that to a novice, or given by him again;
Or through his confidence, it is allowable to consume (it).

1437.

1437.

Bhikkhācāre sace bhattaṃ, sarajaṃ deti bhikkhuno;

If in the alms round, he gives rice with dust to a bhikkhu;
"Having received the alms, either take (it) or consume (it)."

1438.

1438.

Vattabbo so tathā tena, kattabbañceva bhikkhunā;

He should be told thus, and it should be done by the bhikkhu;
If dust floats on top of the rice.

1439.

1439.

Kañjikaṃ tu pavāhetvā, bhuñjitabbaṃ yathāsukhaṃ;

Having drained off the gruel, it should be consumed as is convenient;
It should be received inside, if it has entered.

1440.

1440.

Patitaṃ sukkhabhatte ce, apanīyāva taṃ rajaṃ;

If (it) has fallen on dry rice, having removed that dust;
If (it is) fine, all the rice should be consumed as is convenient.

1441.

1441.

Uḷuṅkenāharitvāpi, dentassa paṭhamaṃ pana;

Even when (he is) giving not having brought (it) with a ladle at first;
If a drop falls from the ladle into the bowl, it is allowable.

1442.

1442.

Bhatte ākiramāne tu, carukena tato pana;

When rice is being scattered (about), then with a ladle;
If soot or ashes fall into the bowl.

1443.

1443.

Tassa cābhihaṭattāpi, na doso upalabbhati;

Because of having been brought by him, no fault is found;
When (it is) being given from a bowl to the immediately following bhikkhu.

1444.

1444.

Uppabhitvā sace patte, itarassa ca bhikkhuno;

If, after being raised up, it falls into the bowl of another monk;
If it falls or rolls away, that is indeed considered received.

1445.

1445.

Pāyāsassa ca pūretvā, pattaṃ ce denti bhikkhuno;

If, having filled a bowl with pāyāsa, they give it to a monk;
But because of the heat, he is unable to hold it from below.

1446.

1446.

Vaṭṭatīti ca niddiṭṭhaṃ, gahetuṃ mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ;

It has been specified that it is allowable to receive it with a mouth-cloth;
If it cannot be taken, it is the same with a bowl-stand (ādhāraka).

1447.

1447.

Sace āsanasālāyaṃ, gahetvā pattamattano;

If, in the assembly hall, having taken his bowl;
He falls asleep while sitting, he does not know it is being given.

1448.

1448.

Nevāhariyamānaṃ vā, appaṭiggahitameva taṃ;

Or if it is not being brought near, that is indeed unreceived;
But if he has made an effort (ābhoga) and is sitting, it is allowable.

1449.

1449.

Sace hatthena muñcitvā, pattaṃ ādhārakampi vā;

If, having released the bowl or bowl-stand from his hand;
Having kicked it with his foot, he falls asleep, indeed it is allowable.

1450.

1450.

Pādenādhārakaṃ akka-mitvāpi paṭigaṇhato;

Even if pressing the bowl-stand with his foot, he receives it;
Even if awake, there is inattentiveness in the receiving.

1451.

1451.

Tasmā taṃ na ca kātabbaṃ, bhikkhunā vinayaññunā;

Therefore, that should not be done by a monk who knows the Vinaya;
If what is being given falls, it is allowable to take that.

1452.

1512.

Bhuñjantānañca dantā vā, khīyantipi nakhāpi vā;

And for those eating, either teeth or nails wear out;
Likewise, the color of the bowl, this is the way of non-usage (abbohāranaya).

1453.

1453.

Satthakenucchuādīni, phālentānaṃ sace malaṃ;

For those splitting sugar cane etc. with a knife, if dirt;
Appears on those, it would be newly arisen.

1454.

1454.

Paṭiggahetvā taṃ pacchā, khāditabbaṃ tu bhikkhunā;

Having received that, afterwards it should be eaten by the monk;
If dirt does not appear on that, it is allowable to eat.

1455.

1455.

Pisantānampi bhesajjaṃ, koṭṭentānampi vā tathā;

For those grinding medicine, or likewise pounding;
This is the same rule for wearing out of sitting cloths and dukkha grass etc.

1456.

1456.

Bhesajjatthāya tāpetvā, vāsiṃ khīre khipanti ce;

Having heated a knife for medicine, if they throw it into milk;
A blue stain arises there, the decision is like with a knife.

1457.

1457.

Sace āmakatakke vā, khīre vā pakkhipanti taṃ;

If they throw it into raw buttermilk or milk;
He is not freed from a dukkata due to it being incompletely ripened (sāmapāka).

1458.

1458.

Piṇḍāya vicarantassa, vassakālesu bhikkhuno;

For a monk wandering for alms, in the rainy season;
If water falls into the bowl, soiled from the body-cloth.

1459.

1459.

Pacchā paṭiggahetvā taṃ, bhuñjitabbaṃ yathāsukhaṃ;

Having received that afterwards, it should be eaten comfortably;
And this same rule is said for one eating at the foot of a tree.

1460.

1460.

Sattāhaṃ pana vassante, deve suddhaṃ jalaṃ sace;

If it is raining for a week, and if pure water;
Falls into the bowl in the open air, it is allowable.

1461.

1461.

Odanaṃ pana dentena, sāmaṇerassa bhikkhunā;

If a monk is giving rice to a novice;
The rice in his bowl should be given without being touched.

1462.

1462.

Paṭiggahetvā vā pattaṃ, dātabbo tassa odano;

Or having received the bowl, the rice should be given to him;
If he gives food touching it, that would be considered as taken up (uggahita).

1463.

1463.

Aññassa dātukāmena, pariccattaṃ sace pana;

If, intending to give to another, it is relinquished;
As long as it is in the hand, that is indeed received.

1464.

1464.

‘‘Gaṇhā’’ti nirapekkhova, pattamādhārake ṭhitaṃ;

If, being without expectation, he says "Take," while the bowl is standing on a stand;
Afterwards, a wise man should receive that.

1465.

1465.

Sāpekkhoyeva yo pattaṃ, ṭhapetvādhārake pana;

But if, with expectation, he places the bowl on the stand;
And says, "Take some cake or food from here."

1466.

1466.

Sāmaṇeropi taṃ bhattaṃ, dhovitvā hatthamattano;

If even a novice, having washed his hands;
Without touching the food in his own bowl.

1467.

1467.

Pakkhipanto satakkhattuṃ, uddharitvāpi gaṇhatu;

While putting it in, even after lifting it up a hundred times, let him take it;
There is no need for him to receive it again.

1468.

1468.

Attapattagataṃ bhattaṃ, phusitvā yadi gaṇhati;

If, having touched the food in his own bowl, he takes it;
Afterwards it must be received, because it is mixed with another's.

1469.

1469.

Bhikkhūnaṃ yāguādīnaṃ, pacane bhājane pana;

If, when cooking gruel etc. for the monks, in a pot;
While placing the rice for another.

1470.

1470.

Bhājanupari hatthesu, sāmaṇerassa pakkhipe;

He puts it on the hands over the pot, of a novice;
If it falls from his hand there, he does not make it unallowable.

1471.

1471.

Pariccattañhi taṃ evaṃ, akatvākirateva ce;

For that is indeed relinquished, if not having done so, he scatters it;
But it should be eaten having made it like a bowl, without meat.

1472.

1472.

Sace yāgukuṭaṃ puṇṇaṃ, sāmaṇero hi dubbalo;

If a gruel pot is full, and the novice is weak;
He is unable to have it received by a monk again.

1473.

1473.

Kuṭassa gīvaṃ pattassa, ṭhapetvā mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ;

Having placed the neck of the pot at the mouth of the bowl;
It is allowable for the monk to turn it over when it is brought near.

1474.

1474.

Atha vā bhūmiyaṃyeva, hatthe bhikkhu ṭhapeti ce;

Or if indeed on the ground, the monk places his hands;
Having turned it over, he lifts it up, it is allowable there.

1475.

1475.

Bhattapacchucchubhāresu, ayameva vinicchayo;

In the case of burdens of cooked rice and sugarcane, this is the decision;
If two or three novices give it, it approaches acceptance.

1476.

1476.

Bhāramekassa bhikkhussa, gahetuṃ pana vaṭṭati;

It is allowable for one monk to take the burden of one;
Or even if it is given by one, two or three take it.

1477.

1477.

Mañcassa pāde pīṭhassa, pāde telaghaṭādikaṃ;

At the foot of a couch, at the foot of a seat, an oil pot etc.;
It is allowable for the monk to sit there when it is attached.

1478.

1478.

Appaṭiggahitaṃ heṭṭhā-mañce ce telathālakaṃ;

If an oil dish is unreceived under the couch;
While contracting he brushes against it, it would not be taken up (uggahita).

1479.

1479.

Paṭiggahitasaññāya, appaṭiggahitaṃ pana;

With the intention of receiving, if it is unreceived;
Having taken it and then knowing it, it is allowable to place it there.

1480.

1480.

Vivaritvā sace pubbe, ṭhapitaṃ pihitampi ca;

If it was previously placed open, or even closed;
It should be placed just like that, it should not be done otherwise.

1481.

1481.

Bahi ṭhapeti ce tena, chupitabbaṃ na taṃ puna;

If he places it outside, that should not be touched again;
If he touches it knowing, that would be taken up (uggahita).

1482.

1482.

Paṭiggahitatelasmiṃ, uṭṭheti yadi kaṇṇakā;

In the case of received oil, if a residue arises;
Of ginger etc., roots, or likewise thick powder.

1483.

1483.

Taṃsamuṭṭhānato sabbaṃ, taññevāti pavuccati;

Due to the arising of that, everything is called just that;
There is no need for receiving again in that case.

1484.

1484.

Tālaṃ vā nāḷikeraṃ vā, āruḷho koci puggalo;

Someone climbing a palm tree or coconut tree;
Having descended from there, he lowers a palm-fruit cluster with a rope.

1485.

1485.

Sace vadati ‘‘gaṇhā’’ti, na gahetabbameva ca;

If he says, "Take," it should not be taken;
But it is allowable if another person on the ground takes and gives it.

1486.

1486.

Chinditvā ce vatiṃ ucchuṃ, phalaṃ vā deti gaṇhituṃ;

If, having cut a sugarcane stalk or fruit, he gives it to be taken;
It is allowable if it comes out without touching the stalk.

1487.

1487.

Sace na puthulo hoti, pākāro atiuccako;

If the wall is not wide, and not too high;
If the hand-reach of those standing inside and outside is sufficient.

1488.

1488.

Uddhaṃ hatthasataṃ gantvā, sampattaṃ puna taṃ pana;

Having gone up a hundred hands, and then having arrived back;
No fault is found for the monk taking it.

1489.

1489.

Bhikkhuno sāmaṇeraṃ tu, khandhena vahato sace;

If a monk is carrying a novice on his shoulders;
Having taken fruit there, sitting down, he gives it, it is allowable.

1490.

1490.

Aparopi vahantova, bhikkhuṃ yo koci puggalo;

Or another person who is carrying the monk;
It is allowable if he gives fruit to the monk sitting on his shoulders.

1491.

1491.

Gahetvā phaliniṃ sākhaṃ, chāyatthaṃ yadi gacchati;

Having taken a fruit-bearing branch, if he goes for shade;
If a thought arises again for the monk to eat.

1492.

1492.

Sākhaṃ paṭiggahāpetvā, phalaṃ khādati vaṭṭati;

Having had the branch received, it is allowable to eat the fruit;
This is the same rule for what is taken for the sake of warding off flies.

1493.

1493.

Kappiyaṃ pana kāretvā, paṭiggaṇhāti taṃ puna;

Having had it made allowable, he receives that again;
If he desires to eat, even taking the root is allowable.

1494.

1494.

Mātāpitūnamatthāya, gahetvā sappiādikaṃ;

For the sake of his mother and father, having taken ghee etc.;
While going along the road, whatever he desires from that.

1495.

1495.

Taṃ so paṭiggahāpetvā, paribhuñjati vaṭṭati;

Having had that received, it is allowable for him to consume it;
That received, even the original taking is allowable.

1496.

1496.

Sāmaṇerassa pātheyya-taṇḍule bhikkhu gaṇhati;

A monk takes rice for provisions for a novice;
Likewise, a novice also takes it and goes for a monk.

1497.

1497.

Taṇḍulesu hi khīṇesu, attanā gahitesu so;

When the rice has been used up, in what he has taken himself;
If, having cooked gruel, even with other rice.

1498.

1498.

Ubhinnaṃ dvīsu pattesu, ākiritvā panattano;

Having poured it into two bowls for both of them, and having given his own gruel to the monk;
If he himself drinks from that.

1499.

1499.

Sannidhipaccayā neva, na uggahitakāraṇā;

There is no fault for the monk, due to the condition of storing up, not because it was taken up (uggahita);
Since it was drunk by the novice.

1500.

1500.

Mātāpitūnamatthāya, telādiṃ haratopi ca;

There is no difference in this case, whether he is carrying oil etc. for the sake of his mother and father;
Or a branch for the sake of shade etc.

1501.

1501.

Tasmā hissa visesassa, cintetabbaṃ tu kāraṇaṃ;

Therefore, the reason for this difference should be considered;
I think the state of being his property is the difference.

1502.

1502.

Taṇḍule pana dhovitvā, niccāletuñhi celako;

But if a celaka is unable to wash the rice and constantly stir it;
If he is unable to do so, both the rice and the pot.

1503.

1503.

Paṭiggahetvā dhovitvā, āropetvā panuddhanaṃ;

Having received it, washed it, and placed it on the stove;
The monk should not make a fire, even having opened it for cooking.

1504.

1504.

Ñātabbā pakkakālasmiṃ, oropetvā yathāsukhaṃ;

At the time of cooking it should be known, having taken it down comfortably;
It should be eaten, there is no reason for receiving it again afterwards.

1505.

1505.

Āropetvā sace bhikkhu, uddhanaṃ suddhabhājanaṃ;

If a monk, having placed a clean pot on the stove;
Heats water for gruel, it is allowable.

1506.

1506.

Tatte panudake koci, ce pakkhipati taṇḍule;

If someone then throws rice into the hot water;
From then on, a fire should not be made by that monk.

1507.

1507.

Paṭiggahetvā taṃ yāguṃ, pātuṃ vaṭṭati bhikkhuno;

It is allowable for the monk to drink that gruel having received it;
If he cooks that afterwards, he is not freed from being incompletely ripened (sāmapāka).

1508.

1508.

Tatthajātaphalaṃ kiñci, saha cāleti valliyā;

It is not allowable to stir any fruit born there together with the vine;
Nor any fruit obtained from that.

1509.

1509.

Phalarukkhaṃ parāmaṭṭhuṃ, tamapassayitumpi vā;

It is indeed allowable for a monk to touch a fruit tree;
Or even to not see it, or even to tie it with thorns.

1510.

1510.

Saṇḍāsena ca dīghena, gahetvā thālakaṃ pana;

If, while a monk is cooking, having taken a dish with long tongs;
Oil or ash falls there.

1511.

1511.

Amuñcantena hatthena, pacitvā telathālakaṃ;

Having cooked the oil dish without releasing his hand;
Having taken it down afterwards, he should receive it, it is allowable.

1512.

1512.

Paṭiggahetvā aṅgāre, tāni dārūni vā pana;

Having received it, if coals or those firewood pieces;
Have been placed, the prior taking is allowable.

1513.

1513.

Ucchuṃ khādati ce bhikkhu, sāmaṇeropi icchati;

If a monk is eating sugarcane, and a novice desires some;
If he is told, "Cut and take from here," and he takes it.

1514.

1514.

Nattheva avasesassa, paṭiggahaṇakāraṇaṃ;

There is indeed no reason for receiving what remains;
This is the same decision for one eating a lump of jaggery.

1515.

1515.

Kātuṃ sāgaratoyena, loṇakiccaṃ tu vaṭṭati;

It is proper to use ocean water to fulfill the need for salt; because it is water, it does not go beyond what is considered yāvajīvika.

1516.

1516.

Idaṃ kālavinimmuttaṃ, udakaṃ paridīpitaṃ;

This water is described as freed from time, like Nibbāna by the wise great sage skilled in Nibbāna.

1517.

1517.

Udakena samā vuttā, himassa karakāpi ca;

Hail and ice are spoken of as similar to water; it is proper to drink water from wells and other sources, even if thick.

1518.

1518.

Khettesu kasitaṭṭhāne, bahalaṃ taṃ na vaṭṭati;

It is not proper if it is thick in cultivated fields; if it flows and goes to fill a river, it is proper.

1519.

1519.

Sobbhesu kakudhādīnaṃ, jale pupphasamākule;

In ponds, among kakudha trees and the like, in water teeming with flowers, their taste is not discernible, and it is not a reason for non-acceptance.

1520.

1520.

Sareṇukāni pupphāni, pānīyassa ghaṭe pana;

If flowers with pollen are put into a water pot, it should be accepted.

1521.

1521.

Paṭiggahetvā deyyāni, vāsapupphāni tattha vā;

Having accepted, they should be given away, or fragrant flowers there; if given among kamallikā flowers, it is proper as a conventional usage.

1522.

1522.

Appaṭiggahitasseva, dantakaṭṭhassa yo raso;

The taste of a toothpick that has not been accepted; if one unknowingly chews it, there is a pācittiya.

1523.

1523.

Sarīraṭṭhesu bhūtesu, kiṃ vaṭṭati? Na vaṭṭati?

Among the elements in the body, what is proper? What is not proper? All milk from allowable and unallowable meat is proper.

1524.

1524.

Kaṇṇakkhigūthako danta- malaṃ muttaṃ karīsakaṃ;

Earwax, eye mucus, feces, tooth grime, urine, dung, phlegm, nasal mucus, saliva, tears, and salt are proper.

1525.

1525.

Yaṃ panettha sakaṭṭhānā, cavitvā patitaṃ siyā;

Whatever here, having fallen from its own place, should fall; either into the bowl or into the hand, one should accept it again.

1526.

1526.

Aṅgalaggamavicchannaṃ, paṭiggahitameva taṃ;

If it is stuck to a finger and not dripping, that is considered accepted; sweat arises on the hands of one drinking hot rice-gruel.

1527.

1527.

Piṇḍāya vicarantassa, sedo hatthānusārato;

When wandering for alms, if sweat drips onto the bowl from the hands, it is not a reason for non-acceptance.

1528.

1528.

Sāmaṃ gahetvā cattāri, vikaṭāni nadāyake;

Having personally taken four rejected items from a river, immediately after being bitten by a snake, there is no offense in using them.

1529.

1529.

Pathaviṃ mattikatthāya, khaṇituṃ chinditumpi vā;

It is proper for a bhikkhu to dig or cut the earth for the sake of clay, or to cut down a tree for the sake of ashes.

1530.

1530.

Acchedagāhanirapekkhanisajjato ca;

And from sitting without considering obstruction or depth; and from abandoning the training, or through death, or change of gender; and through giving to a non-bhikkhu by another; all acceptance thus goes to destruction.

1531.

1531.

Durūpaciṇṇe niddiṭṭhaṃ, gahaṇuggahitassapi;

A dukkaṭa offense for what is not properly accumulated, for what is specified, for what is taken and accepted; for what is cooked inside, for what is self-cooked, and for what is partly cooked.

1532.

1532.

Paṭiggahitake tasmiṃ, appaṭiggahitasaññino;

In that which has been accepted, if one has the perception that it has not been accepted; even for one who is doubtful about it, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.

1533.

1533.

Paṭiggahitasaññissa, dantaponodakesupi;

For one with the perception of having accepted, even in the case of tooth-cleaning water, the arising and so on are the same as in the case of wool, without offense.

1534.

1534.

Navamajjhimatherabhikkhunīnaṃ;

For new, intermediate, and senior bhikkhunīs; the allowable action for a renunciate without distinction; all of this, not condensed, has been spoken by me; therefore, the judgment herein.

Dantaponakathā.

The Story of Tooth-Cleaning Water.

Bhojanavaggo catuttho.

The Fourth Chapter on Food.

1535.

1535.

Yaṃ kiñcicelakādīnaṃ, titthiyānaṃ panāmisaṃ;

Whatever cloth or other material, or non-allowable food, is given to sectarians; with each act of giving, there is a pācittiya offense.

1536.

1536.

Vicchinditvāna dentassa, payogagaṇanāvasā;

For one who gives after interrupting, according to the count of acts; there are pācittiya offenses for him, there is a set of three pācittiya offenses.

1537.

1537.

Udakaṃ dantaponaṃ vā, dentassa ca atitthiye;

For giving water or tooth-cleaning water to a non-sectarian; if one has the perception that it is for a sectarian, and for one who is doubtful, there is a dukkaṭa offense.

1538.

1538.

Dāpentassa panaññena, sāmaṇerādikena vā;

For one causing it to be given by another, either a sāmaṇera or someone else; for placing it in their receptacle, for giving it to those outside the boundary.

1539.

1539.

Ṭhapetvā bhojanaṃ tesaṃ, santike ‘‘gaṇhathā’’ti ca;

Having placed food for them, near them, saying "Take it"; there is no offense, the arising is like that of wool.

Acelakakathā.

The Story of the Naked Ascetics.

1540.

1540.

Dāpetvā vā adāpetvā, bhikkhu yaṃ kiñci āmisaṃ;

Whether having caused to be given or not, if a bhikkhu, desiring to do something, together with a woman, laughs and so on.

1541.

1541.

Uyyojeti hi ‘‘gacchā’’ti, vatvā tappaccayā pana;

If he urges her on, saying "Go," because of that reason; for him, in the mere urging on, there is a dukkaṭa offense with the first step.

1542.

1542.

Pādenassupacārasmiṃ, atikkante ca dukkaṭaṃ;

In approaching her by foot, there is a dukkaṭa offense when it is over; with the second step, there is a pācittiya offense, when the boundary is crossed.

1543.

1543.

Dassane upacārassa, hatthā dvādasa desitā;

In seeing, the approach is described as twelve cubits by hand; the measure is thus in hearing, but not in the open air.

1544.

1544.

Bhikkhusmiṃ tikapācitti, itare tikadukkaṭaṃ;

For the bhikkhu, there is a set of three pācittiya offenses, for others, a set of three dukkaṭa offenses; a dukkaṭa offense is stated for both, in planting a seed of discord.

1545.

1545.

Uyyojentassa kiccena, na dosummattakādino;

There is no offense for one urging on with a task, or for one who is insane, and so on; the modes of arising and so on are just like those for taking what is not given.

Uyyojanakathā.

The Story of Urging On.

1546.

1546.

Khuddake piṭṭhivaṃsaṃ yo, atikkamma nisīdati;

If a bhikkhu sits having crossed behind the back in a family where food is being served, there is a pācittiya offense for him.

1547.

1547.

Hatthapāsaṃ atikkamma, piṭṭhisaṅghāṭakassa ca;

Having crossed the distance of an arm's reach behind the back, and of the couch; there is an offense in a large place near a sleeping area.

1548.

1548.

Asayanighare tassa, sayanigharasaññino;

In a house without a sleeping area, if he has the perception of a house with a sleeping area; even for one who is doubtful about it, a dukkaṭa offense is described.

1549.

1549.

Nisīdantassanāpatti, bhikkhussa dutiye sati;

There is no offense for a bhikkhu when another is sitting; or when they are free from desire, or when both have left.

1550.

1550.

Nisinnassānatikkamma, padesaṃ vuttalakkhaṇaṃ;

For one sitting without crossing the area of the stated characteristic; the modes of arising and so on are similar, by the first and last object.

Sabhojanakathā.

The Story of Being in a Place Where Food is Served.

1551.

1551.

Catutthe pañcame ceva, vattabbaṃ natthi kiñcipi;

In the fourth and fifth, there is nothing to be said; whatever is to be said, all of that has been said in the two that are undetermined.

1552.

1552.

Samuṭṭhānaṃ panetesaṃ, anantarasamaṃ mataṃ;

But the arising of these is considered to be immediately connected; this alone is the difference, and so it is shown for these.

Rahopaṭicchannarahonisajjakathā.

The Story of Sitting in a Secret and Covered Place.

1553.

1553.

Bhojanānaṃ tu pañcannaṃ, vutto aññatarena yo;

Of the five foods, whatever has been said by another; if, without asking the bhikkhu who is present, he incurs [an offense] in families.

1554.

1554.

Cārittaṃ tassa pācitti, aññatra samayā siyā;

For him, a pācittiya offense regarding conduct, except for a reason; having set aside a reason, the bhikkhu of twofold stated characteristic.

1555.

1555.

Avītivatte majjhaṇhe, gharamaññassa gacchati;

If, before noon has passed, he goes to another's house; in stepping over the boundary of the house, there is a dukkaṭa offense with the first step.

1556.

1556.

Atikkante gharummāre, aparampi ca dukkaṭaṃ;

Having crossed the threshold of the house, there is another dukkaṭa offense; and with the second step, there is a pācittiya offense in crossing over completely.

1557.

1557.

Ṭhitaṭṭhāne sace bhikkhuṃ, oloketvā na passati;

If, in a standing place, he looks at a bhikkhu and does not see him; he is said to have entered without announcing, thinking "There is no one."

1558.

1558.

Sace dūre ṭhito hoti, asanto nāma bhikkhu so;

If a bhikkhu is standing far away, that bhikkhu is said to be "not present"; there is no need for announcement, having searched here and there.

1559.

1559.

Na doso samaye santaṃ, āpucchitvā ca gacchato;

There is no offense if there is a reason, or for one going having asked the bhikkhu who is present; if the path goes through a house to the monastery for the bhikkhu.

1560.

1560.

Titthiyānampi seyyaṃ vā, tathā bhikkhunupassayaṃ;

Or the residence of sectarians, or likewise, a bhikkhunī's residence; or a hall for alms, or the house of one who has faith.

1561.

1561.

Idaṃ pana samuṭṭhānaṃ, kathinena samaṃ mataṃ;

But this arising is considered similar to that of the Kathina; it is non-action, without intention, threefold intention, and threefold feeling.

Cārittakathā.

The Story of Conduct.

1562.

1562.

Sabbāpi sāditabbāva, catumāsapavāraṇā;

All four-month invitations should be accepted; by a bhikkhu who is not ill, and again, a constant invitation.

1563.

1563.

‘‘Viññāpessāmi rogasmiṃ, sati me paccaye’’ti ca;

"I will inform [you] when there is a reason for me, in case of illness"; that should not be refused, [saying] "I do not have an illness now."

1564.

1564.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, dukkaṭaṃ natatuttariṃ;

A set of three pācittiya offenses is stated, a dukkaṭa for one going beyond; for one with the perception of going beyond, and for one who is doubtful about it.

1565.

1565.

Natatuttarisaññissa, yehi yena pavārito;

For one with the perception of not going beyond, by whom and with what he was invited; having informed truthfully with others or more than that.

1566.

1566.

Viññāpentassa bhikkhussa, aññassatthāya vā pana;

For a bhikkhu informing for the sake of another; or for relatives, there is no offense, or even with his own wealth.

1567.

1567.

Tathā ummattakādīnaṃ, anāpatti pakāsitā;

Likewise, for those who are insane and so on, there is no offense declared; all the modes of arising and so on are considered similar to those for wandering around.

Bhesajjakathā.

The Story of Medicine.

1568.

1568.

Uyyuttaṃ bhikkhuno senaṃ, dassanatthāya gacchato;

For a bhikkhu going to see an army drawn up; except for a reason, there is a dukkaṭa offense for him at every step.

1569.

1569.

Dassanassupacārasmiṃ, ṭhatvā pācitti passato;

Standing within the boundary of sight, there is a pācittiya offense for one who sees; having released the boundary, from the act of seeing.

1570.

1570.

Ārohā pana cattāro, dve dve taṃpādarakkhakā;

There are four riders, two on each side, those who protect their feet; is called an elephant.

1571.

1571.

hayo;

horse;
One charioteer, one warrior, two people protecting the reins.

1572.

1572.

rathovutto, catusaccavibhāvinā;

chariot is said, by the one who discerns the four truths; is called infantry.

1573.

1573.

Vuttalakkhaṇasampannā, ayaṃ pacchimakoṭiyā;

Endowed with the stated characteristics, this, with the final limit; combined with the four divisions, is called an army.

1574.

1574.

Hatthiādīsu ekekaṃ, dassanatthāya gacchato;

For going to see each one of elephants and so on; even for one intending to go, and for one with the perception of going, there is a dukkaṭa offense.

1575.

1575.

Attano ca ṭhitokāsaṃ, sampattaṃ pana passati;

And if he sees that which has come to his own standing place; in times of danger, there is no offense, and in such a reason.

Uyyuttakathā.

The Story of Going to See an Army Drawn Up.

1576.

1576.

Catutthe divase attha-ṅgate sūriye arogavā;

If, on the fourth day after the sun has set, being healthy; he remains in the army, sits down, or lies down.

1577.

1577.

Ākāse iddhiyā seyyaṃ, pakappetu ca iddhimā;

In the sky, through psychic power, he should make an abode through psychic power; for him, indeed, there is a pācittiya offense, there is a set of three pācittiya offenses.

1578.

1578.

Ūnake ca tirattasmiṃ, atirekoti saññino;

If there are less than three nights, and he has the perception of more; even for one who is doubtful about it, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.

1579.

1579.

Purāruṇāva nikkhamma, tatiyāya ca rattiyā;

Having left before dawn, on the third night; there is no offense in dwelling again, or for one who is ill, or in times of danger.

Senāvāsakathā.

The Story of Dwelling in an Army Encampment.

1580.

1580.

Uyyodhikaṃ balaggaṃ vā, senābyūhampi vā pana;

For going to see a battle array, or the strength of the army, or a military parade; or a review of troops, there is a pācittiya offense.

1581.

1581.

Purime pana yo vutto, ‘‘hatthī dvādasaporiso’’;

But what was said earlier, "an elephant twelve purisas in length"; thus three elephants, are described as "a division of elephants."

1582.

1582.

Sesesupi ca eseva, nayo ñeyyo vibhāvinā;

In the remaining [divisions] also, this same method should be understood by the discerning one; the modes of arising and so on are the same as those for three strands of wool.

Uyyodhikakathā.

The Story of a Battle Array.

Aceḷakavaggo pañcamo.

The Fifth Chapter on Naked Ascetics.

1583.

1583.

surānāmāti vuccati;

Sura is said to be the name; meraya.

1584.

1584.

Bījato pana paṭṭhāya, pivantassubhayampi ca;

From the beginning of the seed, for one who drinks both; with each act and each act, there is a pācittiya offense for the bhikkhu.

1585.

1585.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, amajje majjasaññino;

A set of three pācittiya offenses is stated, for non-intoxicant with the perception of intoxicant; even for one who is doubtful about it, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.

1586.

1586.

Amajjaṃ majjavaṇṇañca, majjagandharasampi ca;

Non-intoxicant with the color of intoxicant, and the smell and taste of intoxicant; also for one who drinks ariṭṭha, loṇasovīra, and suttaka.

1587.

1587.

Vāsagāhāpanatthāya, pakkhipitvāna īsakaṃ;

For the purpose of fixing a handle, having inserted a small piece [of wood];
Even in the cooking of soup and the like, no offense is declared.

1588.

1588.

Hoteḷakasamuṭṭhānaṃ, acittaṃ vatthujānanā;

Arising from a hoteḷaka (place of amusement), without intention, knowledge of the object;
This, indeed, is a lokavajjaka (worldly offense) from drinking, as it is unwholesome.

Surāpānakathā.

Story about Drinking Alcohol.

1589.

1589.

Yena kenaci aṅgena, hasādhippāyino pana;

But if, with whatever part [of the body], with the intention of teasing,
He touches an upasampanna bhikkhu, there is a pācittiya for the bhikkhu.

1590.

1590.

Sabbattha dukkaṭaṃ kāya-paṭibaddhādike naye;

Everywhere a dukkata if the touching is related to the body, etc.;
Likewise, with an anupasampanna, a triple dukkata is declared.

1591.

1591.

Ettha cānupasampanna-ṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati bhikkhunī;

Here, if a bhikkhunī stands in the place of an anupasampanna;
For one touching her with the intention of playing, there is also a dukkata.

1592.

1592.

Anāpatti nahasādhi-ppāyassa phusato paraṃ;

No offense for one touching another without the intention of teasing;
For one touching when there is a need, and likewise for an ummattaka (madman), etc.

Aṅgulipatodakakathā.

Story about Prodding with Fingers.

1593.

1593.

Jale nimujjanādīna-matthāya pana kevalaṃ;

But solely for the purpose of submerging in the water, etc.;
In all cases of foot-movements, there is a dukkata for one descending [into the water].

1594.

1594.

Kīḷāpekkho sace hutvā, jale uparigopphake;

If a bhikkhu, being desirous of play, at the upper part of the ankle in the water,
Were to submerge, or emerge, or swim.

1595.

1595.

Payoge ca payoge ca, tassa pācittiyaṃ siyā;

At each application, for him there would be a pācittiya;
If he goes submerged in the water itself.

1596.

1596.

Hatthapādapayogehi, pācittiṃ paridīpaye;

He should explain a pācittiya for applications of hands and feet;
For one swimming with only the hands, he should do it with hand movements.

1597.

1597.

Yena yena panaṅgena, bhikkhuno tarato jalaṃ;

With whichever part a bhikkhu swims across the water;
With the application of that part, he should explain a pācittiya.

1598.

1598.

Taruto tīrato vāpi, pācitti patato jale;

A pācittiya from swimming, or from falling into the water from the bank;
A triple pācittiya is stated, and likewise a triple dukkata.

1599.

1599.

Pājentopi sace nāvaṃ, arittena phiyena vā;

If he, even propelling a boat, with an oar or a float;
Even raising a boat on the bank, he plays, there is a dukkata.

1600.

1600.

Hatthena vāpi pādena, kaṭṭhena kathalāya vā;

Whether with hand or foot, with wood or a potsherd;
For one removing water, there is an āpatti of dukkata.

1601.

1601.

Udakaṃ kañjikaṃ vāpi, cikkhallaṃ vāpi vikkhipaṃ;

Even for a bhikkhu scattering water, kañjika, or mud;
Playing, there is an āpatti of dukkata.

1602.

1602.

Vigāhitvā jalaṃ kicce, sati nimmujjanādikaṃ;

Having entered the water when there is a need, doing submerging, etc.;
There is no offense for one doing [that], and likewise for one going to the far shore.

1603.

1603.

Samuṭṭhānādayo tulyā, paṭhamantimavatthunā;

The originations, etc., are similar to the first and last thing;
In this immediately following one, there is no difference.

Hasadhammakathā.

Story about the Dhamma of Laughter.

1604.

1604.

Vuccamāno sace bhikkhu, paññatteneva bhikkhunā;

If a bhikkhu being addressed by a bhikkhu who is paññatta (appointed),
Does not want to do it, his speech is indeed Dhamma.

1605.

1605.

Yo asikkhitukāmova, na karoti panādaraṃ;

He who, not wanting to train, does not do it respectfully;
In that case of disrespect, one should declare a pācittiya.

1606.

1606.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, tikātītena satthunā;

A triple pācittiya is stated, by the Teacher when [the offense] is tripled;
Likewise, in disrespect towards an anupasampanna, there is a triple dukkata.

1607.

1607.

Suttenevābhidhammena, apaññattena bhikkhunā;

By a sutta (thread of discourse) itself, by abhidhamma, by a bhikkhu who is apaññatta;
There is a dukkata; by both, to a sāmaṇera what is said.

1608.

1608.

‘‘Ācariyānamayaṃ gāho, amhākaṃ tu paveṇiyā;

"This is the teaching of the teachers, but it has come to us by tradition,"
For one speaking thus, there is no offense, or for an ummattaka (madman), etc.

1609.

1609.

Ettha neva gahetabbo, gārayhācariyuggaho;

Here, one should not take up a blameworthy teacher's teaching;
The modes of origination, etc., are just like abuse.

Anādariyakathā.

Story about Disrespect.

1610.

1610.

Bhayasañjananatthāya, rūpādiṃ upasaṃhare;

For the purpose of causing fear, he makes a show of form, etc.;
Or he might tell a frightening story in the presence of another.

1611.

1611.

Disvā vā pana taṃ sutvā, mā vā bhāyatu, bhāyatu;

Whether having seen it, or having heard that, may [the other] be afraid, or be not afraid;
For the other bhikkhu, there is a pācittiya at that moment.

1612.

1612.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, tatheva tikadukkaṭaṃ;

A triple pācittiya is stated, and likewise a triple dukkata;
For a bhikkhu frightening a sāmaṇera or a householder.

1613.

1613.

Nabhiṃsāpetukāmassa, anāpattādikammino;

No offense for one not wanting to frighten, or for one who has done such [an act] accidentally;
All the originations, etc., are considered similar to the immediately preceding one.

Bhiṃsāpanakathā.

Story about Frightening.

1614.

1614.

Jotiṃ tappetukāmo ce, jalāpeyya jaleyya vā;

If wanting to make a light burn, he would light it, or it would burn;
Having set up such a condition, there is a pācittiya.

1615.

1615.

Sayaṃ samādahantassa, yāva jālā na jāyati;

For one preparing it himself, as long as the flame does not arise;
In all applications, there is an āpatti of dukkata.

1616.

1616.

Jāluṭṭhāne panāpatti, pācitti paridīpitā;

When the flame has arisen, a pācittiya is explained as the āpatti;
For one causing [the light] to burn by means of another, there is an āpatti of dukkata.

1617.

1617.

Gilānassa gilānoti, saññissa vimatissa vā;

For one who is ill, thinking that he is ill, or for one who is doubtful;
There is a dukkata for one raising a firebrand without lighting it up.

1618.

1618.

Vijjhātaṃ tujjalantassa, yathāvatthukatā matā;

For one who has lit it up, while it is burning, it is considered according to the actuality;
No offense for one who is ill, or if it is done by another.

1619.

1619.

Visibbentassa aṅgāraṃ, padīpujjālanādike;

For one extinguishing embers, for lighting a lamp, etc.;
All the originations, etc., are considered similar to the section on wandering.

Jotisamādahanakathā.

Story about Preparing a Light.

1620.

1620.

Apuṇṇe addhamāsasmiṃ, dese ce majjhime pana;

If, in less than half a month, in the middle country;
"I will bathe," and he prepares powder, clay, or cow dung.

1621.

1621.

Abhisaṅkharato sabba-payogesupi dukkaṭaṃ;

In all applications, there is a dukkata for one preparing it;
At the end of the bathing, there is a pācittiya for the bhikkhu.

1622.

1622.

Atirekaddhamāsūna-saññino vimatissa vā;

For one perceiving that more than half a month has passed, or for one who is doubtful;
There is a dukkata in more than half a month, and at the times [allowed].

1623.

1623.

Nhāyantassa anāpatti, nadīpārampi gacchato;

No offense for one bathing, even going to the far shore of a river;
Or having piled up sand, in prepared hollows likewise.

1624.

1624.

Paccantimepi vā dese, sabbesaṃ āpadāsupi;

Even in the border country, in all dangers;
This is similar to the eḷakaloma with its originations, etc.

Nhānakathā.

Story about Bathing.

1625.

1625.

Cīvaraṃ yaṃ nivāsetuṃ, sakkā pārupitumpi vā;

A robe which is able to be worn, or able to be put on;
A bhikkhu, having dyed one or the other of the six, wherever it may be.

1626.

1626.

Padese kaṃsanīlena, pattanīlena vā pana;

In an area with bronze-blue, or pot-blue;
With whatever black [dye], or even with mud.

1627.

1627.

Maṅgulassa mayūrassa, piṭṭhiakkhippamāṇakaṃ;

Without making a kappiya bindu (allowable dot), the size of a maṅgula's, or a peacock's, back-flicking;
There is a pācittiya for one using it.

1628.

1628.

Pāḷikaṇṇikakappo vā, na ca vaṭṭati katthaci;

A pāḷikaṇṇika shape, or a vaṭṭaka (round) shape is nowhere suitable;
One dot, or many dots, are suitable, [if] round.

1629.

1629.

Ādinnepi anādinna-saññino vimatissa ca;

Even when taken, for one perceiving it as not taken, or for one who is doubtful;
A dukkata is stated by the Sage; no offense is declared.

1630.

1630.

Kappe naṭṭhepi vā saddhiṃ, tena saṃsibbitesu vā;

When the allowable dot is lost, or in those sewn together with it;
Doing or not doing is stated; the origination is like the eḷaka section.

Dubbaṇṇakaraṇakathā.

Story about Making (a Robe) Dull-Colored.

1631.

1631.

Vikappanā duve vuttā, sammukhāsammukhātipi;

Two kinds of vikappanā (act of disposal) are stated: sammukhā (in the presence of) and asammukhā (not in the presence of);
While disposing with sammukhā, in the presence of one bhikkhu.

1632.

1632.

Ekattaṃ bahubhāvaṃ vā, dūrasantikatampi vā;

Unity or plurality, nearness or distance;
Having known the robes, according to the application of the wording.

1633.

1633.

‘‘Imāhaṃ cīvaraṃ tuyhaṃ, vikappemī’’ti niddise;

"I dispose of this robe to you," he should specify;
It is allowable to keep it thus much, but it is not allowable.

1634.

1634.

Paribhogādikaṃ tena, apaccuddhaṭato pana;

Because of use, etc., it is not to be withdrawn;
By him it should indeed be withdrawn; use, etc., is allowable.

1635.

1635.

‘‘Santakaṃ pana mayhaṃ tvaṃ, paribhuñja pariccaja;

"You use what is mine, abandon it;
You may do as is suitable," when it is said, it would be withdrawn.

1636.

1636.

Aparā sammukhā vuttā, bhikkhussekassa santike;

Another sammukhā (disposal in presence) is stated, in the presence of one bhikkhu;
Having taken the name of whichever fellow-Dhamma practitioner it may be.

1637.

1637.

‘‘Imāhaṃ cīvaraṃ tissa- bhikkhuno, tissatheriyā;

"I dispose of this robe to the bhikkhu Tissa, the bhikkhunī Tissa";
It should be said; again, it should be said by him.

1638.

1638.

‘‘Tissassa bhikkhuno vā tvaṃ, tassā tissāya theriyā;

"You use what belongs to the bhikkhu Tissa, or to that bhikkhunī Tissa;
Abandon it," or likewise.

1639.

1639.

Tato pabhuti sabbampi, paribhogādi vaṭṭati;

Thenceforth, all use, etc., is allowable;
Thus, even for parammukhā (disposal not in presence), it should be said in the presence of one.

1640.

1640.

‘‘Imāhaṃ cīvaraṃ tuyhaṃ, vikappatthāya dammi’’ti;

"I give this robe to you for the purpose of disposal";
Again, it should be said by him, "Who is your friend?" by the bhikkhu.

1641.

1641.

Itarenapi vattabbaṃ, ‘‘tisso tissā’’ti vā puna;

It should be said by the other, "Tissa, Tissa," or again;
It should be said by the bhikkhu, "This belongs to Tissa.

1642.

1642.

Tissāya theriyā vā tvaṃ, santakaṃ paribhuñja vā;

You may use or abandon what belongs to the bhikkhunī Tissa;
When it is said thus, it is again withdrawn.

1643.

1643.

Iccetāsu pana dvīsu, yāya kāyaci cīvaraṃ;

Thus, in these two, the robe for whichever one it may be;
Having disposed of it among the fellow-Dhamma practitioners, for whichever one of the five.

1644.

1644.

Apaccuddhārakaṃ vāpi, avissāsena tassa vā;

Even without withdrawing it, or without confidence in him;
By whichever bhikkhu that Vinaya act has been done here.

1645.

1645.

Cīvaraṃ paribhuñjeyya, hoti pācitti bhikkhuno;

If he should use the robe, there is a pācittiya for the bhikkhu;
For one re-resolving it, or for one giving it away, there is a dukkata.

1646.

1646.

Paccuddhārakavatthesu, apaccuddhārasaññino;

In robes that have been withdrawn, for one perceiving that they have not been withdrawn;
For one who is doubtful about that, there is an āpatti of dukkata.

1647.

1647.

Paccuddhāraṇasaññissa, vissāsā paribhuñjato;

For one perceiving that it has been withdrawn, for one using it with confidence;
There is no offense; the origination is similar to the kathina, etc.

Vikappanakathā.

Story about Disposal.

1648.

1648.

Adhiṭṭhānupagaṃ pattaṃ, cīvaraṃ vāpi tādisaṃ;

A bowl that is adhiṭṭhāna-upaga (used after resolution), or a robe that is such;
Likewise, a needle case, a kayabandhana (girdle), or a nisidana (sitting cloth).

1649.

1649.

Apanetvā nidhentassa, hasāpekkhassa kevalaṃ;

For one removing and hiding it, solely with the intention of teasing;
There is a pācittiya; for one ordering [another to do it], there is a dukkata.

1650.

1650.

Tenāpanihite tassa, pācittiṃ paridīpaye;

In what has been removed by him, he should explain a pācittiya;
It is stated that in what belongs to an anupasampanna, there is a triple dukkata.

1651.

1651.

Vinā vuttappakārāni, pattādīni tato pana;

Apart from the bowls, etc., mentioned above;
For one hiding another thing than that, there is an āpatti of dukkata.

1652.

1652.

Sabbesvanupasampanna-santakesupi dukkaṭaṃ;

In all things belonging to an anupasampanna, there is a dukkata;
No offense if it is badly placed, for one restoring it.

1653.

1653.

Tathā ‘‘dhammakathaṃ katvā, dassāmī’’ti nidheti ce;

Likewise, "Having given a Dhamma talk, I will give it back," if he hides it;
For one not wanting to harass, or for one not playing, etc.

1654.

1654.

Samuṭṭhānādayo tulyā, dutiyantimavatthunā;

The originations, etc., are similar to the second and last thing;
This, indeed, is only unwholesome, intentional, and a tivedana (requiring confession).

Cīvarāpanidhānakathā.

Story about Hiding a Robe.

Surāpānavaggo chaṭṭho.

The Sixth Chapter, about Drinking Alcohol.

1655.

1655.

Tiracchānagataṃ pāṇaṃ, mahantaṃ khuddakampi vā;

A living being gone to the animal realm, whether large or small;
There is an āpatti of pācittiya for a bhikkhu killing it intentionally.

1656.

1656.

Appāṇe pāṇasaññissa, vimatissubhayattha ca;

In what is not living, perceiving it as living, or being doubtful in both cases;
There is a dukkata; but no offense for one unintentionally not knowing.

1657.

1657.

Na ca māretukāmassa, tathā ummattakādino;

And not wanting to kill, likewise for an ummattaka (madman), etc.;
The originations, etc., are similar to the third and last thing.

Sañciccapāṇakathā.

Story about Intentional Killing.

1658.

1658.

Sappāṇakaṃ jalaṃ jānaṃ, pācitti paribhuñjato;

Knowing water to contain living beings, one who uses it incurs a pācittiya; according to the frequency of the effort, there would be many pācittiyas.

1659.

1659.

Ekeneva payogena, avicchijja sace pana;

But if, with a single effort, without interruption, one drinks a bowlful, there would be a single pācittiya.

1660.

1660.

Tādisenudakenassa, āviñchitvāna sāmisaṃ;

Having strained out the living beings with such water, if he washes a bowl or extinguishes embers,

1661.

1661.

Hatthena taṃ uḷuṅkena, gahetvā nhāyatopi vā;

Having taken it with the hand or a ladle, or even while bathing, a pācittiya is declared for each effort.

1662.

1662.

Appāṇakepi sappāṇa-saññissa ubhayatthapi;

Even in water without living beings, if there is the perception of living beings, in both cases, for a bhikkhu in doubt, there is an offense of dukkata.

1663.

1663.

Sappāṇepi ca appāṇe, appāṇamiti saññino;

And even when living beings are present, if one has the perception of no living beings, there is no offense for one who knows that "they do not die by being used."

1664.

1664.

Patanaṃ salabhādīnaṃ, ñatvā suddhena cetasā;

Knowing the falling of locusts, etc., with a pure mind, and here, knowing the lighting of a lamp to be with living beings,

1665.

1665.

Bhuñjato jalasaññāya, ñeyyā paṇṇattivajjatā;

For one who uses it with the perception of water, the fault of designation should be understood; sprinkling is said regarding sprinkling, but this is regarding usage.

1666.

1666.

Ayameva visesoti, tassa ceva panassa ca;

This itself is the distinction; and the principles of arising, etc., are just like those for taking what is not given, for both that and this.

Sappāṇakakathā.

The Story of Water with Living Beings.

1667.

1667.

Nihataṃ tu yathādhammaṃ, kiccādhikaraṇaṃ puna;

If a matter settled according to the Dhamma, a legal question, is to be settled again, for a bhikkhu who reopens it, there is a pācittiya.

1668.

1668.

‘‘Akataṃ dukkataṃ kammaṃ, kātabbaṃ punadevi’’ti;

Saying, "The deed was not done wrongly, it should be done again," it is not proper to overturn that deed.

1669.

1669.

Sace vippakate kamme, paṭikkosati taṃ puna;

If, when the deed is being processed, he objects to it again, it should be done after informing (the Sangha); it should not be done otherwise.

1670.

1670.

Adhamme pana kammasmiṃ, dhammakammanti saññino;

But regarding a deed that is not according to the Dhamma, if one has the perception that it is a deed according to the Dhamma, in doubt, or in both cases, there is an offense of dukkata.

1671.

1671.

‘‘Adhammena ca vaggena, na ca kammārahassa vā;

For one who knows that it was "not done unlawfully, nor by a faction, nor is he unworthy of the deed," there is no offense in reopening it.

1672.

1672.

Tathā ummattakādīna-manāpatti pakāsitā;

Thus, non-offenses are declared for those who are insane, etc.; the principles of arising, etc., are similar to those for abusive speech.

Ukkoṭanakathā.

The Story of Reopening.

1673.

1673.

Saṅghādisesaṃ duṭṭhullaṃ, āpattiṃ bhikkhuno pana;

Having known of a bhikkhu's gross offense entailing a Sanghādisesa, for him who conceals it, a pācittiya is declared.

1674.

1674.

Nikkhipitvā dhuraṃ tassa, paṭicchādanahetukaṃ;

Having relinquished the responsibility for it, the cause for concealment, if he informs another, and he (informs) yet another,

1675.

1675.

Evaṃ satampi bhikkhūnaṃ, sahassampi ca tāva taṃ;

Thus, even if there are a thousand bhikkhus, so long does that offense continue to be incurred, until the end is cut off.

1676.

1676.

Mūlenārocitasseva, dutiyassa pakāsite;

When it is revealed by the second one to whom it was originally reported, and then stopped by the third, it is said that the end is cut off.

1677.

1677.

Duṭṭhullāya ca duṭṭhalla-saññī pācittiyaṃ phuse;

Having the perception of a gross offense as gross, he incurs a pācittiya; but for the other two (offenses), dukkata is declared.

1678.

1678.

Aduṭṭhullāya sabbattha, niddiṭṭhaṃ tikadukkaṭaṃ;

For a non-gross offense, in all cases, a triple dukkata is specified; and in all cases, regarding those not yet fully ordained, there is a dukkata.

1679.

1679.

‘‘Saṅghassa bhedanādīni, bhavissantī’’ti vā pana;

Or (thinking) "There will be divisions in the Sangha, etc.," or not desiring to conceal, or not seeing an associate (in wrongdoing),

1680.

1680.

‘‘Paññāyissati kammena, sakenāyanti kakkhaḷo’’;

"It will be revealed by his own actions," (thinking thus) if he is harsh and does not inform, there is no offense; (nor is there an offense) for one who is insane, etc.

1681.

1681.

Dhuranikkhepatulyāva, samuṭṭhānādayo nayā;

The principles of arising, etc., are similar to relinquishing responsibility; bodily action, verbal action, non-action, and painful feeling.

Duṭṭhullakathā.

The Story of Gross Offenses.

1682.

1682.

Ūnavīsativassaṃ yo, kareyya upasampadaṃ;

He who confers full ordination on one who is less than twenty years old incurs a pācittiya; for the others, there is dukkata.

1683.

1683.

Upasampādito ceso, jānatā vā ajānatā;

If that person is ordained, whether knowingly or unknowingly, he remains not fully ordained; he must be ordained again.

1684.

1684.

Dasavassaccayenassa, upajjhāyassa ce sato;

If ten years have passed for his preceptor and he is alive, in ordination there is an offense; for others, there is no offense whatsoever.

1685.

1685.

Muñcitvā pana taṃ bhikkhuṃ, gaṇo ce paripūrati;

But if, having released that bhikkhu, the chapter is complete, they are fully ordained; there is no offense to be found.

1686.

1686.

Upajjhāyo sace hutvā, gaṇaṃ ācariyampi vā;

If, having become a preceptor, he seeks a chapter or a teacher, or a bowl, or designates a boundary,

1687.

1687.

‘‘Upasampādayissāmi’’, iti sabbesu tassa hi;

"I will confer full ordination," for him in all these (instances), with the motion and in the two Kammavācās, there is dukkata.

1688.

1688.

Kammavācāya osāne, pācitti paridīpitā;

At the end of the Kammavācā, a pācittiya is declared, even if the person is complete, (but has the) perception of being less than twenty.

1689.

1689.

Vimatissubhayatthāpi, hoti āpatti dukkaṭaṃ;

In doubt or in both cases, there is an offense of dukkata; having the perception that he is complete, in both cases, there is no offense.

1690.

1690.

Tathā ummattakassāpi, ādikammikabhikkhuno;

Thus, for one who is insane, etc., for a bhikkhu who is an original offender, the principles of arising, etc., are just like those for taking what is not given.

Ūnavīsatikathā.

The Story of One Less Than Twenty.

1691.

1691.

Theyyasatthena jānanto, saṃvidhāya sace pana;

If, knowing (them to be) thieves with weapons, he makes an arrangement and then goes on the road with them, for him there is a pācittiya.

1692.

1692.

Gamane saṃvidhāne ca, vattabbo yo vinicchayo;

The judgment that should be stated regarding going and arranging, since it has been stated in the Bhikkhunī Vagga, it is not repeated.

1693.

1693.

Maggāṭavivisaṅkete, yathāvatthukameva tu;

But in a wilderness road that is not isolated, just as the matter is, among those who do not make arrangements, even for one who makes arrangements himself,

1694.

1694.

Tathevātheyyasatthepi, theyyasatthanti saññino;

Likewise, even when the weapons are not stolen, if one has the perception that the weapons are stolen, in doubt, or in both cases, there is an offense of dukkata.

1695.

1695.

Atheyyasatthasaññissa, asaṃvidahatopi ca;

For one having the perception of weapons that are not stolen, even without arranging, there is no offense in danger, nor on an isolated road at the wrong time.

1696.

1696.

Theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kathitaṃ kāyacittato;

The arising of the stolen weapons offense is said to be from bodily and mental (action), and from bodily, verbal, and mental action; triple mind and triple feeling.

Theyyasatthakathā.

The Commentary on Stolen Weapons.

1697.

1697.

Hoti bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ, saṃvidhānena sattamaṃ;

The seventh (pācittiya) is together with a bhikkhunī, by arrangement; with regard to arising, etc., there is no distinction whatsoever.

Saṃvidhānakathā.

The Story of Arrangement.

1698.

1698.

Kammaṃ kileso pāko ca, upavādo atikkamo;

Action, defilement, result, disparagement, transgression—these five things are declared to be obstructive.

1699.

1699.

‘‘Anantarāyikā ete, yathā honti tathā ahaṃ;

"These are not obstructive; as they are, so I understand the Dhamma taught by the Sage," one who speaks thus,

1700.

1700.

Tikkhattuṃ tehi vattabbo, ye passanti suṇanti ca;

He should be admonished three times by those bhikkhus who see and hear, "Do not speak thus, venerable sir."

1701.

1701.

Dukkaṭaṃ avadantassa, taṃ anissajatopi ca;

For one who speaks thus, there is a dukkata; and also for one who does not relinquish (that view); with the motion, and in the two Kammavācās, there is a dukkata.

1702.

1702.

Kammavācāya osāne, pācitti paridīpitā;

At the end of the Kammavācā, a pācittiya is declared; a triple pācittiya is stated; for an unlawful act, a triple dukkata.

1703.

1703.

Nāpattākatakammassa, paṭinissajatopi ca;

There is no offense for one who has not committed an offense, nor for one who relinquishes (the view);

Samuṭṭhānādayo sabbe, vuttā samanubhāsane

All the arisings, etc., have been stated in the Anussāvana (admonition).

Ariṭṭhakathā.

The Story of Ariṭṭha.

1704.

1704.

Ñatvākatānudhammena, tathāvādikabhikkhunā;

Knowing (him to be) one who speaks in accordance with what is not the Dhamma and the Vinaya, a bhikkhu may live with him, eat with him, or sleep in the same dwelling; there is a pācittiya.

1705.

1705.

Uposathādikaṃ kammaṃ, karoto saha tena hi;

Doing the Uposatha, etc., with him, at the conclusion of the act, for him there is a pācittiya.

1706.

1706.

Ekeneva payogena, gaṇhato āmisaṃ bahuṃ;

Taking much alms food with a single effort, and likewise giving it, one at a time to many, and many to many,

1707.

1707.

Ukkhittake nipannasmiṃ, itaro seti ce pana;

When one who has been suspended is lying down, if another sleeps (with him), or when the other is lying down, the former sleeps (with him), or both sleep (together),

1708.

1708.

Nipajjanapayogānaṃ, vasenāpattiyo siyuṃ;

The offenses occur according to the efforts of lying down; the judgment is in accordance with one space and different proximity, or under one roof.

1709.

1709.

Anukkhittepi ukkhitta-saññino pana bhikkhuno;

Even if he has not been suspended, but the bhikkhu has the perception that he has been suspended, in doubt, or in both cases, a dukkata is declared.

1710.

1710.

Anāpattubhayatthāpi, anukkhittakasaññino;

There is no offense in either case for one having the perception that he has not been suspended, or (thinking) "He has abandoned that view," or "He has renounced it."

1711.

1711.

Tathā ummattakādīnaṃ, idaṃ paṇṇattivajjakaṃ;

Thus, for one who is insane, etc., this is the fault of designation; the principles of arising, etc., are just like those for taking what is not given.

Ukkhittakathā.

The Story of Suspension.

1712.

1712.

Tathā vināsitaṃ jānaṃ, upalāpeyya tena vā;

Thus, knowing him to be one who has been destroyed, one should cajole him, or support him, there is a pācittiya; or one should live or associate with him.

1713.

1713.

Saṃvāsena ca liṅgena, daṇḍakammena nāsanā;

Association, and destruction by the sign (of a bhikkhu), and destruction by a penalty, these three are intended here; destruction by a penalty.

1714.

1714.

Sambhogā sahaseyyā ca, anantarasamā matā;

Association and sleeping together are understood to be immediately adjacent; the judgment should be understood in accordance with the principle stated there.

1715.

1715.

Samuṭṭhānādayo sabbe, ariṭṭhena samā matā;

All the arisings, etc., are understood to be the same as with Ariṭṭha; nothing needs to be said here; all of this is clear.

Kaṇṭakakathā.

The Story of Kaṇṭaka.

Sappāṇakavaggo sattamo.

The Seventh Chapter, On Water with Living Beings.

1716.

1716.

Vuccamāno hi bhikkhūhi, bhikkhu sikkhāpadena yo;

When a bhikkhu is being instructed by bhikkhus in a training rule, if he says, "In this training rule, I will not train until

1717.

1717.

Yāva nāññaṃ viyattañca, pakataññuṃ bahussutaṃ;

I ask another who is learned, astute, knowledgeable, and well-versed (in the texts)," for him there is a pācittiya.

1718.

1718.

Satthunānupasampanne, dīpitaṃ tikadukkaṭaṃ;

A triple dukkata is declared by the Teacher for one not fully ordained; this does not apply to self-effacement; even if both are being instructed.

1719.

1719.

Apaññattena tassevaṃ, vadato hoti dukkaṭaṃ;

For one who speaks thus about what has not been prescribed, there is a dukkata; there is no offense for one who is insane, etc., who says, "I will train."

Sahadhammikakathā.

The Story of a Co-Religious.

1720.

1720.

Uddiṭṭhehi kimetehi, kukkuccādinidānato;

By these precepts that have been recited, from grounds of worry, etc., there is a pācittiya offense, in disparaging a training rule.

1721.

1721.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, tatheva tikadukkaṭaṃ;

A triple pācittiya is stated, and likewise a triple dukkata; if he disparages in the presence of one not fully ordained,

1722.

1722.

Dukkaṭaṃ panubhinnampi, aññadhammavivaṇṇane;

There is a dukkata even when interrupted, in disparaging another Dhamma; not desiring to disparage, (if he says) "Study the Suttanta,

1723.

1723.

Vinayaṃ pana pacchāpi, handa pariyāpuṇissasi’’;

But you can study the Vinaya later, go on, you will study it," to one who speaks thus, and likewise for one who is insane, etc.,

1724.

1724.

Anāpattīti ñātabbaṃ, samuṭṭhānādayo nayā;

It should be known that there is no offense; the principles of arising, etc., are similar to those for abusive speech, for him who is immediately near.

Vilekhanakathā.

The Story of disparaging.

1725.

1725.

Aññāṇena panāpatti, mokkho nevassa vijjati;

By ignorance there is an offense, there is no release for him; the bhikkhu should be made to act in accordance with how the Dhamma stands.

1726.

1726.

Tassāropaniyo moho, uttarimpi hi bhikkhuno;

The delusion should be imposed on him; even on a bhikkhu who is superior, after censuring that person with a second act (of the Sangha),

1727.

1727.

Evaṃ āropite mohe, yadi moheti yo pana;

Thus, when delusion has been imposed, if he then causes delusion, the pācittiya has been stated for that person who causes delusion.

1728.

1728.

Adhamme pana kammasmiṃ, dīpitaṃ tikadukkaṭaṃ;

For an act that is not in accordance with the Dhamma, a triple dukkata is declared; and when delusion has not been imposed, a dukkata is described.

1729.

1729.

Na ca mohetukāmassa, vitthārenāsutassapi;

Not desiring to cause delusion, even for one who has not heard it in detail; or less than two or three times, or for one who has heard it in detail,

1730.

1730.

Anāpattīti viññeyyaṃ, tathā ummattakādino;

It should be understood that there is no offense for one who is insane, and so on; all the aspects beginning with origin (samuṭṭhāna) are considered similar to the preceding.

Mohanakathā.

Explanation of Delusion.

1731.

1731.

Kuddho deti pahāraṃ ce, tassa pācittiyaṃ siyā;

If, being angry, he inflicts a blow, there is a pācittiya for him; but for a bhikkhu, in striking, if he intends to strike.

1732.

1732.

Dinne bhijjatu sīsaṃ vā, pādo vā paribhijjatu;

If, when struck, the head is broken or the foot is fractured, whether he dies or not, pācittiya has been declared.

1733.

1733.

Virūpakaraṇāpekkho, ‘‘iccāyaṃ na virocati’’;

Expecting disfigurement, thinking, "Thus, this will not look good," if he cuts off his ear or nose, there is a dukkata.

1734.

1734.

Tathevānupasampanne, itthiyā purisassa vā;

Likewise, to one who is not ordained, to a woman or a man, or even to a being gone to the animal realm, if he inflicts a blow, there is a dukkata.

1735.

1735.

Sace paharatitthiñca, bhikkhu rattena cetasā;

If a bhikkhu strikes a female non-believer with a hateful mind, a grave offense is defined for him by the great sage.

1736.

1736.

Pahāraṃ deti mokkhādhi-ppāyo doso na vijjati;

In inflicting a blow with the intention of liberation, there is no fault; by bodily contact, or with something to be forfeited.

1737.

1737.

Passitvā antarāmagge, coraṃ paccatthikampi vā;

Seeing a thief or an adversary in the middle of the road, coming with the intention to harm, saying, "Do not come here, layperson."

1738.

1738.

Iti vatvā panāyantaṃ, ‘‘gaccha re’’ti ca muggaraṃ;

Having said this, if he comes, or, saying "Go away," and taking a club or a weapon, strikes and then departs.

1739.

1739.

Anāpatti sace tena, pahārena matepi ca;

There is no offense even if he dies from that blow; and this same method is said for rogues, jackals and deer.

1740.

1740.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, sese ca tikadukkaṭaṃ;

Triple pācittiya is stated, and in the remainder, triple dukkata; arising from body and mind, with intention, and painful feeling.

Pahārakathā.

Explanation of Striking.

1741.

1741.

Kāyaṃ vā kāyabaddhaṃ vā, uccāreyya sace pana;

If he raises his body or something connected with his body, there is an offense of pācittiya, due to the cause of raising it.

1742.

1742.

Uggiritvā viraddho so, pahāraṃ deti ce pana;

Having raised it, if he is obstructed and inflicts a blow, not intending to strike, since it was given, there would be a dukkata.

1743.

1743.

Sace tena pahārena, pahaṭassa ca bhikkhuno;

If by that blow, any limb whatsoever of the bhikkhu who was struck, such as a hand, is broken, there is a dukkata.

1744.

1744.

Seso anantare vutta-nayena vinayaññunā;

The remainder should be understood according to the method stated in the preceding, along with origin (samuṭṭhāna) and so on, by one skilled in the Vinaya.

Talasattikathā.

Explanation of Throwing a Palm.

1745.

1745.

Amūlakena saṅghādi-sesena pana bhikkhu yo;

A bhikkhu who accuses or might accuse another bhikkhu of an unfounded saṅghādisesa offense, there is a pācittiya for him.

1746.

1746.

Tikapācittiyaṃ tattha, diṭṭhācāravipattiyā;

Triple pācittiya is seen there, due to transgression of view and conduct; for the accuser, an offense of dukkata; and in the remainder, triple dukkata.

1747.

1747.

Tathāsaññissanāpatti, tathā ummattakādino;

The offense is in accordance with perception, likewise for one who is insane, and so on; the methods beginning with origin (samuṭṭhāna) are similar to those for malicious speech (omasavāda).

Amūlakakathā.

Explanation of the Unfounded.

1748.

1748.

Sañcicca pana kukkuccaṃ, uppādentassa bhikkhuno;

Intentionally, for a bhikkhu who causes remorse, saying, "I think you are less than twenty years old," and so on.

1749.

1749.

Hoti vācāya vācāya, pācitti pana bhikkhuno;

There is a pācittiya for the bhikkhu for each utterance, in such a case where there is no reason otherwise.

1750.

1750.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, sese ca tikadukkaṭaṃ;

Triple pācittiya is stated, and in the remainder, triple dukkata; for one not intending to cause it, there is no fault of remorse.

1751.

1751.

‘‘Hitesitāyahaṃ maññe, nisinnaṃ itthiyā saha;

"I think I was sitting with a woman out of a desire for welfare, and you ate at the wrong time; may it not be so," saying thus.

1752.

1752.

Tathā ummattakādīna-manāpatti pakāsitā;

Likewise, no offense is declared for one who is insane, and so on; all the aspects beginning with origin (samuṭṭhāna) are considered similar to the preceding.

Sañciccakathā.

Explanation of Intention.

1753.

1753.

Sace bhaṇḍanajātānaṃ, bhikkhūnaṃ pana bhikkhu yo;

If a bhikkhu stands listening as an eavesdropper to bhikkhus who are quarreling, there is a pācittiya for him.

1754.

1754.

‘‘Yaṃ ime tu bhaṇissanti, taṃ sossāmī’’ti gacchato;

Going, thinking, "I will hear what these ones will say," for him, desiring to accuse, there is a dukkata at every step.

1755.

1755.

Purato gacchato sotuṃ, ohīyantassa dukkaṭaṃ;

For one going in front to listen, or for one falling back, there is a dukkata; this same judgment applies to one going quickly.

1756.

1756.

Ṭhitokāsaṃ panāgantvā, yadi mantenti attano;

Having come to a place that is not hidden, if they consult privately, or here, having coughed or indicated that it should be known.

1757.

1757.

Tassevamakarontassa, pācitti savane siyā;

For him thus acting, there is a pācittiya for listening; triple pācittiya is stated, and in the remainder, triple dukkata.

1758.

1758.

‘‘Imesaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā, oramissa’’nti gacchato;

Going, thinking, "Having heard the speech of these ones, I will stop," likewise, no offense is declared for one who is insane, and so on.

1759.

1759.

Theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ, idaṃ hoti kriyākriyaṃ;

Its origin (samuṭṭhāna) is through theft; it is both active and inactive; a bodily action and a verbal action, with aversion, and painful feeling.

Upassutikathā.

Explanation of Eavesdropping.

1760.

1760.

Dhammikānaṃ tu kammānaṃ, chandaṃ datvā sace pana;

Having given consent for lawful actions, if he afterwards revokes it, there is a pācittiya for each utterance.

1761.

1761.

Adhamme pana kammasmiṃ, dhammakammanti saññino;

In an unlawful action, perceiving it as a lawful action, in doubt, or in both ways, there is an offense of dukkata.

1762.

1762.

‘‘Adhammena ca vaggena, tathākammārahassa ca;

Knowing that "These ones are doing the action unlawfully and factionally, and it is not appropriate for the action," if he revokes it, there is also.

1763.

1763.

Tathā ummattakādīna-manāpatti pakāsitā;

Likewise, no offense is declared for one who is insane, and so on; the methods beginning with origin (samuṭṭhāna) are similar to those for the unfounded.

Kammapaṭibāhanakathā.

Explanation of Rejecting an Action.

1764.

1764.

Yāva ārocitaṃ vatthu, avinicchitameva vā;

Either until the matter is announced, or while it is still undecided, or the motion (ñatti) is established, the kammavācā does not proceed to completion.

1765.

1765.

Etasmiṃ antare kammaṃ, kopetuṃ parisāya hi;

In this interval, to disrupt the action of the assembly (parisā), for one abandoning the striking distance (hatthapāsa), there is an offense of dukkata.

1766.

1766.

Adatvā jahite chandaṃ, tassa pācittiyaṃ siyā;

If he departs without giving consent (chanda), there is a pācittiya for him; in a lawful action, in an unlawful one, and in doubt, there is a dukkata.

1767.

1767.

Adhammepi ca kammasmiṃ, dhammakammanti saññino;

Even in an unlawful action, perceiving it as a lawful action, thinking, "There will be disputes and so on for the Saṅgha."

1768.

1768.

Gilāno vā gilānassa, karaṇīye na dosatā;

There is no fault for one who is ill or in what should be done for one who is ill; nor for one not intending to disrupt the action, by urination and so on.

1769.

1769.

Pīḷitassāgamissāmi, iccevaṃ gacchatopi vā;

For one going thinking, "I will come when I am relieved," origin (samuṭṭhāna) is the same as for samanubhāsa; it is both active and inactive.

Chandaṃ adatvā gamanakathā.

Explanation of Going Without Giving Consent.

1770.

1770.

Samaggena ca saṅghena, saddhiṃ datvāna cīvaraṃ;

Having given a robe together with the unanimous Saṅgha, if he afterwards revokes it from a bhikkhu who has been approved.

1771.

1771.

Tassa vācāya vācāya, pācitti paridīpitā;

For him, for each utterance, pācittiya has been declared; triple pācittiya is stated for a robe in a lawful action.

1772.

1772.

Ṭhapetvāññaparikkhāraṃ, datvā khīyati dukkaṭaṃ;

Setting aside other requisites, giving and then revoking it, there is a dukkata; even a robe or something else for one not approved by the Saṅgha.

1773.

1773.

Tathevānupasampanne, sabbatthāpi ca dukkaṭaṃ;

Likewise, to one who is not ordained, there is a dukkata in every way; acting according to consent (chanda) and so on, and by nature.

1774.

1774.

Khīyantassa anāpatti, tathā ummattakādino;

There is no offense for one who is revoking under compulsion, likewise for one who is insane, and so on; the methods beginning with origin (samuṭṭhāna) should be understood as similar to those for the unfounded.

Dubbalakathā.

Explanation of Revoking.

1775.

1775.

Idaṃ tiṃsakakaṇḍasmiṃ, antimena ca sabbathā;

This is entirely similar in every way to the last one in the thirtieth section; all of the twelfth is the same; this alone is the difference.

1776.

1776.

Tattha nissaggiyaṃ vuttaṃ, attano pariṇāmanā;

There, the forfeitable (nissaggiya) is stated as the appropriation for oneself; here, the pure pācittiya is the appropriation for an individual.

Pariṇāmanakathā.

Explanation of Appropriation.

Sahadhammikavaggo aṭṭhamo.

The Eighth Chapter on Lawful Conduct.

1777.

1777.

Anikkhante ce rājasmiṃ, anikkhantāya deviyā;

When the king has not departed, nor the queen has departed, for one who crosses the threshold of their sleeping quarters.

1778.

1778.

Dukkaṭaṃ paṭhame pāde, pācitti dutiye siyā;

There is a dukkata in the first footstep, a pācittiya in the second; if his arrival is not known by the queen or the king.

1779.

1779.

Paṭisaṃvidite neva-paṭisaṃviditasaññino;

For one with the perception of being expected, or not being expected; there, a dukkata has been declared for one who is doubtful.

1780.

1780.

Paṭisaṃviditasaññissa, neva ca khattiyassa vā;

For one with the perception of being expected, and not by the noble or by one who has been consecrated with the consecration of a noble.

1781.

1781.

Ubhosubhinnamaññasmiṃ, nikkhante visatopi vā;

In both instances, or when different or someone else has departed, or for one who is scattered; there is no fault for one who is insane, and so on; it is both active and inactive due to the kathina.

Antepurakathā.

Explanation of the Inner Quarters.

1782.

1782.

Rajataṃ jātarūpaṃ vā, uggaṇhantassa attano;

For one taking silver or gold for oneself, there is a nissaggiya offense for him, or for one causing it to be taken.

1783.

1783.

Gaṇapuggalasaṅghānaṃ, navakammassa cetiye;

For causing it to be taken for the community (gaṇa), an individual, the Saṅgha, for new construction (navakamma) or a shrine, there is a dukkata for one taking it or causing it to be taken.

1784.

1784.

Avasesañca muttādi-ratanaṃ attanopi vā;

For one taking the remaining jewels, such as pearls, either for oneself or for the purpose of the Saṅgha and so on, there is a dukkata.

1785.

1785.

Sace kappiyavatthuṃ vā, vatthuṃ vāpi akappiyaṃ;

If it is suitable property or unsuitable property, even if it is a palm leaf, or an earring.

1786.

1786.

Bhaṇḍāgārikasīsena, yaṃ kiñci gihisantakaṃ;

Whatever belongs to a householder under the authority of a treasurer, there is a pācittiya offense for him if he receives it back.

1787.

1787.

‘‘Idaṃ ṭhapetvā dehī’’ti, vuttena pana kenaci;

If someone says, "Setting this aside, give it," saying "It is not allowable," it should certainly not be deposited.

1788.

1788.

‘‘Ṭhapehī’’ti ca pātetvā, sace gacchati puggalo;

If, having dropped it saying, "Deposit it," the person goes away, this is called an encumbrance; but it is allowable to deposit it.

1789.

1789.

Anuññāte panaṭṭhāne, uggahetvā anādarā;

In a place that has been agreed upon, having taken it without respect, for one not properly putting it away, there is an offense of dukkata.

1790.

1790.

Anuññāte panaṭṭhāne, gahetvā ratanaṃ pana;

In a place that has been agreed upon, having taken a jewel, or properly putting away a commodity that is considered a jewel.

1791.

1791.

Gaṇhantassa ca vissāsaṃ, tāvakālikameva ca;

For one taking it with trust, and only temporarily, there is no fault for one who is insane, and so on; it is an occasion for conduct and association.

Ratanakathā.

Explanation of Jewels.

1792.

1792.

Majjhaṇhasamayā uddhaṃ, aruṇuggamato pure;

The time from after the midday hour until before the sunrise, in this interval, the time is called the wrong time (vikāla).

1793.

1793.

Santaṃ bhikkhumanāpucchā, vikāle paccayaṃ vinā;

Without asking the bhikkhus who are there, at the wrong time, without a reason, in entering the enclosure of a village that is enclosed.

1794.

1794.

Aparikkhittagāmassa, upacārokkamepi vā;

In entering the vicinity of a village that is not enclosed, there is a dukkata in the first footstep, a pācittiya in the second.

1795.

1795.

Atha sambahulā gāmaṃ, vikāle pavisanti ce;

If many enter a village at the wrong time, it should be entered only after asking each other, and not otherwise.

1796.

1796.

Gacchanti ce tato aññaṃ, tato aññanti vaṭṭati;

If they go from there to another, and from there to another, it is allowable; there is no need to ask again, even in a hundred villages.

1797.

1797.

Passambhetvāna ussāhaṃ, vihāratthāya niggatā;

Having encouraged support and gone out for the sake of the monastery, if they enter another, they should ask in between.

1798.

1798.

Katvā kulaghare bhatta- kiccaṃ aññattha vā pana;

Having done the meal service in a family's house or elsewhere, if he wants to wander, or for the sake of ghee for the sick.

1799.

1799.

Āpucchitvāva gantabbaṃ, passe ce bhikkhu labbhati;

It should be entered only after asking; if a bhikkhu is seen, it is available; if not available, it should be gone to as is convenient.

1800.

1800.

Otaritvā mahāvīthiṃ, bhikkhuṃ yadi ca passati;

Having descended onto the main street, if he sees a bhikkhu, there is no need to ask, it should be wandered as is convenient.

1801.

1801.

Gāmamajjhena maggena, gacchantasseva bhikkhuno;

For a bhikkhu going along a path through the village, if the thought arises in his mind, "I will go for alms here":

1802.

1802.

Āpucchitvāva gantabbaṃ, passe ce bhikkhu vijjati;

He should go after asking permission, if a bhikkhu is to be found; if he goes without asking permission, what is the use of asking permission from the path?

1803.

1803.

Tikapācittiyaṃ, kāle, vikāloyanti saññino;

A threefold pācittiya applies to one who, being aware, says that it is the proper time when it is the improper time; even if he is doubtful about the time, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.

1804.

1804.

Āpucchitvāva santaṃ vā, anāpucchā asantakaṃ;

For a bhikkhu entering a dwelling after asking permission when someone is present, or without asking permission when no one is present,

1805.

1805.

Gacchato antarārāmaṃ, bhikkhunīnaṃ upassayaṃ;

Or going to an antarārāma, a bhikkhunī's residence, or likewise to a meeting hall, or a titthiya's residence.

1806.

1806.

Siyā gāmena maggo ce, anāpattāpadāsupi;

If the path goes through the village, there is no offense even in times of danger; all occurrences and origins are considered the same as with the kathina.

1807.

1807.

Na kevalamanāpucchā, abandhitvā ca bandhanaṃ;

Not only by going without asking permission, but also by not tying the ties, or by going without opening the saṅghāṭi, is there blamelessness.

Vikālagāmappavesanakathā.

Account of Entering a Village at the Improper Time.

1808.

1808.

Aṭṭhidantamayaṃ sūci-gharaṃ vāpi visāṇajaṃ;

If a bhikkhu has a needle case made of bone or ivory, or made of horn,

1809.

1809.

Lābhe bhedanakaṃ tassa, pācittiyamudīritaṃ;

There is an offense of dukkaṭa for him in causing it to be made or making it himself. If it is for the sake of another, a pācittiya is declared,

1810.

1810.

Aññena ca kataṃ laddhā, dukkaṭaṃ paribhuñjato;

And if, having obtained one made by another, he uses it, there is a dukkaṭa; there is no offense in the wilderness, in the case of knobs and hinges.

1811.

1811.

Dakapuñchaniyā vāsi-jaṭe ummattakādino;

For a water strainer, an axe, matted hair, a madman, etc.; the modes of origination and so on are considered the same as for travelling.

Sūcigharakathā.

Account of the Needle Case.

1812.

1812.

Navaṃ mañcampi pīṭhaṃ vā, kārāpentena bhikkhunā;

When a bhikkhu has a new bed or chair made,

1813.

1813.

Kārāpetabbamevaṃ tu, ṭhapetvā heṭṭhimāṭaniṃ;

It should be made with the measure of eight fingers, according to the Sugata's finger, leaving out the lower rung.

1814.

1814.

Aññassatthāya karaṇe, tathā kārāpanepi ca;

If he transgresses that, there is a pācittiya. If it is for the sake of another, likewise in causing it to be made,

1815.

1815.

Anāpatti pamāṇena, karontassappamāṇikaṃ;

And if, having obtained one made by another, he uses it, there is a dukkaṭa.

1816.

1816.

Neva chinditukāmo ce, nikhaṇitvā pamāṇato;

There is no offense if, making it according to the measure, he makes it without measure; having obtained it, he uses it after cutting off the legs.

Mañcakathā.

Account of the Bed.

1817.

1817.

Mañcaṃ vā pana pīṭhaṃ vā, tūlonaddhaṃ kareyya yo;

Whosoever should have a bed or chair stuffed with cotton wool,

1818.

1818.

Anāpatti panāyoge, bandhane aṃsabaddhake;

It is said that this leads to its being torn up, a pācittiya in an improper manner. But there is no offense in applying it, in tying it, in shoulder straps,

1819.

1819.

Aññena ca kataṃ laddhā, uddāletvā nisevato;

In a bibbohana, a strainer, or a bag, etc., for a bhikkhu. And if, having obtained one made by another, he uses it after unstuffing it,

Tūlonaddhakathā.

Account of being Stuffed with Cotton Wool.

1820.

1820.

Nisīdanaṃ karontena, kātabbaṃ tu pamāṇato;

When making a sitting cloth, it should be made according to measure; if he exceeds the measure, there is an offense of dukkaṭa in the effort.

1821.

1821.

Paṭilābhena sacchedaṃ, pācittiyamudīritaṃ;

It is declared that cutting it up upon receiving it is a pācittiya; if he splits it in two places, it should have three fringes.

1822.

1822.

Anāpatti pamāṇena, karontassa tadūnakaṃ;

There is no offense if, making it according to measure, he makes it less than that; the modes are the same as for travelling when making a canopy, etc.

Nisīdanakathā.

Account of the Sitting Cloth.

1823.

1823.

Roge kaṇḍupaṭicchādi, kātabbā hi pamāṇato;

A covering for sores should be made according to measure when there is illness; if he exceeds the measure, there is an offense of dukkaṭa in the effort.

1824.

1824.

Paṭilābhena sacchedaṃ, pācittiyamudīritaṃ;

It is declared that cutting it up upon receiving it is a pācittiya; the mode of no offense here is considered the same as in the preceding case.

Kaṇḍupaṭicchādikathā.

Account of the Covering for Sores.

1825.

1825.

Pamāṇeneva kātabbā, tathā vassikasāṭikā;

Likewise, the vassikasāṭikā should be made only according to measure; if he exceeds the measure, the mode is the same as in the preceding case.

Vassikasāṭikakathā.

Account of the Vassikasāṭikā.

1826.

1826.

Cīvarena sace tulya-ppamāṇaṃ sugatassa tu;

If a bhikkhu should have a robe made with the same measure as the Sugata's robe, there is an offense of dukkaṭa in the making.

1827.

1827.

Paṭilābhena sacchedaṃ, pācittiyamudīritaṃ;

It is declared that cutting it up upon receiving it is a pācittiya; the mode of no offense is considered exactly the same as in the preceding case.

1828.

1828.

Dīghaso ca pamāṇena, nava tassa vidatthiyo;

Lengthwise, the measure is nine spans; breadthwise, six are determined by the Sugata's span.

1829.

1829.

Aññena ca kataṃ laddhā, sevato dukkaṭaṃ bhave;

If, having obtained one made by another, he uses it, there is an offense of dukkaṭa; all the occurrences and origins are considered the same as for travelling.

Nandakathā.

Account of the Limit.

Rājavaggo navamo.

The Ninth Chapter, the Chapter on the King.

Iti vinayavinicchaye pācittiyakathā niṭṭhitā.

Here ends the Pācittiya Account in the Vinayavinicchaya.

Pāṭidesanīyakathā

Pāṭidesanīya Account

1830.

1830.

Yo cantaragharaṃ bhikkhu, paviṭṭhāya tu hatthato;

Whatsoever edible thing or food a bhikkhu, having entered a dwelling, should receive from the hand of a bhikkhunī who is not a relative,

1831.

1831.

Sahatthā paṭiggaṇheyya, khādanaṃ bhojanampi vā;

If he should accept it with his own hand, there is an offense of dukkaṭa in the receiving, and pāṭidesanīya in the consuming.

1832.

1832.

Rathikāyapi vā byūhe, sandhisiṅghāṭakesu vā;

This mode also applies to one standing in a street, a crossroads, or at a junction, or in a place like an elephant stable.

1833.

1833.

Rathikāya sace ṭhatvā, deti bhikkhuni bhojanaṃ;

If, standing in a street, a bhikkhunī gives food, there is an offense; if a bhikkhu accepts it standing in an antarārāma.

1834.

1834.

Etthantaragharaṃ tassā, paviṭṭhāya hi vākyato;

In this case, her entering the antaraghara is understood from her words, and the place where the bhikkhu stands is not specified.

1835.

1835.

Tasmā bhikkhuniyā ṭhatvā, ārāmādīsu dentiyā;

Therefore, there is no offense for one accepting when a bhikkhunī gives standing in a monastery, etc., or when standing in a street, etc.

1836.

1836.

Yāmakālikasattāha-kālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ;

In accepting yāmakālika, sattāhakālika, and yāvajīvika for the purpose of food, there is an offense of dukkaṭa in the consumption.

1837.

1837.

Āmisena asambhinna-rasaṃ sandhāya bhāsitaṃ;

It is said with reference to flavor unmixed with meat; there is a pāṭidesanīya offense if it is of a single, mixed flavor.

1838.

1838.

Ekatoupasampanna-hatthato paṭigaṇhato;

In accepting from the hand of one not fully ordained, even with respect to the four kinds of kālika, there is an offense of dukkaṭa for the purpose of food.

1839.

1839.

Ñātikāyapi aññāti-saññino vimatissa vā;

There is also a dukkaṭa for one who perceives a relative as a non-relative, or for one who is in doubt; there is a dukkaṭa for one who perceives a relative as such, or likewise for a non-relative.

1840.

1840.

Dāpentiyā anāpatti, dadamānāya vā pana;

There is no offense for one causing it to be given, or for one giving it, or for one giving it after placing it inside a monastery, etc.

1841.

1841.

Gāmato nīharitvā vā, deti ce bahi vaṭṭati;

If, having taken it out from a village, she gives it outside, it is allowable; if she gives three kinds of kālika, saying, "Eat when there is a need."

1842.

1842.

Hatthato sāmaṇerīnaṃ, sikkhamānāya vā tathā;

Accepting from the hand of a sāmaṇerī or a sikkhamānā is considered the same in origination as the eḷakaloma.

Paṭhamapāṭidesanīyakathā.

First Pāṭidesanīya Account.

1843.

1843.

Avutte ‘‘apasakkā’’ti, ekenāpi ca bhikkhunā;

If he accepts meat for the purpose of consumption when "apasakkā" has not been said by even one bhikkhu,

1844.

1844.

Gahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ bhoge, pāṭidesaniyaṃ siyā;

There is an offense of dukkaṭa in the receiving, and pāṭidesanīya in the consuming; there is a dukkaṭa for one who does not prevent one not fully ordained.

1845.

1845.

Tathevānupasampannā-yupasampannasaññino;

Likewise, for one who is not fully ordained but perceives himself as fully ordained; for one who is in doubt about that, there is likewise an offense of dukkaṭa.

1846.

1846.

Anāpattittano bhattaṃ, padāpeti na deti ce;

There is no offense if he causes alms food to be given but does not give it; likewise, if he does not cause alms food to be given to another, but gives it.

1847.

1847.

Yaṃ na dinnaṃ taṃ dāpeti, na dinnaṃ yattha vāpi ca;

He causes that to be given which has not been given, or where it has not been given; there, even that is caused to be given equally to all bhikkhunīs.

1848.

1848.

Vosāsantī ṭhitā sikkha-mānā vā sāmaṇerikā;

A sikkhamānā or sāmaṇerikā standing in dependence on her menstruation, and the five kinds of food, except in the case of a madwoman, etc.

1849.

1849.

Kathinena samuṭṭhānaṃ, samānanti pakāsitaṃ;

It is declared that the origination is the same as with the kathina; this is said to be non-action, threefold thought, and threefold announcement.

Dutiyapāṭidesanīyakathā.

Second Pāṭidesanīya Account.

1850.

1850.

Sekkhanti sammate bhikkhu, laddhasammutike kule;

A bhikkhu, agreed upon as a trainee, entering a family with the agreement, before being invited,

1851.

1851.

Agilāno gahetvā ce, paribhuñjeyya āmisaṃ;

If, being not ill, he should accept and consume meat, there is an offense of dukkaṭa in the receiving, and pāṭidesanīya in the consuming.

1852.

1852.

Yāmakālikasattāha-kālike yāvajīvike;

In the receiving and consuming of yāmakālika, sattāhakālika, and yāvajīvika, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.

1853.

1853.

Asekkhasammate sekkha-sammatanti ca saññino;

It is declared likewise for one who perceives one agreed upon as a non-trainee as agreed upon as a trainee; for one who is in doubt about that, it is declared likewise.

1854.

1854.

Anāpatti gilānassa, gilānassāvasesake;

There is no offense for one who is ill, or for what is left over for one who is ill; if alms food is given there to others who have been invited.

1855.

1855.

Gharato nīharitvā vā, denti ce yattha katthaci;

If, having taken it out from the house, they give it anywhere, or in the case of daily alms food, etc., likewise for a madman, etc.

1856.

1856.

Anāgate hi bhikkhumhi, gharato paṭhamaṃ pana;

If, when a bhikkhu is in the future, having first taken it out from the house, they give it when he has arrived at the door, it is allowable.

1857.

1857.

Bhikkhuṃ pana ca disvāva, nīharitvāna gehato;

If, however, having seen a bhikkhu, having taken it out from the house, they give it, it is not allowable; the origination is like the eḷakūpama.

Tatiyapāṭidesanīyakathā.

Third Pāṭidesanīya Account.

1858.

1858.

Gahaṭṭhenāgahaṭṭhena, itthiyā purisena vā;

If a householder or non-householder, a woman or a man, having entered a monastery or its vicinity,

1859.

1859.

‘‘Itthannāmassa te bhattaṃ, yāgu vā āharīyati’’;

[Says,] "Alms food or rice-gruel is being brought for you, so-and-so"; this is said to be announced, and is called paṭisaṃvidita.

1860.

1860.

Āharīyatu taṃ pacchā, yathārocitameva vā;

That may be brought afterward, or just as announced; or, having made even his retinue into another large one,

1861.

1861.

Yāguyā viditaṃ katvā, pūvaṃ bhattaṃ haranti ce;

If, having made it known as rice-gruel, they bring alms food beforehand; kurundiyaṃ.

1862.

1862.

Kulāni pana aññāni, deyyadhammaṃ panattano;

If other families bring their own gift-worthy things along with it, all of that is also allowable.

1863.

1863.

Anārocitamevaṃ yaṃ, yaṃ ārāmamanābhataṃ;

That which is not announced in this way, which has not been brought into the monastery, that is called asaṃvidita, made known to a co-religionist.

1864.

1864.

Yaṃ asaṃviditaṃ katvā, ābhataṃ pana taṃ bahi;

Having made what is asaṃvidita, that is brought outside; or, having sent it outside to the monastery, having had it prepared, he should bring it.

1865.

1865.

Gantvā vā antarāmagge, gahetabbaṃ tu bhikkhunā;

Or it should be accepted by a bhikkhu, having gone in the middle of the path; if, not having done so, having accepted it within the monastery from its vicinity,

1866.

1866.

Gahetvājjhoharantassa, gahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ siyā;

When consuming it, there is an offense of dukkaṭa in the receiving; pāṭidesanīya is considered to apply to the acts of consuming.

1867.

1867.

Paṭisaṃviditeyeva, asaṃviditasaññino;

Even in what is paṭisaṃvidita, for one who perceives it as asaṃvidita; for one who is in doubt about that, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.

1868.

1868.

Paṭisaṃvidite tassa, gilānassāvasesake;

In what is paṭisaṃvidita for him, for what is left over for the sick; or for one who, having accepted it outside the monastery, consumes it inside.

1869.

1869.

Tatthajātaphalādīni, anāpatteva khādato;

There is no offense in eating fruits, etc., that have originated there; all occurrences and origins are considered the same as with the kathina.

Catutthapāṭidesanīyakathā.

Fourth Pāṭidesanīya Account.

Iti vinayavinicchaye pāṭidesanīyakathā niṭṭhitā.

Here ends the Pāṭidesanīya Account in the Vinayavinicchaya.

Sekhiyakathā

Sekhiya Account

1870.

1870.

Yo anādariyeneva, purato pacchatopi vā;

If, out of disrespect, he drapes it in front or behind;
Having let it hang down, he should wear it; there is an offense of dukkata for him.

1871.

1871.

Hatthisoṇḍāditulyaṃ tu, nivāsentassa dukkaṭaṃ;

If he wears it like an elephant's trunk, there is an offense of dukkata for him;
The one who is afraid of offenses should always wear it perfectly round.

1872.

1872.

Jāṇumaṇḍalato heṭṭhā, aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇakaṃ;

It should be worn letting it hang down eight fingerbreadths below the kneecap;
It is not proper to wear it shorter than that.

1873.

1873.

Asañciccāsatissāpi, ajānantassa kevalaṃ;

There is no offense for one who is unintentional, inattentive, or simply unaware;
No offense for one who is ill, in danger, or insane.

Parimaṇḍalakathā.

The Discourse on Wearing it Perfectly Round.

1874.

1874.

Ubho koṇe samaṃ katvā, sādaraṃ parimaṇḍalaṃ;

Having made both corners equal, carefully make it perfectly round;
It should be worn thus; for one who does not do so, there is an offense of dukkata.

1875.

1875.

Avisesena vuttaṃ tu, idaṃ sikkhāpadadvayaṃ;

These two training rules, however, are stated without distinction;
Therefore, whether in a house or a monastery, it should be made perfectly round.

Dutiyaṃ.

The Second.

1876.

1876.

Gaṇṭhikaṃ paṭimuñcitvā, katvā koṇe ubho samaṃ;

Having unfastened the knot, and made both corners equal;
Covering the wrist and the neck, he should go.

1877.

1877.

Tathā akatvā bhikkhussa, jattūnipi urampi ca;

If a bhikkhu does not do so, and with his collarbones and chest;
Exposed, he goes as he pleases, there is an offense of dukkata.

Tatiyaṃ.

The Third.

1878.

1878.

Galavāṭakato uddhaṃ, sīsañca maṇibandhato;

Above the throat-latch, the head, and from the wrist;
Below on the hands, on the calves, and on both feet.

1879.

1879.

Vivaritvāvasesañca, chādetvā ce nisīdati;

Having exposed these and covered the rest, he sits down;
He is said to be well-covered; there is no offense for the attendant.

Catutthaṃ.

The Fourth.

1880.

1880.

Hatthaṃ vā pana pādaṃ vā, acālentena bhikkhunā;

A bhikkhu should go composed, without moving his hands or feet;
There is no particular exception in the sixth.

Pañcamachaṭṭhāni.

The Fifth and Sixth.

1881.

1881.

Satīmatāvikārena, yugamattañca pekkhinā;

Mindful, without agitation, looking only a yoke's distance ahead;
He should go restrained, with lowered eyes.

1882.

1882.

Yattha katthaci hi ṭṭhāne, ekasmiṃ antare ghare;

In any place whatsoever, in a solitary house;
It is proper to look around to see if there is any danger.

1883.

1883.

Yo anādariyaṃ katvā, olokento tahiṃ tahiṃ;

If, having acted disrespectfully, he looks around here and there;
And thus enters a house, there is an offense of dukkata, the eighth.

Sattamaṭṭhamāni.

The Seventh and Eighth.

1884.

1884.

Ekato ubhato vāpi, hutvā ukkhittacīvaro;

Having lifted his robe, either on one side or both sides;
If he goes inside from the doorpost, there is an offense of dukkata.

Navamaṃ.

The Ninth.

1885.

1885.

Tathā nisinnakālepi, nīharantena kuṇḍikaṃ;

Likewise, while sitting, when taking out the water pot;
It should be given without lifting up the robe; there is no offense for the attendant.

Dasamaṃ.

The Tenth.

Paṭhamo vaggo.

The First Chapter.

1886.

1886.

Na vaṭṭati hasantena, gantuñceva nisīdituṃ;

It is not proper to go or sit down laughing;
However, a slight smile is proper at something amusing.

Paṭhamadutiyāni.

The First and Second.

1887.

1887.

Appasaddena gantabbaṃ, catutthepi ayaṃ nayo;

One should go without making a loud noise; this rule also applies to the fourth;
For one who makes a loud noise, there is an offense of dukkata in both cases.

Tatiyacatutthāni.

The Third and Fourth.

1888.

1888.

Kāyappacālakaṃ katvā, bāhusīsappacālakaṃ;

Having moved his body, or moved his arms or head;
As he goes, there is an offense of dukkata; and likewise as he sits.

1889.

1889.

Kāyaṃ bāhuñca sīsañca, paggahetvā ujuṃ pana;

Having held his body, arms, and head straight;
He should go and sit with balanced posture.

1890.

1890.

Nisīdanena yuttesu, tīsu vāsūpagassa hi;

In these three rules related to sitting, there is no offense for the attendant;
This should be known by the wise one, skilled in the Vinaya.

Dutiyo vaggo.

The Second Chapter.

1891.

1891.

Khambhaṃ katvā sasīsaṃ vā, pārupitvāna gacchato;

Having made a pillar, either with the head, or having covered himself, he goes;
An offense of dukkata was stated by the Buddha, and likewise squatting on his heels.

1892.

1892.

Hatthapallatthikāyāpi, dussapallatthikāya vā;

By using the hands as a cushion, or using the robe as a cushion;
For him in a house, there is an offense of dukkata when sitting down.

1893.

1893.

Dutiye ca catutthe ca, chaṭṭhe vāsūpagassa tu;

In the second, fourth, and sixth, there is no offense for the attendant;
Thus, twenty-six (rules) have been declared according to propriety.

Chaṭṭhaṃ.

The Sixth.

1894.

1894.

Sakkaccaṃ satiyuttena, bhikkhunā pattasaññinā;

Carefully, with mindfulness, the bhikkhu, with the bowl in mind;
Should accept alms food, with balanced curry, skillfully.

1895.

1895.

Sūpo bhattacatubbhāgo, ‘‘samasūpo’’ti vuccati;

Curry is one-fourth of the rice, it is called "balanced curry";
Curry made from green grams, black grams, or horse grams, is called "curry".

1896.

1896.

Anāpatti asañcicca, gilānassa raserase;

There is no offense for one who is unintentional, for the sick due to taste;
Likewise for relatives, etc., or for the sake of something else with wealth.

Sattamaṭṭhamanavamāni.

The Seventh, Eighth, and Ninth.

1897.

1897.

Antolekhāpamāṇena, pattassa mukhavaṭṭiyā;

It should be accepted filled to the extent of the inner line, at the mouth of the bowl;
But not for one who has undertaken a vow.

1898.

1898.

Tattha thūpīkataṃ katvā, gaṇhato yāvakālikaṃ;

There, having made it like a mound, for one who takes it as long as it lasts;
Whatever offense there may be for that bhikkhu, it is an offense of dukkata.

1899.

1899.

Adhiṭṭhānūpage patte, kālikattayameva ca;

In a bowl without a vow, even if it is only for a limited time;
The rest, making it like a mound, is all proper, without doubt.

1900.

1900.

Dvīsu pattesu bhattaṃ tu, gahetvā pattamekakaṃ;

Having taken rice in two bowls, if he sends one bowl;
Filled to the bhikkhus, it is proper.

1901.

1901.

Patte pakkhippamānaṃ yaṃ, ucchukhaṇḍaphalādikaṃ;

When pieces of sugarcane, fruits, etc., are thrown into the bowl;
If it sinks to the bottom, it is not considered a mound.

1902.

1902.

Pupphatakkolakādīnaṃ, ṭhapetvā ce vaṭaṃsakaṃ;

Having placed a garland of flowers, tagara flowers, etc.;
Since it is given for only a limited time, it is not considered a mound.

1903.

1903.

Vaṭaṃsakaṃ tu pūvassa, ṭhapetvā odanopari;

Having placed a garland of cakes on top of the rice;
If they give alms food, this is considered a mound.

1904.

1904.

Bhattassūpari paṇṇaṃ vā, thālakaṃ vāpi kiñcipi;

Having placed a leaf or a plate or anything at all on top of the rice;
If he takes it having filled it completely, it is proper.

1905.

1905.

Paṭiggahetumevassa, taṃ tu sabbaṃ na vaṭṭati;

It is all not proper only when he is receiving it;
Having been taken, well-taken, afterwards, it should be eaten as one pleases.

Tatiyo vaggo.

The Third Chapter.

1906.

1906.

Paṭhamaṃ dutiyaṃ vutta-nayaṃ tu tatiye pana;

The method that was stated in the first (and) second, but in the third;
Without showing disrespect, it should be eaten in order.

1907.

1907.

Aññesaṃ attano bhattaṃ, ākiraṃ pana bhājane;

For others, if he scatters his own rice in the dish;
There is no offense if he does not despise it, and likewise breaking off a little extra.

Tatiyaṃ.

The Third.

1908.

1908.

Catutthe yaṃ tu vattabbaṃ, vuttaṃ pubbe asesato;

Whatever should be said in the fourth has been said completely before;
In the fifth, there is an offense for crushing and consuming the matthaka.

1909.

1909.

Anāpatti gilānassa, parittepi ca sesake;

There is no offense for the sick, even in a small amount that remains;
But for one who crushes it together in one place, and consumes it dragging it along.

Catutthapañcamāni.

The Fourth and Fifth.

1910.

1910.

Yo bhiyyokamyatāhetu, sūpaṃ vā byañjanampi vā;

Whoever, intending to get more, would cover up the curry or sauce;
With rice, for him there is an offense of dukkata.

Chaṭṭhaṃ.

The Sixth.

1911.

1911.

Viññattiyaṃ tu vattabbaṃ, apubbaṃ natthi kiñcipi;

In the rules on requesting, there is nothing unprecedented;
But in the eighth, even the sick one is not freed from blame for complaining.

1912.

1912.

‘‘Dassāmi dāpessāmī’’ti, olokentassa bhikkhuno;

It should be known that there is no offense for a bhikkhu who is looking with the intention, "I will give," "I will have it given";
And not with the perception of complaining.

Aṭṭhamaṃ.

The Eighth.

1913.

1913.

Mahantaṃ pana moraṇḍaṃ, kukkuṭaṇḍañca khuddakaṃ;

The morsel should be made in a medium size;
A large one like a peacock's egg, and a small one like a chicken's egg.

1914.

1914.

Khajjake pana sabbattha, mūlakhādaniyādike;

In all kinds of edibles, roots, etc., and things to be chewed;
There is no offense for the sick, the insane, etc., whether it is proper or improper.

Navamaṃ.

The Ninth.

1915.

1915.

Adīgho pana kātabbo, ālopo parimaṇḍalo;

The morsel should not be made long, but round;
There is no offense in what is proper or improper, when breaking off a little extra to chew.

Dasamaṃ.

The Tenth.

Catuttho vaggo.

The Fourth Chapter.

1916.

1916.

Anāhaṭe mukhadvāraṃ, appatte kabaḷe pana;

Before the morsel has reached the mouth, without having brought it to the opening of the mouth;
For him who opens his own mouth, there is an offense of dukkata.

Paṭhamaṃ.

The First.

1917.

1917.

Mukhe ca sakalaṃ hatthaṃ, pakkhipantassa dukkaṭaṃ;

For one who puts his whole hand in his mouth, there is an offense of dukkata;
Having made a morsel in his mouth, it is not proper to speak.

1918.

1918.

Vacanaṃ yattakenassa, paripuṇṇaṃ na hoti hi;

The speech of one who is restrained is not complete;
For one who speaks while there is still some in his mouth, there is an offense of dukkata.

1919.

1919.

Mukhe harītakādīni, pakkhipitvā katheti yo;

If he puts haritaki etc., in his mouth and speaks;
If the speech is complete, it is proper to speak.

Dutiyatatiyāni.

The Second and Third.

1920.

1920.

Yo piṇḍukkhepakaṃ bhikkhu, kabaḷacchedakampi vā;

If a bhikkhu who is a morsel-thrower, or a morsel-cutter;
Were to eat like a monkey, with his cheek full, there is an offense of dukkata.

Catutthapañcamachaṭṭhāni.

The Fourth, Fifth, and Sixth.

1921.

1921.

Niddhunitvāna hatthaṃ vā, bhattaṃ sitthāvakārakaṃ;

Having shaken off his hand, or making rice grains fall;
Or licking his tongue, and likewise saying "chapu chapū".

1922.

1922.

Anādaravaseneva, bhuñjato hoti dukkaṭaṃ;

For one who eats disrespectfully, there is an offense of dukkata;
In the seventh and eighth, there is no offense when sweeping away refuse.

Sattamadasamāni.

The Seventh and Tenth.

Pañcamo vaggo.

The Fifth Chapter.

1923.

1923.

Katvā evaṃ na bhottabbaṃ, saddaṃ ‘‘suru surū’’ti ca;

One should not eat making a sound "suru surū" like this;
And it is not proper to eat licking the hand.

1924.

1924.

Phāṇitaṃ ghanayāguṃ vā, gahetvā aṅgulīhi taṃ;

Having taken molasses or thick gruel;
It is proper to put the fingers into the mouth and eat with the fingers.

1925.

1925.

Na patto lehitabbova, ekāyaṅgulikāya vā;

The bowl should not be licked, either with one finger;
Or with one lip or the tongue, it should not be licked.

Catutthaṃ.

The Fourth.

1926.

1926.

Sāmisena tu hatthena, na ca pānīyathālakaṃ;

The water pot should not be taken with a hand that is soiled with food;
It is prohibited, due to its repulsiveness.

1927.

1927.

Puggalassa ca saṅghassa, gahaṭṭhassattanopi ca;

Belonging to an individual, or to the Sangha, or even to a householder;
Also a conch shell, or a potsherd, or a plate.

1928.

1928.

Tasmā na ca gahetabbaṃ, gaṇhato hoti dukkaṭaṃ;

Therefore, it should not be taken; for one who takes it, there is an offense of dukkata;
But it is proper to take it with a hand that is not soiled with food.

Pañcamaṃ.

The Fifth.

1929.

1929.

Uddharitvāpi bhinditvā, gahetvā vā paṭiggahe;

Having removed it, or broken it, or taken it in acceptance;
There is no offense when throwing it outside the house.

Chaṭṭhaṃ.

The Sixth.

1930.

1930.

Chattaṃ yaṃ kiñci hatthena, sarīrāvayavena vā;

If he teaches the Dhamma while holding an umbrella, or anything else, in his hand, or with a part of his body, there is an offense of dukkata.

Sattamaṃ.

The Seventh.

1931.

1931.

Ayameva nayo vutto, daṇḍapāṇimhi puggale;

The same method has been stated for a person holding a stick;
The stick should be four cubits long, measured by a medium-sized hand.

Aṭṭhamaṃ.

The Eighth.

1932.

1932.

Tatheva satthapāṇissa, dhammaṃ deseti dukkaṭaṃ;

Likewise, it is an offense of dukkata if he teaches the Dhamma to one holding a weapon;
But if he was not holding a weapon, and stood having put it aside.

Navamaṃ.

The Ninth.

1933.

1933.

Dhanuṃ sarena saddhiṃ vā, dhanuṃ vā sarameva vā;

Either with an arrow, or with the bow alone, or only the arrow; whether ready to shoot or not, if one takes a bow-staff,

1934.

1934.

Ṭhitassapi nisinnassa, nipannassāpi vā tathā;

even while standing, sitting, or lying down, if one teaches the Saddhamma, there is an offense of dukkata.

1935.

1935.

Paṭimukkampi kaṇṭhamhi, dhanuṃ hatthena yāvatā;

But as long as the bow with the string attached is in the hand, one should not teach the Dhamma; it is proper.

Chaṭṭho vaggo.

Sixth chapter.

1936.

1936.

Pādukāruḷhakassāpi, dhammaṃ deseti dukkaṭaṃ;

It is an offense of dukkata to teach the Dhamma while wearing shoes; likewise, while standing astride, or with a head covering.

Paṭhamaṃ.

First.

1937.

1937.

Upāhanagatassāpi, ayameva vinicchayo;

The same ruling applies to one who is wearing foot coverings; in all cases, for one who is not ill, whether in a vehicle or on a bed.

1938.

1938.

Nipannassāgilānassa, kaṭasāre chamāya vā;

It is not proper for one who is not ill to teach while lying down on a mat, on the ground, on a seat, on a high couch, or while sitting or standing.

1939.

1939.

Na ca vaṭṭati desetuṃ, ṭhatvā vā uccabhūmiyaṃ;

Nor is it proper to teach while standing on a high place, or while going among beds, or for one who is going to beds.

1940.

1940.

Samāne vāpi ucce vā, nipanne neva vaṭṭati;

It is not proper [for one who is] lying down whether on the same level or higher; it is proper for one who is lying down [to teach] one who is standing, and for one who is lying down.

1941.

1941.

Nisinnena nisinnassa, ṭhitassāpi ca vaṭṭati;

It is proper for one who is sitting to [teach] one who is sitting or standing; likewise, it is proper for one who is standing to teach one who is standing.

Dutiyatatiyacatutthāni.

Second, third, fourth.

1942.

1942.

Pallatthikā nisinnassa, agilānassa dehino;

It is an offense of dukkata to teach the Dhamma to a healthy person who is sitting cross-legged, or to one with his head wrapped.

1943.

1943.

Kesantaṃ vivarāpetvā, deseti yadi vaṭṭati;

If he uncovers the edge of his hair and teaches, it is proper; the same ruling applies to one whose head is covered.

Pañcamachaṭṭhasattamāni.

Fifth, sixth, seventh.

1944.

1944.

Aṭṭhame navame vāpi, dasame natthi kiñcipi;

There is nothing in the eighth, ninth, or tenth [cases]; even if a young monk, having gone to the presence of a Thera, stands,

1945.

1945.

Pañhaṃ pucchati ce thero, kathetuṃ na ca vaṭṭati;

if the Thera asks a question, it is not proper to answer; but one who knows should speak beside him to another.

Aṭṭhamanavamadasamāni.

Eighth, ninth, tenth.

Sattamo vaggo.

Seventh chapter.

1946.

1946.

Gacchato purato pañhaṃ, na vattabbaṃ tu pacchato;

One should not answer a question from behind to someone going in front; a learned person in the Vinaya should say, "I will speak to the one behind."

1947.

1947.

Saddhiṃ uggahitaṃ dhammaṃ, sajjhāyati hi vaṭṭati;

It is proper to recite the Dhamma that has been learned together; it is proper to speak in unison, even while going.

Paṭhamaṃ.

First.

1948.

1948.

Ekekassāpi cakkassa, pathenāpi ca gacchato;

It is proper for one who is going along the road on each side of the road, or on the same level as the path.

Dutiyaṃ.

Second.

1949.

1949.

Tatiye natthi vattabbaṃ, catutthe harite pana;

There is nothing to be said in the third [case]; in the fourth, regarding green things, it would be a dukkata to do any of the four beginning with excretion.

1950.

1950.

Jīvarukkhassa yaṃ mūlaṃ, dissamānaṃ tu gacchati;

The root of a living tree that is visible as one goes, or a branch touching the ground, all of that is indeed green.

1951.

1951.

Sace aharitaṃ ṭhānaṃ, pekkhantasseva bhikkhuno;

If a bhikkhu is looking at a place that is not green, it is proper for excrement to come out suddenly.

1952.

1952.

Palālaṇḍupake vāpi, gomaye vāpi kismici;

It should be done on a pile of straw, or on dung, or on something; it is proper to cover the green afterward, obscuring it.

1953.

1953.

Kato aharite ṭhāne, haritaṃ eti vaṭṭati;

Having done it in a place that is not green, it is proper to go to a green place; a nasal discharge, etc., is included here with saliva.

Catutthaṃ.

Fourth.

1954.

1954.

Vaccakuṭisamuddādi-udakesupi bhikkhuno;

There is no dukkata for a bhikkhu in latrines, ponds, or bodies of water, since they are not for use [as places to excrete].

1955.

1955.

Deve pana ca vassante, udakoghe samantato;

But when the gods are raining, in a flood of water all around, it is proper to do it in the water if one cannot find a place that is not waterlogged.

Pañcamaṃ.

Fifth.

Aṭṭhamo vaggo.

Eighth chapter.

1956.

1956.

Samuṭṭhānādayo ñeyyā, sekhiyānaṃ panettha hi;

Here, in the Sekhiyas, the originations, etc., should be understood; the four beginning with Ujjagghika, with food and with the mouth,

1957.

1957.

Chamānīcāsanaṭṭhāna-pacchā uppathavā dasa;

Chamānīcāsanaṭṭhāna, afterwards, the path or the ten [teachings]; the originations, etc., are the same, as said in Samanubhāsana.

1958.

1958.

Chattaṃ daṇḍāvudhaṃ satthaṃ, pādukāruḷhupāhanā;

Umbrella, staff, weapon, knife, wearing shoes, foot coverings,

1959.

1959.

Dhammadesanātulyāva, samuṭṭhānādinā pana;

vehicle, bed, cross-legged, wrapped up, and veiled are equivalent to teaching the Dhamma, in terms of origination, etc.; requesting soup and rice is considered the same as theft.

1960.

1960.

Avasesā tipaññāsa, samānā paṭhamena tu;

The remaining fifty-three are the same as the first; in all the Sekhiyas, there is no offense in times of danger.

1961.

1961.

Ujjhānasaññike thūpī-kate sūpapaṭicchade;

In the three training rules concerning the thūpi made into an Ujjhānasaññika covering for the soup, a sick person is not subject to [offense], nor is one who has not gone [there].

Sekhiyakathā.

Account of the Sekhiyas.

1962.

1962.

Imaṃ viditvā vinaye vinicchayaṃ;

Having understood this judgment in the Vinaya, one becomes skilled, with a trained mind; he is not easily defeated by others; therefore, one should always learn, being concentrated.

1963.

1963.

Imaṃ paramasaṃkaraṃ saṃkaraṃ;

Having understood this, the ultimate, the mingled, the unmingled, the named, the unnamed, the highest, the excessive, the beneficial, why do they not go to the degenerate teaching in the dispensation?

Iti vinayavinicchaye

Thus ends the Bhikkhuvibhaṅga in the Vinayavinicchaya.

Bhikkhuvibhaṅgakathā niṭṭhitā.

Account.

Bhikkhunīvibhaṅgo

Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga

1964.

1964.

Bhikkhunīnaṃ hitatthāya, vibhaṅgaṃ yaṃ jinobravi;

I will speak, in brief, a little about the Vibhaṅga that the Conqueror spoke for the welfare of the bhikkhunīs.

Pārājikakathā

Account of the Pārājikas

1965.

1965.

Chandaso methunaṃ dhammaṃ, paṭiseveyya yā pana;

Whatever [bhikkhunī] should engage in sexual intercourse with consent, she is called a pārājika, she is said to be no longer a samaṇī.

1966.

1966.

Manussapurisādīnaṃ, navannaṃ yassa kassaci;

With any of the nine types of beings, beginning with human males; whether living or non-living, covered or uncovered,

1967.

1967.

Attano tividhe magge, yebhuyyakkhāyitādikaṃ;

if she introduces her sexual organ into her own three orifices—most commonly the vagina—, she is defeated, excluded.

1968.

1968.

Ito paramavatvāva, sādhāraṇavinicchayaṃ;

Having said this, the shared judgment, I will speak briefly about the unshared [judgment].

1969.

1969.

Adhakkhakaṃ sarīrakaṃ, yadubbhajāṇumaṇḍalaṃ;

If a bhikkhunī touches a Kapparaka's body, above the knee joint, with that body,

1970.

1970.

Avassutassāvassutā, manussapuggalassa yā;

if she touches the body of a human being, who has an emission, or does not have an emission, with her body, she is pārājika.

1971.

1971.

Kapparassa panuddhampi, gahitaṃ ubbhajāṇunā;

If the emission of a Kapparaka is held with the knee joint, in the manner previously described, with her own body,

1972.

1972.

Purisassa tathā kāya- paṭibaddhaṃ phusantiyā;

for a woman touching what is attached to the body of a man, or with what is attached to her own body in a way that is not clearly defined,

1973.

1973.

Avasesena vā tassa, kāyaṃ kāyena attano;

or with the remainder of his body, with her own body, there is a thullaccaya for her, and for the man, an offense of dukkata.

1974.

1974.

Yakkhapetatiracchāna- paṇḍakānaṃ adhakkhakaṃ;

If a Yakkha, a preta, or an animal is a eunuch, above the knee joint, or if he has an emission in both [places],

1975.

1975.

Ekatovassave cāpi, thullaccayamudīritaṃ;

it is said to be a thullaccaya even if there is an emission in one [place]; in all the remaining [cases], there is an offense of dukkata.

1976.

1976.

Ubbhakkhakamadhojāṇu-maṇḍalaṃ pana yaṃ idha;

Here, whatever is above the Kapparaka's knee joint, or below, is included in this category.

1977.

1977.

Kelāyati sace bhikkhu, saddhiṃ bhikkhuniyā pana;

If a bhikkhu plays with a bhikkhunī, with lustful intention regarding contact of bodies for both of them,

1978.

1978.

Hoti saṅghādisesova, nāso bhikkhuniyā siyā;

there is a saṅghādisesa, but the bhikkhunī is ruined; if there is lustful intention regarding contact of bodies for the bhikkhunī,

1979.

1979.

Bhikkhuno methuno rāgo, gehapemampi vā bhave;

and the bhikkhu has sexual desire, or even domestic affection, it is said to be a thullaccaya for her, and dukkata for the bhikkhu.

1980.

1980.

Ubhinnaṃ methune rāge, gehapemepi vā sati;

If there is sexual desire or even domestic affection for both of them, it is specified without distinction that there is dukkata for both.

1981.

1981.

Yassa yattha manosuddhaṃ, tassa tattha na dosatā;

There is no fault for the one whose mind is pure; there is no offense for both if their minds are pure.

1982.

1982.

Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena, bhinditvā paṭhamaṃ pana;

If, with lustful intention regarding contact of bodies, he first ravishes her and then defiles her, he is not a defiler of a bhikkhunī.

1983.

1983.

Atha bhikkhuniyā phuṭṭho, sādiyantova cetasā;

But if a bhikkhu, having been touched by a bhikkhunī, remains still, approving in his mind, there is no offense for the bhikkhu.

1984.

1984.

Bhikkhunī bhikkhunā phuṭṭhā, sace hotipi niccalā;

If a bhikkhunī, having been touched by a bhikkhu, also remains still, she approves of the contact, there is a pārājika for her.

1985.

1985.

Tathā thullaccayaṃ khette, dukkaṭañca viniddise;

Thus, thullaccaya should be specified in the field [of thullaccaya], and dukkata, because the Teacher said "she would approve of contact of bodies."

1986.

1986.

Tassā kriyasamuṭṭhānaṃ, evaṃ sati na dissati;

In such a case, the origination of her action is not seen; this has been explained according to the method based on the majority [of cases].

1987.

1987.

Anāpatti asañcicca, ajānitvāmasantiyā;

There is no offense for one who is unintentional, unknowing, unwilling; or if she is mindful, yet she approves of the touching or contact.

1988.

1988.

Vedanaṭṭāya vā khitta-cittāyummattikāya vā;

The originations, etc., are the same, with the first and last bases.

Ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalakathā.

Account of the area above the knee joint.

1989.

1989.

Pārājikattaṃ jānanti, saliṅge tu ṭhitāya hi;

If a [bhikkhunī] knowing [herself] to be in the state of having committed a pārājika, declares, "I will not announce it to anyone else,"

1990.

1990.

Dhure nikkhittamattasmiṃ, sā ca pārājikā siyā;

she becomes pārājika as soon as it is concealed; this is called Vajjapaṭicchādikā (Concealer of Faults) by name.

1991.

1991.

Sesaṃ sappāṇavaggasmiṃ, duṭṭhullena samaṃ naye;

The rest should be understood in the Sappāṇavagga (Chapter on Living Beings) as being the same as for a duṭṭhulla; the difference there is a pācittiya, here it is a pārājika.

Vajjapaṭicchādikathā.

Account of the Concealer of Faults.

1992.

1992.

Saṅghenukkhittako bhikkhu, ṭhito ukkhepane pana;

A bhikkhu suspended by the Sangha, while the act of suspension stands, and someone who shares his view—through accepting that view—,

1993.

1993.

Anuvatteyya yā bhikkhuṃ, bhikkhunī sā visumpi ca;

whatever bhikkhunī separately follows that bhikkhu, even while being addressed by other [bhikkhunīs] in the midst of the Sangha,

1994.

1994.

Acajantīva taṃ vatthuṃ, gahetvā yadi tiṭṭhati;

not abandoning that thing, if she stands holding [to it], at the conclusion of that act, she is a follower of the suspended bhikkhu.

1995.

1995.

Hoti pārājikāpannā, hotāsākiyadhītarā;

She incurs a pārājika, she, a daughter of the Sakyans, is no longer able to be rejoined, like a stone broken in two.

1996.

1996.

Adhamme pana kammasmiṃ, niddiṭṭhaṃ tikadukkaṭaṃ;

In an unlawful act, a threefold dukkata is specified; all the originations, etc., are the same as said in Samanubhāsana.

Ukkhittānuvattikakathā.

Account of the Follower of the Suspended Bhikkhu.

1997.

1997.

Apārājikakhettassa, gahaṇaṃ yassa kassaci;

The seizing of any limb of one who is not in the area of pārājika is called seizing of the hand.

1998.

1998.

Pārutassa nivatthassa, gahaṇaṃ yassa kassaci;

The seizing of any [part] of one who is covered and clothed is called seizing the edge of the saṅghāṭī.

1999.

1999.

Kāyasaṃsaggasaṅkhāta-asaddhammassa kāraṇā;

Because of immoral conduct consisting of contact of bodies, a bhikkhunī stands within arm's reach of a man,

2000.

2000.

Sallapeyya tathā tattha, ṭhatvā tu purisena vā;

or converses with a man while standing there, or goes to an assignation, or desires to go [with him],

2001.

2001.

Tadatthāya paṭicchanna-ṭṭhānañca paviseyya vā;

She might enter a concealed place for that purpose; or she might draw her body near if she is standing within arm’s reach.

2002.

2002.

Ayamassamaṇī hoti, vinaṭṭhā aṭṭhavatthukā;

She is then one who is not a Samaṇī, defeated in the eight grounds; she is incapable of further growth, like a palm tree cut off at the crown.

2003.

2003.

Anulomena vā vatthuṃ, paṭilomena vā cutā;

Whether fallen from the ground in direct or reverse order, fulfilling the eighth, or similarly, in an intervening instance.

2004.

2004.

Athādito panekaṃ vā, dve vā tīṇipi satta vā;

Or if, from the beginning, one, two, three, or seven are unfulfilled, even fulfilling it a hundred times, there would be no Pārājika.

2005.

2005.

Āpattiyo panāpannā, desetvā tāhi muccati;

Having confessed the offenses she has committed, she is freed from them; having laid down the burden, what is confessed is of calculable account.

2006.

2006.

Na hotāpattiyā aṅgaṃ, saussāhāya desitā;

Confession with effort is not a condition for the offense; the confessed, though confessed, does not lead to the counting of the confession.

2007.

2007.

Anāpatti asañcicca, ajānitvā karontiyā;

There is no offense for one acting unintentionally, unknowingly; all the origins, etc., are regarded as immediately subsequent.

2008.

2008.

‘‘Asaddhammo’’ti nāmettha, kāyasaṃsagganāmako;

Here, the name ‘‘Asaddhammo’’ is the name for bodily contact; this meaning has been explained in all the commentaries as well.

2009.

2009.

Viññū paṭibalo kāya-saṃsaggaṃ paṭipajjituṃ;

The wise one is able to undertake bodily contact; but in the event of bodily contact, this is the conclusive statement.

Aṭṭhavatthukakathā.

The Discourse on the Eight Grounds.

2010.

2010.

Avassutā paṭicchādī, ukkhittā aṭṭhavatthukā;

Those not flowing out, concealing, expelled, are the eight grounds; these four have been declared by the great seer as non-general.

Pārājikakathā niṭṭhitā.

The Discourse on the Pārājika is finished.

Saṅghādisesakathā

The Saṅghādisesa Discourse

2011.

2011.

Yā pana bhikkhunī ussayavādā;

Whatever Bhikkhunī is an instigator of disputes,
contentious and garrulous, she dwells,
with whatever man here,
she incurs a serious offense.

2012.

2012.

Sakkhiṃ vāpi sahāyaṃ vā, pariyesati dukkaṭaṃ;

Seeking a witness or an ally also incurs a Dukaṭa; likewise, for each step as she goes to make a dispute.

2013.

2013.

Āroceti sace pubbaṃ, bhikkhunī attano kathaṃ;

If, having seen a litigant, the Bhikkhunī first tells her story; she incurs an offense of Dukaṭa.

2014.

2014.

Āroceti sace pacchā, itaro attano kathaṃ;

If the other one tells his story afterward; that Bhikkhunī immediately incurs a Thullaccaya.

2015.

2015.

Ārocetitaro pubbaṃ, sace so attano kathaṃ;

If the other one tells his story first; and afterward the Bhikkhunī, the judgment is the same as before.

2016.

2016.

‘‘Ārocehī’’ti vuttā ce, ‘‘kathaṃ tava mamāpi ca’’;

If, when told ‘‘Tell your story,’’ (she replies) ‘‘And what is your story and mine?’’; she may tell it as she pleases, but a Dukaṭa would occur at first.

2017.

2017.

Dutiyārocane tassā, thullaccayamudīritaṃ;

On the second telling, a Thullaccaya is declared for her; even if spoken by a lay follower, this is the same judgment.

2018.

2018.

Ārocitakathaṃ sutvā, ubhinnampi yathā tathā;

Having heard the story told, similarly by both; when a judgment has been made by them, and the dispute is finished.

2019.

2019.

Aṭṭassa pariyosāne, jaye bhikkhuniyā pana;

At the end of the dispute, if the Bhikkhunī wins; or even if she loses, there is a Saṅghādisesa.

2020.

2020.

Dūtaṃ vāpi pahiṇitvā, āgantvāna sayampi vā;

Having sent a messenger, or having come herself; she is drawn along by people who are opponents.

2021.

2021.

Ārāme pana aññehi, anācāraṃ kataṃ sace;

If an improper act has been done by others in the monastery; without specifying anything else, she asks for protection there.

2022.

2022.

Yāya kiñci avuttāva, dhammaṭṭhā sayameva tu;

Without anything being said by her, the righteous ones themselves; having heard the dispute from another, if they settle it.

2023.

2023.

Tassā, ummattikādīna-manāpatti pakāsitā;

For her, non-offense has been declared for the insane, etc.; the origin is similar with the Kathina, this is a co-active one.

Aṭṭakārikathā.

The Discourse on Instigating Disputes.

2024.

2024.

Jānantī bhikkhunī coriṃ, vajjhaṃ viditameva yā;

A Bhikkhunī, knowing a thief, knowing she is to be executed; without informing the Saṅgha, the king, or even the group.

2025.

2025.

Vuṭṭhāpeyya vinā kappaṃ, corivuṭṭhāpanaṃ pana;

She ordains (her), without what is allowable, the ordination of a thief; that one is said to be one who has incurred a Saṅghādisesa offense.

2026.

2026.

Pañcamāsagghanaṃ yāya, haritaṃ parasantakaṃ;

Whatever green produce of others’ property is worth five Māsa; or even exceeding that worth, she is called ‘‘a thief.’’

2027.

2027.

Bhikkhunīsu panaññāsu, titthiyesupi vā tathā;

But among the other Bhikkhunīs, or even among the Titthiyas; she who has previously gone forth, she is called ‘‘allowable.’’

2028.

2028.

Vuṭṭhāpeti ca yā coriṃ, ṭhapetvā kappamevidaṃ;

She ordains the thief, setting aside what is allowable in this case; if she seeks an ācarinī, a bowl, a robe.

2029.

2029.

Sammannati ca sīmaṃ vā, tassā āpatti dukkaṭaṃ;

She sanctions a boundary too, for her there is an offense of Dukaṭa; a Dukaṭa with the motion, two with the declarations of the action.

2030.

2030.

Thullaccayassa, kammante, garukaṃ niddise budho;

At the end of the action, the wise one should indicate a Garuka; the group and the ācarinī, and she is not freed from the Dukaṭa.

2031.

2031.

Anāpatti ajānantī, vuṭṭhāpeti, tatheva ca;

There is no offense for one ordaining unknowingly, and likewise; or having ordained without informing, or for one who is insane.

2032.

2032.

Corivuṭṭhāpanaṃ nāma, jāyate vācacittato;

The ordination of a thief, it arises from intention through speech; and from bodily action and speech, intentional and non-intentional, active and inactive.

Corivuṭṭhāpanakathā.

The Discourse on the Ordination of a Thief.

2033.

2033.

Gāmantaraṃ nadīpāraṃ, gaccheyyekāva yā sace;

Whatever (Bhikkhunī) goes alone to another village, across a river; or falls away from the group, or spends the night apart.

2034.

2034.

Paṭhamāpattikaṃ dhammaṃ, sāpannā garukaṃ siyā;

She incurs the first offense, it would be a serious one; no offense for one leaving her own village, it should be known.

2035.

2035.

Nikkhamitvā tato aññaṃ, gāmaṃ gacchantiyā pana;

Having left there, as she goes to another village; a Dukaṭa for each step, it should be understood by the discerning one.

2036.

2036.

Ekena padavārena, gāmassa itarassa ca;

With one step each, for the enclosure of that village and the other; when the boundary is crossed, or even when the approach is crossed.

2037.

2037.

Thullaccayaṃ atikkante, okkante dutiyena tu;

When the Thullaccaya is crossed, descending with the second; step, there is a serious offense for that Bhikkhunī.

2038.

2038.

Nikkhamitvā sace pacchā, sakaṃ gāmaṃ visantiyā;

Having left, if afterward she enters her own village; this same method should be understood, or similarly with a break in the fence.

2039.

2039.

Pākārena vihārassa, bhūmiṃ tu pavisantiyā;

As she enters the ground of the monastery by the wall; because it is allowable, no fault is found.

2040.

2040.

Bhikkhunīnaṃ vihārassa, bhūmi tāsaṃ tu kappiyā;

The ground of the monastery for Bhikkhunīs, it is allowable for them; the ground of the Bhikkhu monastery, it is unallowable for them.

2041.

2041.

Hatthiassarathādīhi, iddhiyā vā visantiyā;

By elephants, horses, chariots, etc., or as she enters by psychic power; there would be no offense, there is an offense when going on foot.

2042.

2042.

Yaṃ kiñci sakagāmaṃ vā, paragāmampi vā tathā;

Whatever her own village, or even another village; having stood outside the village, there is an offense as she enters.

2043.

2043.

Lakkhaṇenupapannāya, nadiyā dutiyaṃ vinā;

For the river endowed with characteristics, without a second (Bhikkhunī); whatever bank she goes to, for that Samaṇī.

2044.

2044.

Paṭhamaṃ uddharitvāna, pādaṃ tīre ṭhapentiyā;

Having first raised her foot and placed it on the bank; there is a Thullaccaya offense, a Garu when she crosses the second.

2045.

2045.

Antaranadiyaṃyeva, saddhiṃ dutiyikāya hi;

In the middle of the river itself, together with a second one; having quarreled, as she goes back to the near bank.

2046.

2046.

Iddhiyā setunā nāvā-yānarajjūhi vā pana;

By psychic power, by a bridge, by a boat, by vehicles, by ropes; even in this way, there is no offense as she crosses to the far bank.

2047.

2047.

Nhāyituṃ pivituṃ vāpi, otiṇṇātha nadiṃ puna;

Having gone down into the river to bathe or to drink, again; she may cross back on foot to the near bank.

2048.

2048.

Padasā otaritvāna, nadiṃ uttaraṇe pana;

Having gone down on foot, in crossing the river; having ascended the bridge in that way, there is no offense as she crosses over.

2049.

2049.

Setunā upagantvā vā, yānākāsehi vā sace;

Having approached by the bridge, or by aerial vehicles; if she goes at the time of crossing over, she incurs a Garuka offense on foot.

2050.

2050.

Nadiyā pārimaṃ tīraṃ, ito orimatīrato;

The far bank of the river, from this near bank; having leapt over with speed, there is no offense as she crosses over.

2051.

2051.

Piṭṭhiyaṃ vā nisīditvā, khandhe vā uttarantiyā;

Having sat on the back, or as she crosses over on the shoulders; or even on clasped hands, it is allowable in a cloth vehicle.

2052.

2052.

‘‘Pureruṇodayāyeva, pāsaṃ dutiyikāya hi;

‘‘Before sunrise tomorrow, to the arm’s reach of a second (Bhikkhunī); I will go,’’ without a Bhikkhunī.

2053.

2053.

Ekagabbhepi vā hattha-pāsaṃ dutiyikāya hi;

Even in the same dwelling, at the arm’s reach of a second (Bhikkhunī); there would be an offense if she crosses over as the dawn arises.

2054.

2054.

‘‘Gamissāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ, katvā gacchantiyā pana;

If, having made the intention, ‘‘I will go,’’ she goes; there is no offense if she raises the second within arm’s reach as the dawn arises.

2055.

2055.

Indakhīlamatikkamma, araññaṃ ettha dīpitaṃ;

Having crossed the Indakhīla, here the wilderness is indicated; having gone outside the village, to that second one.

2056.

2056.

Dassanassupacāraṃ tu, jānitvā vijahantiyā;

Having known and given up the range of sight; there is a Thullaccaya offense, it would be a Garuka when it is completely given up.

2057.

2057.

Sāṇipākārapākāra-taruantarite pana;

Even when there is a screen of cloth, a wall, a fence, or trees; there is an offense when there is the range of hearing.

2058.

2058.

Ajjhokāse tu dūrepi, dassanassupacāratā;

But in the open air, even at a distance, there is the range of sight; here, how is it like announcing the Dhamma for hearing?

2059.

2059.

Maggamūḷhassa saddena, viya kūjantiyā pana;

Like cooing with sound for one lost on the path; even when the sound ‘‘Ayye’’ is beyond the range of hearing.

2060.

2060.

Hoti, bhikkhuniyāpatti, garukā evarūpake;

There is a Garuka offense for the Bhikkhunī in such a case; here, even one Bhikkhunī is called a group.

2061.

2061.

Ohīyitvātha gacchantī, ‘‘pāpuṇissāmi dānihaṃ’’;

Having fallen behind, as she goes, ‘‘I will now reach (them);’’ in this way, striving, it is allowable to follow.

2062.

2062.

Dvinnaṃ maggaṃ gacchantīnaṃ, ekā gantuṃ no sakkoti;

For two going on a path, one is not able to go; having broken off the effort, if she falls behind, there is an offense for her.

2063.

2063.

Itarāpi sace yāti, ‘‘ohīyatu aya’’nti ca;

If the other one also goes, ‘‘Let this one fall behind;’’ there is an offense for her too, if there is no effort.

2064.

2064.

Gacchantīsu tathā dvīsu, purimā yāti ekakaṃ;

While two are going in that way, the former one goes alone; if the latter one takes another path.

2065.

2065.

Ekissā pana pakkanta-ṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati cetarā;

If the other one stands in the place where one has departed; therefore, non-offense has been declared there for both.

2066.

2066.

Aruṇuggamanā pubbe, nikkhamitvā sagāmato;

Having left one’s own village before sunrise; at the time of sunrise, she has gone to another village.

2067.

2067.

Atikkamantiyā pāraṃ, nadiyā dutiyikaṃ vinā;

As she crosses the far bank of the river, without a second (Bhikkhunī); all four offenses occur in one moment.

2068.

2068.

Pakkantā vāpi vibbhantā, yātā petānaṃ lokaṃ vā;

Having departed, or bewildered, she has gone to the world of the departed; having flown away by a wing, or destroyed, she has gone together.

2069.

2069.

Gāmantarokkamādīni, cattāripi karontiyā;

In doing the four things: crossing to another village, etc.; it should be known that there is no offense, and similarly for one who is insane.

2070.

2070.

Rattiyaṃ vippavāsaṃ tu, hatthapāsova rakkhati;

Spending the night apart, she protects (herself) within arm’s reach; in a wilderness without a village, it is considered falling away from the group.

2071.

2071.

Sakagāme yathākāmaṃ, divā ca vicarantiyā;

In her own village, wandering at will during the day; those four Saṅghādisesas do not exist for her.

2072.

2072.

Samuṭṭhānādayo tulyā, paṭhamantimavatthunā;

The origins, etc., are similar to the first and last grounds; intentional, a bodily action, three minds, and three feelings.

Gāmantaragamanakathā.

The Discourse on Going to Another Village.

2073.

2073.

Sīmāsammutiyā ceva, gaṇassa pariyesane;

With the granting of a boundary (sīmā), and in seeking a group (gaṇa);
By the announcement (ñatti), there is a dukkata; with two, there are two thullaccayas.

2074.

2074.

Kammassa pariyosāne, hoti saṅghādisesatā;

At the conclusion of the act, there is a saṅghādisesa;
Three saṅghādisesas indeed, three dukkatas in the unlawful.

2075.

2075.

Pucchitvā kārakaṃ saṅghaṃ, chandaṃ datvā gaṇassa vā;

Having asked the acting (kāraka) Saṅgha, or having given consent to the group (gaṇa);
Or in matters that are proceeding, or even when the acting person is not present.

2076.

2076.

Bhikkhuniṃ pana ukkhittaṃ, yā osāreti bhikkhunī;

If a bhikkhunī reinstates a suspended bhikkhunī;
For her, in cases of insanity, etc., non-offense is declared.

2077.

2077.

Saṅghabhedasamā vuttā, samuṭṭhānādayo nayā;

The modes of origination, etc., are stated as similar to causing a split in the Saṅgha;
This is stated as doing and not doing; this itself is the distinction.

Catutthaṃ.

Fourth.

2078.

2078.

Sayaṃ avassutā tathā, avassutassa hatthato;

Directly from one who has lost control (avassutā), likewise from the hand of one who has lost control;
From a human individual, whatever little she might take.

2079.

2079.

Āmisaṃ, gahaṇe tassā;

Food, in her taking;
A thullaccaya is declared;
In swallowing (ajjhohāresu), there is a saṅghādisesa;
From the effort (payogato).

2080.

2080.

Ekatovassute kiñci, paṭiggaṇhati, dukkaṭaṃ;

From one who has lost control on one side (ekatovassute), if she receives something, a dukkata;
In the efforts of swallowing (ajjhohāra), there would be a collection of thullaccayas.

2081.

2081.

Yakkhapetatiracchāna-paṇḍakānañca hatthato;

From the hand of a yakkha, ghost, animal, neuter;
Even from human forms, likewise from one who has lost control on both sides (ubhatovassute).

2082.

2082.

Ekatovassute ettha, udake dantakaṭṭhake;

Here, from one who has lost control on one side (ekatovassute), in water, a tooth-cleaner;
In taking and using, everywhere there is a dukkata.

2083.

2083.

Ubhayāvassutābhāve, na doso yadi gaṇhati;

In the absence of one who has lost control on both sides (ubhayāvassutā), there is no offense if she takes;
If she knowingly takes saying, "This one has not lost control (avassuto)."

2084.

2084.

Tassā ummattikādīna-manāpatti pakāsitā;

For her, in cases of insanity, etc., non-offense is declared;
The modes of origination, etc., are similar, by the first and last basis.

Pañcamaṃ.

Fifth.

2085.

2085.

Uyyojane panekissā, itarissā paṭiggahe;

In giving to one, in receiving from another;
And dukkatas in using, there would be a group of thullaccayas.

2086.

2086.

Bhojanassāvasānasmiṃ, hoti saṅghādisesatā;

At the end of the meal, there is a saṅghādisesa;
For the four, yakkhas, etc., just so, and for a man as well.

2087.

2087.

Dantakaṭṭhudakānañca, gahaṇuyyojane pana;

And for a tooth-cleaner and water, in giving and taking;
And in the use of those, a dukkata is described.

2088.

2088.

Yakkhādīnaṃ tu sesassa, gahaṇuyyojane pana;

Indeed, for the remainder of the yakkhas, etc., in giving and taking;
And in use, a dukkata; when eaten, a thullaccaya is declared.

2089.

2089.

‘‘Nāvassuto’’ti ñatvā vā, kupitā vā na gaṇhati;

Knowing "He has not lost control (nāvassuto)," or being angry, she does not take;
Or even out of compassion for the family, if she gives.

2090.

2090.

Tassā ummattikādīna-manāpatti pakāsitā;

For her, in cases of insanity, etc., non-offense is declared;
The modes of origination, etc., are similar, just like stealing what is not given.

Chaṭṭhaṃ.

Sixth.

2091.

2091.

Sattamaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ saṅgha-bhedena sadisaṃ mataṃ;

The seventh and eighth are considered similar to causing a split in the Saṅgha;
Along with the modes of origination, etc., there is no difference.

Sattamaṭṭhamāni.

Seventh and eighth.

2092.

2092.

Navame dasame vāpi, vattabbaṃ natthi kiñcipi;

In the ninth and tenth, there is nothing to be said;
The modes of origination, etc., are just like the immediately preceding ones.

Navamadasamāni.

Ninth and tenth.

2093.

2093.

Duṭṭhadosadvayenāpi, sañcarittena tena cha;

By the two faults of corruption, by that act of conveying, six;
Up to three times, eight, and four from here and there.

Saṅghādisesakathā.

The Saṅghādisesa Story.

Nissaggiyakathā

The Nissaggiya Story

2094.

2094.

Adhiṭṭhānūpagaṃ pattaṃ, anadhiṭṭhāya bhikkhunī;

A bowl that is taken into possession (adhiṭṭhānūpagaṃ), without taking possession, a bhikkhunī;
Or without making a dispensation (vikappana), if she keeps it even for a single day.

2095.

2095.

Aruṇuggamaneneva, saddhiṃ bhikkhuniyā siyā;

At the very rising of dawn, it would be with the bhikkhunī;
For her, there is a nissaggiya offense, because of keeping a bowl in proximity.

2096.

2096.

Seso pana kathāmaggo, pattasikkhāpade idha;

The remaining narrative path, in this bowl training rule;
All the judgement should be understood, by the manner that has been stated.

2097.

2097.

Dasāhātikkame tattha, ekāhātikkame idha;

There, exceeding ten days; here, exceeding one day;
In that, this is the distinction for both of them.

Paṭhamaṃ.

First.

2098.

2098.

Akāle cīvaraṃ dinnaṃ, dinnaṃ kālepi kenaci;

A robe given out of season, given in season by someone;
Having designated it, she directs, "Let them distribute it when it has arrived."

2099.

2099.

Akālacīvaraṃ ‘‘kāla-cīvara’’nti sace pana;

An out-of-season robe, if she distributes it thinking, "It is a seasonable robe (kāla-cīvara)";
For her, in the effort, there would be a dukkata.

2100.

2100.

Attanā paṭiladdhaṃ yaṃ, taṃ tu nissaggiyaṃ bhave;

That which is obtained by oneself, that indeed becomes nissaggiya;
Having obtained and relinquished it, she should apply it according to the giving.

2101.

2101.

Katvā vinayakammaṃ tu, paṭiladdhampi taṃ puna;

Having performed an act of Vinaya, even having re-obtained that again;
This is her intention: it is not proper to use it.

2102.

2102.

Akālavatthasaññāya, dukkaṭaṃ kālacīvare;

With the perception of an out-of-season cloth, a dukkata for a seasonable robe;
It is specified in both cases, likewise for one who is in doubt.

2103.

2103.

Kālacīvarasaññāya, cīvare ubhayatthapi;

With the perception of a seasonable robe, in both cases regarding the robe;
There is no offense for the insane, etc.; the three modes of origination are considered.

Dutiyaṃ.

Second.

2104.

2104.

Cīvaresupi bandhitvā, ṭhapitesu bahūsvapi;

Even in many robes bound and placed;
There is only one offense, if she herself cuts it.

2105.

2105.

Tathācchindāpane ekā, ekāyāṇattiyā bhave;

Likewise in having it cut, one offense; by a single command there would be one;
In the remaining cases, it would depend on the effort regarding the objects.

2106.

2106.

Tikapācitti aññasmiṃ, parikkhāre tu dukkaṭaṃ;

A three-fold pācittiya in another requisite, a dukkata;
A three-fold dukkata is declared, but for the remaining robe.

2107.

2107.

Tāya vā dīyamānaṃ tu, tassā vissāsameva vā;

Or when it is given by her, or indeed in her entrusting;
For one who is receiving, there is no offense; the three modes of origination are considered.

Tatiyaṃ.

Third.

2108.

2108.

Viññāpetvā sace aññaṃ, tadaññaṃ viññāpentiyā;

Having requested something from one person, if she then requests something else from another;
For her, there is a dukkata of requesting; upon acquisition, there would be a nissaggiya.

2109.

2109.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, anaññe dvikadukkaṭaṃ;

A three-fold pācittiya is stated; in other cases, a two-fold dukkata;
With the perception of other in what is not other, or even when not being able to afford it again.

2110.

2110.

Tasmiṃ taññeva vā aññaṃ, aññenatthepi vā sati;

In that same thing, or something else in that, or even something else when there is a purpose;
And having shown the benefit, if she requests something else from that.

2111.

2111.

Anāpattīti ñātabbaṃ, tathā ummattikāyapi;

It should be known as non-offense, likewise for the insane;
The modes of origination, etc., are stated as similar to acting as a messenger.

Catutthaṃ.

Fourth.

2112.

2112.

Aññaṃ cetāpetvā pubbaṃ, pacchā aññaṃ cetāpeyya;

Having had something ordered previously, afterwards she has something else ordered;
With such perception, "Bring that other wealth for me and give it."

2113.

2113.

Cetāpanapayogena, mūlaṭṭhāya hi dukkaṭaṃ;

By the effort of having it ordered, a dukkata for the original donor;
Upon acquisition, there is a nissaggiya, whether brought by that person or another.

2114.

2114.

Sesaṃ anantareneva, sadisanti viniddise;

The remainder should be determined as similar to the immediately preceding;
Along with the modes of origination, etc., there is nothing not previously done.

Pañcamaṃ.

Fifth.

2115.

2115.

Aññadatthāya dinnena, parikkhārena yā pana;

With a requisite given for one purpose, if a bhikkhunī has something else ordered;
Here, with Saṅgha property.

2116.

2116.

Payoge dukkaṭaṃ, lābhe, tassā nissaggiyaṃ siyā;

In the effort, a dukkata; upon acquisition, for her there would be a nissaggiya;
Here, a two-fold dukkata is specified in what is not for another purpose.

2117.

2117.

Sesakaṃ aññadatthāya, anāpattupanentiyā;

The remainder is non-offense for one who gives up for another purpose;
Having asked the owner, or in danger, or for the insane.

2118.

2118.

Sañcarittasamā vuttā, samuṭṭhānādayo nayā;

The modes of origination, etc., are stated as similar to acting as a messenger;
The seventh is similar to the sixth, except for what is personally requested.

Chaṭṭhasattamāni.

Sixth and seventh.

2119.

2119.

Aṭṭhame navame vāpi, vattabbaṃ natthi kiñcipi;

In the eighth and ninth, there is nothing to be said;
The word "by perception of great common ownership" is additional.

2120.

2120.

Dasamepi kathā sabbā, anantarasamā matā;

In the tenth as well, all the narrative is considered similar to the immediately preceding;
Along with the modes of origination, etc., there is no distinction whatsoever.

Aṭṭhamanavamadasamāni.

Eighth, ninth, and tenth.

Paṭhamo vaggo.

First chapter.

2121.

2121.

Atirekacatukkaṃsaṃ, garupāvuraṇaṃ pana;

An outer-cloth that exceeds four amsas (atirekacatukkaṃsaṃ), if she has it ordered;
By her who illuminates the Four Noble Truths.

2122.

2122.

Payoge dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ, lābhe nissaggiyaṃ mataṃ;

In the effort, a dukkata is stated; upon acquisition, it is considered a nissaggiya;
Four kahāpaṇas indeed, a kaṃsa is said to be.

2123.

2123.

Ūnake tu catukkaṃse, uddiṭṭhaṃ dvikadukkaṭaṃ;

In less than four aṃsas, a two-fold dukkata is specified;
Non-offense for an outer-cloth that is supremely up to four aṃsas.

2124.

2124.

Cetāpeti tadūnaṃ vā, ñātakānañca santake;

She has it ordered or less than that, in the possession of relatives;
Or for the sake of another, with her own wealth, or for the insane.

2125.

2125.

Cetāpentaṃ mahagghaṃ yā, cetāpetappameva vā;

One who has it ordered for a high price, or indeed has it ordered to be that way;
All the modes of origination, etc., are considered similar to acting as a messenger.

Ekādasamaṃ.

Eleventh.

2126.

2126.

Lahupāvuraṇaṃ aḍḍha- teyyakaṃsagghanaṃ pana;

A light outer-cloth, worth half a teyyakaṃsa;
If a bhikkhunī has that ordered, which is more than that.

2127.

2127.

Tassā nissaggiyāpatti, pācitti pariyāputā;

For her, there is a nissaggiya offense; a pācitti is declared;
The remainder is similar to the immediately preceding; there is no difference whatsoever.

Dvādasamaṃ.

Twelfth.

2128.

2128.

Sādhāraṇāni sesāni, tāni aṭṭhārasāpi ca;

The remaining ones that are common, even those eighteen;
These are indeed only in the twelve, they certainly amount to that.

Nissaggiyakathā.

The Nissaggiya Story.

Pācittiyakathā

The Pācittiya Story

2129.

2129.

Lasuṇaṃ bhaṇḍikaṃ vuttaṃ, na ekadvitimiñjakaṃ;

Garlic, a whole bulb is stated, not one, two, or three cloves;
Raw, just like Magadha, if she takes thinking, "I will eat it."

2130.

2130.

Gahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ tassā, pācitti yadi khādati;

For her, there is a dukkata in taking; a pācitti if she eats it;
A pācitti should be explained, just depending on swallowing (ajjhohāravaseneva).

2131.

2131.

Dve tayo bhaṇḍike saddhiṃ, saṅkhāditvā sace pana;

Having chewed two or three bulbs together;
If she swallows, for her there would be one pācitti.

2132.

2132.

Bhinditvā tattha ekekaṃ, miñjaṃ khādantiyā pana;

Having broken it there, if she eats each clove;
For her, there would be a counting of pācittis, by the counting of cloves.

2133.

2133.

Palaṇḍuko bhañjanako, harito cāpalopi ca;

Onion, bhañjanaka, green garlic, and cāpala as well;
Indeed, garlic is four-fold, they occur just by nature.

2134.

2134.

Palaṇḍukopaṇḍuvaṇṇo,bhañjanolohitopi ca;

Onion is pale colored, bhañjanaka is red also;
Green garlic is green colored, cāpala is white as well.

2135.

2135.

Ekā miñjā palaṇḍussa, bhañjanassa duve siyuṃ;

One clove in onion, two in bhañjanaka;
Three also in green garlic; cāpala has no cloves.

2136.

2136.

Sūpamaṃsādisaṃpāke, sāḷavuttaribhaṅgake;

In soup, the preparation of meat, in the way of sāḷavutti;
There is no offense for the insane, etc.; the origination is similar to a sheep.

Paṭhamaṃ.

First.

2137.

2137.

Sambādhe upakacchesu, muttassa karaṇepi vā;

In crowded underarms, or in the doing of excretion;
There would be a pācitti even for one hair, for one who has it plucked.

2138.

2138.

Bahukepi tathā lome, saṃharāpentiyā pana;

Likewise, in having many hairs plucked;
For her, there would be a counting by efforts, not indeed a counting by hairs.

2139.

2139.

Na doso sati ābādhe, lomake saṃharantiyā;

There is no offense, when there is an illness, for one who has hairs plucked;
The modes of origination, etc., are considered similar to the path of arranging.

Dutiyaṃ.

Second.

2140.

2140.

Hoti antamaso mutta-karaṇassa talaghātane;

There is a pācitti even for merely patting the sole in the doing of excretion;
With the pollen, or with the color, of a lotus flower.

2141.

2141.

Gaṇḍaṃ tattha vaṇaṃ vāpi, na doso paharantiyā;

If there is a boil or a wound there, there is no offense for the one who touches; the origin etc. are the same, due to the first and last object.

Tatiyaṃ.

Third

2142.

2142.

Yā panuppalapattampi, byañjane bhikkhunattano;

If a bhikkhuni, overcome with sexual desire, inserts even a lotus petal into her vagina, it is not proper.

2143.

2143.

Idaṃ vatthuvaseneva, vuttaṃ tu jatumaṭṭhakaṃ;

This was said only with regard to the object, like lac, wax; or a stick of daṇḍamelāḷuka, but in the making of a mutta.

2144.

2144.

Samphassaṃ sādiyantiyā, paveseti sace pana;

If she, enjoying the sensation, inserts it; or causes it to be inserted into her, for that, there would be a pācittiya.

2145.

2145.

Ābādhapaccayā doso, natthi ummattikāya vā;

There is no offense due to illness or for an insane woman; the origin etc. are considered the same as for slapping.

Catutthaṃ.

Fourth

2146.

2146.

Aṅgulīnaṃ pana dvinnaṃ, aggapabbadvayādhikaṃ;

For a bhikkhuni inserting more than two fingertip-joints of two fingers, while cleaning herself with water, there is a pācittiya.

2147.

2147.

Ekissāṅguliyā tīṇi, pabbāni pana dīghato;

If three joints of one finger are inserted lengthwise, there will be a pācittiya for the one inserting while cleaning.

2148.

2148.

Catunnaṃ vāpi tissannaṃ, ekapabbampi yā pana;

If she inserts even one joint of four or three fingers in width, for her, there would be a pācittiya.

2149.

2149.

mahāpaccariyāpana;

mahāpaccariyā pana;

2150.

Making it more explicit, this meaning has been clarified.

Doso dvaṅgulapabbe vā, natthi ābādhakāraṇā;

2150.

2151.

There is no offense for two finger joints, or due to illness; for the one cleaning with water after inserting more.

Tathā ummattikādīna-manāpatti pakāsitā;

2151.

Pañcamaṃ.

Thus, non-offense has been declared for the insane, etc.; all origins etc. are considered the same as for slapping.

2152.

Fifth

Bhuñjato pana bhikkhussa, pānīyaṃ vā vidhūpanaṃ;

2152.

2153.

If she takes water or a fan and attends to a bhikkhu who is eating, for her, there would be a pācittiya.

Gahitā udakeneva, khīratakkādayo rasā;

2153.

2154.

By "water" are also included flavors like milk and buttermilk; and whatever is called a "fan" is said to be a piece of cloth, etc.

Hatthapāse idhaṭṭhāna-paccayāpatti dīpitā;

2154.

2155.

Here, the offense is indicated due to being within arm's reach; in the Khandhaka, a dukkata is stated separately due to striking.

Hatthapāsaṃ jahitvā vā, upatiṭṭhantiyā pana;

2155.

2156.

If she attends without being within arm's reach; or while he is eating, there is an offense of dukkata.

Na doso deti dāpeti, tathā ummattikāya vā;

2156.

Chaṭṭhaṃ.

There is no offense for giving, causing to give, or for an insane woman; this origin is considered the same as with a goat.

2157.

Sixth

Viññatvā āmakaṃ dhaññaṃ, bhajjitvā yadi bhikkhunī;

2157.

2158.

If a bhikkhuni, having requested raw grain, roasts it, then grinds and cooks it, and consumes it, there is a pācittiya.

Na kevalaṃ tu dhaññānaṃ, gahaṇeyeva dukkaṭaṃ;

2158.

2159.

Not only in the acceptance of grains is there a dukkata; but also in the carrying of grains, and in drying them.

Bhajjanatthāya dhaññānaṃ, kapalluddhanasajjane;

2159.

2160.

In preparing the hearth for roasting grains; in making a fire, in preparing a ladle, and in the hearth.

Dhaññapakkhipane tattha, dabbiyā ghaṭṭakoṭṭane;

2160.

2161.

In placing the grains there, in stirring and pounding with the ladle; in all uses like scattering, there would be a dukkata.

Bhojanañceva viññatti, pamāṇaṃ idamettha hi;

2161.

2162.

Eating and requesting, this is the measure here; having requested, therefore, roasting etc. from another.

Viññāpetvā panaññāya, bhajjanādīni vā sayaṃ;

2162.

2163.

Or having requested from another, or herself, doing the roasting etc.; or having it done, whichever she consumes.

Ajjhohārapayogesu, tassā pācittiyo siyuṃ;

2163.

2164.

In the acts of consuming, for her, there would be pācittiyas; if she asks even her mother and consumes it, there is a pācittiya.

Bhajjanādīni katvā vā, kārāpetvāpi vā pana;

2164.

2165.

Having done or had done the roasting etc.; what is obtained herself without requesting, consuming it is a dukkata.

Viññattiyā panaññāya, laddhaṃ tāya sayampi vā;

2165.

2166.

What is obtained by another's request, by her herself; having done it or had it done, and then consuming it.

Sedakammādiatthāya, dhaññaviññattiyā pana;

2166.

2167.

For the purpose of sweat-releasing etc., in requesting grain; having kept the seven grains, and also in requesting the rest.

Anāpattīti ñātabbaṃ, tathā ummattikāya ca;

2167.

2168.

It should be known that there is no offense, and also for an insane woman; raw grain from relatives is also not proper.

Vinā viññattiyā laddhaṃ, navakammesu vaṭṭati;

2168.

Sattamaṃ.

What is obtained without requesting is proper for new works; all the origins etc. are considered similar to a journey.

2169.

Seventh

Uccāraṃ vāpi passāvaṃ, saṅkāraṃ vā vighāsakaṃ;

2169.

2170.

If she throws away excrement or urine, refuse or remnants of food; behind a wall, or causes others to throw it away.

Hoti pācittiyaṃ tassā, pākārepi ayaṃ nayo;

2170.

2171.

There is a pācittiya for her, this rule also applies to a fence; when throwing it away, one or many offenses are indicated.

Etāni pana vatthūni, cattāri sakalānipi;

2171.

2172.

These four objects, even all of them;

Āṇattiyampi eseva, nayo ñeyyo vibhāvinā;

With a single action, there would be one if she throws them away.

2173.

2172.

Sabbattha pana bhikkhussa, hoti āpatti dukkaṭaṃ;

This same rule should be understood by the discerning one for commanding; in the throwing away of a tooth stick, a pācittiya is declared.

2174.

2173.

Chaḍḍentiyā anāpatti, tathā ummattikāya vā;

Everywhere, for a bhikkhu, there is an offense of dukkata; even in the lavatory, or after looking around.

Aṭṭhamaṃ.

2174.

2175.

There is no offense for the one who is throwing away, or for an insane woman; the origin is arising from intention, this would be action and inaction.

Khette vā nāḷikerādi-ārāme vāpi yā pana;

Eighth

2176.

2175.

Tāni cattāri vatthūni, sace chaḍḍeti vā sayaṃ;

In a field or a garden of coconut trees etc., wherever a bhikkhuni plants in a green place.

2177.

2176.

Bhuñjamānā nisīditvā, khette tu harite tathā;

Those four objects, if she throws them away herself; or causes to throw them away, the stated rule is the determination of the offense.

2178.

2177.

Chaḍḍeti yadi ucchiṭṭhaṃ, udakaṃ calakāni vā;

While eating, sitting down in a green field; eating sugarcane etc., or going there.

2179.

2178.

Chaḍḍentiyā siyāpatti, ṭhāne antamaso jalaṃ;

If she throws away leftovers, water, or stalks; there is a pācittiya for her, there is a dukkata for a bhikkhu.

2180.

2179.

Kasite tu panaṭṭhāne, bījanikkhepane kate;

There would be an offense for throwing away, even water in any place; having drunk it, a coconut with the top cut off in such a place.

2181.

2180.

Lāyitampi manussānaṃ, khettaṃ rakkhati ce puna;

But in a cultivated place, when seeds are sown; as long as sprouts do not arise, there is a dukkata for all.

2182.

2181.

Na doso chaḍḍite khette, sabbaṃ chaḍḍentiyā pana;

If it protects the field that is cultivated for people; for the sake of planting, there, it is just according to the object.

Navamaṃ.

2182.

2183.

There is no offense for what is thrown away in a field, but for the one who throws everything away;

Naccaṃ vā pana gītaṃ vā, vāditaṃ vāpi bhikkhunī;

All the origins etc. are considered the same as the eighth.

2184.

Ninth

Dassanatthāya naccassa, gītassa savanāya ca;

2183.

2185.

A bhikkhuni should not go to see dancing, singing, or instrumental music; for her, there would be a pācittiya.

Sace ekapayogena, olokentī ca passati;

2184.

2186.

For the one going to see dancing, to hear singing; for her, there would be a dukkata at each step.

Aññasmimpi disābhāge, naccaṃ passati ce pana;

2185.

2187.

If with one effort, while looking, she sees; she hears their singing, one pācittiya is indicated.

Payogagaṇanāyettha, āpattigaṇanā siyā;

2186.

2188.

If she sees dancing in another direction; she hears singing from elsewhere, there would be separate pācittiyas.

‘‘Aññaṃ naccāti vādehi’’, iti vattuṃ na vaṭṭati;

2187.

2189.

Here, the calculation of offenses is the calculation of efforts; a bhikkhuni should not herself dance or sing.

Tassā pācitti sabbattha, bhikkhuno hoti dukkaṭaṃ;

2188.

2190.

It is not proper to say, "Play another dance"; or to agree when it is said, "Let us do the entertainment."

‘‘Upaṭṭhānaṃ pasattha’’nti, vattumevaṃ tu vaṭṭati;

2189.

2191.

There is a pācittiya for her in all cases, there is a dukkata for a bhikkhu; when it is said by a bhikkhuni, "Let us do the entertainment."

Attano ca ṭhitokāsaṃ, āgantvā ca payojitaṃ;

2190.

2192.

It is proper to say only, "Entertainment is praised"; or, staying in the monastery, she sees or hears.

Passantiyā tathā maggaṃ, naccaṃ paṭipathepi ca;

2191.

2193.

What is arranged after coming to her own place; or going and seeing, because of such reasons.

Idameḷakalomena, samuṭṭhānaṃ samaṃ mataṃ;

2192.

Dasamaṃ.

While seeing dancing on the road, even on the path; thus, there is non-offense for the insane, etc., even in emergencies.

Lasuṇavaggo paṭhamo.

2193.

2194.

This origin is considered the same as with a goat; this is worldly blame, evil thought, and also informing.

Yādha rattandhakārasmiṃ, appadīpe panekikā;

Tenth

2195.

The Garlic Chapter, the first.

Tassā pācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, saddhiṃ vā sallapantiyā;

2194.

2196.

If here, in the dark of night, without a lamp, a bhikkhuni stands together with a man.

Hatthapāsaṃ jahitvā vā, purisassa sace pana;

2195.

2197.

A pācittiya is stated for her, or while conversing; having come within arm's reach, through secret contact.

Santiṭṭhati ca yā tassā, dukkaṭaṃ paridīpitaṃ;

2196.

2198.

If a bhikkhuni, having gone beyond arm's reach of a man; or even without going beyond, with a yakkha, a ghost, etc.

Tathā ummattikādīna-mathaññavihitāya vā;

2197.

Paṭhamaṃ.

If she stands, for her, a dukkata is indicated; there is no offense if some other discerning person exists.

2199.

2198.

Dutiye tu ‘‘paṭicchanne, okāse’’ti idaṃ pana;

Thus, for the insane, etc., or for one doing otherwise; the origin is stealing, the intention is action, freeing from perception.

Dutiyaṃ.

First

2200.

2199.

Tatiyepi catutthepi, apubbaṃ natthi kiñcipi;

But in the second, "in a concealed place," this is;

Tatiyacatutthāni.

The rest is all considered the same as the first.

2201.

Second

Chadananto nisīditvā, anovassappadesakaṃ;

2200.

2202.

In the third and the fourth as well, there is nothing new at all;

Atikkameti yā, hoti, dukkaṭaṃ paṭhame pade;

The same as the first, together with origin etc.

2203.

Third and Fourth

Pallaṅkassa anokāse, dukkaṭaṃ samudīritaṃ;

2201.

2204.

Sitting under a roof, a place not exposed to rain;

Asaṃhārimenāpatti, gilānāyāpadāsu vā;

Sitting in the open, or if exceeding the boundary.

Pañcamaṃ.

2202.

2205.

She commits a dukkata in the first instance; in the second instance, a pācittiya is declared for her.

Ekāpatti nisīditvā, hoti gacchantiyā pana;

2203.

2206.

A dukkata is stated in the open space of a couch; likewise, in a doubtful state, with unsure or unquestioned perception.

Nisīditvā nipajjitvā, honti gacchantiyā duve;

2204.

Chaṭṭhaṃ.

There is non-offense for one who cannot be carried away, for one who is sick, or in emergencies;

2207.

All the origins etc. are considered the same as with the kathina.

Chaṭṭhena sattamaṃ tulyaṃ, aṭṭhame natthi kiñcipi;

Fifth

Sattamaṭṭhamāni.

2205.

2208.

There is one offense for the one sitting, but for the one going;

Nirayabrahmacariyehi, attānaṃ vā parampi vā;

There is one offense for the one going without sitting, or lying down.

Abhisapeyya pācitti, vācato vācato siyā

2206.

2209.

There are two offenses for the one going while sitting or lying down;

Ṭhapetvā nirayañceva, brahmacariyañca yā pana;

Having excluded hell and the holy life, then whatever:
"Bitch, sow, crow, blind, cripple," etc. (pāci. 239)

2210.

2210.

Akkosati ca vācāya, vācāyāpatti dukkaṭaṃ;

And she reviles with speech, the offense is a dukkaṭa by speech;
A threefold pācittiya is stated, for the rest, a threefold dukkaṭa.

2211.

2211.

Purakkhatvā vadantīna-matthadhammānusāsaniṃ;

For those who speak, respecting the instruction in meaning and Dhamma;
There is no offense, and the arising, etc., are the same.

Navamaṃ.

Ninth.

2212.

2212.

Rodantiyā vadhitvā vā, pācitti paridīpitā;

Having struck one who is weeping, a pācittiya is declared;
For one doing one each of the two, it is a dukkaṭa.

2213.

2213.

Sesamuttānamevettha, samuṭṭhānādayo pana;

Here, the rest is just as stated before, but the arising, etc.;
Are just like discarding a burden, only the action is different.

Dasamaṃ.

Tenth.

Andhakāravaggo dutiyo.

The Second Chapter on Darkness.

2214.

2214.

Nhāyati naggā yā pana hutvā;

She bathes, indeed, having become naked;
For all efforts, there is a dukkaṭa for her;
At the end of that, the Buddha said;
The bhikkhuni incurs an offense.

2215.

2215.

Acchinnacīvarā naṭṭha-cīvarā āpadāsu vā;

With torn robes, lost robes, or in dangers;
There is no offense by trimming the edge, the arising, etc., are the same.

Paṭhamaṃ.

First.

2216.

2216.

Dutiye pana vattabbaṃ, apubbaṃ natthi kiñcipi;

In the second, it should be said that there is nothing new;
All the arising, etc., are considered the same as wandering about.

Dutiyaṃ.

Second.

2217.

2217.

Dussibbitaṃ visibbetvā, sibbanatthāya cīvaraṃ;

Having unstitched a badly sewn robe, for the purpose of sewing;
After that, without interruption, that bhikkhuni does not sew it.

2218.

2218.

Ṭhapetvā catupañcāhaṃ, ‘‘na sibbissāmyaha’’nti hi;

Having set aside four or five days, "I will not sew it;"
Just as the burden is discarded, for her there would be a pācittiya.

2219.

2219.

Pacchā sibbati pācitti, nikkhipitvā dhuraṃ sace;

Afterwards, she sews, a pācittiya, if she discards the burden;
A threefold pācittiya is stated, for the rest, a threefold dukkaṭa.

2220.

2220.

Vuttaṃ ubhinnamaññasmiṃ, parikkhāre tu dukkaṭaṃ;

It is stated with regard to another of the two, a dukkaṭa with regard to requisites;
There is no offense for one who is ill, or when there is an interruption.

2221.

2221.

Atikkameti pañcāhaṃ, karontī vāpi cīvaraṃ;

She exceeds five days, or even does the robe;
The arising is considered as the discarding of a burden.

Tatiyaṃ.

Third.

2222.

2222.

Pañcāhikaṃ tu saṅghāṭi-cāraṃ yātikkameyya hi;

Indeed, she exceeds a five-day wandering with the saṅghāṭi;
There is an offense of pācittiya, at the dawn of the sixth for her.

2223.

2223.

Ekasmiṃ cīvare ekā, pañca pañcasu dīpitā;

One for one robe, five are declared for five;
The three robes, the saṃkacchi, the water-robe, these are the five.

2224.

2224.

Tikapācitti pañcāhā-natikkante dvidukkaṭaṃ;

A threefold pācittiya, a double dukkaṭa when the five days are not exceeded;
On the fifth day, she uses the five robes.

2225.

2225.

Otāpeti gilānāya, anāpattipadāsupi;

She exposes (them) to a sick person, also in cases of no offense;
All the arising, etc., are considered the same as the kathina.

Catutthaṃ.

Fourth.

2226.

2226.

Gahetvā yā anāpucchā, saṅkametabbacīvaraṃ;

Having taken a robe that should be transferred without asking;
She uses (it) belonging to another, for her there would be a pācittiya.

2227.

2227.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, sesāya tikadukkaṭaṃ;

A threefold pācittiya is stated, for the rest, a threefold dukkaṭa;
With torn robes, lost robes, or in dangers.

2228.

2228.

Tathā ummattikādīna-manāpatti pakāsitā;

Likewise, for the insane, etc., no offense is declared;
The arising is the same as the kathina, this is equal in action and non-action.

Pañcamaṃ.

Fifth.

2229.

2229.

Yā hi bhikkhuni saṅghassa, labhitabbaṃ tu cīvaraṃ;

That bhikkhuni who prevents a robe that should be received by the Sangha;
If so, for her, a pācittiya is declared.

2230.

2230.

Gaṇassāpi ca ekissā, lābhe āpatti dukkaṭaṃ;

Also for the gain of a group, or a single individual, the offense is a dukkaṭa;
Likewise, if she prevents another requisite.

2231.

2231.

Ānisaṃsaṃ nidassetvā, nivāreti na dosatā;

Having shown the benefit, there is no fault in preventing;
The arising, etc., are considered the same as not giving.

Chaṭṭhaṃ.

Sixth.

2232.

2232.

Cīvarānaṃ vibhaṅgaṃ yā, paṭisedheyya dhammikaṃ;

That (bhikkhuni) who forbids a division of robes that is according to Dhamma;
For her there is a pācittiya, a dukkaṭa is declared.

2233.

2233.

Adhamme dhammasaññāya, ubho vematikāya vā;

Thinking what is not Dhamma to be Dhamma, or in both with uncertainty;
Having shown the benefit, for her who forbids.

2234.

2234.

Tathā ummattikādīna-manāpatti pakāsitā;

Likewise, for the insane, etc., no offense is declared;
All the arising, etc., are considered the same as the immediately preceding.

Sattamaṃ.

Seventh.

2235.

2235.

Nivāsanūpagaṃ vāpi, tathā pārupanūpagaṃ;

Also a lower robe, or likewise, an upper robe;
Having removed some mark, together with a co-religionist.

2236.

2236.

Pitaropi panaññassa, dadeyya yadi cīvaraṃ;

If even the father would give a robe to another;
For whomever it may be, for her also, a pācitti is thoroughly purified.

2237.

2237.

Gaṇanāya vasenettha, cīvarānaṃ tu tā pana;

Here, depending on the counting, those concerning robes;
Pācittiyas should be counted, for the bhikkhu it would be a dukkaṭa.

2238.

2238.

Tāvakālikamaññesa-manāpatti dadāti ce;

If she gives a temporary one to another, there is no offense;
The ways of arising, etc., are stated to be the same as wandering about.

Aṭṭhamaṃ.

Eighth.

2239.

2239.

Cīvarassa vibhaṅgaṃ yā, nisedhetvāna cīvare;

That (bhikkhuni) who, having forbidden the division of robes, exceeds the time for the robe;
For her with the hope of a weak (robe), there is an offense.

2240.

2240.

Adubbale tu cīvare, sudubbalanti cetasā;

In the case of a not-weak robe, with the thought "very weak;"
In both with doubt, the Buddha declared a dukkaṭa.

2241.

2241.

Ānisaṃsaṃ nidassetvā, nivāreti na dosatā;

Having shown the benefit, there is no fault in preventing;
The arising, etc., are considered the same as not giving.

Navamaṃ.

Ninth.

2242.

2242.

Dhammikaṃ kathinuddhāraṃ, yā nivāreyya bhikkhunī;

That bhikkhuni who would prevent a lawful removal of the kathina;
For her, there is an offense of pācittiya, declared by the Sage.

2243.

2243.

Ānisaṃso mahā hoti, yassa atthāramūlako;

The benefit is great, for which the foundation is spreading out;
The foundation for removal is small, such a one should not be given.

2244.

2244.

Ānisaṃso mahā hoti, yassa ubbhāramūlako;

The benefit is great, for which the foundation is taking up;
The foundation for spreading out is small, such a one should be given.

2245.

2245.

Tathā samānisaṃsopi, saddhāpālanakāraṇā;

Likewise, even of equal benefit, for the sake of protecting faith;
Having shown the benefit, it is proper to forbid.

2246.

2246.

Sesaṃ pana asesena, sattamena samaṃ mataṃ;

The rest, however, entirely, is considered the same as the seventh;
Together with the arising, etc., there is nothing new.

Dasamaṃ.

Tenth.

Naggavaggo tatiyo.

The Third Chapter on Nakedness.

2247.

2247.

Ekāya tu nipannāya, aparā vā nipajjatu;

When one has lain down, another may lie down;
Or they may lie down together, for the two there would be a pācittiya.

2248.

2248.

Āpattibahukā ñeyyā, punappunaṃ nipajjane;

Many offenses should be known, in repeatedly lying down;
When one has lain down, if one sits down.

2249.

2249.

Ubho vāpi nisīdanti, samaṃ, ummattikāya vā;

Or both may sit down, equally, or for the insane;
There is no offense, the arising is considered the same as trimming the edge.

Paṭhamaṃ.

First.

2250.

2250.

Pāvārakaṭasārādiṃ, santharitvā panekakaṃ;

Having spread out a mat of rushes, etc., each one;
In communal lodgings, having covered over with that same (mat), if then.

2251.

2251.

Nipajjanti saheva dve, tāsaṃ pācittiyaṃ siyā;

They lie down together, for those there would be a pācittiya;
For one, there is a dukkaṭa, for two, a double dukkaṭa is stated.

2252.

2252.

Vavatthānaṃ nidassetvā, nipajjanti sace pana;

Having shown a distinction, if they lie down;
There is no offense for the insane, etc., the rest is equal to the first.

Dutiyaṃ.

Second.

2253.

2253.

Purato ca anāpucchā, yadi caṅkamanādayo;

Without asking beforehand, if she does walking exercise, etc.;
For the sake of discomfort to another, there is a pācittiya.

2254.

2254.

Nivattanānaṃ gaṇanāya tassā;

The counting of the turning away for her;
The counting of the pācittiyas should be known;
Offenses arise from the effort alone;
Of lying down, standing, and sitting.

2255.

2255.

Uddesādīsu pācitti, padānaṃ gaṇanāvasā;

In recitation, etc., there is a pācittiya, depending on the counting of the words;
A threefold pācittiya is stated, for the rest, a threefold dukkaṭa.

2256.

2256.

Na ca aphāsukāmāya, āpucchā purato pana;

And not for one who desires discomfort, (or) asking beforehand;
For her, doing walking exercise, etc., there is no offense.

2257.

2257.

Adinnādānatulyāva, samuṭṭhānādayo nayā;

The ways of arising, etc., are the same as not giving;
This action and non-action is evil, mental suffering, painful feeling.

Tatiyaṃ.

Third.

2258.

2258.

Sayaṃ anantarāyā yā, dukkhitaṃ sahajīviniṃ;

She herself, without interruption, (being) afflicted, a cohabitant;
She does not attend to her by another, nor does she attend to her herself.

2259.

2259.

Dhure nikkhittamatteva, tassā pācittiyaṃ siyā;

Just as the burden is discarded, for her there would be a pācittiya;
Also for a female resident, there is a dukkaṭa, or for another.

2260.

2260.

Anāpatti gilānāya, gavesitvālabhantiyā;

There is no offense for one who is sick, having searched and not found;
In dangers, for the insane, etc., the arising of discarding a burden.

Catutthaṃ.

Fourth.

2261.

2261.

Sakaṃ puggalikaṃ datvā, sakavāṭaṃ upassayaṃ;

Having given her own personal dwelling, a dwelling with its own door;
She herself then drags her out of that dwelling.

2262.

2262.

Ekeneva payogena, dvārādīsu bahūnipi;

With a single effort, even many at the doors, etc.;
For her dragging her out, for her there would be one pācittiya.

2263.

2263.

Payogagaṇanāyettha, pācittigaṇanā matā;

Here, the counting of the efforts is considered the counting of the pācittiyas;
The rule is the same for ordering, stated by the Great Sage.

2264.

2264.

‘‘Ettakāva imaṃ dvārā, nikkaḍḍhāhī’’ti bhāsati;

"Drag this one out of the doors so much;"
By a single order, there would be offenses depending on the number of doors.

2265.

2265.

Dukkaṭaṃ akavāṭamhā, sesāya tikadukkaṭaṃ;

A dukkaṭa from a doorless place, for the rest, a threefold dukkaṭa;
For both, however, everywhere, there is a dukkaṭa with regard to requisites.

2266.

2266.

Sesamettha asesena, samuṭṭhānādinā saha;

The rest here, entirely, together with the arising, etc.;
Is considered the same as dragging out from a Sangha dwelling.

Pañcamaṃ.

Fifth.

2267.

2267.

Chaṭṭhe panidha vattabbaṃ, apubbaṃ natthi kiñcipi;

In the sixth, however, here it should be said that there is nothing new;
The decision is just like that of Ariṭṭha in the training rule.

Chaṭṭhaṃ.

Sixth.

2268.

2268.

Sāsaṅkasammate anto-raṭṭhe bhikkhuniyā pana;

For a bhikkhuni wandering in a district considered dangerous;
There would be an offense, going on tour without a caravan.

2269.

2269.

Gāmantarapavese ca, araññe addhayojane;

And entering another village, in a forest half a yojana away;
The rule of pācittiya should be known by a bhikkhu skilled in the Vinaya.

2270.

2270.

Na doso saha satthena, khemaṭṭhānāpadāsu vā;

There is no offense with a caravan, in safe places, or in dangers;
This, with trimming the edge, is the same with regard to the arising, etc.

Sattamaṃ.

Seventh.

2271.

2271.

Aṭṭhame navame vāpi, anuttānaṃ na vijjati;

In the eighth, or even the ninth, there is nothing unexplained;
They are the same as the seventh, together with the arising, etc.

Aṭṭhamanavamāni.

Eighth and Ninth.

2272.

2272.

Pācitti dhuranikkhepe, ‘‘na gamissāmyaha’’nti ca;

A pācittiya on discarding the burden, "I will not go;"
And having discarded the burden, likewise, for her going afterwards.

2273.

2273.

Yojanāni pavāretvā, pañca gantumpi vaṭṭati;

Having invited for yojanas, it is proper to go five;
In the sixth, it should just be said, what would the name be here?

2274.

2274.

Tīṇi gantvā ca teneva, paccāgantuṃ na vaṭṭati;

Having gone three, it is not proper to return by that same (road);
But by another road, it is proper to return afterwards.

2275.

2275.

Anāpattantarāyasmiṃ, tassā dasavidhe sati;

There is no offense when there is an interruption, when these ten are present for her;
In dangers, for one who is sick, for lack of a second.

2276.

2276.

Rājacoramanussaggi-toyavāḷasarīsapā;

Royal (danger), thieves, a human attack, water, wild beasts, reptiles;
Interferences with human life and the holy life.

2277.

2277.

Samuṭṭhānādinā tulyaṃ, paṭhamantimavatthunā;

Similarly in origin etc., and with the first and last object;
This is the only difference: it is non-action and a painful feeling.

Dasamaṃ.

Tenth.

Tuvaṭṭavaggo catuttho.

The Fourth Chapter on Tuvaṭṭa.

2278.

2278.

Rājāgāraṃ cittāgāraṃ, ārāmaṃ kīḷuyyānaṃ vā;

A royal palace, a picture gallery, a park, or a pleasure garden;
A pleasure pond of various kinds—for those going to see these.

2279.

2279.

Niddiṭṭhaṃ muninā tāsaṃ, dukkaṭaṃ tu pade pade;

A dukkaṭa is specified by the Sage for them at each step;
Even if they see (these) five without withdrawing a foot.

2280.

2280.

Ekāyeva panāpatti, pācitti paridīpitā;

But there is only one offense, a pācittiya is declared;
If they go and see each of these, there would be separate offenses.

2281.

2281.

Payogabahutāyāpi, pācittibahutā siyā;

Even with multiplicity of effort, there would be multiplicity of pācittiyas;
But for a bhikkhu everywhere, there is a dukkaṭa offense.

2282.

2282.

Avaseso anāpatti-kathāmaggavinicchayo;

The remainder is the decision of the way of non-offense story;
Like seeing dancing, together with origin etc.

Paṭhamaṃ.

First.

2283.

2283.

Āsandiṃ vā pallaṅkaṃ vā, māṇanātītaṃ vāḷūpetaṃ;

A chair or a couch, exceeding the measure, filled with stuffing;
For those nuns using them, the Teacher declared a pācittiya offense.

2284.

2284.

Nisīdanassāpi nipajjanassa;

For sitting and also for lying down;
It occurs according to the abundance of effort;
Thus, the enumeration has been spoken of with exceeding effort;
Such indeed is the calculation of pācittiyas.

2285.

2285.

Pāde āsandiyā chetvā, bhitvā pallaṅkavāḷake;

Having cut a foot of the chair, having broken the stuffing of the couch;
No offense; the origin is considered the same as the immediately preceding one.

Dutiyaṃ.

Second.

2286.

2286.

Channaṃ aññataraṃ suttaṃ, yadi kantati bhikkhunī;

If a bhikkhunī cuts any one of the six threads;
As much as is cut by the hand, in that which is wound on the spindle.

2287.

2287.

Ekā pācitti niddiṭṭhā, suttakantanato pana;

One pācittiya is specified, but from the cutting of the thread;
In all preliminary efforts, a dukkaṭa for each handful.

2288.

2288.

Na doso kantitaṃ suttaṃ, puna kantantiyā pana;

There is no offense for one cutting a thread, but again for one cutting;
This is the same as the eḷaka wool one, with origin etc.

Tatiyaṃ.

Third.

2289.

2289.

Koṭṭanaṃ taṇḍulānaṃ tu, ādiṃ katvāna dukkaṭaṃ;

Pounding rice, a dukkaṭa is made the beginning;
In all preliminary efforts, for one doing service.

2290.

2290.

Bhājanāni gaṇetvāva, pācitti yāguādisu;

Having counted the dishes, a pācittiya for gruel etc.;
In the case of hard food etc., it should be shown by counting the pieces.

2291.

2291.

Sace mātāpitūnampi, āgatānaṃ panattano;

Even for mother and father, or for those who have come on their own account;
Without having any work done (for the Saṅgha), it is not proper to do anything.

2292.

2292.

Saṅghassa yāgupāne vā, saṅghabhattepi vā tathā;

For gruel or drinks for the Saṅgha, or likewise for meals for the Saṅgha;
And for the worship of a shrine, or for one doing service.

2293.

2293.

Attano ca anāpatti, tathā ummattikāya vā;

And for oneself there is no offense, likewise for one who is insane;
All the origin etc., are considered the same as the third.

Catutthaṃ.

Fourth.

2294.

2294.

Pācitti dhuranikkhepe, yathā cīvarasibbane;

A pācittiya for putting aside a burden, as in the sewing of robes;
Likewise here, a one-day exemption is not obtained.

2295.

2295.

Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva, tattha cīvarasibbane;

The rest is in accordance with what has been said, there in the sewing of robes;
Together with origin etc., it should be understood by one who discerns.

Pañcamaṃ.

Fifth.

2296.

2296.

Kāyena kāyabaddhena, tathā nissaggiyena vā;

With the body tied to the body, or likewise with that to be forfeited,
Whatever is for lay people, except for tooth-cleaning sticks and water.

2297.

2297.

Ajjhoharaṇiyaṃ aññaṃ, aññesaṃ tu dadāti yā;

She who gives other edibles to others;
There is a pācittiya for her, except for co-religionists.

2298.

2298.

Dantakaṭṭhodake vuttaṃ, dukkaṭaṃ muninā idha;

In regard to tooth-cleaning sticks and water, a dukkaṭa is stated here by the Sage;
She who does not give or have given, (there is no offense) even when going out and giving.

2299.

2299.

Deti bāhiralepaṃ vā, na dosummattikāya vā;

She gives external ointment, or there is no offense for one who is insane;
All the origin etc., are considered the same as the third.

Chaṭṭhaṃ.

Sixth.

2300.

2300.

Adatvā paribhuñjeyya, yā cāvasathacīvaraṃ;

She who uses a dwelling or robe without giving it;
But on the fourth day, having washed that robe again.

2301.

2301.

Sāmaṇerāya vā anta-maso utuniyā sace;

Even for a sāmaṇera or at least for a menstruating woman, if;
A pācittiya is stated for her; there would be a three-fold pācittiya.

2302.

2302.

Tassā nissajjite tasmiṃ, vuttaṃ tu dvikadukkaṭaṃ;

In her forfeiting that, a two-fold dukkaṭa is stated;
But in the absence of a menstruating woman, again on the turn of others.

2303.

2303.

Acchinnacīvarādīna-manāpattāpadāsupi;

For uncut robes etc., there is no offense in dangers;
All the origin etc., are considered the same as the Kathina.

Sattamaṃ.

Seventh.

2304.

2304.

Adatvā rakkhaṇatthāya, vihāraṃ sakavāṭakaṃ;

Without giving it for protection, a monastery with its own door;
There is a pācittiya for her when departing on tour.

2305.

2305.

Attano gāmato aññaṃ, gāmaṃ gacchantiyā pana;

For her going to a village other than her own village;
Or likewise for the enclosure of an enclosed monastery.

2306.

2306.

Itarassupacāraṃ vā, paṭhamena padena taṃ;

Or the vicinity of another, with the first foot;
There is a dukkaṭa; when she crosses over, a pācittiya with the second.

2307.

2307.

Akavāṭabandhanasmiṃ, dukkaṭaṃ paridīpitaṃ;

A dukkaṭa is declared in regard to a door not fastened;
There is no offense in dangers, when not obtaining a watchman.

2308.

2308.

Āpadāsu gilānāya, tathā ummattikāya vā;

In dangers, for one who is sick, likewise for one who is insane;
All the origin etc., are considered the same as the Kathina.

Aṭṭhamaṃ.

Eighth.

2309.

2309.

Hatthiassarathādīhi, saṃyuttaṃ sippameva vā;

Connected with elephants, horses, chariots, or indeed a craft;
Causing harm to others, spells, or various types of medicine.

2310.

2310.

Pariyāpuṇeyya ce kiñci, yassa kassaci santike;

If she learns anything at the side of anyone;
There is a pācittiya for her here, according to the divisions of the words etc.

2311.

2311.

Lekhe pana anāpatti, dhāraṇāya ca guttiyā;

But there is no offense for writing, and for memorizing and protecting;
And in all protective spells, likewise for one who is insane.

Navamaṃ.

Ninth.

2312.

2312.

Dasame natthi vattabbaṃ, navamena samaṃ idaṃ;

In the tenth there is nothing to be said; this is the same as the ninth;
The origin etc., of the two are similar to the words in the Good Dhamma.

Dasamaṃ.

Tenth.

Cittāgāravaggo pañcamo.

The Fifth Chapter on the Picture Gallery.

2313.

2313.

Sabhikkhukaṃ panārāmaṃ, jānitvā pavisantiyā;

For one entering a park with bhikkhus, having known (it as such);
Without asking, whatever it may be, a pācittiya is determined.

2314.

2314.

Sace antamaso rukkha-mūlassapi ca bhikkhunī;

If a bhikkhunī, even at least at the foot of a tree;
Without asking, crosses over the boundary, then.

2315.

2315.

Upacārokkame vāpi, aparikkhittakassa tu;

Or in transgressing the vicinity, but for one without a boundary;
There is a dukkaṭa in the first foot, a pācittiya would be in the second.

2316.

2316.

Abhikkhuke sabhikkhūti, saññāya panubhosupi;

In the perception of (it being) without bhikkhus, (but it) with bhikkhus, or in uncertainty having arisen;
There is a dukkaṭa offense for her.

2317.

2317.

Paṭhamaṃ pavisantīnaṃ, tāsaṃ sīsānulokikā;

For those entering first, it is in accordance with their direction;
She goes near to where they have gathered together.

2318.

2318.

Santaṃ bhikkhuṃ panāpucchā, maggo vārāmamajjhato;

Having asked the bhikkhu who is present, the path is through the middle of the park;
Or for her going by that, or entering in dangers.

2319.

2319.

Tathā ummattikādīna-manāpatti pakāsitā;

Likewise, no offense is declared for one who is insane etc.;
The modes of origin etc., are the same as putting aside a burden.

Paṭhamaṃ.

First.

2320.

2320.

Akkoseyya ca yā bhikkhuṃ, paribhāseyya vā pana;

She who reviles or scolds a bhikkhu;
There is a three-fold pācittiya for her, and in the remainder a three-fold dukkaṭa.

2321.

2321.

Purakkhatvā vadantīna-;

For those speaking, placing forward;
The teaching of the meaning and the Dhamma;
There is no offense for speaking proudly;
The remaining mode is considered the same.

Dutiyaṃ.

Second.

2322.

2322.

Yā saṅghaṃ paribhāseyya, tassā pācittiyaṃ siyā;

She who scolds the Saṅgha, there would be a pācittiya for her;
One or many, or likewise for the other.

2323.

2323.

Paribhāsantiyā tassā, dukkaṭaṃ paridīpitaṃ;

For her scolding, a dukkaṭa is declared;
The remainder is the same as the immediately preceding one, with origin etc.

Tatiyaṃ.

Third.

2324.

2324.

Nimantitāpi vā sace, pavāritāpi vā pana;

Even when invited or authorized;
Invitation and authorization, both are of the kind that has been stated.

2325.

2325.

Purebhattaṃ tu yāguñca, ṭhapetvā kālikattayaṃ;

Excepting pre-meal and gruel, the three kinds of allowable;
She who, for the purpose of consuming, any food.

2326.

2326.

Paṭiggaṇhāti ce tassā, gahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ siyā;

If she accepts it, there would be a dukkaṭa in the acceptance;
Here a pācittiya is declared, in dependence on consuming.

2327.

2327.

Kālikāni ca tīṇeva, āhāratthāya gaṇhati;

She accepts the three kinds of allowable things for the sake of food;
A dukkaṭa is stated in the acceptance, likewise in the consuming.

2328.

2328.

Nimantitā yā pana appavāritā;

She who has been invited, but not authorized;
Even if she drinks gruel here, it is proper;
Likewise, having spoken again to the owner;
Even if she eats other food.

2329.

2329.

Kālikāni ca tīṇeva, paccaye sati bhuñjati;

She eats the three kinds of allowable things, when there is a reason;
Likewise, no offense is declared for one who is insane etc.

2330.

2330.

Samuṭṭhānamidaṃ tulyaṃ, addhānena kriyākriyaṃ;

This origin is the same as the road, action and non-action;
She who, having been invited, without asking, eats the owner’s (food), then.

2331.

2331.

Kappiyaṃ pana kāretvā, akāretvāpi vā yadi;

Having had it made allowable, or even without having it made allowable, if;
She uses (it), there would be a pācittiya for her from the action.

Catutthaṃ.

Fourth.

2332.

2332.

Bhikkhunīnaṃ avaṇṇaṃ vā, pācitti kulasantike;

A pācittiya for speaking disparagingly of bhikkhunīs in the presence of a family;
Or for her speaking disparagingly of a family to bhikkhunīs.

2333.

2333.

Santaṃ bhāsantiyā dosaṃ, na dosummattikāya vā;

For her speaking a fault which is present, there is no offense, or for one who is insane;
The modes of origin etc., are the same as speaking proudly.

Pañcamaṃ.

Fifth.

2334.

2334.

Addhayojanato ore, bhikkhu ovādadāyako;

Within half a yojana, the bhikkhu giving advice;
Does not dwell, if the road is unsafe.

2335.

2335.

Ayaṃ abhikkhuko nāma, āvāso pana tattha hi;

This is called a residence without bhikkhus, but here;
For her approaching for the rains, there is an offense at the break of dawn.

2336.

2336.

Pakkantā pakkhasaṅkantā, vibbhantā vā matāpi vā;

Having departed, having crossed over, bewildered, or even dead;
Bhikkhus who have entered upon the rains, there is no offense in dangers.

2337.

2337.

Seso ñeyyo kathāmaggo;

The remainder should be known as the way of the story;
But the bhikkhu giving advice;
This is the same as the eḷaka wool one;
With origin etc.

Chaṭṭhaṃ.

Sixth.

2338.

2338.

Yā bhikkhunubhatosaṅghe, vassaṃvuṭṭhā tato puna;

She who, in an assembly of bhikkhunīs, having dwelt for the rains, then;
“I will not invite,” if she puts aside the burden.

2339.

2339.

Dhure nikkhittamattasmiṃ, tassā pācittiyaṃ siyā;

As soon as the burden is put aside, there would be a pācittiya for her;
When there is a danger, for one who is sick, or in dangers.

2340.

2340.

Pariyesitvāpi vā bhikkhuṃ, na doso alabhantiyā;

There is no fault for one who, even having searched for a bhikkhu, does not obtain (one);
This is said to be the origin of putting aside a burden.

Sattamaṃ.

Seventh.

2341.

2341.

‘‘Ovādādīnamatthāya, na gacchissāmyaha’’nti hi;

“For the sake of advice etc., I will not go”;
As soon as the burden is put aside, a pācittiya is declared.

2342.

2342.

Sadisaṃ tu samuṭṭhānaṃ, paṭhamantimavatthunā;

The origin is similar, with the first and last object;
Non-action, a worldly fault, bodily, and a painful feeling.

Aṭṭhamaṃ.

Eighth.

2343.

2343.

‘‘Na yācissāmi ovādaṃ, na pucchissāmuposathaṃ’’;

“I will not ask for advice, I will not ask about the uposatha”;
Thus, when the burden is put aside, there would be a pācittiya.

2344.

2344.

Sati vā antarāyasmiṃ, gilānāyāpadāsu vā;

If there is danger, or she is ill, or in distress;
There is no offense in seeking, when a second cannot be found.

2345.

2345.

Aṭṭhamepi anāpatti, evameva pakāsitā;

In the eighth also, non-offense is declared in this way;
This is said to be the arising from relinquishing the burden.

Navamaṃ.

Ninth.

2346.

2346.

Pasākhe pana sañjātaṃ, gaṇḍaṃ rucitameva vā;

But in a shared dwelling, a boil has arisen, or it is pleasing;
Without asking the Saṅgha, or the group, one by one.

2347.

2347.

‘‘Bhinda phālehi dhovā’’ti, sabbānevāṇāpentiyā;

"Break, split, wash," for all these she commands;
If they are done, a dukkata if unwilling, and six pācittiyas for her.

2348.

2348.

‘‘Yamettha atthi kātabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ tvaṃ karohi’’ti;

"Whatever should be done here, you do all of it;"
If she commands thus, and he does all of it.

2349.

2349.

Ekāya pana vācāya, dukkaṭāni panaccha ca;

With one utterance, five dukkata offenses;
Six pācittiyas for her, twelve offenses would occur.

2350.

2350.

Bhedanādīsu ekaṃ sā, āṇāpeti sace pana;

If she commands one of breaking, etc.;
And he does all, there would be one pācittiya.

2351.

2351.

Āpucchitvāpi vā viññuṃ, gahetvā dutiyampi vā;

Even after asking an expert, or taking a second person;
If she has all of breaking, etc., done.

2352.

2352.

Tassā ummattikādīna-manāpatti pakāsitā;

For her, non-offense is declared for insanity, etc.;
All the arisings, etc., are considered the same as with the Kathina.

Dasamaṃ.

Tenth.

Ārāmavaggo chaṭṭho.

The Sixth Ārāma Chapter.

2353.

2353.

Gaṇaṃpariyesanādismiṃ, gabbhiniṃ vuṭṭhapentiyā;

In seeking a group, etc., in ordaining a pregnant woman;
A dukkata for the instructor with the ñatti and kammavācā.

2354.

2354.

Kammavācāya osāne, pācitti pariyāputā;

At the conclusion of the kammavācā, a pācittiya is incurred;
Likewise, with the perception of pregnancy, but not if she is not pregnant.

2355.

2355.

Ubho sañjātakaṅkhāya, hoti āpatti dukkaṭaṃ;

If doubt arises in both, there is a dukkata offense;
Thus, it is declared for her misconduct and for the group.

2356.

2356.

Dvīsvagabbhinisaññāya, na dosummattikāya vā;

No offense with the perception of non-pregnancy, or for insanity;
The arisings, etc., are similar to those for taking what is not given.

Paṭhamaṃ.

First.

2357.

2357.

Dutiye natthi vattabbaṃ, paṭhamena samaṃ mataṃ;

In the second, there is nothing to be said, it is considered the same as the first;
Along with the arisings, etc., there is no difference.

Dutiyaṃ.

Second.

2358.

2358.

Chasvasikkhitasikkhaṃ tu, sikkhamānañhi bhikkhunī;

If a bhikkhunī, while a sikkhāmanā practicing the six training rules,
For two years, should ordain, there is an offense.

2359.

2359.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, dhammakamme tu satthunā;

A triple pācittiya is stated by the Teacher for a lawful act;
But in an unlawful act, a triple dukkata is declared.

2360.

2360.

Chasu sikkhitasikkhaṃ yā, dve vassāni akhaṇḍato;

She who practices the six training rules, for two years without interruption;
If she ordains, there is no offense, likewise for insanity.

2361.

2361.

Imā hi cha ca sikkhāyo, saṭṭhivassāpi ce pana;

These six trainings should be given at ordination, even after sixty years;
Without giving them, one should not have it done.

Tatiyaṃ.

Third.

2362.

2362.

Catutthe natthi vattabbaṃ, idha saṅghena sammataṃ;

In the fourth, there is nothing to be said, here it is approved by the Saṅgha;
There is no offense for ordaining a sikkhāmanā.

2363.

2363.

Adinnā paṭhamaṃ hoti, sace vuṭṭhānasammuti;

Giving consent for ordination is primary;
Even there, the upasampadā should be given in an enclosure (māḷaka).

2364.

2364.

Tatiyañca catutthañca, samuṭṭhānādinā pana;

The third and fourth, with the arisings, etc.;
Should be known to be the same as the first, the fourth is inaction.

Catutthaṃ.

Fourth.

2365.

2365.

Ūnadvādasavassaṃ tu, kañci gihigataṃ pana;

If she ordains someone from the laity who is under twelve years old,
With the perception that she is fully mature, there is no offense.

2366.

2366.

Hoti vānupasampannā, upasampāditāpi sā;

She is not ordained, even though she has been ordained;
Entirely and remaining, it is considered the same as the first.

Pañcamaṃ.

Fifth.

2367.

2367.

Chaṭṭhaṃ tu tatiye vutta-nayeneva vibhāvaye;

The sixth should be understood in the way stated in the third;
The seventh is all the same as the fourth.

Chaṭṭhasattamāni.

Sixth and Seventh.

2368.

2368.

Yaṃ tuvaṭṭakavaggasmiṃ, dukkhitaṃ sahajīviniṃ;

Whatever suffering cohabitant is stated in the Tuvaṭṭaka chapter;
The eighth should be known to be the same as that, there is no difference.

Aṭṭhamaṃ.

Eighth.

2369.

2369.

Dve vassāni ca yā kāci, vuṭṭhāpitapavattiniṃ;

Whatever probationer (pavattini) has been ordained for two years;
If one does not follow up with her, a pācittiya is incurred.

2370.

2370.

‘‘Dve vassāni ahaṃ nānu-bandhissāmī’’ti ce pana;

"For two years, I will not follow up," if she says this;
As soon as the burden is relinquished, there is a pācittiya for her.

2371.

2371.

Tañca bālamalajjiṃ vā, gilānāyāpadāsu vā;

If she does not follow up with one who is foolish, shameless, or ill, or in distress;
There is no offense for her, or for insanity.

2372.

2372.

Samuṭṭhānādayo tulyā, paṭhamantimavatthunā;

The arisings, etc., are the same as the first and last subject;
This is stated to be inaction, feeling is painful feeling.

Navamaṃ.

Ninth.

2373.

2373.

Vuṭṭhāpetvā tu yā kāci, bhikkhunī sahajīviniṃ;

Whatever bhikkhunī has ordained a cohabitant;
She should not go away taking her, nor command another.

2374.

2374.

Dhure nikkhittamattasmiṃ, tassā pācittiyaṃ siyā;

As soon as the burden is relinquished, there is a pācittiya for her;
If there is danger, or she cannot find a second.

2375.

2375.

Āpadāsu gilānāya, tathā ummattikāya vā;

In distress, for illness, or likewise for insanity;
There is no offense, this is the arising from relinquishing the burden.

Dasamaṃ.

Tenth.

Gabbhinivaggo sattamo.

The Seventh Pregnancy Chapter.

2376.

2376.

Kumāribhūtavaggassa, paṭhamādīni tīṇipi;

The first three of the Kumāribhūta chapter;
Should be indicated as similar to the three with laypeople.

2377.

2377.

Yā mahūpapadā dve tu, sikkhamānā panādito;

Two who are ready for higher ordination, sikkhāmanās from the beginning;
Should be known by a wise person as "having reached twenty years."

2378.

2378.

Sace gihigatā honti, na ca vā purisaṃ gatā;

If they have had experience as laypeople, but have not gone to a man;
They should be called "sikkhamānās," for they are in agreements, etc.

2379.

2379.

Na tā ‘‘kumāribhūtā’’ti, tathā ‘‘gihigatā’’ti vā;

They should not be called "kumāribhūtās," or "gihigatās;"
For they are endowed with both, it is not fitting to say so.

2380.

2380.

Sammutiṃ dasavassāya, datvā dvādasavassikā;

Giving agreement for ten years, one who is twelve years old;
Should be made fully ordained, this is the way with the rest.

2381.

2381.

Yā aṭṭhārasavassā tu, tato paṭṭhāya sā pana;

She who is eighteen years old, from then on;
Is said to be "kumāribhūtā," and also "gihigatā."

2382.

2382.

Vuttā ‘‘kumāribhūtā’’ti, sāmaṇerī hi yā pana;

She is said to be "kumāribhūtā," for she is a sāmaṇerī;
She should be called "kumāribhūtā" only, not otherwise.

2383.

2383.

Etā tu pana tissopi, sikkhāsammutidānato;

These three, from giving the training and agreement;
It is fitting to call them "sikkhamānās," there is no doubt.

Tatiyaṃ.

Third.

2384.

2384.

Ūnadvādasavassāva, vuṭṭhāpeti sace paraṃ;

If a bhikkhunī, becoming an preceptor herself, ordains another;
Who is a sikkhāmanā, under twelve years old.

2385.

2385.

Pubbe vuttanayeneva, dukkaṭānamanantaraṃ;

As in the way stated before, immediately after the dukkata offenses;
At the conclusion of the kammavācā, a pācittiya is declared for her.

Catutthaṃ.

Fourth.

2386.

2386.

Pañcame natthi vattabbaṃ, catutthaṃ pañcamampi ca;

In the fifth, there is nothing to be said, the fourth and fifth;
Both are triple arising, the fifth is inaction.

Pañcamaṃ.

Fifth.

2387.

2387.

Saṅghenupaparikkhitvā, ‘‘alaṃ tāvā’’ti vāritā;

Without being examined by the Saṅgha, "enough for now" is prevented;
Here, in the case of one ordained, fault is found later.

2388.

2388.

Ujjhāyati sace chanda-dosādīhi karontiyā;

If she is displeased with giving consent, because of dislike, etc.;
There is no offense, it is triple arising, intentional, painful feeling.

Chaṭṭhaṃ.

Sixth.

2389.

2389.

Laddhe ca cīvare pacchā, asante antarāyike;

Having obtained robes, later, when there is no impediment;
"I will not ordain," in relinquishing the burden.

2390.

2390.

Hoti pācittiyaṃ tassā, gilānāyāpadāsupi;

There is a pācittiya for her, even if she is ill or in distress;
There is no offense in seeking, when a group cannot be found.

2391.

2391.

Idañhi dhuranikkhepa-samuṭṭhānaṃ sacittakaṃ;

This is the arising from relinquishing the burden, intentional;
It is inaction, a worldly offense, it is painful feeling.

Sattamaṃ.

Seventh.

2392.

2392.

Aṭṭhamaṃ sattameneva, sadisaṃ pana sabbathā;

The eighth is entirely similar to the seventh;
In the ninth also, there is something to be said, this is the explanation.

2393.

2393.

Natthājānantiyā doso, tathā ummattikāya vā;

There is no offense if she does not know, likewise for insanity;
The arisings, etc., are similar to those for taking what is not given.

Aṭṭhamanavamāni.

Eighth and Ninth.

2394.

2394.

Mātarā pitarā vātha, nānuññātaṃ tu sāminā;

Not permitted by mother, father, or the owner;
There is a pācittiya offense for her, if she ordains her.

2395.

2395.

Upasampadakālasmiṃ, tathā pabbājanakkhaṇe;

At the time of ordination, and at the moment of going forth;
It should be asked twice by the bhikkhunīs, not by the bhikkhu.

2396.

2396.

Anāpatti na jānāti, mātuādīnamatthitaṃ;

There is no offense if she does not know of the existence of mother, etc.;
This is fourfold arising, from speech, from body and speech.

2397.

2397.

Vācāmānasato ceva, kāyavācāditopi ca;

From verbal mind, and also from body and speech, etc.;
It is action/inaction, unintentional, triple consciousness, and triple feeling.

Dasamaṃ.

Tenth.

2398.

2398.

Yā pārivāsikenettha, chandadānena bhikkhunī;

Whatever bhikkhunī, with the giving of consent, ordains a sikkhāmanā;
Who is on probation, there is a pācittiya.

2399.

2399.

Avuṭṭhitāyanāpatti, parisāyāvihāya vā;

There is no offense for one who has not completed probation, or for one leaving the assembly;
Consent is triple arising, triple consciousness, and triple feeling.

Ekādasamaṃ.

Eleventh.

2400.

2400.

Dvādase terase vāpi, vattabbaṃ natthi kiñcipi;

In the twelfth or thirteenth, there is nothing to be said;
All the arisings, etc., are considered the same as the immediately preceding.

Dvādasamaterasamāni.

Twelfth and Thirteenth.

Kumārībhūtavaggo aṭṭhamo.

The Eighth Kumārībhūta Chapter.

2401.

2401.

Samaṇī agilānā yā, dhāreyya chattupāhanaṃ;

Whatever samaṇī, not being ill, would carry an umbrella or footwear;
For her, a pācittiya offense occurs, it is incurred.

2402.

2402.

Sace ekapayogena, maggassa gamane pana;

If with one effort, in going on a road;
She carries it even for a day, there is one pācittiya.

2403.

2403.

Kaddamādīni passitvā, omuñcitvā upāhanā;

Having seen mud, etc., having removed the footwear;
If she goes carrying only the umbrella, there is a dukkata.

2404.

2404.

Sace upāhanāruḷhā, disvā gacchādikaṃ pana;

If, having put on footwear, she goes seeing dung, etc.;
Having removed that umbrella, there is a dukkata as she goes.

2405.

2405.

Chattampi apanāmetvā, omuñcitvā upāhanā;

Having also removed the umbrella, having removed the footwear;
If she puts them on again, there is a pācittiya for her.

2406.

2406.

Payogagaṇanāyeva, pācittigaṇanā siyā;

The counting of offenses is only by the counting of efforts;
A triple pācittiya is stated, likewise a double dukkata.

2407.

2407.

Ārāme upacāre vā, doso natthāpadāsupi;

In a monastery or its vicinity, there is no offense, even in distress;
This is the same as with eḷaka wool, with the arisings, etc.

Paṭhamaṃ.

First.

2408.

2408.

Hoti bhikkhuniyā yānā, orohitvā punappunaṃ;

For a bhikkhunī, having descended from a vehicle, again and again;
There is an offense in repeatedly mounting, according to the counting of efforts.

2409.

2409.

Āpadāsu anāpatti, tathā ummattikāya vā;

There is no offense in distress, likewise for insanity;
The rest is the same as the immediately preceding, with the arisings, etc.

Dutiyaṃ.

Second.

2410.

2410.

Yā ca dhāreyya saṅghāṇiṃ, yaṃ kiñcipi kaṭūpiyaṃ;

She who wears a girdle, even if it is small;
For her, an offense of expiation occurs, thus it has been declared.

2411.

2411.

Dhārentiyā panetthāpi, omuñcitvā punappunaṃ;

But here also, for her who wears it, repeatedly loosening and fastening it;
Just by the effort of each action, for her, there would be expiations.

2412.

2412.

Ābādhapaccayā yā tu, dhāreti kaṭisuttakaṃ;

However, she who wears a waist-string due to illness;
Likewise, for the insane, etc., no offense is declared.

2413.

2413.

Sesaṃ tu paṭhameneva, sadisanti pakāsitaṃ;

But the rest is declared to be similar to the first;
Here, the unwholesome mind and worldly fault are distinctive.

Tatiyaṃ.

Third.

2414.

2414.

Dhāreti pana yaṃ kiñci, sace sīsūpagādisu;

But she who wears anything at all, if on the head or elsewhere;
For her and for each object, there would be a count of offenses.

2415.

2415.

Ābādhapaccayā doso, kiñci dhārentiyā na ca;

No offense for wearing anything due to illness;
The rest is described as similar to the immediately preceding.

Catutthaṃ.

Fourth.

2416.

2416.

Yena kenaci gandhena, savaṇṇāvaṇṇakena ca;

By whatever scent, whether of good or bad color;
For her who bathes, an offense is declared at the end of the bathing.

2417.

2417.

Gandhayojanato sabba-payoge dukkaṭaṃ siyā;

In applying scent, for every effort, there would be a dukkaṭa;
No offense due to illness, or for the insane.

2418.

2418.

Sesaṃ tu tatiyeneva, sadisaṃ sabbathā mataṃ;

But the rest is considered similar to the third in every way;
The sixth is also declared to be similar to the third.

Pañcamachaṭṭhāni.

Fifth and Sixth.

2419.

2419.

Ubbaṭṭāpeyya caññāya, sambāhāpeyya vā tathā;

If she has another nun rub her body with powder, or massage her;
There is an offense for the nun, if it is done by a nun.

2420.

2420.

Ettha hatthamamocetvā, ekā ubbaṭṭane siyā;

Here, without removing the hand, there would be one offense for rubbing;
But removing it and removing it again, there would be a count of offenses for each effort.

2421.

2421.

Sambāhanepi eseva, nayo ñeyyo vibhāvinā;

In massage also, this same method should be understood by the discerning one;
No offense is declared in times of danger or for the sick.

2422.

2422.

Sesaṃ tu tatiyeneva, samuṭṭhānādinā samaṃ;

But the rest is the same as the third, in terms of origin, etc.;
The seventh is similar to the eighth, and the three following.

Sattamaṭṭhamanavamadasamāni.

Seventh, Eighth, Ninth, and Tenth.

2423.

2423.

Yā antoupacārasmiṃ, bhikkhussa purato pana;

She who, in the inner enclosure, in front of a monk;
Without asking permission, sits down, even on the ground, it is not proper.

2424.

2424.

Tikapācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, pucchite dukkaṭadvayaṃ;

A three-fold pācittiya is stated, a double dukkaṭa if asked;
No offense in times of danger or for the sick, or for the insane.

2425.

2425.

Idaṃ pana samuṭṭhānaṃ, kathinena samaṃ mataṃ;

But this origin is considered the same as for the kathina;
Action, inaction, without intention, three minds, and three feelings.

Ekādasamaṃ.

Eleventh.

2426.

2426.

Anokāsakataṃ bhikkhuṃ, pañhaṃ puccheyya dosatā;

Asking a question of a monk who is not at leisure incurs an offense;
And also when asking about the sutta from one who has made himself available in the Vinaya.

2427.

2427.

Kāretvā pana okāsaṃ, anodissāpi pucchati;

But having made an opportunity, she asks even without specifying (a topic);
There is no offense; this origin is from the words of the Dhamma.

Dvādasamaṃ.

Twelfth.

2428.

2428.

Saṃkaccikaṃ vinā gāmaṃ, padasā pavisantiyā;

For her who enters a village without prior arrangement, on foot;
When leaving the enclosure of a village that has an enclosure.

2429.

2429.

Dukkaṭaṃ paṭhame pāde, pācitti dutiye siyā;

A dukkaṭa in the first step, a pācittiya would occur in the second;
When leaving the boundary, the same method is considered here.

2430.

2430.

Yassā saṃkaccikaṃ naṭṭhaṃ, acchinnaṃ vāpi kenaci;

For her whose pre-arrangement is lost, or has been taken away by someone;
There would be no offense for her, or for the sick in times of danger.

2431.

2431.

Idameḷakalomena, samuṭṭhānādinā samaṃ;

This is the same as the eḷakala wool robe in origin, etc.;
The rest should be understood by the discerning one in the manner already stated.

Terasamaṃ.

Thirteenth.

Chattupāhanavaggo navamo.

The Ninth Chapter: On Umbrellas and Sandals.

Iti vinayavinicchaye pācittiyakathā niṭṭhitā.

Thus, the Pācittiya section in the Vinaya-vinicchaya is completed.

Pāṭidesanīyakathā

Pāṭidesanīya Account

2432.

2432.

Agilānā sace sappiṃ, laddhaṃ viññattiyā sayaṃ;

If, without being ill, she herself obtains ghee through solicitation;
In accepting it, thinking “I will eat it,” a dukkaṭa is declared.

2433.

2433.

Ajjhohāravaseneva, pāṭidesaniyaṃ siyā;

Just at the moment of swallowing, a pāṭidesanīya occurs;
A triple pāṭidesanīya, but for the sick, a double dukkaṭa.

2434.

2434.

Gilānā viññāpetvāna, pacchā sevantiyāpi ca;

Even if the sick solicits and then consumes it later;
Or the sick one solicits the remainder from relatives, etc.

2435.

2435.

Aññassatthāya vā atta-dhanenummattikāya vā;

Or for the sake of another, or by her own wealth, or for the insane;
There is no offense; the origin is considered similar to the road (addhāna).

Paṭhamaṃ.

First.

2436.

2436.

Ayameva ca sesesu, dutiyādīsu nicchayo;

This same determination applies to the remaining ones, the second, etc.;
Together with the origin, etc., there is no distinction.

2437.

2437.

Anāgatesu sabbesu, sappiādīsu pāḷiyaṃ;

In all the future instances, in the pāḷi, regarding ghee, etc.;
For her who eats, having solicited, a dukkaṭa in all eight cases.

Iti vinayavinicchaye

Thus, in the Vinaya-vinicchaya,

Pāṭidesanīyakathā niṭṭhitā.

The Pāṭidesanīya Account is completed.

2438.

2438.

Sekhiyā pana ye dhammā, uddiṭṭhā pañcasattati;

But those rules of training (sekhiya) that are enumerated, seventy-five;
In their Great Analysis (Mahāvibhaṅga), the interpretation of their meaning has been stated.

Iti vinayavinicchaye

Thus, in the Vinaya-vinicchaya,

Sikkhākaraṇīyakathā niṭṭhitā.

The Training Rules Account is completed.

2439.

2439.

Ubhatopātimokkhānaṃ;

Of the two pāṭimokkhas;
Of the analyses themselves;
The meaning, the essence of the commentaries;
That also has been stated in detail.

2440.

2440.

Tañca sabbaṃ samādāya, vinayassa vinicchayo;

Having gathered all that together, the Vinaya-vinicchaya;
Has been made by me for the benefit of monks and nuns.

2441.

2441.

Imaṃ paṭibhānajantu no jantuno;

May creatures of understanding, not without understanding,
Listen to this Vinaya, for they are interested in what is beneficial;
May they, who are manifestly wise and discerning,
Become a refuge, a protection, for people of good sense.

2442.

2442.

Bahusāranaye vinaye parame;

In this supreme Vinaya, rich in essential principles,
For one who aspires to expertise,
A great and supreme effort of the intelligent,
Should be made with diligence and respect.

2443.

2443.

Avagacchati yo pana bhikkhu imaṃ;

That monk who understands this,
Vinaya-vinicchaya, endowed with meaning,
Attains the peaceful state,
Which is immortal, ageless, stainless, and free from disease.

Iti vinayavinicchaye

Thus, in the Vinaya-vinicchaya,

Bhikkhunīvibhaṅgakathā niṭṭhitā.

The Bhikkhunī Vibhaṅga Account is completed.

Khandhakakathā

Khandhaka Account

Mahāvaggo

Mahāvagga

Mahākhandhakakathā
Mahākhandhaka Account
Pabbajjākathā
Ordination Account

2444.

2444.

Sīlakkhandhādiyuttena, subhakkhandhena desite;

In this section (khandhaka) also, declared with a section of excellent virtues (subhakkhandha), endowed with the aggregates of morality (sīlakkhandha), etc.;
I will explain the interpretation in brief.

2445.

2445.

Mātarā ananuññātaṃ, pitarā vāpi bhikkhuno;

For a monk who ordains someone without the permission of the mother or the father;
And without asking about disqualifying conditions (bhaṇḍukamma), there is a dukkaṭa.

2446.

2446.

Uddesaparipucchāya, sayaṃ ce byāvaṭo siyā;

If he himself is occupied with giving instruction and questions;
A young man should be ordered, saying, “Ordain and bring him here.”

2447.

2447.

Upajjhāyamathuddissa, avutto daharo pana;

But if the young man is not addressed to the preceptor (upajjhāya);
If he ordains him, it is proper even if he does it himself.

2448.

2448.

Sāmaṇeropi vattabbo, daharo natthi tattha ce;

A novice (sāmaṇera) should also be told, if there is no young man there;
Saying, "Having brought this boundary marker, ordain him and bring him here."

2449.

2449.

Saraṇāni panetassa, dātabbāneva attanā;

But for him, the three refuges should indeed be given by oneself;
Even in this way, a person is ordained only by a monk.

2450.

2450.

Purisaṃ bhikkhuto añño, pabbājeti na vaṭṭati;

Someone other than a monk is not allowed to ordain a man;
Someone other than a nun is not allowed to ordain a woman.

2451.

2451.

Sāmaṇeropi vā dātuṃ, sāmaṇerīpi vā tathā;

A novice can give, or a female novice can give;
By the order of both, they obtain the yellow robes (kāsāya).

2452.

2452.

Sayameva ca yaṃ kiñci, pabbājentena bhikkhunā;

By the monk who ordains someone himself;
Having cut off the hair, first in water, then again.

2453.

2453.

Nhāpetabbo siyā suṭṭhu, ghaṃsitvā gomayādinā;

He should be bathed well, having scrubbed him with cow dung, etc.;
If there are sores or scabies on his body.

2454.

2454.

Mātā yathā niyaṃputtaṃ, na jigucchati sabbaso;

Just as a mother does not abhor her own son in any way;
He should be bathed by the monk, just so, without abhorrence.

2455.

2455.

Kasmā? Panettakenāpi, upakārena sāsane;

Why? By this small act of kindness, in the dispensation;
May he always have strong affection for his preceptor, etc.

2456.

2456.

Vinodetvā panuppannaṃ, ukkaṇṭhaṃ kulaputtakā;

Having dispelled the arisen longing, the sons of good families;
Having fulfilled the trainings, they attain nibbāna.

2457.

2457.

Gandhacuṇṇena vā pacchā, cuṇṇenapi haliddiyā;

Afterwards, with scented powder, or with powder of turmeric;
Having repeatedly rubbed the body and the head.

2458.

2458.

Gihigandhaṃ vinodetvā, kāsāyāni panekato;

Having removed the householder's scent, the yellow robes (kāsāya), in one go;
Two or three times, or even once, should be given to him by the monk.

2459.

2459.

Atha hatthepi vā tassa, adatvā sayameva taṃ;

Then, even without giving them into his hand, the preceptor covers him himself;
Or the teacher is allowed to do so.

2460.

2460.

Nivāseti anāṇatto, so pārupati vā sayaṃ;

He puts it on without being instructed, or he covers himself;
Having removed all that, it should be given again.

2461.

2461.

Bhikkhunā tu sahatthena, tathā āṇattiyāpi vā;

The kāsāva given by the monk with his own hand, or by his order, is allowable;
But not if it is not given, it is not allowable.

2462.

2462.

Tasseva santakaṃ vāpi, kā kathā attasantake;

Or what is owned by him, what need to mention what is owned by oneself?
Having had the monks venerated there, having made him squat down.

2463.

2463.

Añjaliṃ paggahāpetvā, dātabbaṃ saraṇattayaṃ;

Having made him raise his joined palms, the three refuges should be given;
In the proper order, and not in reverse order.

2464.

2464.

Sace ekapadaṃ vāpi, deti ekakkharampi vā;

If he gives even one word, or even one letter;
Having violated the order, it is not valid if received.

2465.

2465.

Tikkhattuṃ yadi vā deti, buddhaṃ saraṇameva vā;

If he gives three times, either "Buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ," or only "Buddhaṃ";
Likewise, in the remaining cases also, they are indeed not considered given.

2466.

2466.

Katvānunāsikantāni, ekābaddhāni vā pana;

Having made them nasalized, or connected as one;
Having separated them or ma-endings, they should be given by one who knows.

2467.

2467.

Upasampadakammaṃ tu, ekatosuddhiyā siyā;

Ordination as a bhikkhu occurs with purity on one side;
But ordination as a novice does not occur without purity on both sides.

2468.

2468.

Tasmā ācariyenāpi, tathāntevāsikenapi;

Therefore, by the teacher and by the pupil;
The sounds, Bu-, ddha-, etc., proper articulation.

2469.

2469.

Ahāpentena vattabbā, pabbajjāguṇamicchatā;

Should be told to one who does not slur, desiring the qualities of ordination;
Ordination does not grow if even one sound is destroyed.

2470.

2470.

Yadi siddhāpi pabbajjā, saraṇāgamanatova hi;

Even if ordination is successful, from the going for refuge;
The ten precepts should be given by the monk to fulfill it.

Pabbajjākathā.

Ordination Account.

2471.

2471.

Upajjhāyamathācariyaṃ, nissāya vasatā pana;

For one who lives in dependence on a preceptor or a teacher;
The duties should indeed be done by the monk with affectionate morality (piyasīla).

2472.

2472.

Āsanaṃ paññapetabbaṃ, dantakaṭṭhaṃ mukhodakaṃ;

A seat should be prepared, a tooth-cleaner and water for the mouth;
Should be given to him at the proper time, if there is rice gruel (yāgu).

2473.

2473.

Yāgu tassupanetabbā, saṅghato kulatopi vā;

Gruel should be brought to him, either from the Saṅgha or from the family;
And the duty to the bowl should be done, the duty upon entering the village.

2474.

2474.

Cīvare yāni vattāni, vuttāni hi mahesinā;

Those duties in regard to robes that have been stated by the great sage;
Likewise in regard to lodging, footstools, and mats, etc.

2475.

2475.

Evamādīni vattāni, sabbāni pana rogato;

All these duties, from beginning to end regarding recovery from illness;
There would be one hundred and thirty-seven.

2476.

2476.

Vattabhedena sabbattha, dukkaṭaṃ tu pakāsitaṃ;

In every case, by difference of duty, a dukkaṭa is declared;
For the monk who does not do them, just through disrespect.

Upajjhāyācariyavattakathā.

Account of Duties to Preceptor and Teacher.

2477.

2477.

Upajjhāyassa vattāni, tathā saddhivihārike;

The duties to the preceptor, and likewise to the disciple who shares a dwelling;
There would be one hundred and thirteen, and likewise to the pupil also.

Saddhivihārikantevāsikavattakathā.

Account of the Duties Regarding a Co-Resident Pupil and a Dependent Pupil.

2478.

2478.

Pakkante vāpi vibbhante, pakkhasaṅkantake mate;

When one has departed or become distracted, when the group has departed, upon death;
Through the preceptor’s command, the dependence ceases, and the reliance is broken.

2479.

2479.

Hoti ācariyamhāpi, chadhā nissayabhedanaṃ;

There are six ways that dependence on the teacher is broken:
When one has departed or become distracted, when the group has departed, upon death.

2480.

2480.

Āṇattiyaṃ ubhinnampi, dhuranikkhepanepi ca;

Through the command of both, even by relinquishing the burden;
For one or for both, it is broken when there is no adherence.

2481.

2481.

Upajjhāyasamodhāna-gatassāpi ca bhijjati;

It is also broken when one has gone to reconcile with the preceptor;
Reconciliation is considered twofold: seeing and hearing.

2482.

2482.

Addhikassa gilānassa, gilānupaṭṭhakassa ca;

There is no offense for one on a journey, for one who is ill, or for one attending the sick;
Who has requested to dwell without dependence.

2483.

2483.

Jānatā attano ceva, vane phāsuvihārataṃ;

Knowing the ease of dwelling for oneself, even in the forest,
In a shared dwelling, near suitable alms-givers, it is proper to dwell.

Nissayapaṭippassambhanakathā.

Account of the Cessation of Dependence.

2484.

2484.

Kuṭṭhiṃ gaṇḍiṃ kilāsiñca, sosiñca apamārikaṃ;

A leper, one with boils, one with a skin disease, one with consumption, one with epilepsy;
Likewise, a royal soldier, a thief, one with debts, a creator of discord.

2485.

2485.

Kasāhataṃ narañceva, purisaṃ lakkhaṇāhataṃ;

A person flogged, a man marked with defects;
A debtor and a slave: there is a dukkata for ordaining such a one.

2486.

2486.

Hatthacchinnamaḷacchinnaṃ, pādacchinnañca puggalaṃ;

A person with a hand cut off, or whose testicles are cut off, and one whose foot is cut off;
One whose ears, nose, or fingers are cut off, and also one whose tendons are severed.

2487.

2487.

Kāṇaṃ kuṇiñca khujjañca, vāmanaṃ phaṇahatthakaṃ;

A blind man, a cripple, a hunchback, a dwarf, one with club hands;
A lame man, one paralyzed on one side, one with elephantiasis, one with a vile disease.

2488.

2488.

Jarāya dubbalaṃ andhaṃ, badhirañceva mammanaṃ;

One weakened by old age, a blind man, a deaf man, a mute man;
One who uses a chair for support, likewise a mute man: there is a dukkata for ordaining such a one.

2489.

2489.

Atidīghotirasso vā, atikālopi vā tathā;

One who is excessively tall or short, or likewise excessively dark;
Or excessively pale, or showing signs of copper or iron-like color.

2490.

2490.

Atithūlo atikisso, mahāsīsopi vā tathā;

Excessively stout, excessively thin, or likewise one with a large head;
Or one with an excessively small head, or one joined with or connected to it.

2491.

2491.

Kuṭakuṭakasīso vā, tathā sikharasīsako;

One with a head like a Kuṭa pot, or likewise one with a head like a peak;
A person with a head like a bamboo tube.

2492.

2492.

Kappasīsopi pabbhāra-sīso vā vaṇasīsako;

One with a head like a half-moon, or one with a head like a projecting rock, or one with a head like a wound;
Likewise, one with hair like a kaṇṇika flower, or likewise one with thick hair.

2493.

2493.

Pūtinillomasīso vā, jātipaṇḍarakesako;

One with a head of foul-smelling blue hair, or one with naturally white hair;
One with naturally copper-colored hair, or likewise one with a whorled head.

2494.

2494.

Sīsalomekabaddhehi, bhamukehi yutopi vā;

Or one joined with eyebrows connected by head hair;
Or one with connected eyebrows, or one with hairless eyebrows.

2495.

2495.

Mahantakhuddanetto vā, tathā visamalocano;

One with very large or small eyes, or likewise one with mismatched eyes;
One with squinting eyes, or one with deeply set eyes, or one with mismatched eye pupils.

2496.

2496.

Jatumūsikakaṇṇo vā, hatthikaṇṇopi vā pana;

One with ears like a Jatu mouse, or likewise one with elephant ears;
One with ears like a pierced pot, or likewise one with unpierced ears.

2497.

2497.

Tathā ṭaṅkitakaṇṇo vā, pūtikaṇṇopi vā pana;

Likewise, one with marked ears, or likewise one with foul-smelling ears;
Even the various kinds such as Yonaka, etc., are not corruptors of the assembly.

2498.

2498.

Atipiṅgalanetto vā, tathā nippakhumakkhi vā;

One with excessively yellow eyes, or likewise one without eyelashes;
One with constantly weeping eyes, or one with eyes like burst flowers.

2499.

2499.

Tatheva ca mahānāso, atikhuddakanāsiko;

Likewise, one with a large nose, or excessively small nose;
Likewise, one with a flat nose, or a person with a crooked nose.

2500.

2500.

Niccavissavanāso vā, yo vā pana mahāmukho;

One with a constantly running nose, or one with a large mouth;
One with a crooked or broken mouth, or likewise one with large lips.

2501.

2501.

Tathā tanukaoṭṭho vā, vipuluttaraoṭṭhako;

Likewise, one with thin lips, or one with very large upper lips;
One with cut lips, or one with an ulcerated mouth, or one with a mouth like a goat.

2502.

2502.

Saṅkhatuṇḍopi duggandha-mukho vā pana puggalo;

One with a conch-like snout, or a person with a foul-smelling mouth;
One with very large teeth, likewise one with Asura-like teeth.

2503.

2503.

Heṭṭhā uparito vāpi, bahinikkhantadantako;

One with teeth protruding outwards from above or below;
One without teeth, one with foul-smelling teeth, one with excessively small teeth.

2504.

2504.

Yassa dantantare danto, kāḷakadantasannibho;

If a tooth is located between the teeth, resembling a black grain;
If it is very small and remains there, it is allowable to ordain such a one.

2505.

2505.

Yo mahāhanuko poso;

That person who has a large jaw;
Connected with a long jaw;
Or one with a flat jaw;
Connected with a short jaw.

2506.

2506.

Nimmassudāṭhiko vāpi, atidīghagalopi vā;

Or one without gums, or likewise one with an excessively long throat;
Or one with an excessively short throat, or one with a throat with broken nodules.

2507.

2507.

Tathā bhaṭṭhaṃsakūṭo vā, bhinnapiṭṭhiuropi vā;

Likewise, one with a broken shoulder blade, or one with a broken back or chest;
One with excessively long or short arms, or one afflicted with scabies and itching.

2508.

2508.

Mahānisadamaṃso vā, uddhanaggupamāyuto;

One with excessively fleshy buttocks, joined with an elevated waist;
One with curved legs, large thighs, one with knees that rub together.

2509.

2509.

Bhinnajāṇu mahājāṇu, dīghajaṅgho vijaṅghako;

One with broken knees, large knees, long shins, or shrunken shins;
One with deformed heels, or likewise one with raised calves.

2510.

2510.

Yaṭṭhijaṅgho mahājaṅgho, mahāpādopi yo naro;

One with stick-like shins, large shins, a person with large feet;
Likewise, one with flat feet, or likewise one with large heels.

2511.

2511.

Vaṅkapādo naro yo vā, gaṇṭhikaṅgulikopi vā;

That person with crooked feet, or one with knotted fingers;
Or one with broken nails, or one with black, foul-smelling nails.

2512.

2512.

Iccevamādikaṃ kañci, naraṃ parisadūsakaṃ;

Ordaining any such person who is a corruptor of the assembly,
For that bhikkhu, there is an offense of dukkata.

Parisadūsakakathā.

Account of Corruptors of the Assembly.

2513.

2513.

‘‘Sāmaṇerajja mā khāda, mā bhuñja ca pivā’’ti ca;

Saying “Do not eat novicehood, do not consume, and do not drink”;
For preventing food, there is an offense of dukkata.

2514.

2514.

‘‘Nivāressāmi āhāra’’-miti vā pattacīvaraṃ;

Thinking "I will prevent food," or putting the bowl and robe inside;
In all applications, there is a dukkata.

2515.

2515.

Dubbacasāmaṇerassa, anācārassa kevalaṃ;

For a novice who is difficult to admonish and always misbehaving,
A bhikkhu, wishing for his welfare, having justly imposed a punishment.

2516.

2516.

Yāguṃ vā pana bhattaṃ vā, dassetvā kira bhāsituṃ;

Having shown him rice-gruel or food, it is proper to say,
“When the punishment is brought, you will get this.”

2517.

2517.

Aparādhānurūpena, daṇḍakammaṃ tu kāraye;

He should administer punishment according to the offense;
That is, ordering the fetching of things like sand and water.

2518.

2518.

Sīse vā nikkhipāpetuṃ, pāsāṇādīni kānici;

Or causing him to carry some stones, etc., on his head;
Or causing him to lie down on hot stones or on the ground.

2519.

2519.

Udakaṃ vā pavesetuṃ, na ca vaṭṭati bhikkhuno;

It is not proper for a bhikkhu to submerge him in water;
Here, only a limited punishment has been declared.

Nivāraṇakathā.

Account of Prevention.

2520.

2520.

Pakkhopakkamikāsittā, catuttho panusūyako;

One excited every fortnight, one who spies on, the fourth, one made impotent;
These five eunuchs have been described, along with a hermaphrodite.

2521.

2521.

Tesu āsittusūyānaṃ, pabbajjā na nivāritā;

Among them, ordination is not prevented for one who is excited or spies;
But for the other three eunuchs, it is prevented.

2522.

2522.

Vāritā yassa pabbajjā, nāsetabboti so mato;

He whose ordination is prevented, he is considered to be expelled;
Having known them in these three ways, there is a dukkata for ordaining such a one.

Paṇḍakakathā.

Account of Eunuchs.

2523.

2523.

Liṅgattheno ca saṃvāsa-ttheno tadubhayassa ca;

A thief of the sign, a thief of association, and a thief of both;
A theyyasaṃvāsaka is said to be threefold.

2524.

2524.

Sayameva ca yo tattha, pabbajitvā na gaṇhati;

He who, having gone forth there himself, does not count;
Or the bhikkhu years, or pay respects according to seniority.

2525.

2525.

Liṅgattheno ayaṃ liṅga-mattassa thenato siyā;

This thief of the sign is a thief merely of the sign;
But he who, having gone forth, counts the bhikkhu years.

2526.

2526.

Saṃvāsaṃ sādiyantova, saṃvāsatthenako mato;

Approving of association, he is considered a thief of association;
A thief of both is as stated in the previous manner, as he said.

2527.

2527.

‘‘Rājadubbhikkhakantāra-rogaveribhayehi vā;

“Due to royal oppression, famine, a wilderness, disease, enemies, or fear;
Or for the purpose of obtaining robes, he here takes up the sign.

2528.

2528.

Saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāseti, yāva so suddhamānaso;

He does not approve of association, until his mind is pure;
He is not called a theyyasaṃvāsaka until then.”

Theyyasaṃvāsakakathā.

Account of the Theyyasaṃvāsaka.

2529.

2529.

‘‘Titthiyohaṃ bhavissa’’nti, upasampannabhikkhu ce;

“I will become a heretic,” if an ordained bhikkhu;
Goes to a heretic monastery, even with the (Buddhist) sign.

2530.

2530.

Gacchato padavārena, hoti āpatti dukkaṭaṃ;

There is an offense of dukkata for each step he takes;
He becomes a deserter to the heretics when he relies on their sign.

2531.

2531.

‘‘Titthiyohaṃ bhavissa’’nti, kusacīrādikaṃ pana;

"I will become a heretic," if he himself;
Removes the kusa grass robe, he too would be a deserter.

2532.

2532.

Naggo ājīvakādīnaṃ, gantvā tesaṃ upassayaṃ;

Going naked to the monastery of the Ājīvakas, etc.;
If he shaves his head or does not adopt their practice.

2533.

2533.

Morapiñchādikaṃ tesaṃ, liṅgaṃ gaṇhāti vā sace;

If he takes up their sign of peacock feathers, etc.;
Or if he obtains their essence or their ordination itself.

2534.

2534.

Hoti titthiyapakkanto, na panesa vimuccati;

He becomes a deserter to the heretics, but he is not freed;
As stated for the naked one going, there is a dukkata for each step.

2535.

2535.

Vutto anupasampanna-vasena theyyavāsako;

The theyyavāsaka has been stated in the context of one not yet fully ordained;
Likewise, the deserter to the heretics has been stated for a fully ordained bhikkhu.

Titthiyapakkantakathā.

Account of the Deserter to the Heretics.

2536.

2536.

Nāgo vāpi supaṇṇo vā, yakkho sakkopi vā idha;

A nāga, or a supaṇṇa, or a yakkha, or even Sakka;
A being gone to the animal realm, it is said, is not fit to be ordained.

Tiracchānakathā.

Account of Animals.

2537.

2537.

Pañcānantarike pose, pabbājentassa dukkaṭaṃ;

There is a dukkata for ordaining a person who has committed any of the five heinous crimes;
And a hermaphrodite, and likewise one who has defiled a bhikkhuni.

2538.

2538.

Ekatoupasampannaṃ, bhikkhunīnaṃ tu santike;

Having defiled one fully ordained, in the presence of bhikkhunis;
Having defiled her, he would not be one who has defiled a bhikkhuni.

2539.

2539.

Sace anupasampanna-dūsako upasampadaṃ;

If a defiler who is not fully ordained obtains full ordination;
That ordination, however, is not defeated.

Ekādasaabhabbapuggalakathā.

Account of the Eleven Unfit Individuals.

2540.

2540.

Nūpasampādanīyova, anupajjhāyako naro;

A person who is not to be fully ordained as a preceptor;
There is a dukkata for doing so, it does not lapse if it is done.

2541.

2541.

Kuppatīti vadanteke, na gahetabbameva taṃ;

Some say that it lapses; it should not be accepted;
This method should be understood by the wise in all the remaining cases.

2542.

2542.

Upasampadakammassa, abhabbā pañcavīsati;

Twenty-five are unfit for the ordination procedure;
Even if done unknowingly, the removal is worthy of expulsion.

2543.

2543.

Hatthacchinnādibāttiṃsa, kuṭṭhiādi ca terasa;

Thirty-two beginning with one with a hand cut off, and thirteen beginning with a leper;
Removing those is not an offense; if it is done, it is permissible.

2544.

2544.

Ekūpajjhāyako hoti;

There is one preceptor;
There are three teachers;
And those seeking ordination;
There are two or three.

2545.

2545.

Tīhi ācariyeheva, ekato anusāvanaṃ;

Having removed (the names) together with the three teachers;
The action done does not lapse, it is proper.

2546.

2546.

Ekūpajjhāyako hoti;

There is one preceptor;
Likewise, there is one teacher;
And those seeking ordination;
There are two or three.

2547.

2547.

Anupubbena sāvetvā, tesaṃ nāmaṃ tu tena ca;

Having announced sequentially, and their names with that (candidate);
Having announced it together, the action done does not lapse.

2548.

2548.

Nānupajjhāyakenāpi, nānācariyakena ca;

Having announced it mutually, even with different preceptors and different teachers,
The action done is proper.

2549.

2549.

Sumano tissatherassa, anusāveti sissakaṃ;

Sumana Thera announces to his pupil;
Tissa announces to Sumana Thera's pupil.

2550.

2550.

Nānupajjhāyakeneva, ekācariyakenidha;

Not even with one's own preceptor, nor with a single teacher here,
Ordination is prohibited, by the Buddha, kinsman of the sun.

Mahākhandhakakathā.

Mahākhandhakakathā.

Uposathakkhandhakakathā

Uposathakkhandhakakathā

2551.

2551.

Baddhābaddhavaseneva, sīmā nāma dvidhā matā;

By the determination of bound and unbound, a boundary (sīmā) is considered twofold;
But by connecting a sign (nimitta) with a sign, it is agreed upon.

2552.

2552.

Ayaṃ sīmāvipattīhi, ekādasahi vajjitā;

This, free from the eleven faults of a boundary,
Is known as a bound boundary (baddhā sīmā), and it is endowed with the three accomplishments.

2553.

2553.

Khaṇḍasamānasaṃvāsā-vippavāsādibhedato;

Through division of shared residence by fragments, separate residence, and so on,
Thus, the bound is said to be threefold, and the unbound is also considered threefold.

2554.

2554.

Gāmato udakukkhepā, sattabbhantaratopi ca;

From the village, a water-scoop, and also within seven abbbhantaras,
Is called "village boundary."

2555.

2555.

Jātassare samudde vā, nadiyā vā samantato;

In a natural lake or in the sea, or all around a river,
It is designated udakukkhepa.

2556.

2556.

Agāmake araññe tu, sattevabbhantarā pana;

In a non-village forest, but within seven abbhantaras,
Is named sattabbhantara.

2557.

2557.

Ekaṃ abbhantaraṃ vuttaṃ, aṭṭhavīsatihatthakaṃ;

One abbhantara is said to be twenty-eight cubits;
A water-scoop (udakukkhepa) is considered by the method of throwing a lump.

2558.

2558.

Imā dve pana sīmāyo, vaḍḍhanti parisāvasā;

These two boundaries, however, increase according to the assembly;
An abbhantara and a water-scoop, the remaining ones exist in a fixed space.

2559.

2559.

Ṭhito antoparicchede, hatthapāsaṃ vihāya vā;

Standing within the boundary, or leaving a hand's reach,
Without transgressing that much, or another boundary beyond.

2560.

2560.

Ṭhito kammaṃ vikopeti, iti aṭṭhakathānayo;

Standing invalidates the act, so is the way of the commentary;
Therefore, it should be done within a hand's reach or outside.

2561.

2561.

Baddhasīmāya saṇṭhānaṃ, nimittaṃ disakittanaṃ;

Knowing the shape of the bound boundary, the sign, the declaration of direction,
Having purified the measurement, a wise person should bind the boundary.

2562.

2562.

Tikoṇaṃ caturassañca, vaṭṭañca paṇavūpamaṃ;

Triangular, quadrangular, circular, like a tabor,
Like an awning, bow-shaped, like a mudiṅga drum or a cart.

2563.

2563.

Pabbataṃ vanaṃ pāsāṇaṃ, rukkhaṃ maggañca vammikaṃ;

Mountain, forest, rock, tree, path, and anthill,
Water, and also river, these eight signs he should declare.

2564.

2564.

Tesu tīṇi nimittāni, ādiṃ katvā samantato;

Among these, taking three signs as the beginning, all around,
It is proper to bind even with a hundred signs.

2565.

2565.

Tiyojanaparā sīmā, ukkaṭṭhāti pakāsitā;

A boundary of three yojanas is declared as the maximum;
Taking twenty-one bhikkhus, it is considered the minimum.

2566.

2566.

Ukkaṭṭhāyapi ukkaṭṭhā, heṭṭhimāyapi heṭṭhimā;

Greater than the maximum, and smaller than the minimum,
These two are said to be without a boundary, by the kinsman of the sun.

2567.

2567.

Nimittaṃ pana kittetvā, sabbameva samantato;

Having declared each sign, all around,
Afterward, with a ñatti-dutiyakamma, it is fitting to bind the boundary.

2568.

2568.

Bandhitvānantaraṃ pacchā, cīvarāvippavāsakaṃ;

Having bound it, immediately afterward, one who has been deprived of robes,
Having agreed, that bound one is called deprived.

2569.

2569.

Nadīsarasamuddesu, sīmaṃ bandhati ce pana;

If one binds a boundary in a river, lake, or sea,
He does not get across by that, the Conqueror said it is without a boundary.

Sīmākathā.

Sīmākathā.

2570.

2570.

Dinakārakakattabbā-kārānañca vasā pana;

According to the effect of the day-maker,
Nine uposathas are stated, by the Buddha, kinsman of the sun.

2571.

2571.

Cātuddaso pannaraso, sāmaggī ca uposatho;

The fourteenth, the fifteenth, and the sāmaggi uposatha,
Are specified by the day, these three uposathas.

2572.

2572.

Saṅghe uposatho ceva, gaṇe puggaluposatho;

The Sangha uposatha, the group (gaṇa) uposatha, and the individual (puggala) uposatha,
According to the effect of the causes, these three uposathas are stated.

2573.

2573.

Suttuddesābhidhāno ca, pārisuddhiuposatho;

The suttuddesa, the pārisuddhi uposatha,
And the adhiṭṭhāna, are specified as the three uposathas by action (kamma).

2574.

2574.

Saṅghassa pātimokkho ca, pārisuddhi gaṇassa ca;

The Pātimokkha for the Sangha, the pārisuddhi for the group,
And the adhiṭṭhāna for one person, were specified by the Teacher.

2575.

2575.

Pātimokkhassa uddesā, pañca vuttā mahesinā;

Five recitations of the Pātimokkha were stated by the great sage;
Having recited the Nidāna, the remainder should be proclaimed.

2576.

2576.

Ayameva nayo ñeyyo, sesesupi ca viññunā;

The wise should know this same method in the remaining ones also;
For bhikkhunis, there are four recitations, not these nine.

2577.

2577.

Pātimokkhassa uddeso, kātabbova uposathe;

The recitation of the Pātimokkha should be done on the Uposatha;
Without obstruction, non-recitation is prohibited.

2578.

2578.

Thero ca issaro tassa;

The Thera is the master of it;
"Therādheyya" is the reading;
Requested by the one who does not turn away;
Whose act is valid.

2579.

2579.

Uddisante samappā vā, āgacchanti sace pana;

While reciting, if those who are equal or coming arrive,
That which is recited is well-recited, the remainder should be proclaimed.

2580.

2580.

Uddiṭṭhamatte bhikkhūnaṃ, parisāyuṭṭhitāya vā;

When only the recited portion remains, or for the assembly of bhikkhus,
The pārisuddhi should be done at their origin, if they are many.

2581.

2581.

Sammajjituṃ padīpetuṃ, paññāpetuṃ dakāsane;

For sweeping, lighting a lamp, arranging a water seat,
If the Thera who has been designated does not do it, there is a dukkaṭa.

2582.

2582.

Katvā sammajjanaṃ dīpaṃ, ṭhapetvā udakāsanaṃ;

Having done the sweeping, the lamp, having placed the water seat,
Having placed the gaṇañatti, the three uposathas should be done.

2583.

2583.

Pubbakiccaṃ samāpetvā, adhiṭṭheyya panekako;

Having completed the preliminary duties, one alone should make the resolution (adhiṭṭheyyā);
If he does not make the resolution, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.

2584.

2584.

Adhammena ca vaggena, samaggena adhammato;

By unlawful group, and lawful group,
Likewise, by the harmonious and the unlawful, and by the harmonious and the lawful.

2585.

2585.

Uposathassa etāni, kammānīti jinobravi;

These are the actions of the uposatha, so the Conqueror said;
Among these four, the fourth is considered righteous.

2586.

2586.

Adhammenidha vaggo hi, katamo cetthuposatho?

Here, by which unlawful group is the uposatha in this case?
Where four bhikkhus dwell within one boundary.

2587.

2587.

Ekassa pārisuddhiṃ te, ānayitvā tayo janā;

Having brought the pārisuddhi of one, three persons,
If they do the pārisuddhi, the group uposatha is unlawful.

2588.

2588.

Adhammena samaggo hi, cattāro bhikkhunekato;

Harmonious by the unlawful, four bhikkhus together,
If they do the pārisuddhi, it is harmonious and unlawful.

2589.

2589.

Dhammena pana vaggo hi, katamo so uposatho;

Indeed, by which lawful group is that uposatha?
Where four bhikkhus dwell within one boundary.

2590.

2590.

Ekassa pārisuddhiṃ te, ānayitvā tayo janā;

Having brought the pārisuddhi of one, three persons,
If they recite the Pātimokkha, the group uposatha is lawful.

2591.

2591.

Dhammato hi samaggo so;

Harmonious by the lawful is this;
Four bhikkhus together;
Here, they recite the Pātimokkha;
Considered harmonious by the lawful.

2592.

2592.

Vagge samagge vaggoti, saññino vimatissa vā;

For one who performs the Uposatha thinking it is a group when it is harmonious, or being in doubt,
There is an offense of dukkaṭa.

2593.

2593.

Bhedādhippāyato tassa, hoti thullaccayaṃ pana;

For him, with the intention of division, there is a thullaccaya;
If he is aware that it is a group when it is harmonious, there is an offense.

2594.

2594.

Ukkhittena gahaṭṭhena, sesehi sahadhammihi;

With one who has been expelled, a householder, with the remaining co-religionists,
With those who have renounced, those who have been dismissed, those who are in training, or with eleven.

2595.

2595.

Uposatho na kātabbo, sabhāgāpattikena vā;

The Uposatha should not be done, nor with one who shares an offense (sabhāgāpattika);
For one who does it with a proxy (chanda) or being surrounded, there is a dukkaṭa.

2596.

2596.

Adesetvā panāpattiṃ, nāvikatvāna vematiṃ;

Without declaring an offense, without making it clear without doubt,
The Uposatha should not be done, on a day or a non-Uposatha day.

2597.

2597.

Uposathe panāvāsā, sabhikkhumhā ca bhikkhunā;

On the Uposatha day, from a dwelling (āvāsa) with bhikkhus,
A dwelling or a non-dwelling, should never be gone to.

2598.

2598.

Yasmiṃ uposathe kiccaṃ;

In which Uposatha, a duty,
Exists in the dwelling;
That is called,
A dwelling with bhikkhus.

2599.

2599.

Uposatho kimatthāya, kimatthāya pavāraṇā;

For what purpose is the Uposatha, for what purpose is the pavāraṇā?
The Uposatha is for the purpose of harmony, the pavāraṇā is for the purpose of purity.

2600.

2600.

Kopetuṃ dhammikaṃ kammaṃ, paṭikkoseyya dukkaṭaṃ;

To ruin a righteous act, if one rejects, there is a dukkaṭa;
For one who does not give consent (chanda) or bodily harmony, there is also a dukkaṭa.

2601.

2601.

Hoti pañcavidho saṅgho, catuvaggādibhedato;

The Sangha is fivefold, due to division into groups of four, and so on;
And that is explained in relation to the action to be done.

2602.

2602.

Pavāraṇaṃ tathābbhānaṃ, kammañca upasampadaṃ;

Except for pavāraṇā, invitation (abbhāna), action, and higher ordination (upasampadā),
There is no action that cannot be done by a group of four.

2603.

2603.

Pañcavaggena abbhānaṃ, majjhadesūpasampadaṃ;

Invitation (abbhāna) by a group of five, higher ordination in the Middle Country (Majjhima Desa);
Without invitation, everything else is proper with a group of ten.

2604.

2604.

Kammaṃ vīsativaggena, na kattabbaṃ na kiñcipi;

No action whatsoever should be done by a group of twenty;
To make known that there is a fault in being deficient, not excess in being more than that.

2605.

2605.

Cattāro pakatattāva, kammappattāti dīpitā;

Four are declared as being competent by nature, to be competent for the action;
In actions to be done by a group of four, and in the remaining ones, this is the method.

2606.

2606.

Catuvaggādikattabbaṃ, katvāsaṃvāsapuggalaṃ;

Having done that which is to be done by a group of four, and making a person who does not live together (asaṃvāsa puggala),
For one who makes the gaṇapūra, what is done is ruined, there is a dukkaṭa.

2607.

2607.

Parivāsādikammepi, tatraṭṭhaṃ gaṇapūrakaṃ;

Even in the actions of parivāsa and so on, making a gaṇapūra in that situation,
For those who do so, likewise, the remainder is proper.

Uposathakkhandhakakathā.

Uposathakkhandhakakathā.

Vassūpanāyikakkhandhakakathā

Vassūpanāyikakkhandhakakathā

2608.

2608.

Purimā pacchimā cāti, duve vassūpanāyikā;

There are two entering of the rains-retreat (vassūpanāyika), the earlier and the later;
A dwelling or a verbal expression must be made by one who is going to enter.

2609.

2609.

Vassūpagamanaṃ vāpi, jānaṃ anupagacchato;

Or not entering the rains-retreat while knowing,
Or after dwelling for three months, if one wanders, there is a dukkaṭa.

2610.

2610.

Rukkhassa susire chatte, cāṭichavakuṭīsu vā;

In the hollow of a tree, under an umbrella, in a cāṭi, a thatched hut, or a kuṭī,
Or even in the open air, it is not proper to enter the rains-retreat.

2611.

2611.

Vassacchede anāpatti, antarāyo sace siyā;

There is no offense in breaking the rains-retreat, if there is an obstruction;
For a bhikkhu who has broken the rains-retreat, pavāraṇā is prohibited.

2612.

2612.

Mātāpitūnaṃ pana dassanatthaṃ;

For the purpose of seeing mother and father;
For five purposes of co-religionists;
To see a sick person and those who attend to him;
For the purpose of seeking food, etc., for them.

2613.

2613.

Tathānabhirataṃ gantvā, vūpakāsessamuṭṭhitaṃ;

Likewise, having gone to one who is discontented, having raised up his dispiritedness,
Or "we will dispel his wrong view or his doubt."

2614.

2614.

Evaṃ sattāhakiccena, bhikkhunā vinayaññunā;

Thus, with a purpose that takes seven days, by a bhikkhu skilled in the Vinaya,
Even if not sent for, it should be gone, how much more if sent.

2615.

2615.

Vassaṃ upagatenettha, animantitabhikkhunā;

Here, by a bhikkhu who has entered the rains-retreat, without being invited,
It is not proper to go for the purpose of hearing the Dhamma.

2616.

2616.

‘‘Asukaṃ nāma divasaṃ, sannipāto bhavissati’’;

"On such and such a day, there will be an assembly";
If a prior agreement has been made in this way, it is proper.

2617.

2617.

‘‘Dhovissāmi rajissāmi, bhaṇḍaka’’nti na vaṭṭati;

"I will wash, I will dye, the robe," is not proper;
If the teacher or preceptor sends it, it is proper.

2618.

2618.

Uddesādīnamatthāya, gantuṃ neva ca vaṭṭati;

It is not proper to go for the purpose of recitation and so on;
It is permissible for an individual to go for the purpose of seeing his superiors (garu).

2619.

2619.

Sace ācariyo ‘‘ajja, mā gacchāhī’’ti bhāsati;

If the teacher says, "Do not go today,"
There is no offense if the night breaks, it is explained.

2620.

2620.

Yassa kassaci ñātissa, upaṭṭhākakulassa vā;

For the purpose of seeing any relative whatsoever, or a family that supports him,
If the night breaks while going, there is a dukkaṭa.

2621.

2621.

‘‘Āgamissāmi ajjeva, gantvāhaṃ gāmaka’’nti ca;

"I will go to the village, I will return today";
If he is not able to reach the village while going, it is proper.

2622.

2622.

Vaje satthepi nāvāyaṃ, tīsu ṭhānesu bhikkhuno;

In a storm, in danger, in a ship, in three situations, for a bhikkhu,
There is no offense in breaking the rains-retreat, and it is proper to hold pavāraṇā.

2623.

2623.

Sati paccayavekalle, sarīrāphāsutāya vā;

If there is a lack of requisites, or bodily discomfort,
This itself is an obstruction; having broken the rains-retreat, he may depart.

2624.

2624.

Yena kenantarāyena, vassaṃ nopagato hi yo;

Whoever has not entered the rains due to some obstacle;
A second (residence) should be entered, or with one whose rains-residence is broken.

2625.

2625.

Vassaṃ anupagantvā vā, tadaheva ca gacchati;

Or without entering the rains-residence, he departs on that very day;
Or even after entering, (he stays) outside only for a week.

2626.

2626.

Vītināmeti ce tassa, purimāpi na vijjati;

If he exceeds that, the former (rains-residence) is not valid for him;
And for a bhikkhu who has given his promise, there is an offense of wrong-doing (dukkaṭaṃ).

2627.

2627.

Vassaṃ panupagantvā ca, uṭṭhāpetvā na cāruṇaṃ;

And without entering the rains-residence, without setting aside the dawn;
For a bhikkhu who is going, it is only with the making of a week (sattāha-karaṇena).

2628.

2628.

Antoyeva ca sattāhaṃ, nivattantassa tassa tu;

But for him who returns within the week;
What need to say there is no offense, (even) when having stayed, he goes outside.

2629.

2629.

‘‘Vasissāmīdha vassa’’nti, ālayo yadi vijjati;

If there is attachment, thinking "I will reside here for the rains";
Due to not abandoning mindfulness, then that dwelling (senāsanaṃ) is (considered as) his rains-residence.

2630.

2630.

Gahitaṃ suggahitaṃ hoti, chinnavasso na hoti so;

What is taken is well-taken, he is not one whose rains-residence is broken;
He obtains (the right) to invite (pavāretuṃ), there is no fault whatsoever.

2631.

2631.

‘‘Imasmiṃ vihāre temāsaṃ, imaṃ vassaṃ upemi’’ti;

"In this monastery, for three months, I enter this rains-residence";
Having declared it three times, he would be one who has entered the rains-residence.

2632.

2632.

Ādiṃ tu navamiṃ katvā, gantuṃ vaṭṭati bhikkhuno;

Having made the first day the ninth, it is proper for a bhikkhu to go;
Whether he comes back afterwards or not, there is no fault.

Vassūpanāyikakkhandhakakathā.

The Discourse on the Rains-Residence Entry Khandhaka.

Pavāraṇakkhandhakakathā

The Discourse on the Pavāraṇā Khandhaka

2633.

2633.

Cātuddasī pañcadasī, sāmaggī ca pavāraṇā;

Fourteenth, fifteenth, and the united (sāmaggī) Pavāraṇā;
Three-utterance, two-utterance, and in the Saṅgha, in the group, (and) in the individual.

2634.

2634.

Etā pana munindena, vuttā nava pavāraṇā;

These nine Pavāraṇās, indeed, have been spoken by the Lord of Sages;
Having relinquished three actions, one should invite (pavāraye) at the end.

2635.

2635.

Pubbakiccaṃ samāpetvā, pattakalle samānite;

Having completed the preliminary duties, when the bowl is brought near;
Having established the motion (ñattiṃ), the Pavāraṇā should be done by the Saṅgha.

2636.

2636.

Pavārentesu theresu, nisīdeyya navo pana;

While the elder (theresu) (monks) are inviting (pavārentesu), the new one should sit;
As long as he himself invites (pavāreyya), he should be squatting (ukkuṭikañhi).

2637.

2637.

Ñattiṃ vatvā pavāreyyuṃ, cattāro vā tayopi vā;

Having spoken the motion (ñattiṃ), four or three should invite (pavāreyyuṃ);
Having completed the preliminary duties, if they dwell in a single residence.

2638.

2638.

Aññamaññaṃ pavāreyyuṃ, vinā ñattiṃ duve janā;

Two people should invite (pavāreyyuṃ) each other, without a motion (ñattiṃ);
Even one should determine (adhiṭṭheyya), the rest is the Saṅgha's Pavāraṇā.

2639.

2639.

Pavārite ca saṅghasmiṃ, kareyyanāgato pana;

When the Saṅgha has invited (pavārite), one who comes who is;
Not rained, or whose rains-residence is broken, (should perform) the Pārisuddhi Uposatha.

2640.

2640.

Pañca yasmiṃ panāvāse, cattāro vā tayopi vā;

In whatever dwelling there are five, or four, or three;
Those renunciates (samaṇā), having taken from each one, (do) the Pavāraṇā.

2641.

2641.

Aññamaññaṃ pavārenti, sace āpatti dukkaṭaṃ;

If they invite (pavārenti) each other, there is an offense of wrong-doing (dukkaṭaṃ);
The wise one should apply the rest here according to the method stated in the Uposatha.

2642.

2642.

Pārisuddhippadānena, sampādetattano suciṃ;

By giving purity (Pārisuddhi), he accomplishes his own purity;
By giving consent (Chanda) to the Saṅgha, he accomplishes everything, not himself.

2643.

2643.

Tasmā pana ubhinnampi, kiccasiddhatthamevidha;

Therefore, for the sake of accomplishing the task for both here;
Purity (Pārisuddhi) should be given by the bhikkhu who is giving consent (Chanda).

2644.

2644.

Chandekena bahūnampi, hātabbo pārisuddhipi;

Consent (Chanda) and purity (Pārisuddhi) should be taken for many by one (person);
Consent (Chanda) brought in succession does not go to purity.

2645.

2645.

Chandaṃ vā pārisuddhiṃ vā, gahetvā vā pavāraṇaṃ;

Having taken consent (Chanda) or purity (Pārisuddhi) or Pavāraṇā;
Or the state of a novice (sāmaṇera), the carrier should acknowledge it.

2646.

2646.

Sace so saṅghamappatvā, vibbhameyya mareyya vā;

If he, without reaching the Saṅgha, is confused or dies;
All of that is not brought, but having reached, it is thus brought.

2647.

2647.

Saṅghaṃ patvā pamatto vā, sutto vā khittacittako;

Having reached the Saṅgha, (if he is) inattentive, or sleeping, or of deranged mind;
If he does not announce it, there is no offense, intentionally (there is an offense of) wrong-doing (dukkaṭaṃ).

2648.

2648.

Ye te vipassanāyuttā, rattindivamatanditā;

Those who are engaged in insight (vipassanā), tirelessly day and night;
During the early part of the night and the later part of the night, dedicated to insight (vipassanā).

2649.

2649.

Laddhaphāsuvihārānaṃ, siyā na parihāniti;

For those who have obtained a comfortable dwelling, there would be no decline;
The gathering for Pavāraṇā is spoken of in the month of Kattika.

Pavāraṇakkhandhakakathā.

The Discourse on the Pavāraṇā Khandhaka.

Cammakkhandhakakathā

The Discourse on the Leather Khandhaka

2650.

2650.

Eḷakājamigānaṃ tu, cammaṃ vaṭṭati bhikkhuno;

The leather of goats and deer is allowable for a bhikkhu;
(The leather) of rohita deer, eṇi deer, kuraṅga deer, and the pasada deer's mother.

2651.

2651.

Ṭhapetvā cammametesaṃ, aññaṃ dukkaṭavatthukaṃ;

Having excluded the leather of these, other (leather) is a matter for wrong-doing (dukkaṭavatthukaṃ);
All leather in bags and shoes that is human (amānusaṃ) is allowable.

2652.

2652.

Vaṭṭanti majjhime dese, na guṇaṅguṇupāhanā;

Shoes without straps and strings are not allowable in the middle country;
They are allowable inside the monastery, and also everywhere for the sick.

2653.

2653.

Puṭakhallakabaddhā ca, tatheva pāliguṇṭhimā;

And those bound with a covering-patch, likewise those with a covering-wrap;
Those filled with cotton are not allowable, nor are those entirely blue and so on.

2654.

2654.

Citrā upāhanā meṇḍa-visāṇūpamavaddhikā;

Decorated shoes (upāhanā) that are ram's-horn-shaped or growth-shaped;
Are not allowable, nor those of peacock (feathers), sewn around with down.

2655.

2655.

Majjārakāḷakolūka-sīhabyagghuddadīpinaṃ;

(Shoes made) of the skin of marrow-eaters, black owls, owls, lions, tigers, otters, and leopards;
And bordered with the hide of a deer-skin (ajinassa), are not allowable.

2656.

2656.

Puṭādiṃ apanetvā vā, chinditvā vāpi sabbaso;

Having removed the patch and so on, or having cut it off completely;
And having made a distinction in color, the shoes (upāhanā) should be worn.

2657.

2657.

Sabbāpi pana dhāretuṃ, na ca vaṭṭanti pādukā;

All sandals (pādukā) are not allowable to be worn;
Except for sandals for urine, feces, and rinsing the mouth.

2658.

2658.

Āsandiñceva pallaṅkaṃ, uccāsayanasaññitaṃ;

A chair and a couch, designated as a high bed;
For one using (anything) exceeding the measure, (there is an offense of) wrong-doing (dukkaṭaṃ).

2659.

2659.

Gonakaṃ kuttakaṃ cittaṃ, paṭikaṃ paṭalikampi ca;

A long-fleeced rug (gonakaṃ), a patchwork quilt (kuttakaṃ), an embroidered (cittaṃ) rug, a white woolen blanket (paṭikaṃ), a woolen rug with a fringe (paṭalikampi ca);
A rug with hair on one side (ekantalomiṃ), a rug made of sheared wool (vikatiṃ), a cotton-filled mattress (tūlikaṃ), a rug with hair on both sides (uddalomikaṃ).

2660.

2660.

Kaṭṭissaṃ pana koseyyaṃ, hatthiassarathattharaṃ;

A rug of felted wool (kaṭṭissaṃ), a silk rug (koseyyaṃ), a covering for elephants, horses, and chariots (hatthiassarathattharaṃ);
And a choice covering made of plantain leaves or deer skin (kadalimigapavarapaccattharaṇakampi ca).

2661.

2661.

Heṭṭhā rattavitānassa, dvidhā rattūpadhānakaṃ;

Underneath, a red canopy, a double red pillow (dvidhā rattūpadhānakaṃ);
All of this is impermissible (akappiyamidaṃ), for one using (there is an offense of) wrong-doing (dukkaṭaṃ).

2662.

2662.

Heṭṭhā akappiye paccatthare sati na vaṭṭati;

It is not allowable if there is an impermissible covering underneath;
Even a white canopy above, is allowable if that is not there.

2663.

2663.

Āsandiṃ pana pallaṅkaṃ, ṭhapetvā tūlikampi ca;

Having excluded a chair and a couch, and a cotton-filled mattress;
The rest, however, and all of it, he may obtain that belongs to householders (gihisantakaṃ).

2664.

2664.

Dhammāsane anāpatti, bhattaggepi nisīdituṃ;

There is no offense (anāpatti) on a Dhamma seat, to sit even in the refectory;
It is also allowable to lie down there on a floor-covering.

Cammakkhandhakakathā.

The Discourse on the Leather Khandhaka.

Bhesajjakkhandhakakathā

The Discourse on the Medicine Khandhaka

2665.

2665.

Vuttā gahapatissāpi, sammutussāvanantikā;

The land of the householder, the land announced with consent (sammutussāvanantikā);
The land of the enclosure (gonisādī), these four are the allowable grounds (bhūmiyo).

2666.

2666.

Saṅghassa santakaṃ gehaṃ, santakaṃ bhikkhunopi vā;

A house belonging to the Saṅgha, or belonging to a bhikkhu;
It should be made allowable (kappiyaṃ), sufficient for a shared bed.

2667.

2667.

Ṭhapetvā bhikkhumaññehi, dinnaṃ kappiyabhūmiyā;

Having excluded the bhikkhu, (whatever is) given by others on allowable ground;
That is the householder's (gahapate) land.

2668.

2668.

sammutikānāma, yā hi saṅghena sammatā;

What is called with consent (sammutikā) is that which is consented to by the Saṅgha;
Either by reciting the Kammavāca, or it is allowable merely by approval (apalokanaṃ).

2669.

2669.

Paṭhamiṭṭhakapāsāṇa-thambhādiṭṭhapane pana;

At the first placing of bricks, stones, pillars and so on;
With those saying, "Let us make an allowable hut (kappiyakuṭiṃ)," all around.

2670.

2670.

Ukkhipitvā ṭhapentesu, āmasitvā paresu vā;

When they lift up and place (them), or touch (them), or others (touch them);
(That is) announced with consent (ssāvanantikā).

2671.

2671.

Iṭṭhakādipatiṭṭhānaṃ, bhikkhūnaṃ vadataṃ pana;

However, when the bhikkhus are speaking of the establishment of bricks and so on;
The end of the statement and the same time, is allowable.

2672.

2672.

Ārāmo aparikkhitto, sakalo bhuyyatopi vā;

A monastery that is unenclosed, either wholly or mostly;
Is called the land of the enclosure (gonisādī).

2673.

2673.

Etā pana catassopi, honti kappiyabhūmiyo;

These four grounds (bhūmiyo), indeed, are allowable grounds (kappiyabhūmiyo);
Here, both cooked and dwelling, all food (āmisaṃ) is allowable.

2674.

2674.

Ussāvanantikā yā sā, thambhādīsu adhiṭṭhitā;

That which is announced with consent (ussāvanantikā), established on pillars and so on;
When the pillars and so on are removed, it remains on others as well.

2675.

2675.

Apanītesu sabbesu, siyā jahitavatthukā;

When all are removed, it would be abandoned-ground (jahitavatthukā);
The land of the enclosure (gonisādī) is enclosed, the rest (depends) on the destruction of the roof.

2676.

2676.

Bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā aññesaṃ, hatthato ca paṭiggaho;

Having excluded the bhikkhu, receiving from the hands of others;
And the dwelling within of those, as mentioned, is allowable for the bhikkhu.

2677.

2677.

Bhikkhussa bhikkhuniyā vā, santakaṃ saṅghikampi vā;

Belonging to the bhikkhu or bhikkhunī, or belonging to the Saṅgha;
Cooked and dwelling within, is not allowable for both.

2678.

2678.

Akappakuṭiyā vutthaṃ, sappiādivimissitaṃ;

Dwelling in an impermissible hut (akappakuṭiyā), mixed with ghee and so on;
"Dwelling within (Antovuttha)" is the designation, the first two kālikas.

2679.

2679.

Teheva sappiādīhi, bhikkhunā yāvajīvikaṃ;

Cooked with those same ghee and so on, by the bhikkhu, for as long as life lasts (yāvajīvikaṃ);
That which is cooked is allowable for a week (sattāhaṃ), indeed, without relish (nirāmisaṃ).

2680.

2680.

Sace āmisasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ, pakkaṃ taṃ paribhuñjati;

If he consumes that which is cooked mixed with relish (āmisasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ);
And dwelling within (Antovuttha), and even more, he consumes cooked with relish (sāmapakkañca).

2681.

2681.

Yāvakālikamāhāro, pānakaṃ yāmakālikaṃ;

Food that is allowable until the next day (yāvakālikaṃ), a drink (pānakaṃ) that is allowable for a watch (yāmakālikaṃ);
That which is allowable for a week (sattāhakālikaṃ) is the fivefold of ghee and so on.

2682.

2682.

Sesaṃ pana haliddādi, bhesajjaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ;

The rest, turmeric and so on, medicine that lasts as long as life (yāvajīvikaṃ);
The kālikas are spoken of as fourfold, water is not kālika (akālikaṃ).

2683.

2683.

Paṭiggahavaseneva, kālātītā tikālikā;

The three kālikas, because they are past the time only by receiving;
Are blameworthy when consumed, and even the third one unconsumed.

2684.

2684.

Ambaṃ jambu ca cocañca, mocañca madhu muddikā;

Mangoes, rose-apples, coca fruits, bananas, honey, grapes;
Sālu fruits and phārusaka fruits, drinks (pānakaṃ) are considered to be eightfold.

2685.

2685.

Pānakatthamanuññātaṃ, phalaṃ pakkañca āmakaṃ;

Fruit which is unripe and ripe, is unpermitted in (the chapter on) drink (pānakattha);
Receiving with substance is forbidden because of drink.

2686.

2686.

Ambapakkaṃ sukoṭṭetvā, madditvā udake pana;

Having well crushed a ripe mango, having pressed it in water;
Having strained (parissavaṃ) it afterwards, it is allowable to drink (pātuṃ) as a drink (pānakaṃ).

2687.

2687.

Vaṭṭatādiccapākaṃ tu, aggipakkaṃ na vaṭṭati;

That which is ripened by the sun (ādiccapākaṃ) is allowable, that which is ripened by fire (aggipakkaṃ) is not allowable;
And this same method is shown in the other drinks (pānakesupi).

2688.

2688.

Pupphapattaphalucchūnaṃ, cattāro panime rasā;

These four saps of flowers, leaves, fruits, and sugar cane;
Are allowed, the eight of these are allowed by the one who allows.

2689.

2689.

Sabbo puppharaso vutto, madhukassa rasaṃ vinā;

All flower sap (puppharaso) is spoken of, except for the sap of the madhuka flower;
All leaf sap (pattaraso) is spoken of, except for the sap of the pakkaḍā leaf.

2690.

2690.

Sattannaṃ sānulomānaṃ, dhaññānaṃ phalajaṃ rasaṃ;

Sap from fruit that is in accordance with the seven grains;
Having excluded (those) from the seven grains, all fruit sap is approved at the wrong time.

2691.

2691.

Yāvakālikapattāna-mapi sītudake kato;

And also leaf (pattāna) which is allowable until the next day (yāvakālika), made in cold water;
Even pressed and ripened by the sun, is allowable at the wrong time.

2692.

2692.

Tālañca nāḷikerañca, panasaṃ labujampi ca;

Palm fruit (tālañca), coconut (nāḷikerañca), jackfruit (panasaṃ), bottle gourd (labujampi ca);
Wax gourd (tipusālābu), white gourd (kumbhaṇḍaṃ), and also pussa fruit.

2693.

2693.

Evameḷālukañcāti, navetāni phalāni hi;

Thus, even elāluka, these nine fruits;
And all aparaṇṇa, in accordance with the seven grains.

2694.

2694.

Badaraṃ timbarū selu, kosambaṃ karamaddakaṃ;

Jujube (badaraṃ), timbaru fruit, selu fruit, kosamba fruit, karamadda fruit;
Citron (mātuluṅga), wood apple (kapitthañca), rattan fruit (vettaṃ), tamarind fruit (ciñcaphalampi ca).

2695.

2695.

Phalānaṃ evamādīnaṃ, khuddakānaṃ raso pana;

And the sap of fruits such as these, the small ones;
Because it is in accordance with the eight drinks, it is designated as in accordance.

2696.

2696.

Sānulomassa dhaññassa, ṭhapetvā phalajaṃ rasaṃ;

As for allowable grains, having excluded the extracted juice of fruits;
There is no other fruit juice allowable here, it is not for a limited time.

Bhesajjakkhandhakakathā.

Account of the Chapter on Medicine.

Kathinakkhandhakakathā

Account of the Chapter on Spreading the Kathina

2697.

2697.

Bhikkhūnaṃ vuṭṭhavassānaṃ, kathinatthāramabravi;

To monks who have completed the rains residence, the spreading of the kathina he spoke;
Because of the five benefits, the foremost sage (Buddha).

2698.

2698.

Na ullikhitamattādi-catuvīsativajjitaṃ;

A robe, not omitting the twenty-four, beginning with the mere marking;
Having taken a robe, a monk should remove the old one.

2699.

2699.

Navaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvāva, vattabbaṃ vacasā puna;

Having determined upon a new one, one should say again with words;
“With this lower robe, I spread the kathina.”

2700.

2700.

Vutte tikkhattumiccevaṃ, kathinaṃ hoti atthataṃ;

When said three times in this way, the kathina is considered spread;
But having approached the Sangha, and having taken the kathina, thus:

2701.

2701.

‘‘Atthataṃ kathinaṃ bhante, saṅghassa anumodatha;

"Bhante, the kathina is spread, approve of it for the Sangha;
The spreading of the kathina is in accordance with the Dhamma," should be said by that monk.

2702.

2702.

‘‘Suatthataṃ tayā bhante, saṅghassa kathinaṃ puna;

"Bhante, the kathina is well spread by you for the Sangha again;
The spreading of the kathina is in accordance with the Dhamma, I approve," one should say.

2703.

2703.

Kathinassa ca kiṃ mūlaṃ, kiṃ vatthu kā ca bhūmiyo;

What is the root of the kathina, what is the basis, and what are the grounds?
A monk knowing how many things is worthy of spreading the kathina?

2704.

2704.

Mūlamekaṃ, siyā vatthu, tividhaṃ, bhūmiyo cha ca;

The root is one, the basis could be threefold, the grounds are six;
A monk knowing eight things is worthy of spreading the kathina.

2705.

2705.

Saṅgho mūlanti niddiṭṭhaṃ, vatthu hoti ticīvaraṃ;

The Sangha is specified as the root, the basis is the triple robe;
Linen and so on are said to be six, the robes are the six grounds.

2706.

2706.

Pubbapaccuddharādhiṭṭhā-natthāro mātikāpi ca;

Preliminary duties, removing, determining, spreading,
The formula, impediment, removal, and these eight benefits.

2707.

2707.

Dhovanañca vicāro ca, chedanaṃ bandhanampi ca;

Washing and examining,
Cutting and binding too,
Are called "preliminary duties."

2708.

2708.

Saṅghāṭi uttarāsaṅgo, atho antaravāsako;

The outer robe, the upper robe, and then the lower robe;
Removing, determining, and indeed the spreading itself.

2709.

2709.

Pakkamanañca niṭṭhānaṃ, sanniṭṭhānañca nāsanaṃ;

Departing, completing, concluding, and destroying;
Lapsing, boundary, and being with removal; these are the eight.

2710.

2710.

Katacīvaramādāya, āvāse nirapekkhako;

Having taken a finished robe, without expectation in the dwelling;
It is departure-termination.

2711.

2711.

Ānisaṃsamathādāya, vihāre anapekkhako;

Having taken the benefits, without expectation in the monastery;
Having gone to that monastery, another dwelling pleasantly.

2712.

2712.

Tattha taṃ viharantova, karoti yadi cīvaraṃ;

While dwelling there, if he makes a robe;
It is called completion-termination.

2713.

2713.

‘‘Cīvaraṃ na karissāmi, na paccessaṃ tamassamaṃ’’;

"I will not make a robe, nor will I return to that hermitage;"
Is considered conclusion-termination.

2714.

2714.

Kathinacchādanaṃ laddhā, ‘‘na paccessa’’nti ce gato;

Having obtained the covering of the kathina, if he goes, saying "I will not return;"
It is destruction-termination.

2715.

2715.

Laddhānisaṃso sāpekkho, bahisīmaṃ gato pana;

Having obtained the benefits, with expectation, but having gone outside the boundary;
It is lapsing-termination.

2716.

2716.

Cīvarāsāya pakkanto, bahisīmaṃ gato pana;

Having departed with the hope of a robe, but having gone outside the boundary;
"I will give you a robe," he is told, he lapses by someone.

2717.

2717.

Puna vutte ‘‘na sakkomi, dātunti tava cīvaraṃ’’;

Again, when told, "I am not able, to give the robe to you;"
Is considered hope-severance.

2718.

2718.

Vassaṃvuṭṭhavihāramhā, vihāraññaṃ gato siyā;

From the monastery where the rains were resided, he would go to another monastery;
Coming, in between the path, he transgresses that removal.

2719.

2719.

sīmātikkantikomato;

Is considered boundary-transgression;
Having taken the benefits of the kathina, if he goes with expectation.

2720.

2720.

Sambhuṇāti punāgantvā, kathinuddhārameva ce;

He gathers together, and coming again, the removal of the kathina itself;
Is called "being with removal."

2721.

2721.

Pakkamanañca niṭṭhānaṃ, sanniṭṭhānañca sīmato;

Departure and completion, conclusion, and from the boundary;
Four are dependent on the individual, being with removal is dependent on the Sangha.

2722.

2722.

Nāsanaṃ savanañceva, āsāvacchedikāpi ca;

Destruction and lapsing, and also hope-severance;
These three removals of the kathina, are not from the Sangha, nor from the monk.

2723.

2723.

Āvāsapalibodho ca, palibodho ca cīvare;

The dwelling as impediment, and the robe as impediment;
Two impediments are spoken of, by the speaker of fitting and true words.

2724.

2724.

Aṭṭhannaṃ mātikānaṃ vā, antarubbhāratopi vā;

From the eight formulas, or from the intervening removal;
Two removals also are spoken of, for the kathina by the great sage.

2725.

2725.

Anāmantāsamādānaṃ, gaṇato yāvadatthikaṃ;

Unannounced taking, up to what is needed from the group;
There, the arising of robes, these are the five benefits.

Kathinakkhandhakakathā.

Account of the Chapter on the Kathina.

Cīvarakkhandhakakathā

Account of the Chapter on Robes

2726.

2726.

Cīvarassa panuppādā, aṭṭha cīvaramātikā;

The arising of robes, eight robe formulas;
Giving at the boundary, by agreement, by the monastic ordinance, likewise.

2727.

2727.

Saṅghassa, ubhatosaṅghe, vassaṃvuṭṭhassa deti ca,;

To the Sangha, to both Sanghas, giving to one who has completed the rains residence;
Giving intending for, to the individual; these eight are the formulas.

2728.

2728.

sīmāya detīti, antosīmaṃ gatehi tu;

"Giving at the boundary", within the boundary that has been entered;
Should be divided by the monks, has been described by the excellent describer.

2729.

2729.

Katikāya ca dinnaṃye, vihārā ekalābhakā;

"Given by agreement," those monasteries are of single gain;
What is given here should be divided by all, is said.

2730.

2730.

Saṅghassa dhuvakārā hi, yattha karīyanti tattha ca;

For the Sangha, there are permanent workers, wherever they do work there;
"Given by monastic ordinance," it is said, given by the great sage.

2731.

2731.

Saṅghassapana yaṃ dinnaṃ, ujubhūtena cetasā;

What is given "to the Sangha", with an upright mind;
That should be divided in the presence of the Sangha, it is said.

2732.

2732.

Ubhatosaṅghamuddissa, deti saddhāya cīvaraṃ;

Having intended "for both Sanghas", one gives a robe with faith;
Whether few or many monks, it is proper to divide equally.

2733.

2733.

Vassaṃvuṭṭhassa saṅghassa,cīvaraṃ deti yaṃ pana;

What robe is given "to the Sangha that has completed the rains residence;"
That should be divided among those who have completed the rains residence, it has been described.

2734.

2734.

detiādissace pana;

If "giving intending for" indeed;
A robe should be connected there and there only, by one who knows.

2735.

2735.

Puggalaṃ pana uddissa, cīvaraṃ yaṃ tu dīyati;

But a robe that is given having intended for an individual;
Is called "individual-intending," that giving is called.

2736.

2736.

Sahadhammikesu yo koci, pañcasvapi ‘‘mamaccaye;

Whoever among the co-religionists, in any of the five, says, "At my death;
This is my equipment, or of my mother or father.

2737.

2737.

Upajjhāyassa vā hotu’’, vadaticcevameva ce;

Or let it be for my preceptor," if he speaks thus;
That does not belong to them, it is the property of the Sangha itself.

2738.

2738.

Pañcannaṃ accaye dānaṃ, na ca rūhati kiñcipi;

Giving at the death of the five, nothing at all grows;
That belongs to the Sangha alone, but for lay people it grows.

2739.

2739.

Bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vā, kālaṃ bhikkhunupassaye;

A monk or a novice, at the time of death in a nun's dwelling;
The equipment of that person, belongs to the monks alone.

2740.

2740.

Bhikkhunī sāmaṇerī vā, vihārasmiṃ sace matā;

A nun or a female novice, if dead in a monastery;
The equipment of that person belongs to the nuns.

2741.

2741.

‘‘Dehi netvāsukassā’’ti, dinnaṃ taṃ purimassa tu;

"Give, having taken it to so-and-so," that which is given belongs to the former;
"I give this," that which is given belongs to the latter only.

2742.

2742.

Evaṃ dinnavidhiṃ ñatvā, matassa vāmatassa vā;

Having known thus the method of giving, of the dead or the living;
Or having taken confidence, one should take a robe of a dead person.

2743.

2743.

Mūlapattaphalakkhandha-tacapupphappabhedato;

From root, leaf, fruit, trunk, bark, and flower division;
Six kinds of dye are spoken of, by the trustworthy one without fault.

2744.

2744.

Mūle haliddiṃ, khandhesu, mañjeṭṭhaṃ tuṅgahārakaṃ;

In the roots, turmeric; in the trunks, madder and tuṅgahāraka;
In the leaves, alliyā patta, likewise patta and nīliyā.

2745.

2745.

Kusumbhaṃ kiṃsukaṃ pupphe, tace loddañca kaṇḍulaṃ;

Safflower and kiṃsuka in the flowers, lodda and kaṇḍula in the bark;
Having excluded all dyes, all fruits are allowable.

2746.

2746.

Kiliṭṭhasāṭakaṃ vāpi, dubbaṇṇaṃ vāpi cīvaraṃ;

A soiled cloth, or a discolored robe;
With alliyā patta, it is allowable to wash it.

2747.

2747.

Cīvarānaṃ kathā sesā, paṭhame kathine pana;

The remaining discussion on robes, in the first kathina chapter;
In the manner described there, it should be understood by one who discerns.

Cīvarakkhandhakakathā.

Account of the Chapter on Robes.

Mahāvaggo niṭṭhito.

The Mahāvagga is finished.

Cūḷavaggo

Cūḷavagga

Pārivāsikakkhandhakakathā
Account of the Chapter on Suspension

2748.

2748.

Tajjanīyaṃ niyassañca, pabbājaṃ paṭisāraṇaṃ;

Censure, banishment, expulsion, reconciliation;
Threefold suspension, these seven acts he shows.

2749.

2749.

khandhakekammasaññite;

in the Khandhaka is called the Kamma;
in the Khandhaka that is immediately after that.

2750.

2750.

Evaṃ sabbāni vattāni, dvāsīteva mahesinā;

Thus, all the duties, eighty-two in all, by the great sage;
Are Khandhaka duties, by taking and not taking.

2751.

2751.

Pārivāsañca vattañca, samādinnassa bhikkhuno;

For a monk who has undertaken pārivāsa and the duties;
How is the break of the night spoken of, how does the difference in duties occur?

2752.

2752.

Sahavāso vināvāso, anārocanameva ca;

Cohabitation, living apart, and non-reporting;
For a monk on pārivāsa, there is an offense for the break of the night.

2753.

2753.

Ekacchanne panāvāse, pakatattena bhikkhunā;

In a shared dwelling, by a monk who is ordinary;
Dwelling is prevented by a drop of water, for one who has been suspended.

2754.

2754.

Pārivāsikabhikkhussa, antoyeva na labbhati;

For a monk on pārivāsa, even inside is not obtained;
in the Mahāpaccariya.

2755.

2755.

‘‘Avisesena niddiṭṭhaṃ, mahāaṭṭhakathādisu;

"It is specified without distinction, in the Mahā-aṭṭhakathā and so on;
For both, dwelling is prevented by a drop of water," indeed.

2756.

2756.

Abhikkhuke panāvāse, anāvāsepi katthaci;

In a dwelling without monks, or somewhere without a dwelling;
For one dwelling in separation, there is an offense for the break of the night.

2757.

2757.

Pārivāsikabhikkhussa, bhikkhuṃ disvāna taṅkhaṇe;

For a monk on pārivāsa, having seen a monk at that moment;
For not reporting the state of mind, there is an offense for the break of the night.

2758.

2758.

Pañceva ca yathāvuḍḍhaṃ, labhate pārivāsiko;

A monk on pārivāsa obtains five things in order of seniority;
To do and remain there the uposatha and pavāraṇa.

2759.

2759.

Vassasāṭiṃ yathāvuḍḍhaṃ, denti ce saṅghadāyakā;

If lay donors give rains-cloth in order of seniority;
He obtains seasoning and meal, these five.

Pārivāsikakkhandhakakathā.

Account of the Chapter on Suspension.

Samathakkhandhakakathā
Account of the Chapter on Reconciliations

2760.

2760.

Vivādādhāratā cānu-vādādhikaraṇampi ca;

Grounds for dispute, and accusations as legal questions;
Grounds for offense as well, and grounds for duties.

2761.

2761.

Etāni pana cattāri, vuttāni ca mahesinā;

These four are spoken of by the great sage;
Dispute there, is relied upon.

2762.

2762.

anuvādoupāgato;

Accusation is approached;
Grounds for offense are known as seven offenses.

2763.

2763.

kiccādhikaraṇaṃsiyā;

Grounds for duties there would be;
The resolutions of these four are known as reconciliations.

2764.

2764.

Sammukhā sati cāmūḷho, paṭiññāvinayopi ca;

In the presence of, when not deluded, the paṭiññā procedure as well;
The further punishment procedure also, likewise the majority procedure also.

2765.

2765.

Tiṇavatthārako ceva, sattamo vinayo mato;

The covering-with-grass procedure, the seventh is known as reconciliation;
These seven reconciliations are spoken of, by the Buddha, kinsman of the sun.

2766.

2766.

Vivādo sammati dvīhi, anuvādo catūhi ca;

Dispute is reconciled by two, accusation by four;
Offense by three, duty is reconciled by one.

2767.

2767.

Chaṭṭhena paṭhamenāpi, vivādo ettha sammati;

Dispute is here reconciled by the sixth or the first;
By the presence-procedure and so on, by the three in order.

2768.

2768.

Tatheva pañcamenāpi, anuvādo hi sammati;

Just so, by the fifth also, accusation is reconciled;
By the presence-procedure, the acknowledgement-procedure, and the covering-with-grass procedure.

2769.

2769.

Āpattūpasamaṃ yāti, tīheva samathehi sā;

The offense is calmed by these three reconciliations; it is settled by one act, namely, facing-the-offense-as-it-is.

2770.

2770.

Yebhuyyasikakamme tu, salākaṃ gāhaye budho;

In a Yebhuyyasika Kamma, the wise man should have the ballots taken, either secretly, openly, or by whispering in the ear.

2771.

2771.

Alajjussade gūḷhena, vivaṭeneva lajjisu;

With the shameless one, secretly; with the shamefaced one, openly; with the foolish ones, by whispering in the ear, the wise one should have the ballots taken.

2772.

2772.

Lajjī alajjī bāloti, kena sakkā vijānituṃ?

How is it possible to know who is shamefaced, shameless, or foolish? It is possible to know by one's own actions.

2773.

2773.

Āpajjati ca sañcicca, āpattiṃ parigūhati;

He commits an offense intentionally and conceals the offense; such a one is shameless.

2774.

2774.

Nāpajjati ca sañcicca, āpattiṃ na ca gūhati;

He does not commit an offense intentionally, nor does he conceal the offense; such a person is shamefaced.

2775.

2775.

Duccintito ca dubbhāsī, tathā dukkaṭakāriko;

One who is ill-conceived, ill-spoken, and likewise, an ill-doer; is known as "foolish" by this characteristic.

2776.

2776.

Tidhā salākagāhena, bahukā dhammavādino;

With the taking of ballots in three ways, when there are many who speak the Dhamma; the Buddha said that it should be done with Yebhuyyasika Kamma.

2777.

2777.

Alajjī sānuvādo ca, asucī kammato ca yo;

One who is shameless, accusatory, and impure in conduct; that person is fit for Tassapāpiyasī Kamma.

2778.

2778.

Bhaṇḍane kalahe jāte, vivādasmiṃ anappake;

When quarrels and disputes arise, in a considerable disagreement; when many non-recluses are involved, and also in uncontrolled speech.

2779.

2779.

Mūlamūlaṃ gavesantaṃ, hoti vāḷañca kakkhaḷaṃ;

When seeking the root cause, it becomes harsh and rough; it has been declared that it should be dealt with by the Tiṇavatthāraka (covering with grass).

2780.

2780.

Yathā ca tiṇapaṇṇena, channaṃ gūthañca muttakaṃ;

Just as with a grass-leaf, dung and urine are covered; and a bad smell does not emanate, it subsides immediately.

2781.

2781.

Ṭhapetvā thullavajjañca, gihīhi paṭisaṃyutaṃ;

Except for a grave offense and what is connected with laypersons; and the Diṭṭhāvikammika and one who is not present there.

2782.

2782.

Sesāyāpattiyā yāva, upasampadamāḷato;

For the remaining offenses, up to the boundary of the upasampadā; one is pure and without offense, like in the Tiṇavatthāraka.

Samathakkhandhakakathā.

Samathakkhandhakakathā.

Khuddakavatthukkhandhakakathā
Khuddakavatthukkhandhakakathā

2783.

2783.

Rukkhe vā pana kuṭṭevā, aṭṭāne thambhakesu vā;

When bathing, if one rubs one's body against a tree, a wall, a bone, or pillars; there is an offense of dukkata.

2784.

2784.

Kāyaṃ gandhabbahatthena, kuruvindakasuttiyā;

One should not rub the body with the "Gandhabba hand," with "Kuruvindaka powder," or with a washing ball; nor should one rub different parts of the body against each other.

2785.

2785.

Akataṃ mallakaṃ nāma, gilānasseva vaṭṭati;

An "unmade" washing ball is suitable only for the sick; a "made" washing ball is not suitable for anyone.

2786.

2786.

Kapāliṭṭhakakhaṇḍāni, sabbassa puthupāṇikaṃ;

Pieces of potsherd and brick, and rough stone are suitable for everyone; a cloth swab is suitable for both the sick and the non-sick.

2787.

2787.

Vuttā pheṇakapāsāṇa-kathalā pādaghaṃsane;

Mentioned are foam-stone and kathala for rubbing the feet; a round or square kataka is not suitable.

2788.

2788.

Yaṃ kiñcipi alaṅkāraṃ, dhārentassapi dukkaṭaṃ;

Whatever ornament one may wear, there is an offense of dukkata; even if it is only the size of a palm leaf, for a bhikkhu.

2789.

2789.

Osaṇheyya sake kese, yo hatthaphaṇakena vā;

If one smooths one's hair with a hand-comb or with a comb; dukkata is declared for him with either a comb or a brush.

2790.

2790.

Sitthatelodatelehi, maṇḍanatthaṃ na vaṭṭati;

Oil, sesame oil, and other oils are not suitable for decoration; but for applying it in the direction of the hair growth, by a bhikkhu, against the direction of hair growth.

2791.

2791.

Hatthaṃ telena temetvā, puñchitabbā siroruhā;

Having moistened the hand with oil, the hair should be wiped; it is suitable to wipe it with a moist hand for one who is hot from exercise.

2792.

2792.

Ādāse udapatte vā, yattha katthaci attano;

In a mirror or a bowl of water, wherever it may be, for one who looks at his own face without a reason, there is an offense of dukkata.

2793.

2793.

‘‘Sañchaviṃ tu mukhaṃ, no’’ti, daṭṭhumābādhapaccayā;

"To see if the complexion of the face is good, no," due to illness; "Am I getting old, no?" it is suitable for knowing the decline of life.

2794.

2794.

Naccaṃ vā pana gītaṃ vā, vāditaṃ vāpi bhikkhuno;

For a bhikkhu, to watch or listen to dancing, singing, or instrumental music; there is an offense of dukkata when going to such places.

2795.

2795.

Daṭṭhumantamaso mora-naccampi ca na vaṭṭati;

It is not suitable to watch even a peacock dance; it is not suitable to listen to even the sound of teeth chattering.

2796.

2796.

Naccantassa sayaṃ vāpi, naccāpentassa dukkaṭaṃ;

For one who is dancing himself, or causing others to dance, there is an offense of dukkata; there is no offense if one listens or watches while staying inside the boundary of the monastery.

2797.

2797.

‘‘Passissāmī’’ti naccaṃ vā, gītaṃ vā pana vāditaṃ;

"I will watch" dancing, singing, or instrumental music; for one going from one monastery to another, there is an offense of dukkata.

2798.

2798.

Āpattantovihārepi, uṭṭhahitvāna gacchato;

Even within the boundary of the monastery, for one who gets up and goes; or stands stretching the neck and watches on the road.

2799.

2799.

Kesā dīghā na dhāreyyā, yo dhāreyyassa dukkaṭaṃ;

Long hair should not be kept; for one who keeps it, there is an offense of dukkata; two finger-breadths or two months, beyond that it is not suitable.

2800.

2800.

Nakhe nāsikalomāni, dīghāni na tu dhāraye;

Long nails and nose hairs should not be kept; and it is not suitable for a bhikkhu to do (cut) them every twenty-eighth day.

2801.

2801.

Kappāpeyya visuṃ massuṃ, dāṭhikaṃ vā ṭhapeyya yo;

If one shaves the beard separately, or keeps the side whiskers; or has the hair thinned out, in a dense area, there is an offense of dukkata.

2802.

2802.

Chindato dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ, kese kattarikāya vā;

It is said that there is an offense of dukkata when cutting the hair with scissors; or for one who is not sick, when having it cut by another.

2803.

2803.

Chindato attano aṅga-jātaṃ thullaccayaṃ siyā;

For one who cuts off his own sexual organ, there would be a thullaccaya offense; in cutting off other parts, the offense is dukkata in self-harm.

2804.

2804.

Ahikīṭādidaṭṭhassa, tādisābādhapaccayā;

For one bitten by a snake or insect, due to such illness; there is no offense in cutting off the limb, to release the blood.

2805.

2805.

Aparissāvano maggaṃ, sace gacchati dukkaṭaṃ;

If one goes on a road without a filter cloth, there is an offense of dukkata; likewise, for one who begs on the road, or for one who gives without a filter cloth.

2806.

2806.

Na bhuñje na pive naggo, na khāde na ca sāyaye;

One should not eat, drink, chew, or taste naked; one should not give, take, or go directly (naked).

2807.

2807.

Vanditabbaṃ na naggena, vandāpetabbameva vā;

One should not pay homage naked, or cause others to pay homage; preliminary work should not be done, nor should one have it done naked.

2808.

2808.

Parikamme paṭicchādī, tisso jantāgharādikā;

In preliminary work, three coverings are mentioned, such as in a bathhouse; a cloth covering is suitable everywhere.

2809.

2809.

Yattha katthaci peḷāyaṃ, bhuñjituṃ na ca vaṭṭati;

It is not suitable to eat in a box anywhere; for one eating together, there is an offense of dukkata in a single dish.

2810.

2810.

Ekapāvuraṇā eka-ttharaṇā vā nipajjare;

If they lie down with a single outer robe or a single spread; or even on a single bed, for them, there is an offense of dukkata.

2811.

2811.

Na nisīdeyya saṅghāṭi-pallatthikamupāgato;

One should not sit having wrapped the Saṅghāṭi around the knees; one should not play any kind of game, nor should one pluck gray hairs.

2812.

2812.

Bhamukāya nalāṭe vā, dāṭhikāyapi uggataṃ;

A gray hair that has grown on the eyebrow, forehead, or side whiskers; it is suitable to have such a gray hair or another plucked.

2813.

2813.

Agilāno sace bhikkhu, chattaṃ dhāreyya dukkaṭaṃ;

If a bhikkhu who is not sick carries an umbrella, there is an offense of dukkata; but it is suitable for the sake of protecting one's robes and so on.

2814.

2814.

Hatthisoṇḍaṃ catukkaṇṇaṃ, vasanaṃ macchavāḷakaṃ;

An elephant trunk, a four-cornered cloth, a fish tail garment; it is an offense of dukkata to wear a velliya or a palm-leaf fan as a lower garment.

2815.

2815.

Gahipārupanaṃ vāpi, pārupantassa dukkaṭaṃ;

It is an offense of dukkata to wear a garment worn by a layperson; in wearing the lower and upper garments, roundness is intended.

2816.

2816.

Lokāyataṃ na vāceyya, na ca taṃ pariyāpuṇe;

A bhikkhu should not recite Lokāyata, nor should he learn it; nor should animal science be recited by a bhikkhu.

2817.

2817.

Na ca vaṭṭati dhāretuṃ, sabbā cāmaribījanī;

It is not suitable to carry all kinds of yak-tail whisks; nor should one smear dye, nor apply rouge to the face.

2818.

2818.

Na vahe ubhatokājaṃ, vaṭṭatantarakājakaṃ;

One should not carry a load on both shoulders, but an inner-shoulder load is suitable; there is no fault in a load hanging from the head, shoulders, or neck.

2819.

2819.

Aṭṭhaṅgulādikaṃ bhikkhu, pacchimaṃ caturaṅgulā;

If a bhikkhu chews a toothpick that is more than eight finger-breadths long, and four finger-breadths at the rear end; there is an offense of dukkata.

2820.

2820.

Rukkhaṃ nevābhirūheyya, kicce satipi porisaṃ;

One should never climb a tree, even if there is a reason for a man; in emergencies, it is suitable to climb as one pleases.

2821.

2821.

Lasuṇaṃ na ca khādeyya, sace nākallako siyā;

One should not eat garlic if one is not ill; the Buddha's word should not be distorted otherwise.

2822.

2822.

Khipitena ca vattabbaṃ, ‘‘jīvā’’ti, gihinā puna;

One should say "live" to one who sneezes, and then the householder again; if he says "may you live," it is suitable to say "may you live long."

2823.

2823.

Sāmaṇeraṃ gahaṭṭhaṃ vā, ākoṭentassa dukkaṭaṃ;

It is an offense of dukkata to strike a novice or a householder; it is not suitable to lie down on a bed strewn with flowers.

2824.

2824.

Khurabhaṇḍaṃ na gaṇheyya, sace nhāpitapubbako;

One should not take a razor case if one has been a barber before; and headbands and all outer hair are not to be worn.

2825.

2825.

Aṅgarāgaṃ karontassa, dukkaṭaṃ samudīritaṃ;

It is said that there is an offense of dukkata for one who applies rouge; also for one who enters a village without a waistband.

2826.

2826.

Lohajaṃ dārujaṃ sabbaṃ, kappiyaṃ mattikāmayaṃ;

Everything made of metal or wood, that is allowable, is made of clay; except for a knife and a bowl, a kataka made by a potter.

Khuddakavatthukkhandhakakathā.

Khuddakavatthukkhandhakakathā.

Senāsanakkhandhakakathā
Senāsanakkhandhakakathā

2827.

2827.

Āsandiko atikkanta-pamāṇopi ca vaṭṭati;

A small seat is suitable even if it exceeds the prescribed measure; likewise, a five-limbed seat and a seven-limbed seat are suitable.

2828.

2828.

Tūlonaddhā ghareyeva, mañcapīṭhā nisīdituṃ;

It is suitable to sit on a bed or seat stuffed with cotton in a house; a headrest and footrest are suitable for one who is not sick.

2829.

2829.

Santharitvā gilānassa, upadhānāni tattha ca;

For the sick, having spread out and placed pillows there; it is suitable to lie down after giving a covering sheet.

2830.

2830.

Tiriyaṃ muṭṭhiratanaṃ, hoti bimbohanaṃ mitaṃ;

The measurement of a face-wiper that is one fist-span across is called kurundiyaṃ.

2831.

2831.

Pūritā coḷapaṇṇuṇṇa-tiṇavākehi pañcahi;

Five kinds of seat-fillings have been spoken of; coḷa, paṇṇuṇṇa, grass, bark, and reeds; this is the end of the enumeration of fillings.

2832.

2832.

Bhisitūlāni pañceva, tathā tūlāni tīṇipi;

There are only five kinds of filling-cotton, likewise three kinds of cotton; hair and feathers of animals and birds, these are the contents of a face-wiper.

2833.

2833.

Manussalomaṃ lomesu, pupphesu bakulādikaṃ;

Human hair among hairs, flowers such as bakula; pure tamāla leaves among leaves are not suitable.

2834.

2834.

Uṇṇādikaṃ pañcavidhañca tūlaṃ;

Five kinds of cotton, such as wool;
Which were prescribed by the great sage for a seat-filling;
It is said that in the masūraka it is suitable;
It is said in the Kurundiyaṃ commentary.

2835.

2835.

Yadetaṃ tividhaṃ tūlaṃ, bhisiyaṃ taṃ akappiyaṃ;

That three kinds of cotton, that is unsuitable for a seat-filling; but mixed tamāla leaves, are suitable everywhere.

2836.

2836.

Rūpaṃ tu purisitthīnaṃ, tiracchānagatassa vā;

For one who is making or having made a form of a man, woman, or animal; there is an offense of dukkata.

2837.

2837.

Jātakaṃ pana vatthuṃ vā, kārāpetuṃ parehi vā;

But it is suitable to have a Jātaka story or a design made by others; it is also suitable to make flower arrangements and creeper designs oneself.

2838.

2838.

Samānāsaniko nāma, dvīhi vassehi yo pana;

2839.

Samānavasse vattabbaṃ, kiñca nāmidha vijjati;

2840.

Heṭṭhā dīghāsanaṃ tiṇṇaṃ, yaṃ pahoti nisīdituṃ;

2841.

Ubhatobyañjanaṃ itthiṃ, ṭhapetvā paṇḍakaṃ pana;

2842.

Purimiko pacchimiko, tathevantaramuttako;

2843.

Pubbāruṇā pāṭipadassa yāva;

2844.

Pātova gāhite añño, bhikkhu senāsane pana;

2845.

Saṅghikaṃ apaloketvā, gahitaṃ vassavāsikaṃ;

2846.

Vuṭṭhavasso sace bhikkhu, kiñci āvāsihatthato;

2847.

‘‘Asukasmiṃ kule mayhaṃ, vassāvāsikacīvaraṃ;

2848.

Uppabbajati ce tattha, gataṭṭhāne, na labbhati;

2849.

Manusse sammukhā tattha, paṭicchāpeti ce pana;

2850.

Ārāmo ca vihāro ca, vatthūni duvidhassapi;

2851.

Lohakumbhī kaṭāhañca, bhāṇako lohavārako;

2852.

Valli veḷu tiṇaṃ paṇṇaṃ, muñjapabbajameva ca;

2853.

‘‘Dvīhi saṅgahitāni dve, tatiyaṃ catusaṅgahaṃ;

2854.

Iti pañcahi rāsīhi, pañcanimmalalocano;

2855.

Idañhi pana saṅghassa, santakaṃ garubhaṇḍakaṃ;

2856.

Bhikkhunā garubhaṇḍaṃ tu, saṅghena hi gaṇena vā;

2857.

Purimesu hi tīsvettha, na catthāgarubhaṇḍakaṃ;

2858.

Tividhaṃ khuddakaṃ vāpi, garubhaṇḍakamevidaṃ;

2859.

Uddhaṃ pana tato loha-vārako garubhaṇḍakaṃ;

2860.

Bhājetabbo ayopatto;

2861.

Attanā paṭiladdhaṃ taṃ, lohabhaṇḍaṃ tu kiñcipi;

2862.

Kaṃsavaṭṭakalohānaṃ, bhājanānipi sabbaso;

2863.

Tipubhaṇḍepi eseva, nayo ñeyyo vibhāvinā;

2864.

Khīrapāsāṇasambhūtaṃ, garukaṃ taṭṭakādikaṃ;

2865.

Siṅgisajjhumayaṃ hāra-kūṭajaṃ phalikubbhavaṃ;

2866.

Vāsi bhājaniyā khuddā, garubhaṇḍaṃ mahattarī;

2867.

Kuṭhāri vāsi kuddālo, garubhaṇḍaṃ nikhādanaṃ;

2868.

Caturassamukhaṃ doṇi-mukhaṃ vaṅkampi tattha ca;

2869.

Muṭṭhikamadhikaraṇī, saṇḍāso vā tulādikaṃ;

2870.

Nhāpitassa ca saṇḍāso, kattarī ca mahattarī;

2871.

Valli saṅghassa dinnā vā, tatthajātāpi rakkhitā;

2872.

Suttavākādinibbattā, rajjukā yottakāni vā;

2873.

Nāḷikerassa hīre vā, vāke vā pana kenaci;

2874.

Veḷu saṅghassa dinno vā, rakkhito tatthajātako;

2875.

Chattadaṇḍasalākāyo, daṇḍo kattarayaṭṭhipi;

2876.

Muñjādīsupi yaṃ kiñci, muṭṭhimattaṃ garuṃ siyā;

2877.

Aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇopi, garukaṃ rittapotthako;

2878.

Silesādīsu vā kiñci, dinnaṃ vā tatthajātakaṃ;

2879.

Valliveḷādikaṃ kiñci, arakkhitamagopitaṃ;

2880.

Rakkhitaṃ gopitaṃ vāpi, gahetabbaṃ tu gaṇhatā;

2881.

Añjanaṃ haritālañca, tathā hiṅgu manosilā;

2882.

Dārubhaṇḍepi yo koci, sūcidaṇḍappamāṇako;

2883.

Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃtu, vibhajitvāva dassitaṃ;

2884.

Pīṭhameḷakapādañca, tathāmaṇḍakavaṭṭakaṃ;

2885.

Bhaṇḍikā muggaro ceva, vatthaghaṭṭanamuggaro;

2886.

Uḷuṅkopi samuggopi, karaṇḍampi kaṭacchupi;

2887.

Sabbaṃ dārumayaṃ geha-sambhāraṃ garukaṃ mataṃ;

2888.

Eḷacammaṃ garuṃ vuttaṃ, tathevodukkhalādikaṃ;

2889.

Tathevādhārako patta-pidhānaṃ tālavaṇṭakaṃ;

2890.

Yaṃ kiñci bhūmattharaṇaṃ, yo koci kaṭasārako;

2891.

Chattañca muṭṭhipaṇṇañca, visāṇaṃtumbabhājanaṃ;

2892.

Hatthidanto visāṇañca, yathāgatamatacchitaṃ;

2893.

Niṭṭhito tacchito vāpi, vidho hiṅgukaraṇḍako;

2894.

Sabbaṃ kulālabhaṇḍampi, paribhogārahaṃ pana;

2895.

Thūpikā dīparukkho ca, cayanacchadaniṭṭhakā;

2896.

Patto kañcanako ceva, thālakaṃ kuṇḍikāpi ca;

2897.

Garunā garubhaṇḍañca, thāvarena ca thāvaraṃ;

2898.

Adhotena ca pādena, nakkame sayanāsanaṃ;

2899.

Bhūmiyā niṭṭhubhantassa, parikammakatāya vā;

2900.

Parikammakataṃ bhūmiṃ, saṅghikaṃ mañcapīṭhakaṃ;

2901.

Nipajjitabbaṃ, sahasā, tassa niddāyato yadi;

2902.

Lomesu pana lomānaṃ, gaṇanāyeva dukkaṭaṃ;

2903.

Sahassagghanako koci, piṇḍapāto sacīvaro;

2904.

Tādiso piṇḍapātova, saṭṭhivassānamaccaye;

2905.

Uddesabhattaṃ bhuñjitvā, jāto ce sāmaṇerako;

2906.

Sampuṇṇavīsavasso yo, sve uddesaṃ labhissati;

2907.

Sace pana salākā tu, laddhā bhattaṃ na taṃdine;

If a ticket is obtained, and food is not received on that day;
It should be taken the next day without doubt.

2908.

2908.

Uttaruttaribhaṅgassa, bhattassekacarassa hi;

For a one-by-one distribution of subsequent meals;
A ticket should be given after making a separate arrangement.

2909.

2909.

Bhattameva sace laddhaṃ, na panuttaribhaṅgakaṃ;

If only food is obtained, but not a subsequent meal;
Or a subsequent meal is obtained, but not food.

2910.

2910.

Yena yena hi yaṃ yaṃ tu, na laddhaṃ, tassa tassa ca;

Whatever was not obtained by whomever;
It has been indicated that the same should be taken the next day.

2911.

2911.

Saṅghuddesādikaṃ bhattaṃ, idaṃ sattavidhampi ca;

Food by Saṅgha designation and these seven kinds;
And food for visitors, etc., are said to be of four kinds.

2912.

2912.

Vihāravārabhattañca, niccañca kuṭibhattakaṃ;

Food by monastery rotation and regular food, and food for the hut;
All these kinds of food have been designated as fifteen kinds.

2913.

2913.

Pāḷimaṭṭhakathañceva, oloketvā punappunaṃ;

Having repeatedly looked at the Pali and the Aṭṭhakathā;
A wise person should properly distribute the Saṅghika requisites.

Senāsanakkhandhakakathā.

Senāsanakkhandhakakathā.

Vattakkhandhakakathā
Vattakkhandhakakathā

2914.

2914.

Āgantukāvāsikapiṇḍacārī-;

Observances for visitors, residents, alms-goers;
Dwelling, forest, rejoicing; Observances for one going for a meal;
At home, and upon entering the toilet.

2915.

2915.

Ācariyupajjhāyakasissasaddhi-;

Observances for the teacher, preceptor, disciple, co-resident;
All the monastic observances; These fourteen observances have been spoken
By the Leader with a pure mind.

2916.

2916.

Āgantukena ārāmaṃ, pavisantena bhikkhunā;

A bhikkhu entering a monastery as a visitor;
Should remove the umbrella and take off the shoes.

2917.

2917.

Oguṇṭhanaṃ na kātabbaṃ, sīse cīvarameva vā;

The head should not be covered, even with the robe;
And the feet should not be washed with drinking water.

2918.

2918.

Vanditabbāva pucchitvā, vihāre vuḍḍhabhikkhuno;

After asking, the senior bhikkhus in the monastery should be venerated;
The dwelling should be asked for by the bhikkhu at the proper time.

2919.

2919.

Vaccaṭṭhānañca passāva-ṭṭhānaṃ pānīyameva ca;

The toilet, the place for urinating, and the drinking water;
The Saṅgha’s communal things for use, the alms round, and so on.

2920.

2920.

Vuḍḍhamāgantukaṃ disvā, bhikkhunāvāsikenapi;

Seeing a senior visitor, even a resident bhikkhu;
Should receive the bowl and robe, having gone to greet him.

2921.

2921.

Āsanaṃ paññapetabbaṃ, tassa pādodakampi ca;

A seat should be prepared for him, and water for his feet;
It should be placed near, and he should be asked for water.

2922.

2922.

Vandeyyo paññapetabbaṃ, tassa senāsanampi ca;

He should be venerated, and his dwelling should be prepared;
Whether it is occupied or unoccupied, the alms round area and non-area.

2923.

2923.

Vaccaṭṭhānañca passāva-ṭṭhānaṃ sekkhakulāni ca;

The toilet, the place for urinating, the training families;
The time for entering and leaving, and drinking water should be told.

2924.

2924.

Sace so navako hoti;

If he is a junior;
As is the custom for a visitor;
All of that should be done by the resident bhikkhu
While sitting.

2925.

2925.

‘‘Atra pattaṃ ṭhapehīti, nisīdāhīdamāsanaṃ’’;

"Place the bowl here," "Sit on this seat";
Thus it should be said, and a dwelling should be given.

2926.

2926.

Dārumattikabhaṇḍāni, gantukāmena bhikkhunā;

Utensils made of wood or clay, by a bhikkhu intending to leave;
Should be returned, and the lodging should be tidied up before leaving.

2927.

2927.

Āpucchitvāpi gantabbaṃ, bhikkhunā sayanāsanaṃ;

Having taken leave, the bhikkhu should depart from the lodging;
Even if there is no one to take leave from, it should be well-guarded.

2928.

2928.

Sahasā pavise nāpi, sahasā na ca nikkhame;

He should neither enter nor leave suddenly;
The alms-goer should stand neither too far nor too near.

2929.

2929.

Vāmahatthena saṅghāṭiṃ, uccāretvātha bhājanaṃ;

Raising the upper robe with the left hand, then the bowl;
The wise one should extend the right hand and receive the alms.

2930.

2930.

Sūpaṃ vā dātukāmāti, sallakkheyya muhuttakaṃ;

He should consider for a moment if they intend to give soup;
A bhikkhu should look inside, not at the face of the alms-giver.

2931.

2931.

Pānīyādi panāneyyaṃ, bhikkhunāraññakenapi;

Drinking water, etc., should be brought by the forest-dwelling bhikkhu;
The constellation, its conjunction, and the direction should be known by him.

2932.

2932.

Vaccapassāvatitthāni, bhavanti paṭipāṭiyā;

The toilet, the place for urinating, and the bathing places should be in order;
If one does it contrary to seniority, there is an offense of wrong-doing.

2933.

2933.

Sahasā ubbhajitvā vā, na ca vaccakuṭiṃ vise;

He should not rush into the toilet;
Having coughed and stood outside, he should enter slowly.

2934.

2934.

Vaccaṃ na nitthunantena, kātabbaṃ pana bhikkhunā;

A bhikkhu should not make excrement with a thumping sound;
If one does it while chewing a toothpick, there is an offense of wrong-doing.

2935.

2935.

Vaccaṃ pana na kātabbaṃ, bahiddhā vaccadoṇiyā;

Excrement should not be made outside the toilet trough;
Urine should also not be made outside the urine trough.

2936.

2936.

Kharena nāvalekheyya, na kaṭṭhaṃ vaccakūpake;

He should not scrape roughly, nor with wood in the toilet pit;
He should not throw or drop saliva in the urine trough.

2937.

2937.

Pādukāsu ṭhitoyeva, ubbhajeyya vicakkhaṇo;

Standing on the sandals, the wise one should stand up;
He should cover it there, standing at the exit.

2938.

2938.

Nācameyya sace vaccaṃ, katvā yo salile sati;

If one does not rinse after making excrement, when there is water;
For him, wrong-doing has been declared by the sage, the destroyer of delusion.

2939.

2939.

Sasaddaṃ nācametabbaṃ, katvā capu capūti ca;

One should not rinse noisily, making sounds like "capu capu";
Having rinsed, water should not be left in the pot.

2940.

2940.

Ūhatampi adhovitvā, nikkhamantassa dukkaṭaṃ;

For one leaving without washing the dirt;
There is an offense of wrong-doing; If there are scales,
They should be cleaned completely.

2941.

2941.

Avalekhanakaṭṭhena, pūro ce pīṭharo pana;

If the container is full with a scraper stick;
He should throw it away; if the pot is empty, he should fill the pot with water.

2942.

2942.

Anajjhiṭṭho hi vuḍḍhena, pātimokkhaṃ na uddise;

If not authorized by a senior, he should not recite the Pātimokkha;
He should not speak Dhamma, ask a question, or answer.

2943.

2943.

Āpucchitvā kathentassa, vuḍḍhaṃ vuḍḍhatarāgame;

If one speaks after asking, when a senior or more senior arrives;
There is no need to ask again, it has been clearly stated.

2944.

2944.

Vuḍḍhenekavihārasmiṃ, saddhiṃ viharatā pana;

While living together with a senior in one monastery;
Recitation should never be done without asking.

2945.

2945.

Uddesopi na kātabbo, paripucchāya kā kathā;

Recitation should not be done, so what to say of questioning;
Dhamma should not be spoken by a bhikkhu with the eye of Dhamma.

2946.

2946.

Na dīpo vijjhāpetabbo, kātabbo vā na ceva so;

A lamp should not be lit, nor should it be made to light;
The window shutters should neither be closed nor opened.

2947.

2947.

Caṅkame caṅkamanto ca, vuḍḍhato parivattaye;

While walking on the promenade, one should turn away from the senior;
And that too, with the edge of the robe, not touching the body.

2948.

2948.

Purato neva therānaṃ, nhāyeyya na panūpari;

One should not bathe in front of the elders, nor above;
For those descending, give way, do not collide.

2949.

2949.

Vattaṃ aparipūrento, na sīlaṃ paripūrati;

One who does not fulfill the observances does not fulfill virtue;
One with impure virtue and poor wisdom does not find one-pointedness of mind.

2950.

2950.

Vikkhittacittonekaggo, saddhammaṃ na ca passati;

One with a distracted mind, without one-pointedness, does not see the true Dhamma;
Not seeing the true Dhamma, one is not freed from suffering.

2951.

2951.

Tasmā hi vattaṃ pūreyya, jinaputto vicakkhaṇo;

Therefore, a wise son of the Conqueror should fulfill the observances;
Having done the advice of the Buddha, the best, one goes to Nibbāna.

Vattakkhandhakakathā.

Vattakkhandhakakathā.

Bhikkhunikkhandhakakathā
Bhikkhunikkhandhakakathā

2952.

2952.

Kāyaṃ ūruṃ thanaṃ vāpi, vivaritvāna bhikkhunī;

A bhikkhunī should not uncover the body, thigh, or breast;
Nor should she show her private parts to a bhikkhu.

2953.

2953.

Bhikkhunā saha yaṃ kiñci, sampayojentiyāpi ca;

For her who engages in any interaction with a bhikkhu;
Or speaks to a bhikkhu, there is an offense of wrong-doing.

2954.

2954.

Na ca bhikkhuniyā dīghaṃ, dhāreyya kāyabandhanaṃ;

A bhikkhunī should not wear a long waistband;
Nor with that waistband, or a breast band.

2955.

2955.

Vilīvena ca paṭṭena, cammapaṭṭena vā tathā;

Nor with a vine band, a leather band, or similarly;
With a cloth band, a cloth braid, or a cloth strip.

2956.

2956.

Na phāsukā nametabbā, dukkaṭaṃ tu namentiyā;

The ribs should not be pressed; there is wrong-doing in pressing;
A female novice should not rub the buttocks with bone, etc.

2957.

2957.

Hatthaṃ vā hatthakocchaṃ vā, pādaṃ vā mukhamūrukaṃ;

If she taps a hand, a hand-arm, a foot, a face, or a thigh;
For her, there is an offense of wrong-doing.

2958.

2958.

Na mukhaṃ limpitabbaṃ tu, na cuṇṇetabbameva ca;

The face should not be smeared, nor powdered;
If she paints her face with realgar, there is an offense.

2959.

2959.

Aṅgarāgo na kātabbo, mukharāgopi vā tathā;

Facial coloring should not be done, nor face coloring;
Cosmetics should not be used, nor should special marks be made.

2960.

2960.

Olokanakato rāgā, oloketuṃ na vaṭṭati;

Looking with lustful intention, it is not proper to look;
She should not stand in a public place, nor should she cause dancing.

2961.

2961.

Dukkaṭaṃ muninā vuttaṃ, gaṇikaṃ vuṭṭhapentiyā;

Wrong-doing has been stated by the Sage for one who makes a courtesan get up;
Or for one who sells liquor, meat, or leaves.

2962.

2962.

Vaḍḍhiṃ vāpi vaṇijjaṃ vā, payojetuṃ na vaṭṭati;

It is not proper to engage in lending or trading;
If she wears a diadem or a bodice, there is wrong-doing.

2963.

2963.

Dāso vā pana dāsī vā, tathā kammakaropi vā;

A male or female slave, or a worker;
Should not be attended upon, nor should an animal.

2964.

2964

Na ca bhikkhuniyā sabba-nīlādiṃ pana cīvaraṃ;

A bhikkhunī should not wear a robe that is all blue, etc.;
It should not be worn, nor should one wear all withered [robes].

2965.

2965.

Paṭicchannāpaṭicchannaṃ, chinnaṃ vācchinnameva vā;

Covered or uncovered, cut or uncut;
It is not proper to look at all the male genitals.

2966.

2966.

Dūratova ca passitvā, bhikkhuṃ bhikkhuniyā pana;

Having seen a bhikkhu from afar, a bhikkhunī;
Should give way to him, moving away from a distance.

2967.

2967.

Bhikkhuṃ pana ca passitvā, pattaṃ bhikkhaṃ carantiyā;

Having seen a bhikkhu while going for alms;
Having taken out the bowl and turned it upside down, it should be shown to the bhikkhu.

2968.

2968.

Saṃvellikañca kātuṃ vā, dhāretuṃ kaṭisuttakaṃ;

To make a waist-band or to wear a belt;
Is allowed during menstruation, for menstruating women by the Great Sage.

2969.

2969.

Itthiposayutaṃ yānaṃ, hatthavaṭṭakameva vā;

It is proper for a sick woman to ride in a vehicle used by women;
A walking stick, or a palanquin.

2970.

2970.

Garudhamme ṭhitāyāpi, mānattaṃ tu carantiyā;

Even for one who is established in the heavy rules, and for one undergoing penance;
A second bhikkhunī should be appointed after formal agreement.

2971.

2971.

Yassā pabbajjakāle tu, gabbho vuṭṭhāti itthiyā;

For a woman whose pregnancy becomes apparent at the time of ordination;
And if she has a son, a second one should be appointed for her as well.

2972.

2972.

Mātā labhati pāyetuṃ, bhojetuṃ puttamattano;

The mother is allowed to nurse and feed her son;
She is allowed to adorn him, put him on her lap, and bathe him.

2973.

2973.

Ṭhapetvā sahaseyyaṃ tu, tasmiṃ dutiyikāya hi;

Except for sleeping together, with that second one;
One should behave just like with other men.

2974.

2974.

Vibbhameneva sā hoti, yasmā idha abhikkhunī;

Because she is considered as a non-bhikkhunī;
Therefore, for a bhikkhunī, there is no renunciation of training.

2975.

2975.

Vibbhantāya yathā tassā, puna natthūpasampadā;

Just as there is no further ordination for her who is deranged;
Similarly, there is no further ordination for one who has gone to a heretical sect.

2976.

2976.

Chedanaṃ nakhakesānaṃ, purisehi ca vandanaṃ;

Cutting nails and hair, and veneration by men;
And tending to a wound is proper to undertake.

2977.

2977.

Na vaccakuṭiyā vacco, kātabbo yāya kāyaci;

A nun should not make a dwelling hut for herself; it is permissible if open below or covered above.

2978.

2978.

Na ca vaṭṭati sabbattha, pallaṅkena nisīdituṃ;

And it is not permissible to sit on a pallaṅka everywhere; it is declared permissible for a sick nun to use a half-pallaṅka.

2979.

2979.

Na ca bhikkhuniyāraññe, vatthabbaṃ tu kathañcana;

And a nun should never dwell in the wilderness; nor is it permissible to bathe at a tittha for people or ordinary tittha.

2980.

2980.

Samaṇī gandhacuṇṇena, yā ca vāsitamattiyā;

If a female samaṇera bathes with scented powder or perfumed clay, or upstream, she incurs a dukkaṭa offense.

2981.

2981.

‘‘Tvaṃyeva paribhuñjā’’ti, paribhogatthamattano;

If something is given for one's own use, saying "You alone should use this," it is a dukkaṭa offense to give it to another without using it oneself.

2982.

2982.

Sabbaṃ paṭiggahāpetvā, bhikkhūhi paribhuñjituṃ;

It is permissible for nuns to have everything accepted and used by the monks, even by those not approved or not fully ordained.

Bhikkhunikkhandhakakathā.

Bhikkhunikkhandhakakathā.

Iti vinayavinicchaye khandhakakathā niṭṭhitā.

Thus ends the Khandhaka discourse in the Vinayavinicchaya.

Catubbidhakammakathā
Discourse on the Four Kinds of Acts

2983.

2983.

Cattārimāni kammāni, apalokanasaññitaṃ;

These are the four kinds of acts: the act announced for approval (apalokanasaññitaṃ); the act with a motion (ñatti); the act with a motion and one announcement (ñattidutiya); and the act with a motion and three announcements (ñatticatutthakaṃ).

2984.

2984.

Apalokanakammaṃ tu, pañca ṭhānāni gacchati;

The act announced for approval occurs in five instances; the act with a motion in nine instances; the act with a motion and one announcement occurs in seven.

2985.

2985.

Tathā ñatticatutthampi, satta ṭhānāni gacchati;

Likewise, the act with a motion and three announcements occurs in seven instances: expulsion (nissāraṇa), degradation (osāra), bhaṇḍuka, and the brahmadaṇḍa.

2986.

2986.

Apalokanakammañhi, kammalakkhaṇapañcamaṃ;

Indeed, the act announced for approval is the fifth, the defining characteristic of an act (kammalakkhaṇa); expulsion and degradation apply to a young novice (samaṇuddesa).

2987.

2987.

Bhaṇḍukaṃpabbajantena, channenabrahmadaṇḍakaṃ;

The bhaṇḍuka applies to one seeking ordination, hiding his defects; the brahmadaṇḍa should be applied to another monk who is of such a nature.

2988.

2988.

Sabbo sannipatitvāna, āpucchitvāna sabbaso;

Having all assembled, having asked everyone, the Saṅgha gives him robes and other requisites.

2989.

2989.

Tikkhattuṃ apaloketvā, bhikkhūnaṃ ruciyā pana;

Having announced it three times, according to the monks' approval; the defining characteristic of an act (kammalakkhaṇa).

2990.

2990.

Nissāraṇamathosāro, uposathapavāraṇā;

Expulsion, degradation, uposatha, pavāraṇā, agreement (sammuti), giving (dāna), and acceptance is the seventh.

2991.

2991.

Paccukkaḍḍhanatā ceva, aṭṭhamī parikittitā;

Revocation is declared the eighth; and the defining characteristic of an act, these are the nine instances of the act with a motion.

2992.

2992.

Vinicchaye asampatte, therassāvinayaññuno;

In a judgment not reached, of an elder unversed in the Vinaya; this is called expulsion (nissāraṇā).

2993.

2993.

sāraṇāti sā;

Degradation (osāraṇā) is that; by means of the Uposatha, and by means of the Pavāraṇā.

2994.

2994.

Ñattiyā ṭhapitattā hi, ñattikammānime duve;

These two are acts with a motion, because they are established by motion; "He should instruct one who is seeking full ordination."

2995.

2995.

‘‘Itthannāmamahaṃ bhikkhuṃ, puccheyyaṃ vinaya’’nti ca;

"I should question the monk named so-and-so about the Vinaya"; agreement (sammuti).

2996.

2996.

‘‘dāna’’nti vuccati;

Giving (dāna) is said; acceptance (paṭiggāho) is said.

2997.

2997.

Paccukkaḍḍhanatānāma, pavārukkaḍḍhanā matā;

Revocation (paccukkaḍḍhanatā) is considered the revocation of the invitation (pavāraṇā); "Having done this Uposatha, I will invite at the proper time."

2998.

2998.

Tiṇavatthārake sabba-paṭhamā ñatti cetarā;

The first motion is on a spread of grass, and so on; this is the defining characteristic of an act (kammalakkhaṇa); these are the nine instances of the act with a motion.

2999.

2999.

Ñattidutiyakammampi, satta ṭhānāni gacchati;

The act with a motion and one announcement occurs in seven instances: expulsion, degradation, agreement, and giving.

3000.

3000.

Uddhāraṃ desanaṃ kamma-lakkhaṇaṃ pana sattamaṃ;

Exclusion (uddhāra), teaching (desana), and the defining characteristic of an act is the seventh; expulsion and degradation are considered thus (nissārosāraṇā).

3001.

3001.

Sammutināma sīmādi, sā pañcadasadhā matā;

Agreement (sammuti) refers to the boundary, and is considered to be of fifteen kinds; giving (dāna) refers to the kathina cloth, giving refers to the cloth for the dead.

3002.

3002.

‘‘ubbhāro’’ti pavuccati;

Exclusion (ubbhāro) is said; teaching (desanā) refers to the grounds for a hut, and the grounds for a dwelling.

3003.

3003.

Tiṇavatthārakamme ca, mohāropanatādisu;

In the act of spreading grass, and in cases of delusion, and so on; this is considered the defining characteristic of an act (kammalakkhaṇatā).

3004.

3004.

Iti ñattidutiyassa, ime satta pakāsitā;

Thus, these seven are declared for the act with a motion and one announcement; likewise, the act with a motion and three announcements occurs in seven instances.

3005.

3005.

Nissāraṇamathosāraṃ, sammutiṃ dānaniggahaṃ;

Expulsion, degradation, agreement, giving, censure (niggaha), formal admonition (samanubhāsana), and the defining characteristic of an act is the seventh.

3006.

3006.

Sattannaṃ tajjanādīnaṃ, kammānaṃ karaṇaṃ pana;

Doing the acts of censure, and so on, for the seven; expulsion (nissāraṇā), then calming, their degradation (osāraṇā) is considered.

3007.

3007.

sammutīti pakāsitā;

Agreement (sammutī) is declared; giving (dāna) is said.

3008.

3008.

‘‘niggaho’’ti pavuccati;

Censure (niggaho) is said; one who follows the one who is suspended, up to the third time.

3009.

3009.

Ariṭṭho caṇḍakāḷī ca, ekādasa bhavantime;

Ariṭṭha, Caṇḍakāḷī, and these eleven exist; formal admonition (samanubhāsanā).

3010.

3010.

Upasampadakammañca, kammamabbhānasaññitaṃ;

The act of full ordination, and the act known as the giving of gifts; the defining characteristic of an act (kammalakkhaṇaṃ).

3011.

3011.

Apalokanakammañcā-paloketvāva kāraye;

The act announced for approval should only be done after announcing for approval; the act with a motion and one announcement, or the act with a motion and three announcements, should not be done.

3012.

3012.

Ñattidutiyakammāni, lahukānatthi kānici;

Some acts with a motion and one announcement are minor and non-existent; all agreements should be made after announcing for approval.

3013.

3013.

Sesāni apaloketvā, kātuṃ pana na vaṭṭati;

It is not permissible to do the remaining acts after announcing for approval; they should be done in accordance with the manner described, in that very way.

Catubbidhakammakathā.

Discourse on the Four Kinds of Acts.

Kammavipattikathā
Discourse on the Failure of Acts

3014.

3014.

Vatthuto ñattito ceva, anussāvanasīmato;

Faults in an act are declared in five ways: with regard to the basis, with regard to the motion, with regard to the proclamation, with regard to the boundary, and with regard to the assembly (parisā).

3015.

3015.

Sammukhākaraṇīyaṃ yaṃ, taṃ karoti asammukhā;

That which should be done in the presence of someone, if one does that in the absence of someone; that act is failed with regard to the basis, it is called unlawful.

3016.

3016.

Asammukhākaraṇīyāni, aṭṭheva ca bhavanti hi;

There are eight things that should be done in the absence of someone: overturning a bowl, and also righting a bowl.

3017.

3017.

Pakāsanīyakammañca, sekkhaummattasammuti;

The act of declaring, agreement about a trainee or a madman, one who is unworthy of respect, likewise the brahmadaṇḍa, and ordination by a messenger (dūtūpasampadā).

3018.

3018.

Imānaṭṭha ṭhapetvāna, sesāni pana sabbaso;

Having set aside these eight, all the remaining acts, the Blessed One said, should be done in the presence of someone.

3019.

3019.

Ñattito pana pañceva, vipajjananayā matā;

But with regard to the motion, there are five ways of failure; one does not touch the basis, or the Saṅgha, or the individual.

3020.

3020.

Na parāmasati ñattiṃ vā, pacchā ñattiṃ ṭhapeti vā;

One does not touch the motion, or later one establishes the motion; by these five causes, acts fail with regard to the motion.

3021.

3021.

Anussāvanato pañca, kammadosā pakāsitā;

Faults in an act are declared in five ways with regard to the proclamation; one does not touch the basis, or the Saṅgha, or the individual.

3022.

3022.

Hāpeti sāvanaṃ vāpi, sāvetasamayepi vā;

One omits the proclamation, or at the time of the proclamation; in this way, acts fail with regard to the proclamation.

3023.

3023.

Ekādasahi sīmāhi, sīmato kammadosatā;

With eleven kinds of boundaries, the faults in an act are due to the boundary; these were spoken by me entirely in the Khandhaka about the Uposatha.

3024.

3024.

Catuvaggena kātabbe, kammappattā anāgatā;

Those who are subject to the act have not come, in an act to be done by a group of four; and consent has not been brought, they object in person.

3025.

3025.

Evaṃ tivaṅgiko doso, parisāya vasā siyā;

Thus, there may be a threefold fault due to the assembly; those who are subject to the act have come, but consent has not been brought.

3026.

3026.

Sammukhā paṭisedhenti, dutiye catuvaggike;

They object in person, in the second group of four; those who are subject to the act have come, and consent has been brought.

3027.

3027.

Paṭikkosova etthatthi, tatiye catuvaggike;

There is only objection in this case, in the third group of four; thus, in groups of five or more, in these three kinds of Saṅghas.

3028.

3028.

Catutthikā siyuṃ dosā, dasa dve parisāvasā;

There may be four faults, twelve due to the assembly; thus, in these twelve ways, acts fail.

Kammavipattikathā.

Discourse on the Failure of Acts.

Sedamocanakathā
Discourse on Sweat Removal

Ka.

Ka.

Soḷasaparivārassa, parivārassa sādarā;

With eagerness for the sixteen entourages, listen carefully to the subtle questions, as I speak of the hidden meanings.

Kha.

Kha.

Divāpajjati no rattiṃ, rattiṃyeva ca no divā;

He incurs an offense by day, but not by night; and only by night, but not by day; how does one incur an offense by accepting, and how by not accepting?

Ga.

Ga.

Chindantassa siyāpatti, tathevāchindatopi ca;

One incurs an offense by cutting, and likewise by not cutting; a monk incurs an offense by covering, and also by not covering.

Gha.

Gha.

Kā cāpatti samāpatti-lābhinoyeva bhikkhuno;

What offense is attained by a monk who is skilled in attainment; and what is the name of that offense for one who is not skilled in attainment?

Ṅa.

Ṅa.

Garukaṃ bhaṇato saccaṃ, alikaṃ bhaṇato siyuṃ;

Speaking the truth incurs a grave offense, speaking falsely incurs a light offense; speaking the truth incurs a light offense, and speaking falsely incurs a grave offense.

Ca.

Ca.

Pavisanto ca ārāmaṃ, āpajjati na nikkhamaṃ;

One incurs an offense by entering a monastery, but not by leaving; one incurs an offense only by leaving, but not by entering;

Cha.

Cha.

Samādiyanto asamādiyanto;

By undertaking and by not undertaking;
By not taking and by taking;
By giving and by not giving one is at fault;
Likewise, by doing and by not doing.

Ja.

Ja.

Āpajjati ca dhārento, adhārento tatheva ca;

One incurs an offense by keeping and also by not keeping; how is a mother and father both present in one? Tell me.

Jha.

Jha.

Ubhatobyañjanā itthī, gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti attanā;

A hermaphrodite takes a womb by herself; she causes another to take a womb, therefore she is both mother and father.

Ña.

Ña.

Gāme vā yadi vāraññe, yaṃ paresaṃ mamāyitaṃ;

In a village or in the wilderness, if something is possessed by another, how does one incur expulsion by not stealing it?

Ṭa.

Ṭa.

Theyyasaṃvāsako eso, liṅgasaṃvāsathenako;

This is one who lives in communion by theft, a thief by means of living in communion through pretense; without taking another's belongings, he is defeated by that.

Ṭha.

Ṭha.

Nāriṃ rūpavatiṃ bhikkhu, rattacitto asaññato;

How is a monk, with lustful thoughts and unrestrained, not expelled even after engaging in sexual intercourse with a beautiful woman?

Ḍa.

Ḍa.

Accharāsadisaṃ nāriṃ, supinantena passati;

He sees a woman like a nymph, while dreaming; he will not be expelled even if sexual intercourse is engaged in with her.

Ḍha.

Ḍha.

Bahiddhā gehato bhikkhu, itthī gabbhantaraṃ gatā;

A woman goes inside the womb, outside of a house; there is no hole in the house, how is he expelled from sexual intercourse?

Ṇa.

Ṇa.

Antodussakuṭiṭṭhena, mātugāmena methunaṃ;

By engaging in sexual intercourse with a woman, inside a hidden hut, by means of a spread, and so on, he is defeated.

Ta.

Ta.

Sutte ca vinayeyeva, khandhake sānulomike;

In the Sutta and in the Vinaya, in the Khandhaka and in conformity with it; everywhere the wise and intelligent speak of these questions.

Tha.

Tha.

Khandhake parivāre ca, vinaye sānulomike;

In the Khandhaka and the Parivāra, in the Vinaya and in conformity with it; care should be taken to determine readiness.

Sedamocanakathā.

Discourse on Sweat Removal.

Pakiṇṇakavinicchayakathā
Discourse on Miscellaneous Judgments

3029.

3029.

Chattaṃ paṇṇamayaṃ kiñci, bahi anto ca sabbaso;

A leaf umbrella, whether a little inside or entirely outside, it is not permissible to sew it with thread of five colors.

3030.

3030.

Chindituṃ aḍḍhacandaṃ vā, paṇṇe makaradantakaṃ;

It is not permissible to cut a half-moon or serrated edges on leaves; or figures of alligators or animals, or drawings on the handle.

3031.

3031.

Sibbituṃ ekavaṇṇena, chattaṃ suttena vaṭṭati;

It is permissible to sew an umbrella with thread of one color; or to bind a cage with five colors for stability.

3032.

3032.

Ghaṭakaṃ vāḷarūpaṃ vā, lekhā vā pana kevalā;

It is permissible to keep figures of alligators or animals, or just drawings, after breaking or rubbing them away.

3033.

3033.

Ahichattakasaṇṭhānaṃ, daṇḍabundamhi vaṭṭati;

A design in the shape of a mushroom is permissible on the handle; it is permissible to make drawings that are carved for the purpose of binding.

3034.

3034.

Nānāvaṇṇehi suttehi, maṇḍanatthāya cīvaraṃ;

A robe (cīvaraṃ) to be adorned with threads of various colors;
It is not proper to sew it evenly with strips etc.

3035.

3035.

Pattassa pariyante vā, tathā pattamukhepi vā;

It is a dukkaṭa to make braids (veṇiṃ) or chain-like patterns (saṅkhalikaṃ) on the edge of the bowl (pattassa) or at the mouth of the bowl (pattamukhe).

3036.

3036.

Paṭṭampi gaṇṭhipāsānaṃ, aṭṭhakoṇādikaṃvidhiṃ;

Also, making belts (paṭṭampi) with knot patterns (gaṇṭhipāsānaṃ), eight-cornered designs (aṭṭhakoṇādikaṃvidhiṃ);
And making forms of pestles (tatthagghiyagadārūpaṃ), mallets (muggarādiṃ), etc.

3037.

3037.

Tattha kakkaṭakakkhīni, uṭṭhāpenti na vaṭṭati;

It is not proper to raise crab-eyes (kakkaṭakakkhīni) there;
And the threads (suttā) and pimples (piḷakā) there, are explained as difficult to know (duviññeyyāva dīpitā).

3038.

3038.

Catukoṇāva vaṭṭanti, gaṇṭhipāsakapaṭṭakā;

Only four-cornered (catukoṇāva) knot-patterned belts (gaṇṭhipāsakapaṭṭakā) are proper;
The threads in the corners (kaṇṇakoṇesu suttāni) should be cut immediately in the robe (cīvare).

3039.

3039.

Sūcikammavikāraṃ vā, aññaṃ vā pana kiñcipi;

A bhikkhu should not do or have done any needlework (sūcikammavikāraṃ) or anything else whatsoever (aññaṃ vā pana kiñcipi) on a robe (cīvare).

3040.

3040.

Yo ca pakkhipati bhikkhu cīvaraṃ;

That bhikkhu who puts a robe (cīvaraṃ) in
Kañji (rice gruel), piṭṭha (flour), khali (sesame stalk), allikā (turmeric), etc.;
Desiring a superior (paraṃ) color and smoothness (vaṇṇamaṭṭhaṃ abhipatthayaṃ);
There is no release (mutti) for him from the dukkaṭa.

3041.

3041.

Sūcihatthamalādīnaṃ, karaṇe cīvarassa ca;

When a robe (cīvarassa) requires needlework (sūcihatthamalādīnaṃ), and when it is dirty (kiliṭṭhakāle), it is proper to wash it (dhovanatthaṃ).

3042.

3042.

Rajane pana gandhaṃ vā, telaṃ vā lākhameva vā;

When dyeing (rajane), it is not proper for a bhikkhu to put any perfume (gandhaṃ) or oil (telaṃ) or lac (lākhameva vā) into it.

3043.

3043.

Saṅkhena maṇinā vāpi, aññenapi ca kenaci;

One should not rub a robe (cīvaraṃ) with a conch shell (saṅkhena) or a gem (maṇinā) or anything else; it should not be rubbed with a trough (doṇiyā).

3044.

3044.

Cīvaraṃ doṇiyaṃ katvā, nāpi ghaṭṭeyya muṭṭhinā;

Having put the robe (cīvaraṃ) in the trough (doṇiyaṃ), one should not rub it with the fist (muṭṭhinā); it is proper to beat (paharituṃ) it lightly with the hands (hattheheva).

3045.

3045.

Gaṇṭhike pana lekhā vā, piḷakā vā na vaṭṭati;

A pattern of lines (lekhā) or pimples (piḷakā) or a variation of the kappabindu is not proper on the border (gaṇṭhike), due to the difference in the edge of the hem (pāḷikaṇṇikabhedato).

3046.

3046.

Thālakassa ca pattassa, bahi antopi vā pana;

No line (lekhā), drawn with an awl (āraggena), is proper on the inside or outside of a bowl (thālakassa ca pattassa).

3047.

3047.

Āropetvā bhamaṃ pattaṃ, majjitvā ce pacanti ca;

Having placed the bowl (pattaṃ) on a wheel (bhamaṃ) and dipped it, if they cook it,
Saying, "We will make it gem-colored (maṇivaṇṇaṃ karissāma)," it is not proper to do.

3048.

3048.

Pattamaṇḍalake kiñci, bhittikammaṃ na vaṭṭati;

No kind of wall-painting (bhittikammaṃ) is proper on the patta-maṇḍalaka (bowl-stand);
There is no fault in making makaradantaka (crocodile teeth).

3049.

3049.

Na dhammakaraṇacchatte, lekhā kācipi vaṭṭati;

No line (lekhā) whatsoever is proper on a dhammakaraṇa umbrella (dhammakaraṇacchatte);
Having placed it in the stomach (kucchiyaṃ), a line (lekhaṃ) on the mouth-rim (mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ).

3050.

3050.

Suttaṃ vā diguṇaṃ katvā, koṭṭenti ca tahiṃ tahiṃ;

Having doubled the thread (suttaṃ) and knotted (koṭṭenti) it here and there (tahiṃ tahiṃ);
For the beauty of the waistband (kāyabandhanasobhatthaṃ), that is not proper for a bhikkhu.

3051.

3051.

Dasāmukhe daḷhatthāya, dvīsu antesu vaṭṭati;

It is proper at the two ends (dvīsu antesu) for strength (daḷhatthāya) at the edge of the hem (dasāmukhe);
But designs of garlands (mālākamma), vines (latākamma), and paintings (cittikampi) are not proper.

3052.

3052.

Akkhīni tattha dassetvā, koṭṭite pana kā kathā;

What to say of the fact that eyes (akkhīni) are shown there, when it is knotted (koṭṭite pana kā kathā);
It is not proper to raise crab-eyes (kakkaṭakkhīni) there.

3053.

3053.

Ghaṭaṃ deḍḍubhasīsaṃ vā, makarassa mukhampi vā;

A pot (ghaṭaṃ), a deḍḍubha head, or the mouth of a makara (makarassa mukhampi vā);
Any kind of modified form (vikārarūpaṃ yaṃ kiñci) is not proper at the edge of the hem (dasāmukhe).

3054.

3054.

Ujukaṃ macchakaṇṭaṃ vā, maṭṭhaṃ vā pana paṭṭikaṃ;

It is proper to knot it having made it straight (ujukaṃ), like a fish-bone (macchakaṇṭaṃ), or smooth (maṭṭhaṃ), or a flat strip (paṭṭikaṃ);
Or in the shape of a date-palm leaf (khajjūripattakākāraṃ).

3055.

3055.

Paṭṭikā sūkarantanti, duvidhaṃ kāyabandhanaṃ;

The waistband (kāyabandhanaṃ) is of two kinds: paṭṭikā (flat strip) and sūkarantanti (boar's gut);
Rope (rajjukā), cloth strip (dussapaṭṭādi), etc., are all in accordance with that (sabbaṃ tassānulomikaṃ).

3056.

3056.

Murajaṃ maddavīṇañca, deḍḍubhañca kalābukaṃ;

Muraja (a kind of drum), maddavīṇa (a kind of lute), deḍḍubha (a kind of drum), and kalābuka (a kind of lute);
Ropes (rajjuyo) are not proper; the first two are ten-layered (dvedasā siyuṃ).

3057.

3057.

Dasā pāmaṅgasaṇṭhānā, niddiṭṭhā kāyabandhane;

The ten straps (dasā) having the shape of a pāmaṅga (a kind of fruit) are specified for the waistband (kāyabandhane);
One, two, three, or four are proper, but not more than that.

3058.

3058.

Ekarajjumayaṃ vuttaṃ, muninā kāyabandhanaṃ;

A waistband (kāyabandhanaṃ) made of a single rope (ekarajjumayaṃ) is stated by the sage (muninā);
But even that one (ekampi) having the shape of a pāmaṅga (Tinospora cordifolia) is not proper.

3059.

3059.

Rajjuke ekato katvā, bahū ekāya rajjuyā;

Having made the ropes (rajjuke) into one, with many into one rope;
It is proper to tie it, having continuously wrapped (nirantarañhi veṭhetvā).

3060.

3060.

Dantakaṭṭhavisāṇaṭṭhi-lohaveḷunaḷabbhavā;

Made of tooth (dantakaṭṭha), horn (visāṇa), bone (aṭṭhi), iron (loha), bamboo (veḷu), reed (naḷa);
Lac (jatu), conch shell (saṅkha), thread (sutta), fruit (phala): these are considered different types (vidhakā matā).

3061.

3061.

Kāyabandhanavidhepi, vikāro na ca vaṭṭati;

No modification (vikāro) is proper in the method of the waistband (kāyabandhanavidhepi);
Only the indication (lekhāmattaṃ) of divisions (pariccheda) here and there (tattha tattha) is proper.

3062.

3062.

Mālākammalatākamma-nānārūpavicittitā;

Designs of garlands (mālākamma), vines (latākamma), various forms (nānārūpavicittitā);
Eye-salve (añjanī) pleasing to people (janarañjanī) is not proper for bhikkhus.

3063.

3063.

Tādisaṃ pana ghaṃsitvā, veṭhetvā suttakena vā;

But for a bhikkhu grinding (ghaṃsitvā) such (tādisaṃ) and wrapping (veṭhetvā) it with thread (suttakena vā);
There is no fault (na doso koci vijjati) in using it.

3064.

3064.

Vaṭṭā vā caturassā vā, aṭṭhaṃsā vāpi añjanī;

Whether the eye-salve container (añjanī) is round (vaṭṭā) or square (caturassā) or eight-sided (aṭṭhaṃsā vāpi);
It is stated that only round (vaṭṭateva) is proper; color and smoothness (vaṇṇamaṭṭhā) is not proper.

3065.

3065.

Tathāñjanisalākāpi, añjanithavikāya ca;

Likewise, on the eye-salve stick (añjanisalākāpi) and the eye-salve bag (añjanithavikāya ca);
Painting (cittakammaṃ) with threads of various colors (nānāvaṇṇehi suttehi) is not proper.

3066.

3066.

Ekavaṇṇena suttena, sipāṭiṃ yena kenaci;

Having sewn (sibbetvā) anything (yaṃ kiñci) with a single-colored thread (ekavaṇṇena suttena) in any way (sipāṭiṃ yena kenaci);
It is proper for one to use it when wrapping (vaḷañjantassa vaṭṭati).

3067.

3067.

Maṇikaṃ piḷakaṃ vāpi, pipphale ārakaṇṭake;

It is not proper for a bhikkhu to place any gem (maṇikaṃ) or pimple (piḷakaṃ) on a pipphali (long pepper), an ārakaṇṭaka (a kind of thorn), or anything else.

3068.

3068.

Daṇḍakepi pariccheda-lekhāmattaṃ tu vaṭṭati;

Only the indication of divisions (pariccheda-lekhāmattaṃ) is proper even on a staff (daṇḍakepi);
It is proper to round it (valitvā ca) and make nail marks (nakhacchedaṃ karontīti hi vaṭṭati).

3069.

3069.

Uttarāraṇiyaṃ vāpi, dhanuke pelladaṇḍake;

On the upper fire-stick (uttarāraṇiyaṃ), the bow (dhanuke), the pelladaṇḍaka (arrow-shaft);
Any kind of garland work (mālākammādi), color and smoothness (vaṇṇamaṭṭhaṃ) is not proper.

3070.

3070.

Saṇḍāse dantakaṭṭhānaṃ, tathā chedanavāsiyā;

On the tongs (saṇḍāse) for tooth-wood (dantakaṭṭhānaṃ), as well as on the cutting adze (chedanavāsiyā);
It is proper to bind (bandhituṃ) the two sides (dvīsu passesu) with iron (lohena).

3071.

3071.

Tathā kattaradaṇḍepi, cittakammaṃ na vaṭṭati;

Likewise, on the handle of scissors (kattaradaṇḍepi), painting (cittakammaṃ) is not proper;
Only round lines (vaṭṭalekhāva vaṭṭanti), one or two also below (heṭṭhato).

3072.

3072.

Visāṇe nāḷiyaṃ vāpi, tathevāmaṇḍasārake;

On horn (visāṇe) or a tube (nāḷiyaṃ), likewise on the āmaṇḍasāraka (castor-oil plant);
In the oil container (telabhājanake), all color and smoothness (vaṇṇamaṭṭhaṃ) is not proper.

3073.

3073.

Pānīyassa uḷuṅkepi, doṇiyaṃ rajanassapi;

In the water strainer (pānīyassa uḷuṅkepi), in the dye trough (doṇiyaṃ rajanassapi);
In the pot (ghaṭe), on the wooden seat (phalakapīṭhepi), in the ring-stand (valayādhārakādike).

3074.

3074.

Tathā pattapidhāne ca, tālavaṇṭe ca bījane;

Likewise, on the bowl lid (pattapidhāne ca), on the palm-leaf fan (tālavaṇṭe ca), and the fan (bījane);
On the foot-wiper (pādapuñchaniyaṃ vāpi), and likewise on the broom (sammuñjaniyameva ca).

3075.

3075.

Mañce bhūmatthare pīṭhe, bhisibimbohanesu ca;

On the bed (mañce), the floor covering (bhūmatthare), the seat (pīṭhe), the cushion (bhisi), the pillow (bimbohanesu ca);
All designs of garlands (mālākammādikaṃ cittaṃ), everything is proper (sabbameva ca vaṭṭati).

3076.

3076.

Nānāmaṇimayatthambha-kavāṭadvārabhittikaṃ;

What to say of color and smoothness (kā kathā vaṇṇamaṭṭhake) in an unapproved dwelling (senāsanamanuññātaṃ) with pillars (thambha) made of various jewels (nānāmaṇimaya), doors (kavāṭa), walls (bhittikaṃ).

3077.

3077.

Sovaṇṇiyaṃ dvārakavāṭabaddhaṃ;

A doorway (dvārakavāṭabaddhaṃ) made of gold (sovaṇṇiyaṃ);
A wall and floor (bhittibhūmiṃ) of various gold jewels (suvaṇṇanānāmaṇi);
Nothing (na kiñci) at all (ekampi) should be prohibited (nisedhanīyaṃ);
All dwelling (senāsanaṃ) is proper (vaṭṭati sabbameva).

3078.

3078.

Buddhaṃ dhammañca saṅghañca, na uddissa davaṃ kare;

He should not make a vow (davaṃ kare) dedicating it to the Buddha, the Dhamma, or the Saṅgha;
He should not take vows of ascetics (titthiyabbataṃ) such as keeping silence (mūgabbatādikaṃ).

3079.

3079.

Kāyaṃ vā aṅgajātaṃ vā, ūruṃ vā na tu dassaye;

He should not show (na tu dassaye) the body (kāyaṃ), or genitals (aṅgajātaṃ), or thighs (ūruṃ);
And they (tā vāpi) should not sprinkle (na siñce) bhikkhunīs with water (udakādinā).

3080.

3080.

Vassamaññattha vuṭṭho ce, bhāgamaññattha gaṇhati;

If one has spent the rains (vassamaññattha vuṭṭho ce) elsewhere, and he takes a share (bhāgamaññattha gaṇhati) from elsewhere;
There is a dukkaṭa, and it must be given back (dātabbaṃ), even if the neck (gīvā) is destroyed (naṭṭhepi) and worn out (jajjare).

3081.

3081.

Codito so sace tehi, bhikkhūhi na dadeyyataṃ;

If, when he is urged by those bhikkhus (bhikkhūhi), he does not give it;
They should have it done by the price of the goods (bhaṇḍaggheneva kāraye) when relinquishing their duty (dhuranikkhepane tesaṃ).

3082.

3082.

Akappiyasamādānaṃ, karoto hoti dukkaṭaṃ;

There is a dukkaṭa for one undertaking what is unallowable (akappiyasamādānaṃ karoto);
He is not released from the dukkaṭa for throwing a stone (davā silaṃ pavijjhanto).

3083.

3083.

Gihīgopakadānasmiṃ, na doso koci gaṇhato;

There is no fault in taking what is given by householders (gihīgopakadānasmiṃ);
The method of restriction (paricchedanayo) is stated for what belongs to the Saṅgha and the cetiya (Saṅghacetiyasantake).

3084.

3084.

Yānaṃ purisasaṃyuttaṃ, hatthavaṭṭakameva vā;

It is proper to get on a vehicle (yānaṃ) connected with a man (purisasaṃyuttaṃ), or even a hand-cart (hatthavaṭṭakameva vā);
And a litter (pāṭaṅkiñca) for a sick person (gilānassa), is proper to ascend.

3085.

3085.

Na ca bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ, sampayojeyya kiñcipi;

He should not have any connection (na ca bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ sampayojeyya kiñcipi) with a bhikkhunī;
There is a dukkaṭa for a bhikkhu who shines upon (obhāsentassa) a bhikkhunī with lust (rāgā).

3086.

3086.

Bhikkhunīnaṃ have bhikkhu, pātimokkhaṃ na uddise;

A bhikkhu should not recite (na uddise) the Pātimokkha to bhikkhunīs;
If he accepts an offense (āpattiṃ) from them (tāsaṃ), there is a dukkaṭa.

3087.

3087.

Attano paribhogatthaṃ, dinnamaññassa kassaci;

If he gives (dadato pana dukkaṭaṃ) something given (dinnaṃ) for his own use (attanoparibhogatthaṃ) to someone else (aññassa kassaci);
Without using it (paribhogamakatvāva).

3088.

3088.

Asappāyaṃ sace sabbaṃ, apanetumpi vaṭṭati;

It is proper to remove (apanetumpi vaṭṭati) everything that is unsuitable (asappāyaṃ sace sabbaṃ);
This is the same method (ayaṃ nayo) for taking the best (aggaṃ gahetvā) or giving (dātuṃ), even with bowls (pattādīsu).

3089.

3089.

Pañcavaggūpasampadā, guṇaṅguṇaupāhanā;

Upasampadā (higher ordination) with a group of five (pañcavaggūpasampadā), guṇaṅguṇa sandals (guṇaṅguṇaupāhanā);
A leather mat (cammatthāro), frequent bathing (dhuvanhānaṃ) are not proper in the Middle Country (majjhadese).

3090.

3090.

Sambādhassa ca sāmantā, satthakammaṃ duvaṅgulā;

For a tight space (sambādhassa ca), knife work (satthakammaṃ) two finger-widths around (sāmantā duvaṅgulā);
Is prohibited (vāritaṃ), and enema use (vatthikammampi) is prohibited by the Teacher (satthunā) only in a tight space (sambādheyeva).

3091.

3091.

Paṇṇāni ajjukādīnaṃ, loṇaṃ vā uṇhayāguyā;

It is not proper to stir leaves (paṇṇāni) of ajjukā etc. (ajjukādīnaṃ), salt (loṇaṃ), or hot rice-gruel (uṇhayāguyā);
Having put (pakkhipitvāna) them into a pot (pākatthaṃ).

3092.

3092.

Sace parisamaññassa, upaḷāleti dukkaṭaṃ;

If he praises (upaḷāleti) another assembly (parisamaññassa), there is a dukkaṭa;
But it is proper to speak of the disadvantages (ādīnavaṃ) of that there (tattha).

3093.

3093.

‘‘Makkhanaṃ gūthamuttehi, gatena nhāyituṃ viya;

"Like bathing with excrement and urine after smearing oneself (makkhanaṃ gūthamuttehi, gatena nhāyituṃ viya);
The immorality (dussīlaṃ) is done (kataṃ) relying on this (nissāya), by you living (taya viharatā)."

3094.

3094.

Bhattagge yāgupāne ca, antogāme ca vīthiyaṃ;

In the refectory (bhattagge), with rice-gruel and drink (yāgupāne), in the village (antogāme), and in the street (vīthiyaṃ);
In the dark (andhakāre), there is no offense (anāvajjo), with one turn (ekāvatto), and disturbed (byāvaṭo).

3095.

3095.

Sutto khādañca bhuñjanto, vaccaṃ muttampi vā karaṃ;

While eating (bhuñjanto) what is chewed and what is eaten, or while defecating or urinating (vaccaṃ muttampi vā karaṃ);
Veneration (vandanā) of thirteen (terasa) is prohibited because of inappropriate intent (ayuttatthena vāritā).

3096.

3096.

Naggo anupasampanno, nānāsaṃvāsakopi ca;

A naked person (naggo), one not yet fully ordained (anupasampanno), one of different association (nānāsaṃvāsakopi ca);
One who is ordained later (yo pacchā upasampanno), one who is expelled (ukkhitto), a woman (mātugāmako).

3097.

3097.

Ekādasa abhabbā ca, garukaṭṭhā ca pañcime;

Eleven (ekādasa) incapable ones (abhabbā ca), and these five (pañcime) of serious offense (garukaṭṭhā ca);
It is stated (vuttaṃ) that there is a dukkaṭa for venerating (vandato) twenty-two (bāvīsati) individuals (puggale).

3098.

3098.

Yo pure upasampanno, nānāsaṃvāsavuḍḍhako;

One who is ordained earlier (yo pure upasampanno), an elder (vuḍḍhako) of different association (nānāsaṃvāsa);
A speaker of the Dhamma (dhammavādī), and a sambuddha: these three (trayo ime) are worthy of veneration (vandanīyā).

3099.

3099.

Tajjanādikate ettha, caturo pana puggale;

Here, for four (caturo pana) individuals (puggale) under censure (tajjanādikate ettha);
There is no offense (anāpatti) in venerating (vandatopi), or in doing deeds (kammañca kubbato) with them (tehi).

3100.

3100.

Adhiṭṭhānaṃ panekassa, dvinnaṃ vā tiṇṇameva vā;

The making of an appointment (adhiṭṭhānaṃ) is for one (panekassa), or two (dvinnaṃ), or only three (tiṇṇameva vā);
What is seen (diṭṭhāvikamma) should be declared (uddiṭṭhaṃ), beyond that (tato uddhaṃ) is prohibited (nivāraṇaṃ).

3101.

3101.

Sandiṭṭho hoti sambhatto, jīvatālapitopi ca;

He is seen, associated with, and fond of those still living; his mind is seized, and confidence arises in five ways.

3102.

3102.

Sīladiṭṭhivipatti ca, ācārājīvasambhavā;

Defilement of virtue, defilement of views, and those arising from conduct and livelihood; these four kinds of defilements were spoken by the Kinsman of the Sun.

3103.

3103.

Tattha appaṭikammā ca, yā ca vuṭṭhānagāminī;

Among them, that which is without amends, and that which leads to rehabilitation, are proclaimed as defilements of virtue.

3104.

3104.

Antaggāhikadiṭṭhi ca, yā diṭṭhi dasavatthukā;

The view that clings to extremes, and the view with ten grounds; these two kinds of views are shown as defilements of views.

3105.

3105.

Desanāgāminikā yā ca, pañca thullaccayādikā;

That which leads to censure, such as the five thullaccayas, etc.; that is the defilement of conduct, according to one skilled in conduct.

3106.

3106.

micchājīvoti dīpito;

Offences connected with livelihood are sixfold, and are declared as wrong livelihood.

3107.

3107.

Kammunā laddhisīmāhi, nānāsaṃvāsakā tayo;

Three are those of different communions by means of action, gain, and boundary; one expelled by action is considered to be of three kinds of different communions.

3108.

3108.

Adhammavādipakkhasmiṃ, nisinnova vicintiyaṃ;

Sitting in the faction of those who speak against the Dhamma, pondering, and in one's mind arises, "These are speakers of the Dhamma".

3109.

3109.

Nānāsaṃvāsako nāma, laddhiyāyaṃ pakāsito;

This is declared as a different communion by gain; being situated there, he destroys the collective act of both.

3110.

3110.

Bahisīmāgato sīmā-nānāsaṃvāsako mato;

One who has come outside the boundary is considered to be of different communion by boundary; thus, three kinds of different communions were spoken by the Great Sage.

3111.

3111.

Cuto anupasampanno, nānāsaṃvāsakā tayo;

One who has passed away, one who is not fully ordained, these three are of different communions; eleven monks are incapable, these are non-communing.

3112.

3112.

Asaṃvāsassa sabbassa, tathā kammārahassa ca;

For all who are non-communing, and also for those unworthy of acts, the rejection of the insane, etc., in the Sangha does not take root.

3113.

3113.

Sasaṃvāsekasīmaṭṭha-pakatattassa bhikkhuno;

For a monk who is proper, staying within a single communion, rejection by speech takes root immediately.

3114.

3114.

Bhikkhu āpajjatāpattiṃ, ākārehi panacchahi;

A monk incurs an offence through six modes; the likenesses to a samaṇa have been spoken, as well as the five kinds of purity.

3115.

3115.

Nidānaṃ puggalaṃ vatthuṃ, vidhiṃ paññattiyā pana;

Origin, individual, object, method, and rule; the failure to offend, the non-offence, and also the manner of arising.

3116.

3116.

Vajjakammakriyāsaññā, cittāṇattividhiṃ pana;

The perception of a blameworthy act, the performance, the mind, the non-mind method; likewise, the component method, feeling, and the threefold wholesome.

3117.

3117.

Sattarasavidhaṃ etaṃ, dassetvā lakkhaṇaṃ budho;

Having shown these seventeen characteristics, the wise man should apply them to the precepts, there, wherever appropriate.

3118.

3118.

Nidānaṃtattha vesālī, tathā rājagahaṃ puraṃ;

There, origin is Vesālī, and also the city of Rājagaha; Sāvatthi, Āḷavī, Kosambī, and Sakkabhagga are declared.

3119.

3119.

Dasa vesāliyā vuttā, ekavīsaṃ giribbaje;

Ten are spoken in Vesālī, twenty-one in Giribbaja; six hundred less three are in Sāvatthi.

3120.

3120.

Cha panāḷaviyaṃ vuttā, aṭṭha kosambiyaṃ katā;

Six are spoken in Āḷavī, eight are done in Kosambī; eight are prescribed in Sakka, three are declared in Bhagga.

3121.

3121.

Tevīsatividhā vuttā, sudinnadhaniyādayo;

Twenty-three kinds are spoken, Sudinna, Dhaniya, etc.; individuals who are originators in the monks' Pātimokkha.

3122.

3122.

Bhikkhunīnaṃ tathā pāti-mokkhasmiṃ ādikammikā;

Likewise, in the nuns' Pātimokkha, the originators; Thullanandā, etc., are seven, all thirty they become.

3123.

3123.

Taruṃ timūlaṃ navapattamenaṃ;

He who knows the tree with three roots and nine leaves, the two sprouts, seven fruits, and six flowers; he who knows the twofold origin and twofold branch, knows the teaching completely.

3124.

3124.

Iti paramamimaṃ vinicchayaṃ;

Thus, may he who reads, hears, and asks about this supreme judgment, sweet in word and meaning, and not confused, be equal to Pāli in judgment.

Iti vinayavinicchaye pakiṇṇakavinicchayakathā samattā.

Thus ends the Miscellaneous Judgments section in the Vinaya Judgment.

Kammaṭṭhānabhāvanāvidhānakathā
The Discourse on the Method of Meditation Subjects

3125.

3125.

Pāmokkhe pātimokkhasmiṃ, mukhe mokkhappavesane;

In the foremost Pātimokkha, at the mouth, the entrance to liberation; spoken in the destruction of all suffering, it is said thrice over.

3126.

3126.

Idaṃ catubbidhaṃ sīlaṃ, ñatvā tattha patiṭṭhito;

Having known this fourfold virtue, and being established therein; and again, having developed concentration, one is completely freed by wisdom.

3127.

3127.

Dasānussatiyo vuttā, kasiṇā ca dasāsubhā;

Ten recollections have been spoken, ten kasiṇas and the impure; four immeasurables, and also two formless realms.

3128.

3128.

Iccevaṃ pana sabbampi, cattālīsavidhaṃ siyā;

Thus, all of this is fortyfold; the meditation subject is specified, the vital subject for the mind.

3129.

3129.

Upacārappanāto ca, jhānabhedā atikkamā;

From access and attainment, and from the distinctions of jhāna; from exceeding, and from increasing and not increasing, and also from the base of the object.

3130.

3130.

Gahaṇā paccayā bhiyyo, tathā cariyānukūlato;

From grasping, from causes, and more so from suitability of conduct; this distinction among these should be understood by the discerning one.

3131.

3131.

Aṭṭhānussatiyo saññā-vavatthānañca tatthime;

Eight recollections, perception, and defining, these are the bearers of access; the remaining thirty are considered to be bearers of jhāna.

3132.

3132.

Paṭhamajjhānikā tattha, asubhā kāyagatāsati;

There, the impure, mindfulness of the body, and mindfulness of breathing are of the first jhāna; these four kasiṇas are of the fourth jhāna.

3133.

3133.

Tikajjhānāni tissova, appamaññātha pacchimā;

Three are of the third jhāna, the three immeasurables, and the last four formless realms are considered to be of the fourth jhāna.

3134.

3134.

Atikkamo dvidhā vutto, aṅgārammaṇatopi ca;

Exceeding is said to be twofold, from components and also from the object; in the fourfold and threefold jhānas, exceeding is considered to be from the components.

3135.

3135.

Catutthā appamaññāpi, aṅgātikkamato siyā;

The fourth immeasurable can also be from exceeding in components; having exceeded the object, the formless realms arise.

3136.

3136.

Kasiṇāni dasevettha, vaḍḍhetabbāni yoginā;

Here, the ten kasiṇas should be increased by the yogi; but all the rest should not be increased.

3137.

3137.

Nimittārammaṇā tattha, kasiṇā ca dasāsubhā;

There, the kasiṇas and the impure are the objects of the sign; mindfulness of the body and breathing, these are twenty-two.

3138.

3138.

Sesānussatiyo aṭṭha, saññā dhātuvavatthanaṃ;

The remaining eight recollections, perception, definition of elements; consciousness and neither-perception-nor-non-perception, ten and two are objects of being.

3139.

3139.

Catasso appamaññāyo, dve ca āruppamānasā;

The four immeasurables and the two formless minds; these states are specified as objects of six and nine births.

3140.

3140.

Dasāsubhā paṭikkūla-saññā kāyagatāsati;

The ten impure practices, the perception of repulsiveness, and mindfulness of the body; these do not occur in the heavens, only in twelve realms.

3141.

3141.

Tāni dvādasa bhiyyo ca, ānāpānasatīpi ca;

These twelve and also more, and mindfulness of breathing; thirteen in all do not arise in the Brahma world.

3142.

3142.

Ṭhapetvā caturāruppe, arūpāvacare kira;

Having set aside the four formless realms, truly in the formless realm; others do not arise, all arise in the human realm.

3143.

3143.

Catutthaṃ kasiṇaṃ hitvā, kasiṇā ca dasāsubhā;

Having abandoned the fourth kasiṇa, the ten kasiṇas and the impure; should be grasped by sight alone, these are in the preliminary stage.

3144.

3144.

Ānāpānañca phuṭṭhena, diṭṭhena tacapañcakaṃ;

Breathing by touch, the five by sight and touch; the wind by sight and touch, and the rest by hearing.

3145.

3145.

Ākāsakasiṇañcettha, ṭhapetvā kasiṇā nava;

Having set aside the space kasiṇa here, the nine kasiṇas; arise as conditions for the mind of the first formless realm.

3146.

3146.

Bhavanti hi abhiññāṇaṃ, kasiṇāni dasāpi ca;

The ten kasiṇas become indications; three immeasurables also, are conditions for the fourth.

3147.

3147.

Heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimāruppaṃ, parassa ca parassa ca;

The lower formless realm for the lower, and the higher for the higher; neither-perception-nor-non-perception is said to be the condition for cessation.

3148.

3148.

Sabbe sukhavihārassa, bhavanissaraṇassa ca;

All are said to be the conditions for dwelling in happiness, for release from existence; and likewise, for happiness in existence.

3149.

3149.

Asubhā dasa viññeyyā, tathā kāyagatāsati;

The ten impure practices should be understood, and also mindfulness of the body; these are suitable especially for one of lustful temperament.

3150.

3150.

Catasso appamaññāyo, savaṇṇakasiṇā tathā;

The four immeasurables and the colored kasiṇas; these are declared to be suitable for one of hateful temperament.

3151.

3151.

Vitakkacaritassāpi, mohappakatinopi ca;

For one of discursive temperament, and also for one of deluded nature; mindfulness of breathing alone is known to be suitable.

3152.

3152.

Saññā ceva vavatthānaṃ, maraṇūpasame sati;

Perception and defining, with mindfulness of death; these are declared to be suitable for one of wise nature.

3153.

3153.

Ādianussaticchakkaṃ, saddhācaritavaṇṇitaṃ;

The initial six recollections are described as of faithful temperament; the formless realms, the remaining kasiṇas, are suitable for all.

3154.

3154.

Evaṃ pabhedato ñatvā, kammaṭṭhānāni paṇḍito;

Thus, having known the meditation subjects in detail, the wise one should take that which is suitable for one's own temperament among them.

3155.

3155.

Taṃ gahetvāna medhāvī, daḷhaṃ kalyāṇamittako;

Having taken that, the wise one, with a steadfast, virtuous friend; having made an end to obstructions, at the very beginning.

3156.

3156.

Anurūpe vasantena, vihāre dosavajjite;

Dwelling in a suitable monastery, free from faults; having developed the initial jhānas completely.

3157.

3157.

Tato vuṭṭhāya sappañño, jhānamhā paṭhamādito;

Then, having arisen from jhāna, from the very first, with wisdom; having defined name and form, having dispelled doubt.

3158.

3158.

Upaklese amaggoti, dasobhāsādayo pana;

The corruptions are not the path, but the ten signs, etc.; the path is insight knowledge, thus the wise one knows.

3159.

3159.

Tiṇṇaṃ tesaṃ vavatthāne, kate ettāvatā pana;

When the defining of these three is done, by this much; the defining of the three truths is done.

3160.

3160.

Udayabbayabhaṅgā ca, bhayādīnavanibbidā;

Arising and passing away, dissolution, fear, drawbacks, disenchantment; the knowledge of the desire to be free, reflective contemplation.

3161.

3161.

Saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇañca, navamaṃ saccānulomikaṃ;

Equanimity towards formations, the ninth is in accordance with the truths; this is declared as "knowledge and vision of the path".

3162.

3162.

Tato gotrabhucittassa, samanantarameva ca;

Then, immediately after the gotrabhu mind; having made peace the object, knowledge and vision arise.

3163.

3163.

‘‘Ñāṇadassanasuddhī’’ti, idaṃ ñāṇaṃ pakāsitaṃ;

This knowledge is declared as "purity of knowledge and vision"; the fruition arises following it, up to reviewing.

3164.

3164.

Teneva ca upāyena, bhāvento so punappunaṃ;

By that same method, developing it again and again; the monk attains the remaining paths and fruits.

3165.

3165.

Iccevamaccantamavecca dhammaṃ;

Thus, having understood the Dhamma completely; having destroyed all unwholesome qualities; having dried up the three existences; he attains peace without remainder of conditions.

3166.

3166.

Viññāsakkamato vāpi, pubbāparavasena vā;

From the fault of cognition, or by way of prior and posterior; or if in the arrangement of syllables, something seems inappropriate.

3167.

3167.

Taṃ tathā na gahetabbaṃ, gahetabbamadosato;

That should not be taken as such, due to the fault of taking it; because it has been done by me after examining it completely.

3168.

3168.

Seṭṭhassa coḷaraṭṭhassa, nābhibhūte nirākule;

In the village of the best Coḷa country, unoppressed and undisturbed; like a collection of all the worlds.

3169.

3169.

Kadalīsālatālucchu-nāḷikeravanākule;

Crowded with banana, sal, palm, and coconut groves; adorned with ponds covered with lotuses and water lilies.

3170.

3170.

Kāverijalasampāta-paribhūtamahītale;

On the ground pervaded by the confluence of the Kāverī water; prosperous, complete in all aspects, auspicious and truly auspicious.

3171.

3171.

Pavarākārapākāra-parikhāparivārite;

In the monastery of Veṇhudāsa, surrounded by excellent walls and moats; lovely and pleasing.

3172.

3172.

Tīrantaruhavātira-tarurājavirājite;

Adorned with rows of trees on the shore, and a king of trees; a grove of various birds, pleasing in various ways.

3173.

3173.

Cārupaṅkajasaṃkiṇṇa-taḷākasamalaṅkate;

Decorated with ponds crowded with beautiful lotuses; adorned with excellent wells filled with delicious water.

3174.

3174.

Vicitravipulaccugga-varamaṇḍapamaṇḍite;

Adorned with various and extensive excellent pavilions;
Thoroughly graced with many dwellings.

3175.

3175.

Uppatena ca thūpena, bhetvāva dharaṇītalaṃ;

And with a stupa rising up, as if splitting the earth;
Appearing to conquer, mocking the rugged peak of Mount Kailasa.

3176.

3176.

Saradambudasaṅkāse, dassanīye samussite;

While dwelling in the beautiful palace, resembling an autumn cloud, lofty,
Delightful, and generating serenity.

3177.

3177.

Vuttassa buddhasīhena, vinayassa vinicchayo;

The judgment of the Vinaya, spoken by the Buddha-lion,
Directed towards the Buddha-lion, my saddhivihārika.

3178.

3178.

Katoyaṃ pana bhikkhūnaṃ, hitatthāya samāsato;

This was done for the benefit of the monks, in brief,
For the understanding of the Vinaya, easily and quickly.

3179.

3179.

Accutaccutavikkante, kalambakulanandane;

While he was righteously ruling the earth, the delight of the Kalamba clan,
It was begun and completed.

3180.

3180.

Yathā siddhimayaṃ patto, antarāyaṃ vinā tathā;

Just as the desired success was attained, without hindrance,
May all aspirations of beings, connected with the Dhamma, be fulfilled.

3181.

3181.

Yāva tiṭṭhati lokasmiṃ, mandāro cārukandaro;

As long as the beautiful Mandara mountain exists in the world,
So long may the dispensation of the Buddha, the destroyer of defilements, endure.

3182.

3182.

Kāle sammā pavassantu, vassaṃ vassavalāhakā;

May the rain clouds rain properly in season;
May the rulers protect the entire earth righteously.

3183.

3183.

Imaṃ sārabhūtaṃ hitaṃ atthayuttaṃ;

By the merit I have gained by making this essence, beneficial, connected with meaning,
May this world attain the city of Shiva, free from sorrow, proclaimed by the King of Sages.

Iti vinayavinicchaye kammaṭṭhānabhāvanāvidhānakathā

Thus ends the Kammaṭṭhānabhāvanāvidhānakathā in the Vinayavinicchaya

Samattā.

Completed.

buddhadattenaracitoyaṃ vinayavinicchayo.

This Vinayavinicchaya was composed by Buddhdatta.

Vinayavinicchayo samatto.

The Vinayavinicchaya is completed.

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Homage to the Blessed One, the Arahant, the Perfectly Enlightened One

Uttaravinicchayo

Uttaravinicchaya

Ganthārambhakathā
Introduction to the Text

1.

1.

Sabbasattuttamaṃ dhīraṃ, vanditvā sirasā jinaṃ;

Having bowed with my head to the all-supreme, wise Jina;
And to the Dhamma, the destroyer of what is not Dhamma, and to the Sangha, the destroyer of the mass of defilements.

2.

2.

Yo mayā racito sāro, vinayassa vinicchayo;

The essence of the Vinaya, the Vinicchaya, which was composed by me,
Now I will do the Uttara, the all-supreme supplement to it.

3.

3.

Bhaṇato paṭhato payuñjato;

As I speak, recite, and apply,
And as you listen, consider, and thoroughly understand,
The supreme, the increaser of wisdom for those who are not Buddhas,
Listen attentively to me as I speak.

Mahāvibhaṅgasaṅgahakathā

Mahāvibhaṅgasaṅgahakathā

4.

4.

Methunaṃ paṭisevanto, kati āpattiyo phuse;

How many āpattis does one incur, when engaging in sexual intercourse?
When engaging in sexual intercourse, one incurs three āpattis.

5.

5.

Bhave pārājikaṃ khette, yebhuyyakkhāyite pana;

If it occurs in a field, it is a pārājika according to the majority's account;
A thullaccaya in the mouth, a rounded action, and a dukkaṭa if it's just spoken.

6.

6.

Adinnaṃ ādiyanto yo;

He who takes what is not given;
How many āpattis does he incur?
He who takes what is not given;
Incurs three āpattis.

7.

7.

Pañcamāsagghane vāpi, adhike vā parājayo;

If the value is five māsakas or more, it is a parājika;
If it's less than a māsa, it's a dukkaṭa, in between it is a thullaccaya.

8.

8.

Manussajātiṃ mārento;

He who kills a human being;
How many āpattis does he incur?
He who kills a human being;
Incurs three āpattis.

9.

9.

Manussamuddissopātaṃ, khaṇane dukkaṭaṃ siyā;

If aiming at a human being, digging (a pit) would be a dukkaṭa;
If suffering arises, a thullaccaya, if death occurs, it is a pārājika.

10.

10.

Asantaṃ uttariṃ dhammaṃ, vadamattūpanāyikaṃ;

What āpattis are incurred by one who claims to possess an undeclared superior human state?
He incurs three āpattis.

11.

11.

Asantaṃ uttariṃ dhammaṃ, bhaṇantassa parājayo;

For one who speaks of an undeclared superior human state, it's a parājika;
A thullaccaya if implied, if known; if not, it's a dukkaṭa.

Pārājikakathā.

Pārājikakathā.

12.

12.

Bhaṇa sukkaṃ vimocento;

Tell me, one who emits semen;
How many āpattis does he incur?
Listen, one who emits semen;
Incurs three āpattis.

13.

13.

Garukaṃ yadi ceteti, upakkamati muccati;

If he intends something serious, and makes an effort, and it is released;
A thullaccaya is stated for two parts, a dukkaṭa for the attempt.

14.

14.

Ito paṭṭhāya muñcitvā, pañhāpucchanamattakaṃ;

From here on, having released (the text), only questions are asked;
The meaning is determined solely by way of answering.

15.

15.

Itthiyā kāyasaṃsagge, tisso āpattiyo phuse;

In bodily contact with a woman, one incurs three āpattis;
Touching a body with a body is a serious matter.

16.

16.

Kāyena kāyabaddhaṃ tu, phusaṃ thullaccayaṃ phuse;

Touching body to body, one incurs a thullaccaya;
With a clinging body, to a clinging body, it is a dukkaṭa.

17.

17.

Itthiṃ duṭṭhullavācāhi, tisso obhāsato siyuṃ;

Insulting a woman with coarse words, three arise;
Speaking of the good and bad of the two paths, one incurs a serious offense.

18.

18.

Vaṇṇādibhaññe ādissa, ubbhajāṇumadhakkhakaṃ;

Mentioning the good, etc., aiming at the knee joint and below;
It is a thullaccaya, a dukkaṭa if related to the body.

19.

19.

Attakāmacariyāya, vadato vaṇṇamitthiyā;

Speaking of the virtues of a woman for the sake of self-gratification;
It is a serious offense in her presence, if she knows it.

20.

20.

Santike paṇḍakassāpi, tassa thullaccayaṃ siyā;

It is a thullaccaya even in the presence of a paṇḍaka;
It is considered a dukkaṭa in the presence of an animal.

21.

21.

Paṭiggaṇhanavīmaṃsā, paccāharaṇakattike;

The wise one should indicate that solicitation, deliberation,
rejection, and engagement in matchmaking are serious offenses.

22.

22.

Tassa dvaṅgasamāyoge, hoti thullaccayaṃ tathā;

In the union of its two parts, there is a thullaccaya;
If only one part is present, the offense is a dukkaṭa.

23.

23.

Saṃyācikāya ca kuṭiṃ;

If a bhikkhu causes to be built a hut with entreaty;
And a large monastery;
He incurs three āpattis.

24.

24.

Payoge dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ, ekapiṇḍe anāgate;

A dukkaṭa is stated in the effort, for a single, unassigned allocation;
A thullaccaya occurs when the allocation arrives, a serious offense when it's appropriated.

25.

25.

Pārājikena dhammena, bhikkhuṃ amūlakenidha;

He who falsely accuses a bhikkhu of a pārājika offense;
He incurs three āpattis.

26.

26.

Okāsaṃ na ca kāretvā, hutvā cāvanacetano;

Not giving an opportunity (to defend himself), and being intent on degradation;
If he accuses him, it's a dukkaṭa together with a saṅghādisesa.

27.

27.

Okāsaṃ pana kāretvā, hutvā akkosacetano;

But having given an opportunity, and being intent on insult;
If he accuses with offensive words, he reveals a pācittiya.

28.

28.

Anantarasamānova, navame aññabhāgiye;

Without any difference, in the ninth, following immediately, in the other part;
All the distinctions of āpatti are indeed (the same), there is no particular difference.

29.

29.

Saṅghassa bhedako bhikkhu, yāvatatiyakaṃ pana;

A bhikkhu who causes dissension in the Sangha, until the third (instance),
Only through admonition, not relinquishing his grasp.

30.

30.

Ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, dvīhi, kammavācāhi thullataṃ;

A dukkaṭa with the proposal, a thullata with the two acts of declaration;
At the end of the act of declaration, a serious āpatti occurs.

31.

31.

Bhedānuvattake ceva, dubbace kuladūsake;

For one who follows the dissension, one who is difficult to advise, one who corrupts families;
The determination of the āpatti is equivalent to that of one who causes dissension in the Sangha.

Saṅghādisesakathā.

Saṅghādisesakathā.

32.

32.

Atikkamanto atirekacīvaraṃ;

Transgressing the extra robe,
For ten days, he incurs only one offense;
A nissaggiyapācittiya for spending one night,
Without even the three robes.

33.

33.

Māsaṃ atikkamanto hi, gahetvā kālacīvaraṃ;

Transgressing a month, having taken a robe at the permitted time,
He incurs one āpatti, a nissaggiya is declared.

34.

34.

Aññātikāya yaṃ kiñci;

Whatever old robe
Belongs to a non-relative;
If he has it washed,
Two āpattis arise for him.

35.

35.

Dhovāpeti payogasmiṃ, dukkaṭaṃ samudāhaṭaṃ;

A dukkaṭa is stated in the effort of having it washed;
A nissaggiya pācittiya arises when it has been washed.

36.

36.

Aññātikāya hatthamhā, cīvaraṃ paṭigaṇhato;

Receiving a robe from the hand of a non-relative;
A dukkaṭa is stated in the act of receiving, a pācitti arises when it has been received.

37.

37.

Aññātakaṃ gahapatiṃ, gahapatānimeva vā;

Asking a non-related householder or householder's wife for a robe, a bhikkhu incurs two āpattis.

38.

38.

Viññāpeti payogasmiṃ, dukkaṭaṃ parikittitaṃ;

A dukkaṭa is mentioned in the effort of asking;
When it has been requested, a nissaggiya pācitti is proclaimed.

39.

39.

Bhikkhu cīvaramaññātiṃ, viññāpento taduttariṃ;

A bhikkhu asking a non-relative for a robe in excess of that;
A dukkaṭa in the effort, a nissaggiya is incurred when it has been requested.

40.

40.

Aññātakaṃ kañci upāsakaṃ vā;

Having approached any non-related lay man,
Or lay woman,
And previously not having been invited,
If he engages in a stipulation regarding cloth.

41.

41.

Duve āpajjatāpattī, payoge dukkaṭaṃ siyā;

He incurs two āpattis, a dukkaṭa arises in the effort;
When he engages in the stipulation, a nissaggiya is declared.

42.

42.

Aññātiṃ upasaṅkamma, pubbeyevappavārito;

Approaching a non-relative, previously not having been invited;
A bhikkhu incurring a stipulation regarding a robe, he incurs two.

43.

43.

Tathātirekatikkhattuṃ, codanāya ca bhikkhu ce;

In that way, more than three times, for the sake of urging, and if a bhikkhu;
Having gone more than six times, and also for the sake of the location, regarding a robe.

44.

44.

Nipphādeti sace tassa, honti āpattiyo duve;

If he brings it about, he incurs two āpattis;
A dukkaṭa in the effort, a nissaggiya arises in the gaining.

Kathinavaggo paṭhamo.

Kathinavaggo paṭhamo.

45.

45.

Dosā kosiyavaggassa, dvedveādīsu pañcasu;

The faults of the Kosiyavagga, two each in the first five;
A dukkaṭa is stated in the effort, a nissaggiya arises in the gaining.

46.

46.

Gahetveḷakalomāni, tiyojanamatikkamaṃ;

Having taken sheep's wool, transgressing three yojanas;
A dukkaṭa in the first step, a nissaggiya is incurred in the second.

47.

47.

Bhikkhu bhikkhuniyaññāya, dhovāpeteḷalomakaṃ;

A bhikkhu having sheep's wool washed by a nun;
A dukkaṭa in the effort, a nissaggiya arises when it has been washed.

48.

48.

Rūpiyaṃ paṭigaṇhanto, dve panāpattiyo phuse;

Receiving money, he incurs two āpattis;
A dukkaṭa is stated in the effort, a nissaggiya arises when it has been received.

49.

49.

Nānākāraṃ samāpajjaṃ, saṃvohārañca rūpiye;

Engaging in various forms of trade, and exchange with money;
A nissaggiya arises when engaged in, a dukkaṭa is incurred in the effort.

50.

50.

Nānappakārakaṃ bhikkhu, āpajje kayavikkayaṃ;

A bhikkhu engaging in various kinds of buying and selling;
A dukkaṭa in the effort, a nissaggiya arises when it has been done.

Kosiyavaggo dutiyo.

Kosiyavaggo dutiyo.

51.

51.

Pattaṃ atikkamentassa, dasāhamatirekakaṃ;

For a bhikkhu transgressing the bowl,
More than ten days,
Only one nissaggiya āpatti arises for him.

52.

52.

Apañcabandhane patte, vijjamānepi bhikkhuno;

Even when a bowl with five bindings is available to a bhikkhu,
If he causes to be acquired another new bowl.

53.

53.

Dve panāpattiyo bhikkhu, āpajjati, na saṃsayo;

A bhikkhu incurs two āpattis, without doubt;
A dukkaṭa in the effort, a nissaggiya arises in the gaining.

54.

54.

Paṭiggahetvā bhesajjaṃ, sattāhaṃ yo atikkame;

Having received medicine, whoever transgresses seven days;
He incurs one nissaggiya āpatti.

55.

55.

Akāle pariyesanto, vassasāṭikacīvaraṃ;

Seeking a rains-bathing cloth out of season;
A dukkaṭa in the effort, a nissaggiya arises in the gaining.

56.

56.

Bhikkhuno cīvaraṃ datvā, acchindanto duve phuse;

Giving a robe to a bhikkhu and then taking it back, he incurs two;
A dukkaṭa is stated in the effort, a nissaggiya arises when it has been taken.

57.

57.

Viññāpetvā sayaṃ suttaṃ, tantavāyehi cīvaraṃ;

Having asked for thread himself, having weavers weave a robe;
If a bhikkhu has it woven, he incurs two āpattis.

58.

58.

Yo panaññātakasseva, tantavāye samecca ce;

If a bhikkhu, having agreed with a non-relative weaver,
Engages in a stipulation regarding a robe, without having been invited.

59.

59.

Dve panāpattiyo so hi, āpajjati, na saṃsayo;

He incurs two āpattis, without doubt;
A dukkaṭa in the effort, a nissaggiya arises in the gaining.

60.

60.

Paṭiggahetvā acceka-saññitaṃ pana cīvaraṃ;

Having received a robe that has been designated as urgent;
Transgressing the time for it, he incurs one nissaggiya.

61.

61.

Tiṇṇamaññataraṃ vatthaṃ, nidahitvā gharedhikaṃ;

If one lays down one of three cloths, leaving it exceeding six nights, while dwelling without that, he incurs an offense requiring forfeiture.

62.

62.

Jānaṃ pariṇataṃ lābhaṃ, saṅghikaṃ attano pana;

If a bhikkhu knowingly directs a gain that has been transformed, belonging to the Sangha, to himself, he incurs two offenses.

63.

63.

Payoge dukkaṭaṃ hoti, nissaggi pariṇāmite;

There is a dukkata in the attempt; when transformed, it is nissaggiya. Everywhere, I have made an omission of non-imputation.

Pattavaggo tatiyo.

Third Chapter: The Bowl.

Tiṃsanissaggiyakathā.

The Thirty Nissaggiya Stories.

64.

64.

Vadantassa musāvādaṃ, pañca āpattiyo siyuṃ;

For one speaking a lie, there are five offenses; but regarding an untruth about a superhuman quality, there is defeat (pārājika).

65.

65.

Codanāya garuṃ bhikkhuṃ, amūlantimavatthunā;

If, with baseless matter, one accuses a bhikkhu worthy of respect, when the implied meaning is understood, a thullaccaya is declared.

66.

66.

No ce paṭivijānāti, dukkaṭaṃ samudāhaṭaṃ;

If one does not acknowledge it, a dukkata is stated; in a deliberate lie, a pācittiya is clearly shown.

67.

67.

Āpattiyo duve vuttā, bhikkhussomasato pana;

Two offenses are stated, for a bhikkhu who is of unsound mind; a pācittiya for the fully ordained, a dukkata for the other.

68.

68.

Pesuññaharaṇe dvepi, honti, pācittiyaṃ pana;

In tale-bearing, there are both; but a pācittiya in the tale-bearing of a fully ordained one, in the rest, the offense is a dukkata.

69.

69.

Padasonupasampannaṃ, dhammaṃ vāceti ce duve;

If one recites the Dhamma in detail to one not fully ordained, there are two; in the attempt, a dukkata; with each foot, there is a pācittiya.

70.

70.

Tirattānupasampanna-sahaseyyāya uttariṃ;

For lying down for more than three nights in the same lodging with one not fully ordained, in the attempt, a dukkata is stated; having lain down, there is a pācittiya.

71.

71.

Kappeti mātugāmena, sahaseyyaṃ sace pana;

If one arranges to lie down in the same lodging with a woman, he incurs two offenses, beginning with a dukkata for the night.

72.

72.

Uddhaṃ chappañcavācāhi, dhammaṃ deseti itthiyā;

If one teaches the Dhamma to a woman with more than five or six sentences, in the attempt, a dukkata; with each foot, there is a pācittiya.

73.

73.

Bhūtaṃ anupasampanne, manussuttaridhammakaṃ;

If one declares a real superhuman quality to one not fully ordained, there are two offenses, beginning with a dukkata.

74.

74.

Vadaṃ anupasampanne, duṭṭhullāpattimaññato;

When one declares a bad offense to one not fully ordained, in the attempt, there is a dukkata; in declaring it, there is a pācittiya.

75.

75.

Pathaviṃ khaṇato tassa, payoge dukkaṭaṃ mataṃ;

For one digging the earth, the attempt is considered a dukkata; and with each striking blow, a pācittiya is incurred.

Musāvādavaggo paṭhamo.

First Chapter: Lying.

76.

76.

Bhūtagāmaṃ tu pātento, dve panāpattiyo phuse;

But for one destroying a living plant, he incurs two offenses; in the attempt, there is a dukkata; in destroying it, a pācittiya is shown.

77.

77.

Aññenaññaṃ vadantassa, dve siyuṃ aññavādake;

For one speaking disparagingly of another, there are two offenses in speaking disparagingly; in making the accusation, there is a dukkata; in declaring the accusation, there is a pācittiya.

78.

78.

Ujjhāpento paraṃ bhikkhuṃ, dve panāpattiyo phuse;

For one causing another bhikkhu to be displeased, he incurs two offenses; in the attempt, there is a dukkata; in causing displeasure, there is a pācittiya.

79.

79.

Ajjhokāse tu mañcādiṃ, santharitvāna saṅghikaṃ;

Having spread out a bed or chair in the open air belonging to the Sangha, when leaving without permission, one incurs two kinds of offenses.

80.

80.

Leḍḍupāte atikkante, pādena paṭhamena tu;

When exceeding the throwing distance, with the first foot, there is a dukkata; with the second, a pācittiya is shown.

81.

81.

Vihāre saṅghike seyyaṃ, santharitvā anuddharaṃ;

Having spread out a bed in a monastery belonging to the Sangha, when leaving without removing it and without permission, one incurs two kinds of offenses.

82.

82.

Parikkhepe atikkante, pādena paṭhamena tu;

When exceeding the enclosure, with the first foot, a dukkata is declared; with the second, a pācittiya.

83.

83.

Vihāre saṅghike jānaṃ, pubbūpagatabhikkhukaṃ;

Knowing a bhikkhu has previously arrived at a monastery belonging to the Sangha, for one making a bed, in the attempt, there are offenses beginning with a dukkata.

84.

84.

Saṅghikā kupito bhikkhuṃ, nikkaḍḍhati vihārato;

A bhikkhu, being angry, drags another bhikkhu out of a monastery belonging to the Sangha; in the attempt, a dukkata is stated; for the completion of dragging out, there is a pācittiya.

85.

85.

Vihāre saṅghike bhikkhu, vehāsakuṭiyūpari;

In a monastery belonging to the Sangha, a bhikkhu, on the upper story of a dwelling, sitting on a bed with attached legs, incurs two offenses beginning with a dukkata.

86.

86.

Adhiṭṭhitvā dvattipariyāye, uttarimpi adhiṭṭhato;

Having designated a dwelling and then designating again two or three times, in the attempt, there is a dukkata; in the designation, there is a pācittiya.

87.

87.

Jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ toyaṃ, tiṇaṃ vā siñcato pana;

Knowingly watering grass or using water with living beings in it, in the attempt, there is a dukkata; in the watering, there is a pācittiya.

Bhūtagāmavaggo dutiyo.

Second Chapter: Living Plants.

88.

88.

Phuse bhikkhuniyo bhikkhu, ovadanto asammato;

A bhikkhu, not appointed, instructing bhikkhunis, in the attempt, there is a dukkata; in instructing, there is a pācittiya.

89.

89.

Dutiye tatiye ceva, catutthepi ca sabbaso;

In the second, third, and also in the fourth section, the distinctions of offenses are entirely similar to the first.

90.

90.

Cīvaraṃ bhikkhu aññāti-kāya dento duve phuse;

A bhikkhu giving a robe to an unrelated person incurs two offenses; in the attempt, a dukkata is stated; in giving, there is a pācittiya.

91.

91.

Aññātikabhikkhuniyā, bhikkhu sibbeyya cīvaraṃ;

If a bhikkhu sews a robe for an unrelated bhikkhuni, in the attempt, there is a dukkata; in sewing, there is a pācittiya.

92.

92.

Addhānaññatra samayā, bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā saha;

Apart from a journey for a special reason, a bhikkhu traveling together with a bhikkhuni by agreement incurs two offenses beginning with a dukkata.

93.

93.

Nāvekaṃ abhirūhanto, bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā saha;

A bhikkhu embarking on the same boat with a bhikkhuni by agreement incurs two offenses in the attempt, beginning with a dukkata.

94.

94.

Jānaṃ bhikkhuniyā piṇḍa-pātaṃ tu paripācitaṃ;

Knowingly eating food prepared by a bhikkhuni, there is no doubt that one incurs two kinds of offenses.

95.

95.

‘‘Bhuñjissāmī’’ti ce bhattaṃ, paṭiggaṇhāti dukkaṭaṃ;

If he receives food thinking, "I will eat," there is a dukkata; in the acts of swallowing, a pācittiya is shown.

96.

96.

Bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ, nisajjaṃ tu raho pana;

If a bhikkhu arranges to sit in a secret place with a bhikkhuni, he incurs two offenses in the attempt, beginning with a dukkata.

Ovādavaggo tatiyo.

Third Chapter: Instruction.

97.

97.

Taduttariṃ āvasatha-piṇḍaṃ tu paribhuñjato;

For eating alms-food beyond that, the procedure is the same as the ninth rule of the preceding chapter.

98.

98.

Dutiye tatiye cāpi, viseso natthi kocipi;

In the second and third section, there is no distinction whatsoever; the distinctions of offenses are the same as the preceding one.

99.

99.

Dvattipatte gahetvāna, gaṇhato hi taduttariṃ;

Having taken two or three bowls, when taking more than that, in the attempt, a dukkata is stated; in taking, there is a pācittiya.

100.

100.

Pañcame paṭhameneva, samo āpattinicchayo;

In the fifth rule, the determination of offenses is the same as in the first; in the sixth, it is permitted if one has not eaten sufficiently.

101.

101.

Abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavārento, dve panāpattiyo phuse;

For one inviting to bring more, he incurs two offenses; by the words "I will eat," he takes it.

102.

102.

Gahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ tassa, piṭake samudāhaṭaṃ;

In the taking, there is a dukkata for him; in the finishing of the food, a pācittiya is incurred.

103.

103.

Sattame aṭṭhame ceva, navame dasamepi ca;

In the seventh, eighth, ninth, and tenth, the distinctions of offenses are the same as in the first.

Bhojanavaggo catuttho.

Fourth Chapter: Food.

104.

104.

Acelakādino dento, sahatthā bhojanādikaṃ;

For giving food or the like with one's own hand to an ascetic or the like, one attains a dukkata in the attempt; in giving, he incurs a pācittiya.

105.

105.

Dāpetvā vā adāpetvā, uyyojento duve phuse;

Having caused to leave or not caused to leave, for one driving away, he incurs two offenses; in the attempt, there is a dukkata; in driving away, there is a pācittiya.

106.

106.

Nisajjaṃ bhikkhu kappento, kule pana sabhojane;

If a bhikkhu arranges to sit in a family where there is food, he incurs two offenses in the attempt, beginning with a dukkata.

107.

107.

Catutthe pañcame vāpi, viseso natthi kocipi;

In the fourth and fifth sections, there is no distinction whatsoever; the calculation of offenses is the same as in the third.

108.

108.

Santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchā, sabhatto ca nimantito;

Without asking a bhikkhu who is present, if one is invited for alms in families, one incurs two offenses while behaving improperly.

109.

109.

Paṭhamena ca pādena, ummārātikkame pana;

With the first foot, when crossing the threshold, a dukkata is stated in the Piṭaka; with the second, there is a pācittiya.

110.

110.

Taduttariṃ tu bhesajjaṃ, viññāpento duve phuse;

For requesting medicine beyond that, he incurs two offenses; in the attempt, there is a dukkata; in requesting, there is a pācittiya.

111.

111.

Uyyuttaṃ dassanatthāya, gacchanto dve phuse balaṃ;

For going to see an army drawn up, he incurs two offenses; in going, a dukkata is stated; in seeing, there is a pācittiya.

112.

112.

Atirekatirattaṃ tu, senāya vasato duve;

For dwelling in an army for more than three nights, there are two offenses; in the attempt, a dukkata is stated; in dwelling, there is a pācittiya.

113.

113.

Uyyodhikaṃ tu gacchanto, dve panāpattiyo phuse;

For going to a battle array, he incurs two offenses; in going, a dukkata is stated; in seeing, there is a pācittiya.

Acelakavaggo pañcamo.

Fifth Chapter: The Naked Ascetic.

114.

114.

Suraṃ vā pana mereyyaṃ, pivanto dve phuse muni;

For a sage drinking liquor or intoxicants, he incurs two offenses; in taking it, there is a dukkata; in drinking, there is a pācittiya.

115.

115.

Bhikkhaṅgulipatodena, hāsento dve phuse have;

For causing laughter by poking with a finger, he incurs two offenses; in the attempt, there is a dukkata; in laughing, there is a pācittiya.

116.

116.

Kīḷanto udake bhikkhu, dve panāpattiyo phuse;

If a bhikkhu plays in the water, he incurs two offenses; a dukkata below the ankle, a pācittiya above the ankle.

117.

117.

Yo panādariyaṃ bhikkhu, karonto dve phuse have;

For a bhikkhu doing what is improper, he incurs two offenses; in the attempt, a dukkata is stated; in doing, there is a pācittiya.

118.

118.

Bhiṃsāpento have bhikkhu, dve panāpattiyo phuse;

If a bhikkhu intimidates, he incurs two offenses; in the attempt, there is a dukkata; in intimidating, there is a pācittiya.

119.

119.

Jotiṃ samādahitvāna, visibbento duve phuse;

Having kindled a fire, for one extinguishing it, he incurs two offenses; in the attempt, a dukkata is stated; in extinguishing, there is a pācittiya.

120.

120.

Oraso addhamāsassa, nhāyanto dve phuse have;

For bathing more often than once every half-month, he incurs two offenses; in the attempt, there is a dukkata; in the completion of bathing, there is the other.

121.

121.

Dubbaṇṇakaraṇānaṃ tu, tiṇṇamekamanādiya;

Without taking one of three cloths for the purpose of discolouring, for one using a robe, he incurs two offenses beginning with a dukkata.

122.

122.

Cīvaraṃ bhikkhuādīnaṃ, vikappetvā anuddharaṃ;

For using a robe after having disjoined it from a bhikkhu without retrieving it, he incurs two offenses in the attempt, beginning with a dukkata.

123.

123.

Bhikkhussāpanidhento dve, phuse pattādikaṃ pana;

For one bhikkhu hiding another’s bowl or the like, he incurs two offenses; in the attempt, there is a dukkata; in hiding, there is a pācittiya.

Surāpānavaggo chaṭṭho.

Sixth Chapter: Drinking Intoxicants.

124.

124.

Sañcicca jīvitā pāṇaṃ, voropento tapodhano;

Intentionally depriving a living being of life, a contemplative incurs four offenses, without doubt.

125.

125.

Anodissakamopātaṃ, khaṇato hoti dukkaṭaṃ;

For digging a pit without a specific purpose, there is a dukkata; if a human dies by falling into it, there is defeat (pārājika).

126.

126.

Yakkho vāpi tiracchāna-gato manussaviggaho;

If a yaksha or a human-shaped being in the animal realm falls into it and dies, there is a thullaccaya for that.

127.

127.

Tiracchānagate tasmiṃ, nipatitvā mate pana;

If an animal falls into it and dies, for that, an offense of pācittiya is prescribed by the wise Buddha.

128.

128.

Jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ toyaṃ, paribhuñjaṃ duve phuse;

Knowingly using water with living beings in it, he incurs two offenses; in the attempt, there is a dukkata; in using, there is a pācittiya.

129.

129.

Nihatādhikaraṇaṃ jānaṃ, ukkoṭento duve phuse;

Knowingly urging on a case that has been dismissed, he incurs two offenses; in the attempt, a dukkata is stated; in urging, there is a pācittiya.

130.

130.

Jānaṃ bhikkhussa duṭṭhullaṃ, chādento pana vajjakaṃ;

Knowingly concealing a bhikkhu’s grave offense, he incurs one offense, it is declared to be a pācittiya.

131.

131.

Ūnavīsativassaṃ tu, karonto upasampadaṃ;

For conferring full ordination on one less than twenty years old, he attains a dukkata in the attempt; in the completion of the ordination, there is a pācittiya.

132.

132.

Jānaṃ tu theyyasatthena, saṃvidhāya saheva ca;

Knowingly traveling on a road with thieves by agreement, and likewise with a woman,

133.

133.

Dve panāpattiyo honti, payoge dukkaṭaṃ mataṃ;

There are two offenses; a dukkata is considered in the attempt; in traveling, a pācittiya is declared immediately.

134.

134.

Accajaṃ pāpikaṃ diṭṭhiṃ, ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ phuse;

Embracing wrong view, an evil thing, she incurs a dukkata by the motion of informing; at the conclusion of the kammavācā, the bhikkhuni incurs a pācittiya.

135.

135.

Tathākaṭānudhammena, saṃbhuñjanto duve phuse;

Partaking of things acquired in accordance with such rules, she incurs two offenses; a dukkata for the effort, and a pācittiya when it is eaten.

136.

136.

Nāsitaṃ samaṇuddesaṃpalāpento duve phuse;

When causing a novice to be lost, she incurs two offenses; a dukkata is incurred for the effort, and a pācittiya when it is lost.

Sappāṇakavaggo sattamo.

The Seventh Chapter on Living Beings.

137.

137.

Vuccamānassa bhikkhussa, bhikkhūhi sahadhammikaṃ;

To a bhikkhuni being spoken to by bhikkhus about the Dhamma, if she says, "I am not able," the beginning is a dukkata.

138.

138.

Vinayaṃ tu vivaṇṇento, dve panāpattiyo phuse;

When disparaging the Vinaya, she incurs two offenses; a dukkata for the effort, and a pācittiya when it is disparaged.

139.

139.

Mohento dve phuse, mohe, dukkaṭaṃ tu aropite;

When bewildering, she incurs two offenses; a dukkata when the bewilderment is initiated, and when the delusion is established, a pācittiya is incurred.

140.

140.

Pahāraṃ kupito dento, bhikkhussa dve phuse have;

Angrily striking a bhikkhu, she incurs two offenses; a dukkata is incurred for the effort, and a pācittiya when he is struck.

141.

141.

Bhikkhussa kupito bhikkhu, uggiraṃ talasattikaṃ;

If a bhikkhu, angered, throws a talasattika at a bhikkhu; he incurs two offenses; a dukkata for the effort, and a pācittiya when it is thrown.

142.

142.

Bhikkhu saṅghādisesena, amūleneva codayaṃ;

When a bhikkhu accuses another bhikkhu of a saṅghādisesa offense without grounds; he incurs two offenses; a dukkata for the effort, and a pācittiya when he accuses.

143.

143.

Bhikkhu sañcicca kukkuccaṃ, janayanto hi bhikkhuno;

When a bhikkhu intentionally causes remorse in another bhikkhu; he incurs two offenses; a dukkata for the effort, and a pācittiya when it arises.

144.

144.

Tiṭṭhantupassutiṃ bhikkhu, dve panāpattiyo phuse;

A bhikkhu standing listening to secrets incurs two offenses; a dukkata for going to listen, and a pācittiya when listening.

145.

145.

Dhammikānaṃ tu kammānaṃ, chandaṃ datvā tato puna;

Having given consent to lawful acts, if one later falls into a state of recalcitrance, the beginning is a dukkata.

146.

146.

Saṅghe vinicchaye niṭṭhaṃ, agate chandamattano;

When, in a decision of the Sangha, a matter has come to a conclusion, if one departs without giving one's consent, two offenses are incurred.

147.

147.

Hatthapāsaṃ tu saṅghassa, jahato hoti dukkaṭaṃ;

Abandoning the handspan of the Sangha incurs a dukkata; in abandoning the handspan, the bhikkhu incurs a pācittiya.

148.

148.

Samaggena ca saṅghena, datvāna saha cīvaraṃ;

Having together given a robe to the Sangha with concord, if later one becomes recalcitrant, the beginning is a dukkata.

149.

149.

Lābhaṃ pariṇataṃ jānaṃ, saṅghikaṃ puggalassa hi;

Knowing a gain has accrued to the Sangha, if one diverts it to an individual, the beginning is a dukkata.

Sahadhammikavaggo aṭṭhamo.

The Eighth Chapter on Lawful Matters.

150.

150.

Pubbe avidito hutvā, rañño antepuraṃ pana;

Having not been known before, upon entering the king's inner chambers, a bhikkhu incurs two offenses.

151.

151.

Paṭhamena ca pādena, ummārātikkame pana;

With the first foot, upon transgressing the threshold, a dukkata is incurred, a pācittiya with the second.

152.

152.

Ratanaṃ pana gaṇhanto, dve panāpattiyo phuse;

When taking hold of a jewel, she incurs two offenses; a dukkata for the effort, and a pācittiya when it is taken.

153.

153.

Santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchā, vikāle gāmakaṃ pana;

Without asking leave of a bhikkhu who is present, if a samaṇera enters a village at the wrong time, he incurs two offenses.

154.

154.

Paṭhamena ca pādena, parikkhepaṃ atikkame;

With the first foot, upon transgressing the boundary, a dukkata is incurred, a pācittiya with the second.

155.

155.

Aṭṭhidantavisāṇābhi-nibbattaṃ sūciyā gharaṃ;

When having a needle case made from bone, tooth, or horn, she incurs two offenses; the beginning is a dukkata.

156.

156.

Pamāṇātītamañcādiṃ, kārāpento duve phuse;

When having a couch etc., made exceeding the measure, she incurs two offenses; a dukkata is incurred for the effort, the remainder when it is made.

157.

157.

Tūlonaddhaṃ tu mañcādiṃ, kārāpento duve phuse;

When having a couch etc., stuffed with cotton, she incurs two offenses; a dukkata for the effort, the remainder when it is made.

158.

158.

Sattame aṭṭhame ceva, navame dasamepi ca;

In the seventh, eighth, ninth and tenth, the determination of the offenses is the same as in the preceding ones.

Ratanavaggo navamo.

The Ninth Chapter on Jewels.

Pācittiyakathā.

The Pācittiya Account.

159.

159.

Catūsu duvidhāpatti, pāṭidesaniyesupi;

In the four Pāṭidesanīya rules, a twofold offense is described without distinction by the Buddha, kinsman of the sun.

160.

160.

‘‘Bhuñjissāmī’’ti bhikkhussa, dukkaṭaṃ paṭigaṇhato;

For a bhikkhu "I will eat," in receiving incurs a dukkata; in all cases of appropriation, a Pāṭidesanīya offense is incurred.

Pāṭidesanīyakathā.

The Pāṭidesanīya Account.

161.

161.

Sekhiyesu ca dhammesu, ekāvāpatti dīpitā;

In the Sekhiya rules, a single offense is shown; through lack of respect, a dukkata is incurred.

Sekhiyakathā.

The Sekhiya Account.

162.

162.

Paññattā methunaṃ dhammaṃ, paṭisevanapaccayā;

In regard to the practice of the sexual act, how many offenses are incurred? Four indeed are incurred.

163.

163.

Methunaṃ paṭisevanto, allokāsappavesane;

In practicing the sexual act, without open space or cover, when dead or not declared, a bhikkhu incurs a pārājika offense.

164.

164.

Thullaccayaṃ tu yebhuyya-kkhāyite, dukkaṭaṃ tathā;

A thullaccaya offense is incurred by the one who mostly declares, and a dukkata too; a pācittiya is incurred if the mouth makes a circle, like a wax ball.

165.

165.

Paññattā kāyasaṃsaggaṃ, samāpajjanapaccayā;

In regard to the touching of the body, how many offenses are incurred? Five offenses are incurred.

166.

166.

Avassutassa posassa, tathā bhikkhuniyāpi ca;

For a man who is not leaking, and likewise for a bhikkhuni, in accepting the adhakkha etc. or consenting to its acceptance,

167.

167.

Kāyena phusato kāyaṃ, bhikkhussa garukaṃ siyā;

If a bhikkhu touches the body with his body, a garuka offense is incurred; if he touches a body bound to a body, a thullaccaya is incurred.

168.

168.

Paṭibaddhena kāyena, paṭibaddhaṃ tu dukkaṭaṃ;

If touching a bound body with a bound body, a dukkata is incurred; a pācittiya is incurred by the finger-prick.

169.

169.

Sesesu sekhiyantesu, āpattīnaṃ vinicchayo;

In the remaining Sekhiya rules, the determination of the offenses should be understood by an intelligent person in the way described below.

Mahāvibhaṅgasaṅgaho niṭṭhito.

The Mahāvibhaṅga Summary is Complete.

Bhikkhunīvibhaṅgo

Bhikkhunī Vibhaṅga

170.

170.

Bhikkhūnaṃ pāṭavatthāya, vinayassa vinicchaye;

For the sake of understanding the Vinaya for bhikkhus, in the determination of the Vinaya, I will speak a little of the Bhikkhunī Vibhaṅga.

171.

171.

Avassutassa posassa, bhikkhunīpi avassutā;

If a bhikkhuni, not leaking, rejoices in touching the body of a man who is not leaking, how many offenses does she incur?

172.

172.

Tisso āpattiyo ubbha-jāṇussādhakkhakassa ca;

Three offenses are incurred, for the ubbha-jāṇu, ussādhakkha, and for consenting to the acceptance of the adhakkha, she incurs a pārājika.

173.

173.

Ubbhakkhakaṃ adhojāṇu-gahaṇaṃ sādiyantiyā;

For consenting to the acceptance of the ubbhakkha and adhojāṇu, a thullaccaya offense is incurred, and a dukkata for body-bound.

174.

174.

Chādentī bhikkhunī vajjaṃ, tisso āpattiyo phuse;

When a bhikkhuni conceals an offense, she incurs three offenses; if knowing, she conceals a pārājika offense, she is defeated (pārājikā).

175.

175.

Thullaccayaṃ vematikā, paṭicchādeti ce pana;

A thullaccaya is incurred if she conceals while in doubt, and if she conceals an ācāravipatti, a dukkata is incurred.

176.

176.

Nissajjantī na taṃ laddhiṃ, ukkhittassānuvattikā;

Not giving up that opinion, following one who has been suspended, in the act of formal censure, she incurs three offenses.

177.

177.

Ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, dvīhi, kammavācāhi thullatā;

A dukkata for the ñatti, a thullaccaya for the two kammavācās; at the conclusion of the kammavācā, a pārājika is incurred.

178.

178.

Pūrentī aṭṭhamaṃ vatthuṃ, tisso āpattiyo phuse;

When fulfilling the eighth thing, she incurs three offenses; when it is said "Come here with a man," a dukkata is incurred when coming.

179.

179.

Thullaccayaṃ tu posassa, hatthapāsappavesane;

A thullaccaya is incurred when a man's handspan is entered, and if she fulfills the eighth thing, that samaṇī is defeated (parājitā).

Pārājikakathā.

The Pārājika Account.

180.

180.

Ussayavādikā aṭṭaṃ, karontī tividhaṃ phuse;

A bhikkhuni making accusations incurs three offenses; in announcing it to one person, she incurs a dukkata.

181.

181.

Dutiyārocane tassā, thullaccayamudīritaṃ;

In announcing it to a second person, a thullaccaya is incurred; at the end of the accusation, a saṅghādisesa is incurred.

182.

182.

Corivuṭṭhāpikā vāpi, ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ phuse;

Likewise, in the case of one who instigates thieves, a dukkata is incurred with the ñatti; a thullaccaya with the two kammavācās, a garu offense at the end of the act.

183.

183.

Ekā gāmantaraṃ gacche, gamane dukkaṭaṃ siyā;

If one goes to another village alone, a dukkata is incurred in the going; upon transgressing the boundary with the first foot,

184.

184.

Hoti thullaccayāpatti, tassā samaṇiyā pana;

A thullaccaya offense is incurred by that samaṇī; when it is transgressed with the second foot, it remains a garu offense.

185.

185.

Catutthe dutiye vutta-sadisova vinicchayo;

In the fourth and second cases, the determination is similar; in the division of offenses, there is no particular difference.

186.

186.

Avassutā sayaṃ hutvā, tādisasseva hatthato;

If a bhikkhuni who is not leaking herself, takes and eats anything whatever from the hand of one like that,

187.

187.

Phuse āpattiyo tisso, bhojanādīsu kiñcipi;

She incurs three offenses, and in receiving anything whatever such as food, a thullaccaya is incurred.

188.

188.

Ajjhohāresu sabbesu, hoti saṅghādisesatā;

In all cases of appropriation, a saṅghādisesa is incurred; in receiving water or a tooth-cleaner, a dukkata is incurred.

189.

189.

‘‘Sahatthena gahetvā tvaṃ, khāda vā bhuñja vā’’tipi;

If she urges "Having taken it with your hand, eat or consume it," she incurs three offenses.

190.

190.

Dukkaṭaṃ vacane tassā, ‘‘bhuñjissāmī’’ti gaṇhati;

A dukkata is incurred by the word, "I will eat," and in all cases of appropriation, a thullaccaya is incurred.

191.

191.

Bhojanassa panosāne, hoti saṅghādisesatā;

At the end of the meal, a saṅghādisesa is incurred; the three offenses of urging are shown in this way.

192.

192.

Sattame aṭṭhame cāpi, navame dasamepi ca;

In the seventh, eighth, ninth and tenth, the determination is the same as in the case of instigating thieves.

Saṅghādisesakathā.

The Saṅghādisesa Account.

193.

193.

Pattasannicayaṃ yiha, karontī bhikkhunī pana;

If a bhikkhuni makes a collection of bowls, she incurs only one nissaggiya pācittiya.

194.

194.

Akālacīvaraṃ kāla-cīvaraṃ bhājāpentiyā;

When giving away an untimely robe as a timely robe, a dukkata is incurred for the effort, and a nissaggiya offense when it is gained.

195.

195.

Cīvaraṃ parivattetvā, acchindati sace pana;

If, having exchanged a robe, she takes it away, a dukkata is incurred for the effort, and a nissaggiya offense when it is taken away.

196.

196.

Viññāpetvāva aññaṃ ce, viññāpeti tato paraṃ;

Having requested one thing, if she requests another after that, a dukkata is incurred for the effort, and a nissaggiya offense when it is requested.

197.

197.

Cetāpetvā hi aññaṃ ce, cetāpeti tato paraṃ;

Having caused one thing to be bought, if she causes another to be bought after that, a dukkata is incurred for the effort, and a nissaggiya offense when it is bought.

198.

198.

Evameva ca sesesu, chaṭṭhādīsu ca sattasu;

In this way, in the remaining six, from the sixth to the seventh, the determination of the offenses is the same as in the preceding ones.

Nissaggiyakathā.

The Nissaggiya Account.

199.

199.

Lasuṇaṃ khādati dve ce, dukkaṭaṃ gahaṇe siyā;

If she eats garlic, two offenses are incurred; a dukkata in taking it, and a pācittiya in the acts of appropriation.

200.

200.

Saṃharāpentiyā lomaṃ, sambādhe dveva honti hi;

When causing hair to be gathered, in a confined space, two offenses are incurred; a dukkata is incurred for the effort, and a pācittiya when it is gathered.

201.

201.

Karontī talaghātaṃ tu, dve panāpattiyo phuse;

When making a slapping sound, she incurs two offenses; a dukkata is incurred for the effort, and a pācittiya when it is made.

202.

202.

Jatunā maṭṭhakaṃ kiñci, sādiyantī duve phuse;

When consenting to something being patched with wax, she incurs two offenses; a dukkata for the effort, and a pācittiya when it is given.

203.

203.

Pañcamaṃ tu catutthena, samānamiti dīpaye;

The fifth is shown to be the same as the fourth; in the division of offenses, there is no difference at all.

204.

204.

Bhikkhussa bhuñjamānassa, pānīyenupatiṭṭhati;

When a bhikkhu is eating, she stands offering water; if she stands beyond arm's reach, a dukkata is incurred, a pācittiya within arm's reach.

205.

205.

Viññāpetvāmakaṃ dhaññaṃ, ‘‘bhuñjissāmī’’ti gaṇhati;

206.

Uccārādiṃ tirokuṭṭe, chaḍḍentī dve phuse have;

207.

Uccārādicatukkaṃ tu, chaḍḍeti harite sace;

208.

Naccādiṃ dassanatthāya, sace gacchati dukkaṭaṃ;

Lasuṇavaggo paṭhamo.

209.

Paṭhame dutiye ceva, tatiye ca catutthake;

210.

Kulāni upasaṅkamma, nisīditvā panāsane;

211.

Paṭhamena ca pādena, anovassamatikkame;

212.

Sāmike tu anāpucchā, āsane ce nisīdati;

213.

Chaṭṭhena sattamaṃ sabbaṃ, samānaṃ aṭṭhame pana;

214.

Attānaṃ cābhisappentī, dve phuse nirayādinā;

215.

Vadhitvā pana attānaṃ, rodantī tu duve phuse;

Rattandhakāravaggo dutiyo.

216.

Naggā nhāyati dve ceva, payoge dukkaṭaṃ siyā;

217.

Kārāpeti pamāṇāti-kkantaṃ udakasāṭikaṃ;

218.

Cīvaraṃ tu visibbetvā, visibbāpetva vā pana;

219.

Pañcāhikaṃ tu saṅghāṭi-cāraṃ pana atikkame;

220.

Sace saṅkamanīyaṃ tu, dhāreti pana cīvaraṃ;

221.

Gaṇacīvaralābhassa, antarāyaṃ karoti ce;

222.

Vibhaṅgaṃ paṭibāhantī, cīvarānaṃ tu dhammikaṃ;

223.

Agārikādino deti, sace samaṇacīvaraṃ;

224.

Cīvare dubbalāsāya, kālaṃ ce samatikkame;

225.

Dhammikaṃ kathinuddhāraṃ, paṭibāhantiyā duve;

Nhānavaggo tatiyo.

226.

Duve bhikkhuniyo eka-mañcasmiṃ ce tuvaṭṭeyyuṃ;

227.

Dutiyaṃ paṭhameneva, sadisaṃ tatiye pana;

228.

Nupaṭṭhāpentiyā vāpi, dukkhitaṃ sahajīviniṃ;

229.

Sace upassayaṃ datvā, nikkaḍḍhati ca bhikkhuniṃ;

230.

Chaṭṭhe pana ca saṃsaṭṭhā, ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ phuse;

231.

Antoraṭṭhe tu sāsaṅke, cārikaṃ tu carantiyā;

232.

Aṭṭhamaṃ navamañceva, sattamena samaṃ mataṃ;

Tuvaṭṭavaggo catuttho.

233.

Rājāgārādikaṃ sabbaṃ, dassanatthāya gacchati;

234.

Āsandiṃ vāpi pallaṅkaṃ, paribhuñjantiyā duve;

235.

Suttaṃ kantantiyā dveva, payoge dukkaṭaṃ mataṃ;

236.

Veyyāvaccaṃ gihīnaṃ tu, dveva honti karontiyā;

237.

Pañcame pana ekāva, pācitti paridīpitā;

238.

Sattamaṃ dutiyeneva, samāpattipabhedato;

239.

Tiracchānagataṃ vijjaṃ, dveva honti paṭhantiyā;

240.

Dasamaṃ navameneva, samānaṃ sabbathā pana;

Cittāgāravaggo pañcamo.

241.

Sabhikkhukaṃ tamārāmaṃ, jānantī pana bhikkhunī;

242.

Paṭhamena ca pādena, parikkhepassatikkame;

243.

Akkosati ca yā bhikkhuṃ, bhikkhunī paribhāsati;

244.

Yā hi caṇḍikabhāvena, gaṇaṃ tu paribhāsati;

245.

Nimantitā pavāritā, khādanaṃ bhojanampi vā;

246.

‘‘Bhuñjissāmī’’ti yaṃ kiñci, paṭiggaṇhāti dukkaṭaṃ;

247.

Kulaṃ tu maccharāyantī, dve panāpattiyo phuse;

248.

Abhikkhuke panāvāse, bhave vassaṃ vasantiyā;

249.

Bhikkhunī ubhatosaṅghe, vassaṃvuṭṭhā tu tīhipi;

250.

Ovādatthāya vā bhikkhuṃ, saṃvāsatthāya vā tathā;

251.

Ovādampi na yācantī, na gacchantī uposathaṃ;

252.

Apucchitvāva saṅghaṃ vā, bhedāpeti pasākhajaṃ;

Ārāmavaggo chaṭṭho.

253.

Gabbhiniṃ vuṭṭhapentī hi, dve panāpattiyo phuse;

254.

Dutiyaṃ tatiyañceva, catutthaṃ pañcamampi ca;

255.

Bhikkhunī vuṭṭhapetvāna, bhikkhuniṃ sahajīviniṃ;

256.

Navamaṃ dasamañceva, aṭṭhamena samaṃ mataṃ;

Gabbhinīvaggo sattamo.

257.

Kumārībhūtavaggassa, ādito pana pañcapi;

258.

‘‘Alaṃ vuṭṭhāpitenā’’ti, vuccamānā hi khīyati;

259.

Sattame aṭṭhame ceva, ekaṃ pācittiyaṃ mataṃ;

Kumārībhūtavaggo aṭṭhamo.

260.

Āpattiyo phuse dvepi, dhārentī chattupāhanaṃ;

261.

Yānena pana yāyantī, dve kirāpattiyo phuse;

262.

Dhārentiyā tu saṅghāṇiṃ, payoge dukkaṭaṃ siyā;

263.

Nhāyantī gandhavaṇṇena, payoge dukkaṭaṃ phuse;

264.

Chaṭṭhampi pañcameneva, samānaṃ sabbathā pana;

265.

Payoge dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ, pācittummaddite siyā;

266.

Anāpucchā tu bhikkhussa, purato yā nisīdati;

267.

Anokāsakataṃ bhikkhuṃ, pañhaṃ pucchantiyā pana;

268.

Saṃkaccikaṃ vinā gāmaṃ, padasā pavisantiyā;

Chattupāhanavaggo navamo.

Pācittiyakathā.

269.

Aṭṭhasu duvidhāpatti, pāṭidesaniyesupi;

270.

Tato bhikkhuniyā tassā, hoti āpatti dukkaṭaṃ;

Pāṭidesanīyakathā.

271.

Imaṃ viditvā paramaṃ panuttaraṃ;

272.

Yasmā tasmā asmiṃ yogaṃ;

Bhikkhunīvibhaṅgo niṭṭhito.

Catuvipattikathā

273.

Kati āpattiyo sīla-vipattipaccayā pana;

274.

Jānaṃ pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ, sace chādeti bhikkhunī;

Knowing a Pārājika offense, if a bhikkhunī conceals it,
She falls; if she is in doubt, there is a thullaccaya.

275.

275.

Pācitti bhikkhu saṅghādi-sesaṃ chādeti ce pana;

If a bhikkhu conceals a Pācitti or Saṅghādisesa offense,
But if he conceals his own offense, he incurs a dukkaṭa.

276.

276.

Āpattiyo katācāra-vipattipaccayā pana;

Are there offenses due to katācāra-vipatti (violation of conduct)?
There might be only one due to ācāra-vipatti (violation of conduct).

277.

277.

Paṭicchādeti ācāra-vipattiṃ pana bhikkhu ce;

If a bhikkhu conceals an ācāra-vipatti,
There is only one dukkaṭa offense for that bhikkhu.

278.

278.

Kati āpattiyo diṭṭhi-vipattipaccayā pana?

How many offenses are due to diṭṭhi-vipatti (wrong view)?
There are two offenses due to diṭṭhi-vipatti.

279.

279.

Accajaṃ pāpikaṃ diṭṭhiṃ, ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ phuse;

Incurring an evil, wicked view, he incurs a dukkaṭa with the ñatti;
At the end of the kammavācā, a Pācitti is completed.

280.

280.

Āpattiyo katājīva-vipattipaccayā pana?

How many offenses are due to katājīva-vipatti (wrong livelihood)?
There are six offenses incurred due to ājīva-vipatti.

281.

281.

Ājīvahetu pāpiccho, asantaṃ pana attani;

Desiring evil for the sake of livelihood, claiming what is untrue about himself,
Declaring a superhuman quality, he incurs a Pārājika offense.

282.

282.

Sañcarittaṃ samāpanno, hoti saṅghādisesatā;

Engaging in acting as a go-between, there is a Saṅghādisesa;
When the way of expression is known, there is a thullaccaya for him.

283.

283.

Paṇītabhojanaṃ vatvā, pācitti paribhuñjato;

Having said "[It is] choice food," in partaking, there is a Pācitti;
If it is a bhikkhunī, there is a pāṭidesanīya.

284.

284.

Ājīvahetu sūpaṃ vā, odanaṃ vā panattano;

For the sake of livelihood, begging for soup or rice,
And partaking of it for his own benefit, he incurs a dukkaṭa.

Catuvipattikathā.

The Discourse on the Four Kinds of Adversity.

Adhikaraṇapaccayakathā

285.

285.

Vivādādhikaraṇamhā, kati āpattiyo siyuṃ?

From disputes (vivādādhikaraṇa), how many offenses are there?
From disputes, there are two offenses.

286.

286.

Pācitti upasampannaṃ, hoti omasato pana;

Insulting an ordained one, there is a Pācitti;
For a bhikkhu insulting one who is not ordained, there is a dukkaṭa.

287.

287.

Anuvādādhikaraṇa-paccayāpattiyo kati?

How many offenses are conditioned by accusations (anuvādādhikaraṇa)?
Three kinds of offenses are conditioned by accusations.

288.

288.

Anuddhaṃseti ce bhikkhuṃ, amūlantimavatthunā;

If a bhikkhu accuses another with a groundless final charge,
He incurs a Saṅghādisesa offense, there is no doubt.

289.

289.

Tathā saṅghādisesena, anuddhaṃseti ce pana;

Likewise, if he accuses another with a Saṅghādisesa,
There is a Pācitti, a dukkaṭa is said, as well as an ācāravipatti.

290.

290.

Āpattipaccayā vuttā, kati āpattiyo pana?

How many offenses are said to be conditioned by offenses?
Four offenses are said to be conditioned by offenses, by the great sage.

291.

291.

Jānaṃ pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ, sace chādeti bhikkhunī;

Knowing a Pārājika offense, if a bhikkhunī conceals it,
She falls; if she is in doubt, there is a thullaccaya.

292.

292.

Pācitti bhikkhu saṅghādi-sesaṃ chādeti ce pana;

If a bhikkhu conceals a Pācitti or Saṅghādisesa offense,
Likewise, if he conceals an ācāravipatti, there is a dukkaṭa.

293.

293.

Āpattiyo hi kiccādhi-karaṇapaccayā kati?

How many offenses are conditioned by business (kiccādhikaraṇa)?
There are five offenses conditioned by business.

294.

294.

Samanubhāsanāyeva, ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ phuse;

Merely with formal announcement, he incurs a dukkaṭa;
A female novice approaching, or one who follows an expelled bhikkhu.

295.

295.

Thullaccayaṃ dvayaṃ dvīhi, kammavācāhi sā phuse;

She incurs a double thullaccaya with two kammavācās;
At the end of the kammavācā, there is a Pārājika for her.

296.

296.

Samanubhāsanāyeva, bhedakassānuvattikā;

Merely with formal announcement, one who follows a schismatic;
If he does not abandon that view, there is a Saṅghādisesa.

297.

297.

Samanubhāsanāyeva, pāpikāya ca diṭṭhiyā;

Merely with formal announcement, regarding a wicked view;
Up to the third time for her, there is a Pācitti if she does not abandon it.

Adhikaraṇapaccayakathā.

The Discourse on Conditions for Legal Questions.

Khandhakapucchākathā
Discourse on Questions from the Khandhakas

298.

298.

Khandhakesupi āpatti-pabhedaṃ āgataṃ pana;

Now, the classification of offenses in the Khandhakas,
For the purpose of reciting to the bhikkhus, I will explain; listen carefully.

299.

299.

Khandhake paṭhame tāva, kati āpattiyo siyuṃ?

In the first Khandhaka, how many offenses are there?
In the first Khandhaka, there are two offenses.

300.

300.

Ūnavīsativassaṃ tu, karoto upasampadaṃ;

Performing the upasampadā ordination for one under twenty years of age,
There is a Pācitti for him, and a dukkaṭa for the others.

301.

301.

Kati āpattiyo honti;

How many offenses are there?
In the Uposatha Khandhaka?
There are three offenses;
In the Uposatha Khandhaka.

302.

302.

‘‘Nassantete vinassantu’’, iti bhedapurakkhakā;

"Let these be destroyed, let these be ruined," with the intention of causing a split,
In performing the Uposatha, a thullaccaya is declared.

303.

303.

Ukkhittakena saddhiṃ tu, karontassa uposathaṃ;

Performing the Uposatha with one who has been suspended,
There is a Pācitti for him, and a dukkaṭa for the others.

304.

304.

Kati āpattiyo vuttā, vada vassūpanāyike?

How many offenses are said in the Vasso-panāyika (Entering the Rainy Season) ?
Only one dukkaṭa offense is said in the Vasso-panāyika.

305.

305.

Kati āpattiyo vuttā, khandhake tu pavāraṇe?

How many offenses are said in the Pavāraṇā Khandhaka?
Three offenses are said, considered the same as the Uposatha.

306.

306.

Kati āpattiyo vuttā, camme? Tissova dīpitā;

How many offenses are said in the Leather (Khandhaka)? Three are explained;
For killing, there is a Pācitti, after taking the calf.

307.

307.

Aṅgajātaṃ chupantassa, rattena pana cetasā;

Touching the sexual organ, with lustful intent,
There is a thullaccaya for him, and a dukkaṭa for the others.

308.

308.

Kati āpattiyo vuttā, bhesajjakkhandhake pana?

How many offenses are said in the Bhesajja Khandhaka (Medicine)?
Three offenses are said in the Bhesajja Khandhaka.

309.

309.

Samantā dvaṅgule tattha, thullaccayamudīritaṃ;

Completely within two aṅgulas there is a thullaccaya;
For eating thick gruel there is a Pācitti, and a dukkaṭa for the others.

310.

310.

Kathine natthi āpatti, paññattaṃ kevalaṃ pana;

There is no offense in the Kathina, it is merely a regulation;
How many offenses are said in connection with robes?

311.

311.

Tisso cīvarasaṃyutte, vuttā āpattiyo pana;

Three offenses are said in connection with robes;
For a robe made of kusa grass or vāka bark, there is a thullaccaya.

312.

312.

Sanissaggāva pācitti, atireke tu cīvare;

There is a Pācitti requiring forfeiture for an extra robe;
A dukkaṭa is said for the others, by the kinsman of the sun (the Buddha).

313.

313.

Campeyyake ca kosambe, kammasmiṃ pārivāsike;

In Campeyyaka and Kosambī, in the parivāsa act,
Likewise in the Samuccaya, one dukkaṭa offense is explained.

314.

314.

Kati āpattiyo vuttā, samathakkhandhake pana?

How many offenses are said in the Samatha Khandhaka?
Only two offenses are said in the Samatha Khandhaka.

315.

315.

Chandassa dāyako bhikkhu, pācitti yadi khīyati;

A bhikkhu who is a giver of consent incurs a Pācitti if he is annoyed;
Everywhere else, a dukkaṭa is declared.

316.

316.

Kati khuddakavatthusmiṃ, vuttā āpattiyo pana?

How many offenses are said in the Khuddakavatthu?
Three offenses are said in the Khuddakavatthu.

317.

317.

Attano aṅgajātaṃ tu, chindaṃ thullaccayaṃ phuse;

Cutting off one's own sexual organ, he incurs a thullaccaya;
For masturbation there is a Pācitti, and a dukkaṭa for the others.

318.

318.

Tathā senāsanasmiṃ tu, tisso āpattiyo siyuṃ;

Likewise, in the Senāsana (Lodgings), there are three offenses;
For relinquishing the garu (heavy) items, a thullaccaya is declared.

319.

319.

Nikkaḍḍhane ca pācitti, saṅghikamhā vihārato;

For dragging out, there is a Pācitti, from a saṅghika dwelling;
Everywhere else, a dukkaṭa is declared.

320.

320.

Kati āpattiyo saṅgha-bhede vuttā mahesinā?

How many offenses are said by the great sage regarding a split in the Saṅgha?
Two offenses are said by the great sage regarding a split in the Saṅgha.

321.

321.

Bhedānuvattakānaṃ tu, thullaccayamudīritaṃ;

For those who follow a split, a thullaccaya is declared;
For bhikkhus eating together in a group (gaṇabhojana), a Pācitti is explained.

322.

322.

Khandhake vattasaṃyutte, kati āpattiyo matā?

How many offenses are considered in the Vatta-saṃyutta Khandhaka?
In the Vatta-saṃyutta Khandhaka, it is only a dukkaṭa offense.

323.

323.

Ṭhapane pātimokkhassa, tathā ekāva dīpitā;

Regarding the withholding of the Pātimokkha, likewise only one is explained;
How many offenses are considered in the Bhikkhunī Khandhaka?

324.

324.

Bhikkhunikkhandhake cāpi, dve panāpattiyo matā;

In the Bhikkhunī Khandhaka, two offenses are considered;
For non-invitation (apavāraṇā), there is a Pācitti, and a dukkaṭa for the others.

Khandhakapucchākathā niṭṭhitā.

The Discourse on Questions from the Khandhakas is Finished.

Samuṭṭhānasīsakathā
Discourse on the Origins

325.

325.

Vibhaṅgesu pana dvīsu, paññattāni mahesinā;

In the two Vibhaṅgas, declared by the great sage,
The Pārājikas and so on, are recited at the Uposatha.

326.

326.

Tesaṃ dāni pavakkhāmi, samuṭṭhānamito paraṃ;

Now I will explain their origins from here on;
For the purpose of recitation by the bhikkhus, listen carefully.

327.

327.

Kāyo ca vācāpi ca kāyavācā;

Body and speech, and body-and-speech;
These three, combined with mind, are three;
Single-factored, two-factored, and three-factored;
They speak of six ways of origin.

328.

328.

Tesu ekena vā dvīhi, tīhi vātha catūhi vā;

Among them, by one, two, three, or four,
Or six factors, various offenses arise from different origins.

329.

329.

Tattha pañcasamuṭṭhānā, kā cāpatti na vijjati;

There is no offense that has five origins;
There is an offense with one origin, only with the last three.

330.

330.

Tatheva dvisamuṭṭhānā, kāyato kāyacittato;

Likewise, an offense with two origins, from body or body-and-mind;
From speech or speech-and-mind, and also from the third and sixth factors.

331.

331.

Catutthacchaṭṭhato ceva, pañcamacchaṭṭhatopi ca;

And also from the fourth and sixth, and from the fifth and sixth factors;
These arise in five ways, it does not originate otherwise.

332.

332.

Tisamuṭṭhānikā nāma, paṭhamehi ca tīhipi;

Those with three origins, from the first three factors;
And also from the last three, it does not originate otherwise.

333.

333.

Paṭhamā tatiyā ceva, catutthacchaṭṭhatopi ca;

The first and third factors, and also the fourth and sixth;
The second and third factors, and also the fifth and sixth.

334.

334.

Dvidhā catusamuṭṭhānā, jāyate na panaññato;

With four origins in two ways, it does not arise otherwise;
With six origins in one way, it originates only from all six.

Āha ca –

And he said –

335.

335.

‘‘Tidhā ekasamuṭṭhānā, pañcadhā dvisamuṭṭhitā;

"Single-origin offenses are in three ways, double-origin offenses in five ways;
Three- and four-origin offenses in two ways, six-origin offenses in one way."

336.

336.

Teraseva ca nāmāni, samuṭṭhānavisesato;

There are thirteen names, specifically according to origin;
All offenses obtain, I will explain them from here on.

337.

337.

Paṭhamantimavatthuñca, dutiyaṃ sañcarittakaṃ;

The first and last object, the second, acting as a go-between;
Formal announcement, the kathina, goat's hair.

338.

338.

Padasodhammamaddhānaṃ, theyyasatthañca desanā;

Phrase-repeating, the path, theft, instruction;
Revealing what is untrue, and inciting a thief.

339.

339.

Ananuññātakañcāti, sīsānetāni terasa;

And what is unpermitted; these thirteen are the headings;
These thirteen origins have been considered by the wise.

340.

340.

Tattha yā tu catutthena, samuṭṭhānena jāyate;

Among them, that which arises from the fourth origin;
The ādi-pārājika-uṭṭhāna, is explained.

341.

341.

Sacittakehi tīheva, samuṭṭhānehi yā pana;

By the three origins with intention,
adinnādānapubbakā (preceded by taking what is not given).

342.

342.

Samuṭṭhānehi yāpatti, jātucchahipi jāyate;

That offense which arises from all six origins;
Sañcarittasamuṭṭhānā, is its name, as explained.

343.

343.

Chaṭṭheneva samuṭṭhāti, samuṭṭhānena yā pana;

That which arises only from the sixth origin;
samanubhāsanā (formal announcement).

344.

344.

Tatiyacchaṭṭhatoyeva, samuṭṭhāti hi yā pana;

That which arises only from the third and sixth origins;
kathinu is considered its name.

345.

345.

Jāyate yā panāpatti, kāyato kāyacittato;

That offense which arises from body and body-mind;
meḷakalomādi-samuṭṭhāna (goat’s hair) is explained.

346.

346.

Jāyate yā panāpatti, vācato vācacittato;

That offense which arises from speech and speech-mind;
is called padasodhamma-samuṭṭhānā (phrase-repeating).

347.

347.

Kāyato kāyavācamhā, catutthacchaṭṭhatopi ca;

From body and body-speech, and the fourth and sixth origins;
is indicated as addhāna-samuṭṭhānā (the path).

348.

348.

Catutthacchaṭṭhatoyeva, samuṭṭhāti hi yā pana;

The one that arises only from the fourth and sixth, the theyasatthasamuṭṭhāna, is clearly described.

349.

349.

Pañcameneva yā cettha, samuṭṭhānena jāyate;

The one that arises here only from the fifth arising is known as dhammadesanasaññitā.

350.

350.

Acittakehi tīheva, samuṭṭhānehi yā siyā;

The one that exists with three arisings from non-minds is bhūtārocanapubbakā.

351.

351.

Pañcamacchaṭṭhatoyeva, yā samuṭṭhānato siyā;

The one that exists from the fifth and sixth arisings is the cori-vuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhitā.

352.

352.

Dutiyā tatiyamhā ca, pañcamacchaṭṭhatopi yā;

The one that is from the second, the third, the fifth and the sixth is called ananuññāta-samuṭṭhānā.

353.

353.

Paṭhamaṃ dutiyaṃ tattha, catutthaṃ navamampi ca;

The first, second there, the fourth, and the ninth also,
The tenth and the twelfth, the arising is with mind.

354.

354.

Ekekasmiṃ samuṭṭhāne, sadisā idha dissare;

In each arising, similar ones are seen here;
Sukka and bodily contact, and also the first aniyata.

355.

355.

Pubbupaparipāko ca, raho bhikkhuniyā saha;

Previous preparation, being alone with a bhikkhuni,
During meals, being alone twice, finger, laughing in the water.

356.

356.

Pahāre, uggire ceva, tepaññāsā ca sekhiyā;

Assault, vomiting, and fifty-three sekhiya rules,
Exceeding half, bending the knee, going to another village without notice.

357.

357.

Talamaṭṭhudasuddhi ca, vassaṃvuṭṭhā tatheva ca;

Striking the palm, ten kinds of purification, leaving the rains residence and also,
Not going for instruction, not following the pravattini.

358.

358.

Pañcasattati niddiṭṭhā, kāyacittasamuṭṭhitā;

Seventy-five are specified, arising from body and mind,
These single arisings are considered similar to sexual intercourse.

Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ.

The arising of the first pārājika.

359.

359.

Viggahaṃ, uttariñceva, duṭṭhullaṃ, attakāmatā;

Quarrel, exaggeration, offensive language, selfishness,
Two kinds of anger, and also the second aniyata.

360.

360.

Acchindanañca pariṇāmo, musā, omasapesuṇā;

Stealing and appropriation, lying, malicious speech and backbiting,
Revealing offensive language, and also digging up the earth.

361.

361.

Bhūtagāmaññavādo ca, ujjhāpanakameva ca;

Denying existing beings, and also complaining,
Dragging away, irrigating, and also for the sake of food.

362.

362.

Bhuttāviṃ, ehanādariṃ, bhiṃsāpanakameva ca;

Having eaten, disrespect, and also frightening,
Concealing, intentionally, a living being, and also one with living beings.

363.

363.

Ukkoṭanaṃ =00 tathā ūno, saṃvāso, nāsanena ca;

Bribery, likewise insufficient, association, and also by destruction,
With a fellow practitioner, by erasing, and also with delusion as the root.

364.

364.

Kukkuccaṃ, khīyanaṃ datvā, pariṇāmeyya puggale;

Remorse, scolding after giving, one should transfer to an individual,
What's yours, unseasonably, one should steal, difficult to grasp, or with hell.

365.

365.

Gaṇassa ca vibhaṅgañca, dubbalāsā tatheva ca;

And division of the Sangha, and also weak hope,
Lawful removal of the kathina, intentionally causing discomfort.

366.

366.

Sayaṃ upassayaṃ datvā, akkoseyya ca caṇḍikā;

Giving lodging oneself, one should scold, and a shrew,
Being miserly with families, and she should evict a pregnant woman.

367.

367.

Pāyantiṃ, dve ca vassāni, saṅghenāsammatampi ca;

Causing to drink, two years, and also not agreed upon by the Sangha,
Three are said to be those gone to lay life, and three are young girls.

368.

368.

Ūnadvādasavassā dve, tathālaṃ tāva teti ca;

Two who are less than twelve years old, and also suitable up to that amount,
Those whose menstruation has begun, likewise giving probation and approval.

369.

369.

Anuvassaṃ duve cāti, sikkhā ekūnasattati;

Two each year, sixty-nine trainings,
Being equal to not giving what is not given, it is made of three arisings.

Dutiyapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ.

The arising of the second pārājika.

370.

370.

Sañcarikuṭimahallakaṃ, dhovāpanañca paṭiggaho;

Wandering hut and large one, and having it washed and accepting,
Requesting for a robe, and accepting what is extra.

371.

371.

Upakkhaṭadvayañceva, tathā dūtena cīvaraṃ;

Two kinds of preparation, and also a robe by a messenger,
Kosiya, pure black, and also taking two shares.

372.

372.

Chabbassāni, purāṇassa, lomadhovāpanampi ca;

Six years, of an old one, and also having the wool washed,
Accepting silver, both of various kinds.

373.

373.

Ūnabandhanapatto ca, vassasāṭikasuttakaṃ;

An incomplete waistband and bowl, and thread for a rains cloth,
Relinquishing by way of vikappa, up to, door, giving and sewing.

374.

374.

Pūvehi, paccayo jotiṃ, ratanaṃ, sūci, mañcakaṃ;

With cakes, requisite, fire, jewel, needle, cot,
Cotton, seat, itch, rains cloak, and also the Sugata's.

375.

375.

Aññaviññattisikkhā ca, aññacetāpanampi ca;

Training in requesting for another, and also having another urged,
Two are said to be belonging to the Sangha, and two belonging to the general public.

376.

376.

Tathā =01 puggalikenekaṃ, garupāvuraṇaṃ lahuṃ;

Likewise one belonging to an individual, a heavy and light outer robe,
Two, the vighāsa and odasaṭī, and also a monk's robe.

377.

377.

Iti ekūnapaṇṇāsa, dhammā dukkhantadassinā;

Thus forty-nine, these teachings by the seer of the end of suffering,
These of six arisings, are considered similar to wandering.

Sañcarittasamuṭṭhānaṃ.

The arising of wandering.

378.

378.

Saṅghabhedo ca bhedānu-vattadubbacadūsakā;

Division of the Sangha and following the division, difficult to admonish, corrupting,
Concealing an offense, view, inclination, two kinds of instigation.

379.

379.

Appasaddā duve vuttā, tathā na byāhareti ca;

Two are said to be soft-spoken, and also not speaking out,
Forgiveness, low seat, standing, behind, and by a deviated path.

380.

380.

Vajjacchādānuvattā ca, gahaṇaṃ, osāreyya ca;

Following the covering of faults, and accepting, and one should remove,
Training in "I disavow", and also in any whatsoever.

381.

381.

Saṃsaṭṭhā dve, vadhitvā ca, visibbetvā ca dukkhitaṃ;

Two kinds of associating, and after striking and making miserable,
And again associating, and not calming down.

382.

382.

Jānaṃ sabhikkhukārāmaṃ, tatheva na pavāraye;

Knowing a monastery with monks, and also not inviting,
And also every half month, and two cohabiting.

383.

383.

Sace me cīvaraṃ ayye, anubandhissasīti ca;

"If you will follow me, venerable one, for a robe,"
These thirty-seven teachings were declared by the Buddha.

384.

384.

Sabbe ete samuṭṭhānā, kāyavācādito siyuṃ;

All these arisings would be from body and speech,
Having made it equal and unequal, the admonition.

Samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānaṃ.

The arising of admonition.

385.

385.

Kathināni ca tīṇādi, patto, bhesajjameva ca;

Three kinds of kathina etc., bowl, and also medicine,
Also an occasional one, and also a suspicious one, and also two kinds of departure.

386.

386.

Tathā upassayaṃ gantvā, bhojanañca paramparaṃ;

And also after going to lodging, and successive meals,
Not extra, with a meal invitation, and also after relinquishing by way of vikappa.

387.

387.

Rañño, vikāle, vosāsā-raññakussayavādikā;

Of the king, at the wrong time, abandoning-forest, and speaking of a forest hut,
Accumulation of bowls, before, after, at the wrong time.

388.

388.

Pañcāhikaṃ =02, saṅkamaniṃ, tathā āvasathadvayaṃ;

Five-day, changing, and also two kinds of rest house,
In the assembly hall, on the seat, these twenty-nine.

389.

389.

Dvisamuṭṭhānikā dhammā, niddiṭṭhā kāyavācato;

Teachings of two arisings, specified from body and speech,
And all from body and speech, all arise from the kathina.

Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ.

The arising of the kathina.

390.

390.

Dve seyyāhaccapādo ca, piṇḍañca gaṇabhojanaṃ;

Two beds, seizing, and the foot, and alms food, and a group meal,
At the wrong time, accumulation, toothpick, going naked.

391.

391.

Uyyuttañca vasuyyodhiṃ, surā, orena nhāyanaṃ;

Agitation and inciting violence, liquor, below, bathing,
Making bad color, and two pāṭidesanīya.

392.

392.

Lasuṇaṃ, upatiṭṭheyya, naccadassanameva ca;

Garlic, one should attend upon, seeing dancing,
Naked, spread, on a bed, inside the country, and also outside.

393.

393.

Antovassamagārañca, āsandiṃ, suttakantanaṃ;

Inside the rains residence, chair, spinning thread,
Service, with one's own hand, and in a residence without monks.

394.

394.

Chattaṃ, yānañca saṅghāṇiṃ, alaṅkāraṃ, gandhavāsitaṃ;

Umbrella, and vehicle, and mixing, decoration, fragrant scent,
Bhikkhuni, sikkhamana, samaneri, lay woman.

395.

395.

Tathā saṃkaccikā cāti, tecattālīsime pana;

And also a swing, these forty-three,
All of them with goat's hair, are equal with two arisings.

Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ.

The arising of goat's hair.

396.

396.

Aññatrāsammato ceva, tathā atthaṅgatena ca;

Elsewhere without agreement, and also with the sunset,
Two kinds of animal knowledge are said, and also without permission.

397.

397.

Sabbe cha panime dhammā, vācato vācacittato;

All these six teachings, from speech, from speech and mind,
Are of two arisings, being equal to the padasodhamma.

Padasodhammasamuṭṭhānaṃ.

The arising of padasodhamma.

398.

398.

Ekaṃ nāvaṃ, paṇītañca, saṃvidhānañca saṃhare;

One boat, excellent, and arrangement, and collecting,
Grain, invited ones, and the eighth pāṭidesanīya.

399.

399.

Etā =03 catusamuṭṭhānā, sikkhā cuddasa honti hi;

These fourteen trainings of four arisings,
Declared by the best of Buddhas, are considered similar to the road.

Addhānasamuṭṭhānaṃ.

The arising of the road.

400.

400.

Sutiṃ, sūpādiviññattiṃ, andhakāre tatheva ca;

A seam, requesting for soup etc., and also in the dark,
In a covered place, and in a crowd, these six.

401.

401.

Sabbe tu dvisamuṭṭhānā, catutthacchaṭṭhato siyuṃ;

All, however, are teachings of two arisings, from the fourth and sixth,
The theyyasatthasamuṭṭhāna, taught by the kinsman of the sun.

Theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ.

The arising of theyyasatthasamuṭṭhāna.

402.

402.

Chatta, daṇḍakarassāpi, satthāvudhakarassapi;

An umbrella, also a staff-carrier, a weapon-carrier,
Sandals, shoes, vehicle, bed, and also a couch.

403.

403.

Veṭhitoguṇṭhito cāti, ekādasa nidassitā;

Wrapped up and covered, these eleven are shown,
All of one arising, known as dhammadesanasaññitā.

Dhammadesanasamuṭṭhānaṃ.

The arising of dhammadesanasaññitā.

404.

404.

Bhūtārocanakañceva, corivuṭṭhāpanampi ca;

Bhūtārocanaka and corivuṭṭhāpana also,
And just ananuññāta, this triad is unmixed.

Samuṭṭhānasīsakathā niṭṭhitā.

The discourse on the arisings is finished.

Ekuttaranayakathā
Discourse on Numerical Order

405.

405.

Kati āpattiyo honti, samuṭṭhānena ādinā?

How many offenses are there, beginning with the arising?
There are five offenses, in requesting for a hut.

406.

406.

Karoto pana tissova, payoge dukkaṭādayo;

But in building, there are three, starting with dukkaṭa in the effort,
But at the wrong time, a pācitti, and also from another's hand.

407.

407.

Gahetvā bhuñjato vuttaṃ, pāṭidesaniyampi ca;

Having taken and eaten, it is said, there is also a pāṭidesanīya,
These five offenses are there, beginning with the arising.

408.

408.

Kati =04 āpattiyo honti, dutiyena tuvaṃ bhaṇa?

How many offenses are there, with the second, tell me?
It should be clearly shown that there are four offenses.

409.

409.

‘‘Kuṭiṃ mama karothā’’ti, samādisati bhikkhu ce;

"Build a hut for me," if a monk directs,
If they build a hut for him, it is ruined in every way.

410.

410.

Tisso purimaniddiṭṭhā, payoge dukkaṭādayo;

The three previously specified, starting with dukkaṭa in the effort,
With the root of padasodhamma, these four come into being.

411.

411.

Tatiyena kati jāyanti, samuṭṭhānena me bhaṇa?

How many arise with the third arising, tell me?
I tell you with the third, there would be five kinds of offenses.

412.

412.

Bhikkhu saṃvidahitvāna;

A monk having arranged,
And builds a hut,
There are three offenses,
Starting with dukkaṭa in the effort.

413.

413.

Paṇītabhojanaṃ vatvā, hoti pācitti bhuñjato;

Having said "excellent food," there is a pācitti when eating,
Without preventing a bhikkhuni, there would be a pāṭidesanīya.

414.

414.

Siyuṃ kati catutthena, samuṭṭhānena me bhaṇa?

How many are there with the fourth arising, tell me?
There are six offenses, if one engages in sexual intercourse.

415.

415.

Hoti pārājikaṃ tassa, kuṭiṃ saṃyācikāya tu;

There is a pārājika for him, in requesting for a hut,
But in building, there are three, starting with dukkaṭa in the effort.

416.

416.

Vikāle pana pācitti, tathā aññātihatthato;

But at the wrong time, a pācitti, and also from another's hand,
Having taken and eaten, it is said, there is also a pāṭidesanīya.

417.

417.

Kati āpattiyo honti, pañcamena? Cha honti hi;

How many offenses are there with the fifth type of arising? There are six indeed;
Speaking of superhuman qualities, one incurs a Pārājika offense.

418.

418.

‘‘Kuṭiṃ mama karothā’’ti;

If a bhikkhu commands, "Make a hut for me,"
And if they make a hut, the three;
Those offenses are from Dukkaṭa onwards.

419.

419.

Vāceti padaso dhammaṃ, hoti pācitti bhikkhuno;

Reciting the Dhamma word by word, a bhikkhu incurs a Pācittiya;
Speaking with the intention of disparaging, that would be a Dubbhāsita.

420.

420.

Samuṭṭhānena =05 chaṭṭhena, kati āpattiyo siyuṃ?

With the arising of the sixth type, how many offenses are there?
Six, and after conspiring, if one who has passed away carries away property.

421.

421.

‘‘Kuṭiṃ mama karothā’’ti;

If a bhikkhu commands, "Make a hut for me,"
And if they make a hut, the three;
Those offenses are from Dukkaṭa onwards.

422.

422.

Paṇītabhojanaṃ vatvā, hoti pācitti bhuñjato;

After requesting choice food, one incurs a Pācittiya while eating it;
Without preventing a bhikkhuni, there would be a Pāṭidesanīya.

423.

423.

Idha yo vimatūparamaṃ paramaṃ;

Here, one who goes beyond doubt to the ultimate,
Crosses over this supreme (teaching);
The Vinaya, well-guided, endowed with good guidance,
He crosses over the unsurpassable.

Āpattisamuṭṭhānakathā.

Account of the Arising of Offenses.

424.

424.

Ito paraṃ pavakkhāmi, paramekuttaraṃ nayaṃ;

From here on, I will explain the supreme and excellent method;
With an undistracted mind, listen attentively to it.

425.

425.

Ke āpattikarā dhammā, anāpattikarāpi ke?

What are the Dhammas that cause offenses, and which are those that do not cause offenses?
What are the offenses, and which are minor and which are serious?

426.

426.

Sāvasesā ca kāpatti, kā nāmānavasesakā?

Which offense is with remainder, and which is without remainder?
Which offense is "serious," and which is "not serious?"

427.

427.

Niyatā nāma kāpatti, kā panāniyatāpi ca?

Which offense is fixed, and which is unfixed?
Which one is expiable, and which is non-expiable?

428.

428.

Samuṭṭhānāni āpatti-karā dhammāti dīpitā;

The Dhammas that cause the arising of offenses have been shown;
The Dhammas that do not cause offenses, the seven means of calming, have been shown.

429.

429.

Pārājikādayo satta-vidhā āpattiyo siyuṃ;

There are seven kinds of offenses, beginning with Pārājika;
Among them, only five are light, namely, Thullaccaya and the like.

430.

430.

Pārājikaṃ ṭhapetvāna, sāvasesāvasesakā;

Except for the Pārājika, the remaining ones are with remainder;
The one Pārājika offense is considered without remainder.

431.

431.

‘‘Duṭṭhullā’’ti =06 ca niddiṭṭhā, duvidhāpattiādito;

The two kinds of offenses from the beginning are designated as "serious;"
The remaining five kinds of offenses are described as "not serious."

432.

432.

Pañcānantariyasaṃyuttā, niyatāniyatetarā;

Those associated with the five immediately retributive acts are fixed and unfixed;
Five are expiable, and two are non-expiable.

Ekakakathā.

Account of the Ones.

433.

433.

Abhabbāpattiko ko ca, bhabbāpattikapuggalo?

Who is incapable of incurring offenses, and who is the person capable of incurring offenses?
Whose ordination was forbidden by the Teacher?

434.

434.

Āpattimāpajjituṃ dveva loke;

Only two in the world are incapable of incurring offenses;
Buddhas and Paccekabuddhas are incapable;
Only two in the world are capable of incurring offenses;
Bhikkhus are capable, and so are bhikkhunis.

435.

435.

Addhavihīno aṅgavihīno;

One who is deficient, one who is defective in a limb,
One who is corrupt in substance, one who commits wrongdoings,
One who is not complete, one who does not request;
Ordination is prohibited for him.

436.

436.

Atthāpatti have laddha-samāpattissa bhikkhuno;

An offense exists for a bhikkhu who has attained samāpatti;
An offense is said not to exist for one who has not attained samāpatti.

437.

437.

Bhūtassārocanaṃ laddha-samāpattissa niddise;

A true report should be stated by one who has attained samāpatti;
The offense of reporting falsely is for one who has not gained attainment.

438.

438.

Atthi saddhammasaṃyuttā, asaddhammayutāpi ca;

There is that which is connected with the true Dhamma, and that which is connected with the untrue Dhamma;
That which is connected with requisites, and that which is connected with another's property.

439.

439.

Padasodhammamūlādī, saddhammapaṭisaṃyutā;

The root of the Dhamma word by word, etc., is connected with the true Dhamma;
That which is connected with abusive speech is connected with the untrue Dhamma.

440.

440.

Atirekadasāhaṃ tu, ṭhapane cīvarādino;

Keeping a robe, etc., for more than ten days;
And enjoying property without relinquishing it, is connected with requisites.

441.

441.

Saṅghassa mañcapīṭhādiṃ, ajjhokāsattharepi ca;

A bed, chair, etc., of the Saṅgha, or a spread for an open space;
Going away without asking permission, is connected with another's property.

442.

442.

Kathañhi =07 bhaṇato saccaṃ, garukaṃ hoti bhikkhuno?

How does speaking the truth become serious for a bhikkhu?
How does a minor offense arise for one who speaks a lie?

443.

443.

‘‘Sikharaṇī’’ti saccaṃ tu, bhaṇato garukaṃ siyā;

Speaking the truth about a "Sikharaṇī" becomes serious;
In a deliberate lie, a Pācittiya is a minor offense.

444.

444.

Kathaṃ musā bhaṇantassa, garukaṃ hoti bhikkhuno?

How does a serious offense occur for a bhikkhu who speaks a lie?
And how does a minor offense occur for one who speaks the truth?

445.

445.

Abhūtārocane tassa, garukāpatti dīpitā;

For him, in reporting something untrue, a serious offense is stated;
In reporting something true, speaking the truth would be a minor offense.

446.

446.

Kathaṃ bhūmigato dosaṃ, na vehāsagato phuse?

How does one on the ground incur an offense, but not one in the air?
How does one in the air incur an offense, but not one on the ground?

447.

447.

Saṅghakammaṃ vikopetuṃ, hatthapāsaṃ jahaṃ phuse;

To disrupt a Saṅgha act, abandoning the hatha-pāsa incurs an offense;
There is no fault for one standing in the air, even a hair's breadth.

448.

448.

Āhaccapādakaṃ mañcaṃ, vehāsakuṭiyūpari;

Having struck a bed’s leg on top of an aerial hut;
Or sitting down on a chair, one incurs an offense, but not from the ground.

449.

449.

Pavisanto kathaṃ bhikkhu, āpajjati, na nikkhamaṃ?

How does a bhikkhu incur an offense when entering, but not when leaving?
How does a bhikkhu incur an offense when entering, but not when entering?

450.

450.

Sachattupāhano vatta-mapūretvāna kevalaṃ;

Having covered the privy with grass, without completely filling the designated area;
One incurs an offense when entering, but not when leaving.

451.

451.

Gamiko gamikavattāni, apūretvāna nikkhamaṃ;

Leaving without fulfilling the duties of a departing bhikkhu;
One incurs an offense only when leaving, but not when entering.

452.

452.

Ādiyanto panāpattiṃ, āpajjati kathaṃ vada?

How does one incur an offense when undertaking something, tell me?
Similarly, how does one incur an offense even when not undertaking something, tell me?

453.

453.

Bhikkhunī atigambhīraṃ, yā kācudakasuddhikaṃ;

A bhikkhuni drawing water that is very deep,
Undertaking that, she incurs an offense, there is no doubt.

454.

454.

Anādiyitvā dubbaṇṇa-karaṇaṃ pana cīvaraṃ;

Without undertaking the dyeing of a robe in a bad color;
Thus, without undertaking, he incurs an offense.

455.

455.

Samādiyanto āpattiṃ, āpajjati kathaṃ pana?

How does one incur an offense when undertaking something?
Similarly, how does one incur an offense when not undertaking something?

456.

456.

Yo =08 hi mūgabbatādīni, vatānidha samādiyaṃ;

One who undertakes vows here, such as a vow of silence;
Undertaking that, he incurs an offense.

457.

457.

Yo hi kammakato bhikkhu, vuttaṃ vattaṃ panattano;

The bhikkhu who is appointed to a task, the duties that have been assigned to him;
Not undertaking that, he incurs an offense.

458.

458.

Karontova panāpattiṃ, kathamāpajjate naro?

How does one incur an offense by doing something?
How is it that a Samaṇa is at fault even when not doing something?

459.

459.

Bhaṇḍāgārikakammañca, vejjakammañca cīvaraṃ;

The task of a storehouse keeper, the task of a doctor, and a robe;
Sewing it for a non-relative, one incurs an offense by doing.

460.

460.

Upajjhāyassa vattāni, vattāni itarassa vā;

The duties to one's preceptor, or the duties to another;
Not doing that, he incurs an offense.

461.

461.

Dento āpajjatāpattiṃ, na dentopi kathaṃ bhaṇa?

How does one incur an offense by giving, and how by not giving?
Whatever a bhikkhu gives to a bhikkhuni who is a non-relative.

462.

462.

Cīvaraṃ dadamāno hi, dento āpajjate pana;

Certainly, giving a robe, one incurs an offense by giving;
Likewise, not giving robes etc. to one's student, etc.

463.

463.

Attasannissitā atthi, tatheva paranissitā;

There is that which depends on oneself, and that which depends on another;
Mudu, Lamba, etc., depend on oneself, the rest depend on another.

464.

464.

Kathañca paṭigaṇhanto, āpajjati hi vajjataṃ?

How does one incur a fault by accepting something?
How does one incur a fault by not accepting something?

465.

465.

Cīvaraṃ paṭigaṇhanto, bhikkhu aññātihatthato;

A bhikkhu accepting a robe from the hand of a non-relative;
And not accepting advice, one incurs a fault.

466.

466.

Kathañca paribhogena, āpajjati tapodhano?

How does an ascetic incur an offense by using something?
How does an ascetic incur an offense by not using something?

467.

467.

Yo hi nissaggiyaṃ vatthuṃ, accajitvā nisevati;

One who uses an object requiring forfeiture without giving it up;
He incurs an offense by using it, without doubt.

468.

468.

Atikkamentī saṅghāṭi-cāraṃ pañcāhikaṃ pana;

A bhikkhuni exceeding the going for alms in Saṅghāṭi robe for five days;
She incurs an offense by using it.

469.

469.

Divāpajjati no rattiṃ, rattimeva ca no divā;

One incurs an offense during the day, but not at night; only at night, and not during the day;
Leaving the door unbarred, one incurs an offense during the day.

470.

470.

Sagāraseyyakaṃ =09 rattiṃ, āpajjati hi no divā;

Sleeping in the same dwelling with passion at night, one incurs an offense, but not during the day;
When dawn breaks, how is there an offense, and how is there not an offense when dawn breaks?

471.

471.

Ekachārattasattāha-dasāhādiatikkame;

Exceeding one night, seven nights, ten days, etc.;
Experiencing the stated offense, one incurs an offense when dawn breaks.

472.

472.

Pavāretvāna bhuñjanto, phuse na aruṇuggame;

Eating after invitation, one does not incur an offense when dawn breaks;
For one who cuts, there would be an offense; how would there be an offense for one who does not cut?

473.

473.

Chindanto bhūtagāmañca, aṅgajātañca attano;

Cutting living plants and one’s own bodily parts,
One incurs a Pārājika, a Pācittiya, and a Thullaccaya as well.

474.

474.

Na chindanto nakhe kese, āpajjati hi nāma so;

Not cutting one's nails or hair, he incurs an offense;
Covering, one incurs an offense; how does one not incur an offense when not covering?

475.

475.

Chādento pana āpattiṃ, chādentopajjate naro;

Covering, one incurs an offense; covering, one incurs an offense;
One incurs an offense when what is cut is not covered with grass etc.

476.

476.

Āpajjati hi dhārento, na dhārento kathaṃ pana?

One incurs an offense by wearing, how does one not incur an offense when not wearing?
Wearing a garment of Kusa grass, one incurs an offense.

477.

477.

Dinnaṃ nissaṭṭhapattaṃ taṃ, adhārentova dosavā;

Not wearing the alms bowl that has been given and relinquished is a fault;
The pair of what is with consciousness and the pair of liberation by perception occur.

Dukakathā.

Account of the Pairs.

478.

478.

Atthāpatti hi tiṭṭhante, nāthe, no parinibbute;

An offense exists while the Teacher is living, not when he has passed away;
When he has passed away, not while he is living, an offense exists in both cases.

479.

479.

Ruhiruppādanāpatti, ṭhite, no parinibbute;

The offense of causing blood to flow exists while he is living, not when he has passed away;
Speaking to an elder with the term "Āvusa" when he has passed away.

480.

480.

Āpattiyo imā dvepi, ṭhapetvā sugate pana;

These two offenses, except for those of the Sugata;
The remaining ones exist while he is living, and when he has passed away.

481.

481.

Kāleyeva siyāpatti, vikāle na siyā kathaṃ?

How is there an offense at the proper time, but not at the wrong time?
How is there an offense at the wrong time, but not at the proper time, or in both cases?

482.

482.

Bhuñjatonatirittaṃ tu, kālasmiṃ, no vikālake;

Eating without leaving any remainder at the proper time, but not at the wrong time;
The offense of eating at the wrong time occurs at the wrong time, but not at the proper time.

483.

483.

Avasesaṃ =10 panāpattiṃ, āpajjati hi sabbadā;

One incurs the remaining offenses at all times;
Everything, at the proper time and at the wrong time, there is no doubt about that.

484.

484.

Rattimeva panāpattiṃ, āpajjati ca no divā;

One incurs an offense only at night, but not during the day;
One incurs an offense during the day, but not at night; one incurs an offense in both cases.

485.

485.

Sahaseyyā siyā rattiṃ, dvārāsaṃvaramūlakā;

Sleeping together occurs at night, based on not barring the door;
During the day, the remaining offenses occur both day and night.

486.

486.

Dasavasso tu no ūna-dasavasso siyā kathaṃ?

How is one ten years old, and how is one not ten years old?
How is one not ten years old, how is one ten years old in both cases?

487.

487.

Upaṭṭhāpeti ce bālo, parisaṃ dasavassiko;

If a fool establishes an assembly at ten years old,
One who is incapable incurs an offense, there is no doubt.

488.

488.

Tathūnadasavasso ca, ‘‘paṇḍitoha’’nti gaṇhati;

Likewise, one who is not ten years old thinks, "I am wise,"
An assembly, one who is ten years old does not, the rest incur both.

489.

489.

Kāḷe āpajjatāpattiṃ, na juṇhe juṇhake kathaṃ;

One incurs an offense in the dark fortnight, how not in the bright fortnight?
One incurs an offense, how not in the dark fortnight, one incurs an offense in both cases?

490.

490.

Vassaṃ anupagacchanto, kāḷe, no juṇhake pana;

Not going to the rains residence in the dark fortnight, but not in the bright fortnight;
Incurring an offense by not inviting in the bright fortnight, but not in the dark fortnight.

491.

491.

Avasesaṃ tu paññatta-māpattimavipattinā;

The remaining offenses that have been prescribed, with and without violation;
In the dark fortnight and in the bright fortnight, one incurs an offense, there is no doubt.

492.

492.

Vassūpagamanaṃ kāḷe, no juṇhe, tu pavāraṇā;

Entering the rains in the early time is suitable, not in the late time, but the inviting (pavāraṇā) is not; In the late time it is suitable, not in the early time, the rest is suitable in both.

493.

493.

Atthāpatti tu hemante, na hotītarutudvaye;

The arising of a case (atthāpatti) is in the cold season (hemanta), not in the other two seasons; Only in the hot season, not in the other seasons, in the rains not in the other two.

494.

494.

Dine pāḷipadakkhāte, kattike puṇṇamāsiyā;

On the day called the pāḷi, on the full-moon day of Kattika, the rains-cloth robe is put away after resolving (vikappetvā).

495.

495.

Āpajjati ca hemante, nivāseti ca taṃ sace;

If he wears it in the cold season, he incurs an offense; Indeed, on the day after the full moon of Kattika.

496.

496.

Taṃ apaccuddharitvāva, hemanteyeva, netare;

Without taking it back, only in the cold season, not in the others; according to the Kurunda Commentary.

497.

497.

‘‘Atirekamāso =11 seso’’ti;

"The excess month = 11 remainder"; And seeking in the hot season; In the hot season he incurs an offense; But not in the other two seasons.

498.

498.

Vijjamāne sace naggo, vassasāṭikacīvare;

If, while the rains-cloth robe is available, he is naked; He who exposes his body to the rain, here he incurs an offense.

499.

499.

Āpajjati hi saṅghova, na gaṇo na ca puggalo;

It is the Saṅgha that incurs the offense, not the group, nor the individual; The group incurs the offense, not the others; The individual incurs the offense, not the others.

500.

500.

Adhiṭṭhānaṃ karonto vā, pārisuddhiuposathaṃ;

While doing the assigning (adhiṭṭhāna) or the purification day (pārisuddhiuposatha); The Saṅgha incurs the offense, not the group, nor the individual.

501.

501.

Suttuddesamadhiṭṭhānaṃ, karonto vā uposathaṃ;

While doing the assigning of the Sutta recitation or the Uposatha; The group incurs the offense, not the Saṅgha, nor the individual.

502.

502.

Suttuddesaṃ karonto vā, eko pana uposathaṃ;

While one person does the Sutta recitation or the Uposatha; The individual incurs the offense, not the Saṅgha, nor the group.

503.

503.

Āpajjati gilānova, nāgilāno kathaṃ pana;

Only the sick one incurs the offense, how does the non-sick one incur it? Only the non-sick one incurs the offense, not the sick one, or both?

504.

504.

Bhesajjena panaññena, atthe sati ca yo pana;

If there is medicine and another thing, and when there is a need; He who asks for that other thing, that unseemly one incurs an offense.

505.

505.

Na bhesajjena atthepi, bhesajjaṃ viññāpeti ce;

If, even when there is a need for medicine, he asks for medicine; Only the non-sick one incurs an offense, the rest, both incur it.

506.

506.

Atthāpatti hi antova, na bahiddhā, tathā bahi;

The arising of a case (atthāpatti) is inside, not outside, so also outside; He incurs an offense, but not inside, in the arising of a case, in both.

507.

507.

Anupakhajja seyyaṃ tu, kappento pana kevalaṃ;

Only if he makes a bed without encroaching; He incurs an offense, only inside, not outside.

508.

508.

Ajjhokāse tu mañcādiṃ, santharitvāna pakkamaṃ;

Having spread out a couch etc. in the open air, and departing; Only outside, not inside, the rest, in both.

509.

509.

Antosīmāyevāpattiṃ, bahisīmāya neva ca;

He incurs an offense only inside the boundary (sīmā), not outside the boundary; Outside the boundary, not inside the boundary, in both.

510.

510.

Sachattupāhano =12 bhikkhu, pavisanto tapodhano;

A monk with an umbrella, entering, rich in asceticism; At the end of the boundary of approach (upacārasīmā), he incurs an offense inside.

511.

511.

Gamiko dārubhaṇḍādiṃ, paṭisāmanavattakaṃ;

A traveler, without completing the woodware etc., which needs to be gathered; When he transgresses the boundary of approach.

512.

512.

Āpajjati panāpattiṃ, bahisīmāyayeva so;

He incurs an offense, only outside the boundary; The rest he incurs an offense completely inside and outside the boundary.

Tikakathā.

Three Stories

513.

513.

Sakavācāya āpanno, paravācāya sujjhati;

Having incurred an offense by his own speech, he is purified by another's speech; Having incurred an offense by another's speech, he is purified by his own speech.

514.

514.

Sakavācāya āpanno, sakavācāya sujjhati;

Having incurred an offense by his own speech, he is purified by his own speech; Having incurred an offense by another's speech, he is purified by another's speech.

515.

515.

Vacīdvārikamāpattiṃ, āpanno sakavācato;

Having incurred an offense through speech, by his own speech; Having gone to a covering of grass (tiṇavatthāraka), he is purified by another's speech.

516.

516.

Tathā appaṭinissagge, pāpikāya hi diṭṭhiyā;

Similarly, in the case of non-surrender, with a bad view; Having incurred an offense through another's act of speech, he becomes faulty.

517.

517.

Desento bhikkhuno mūle, sakavācāya sujjhati;

While confessing at the feet of a monk, he is purified by his own speech; Having incurred an offense through speech, in the presence of a monk.

518.

518.

Desetvā taṃ visujjhanto, sakavācāya sujjhati;

Having confessed that, while being purified, he is purified by his own speech; For a Saṅghādisesa offense, up to the third time.

519.

519.

Parassa kammavācāya, āpajjitvā tathā puna;

Having incurred an offense through another's act of speech, so again; He is purified by another's act of speech of probation etc.

520.

520.

Kāyenāpajjatāpattiṃ, vācāya ca visujjhati;

Having incurred an offense through body, he is purified by speech; Having incurred an offense through speech, he is purified by body.

521.

521.

Kāyenāpajjatāpattiṃ, kāyeneva visujjhati;

Having incurred an offense through body, he is purified by body itself; Having incurred an offense through speech, he is purified by speech itself.

522.

522.

Kāyadvārikamāpattiṃ, kāyenāpajjate, puna;

Having incurred an offense through the door of body, he incurs it by body; Again, while confessing that offense, he is purified by speech itself.

523.

523.

Vacīdvārikamāpattiṃ =13, āpajjitvāna vācato;

Having incurred an offense through the door of speech, by speech; Having gone to a covering of grass (tiṇavatthāraka), he is purified by body itself.

524.

524.

Kāyadvārikamāpattiṃ, āpajjitvāna kāyato;

Having incurred an offense through the door of body, by body; Having gone to a covering of grass (tiṇavatthāraka), he is purified by body itself.

525.

525.

Vacīdvārikamāpattiṃ, āpajjitvā tapodhano;

Having incurred an offense through the door of speech, rich in asceticism; While confessing that very thing, he is purified by speech itself.

526.

526.

Sutto āpajjatāpattiṃ, paṭibuddho visujjhati;

A sleeping person incurs an offense, an awakened person is purified; Having incurred an offense awakened, how does a sleeping person get purified?

527.

527.

Sutto āpajjatāpattiṃ, suttoyeva visujjhati;

A sleeping person incurs an offense, a sleeping person is purified; Having incurred an offense awakened, is an awakened person purified?

528.

528.

Sagāraseyyakādiṃ tu, sutto āpajjate naro;

A person incurs a shared dwelling etc. while sleeping; While confessing that, having known, an awakened person is purified.

529.

529.

Āpajjitvāna jagganto, tiṇavatthārake pana;

Having incurred an offense and being awake, on a covering of grass; Being capable, while lying down, he is said to get up sleeping.

530.

530.

Sagāraseyyakādiṃ tu, sutto āpajjate naro;

A person incurs a shared dwelling etc. while sleeping; While lying on a covering of grass, a sleeping person is purified.

531.

531.

Āpajjitvā panāpattiṃ, jagganto pana kevalaṃ;

Having incurred an offense and being awake, merely; While confessing that later, an awakened person is purified.

532.

532.

Āpajjitvā acittova, sacittova visujjhati;

Having incurred an offense without intention, he is purified with intention; Having incurred an offense with intention, he is purified without intention.

533.

533.

Āpajjitvā acittova, acittova visujjhati;

Having incurred an offense without intention, he is purified without intention; Having incurred an offense with intention, he is purified with intention.

534.

534.

Acitto, cittakāpattiṃ, āpajjitvā tapodhano;

Having incurred an offense with no intention, an offense born of intention, rich in asceticism; Later, while confessing that, he is purified with intention.

535.

535.

Tathā sacittakāpattiṃ, āpajjitvā sacittako;

Similarly, having incurred an offense born of intention, with intention; While lying on a covering of grass, he is purified without intention.

536.

536.

Evamevaṃ amissetvā, pacchimaṃ tu padadvayaṃ;

Thus, without mixing, the last two words; According to what is said here, it should be understood by the discerning one.

537.

537.

Āpajjati =14 ca kammena, akammena visujjhati;

He incurs an offense by action (kamma), he is purified by non-action (akamma); He incurs an offense by non-action, he is purified by action.

538.

538.

Kammenāpajjatāpattiṃ, kammeneva visujjhati;

Having incurred an offense by action, he is purified by action itself; He incurs an offense by non-action, he is purified by non-action.

539.

539.

Accajaṃ pāpikaṃ diṭṭhiṃ, āpajjitvāna kammato;

Having adopted a bad view that leads to ruin, by action; Later, while confessing that, he is purified by non-action.

540.

540.

Visaṭṭhiādikāpattiṃ, āpajjitvā akammato;

Having incurred an offense such as disrobing, by non-action; He is purified by action, by probation etc.

541.

541.

Samanubhāsanaṃ bhikkhu, āpajjati ca kammato;

A monk incurs an offense by admonition, by action; Later, by probation etc., he is purified by action itself.

542.

542.

Avasesaṃ panāpattiṃ, āpajjati akammato;

Having incurred a remaining offense, by non-action; Later, while confessing that, he is purified by non-action itself.

543.

543.

Sammukhāpattimāpanno, visujjhati asammukhā;

Having incurred an offense in the presence (sammukhā), he is purified in the absence (asammukhā); Having incurred an offense in the absence, he is purified in the presence.

544.

544.

Sammukhāpattimāpanno, sammukhāva visujjhati;

Having incurred an offense in the presence, he is purified in the presence itself; Having incurred an offense in the absence, he is purified in the absence.

545.

545.

Accajaṃ pāpakaṃ diṭṭhiṃ, āpanno saṅghasammukhe;

Having adopted a bad view that leads to ruin, in the presence of the Saṅgha; At the time of rising (vuṭṭhāna), there is no action for the Saṅgha.

546.

546.

Visaṭṭhiādikāpattiṃ, āpajjitvā asammukhā;

Having incurred an offense such as disrobing, in the absence; He is purified only in the presence of the Saṅgha, not otherwise.

547.

547.

Samanubhāsanaṃ saṅgha-sammukhāpajjate, puna;

Admonition is incurred in the presence of the Saṅgha, again; He is purified only in the presence of the Saṅgha, not otherwise.

548.

548.

Musāvādādikaṃ sesaṃ, āpajjati asammukhā;

A remaining offense such as false speech, he incurs in the absence; Later, while confessing that, he is purified in the absence.

549.

549.

Ajānantova āpanno, jānantova visujjhati;

Having incurred an offense unknowingly, he is purified knowingly; Having incurred an offense knowingly, he is purified unknowingly.

550.

550.

Ajānantova āpanno, ajānanto visujjhati;

Having incurred an offense unknowingly, he is purified unknowingly; Having incurred an offense knowingly, he is purified knowingly.

551.

551.

Acittakacatukkena =15, sadisaṃ sabbathā idaṃ;

This is similar in every way to the fourfold without intention (acittakacatukka); The fourfold without knowing (ajānantacatukka) should be understood by the discerning one.

552.

552.

Āgantukova āpattiṃ, āpajjati, na cetaro;

A newcomer incurs an offense, not the other; A resident incurs an offense, not the other.

553.

553.

Āgantuko tathāvāsi-kopi āpajjare ubho;

Both a newcomer and a resident incur an offense; The arising of a case (atthāpatti) and the rest, both do not incur.

554.

554.

Sachattupāhano ceva, sasīsaṃ pārutopi ca;

With an umbrella and shoes, and with head covered; While entering the monastery, and while wandering there.

555.

555.

Āgantukova āpattiṃ, āpajjati, na cetaro;

A newcomer incurs an offense, not the other; A resident, not doing the duties of a resident, is at fault.

556.

556.

Na cevāgantuko, sesa-māpajjanti ubhopi ca;

Both do not incur the remaining, and both do not incur an offense that is not shared (asādhāraṇa).

557.

557.

Vatthunānattatā atthi, natthi āpattinānatā;

There is difference of object (vatthu), there is no difference of offense (āpatti); There is difference of offense, there is no difference of object.

558.

558.

Vatthunānattatā ceva, atthi āpattinānatā;

There is difference of object, and there is difference of offense; There is no difference of object, nor is there difference of offense.

559.

559.

Pārājikacatukkassa, vatthunānattatā matā;

Difference of object is considered for the four Pārājikas; There is no difference of offense, the same method for the remaining offenses.

560.

560.

Samaṇo samaṇī kāya-saṃsaggaṃ tu karonti ce;

If a monk and a nun make bodily contact; For the monk it is a Saṅghādisesa, for the nun it is a Pārājika.

561.

561.

Evaṃ āpattinānattaṃ, natthi vatthussa nānatā;

Thus, there is difference of offense, there is no difference of object; Indeed, bodily contact is an object for both.

562.

562.

Tatheva lasuṇassāpi, khādane bhikkhunī pana;

Likewise, in the eating of garlic, the nun incurs a Pācittiya; For the monk it is a Dukkaṭa.

563.

563.

Pārājikānaṃ pana ce catunnaṃ;

Indeed, for the four Pārājikas; And for the thirteen Saṅghādisesas; There is difference of object; And indeed, there is difference of offense.

564.

564.

Pārājikāni =16 cattāri, āpajjantānamekato;

The four Pārājikas, when incurring them together; For both the monk and the nun, completely.

565.

565.

Vatthussa natthi nānattaṃ, natthi āpattinānatā;

There is no difference of object, there is no difference of offense; This is the decision when incurring them separately.

566.

566.

Atthi vatthusabhāgattaṃ, natthāpattisabhāgatā;

There is similarity of object, there is no similarity of offense; There is similarity of the arising of a case (atthāpatti), there is no similarity of object.

567.

567.

Atthi vatthusabhāgattaṃ, atthāpattisabhāgatā;

There is similarity of object, there is similarity of the arising of a case; There is no similarity of object, there is no similarity of the arising of a case.

568.

568.

Bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīnañca, kāyasaṃsaggake sati;

When there is bodily contact between monks and nuns; There is similarity of object, there is no similarity of offense.

569.

569.

Ādito pana bhikkhussa, catūsvantimavatthusu;

From the beginning, for the monk, in the last four objects; There could be similarity of offense, but not similarity of object.

570.

570.

Bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīnañca, catūsvanti mavatthusu;

For monks and nuns, in the last four objects; There is similarity of object, there is similarity of the arising of a case.

571.

571.

Sādhāraṇāsu sabbāsu, āpattīsvapyayaṃ nayo;

This rule applies to all shared offenses; there is no sharing of offenses regarding robes in unshared ones.

572.

572.

Atthāpatti upajjhāye, neva saddhivihārike;

There is an offense for the preceptor, but not for the pupil who lives with him; there is one for the pupil who lives with him, but not for the preceptor.

573.

573.

Atthāpatti upajjhāye, tathā saddhivihārike;

There is an offense for the preceptor, and likewise for the pupil who lives with him; there is no offense for the preceptor, nor for the pupil who lives with him.

574.

574.

Upajjhāyena kattabba-vattassākaraṇe pana;

But if the duties to be done by the preceptor are not done, the preceptor incurs a fault, but not the pupil who lives with him.

575.

575.

Upajjhāyassa kattabba-vattassākaraṇe pana;

But if the duties to be done to the preceptor are not done, there is no offense for the preceptor, but there is for the pupil who lives with him.

576.

576.

Sesaṃ panidha āpattiṃ, āpajjanti ubhopi ca;

Here, the rest of the offenses are committed by both; unshared offenses are not committed by either.

577.

577.

Ādiyanto garuṃ dosaṃ, payojento lahuṃ phuse;

In the beginning and end, he incurs a light offense while intending a grave one; in the beginning and end, he incurs a grave offense while intending a light one.

578.

578.

Ādiyanto =17 payojento, garukeyeva tiṭṭhati;

In the beginning and end, while intending, it remains a grave offense; in the beginning and end, while intending, it remains a light offense.

579.

579.

Pādaṃ vāpi tato uddhaṃ, ādiyanto garuṃ phuse;

In the beginning, he incurs a grave offense even up to a foot [length]; ordering "Take!" for less than a foot, he incurs a light offense.

580.

580.

Eteneva upāyena, sesakampi padattayaṃ;

By this same method, the remaining three lengths should be understood by the discerning one, according to the possibility of the meaning.

581.

581.

Kāleyeva panāpatti, no vikāle kathaṃ siyā?

Is there an offense only at the proper time, and how could it be at the wrong time? Is there an offense only at the wrong time, and how could it be at the proper time?

582.

582.

Atthāpatti hi kāle ca, vikāle ca pakāsitā?

Is there an offense declared at the proper time and at the wrong time? Is there an offense not declared at the proper time or at the wrong time?

583.

583.

Pavāretvāna bhuñjanto, kāle anatirittakaṃ;

Having invited, eating at the proper time what is not leftover, it shows that he incurs an offense at the proper time, not at the wrong time.

584.

584.

Vikālabhojanāpattiṃ, vikāle na ca kālake;

The offense of eating at the wrong time [occurs] at the wrong time, but not at the proper time; the rest [of the offenses] occur at the proper time and the wrong time, without doubt.

585.

585.

Asādhāraṇamāpattiṃ, bhikkhunīnaṃ vasā pana;

But depending on the nuns, an unshared offense is never incurred, neither at the proper time nor at the wrong time.

586.

586.

Kiṃ paṭiggahitaṃ kāle, no vikāle tu kappati?

What is proper when received at the proper time, but not at the wrong time? What is proper when received at the wrong time, but not at the proper time?

587.

587.

Kāle ceva vikāle ca, kiṃ nāma vada kappati?

What, pray tell, is proper at both the proper time and the wrong time? What, pray tell, is proper neither at the proper time nor at the wrong time?

588.

588.

Āmisaṃ tu purebhattaṃ, paṭiggahitakaṃ pana;

But having received non-staple food before the meal, it is proper for the monks only at the proper time, but not at the wrong time.

589.

589.

Pānakaṃ tu vikālasmiṃ, paṭiggahitakaṃ pana;

But having received drinks at the wrong time, it is proper only at the wrong time and at the proper time until sunrise.

590.

590.

Sattāhakālikañceva, catutthaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ;

It should be determined that what is seven-days-lasting, fourth [medicine], and as-long-as-life-lasting is proper at both the proper time and the wrong time.

591.

591.

Attano attano kāla-matītaṃ kālikattayaṃ;

The three kinds of provisions that have exceeded their time for oneself, meat, what is not allowable, and also what has been taken up [without being given].

592.

592.

Kuladūsanakammādiṃ =18, katvā uppannabhojanaṃ;

Having committed acts such as defiling families, food that has arisen is not proper for a monk at either the proper time or the wrong time.

593.

593.

Paccantimesu desesu, āpajjati na majjhime;

He incurs an offense in border areas, but not in central areas; in central areas, but not in border areas.

594.

594.

Paccantimesu desesu, āpajjati ca majjhime;

He incurs an offense in border areas and in central areas; he does not incur an offense in border areas or in central areas.

595.

595.

Sīmaṃ samudde bandhanto, bhikkhu paccantimesu hi;

Indeed, a monk in border areas incurs an offense while defining a boundary at sea; he does not incur an offense in central areas.

596.

596.

Gaṇena pañcavaggena, karonto upasampadaṃ;

When conferring the Full Acceptance with a group of five, [the use of] a leather mat, permanent bathing-cloths, a needle case with thread, and sandals with one layer.

597.

597.

Dhārento majjhime vajjaṃ, phuse paccantimesu no;

Wearing [these] in central areas, he incurs a fault, but not in border areas; for the remaining offenses, he incurs [them] in both places.

598.

598.

Asādhāraṇaāpattiṃ, bhikkhunīnaṃ vasā pana;

But depending on the nuns, a monk does not incur an unshared offense in border areas or in central areas.

599.

599.

Paccantimesu desesu, kappate na ca majjhime;

It is allowable in border areas, but not in central areas; it is allowable in central areas, but not in border areas.

600.

600.

Paccantimesu desesu, kappate, majjhimepi kiṃ?

It is allowable in border areas, but what about in central areas? And also in border areas, what is not allowable in central areas?

601.

601.

Paccantimesu desesu, vuttaṃ vatthu catubbidhaṃ;

It was said that four kinds of things are allowable in border areas, but not allowable in central areas.

602.

602.

‘‘Idaṃ catubbidhaṃ vatthu, desasmiṃ pana majjhime;

Indeed, it was said, "These four kinds of things are not allowable in central areas," [and conversely] "they are allowable only in central areas."

603.

603.

Paccantimesu desesu, evaṃ vuttaṃ na kappati;

It was said thus: what is not allowable in border areas, the rest, beginning with five salts, is allowable in both places.

604.

604.

Akappiyanti yaṃ nāma, paṭikkhittaṃ mahesinā;

Whatever is called unallowable, what was rejected by the great sage, all of that is not allowable for a monk in both places.

605.

605.

Anto āpajjatāpattiṃ, āpajjati ca, no bahi;

He incurs an offense inside, but not outside; he incurs an offense outside, but never inside.

606.

606.

Āpajjati =19 pananto ca, bahi cevubhayatthapi;

He incurs an offense inside, and also outside, in both places; he does not incur an offense inside, but he does outside.

607.

607.

Anupakhajjaseyyādiṃ, antoyeva ca, no bahi;

An anupakhajja bed etc., only inside, but not outside; but a monastic bed etc., in the open air at any place.

608.

608.

Nikkhipitvāna gacchanto, no anto, bahiyeva ca;

Going away after putting down, not inside, but only outside; for the remaining offenses, he incurs the offense both inside and outside.

609.

609.

Asādhāraṇamāpattiṃ, bhikkhunīnaṃ vasā pana;

But depending on the nuns, he never incurs an unshared offense inside or outside in any way.

610.

610.

Gāme āpajjatāpattiṃ, no araññe kathaṃ vada?

He incurs an offense in a village, but how is it not in the forest? He incurs an offense in the forest, but how is it not in the village?

611.

611.

Āpajjati ca gāmepi, araññepi kathaṃ vada?

He incurs an offense in the village, and how is it also in the forest? He does not incur an offense in the village, nor in the forest.

612.

612.

Antaragharasaṃyuttā, sekkhapaññattiyo pana;

Indeed, a monk incurs the sekhiya rules connected with the interior of a house in the village, but not in the forest.

613.

613.

Agaṇā aruṇaṃ nāma, uṭṭhāpentī ca bhikkhunī;

Indeed, a nun who raises the dawn without a quorum incurs an offense in the forest, but not in the village.

614.

614.

Musāvādādimāpattiṃ, āpajjatūbhayatthapi;

He incurs offenses such as false speech in both places; he does not incur an unshared offense anywhere.

615.

615.

Āpajjati gilānova, nāgilāno kudācanaṃ;

He incurs an offense like a sick person, but never like a healthy person; a healthy person incurs an offense, but not a sick person.

616.

616.

Agilāno gilāno ca, āpajjanti ubhopi ca;

Both a healthy person and a sick person incur offenses; neither a sick person nor a healthy person incurs offenses.

617.

617.

Bhesajjena panaññena, atthe sati ca yo pana;

Indeed, when there is need for medicine, and he asks for something other than that, that unsuitable person incurs an offense.

618.

618.

Na bhesajjena atthepi, bhesajjaṃ viññāpeti ce;

Even when there is need for medicine, if he asks for medicine, the healthy person incurs an offense, being greedy-minded.

619.

619.

Musāvādādikaṃ sesaṃ, āpajjanti ubhopi ca;

Both incur the remaining [offenses] beginning with false speech; neither incurs an unshared offense.

Catukkakathā.

Four-Category Talk.

620.

620.

Pañca =20 āpattiyo honti, musāvādassa kāraṇā;

There are five offenses due to false speech: pārājika, grave thullaccaya, pācittiya, and dukkaṭa.

621.

621.

Ānisaṃsā panuddiṭṭhā, pañceva kathinatthare;

Five benefits have been pointed out in spreading the Kathina: going without announcement, wandering without taking leave, and group meals.

622.

622.

Yo tattha cīvaruppādo, so ca nesaṃ bhavissati;

And whatever robes arise there, that will belong to them; it is also allowable to take robes as much as needed.

623.

623.

Telaṃ pañcavidhaṃ vuttaṃ, nippapañcena satthunā;

Five kinds of oil have been spoken of by the unproliferated Teacher: fat, madhuka, castor, sesame, and mustard-seed produced.

624.

624.

Acchamacchavasā ceva, susukā sūkarassa ca;

The fat of a bear, the fat of a crocodile, the fat of a pig, and the fat of a donkey: these are known as five kinds of fat.

625.

625.

Mūlakhandhaggabījāni, phaḷubījañca paṇḍito;

Roots, trunks, shoots, joints, seeds, and the wise one shows five kinds of seeds, the fifth being seed-of-a-seed.

626.

626.

Phalaṃ samaṇakappehi, paribhuñjeyya pañcahi;

One may consume fruit with five allowable means: cut by fire, by a knife, by nails, without seeds, and with the seed removed.

627.

627.

Paṇṇuṇṇatiṇacoḷānaṃ, vākassa ca vasenidha;

Here, five kinds of bandages have been spoken of by the Sage, the destroyer of delusion, namely, bandages made of leaves, wool, grass, bark-cloth, and bark.

628.

628.

Pavāraṇāpi pañceva, odanādīhi pañcahi;

There are also five invitations, with rice etc.; there are also five acceptances, with the taking of the body etc.

629.

629.

Pañcānisaṃsā vinayaññukasmiṃ;

Five benefits in one who knows the Vinaya have been spoken of by the compassionate Great Sage: one's own virtue is well protected; he dispels the doubts of others.

630.

630.

Visārado bhāsati saṅghamajjhe;

He speaks confidently in the midst of the Sangha; he easily restrains hostile monks; he is devoted to the stability of the Dhamma; therefore, the wise one should show respect there.

Pañcakakathā.

Five-Category Talk.

631.

631.

Chavacchedanakā =21 vuttā, chaḷabhiññena tādinā;

Six cuttings have been spoken of by the Accomplished One with six superknowledges: [the cutting of] a bed, a bench, a seat exceeding the measure.

632.

632.

Tathā kaṇḍupaṭicchādī, vassasāṭikacīvaraṃ;

Likewise, a cover for a boil, a rain-bathing cloth, and a robe; a robe [cut] according to the measure of the Sugata’s robe.

633.

633.

Chahākārehi āpattiṃ, āpajjati na aññathā;

One incurs an offense in six ways, not otherwise: through shamelessness, through ignorance, and likewise through doubt.

634.

634.

Viparitāya saññāya, kappiyepi akappiye;

Through a perverted perception, in what is allowable as unallowable; and certainly through loss of mindfulness, one incurs an offense, without doubt.

635.

635.

Chahi aṅgehi yuttena;

Full Acceptance should be conferred with six factors; and dependence should be given to a novice.

636.

636.

Bhikkhunāpaṭṭhapetabbo, satataṃ dhammacakkhunā;

A monk should be established constantly with the eye of the Dhamma; he knows an offense, and what is not an offense, grave and light.

637.

637.

Pātimokkhāni vitthārā, ubhayāni panassa hi;

The Pātimokkhas, both detailed, are well-learned by him, well-divided according to meaning.

638.

638.

Anubyañjanaso ceva, suttaso suvinicchitā;

Well-decided in terms of vowels, in terms of suttas; he is either ten years old or has more than ten years.

Chakkakathā.

Six-Category Talk.

639.

639.

Satta sāmīciyo vuttā, satteva samathāpi ca;

Seven kinds of proper conduct have been spoken of, and also seven factors of concentration; seven offenses have been laid down by the Seer of the seven factors of enlightenment.

Sattakakathā.

Seven-Category Talk.

640.

640.

Kulāni idha dūseti, ākārehi panaṭṭhahi;

Here, he harms families in eight ways: harming with flowers, and also with fruits, and also being a defiler with powder.

641.

641.

Mattikādantakaṭṭhehi, veḷuyā vejjikāyapi;

With earth, tooth sticks, bamboo, a surgical needle, and with a leg-messenger, for the sake of one's livelihood.

642.

642.

Aṭṭhevānatirittāpi, atirittāpi aṭṭha ca;

There are eight that are not leftover, and also eight that are leftover: what has been made unallowable, and also what has been taken up and declared.

643.

643.

Kataṃ ahatthapāsepi, na ca bhuttāvinā kataṃ;

What has been made without hand-proximity, and what has not been made without eating; and what has been made by one who has invited, and also what has been made by one who has eaten.

644.

644.

Āsanā vuṭṭhitenāpi, atirittakatampi ca;

And what has been made by one who has risen from his seat, and also what has been made extra; [and] "Enough!" has not been said, and what is not extra for a sick person.

645.

645.

Ime aṭṭheva niddiṭṭhā, ñeyyā anatirittakā;

These eight have been pointed out, [and] should be known as not leftover; but the leftover ones have been shown by the negation of these.

646.

646.

Sahapubbapayogesu, dukkaṭaṃ ñātañattisu;

In prior uses together, there is a dukkaṭa offense; in known information, there is a dukkaṭa offense; in wrongly accumulated raw food, there is a dukkaṭa offense in receiving it.

647.

647.

Aṭṭhamaṃ pana niddiṭṭhaṃ, tathā vinayadukkaṭaṃ;

648.

Ehibhikkhūpasampadā, saraṇagamanena ca;

649.

Tathā ñatticatutthena, kammenevaṭṭhavācikā;

650.

Asaddhammā panaṭṭheva, niddiṭṭhā suddhadiṭṭhinā;

651.

Sakkāro ca asakkāro;

652.

Pāṇaṃ na hane, na cādinnamādiye;

653.

Mālaṃ na dhāre, na ca gandhamācare;

654.

Aṭṭheva pana pānāni, niddiṭṭhāni mahesinā;

Aṭṭhakakathā.

655.

Bhojanāni paṇītāni, nava vuttāni satthunā;

656.

Pātimokkhassa uddesā, naveva paridīpitā;

Navakakathā.

657.

Dasa akkosavatthūni, dasa sikkhāpadāni ca;

658.

Jāti nāmañca gottañca, kammaṃ sippañca rogatā;

659.

Dasa ādīnavā rañño, antepurappavesane;

660.

Dasa kammapathā puññā, apuññāpi tathā dasa;

661.

Annaṃ pānañca vatthañca, mālā gandhavilepanaṃ;

662.

Avandiyā munindena, dīpitā dasa puggalā;

663.

Sosānikaṃ pāpaṇikaṃ, tathā undūrakhāyitaṃ;

664.

Thūpacīvarikañceva, tatheva abhisekiyaṃ;

665.

Sabbanīlādayo vuttā, dasa cīvaradhāraṇā;

Dasakakathā.

666.

Ekādasa panābhabbā, puggalā paṇḍakādayo;

667.

Pattā akappiyā vuttā, ekādasa bhavanti hi;

668.

Ekādasa tathā honti, pādukāpi akappiyā;

669.

Atikhuddātimahantā, khaṇḍacchāyānimittakā;

670.

Jātassare, samudde vā, sambhinnajjhotthaṭāpi ca;

671.

Ekādaseva pathavī, kappiyā ca akappiyā;

672.

Ekādasavidhaṃ vuttaṃ, adhiṭṭhātabbacīvaraṃ;

673.

Paccattharaṇaṃ, vassika-sāṭikā, mukhapuñchanaṃ;

674.

Yāvatatiyakā sabbe, ekādasa pakāsitā;

675.

Aṭṭha saṅghādisesesu, ubhinnaṃ tu vasā pana;

676.

Nissayassa dasekāva, paṭippassaddhiyo pana;

Ekādasakakathā.

677.

Teraseva dhutaṅgāni, paramāni ca cuddasa;

678.

Sauttaraṃ vinayavinicchayaṃ tu yo;

Ekuttaranayo samatto.

Sedamocanakathā

679.

Ito paraṃ pavakkhāmi, bhikkhūnaṃ suṇataṃ puna;

680.

Ubbhakkhakaṃ vivajjetvā, adhonābhiṃ vivajjiya;

681.

Kabandhasattakāyassa, ure hoti mukhaṃ sace;

682.

Suññe nissattake dīpe, eko bhikkhu sace vase;

683.

Lambī vā mudupiṭṭhī vā, vaccamagge mukhepi vā;

684.

Sayaṃ nādiyate kiñci, parañca na samādape;

685.

Suṅkaghāte atikkante, nādiyanto parassa tu;

686.

Haranto garukaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ, theyyacittena puggalo;

687.

Tiracchānagatānaṃ tu, puggalo garubhaṇḍakaṃ;

688.

Attano santakaṃ datvā, bhikkhu pārājiko kathaṃ?

689.

Pitari pitusaññī ca, mātusaññī ca mātari;

690.

Tiracchānagatā mātā, tiracchānagato pitā;

691.

Anādiyanto garukaṃ, parañca na samādape;

692.

Manussuttarike dhamme, katvāna katikaṃ tato;

693.

Saṅghādisesā cattāro, bhaveyyuṃ ekavatthukā;

694.

Sañcarittañca duṭṭhullaṃ, saṃsaggaṃ attakāmataṃ;

695.

Saṅghādisesamāpanno, chādetvā suciraṃ pana;

696.

Sukkavissaṭṭhimāpanno, bhikkhubhāve ṭhito pana;

697.

Kuddho ārādhako hoti;

698.

Vaṇṇasmiṃ bhaññamāne yo, titthiyānaṃ tu kujjhati;

699.

Atthaṅgate tu sūriye, bhojanaṃ bhikkhu bhuñjati;

700.

Yo ca romanthayitvāna, rattiṃ ghasati bhojanaṃ;

701.

Atthaṅgate ca sūriye, gahetvā bhikkhu bhojanaṃ;

702.

Vikāluttarakuruṃ gantvā, tattha laddhāna bhojanaṃ;

703.

Gāme vā yadi vāraññe, yaṃ paresaṃ mamāyitaṃ;

704.

Theyyasaṃvāsako nāma, liṅgasaṃvāsathenako;

705.

Nārī rūpavatī bālā, bhikkhu rattena cetasā;

706.

Bhikkhu rūpavatiṃ nāriṃ, supinantena passati;

707.

Ekissā dve siyuṃ puttā, jātā idha panitthiyā;

708.

Ubhatobyañjanā itthī, gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti attanā;

709.

Purisena sahāgāre, raho vasati bhikkhunī;

710.

Sahāgārikaseyyañca, sabbañca paṭijagganaṃ;

711.

Ko ca bhikkhūhi sikkhāsu, asādhāraṇataṃ gato;

712.

Gahetuṃ khurabhaṇḍaṃ tu, sace nhāpitapubbako;

713.

Katheti kusalaṃ dhammaṃ, paramaṃ atthasaṃhitaṃ;

714.

Katheti kusalaṃ dhammaṃ, paramaṃ atthasaṃhitaṃ;

715.

Saṃyācikaṃ karontassa, kuṭiṃ desitavatthukaṃ;

716.

Naro karoti ce kuṭiṃ, sa sabbamattikāmayaṃ;

717.

Saṃyācikāya bhikkhussa, anāpatti kathaṃ siyā;

718.

Saṃyācikaṃ karontassa, tiṇacchadanakaṃ kuṭiṃ;

719.

Na kāyikaṃ kañci payogamācare;

720.

Parassā pana yā vajjaṃ, paṭicchādeti bhikkhunī;

But a bhikkhuni who conceals another's offense
Incurs a Pārājika offense, a grave one on that account.

721.

721.

Na kāyikaṃ kiñcipi pāpamācare;

One should not commit any evil by body;
One should not do anything evil by speech;
And, being a sunāsita, one should be nāsita;
How do you say, when you are asked by me?

722.

722.

Abhabbā pana ye vuttā, puggalā paṇḍakādayo;

But those persons who are said to be incapable, such as paṇḍakas;
Eleven, by the Lord of Sages, they are nāsita and sunāsita.

723.

723.

Anuggiraṃ giraṃ kiñci, subhaṃ vā yadi vāsubhaṃ;

Without uttering any speech, whether good or bad;
One incurs a verbal offense; how do you say when asked by me?

724.

724.

Santimeva panāpattiṃ, bhikkhu nāvikareyya yo;

If a bhikkhu does not reveal an actual offense;
In a deliberate lie, a dukkaṭa is described for him.

725.

725.

Ekatoupasampannā, ubho tāsaṃ tu hatthato;

One is fully ordained, both have it in their hands;
When taking the robe, how are there different offenses?

726.

726.

Ekatoupasampannā, bhikkhūnaṃ tu vasena yā;

One is fully ordained, that which is by way of the bhikkhus;
Taking the robe from her hand, a pācitti.

727.

727.

Ekatoupasampannā, bhikkhunīnaṃ vasena yā;

One is fully ordained, that which is by way of the bhikkhunis;
Taking the robe from her hand, a dukkaṭa.

728.

728.

Saṃvidhāya ca cattāro, garuṃ theniṃsu bhaṇḍakaṃ;

Conspiring, four stole a valuable item from a theri;
The Thera incurred a thullaccaya for those, the rest a pārājika.

729.

729.

Kathaṃ? Chamāsakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ, tattha sāhatthikā tayo;

How? A six-māsaka item, three were direct actors there;
The Thera took by force for a month, and three by command.

730.

730.

Tīhi sāhatthikokeko;

One each by three direct actors;
Five taken by command;
Therefore, the Thera incurred a thullaccaya;
The rest a pārājika.

731.

731.

Bahiddhā gehato bhikkhu, itthī gabbhantaraṃ gatā;

Outside the house, a bhikkhu, a woman has entered inside the womb;
There is no hole in the house, he has fallen due to the cause of sexual intercourse.

732.

732.

Antodussakuṭiṭṭhena, mātugāmena methunaṃ;

Inside a small hut, sexual intercourse with a woman;
Having done it like using a mat, he is defeated.

733.

733.

Sappiādiṃ tu bhesajjaṃ, gahetvā sāmameva taṃ;

Having taken ghee, etc., as medicine, even he himself;
If seven days have not passed, how is there an offense when using it?

734.

734.

Parivattitaliṅgassa, bhikkhuno itarāya vā;

For a bhikkhu whose gender has changed, or for the other;
If seven days have not passed, there is an offense when using it.

735.

735.

Nissaggiyena pācitti, suddhapācittiyampi ca;

Nissaggiya pācittiya and suddha-pācittiya as well;
How can a bhikkhu incur them both at once, tell me?

736.

736.

Saṅghe pariṇataṃ lābhaṃ, attano ca parassa ca;

Profit allocated to the Sangha, both for oneself and another;
Allocating at once, one incurs both by the effort.

737.

737.

Bhikkhū samāgamma samaggasaññā;

Bhikkhus having assembled with concordant perception;
All should do the Sangha's action;
A bhikkhu stands within twelve yojanas;
How does that done become invalid due to division?

738.

738.

Atthi sace pana bhikkhu nisinno;

There is, if a bhikkhu is sitting;
In a city of twelve yojanas;
There, the action done is not an action;
If the boundary is not within the monastery.

739.

739.

Saṅghāṭi pārutā kāye, nivatthontaravāsako;

The Sangha robe is worn on the body, the under-robe is put on;
How are all the nissaggiyas incurred, tell me?

740.

740.

Kaṇṇaṃ gahetvā tattheva, kaddamaṃ yadi dhovati;

Having taken an ear, right there, if one washes off the mud;
A bhikkhuni's bodily parts, those indeed are nissaggiya.

741.

741.

Purisaṃ apitaraṃ hantvā, itthiṃ hantvā amātaraṃ;

Having killed a man who is not one's father, having killed a woman who is not one's mother;
How does a person incur an ānantarika deed?

742.

742.

Parivatte tu liṅgasmiṃ, pitaraṃ itthitaṃ gataṃ;

But when the gender has changed, the father has gone to the state of woman;
The mother to the state of man, having killed them, one incurs a grave offense.

743.

743.

Mātaraṃ pana māretvā, māretvā pitarampi ca;

Having killed the mother, and having killed the father as well;
How does a person not incur an ānantarika deed?

744.

744.

Tiracchānagatā mātā, tiracchānagato pitā;

The mother is a non-human being, the father is a non-human being;
Having killed the mother and father, one does not incur an ānantarika deed.

745.

745.

Codetvā sammukhībhūtaṃ, saṅgho kammaṃ kareyya ce;

Having accused, in the presence [of the accused], if the Sangha performs an action;
How is that action not an action, and the Sangha is with offense?

746.

746.

Vuttaṃ tu paṇḍakādīnaṃ, sandhāya upasampadaṃ;

It is said with reference to the ordination of paṇḍakas, etc.,
in the Kurundi.

747.

747.

Kappabindukataṃ rattaṃ, cīvaraṃ tu adhiṭṭhitaṃ;

A robe marked with a kappabindu is dyed, and has been determined;
How is there an offense for him, when using it, a dukkaṭa?

748.

748.

Sakaṃ anissajitvāna, yo nissaggiyacīvaraṃ;

Without relinquishing his own nissaggiya robe;
Whatever robe he uses, that offense is declared.

749.

749.

Pañca pācittiyāneva, nānāvatthukatāni hi;

Five pācittiyas, indeed, with different objects;
How are they incurred, non-preceding, non-final, in one moment?

750.

750.

Bhesajjāni hi pañceva, gahetvā bhājane visuṃ;

Indeed, the five medicines, having taken them separately in a vessel;
When seven days have passed, all five are incurred.

751.

751.

Na rattacitto na ca theyyacitto;

Not with lustful mind, nor with thieving mind;
Nor is the mind for his death;
The Teacher declared a pārājika for the giver;
A thullaccaya for the receiver of that.

752.

752.

Salākaṃ saṅghabhedāya, padentassa parājayo;

For one giving a ballot for division of the Sangha, a pārājika;
There is a thullaccaya for him, for receiving the ballot.

753.

753.

Ekattha nikkhipitvāna, cīvaraṃ addhayojane;

Having placed the robe in one place, at half a yojana;
For one raising the dawn, how is there no offense?

754.

754.

Suppatiṭṭhitanigrodha-sadise rukkhamūlake;

At the root of a tree similar to a well-established nigrodha tree;
There is no offense, indeed, if that tree belongs to one family.

755.

755.

Kathaṃ āpattiyo nānā-;

How are different offenses—;
Indeed, the body is the object;
Non-preceding, non-final, in one—;
Moment, many are incurred?

756.

756.

Nānitthīnaṃ tu kese vā, tāsaṃ aṅguliyopi vā;

Indeed, the hair of women, or their fingers;
For one taking them all at once, many are incurred.

757.

757.

Kathaṃ vācasikā nānā-vatthukāyo na kāyikā;

How are verbal offenses, with different objects, not bodily;
Non-preceding, non-final, in one moment, offenses incurred?

758.

758.

Duṭṭhullaṃ yo vadati ca vācaṃ;

He speaks abusive words;
"All of you are lewd";
Faults are stated in the Vinaya treatise;
For those women, according to their number.

759.

759.

Itthiyā purisenāpi, paṇḍakena nimittake;

By a woman, by a man, or by a paṇḍaka, with an artificial organ;
Not engaging in sexual intercourse, is he expelled due to the cause of sexual intercourse?

760.

760.

Methune pubbabhāgaṃ tu, kāyasaṃsaggataṃ gatā;

In sexual intercourse, the preliminary action has reached bodily contact;
Expulsion due to the cause of sexual intercourse, he has incurred the eight-fold basis.

761.

761.

Mātaraṃ cīvaraṃ yāce, saṅghe pariṇataṃ na ca;

He asks his mother for a robe, not allocated to the Sangha;
What offense is there for him, and no offense for a relative?

762.

762.

Vassasāṭikalābhatthaṃ, samaye piṭṭhisaññite;

For the sake of obtaining a rain-bathing cloth, at the time called piṭṭhi;
There is an offense when creating an intention, even towards his mother.

763.

763.

Saṅghādisesamāpattiṃ, pācittiṃ dukkaṭaṃ kathaṃ;

How does one incur a saṅghādisesa offense, a pācitti, a dukkaṭa;
A pāṭidesanīya, a thullaccaya in one moment?

764.

764.

Avassutāvassutahatthato hi;

From the hand of one who has not received, and who has received;
Having taken alms food, garlic, delicious food;
Human flesh, and other unallowable [food];
He eats all at once, those are incurred by him.

765.

765.

Eko upajjhāyakapuggaleko;

One preceptor, one person;
Two teachers, and also full years;
One procedural statement for them;
Why does the action not stand for one?

766.

766.

Kesaggamattampi mahiddhikesu;

Even the tip of a hair among those of great power;
If one is going in the sky, indeed;
That action done does not stand;
For one in the sky, not for one on the ground.

767.

767.

Saṅghenapi hi ākāse, ṭhitena pana iddhiyā;

Even by the Sangha, standing in the sky, by power;
It should not be done for one on the ground; if it is done, it becomes invalid.

768.

768.

Na ca kappakataṃ vatthaṃ, na ca rattaṃ akappiyaṃ;

The cloth is not allowable, nor is the dyed [cloth] unallowable;
For one wearing it, how is there an offense, or no offense?

769.

769.

Acchinnacīvarassettha, bhikkhussa pana kiñcipi;

For a bhikkhu whose robe is torn, in this case, nothing;
There is no unallowable robe for him; the robe exists.

770.

770.

Na kutopi ca gaṇhati kiñci have;

He does not take anything from anywhere;
Nor does he give anything from food;
How does he incur a grave offense?
Tell me, if you are skilled in the Vinaya?

771.

771.

Ādāya yaṃ kiñci avassutamhā;

Having taken something from one who has not received;
If she, expelled, eats food;
She, expelled, by whom, for whom;
The wise declare a saṅghādisesa.

772.

772.

Kassaci kiñci na deti sahatthā;

He does not give anything with his own hand to anyone;
Nor does he take anything from anywhere;
He incurs a light offense, not a grave one;
Tell me how, if you understand well?

773.

773.

Dantaponodakānaṃ tu, gahaṇe pana bhikkhunī;

For a bhikkhuni, in the taking of tooth-cleaning sticks and water;
Expelling, she incurs a light offense, when using them.

774.

774.

Āpajjati panāpattiṃ, garukaṃ sāvasesakaṃ;

He incurs an offense, a grave one with remainder;
He conceals [it], he does not incur the offense; how do you know, tell me?

775.

775.

Saṅghādisesamāpattiṃ, āpajjitvā anādaro;

Having incurred a saṅghādisesa offense, he is disrespectful;
Even concealing that offense, he does not incur another expulsion.

776.

776.

Sappāṇappāṇajaṃ neva, jaṅgamaṃ na vihaṅgamaṃ;

Not with living beings, not with non-living beings, not moving, not flying;
Biped, desired and undesired, if you know, tell me?

777.

777.

Sappāṇappāṇajo vutto;

Said to be with living beings and non-living beings;
Born of mind and also of heat;
Because of being born from two;
The sound is dead, therefore it is called biped.

778.

778.

Vinaye anayūparame parame;

In the Vinaya, the cessation of evil, supreme, the supreme;
Bringing happiness to a good person, guiding;
He is skilled, devoted to effort, not delighting;
Here, indeed, he delights in considering the essence.

Sedamocanagāthāyo samattā.

The Sedamocana verses are complete.

Sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇakathā
Common and Uncommon Discourse

779.

779.

Sabbasikkhāpadānāhaṃ, nidānaṃ gaṇanampi ca;

All the training rules, I will speak of the origin and the count;
For bhikkhus and bhikkhunis, by bhikkhus for bhikkhunis.

780.

780.

Asādhāraṇapaññattaṃ, tathā sādhāraṇampi ca;

Uncommonly prescribed, and commonly as well;
I will speak briefly, listen to it attentively.

781.

781.

Nidānaṃ nāma vesālī, tathā rājagahaṃ puraṃ;

The origin is named Vesālī, and also the city of Rājagaha;
Sāvatthi, Āḷavi, Kosambi, and Sakkabhagga are declared.

782.

782.

Kati vesāliyā vuttā, kati rājagahe katā?

How many are said in Vesālī, how many were made in Rājagaha?
How many are prescribed in Sāvatthi, how many were made in Āḷavi?

783.

783.

Kati kosambipaññattā, kati sakkesu bhāsitā?

How many are prescribed in Kosambi, how many are spoken in the Sakyan land?
How many are prescribed in the Bhaggan land, explain it to me when asked?

784.

784.

Dasa vesāliyā vuttā, ekavīsa giribbaje;

Ten are said in Vesālī, twenty-one in Giribbaja;
Six hundred less three, were made in Sāvatthi.

785.

785.

Cha panāḷaviyaṃ vuttā, aṭṭha kosambiyaṃ katā;

Six are said in Āḷavi, eight were made in Kosambi;
Eight are prescribed in the Sakyan land, three are declared in the Bhaggan land.

786.

786.

Methunaṃ viggaho ceva, catutthantimavatthukaṃ;

Sexual intercourse and quarreling, the fourth and final object;
Excess robes, pure black goat's hair.

787.

787.

Bhūtaṃ paramparañceva, mukhadvāramacelako;

Ghosts, one after another, mouth-door, naked ascetics;
And abuse towards bhikkhunis, ten were made in Vesālī.

788.

788.

Dutiyantimavatthuñca, dve anuddhaṃsanāni ca;

The second and final object, two instances of knocking down;
Two divisions of the Sangha, and acceptance of robes.

789.

789.

Rūpiyaṃ suttaviññatti, tathā ujjhāpanampi ca;

Silver, requesting thread, and also complaining;
Well-cooked alms food, and likewise communal meals.

790.

790.

Vikālabhojanañceva, cārittaṃ nhānameva ca;

Untimely meals, wandering and bathing;
Giving robes with the Sangha for one under twenty years of age.

791.

791.

Vosāsantī ca naccaṃ vā, gītaṃ vā cārikadvayaṃ;

Dancing or singing at Vosāsantī, two wanderings; these twenty-one were established in Rājagaha by giving approval.

792.

792.

Kuṭi kosiyaseyyañca, pathavībhūtagāmakaṃ;

The kuṭi, Kosiya's bed, the earth-become village; they sprinkle living beings, these six were done at Chāḷavi.

793.

793.

Mahallakavihāro ca, dovacassaṃ tatheva ca;

The old monastery and likewise being difficult to admonish; differently, the two doors, the treasure, and the middle fifth.

794.

794.

Anādariyaṃ sahadhammo, payopānañca sekhiye;

Disrespect and the true Dhamma, and the drinking of milk in the Sekhiya rules; these eight were established at Kosambī by one of pure view.

795.

795.

Dhovaneḷakalomāni, patto ca dutiyo pana;

Clippings of eḷaka wool, and the bowl also the second; advice and medicine, a needle in the wildernesses.

796.

796.

Udakasuddhikañceva, ovādāgamanampi ca;

And even water purification, and the arrival for advice; these eight were established in the city of Kapilavatthu.

797.

797.

Jotiṃ samādahitvāna, sāmisena sasitthakaṃ;

Having established the lamp, with meat, with sitthaka; these three were established in the land of the Bhaggas by the kinsman of the sun.

798.

798.

Pārājikāni cattāri, garukā soḷasā, duve;

Four Pārājikas, sixteen heavy offenses, two Aniyata; thirty-four Nissaggiyas there are indeed.

799.

799.

Chappaṇṇāsasatañceva, khuddakāni bhavanti hi;

One hundred fifty-six, minor ones there are indeed; only ten Garayhas, and seventy-two Sekhiyas.

800.

800.

Chaūnāni ca tīṇeva, satāni samacetasā;

Three hundred less six with a well-composed mind; these remaining ones spoken of, all were done at Sāvatthī.

801.

801.

Pārājikāni cattāri, satta saṅghādisesakā;

Four Pārājikas, seven Saṅghādisesas; eight Nissaggiyas, and thirty-two minor ones.

802.

802.

Dve gārayhā, tayo sekhā, chappaññāseva sabbaso;

Two Garayhas, three Sekhiyas, fifty-six in all; were established in six cities, collected together.

803.

803.

Sabbāneva panetāni, nagaresu ca sattasu;

All of these, in seven cities; one hundred and fifty, were established indeed.

804.

804.

Sikkhāpadāni bhikkhūnaṃ, vīsañca dve satāni ca;

The training rules for monks, two hundred and twenty; but for nuns, three hundred and four.

805.

805.

Pārājikāni cattāri, garukā pana terasa;

Four Pārājikas, thirteen heavy offenses; two Aniyatas were spoken, and thirty Nissaggiyas.

806.

806.

Khuddakā navuti dve ca, cattāro pāṭidesanā;

Ninety-two minor ones, four Pāṭidesanīyas; seventy-five Sekhiyas, designated without complication.

807.

807.

Dve satāni ca vīsañca, vasā bhikkhūnameva ca;

Two hundred and twenty, the monastic life of monks only; the training rules come to utterance on the Uposatha day.

808.

808.

Pārājikāni aṭṭheva, garukā dasa satta ca;

Eight Pārājikas, seventeen heavy offenses; thirty Nissaggiyas, and one hundred sixty-six.

809.

809.

Khuddakānaṭṭha gārayhā, pañcasattati sekhiyā;

Eight minor Garayhas, seventy-five Sekhiyas; all three hundred and four.

810.

810.

Bhavanti pana etāni, bhikkhunīnaṃ vasā pana;

These are indeed, the monastic life of nuns; the training rules come to utterance on the Uposatha day.

811.

811.

Chacattālīsa honteva, bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīhi tu;

Forty-six there are, by monks from nuns; the Great Sage brought about the state of being not in common.

812.

812.

Cha ca saṅghādisesā ca, tathā aniyatā duve;

Six Saṅghādisesas, and two Aniyatas likewise; twelve Nissaggiyas, and twenty-two minor ones.

813.

813.

Cattāropi ca gārayhā, chacattālīsa hontime;

Four Garayhas too, forty-six there are; established by Gotama the glorious for monks only.

814.

814.

Visaṭṭhi kāyasaṃsaggo, duṭṭhullaṃ attakāmatā;

Touching the body immodestly, offense, acting according to one's desires; a kuṭi and a monastery, these six are heavy offenses.

815.

815.

Nissaggiyādivaggasmiṃ, dhovanañca paṭiggaho;

In the Nissaggiyādika Vagga, washing and acceptance; in the Eḷakaloma Vagga too, the first seven.

816.

816.

Tatiyepi ca vaggasmiṃ, patto ca paṭhamo tathā;

In the third Vagga too, the bowl is the first; a rains-cloth, an āraññaka—thus twelve are indicated.

817.

817.

Pācittiyāni vuttāni, sabbāni gaṇanāvasā;

The Pācittiyas that were spoken, all in the calculation; for monks and nuns, one hundred eighty-eight, after that.

818.

818.

Sabbo bhikkhunivaggopi, saparamparabhojano;

The entire nun's vagga, and eating in unbroken succession; likewise being not satisfied, urging to bring near.

819.

819.

Paṇītabhojanaviññatti, tathevācelakopi ca;

Soliciting fine food, and likewise an ācelaka; being invited and a community meal, and concealing an offense.

820.

820.

Ūnavīsativassaṃ tu, mātugāmena saddhipi;

Being under twenty years, and together with a woman; entering the inner apartments, a rains-cloth, a sitting cloth.

821.

821.

Khuddakāni panetāni, dvāvīsati bhavanti hi;

These minor ones, twenty-two there are indeed; four Garayhas for monks in the Pātimokkha.

822.

822.

Ekato pana paññattā, chacattālīsa hontime;

Established from one source, forty-six there are; by nuns from monks, gone to the state of being not in common.

823.

823.

Bhikkhūhi bhikkhunīnañca, sataṃ tiṃsa bhavanti hi;

By monks from nuns, one hundred and thirty there are; the Great Sage brought about the state of being not in common.

824.

824.

Pārājikāni cattāri, dasa saṅghādisesakā;

Four Pārājikas, ten Saṅghādisesas; twelve Nissaggiyas, and ninety-six minor ones.

825.

825.

Aṭṭheva pana gārayhā, sataṃ tiṃsa bhavantime;

Eight Garayhas indeed, one hundred thirty there are; by monks from nuns, gone to the state of being not in common.

826.

826.

Bhikkhunīnaṃ tu saṅghādi-sesehi cha panādito;

In the Saṅghādisesa rules for nuns, six are first; up to the third one, these four make ten.

827.

827.

Akālacīvarañceva, tathā acchinnacīvaraṃ;

An unseasonal robe, and likewise an unsevered robe; the seven beginning with aññadatthikā, the bowl, heavy and light.

828.

828.

Dvādaseva panetāni, bhikkhunīnaṃ vasenidha;

These twelve, with reference to nuns here; Nissaggiyas were established by the Teacher from one source.

829.

829.

Asādhāraṇapaññattā, khuddakā navuticcha ca;

Minor ones established as not in common, ninety-six; and eight Garayhas, all are included in the calculation.

830.

830.

Bhikkhunīnaṃ tu bhikkhūhi, asādhāraṇataṃ gatā;

By monks, from nuns, gone to the state of being not in common; established from one source, one hundred and thirty there are indeed.

831.

831.

Asādhāraṇubhinnampi, sataṃ sattati caccha ca;

What is not in common for both, one hundred seventy-six; four Pārājikas, and sixteen heavy offenses.

832.

832.

Aniyatā duve ceva, nissaggā catuvīsati;

Two Aniyatas also, twenty-four Nissaggiyas; one hundred eighteen, minor ones are explained here.

833.

833.

Dvādaseva ca gārayhā, sataṃ sattati caccha ca;

Twelve Garayhas also, one hundred seventy-six; what is not in common for both, these are explained.

834.

834.

Sādhāraṇā ubhinnampi, paññattā pana satthunā;

What is in common for both, established by the Teacher; one hundred seventy-four, it is declared that there are.

835.

835.

Pārājikāni cattāri, satta saṅghādisesakā;

Four Pārājikas, seven Saṅghādisesas; eighteen Nissaggiyas, seventy-seven minor ones.

836.

836.

Pañcasattati paññattā, sekhiyāpi ca sabbaso;

Seventy-five Sekhiyas were established, entirely; one hundred seventy-four, equal in training for both.

Sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇakathā.

The Discourse on What Is in Common and Not in Common.

Lakkhaṇakathā
Discourse on Characteristics

837.

837.

Ito paraṃ pavakkhāmi, lakkhaṇaṃ pana sabbagaṃ;

After this, I will speak of the characteristics entirely; having made careful listening, understand me as I speak.

838.

838.

Nidānaṃ puggalo vatthu, paññattividhimeva ca;

Basis, individual, object, and the way of designation; failure, offense, transgression, command, limb, and action also.

839.

839.

Saññācittasamuṭṭhānaṃ, vajjakammapabhedakaṃ;

Cognition, thought, origination, division of faulty action; this pair of triads is to be connected everywhere.

840.

840.

Pubbe vuttanayaṃ yañca, yañca uttānamevidha;

And whatever was said earlier, and whatever is clearly explained; having avoided all that, we will make the meaning clear.

841.

841.

Puggalonāma yaṃ yaṃ tu, bhikkhumārabbha bhikkhuniṃ;

Individual means whichever training rule is established regarding a monk or a nun; this is called an individual.

842.

842.

Tevīsatividhā te ca, sudinnadhaniyādayo;

Those are of twenty-three kinds, Suddina, Dhaniya, and so on; individuals who are the cause in the Pātimokkha for monks.

843.

843.

Bhikkhunīnaṃ tathā pāti-mokkhasmiṃ ādikammikā;

Likewise, in the Pātimokkha for nuns, those who are the cause; Thullanandā and so on, seven, all become thirty.

844.

844.

Vatthūti puggalasseva, tassa tassa ca sabbaso;

Object is just that individual, of each and every one; the transgression of that object of each of those, is called misconduct (ajjhācāra).

845.

845.

paññatti,mūlabhūtā tatheva sā;

Designation, the root cause and thus that; the anvānupaññatti in all cases, having words and phrases before.

846.

846.

Sādhāraṇā ca paññatti, tathāsādhāraṇāpi ca;

The designation in common, and likewise the designation not in common; having one origin or two, thus it is of nine kinds.

847.

847.

Tattha ‘‘yo methunaṃ dhammaṃ, paṭiseveyya bhikkhu’’ti;

Therein, "Whoever monk should engage in sexual intercourse"; "Whoever should take what is not given," the designation is thus and so on.

848.

848.

Hoti ‘‘antamaso bhikkhu, tiracchānagatāyapi’’;

It is "even a monk, with an animal"; the anupaññatti is indicated.

849.

849.

nuppannapaññatti,anuppanne tu vajjake;

Nuppannapaññatti, the designation that has not arisen, in a fault that has not arisen; it comes only in connection with the eight heavy rules.

850.

850.

Cammattharaṇakañceva, saguṇaṅguṇupāhanaṃ;

A leather mat, and a needle with string, a needle case; and likewise the expelling, the ordination with a group of five.

851.

851.

padesapaññatti,nāmāti hi catubbidhā;

Padesapaññatti is named as fourfold; it exists only in the Middle Country, not elsewhere.

852.

852.

sabbattha-paññattīti pakāsitā;

Sabbattha-paññatti is declared; in meaning it is only one, the pair of divisions in common and so on.

853.

853.

Sāṇattikāpanāpatti, hotināṇattikāpi ca;

Sāṇattikā (by command) is an offense, and it is nāṇattikā (not by command) also; this designation is named Āṇattī (command), it should be understood as an announcement (āṇāpanā).

854.

854.

Āpattīnaṃ tu sabbāsaṃ, sabbasikkhāpadesupi;

Of all the offenses, in all the training rules; all the divisions of the limbs, should be understood by one who discerns.

855.

855.

Kāyenapi ca vācāya, yā karontassa jāyate;

By body or by speech, that which arises for one who is doing; kriyasamuṭṭhānā (arising from action) by name, like the Pārājikas.

856.

856.

Kāyavācāhi kattabbaṃ, akarontassa hoti yā;

To be done by body and speech, that which arises for one who is not doing; cākriyasamuṭṭhānā (arising from non-action), like in the first Kathina.

857.

857.

Karontassākarontassa, bhikkhuno hoti yā pana;

For a monk who is doing or not doing, that which arises; kriyākriyato (arising from action and non-action), like in the acceptance of a robe.

858.

858.

Siyā pana karontassa, akarontassa yā siyā;

It may be for one who is doing, that which may be for one who is not doing; kriyākriyato (arising from action and non-action), like in the acceptance of silver.

859.

859.

Tathā siyā karontassa;

Likewise, it may be for one who is doing;
That which is for one who is doing or not doing;
It may be arising from action indeed;
And also kriyākriyato (arising from action and non-action).

860.

860.

Sabbā cāpattiyo saññā-;

All offenses, by way of perception;
May be of two kinds;
Saññāvimokkhā (released by perception) and nosaññāvimokkhā (not released by perception); it is declared.

861.

861.

Vītikkamanasaññāya, abhāvena yato pana;

Because of the absence of the perception of transgression; it is declared to be saññā-vimokkhā (released by perception).

862.

862.

nosaññā-vimokkhāti pakāsitā;

nosaññā-vimokkhā (not released by perception) is declared; again all by way of thought, may be of two kinds.

863.

863.

Sacittakā acittāti, sucittena pakāsitā;

Sacittakā (with thought) and acittā (without thought), well declared with thought; by way of arising with thought, that which may be.

864.

864.

sacittakānāma, āpatti paridīpitā;

sacittakā (with thought) is the name, the offense is explained; macittakā (without thought).

865.

865.

Sabbā cāpattiyo vajja-vasena duvidhā rutā;

All offenses by way of fault, are said to be of two kinds; the well-known faultless, and that which is a fault by worldly convention.

866.

866.

Yassā sacittake pakkhe, cittaṃ akusalaṃ siyā;

In whose case with thought, the thought may be unwholesome; Lokavajjā (fault of the world) is the name, the rest are paṇṇattivajjakā (faults by designation).

867.

867.

Sabbā cāpattiyo kamma-vasena tividhā siyuṃ;

All offenses by way of action, may be of three kinds; Kāyakammaṃ (bodily action), vacīkammaṃ (verbal action), and likewise that which is both.

868.

868.

Tikadvayanti nāmetaṃ, kusalāditikadvayaṃ;

Tikadvaya (pair of triads) is the name, that pair of triads beginning with wholesome; with wholesome or unwholesome thought, or likewise with mind that is indeterminate.

869.

869.

Hutvā āpajjatāpattiṃ, āpajjanto na aññathā;

Having done so, he incurs an offense; not otherwise when incurring it;
Or he is endowed with pleasant feeling, or likewise connected with painful feeling, etc.

870.

870.

Idaṃ tu lakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ, sabbasikkhāpadesupi;

This characteristic is stated in all the training rules;
The expert in the Vinaya should apply it and then demonstrate it.

871.

871.

Taruṃ timūlaṃ navapattamenaṃ;

Who knows the tree with three roots and nine leaves,
With four crests, seven fruits, and six blossoms,
Who knows what has two origins and two branches,
He knows the paññatti completely.

872.

872.

Imamuttaraṃ gatamanuttarataṃ;

He who masters and questions this unsurpassed teaching,
Approaches the unsurpassed teaching from the unsurpassed;
He is in the Vinaya regarding bodily and verbal discipline.

Lakkhaṇakathā.

Lakkhaṇakathā.

873.

873.

Soḷasaparivārassa, parivārassa sabbaso;

Hereafter, I will explain the method of complete compilation
Of the sixteen pārivāra chapters, in their entirety.

874.

874.

Kati āpattiyo vuttā;

How many offenses are stated?
How many are bodily, how many are verbal?
What offense does one incur by concealing?
How many are due to association?

875.

875.

Kāyikā chabbidhāpatti, tathā vācasikāpi ca;

Bodily offenses are sixfold, and so are verbal ones;
For concealing, there are three, and five are due to association.

876.

876.

Kati āpattimūlāni, paññattāni mahesinā?

How many āpatti-mūlāni have been laid down by the great seer?
How many offenses are stated for concealing a serious offense (duṭṭhulla)?

877.

877.

Dve panāpattimūlāni, kāyo vācā bhavanti hi;

There are two āpatti-mūlāni, namely body and speech;
Pārājika and pācittiya result from concealing a duṭṭhulla.

878.

878.

Kati gāmantare vuttā, nadīpāre tathā kati?

How many offenses are stated in another village, and how many across a river?
How many thullaccaya offenses are there regarding meat, and how many dukkaṭa regarding meats?

879.

879.

Gāmantare catassova, nadīpārepi tattakā;

There are four offenses in another village, and just as many across a river;
There is a thullaccaya offense regarding human flesh, and nine dukkaṭa offenses regarding meats.

880.

880.

Bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ, saṃvidhāti ca dukkaṭaṃ;

If a bhikkhu makes an arrangement with a bhikkhuni, it is a dukkaṭa offense;
If he exceeds the boundary of a village unknown as to offenses, it is a pācittiya.

881.

881.

Thullaccayaṃ parikkhitte, gāmasmiṃ paṭhame pade;

It is a thullaccaya offense within the defined area, in the first step in the village;
It is a serious offense for her in the second, when going to another village.

882.

882.

Tathā bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ, saṃvidhāne tu dukkaṭaṃ;

Likewise, in making an arrangement with a bhikkhuni, it is a dukkaṭa offense;
If he embarks on a boat, it is a pācittiya offense for the bhikkhu.

883.

883.

Nadiyuttaraṇe kāle, pāde thullaccayaṃ phuse;

At the time of crossing the river, he incurs a thullaccaya offense in the first step;
In the second, it is a serious offense for the bhikkhuni.

884.

884.

Kati vācasikā rattiṃ, kati vācasikā divā?

How many verbal offenses at night, how many verbal offenses during the day?
Two verbal offenses at night, two verbal offenses during the day.

885.

885.

Rattandhakāre purisena saddhiṃ;

In the darkness of night, with a man,
Standing without a lamp within arm's reach,
If she converses, it is a pācittiya offense;
If she speaks from afar, it is only a dukkaṭa.

886.

886.

Channe divā yā purisena saddhiṃ;

In the daytime, in a covered place, with a man,
Standing, if she speaks within arm's reach,
It is a pācittiya offense; but having left arm's reach,
If she speaks, it is only a dukkaṭa offense for her.

887.

887.

Kati vā dadamānassa, kati vā paṭigaṇhato?

How many offenses for the one giving, how many for the one receiving?
Three offenses for the one giving, four for the one receiving.

888.

888.

Manussassa visaṃ deti, sace marati tena so;

If one gives poison to a human being and he dies from it,
It is a pārājika offense; to a yakkha or a ghost, it is considered a thullaccaya offense.

889.

889.

Tiracchānagate tena, mate pācittiyaṃ siyā;

If a non-human animal dies from it, it is a pācittiya offense;
Likewise, a pācittiya offense if one gives a robe to a relative-less person.

890.

890.

Hatthagāhe tathā veṇi-gāhe saṅghādisesatā;

Taking hold of the hand or braid is a saṅghādisesa offense;
Grasping the sexual organ with the mouth is a pārājika.

891.

891.

Aññātikāya hatthamhā, cīvarassa paṭiggahe;

Receiving a robe from the hand of a non-relative;
A pācittiya offense with relinquishment, it is fully learned.

892.

892.

Avassutassa hatthamhā, sayaṃ vāpi avassutā;

From the hand of one not fully ordained, or even by oneself not fully ordained;
It is a thullaccaya offense for her, when receiving food.

893.

893.

Kati ñatticatutthena, vuttā sammutiyo idha?

How many formal acts (ñatticatuttha) are stated here?
Only one is specified: the authorization to admonish bhikkhunis.

894.

894.

Kati dhaññarasā vuttā, vikāle kappiyā pana?

How many kinds of permitted juices are stated for the afternoon?
Salt and sovīraka are the one kind considered permitted in the afternoon.

895.

895.

Kati pārājikā kāyā, kati saṃvāsabhūmiyo?

How many pārājika offenses from the body, how many grounds for association?
Cutting off at night for how many, and how many finger-breadths are prescribed?

896.

896.

Pārājikāni kāyamhā, dve dve saṃvāsabhūmiyo;

Two pārājika offenses from the body, two grounds for association;
Cutting off at night for two, and two finger-breadths are prescribed.

897.

897.

Paṭhamantimavatthuñca, kāyasaṃsaggajampi ca;

The first and last object, and that born from bodily contact;
These two pārājika offenses from the body are produced.

898.

898.

Samānasaṃvāsakabhūmi ekā;

One ground for association is based on shared residence;
And likewise, one is preceded by different padas;
Indeed, these are the two grounds for association
Spoken by the compassionate Great Seer.

899.

899.

Pārivāsikabhikkhussa, tathā mānattacārino;

Cutting off at night for two, for the bhikkhu undergoing parivāsa and for the one practicing mānatta,
Is illuminated by the passing of two (nights).

900.

900.

Dvaṅgulapabbaparamaṃ, ādātabbaṃ, tatheva ca;

The utmost is a finger-breadth at the knot, and likewise,
Two finger-breadths or two months, these are the two prescribed finger-breadths.

901.

901.

Kati pāṇātipātasmiṃ, vācā pārājikā kati?

How many verbal offenses are there in killing a living being, how many pārājika?
How many are stated in flattery, and how many in acting as a go-between?

902.

902.

Tisso pāṇātipātasmiṃ;

Three in killing a living being;
Three verbal pārājika offenses;
Three are stated in flattery;
And likewise, three in acting as a go-between.

903.

903.

Anodissakamopāte, khate marati mānuso;

If, digging without aiming, a human being dies,
It is a pārājika offense; if a yakkha or ghost dies, it is a thullaccaya offense.

904.

904.

Tiracchānagate tattha, mate pācittiyaṃ vade;

If an animal dies there, one should declare it a pācittiya offense;
These are the three offenses in killing a living being.

905.

905.

Manussamāraṇādinnā-dānamāṇattiyāpi ca;

Three verbal offenses for killing a human being, for taking what is not given, for mānatta
And for speaking of superhuman qualities.

906.

906.

Maggadvayaṃ panodissa, vaṇṇādibhaṇane garuṃ;

Addressing the two paths, a serious offense for speaking of color, etc.;
A thullaccaya offense for addressing the groin, knee, or eye.

907.

907.

Ubbhakkhakamadhojāṇu-mādissa bhaṇato pana;

For speaking addressing below the eye or above the knee,
A dukkaṭa offense is specified; these are the three acts of flattery.

908.

908.

Paṭiggaṇhanatādīhi, tīhi saṅghādisesatā;

Through three acts of receiving, etc., it is a saṅghādisesa offense;
A thullaccaya offense is stated through two, and a dukkaṭa through one.

909.

909.

Chindato kati āpatti, chaḍḍitappaccayā kati?

How many offenses for cutting, how many caused by throwing away?
Three for the one cutting, five caused by throwing away.

910.

910.

Hoti pārājikaṃ tassa, chindantassa vanappatiṃ;

It is a pārājika offense for him, the one cutting a tree;
A pācittiya offense for plant life, and a thullaccaya for a sexual organ.

911.

911.

Visaṃ chaḍḍetyanodissa, manusso marati tena ce;

If, throwing poison without aiming, a human dies from it,
It is a pārājika offense; if a yakkha dies, a thullaccaya offense for a ghost.

912.

912.

Tiracchāne tu pācitti, visaṭṭhichaḍḍane garuṃ;

A pācittiya for an animal; a serious offense for throwing away remnants;
It is considered a dukkaṭa offense for throwing away excrement or urine.

913.

913.

Gacchato katidhāpatti, ṭhitassa kati me vada?

How many offenses for one going, how many for one standing, tell me?
How many for one sitting, and how many for one lying down?

914.

914.

Gacchantassa catassova, ṭhitassāpi ca tattakā;

Four for the one going, and just as many for the one standing;
Four for the one sitting, and just as many for the one lying down.

915.

915.

Bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ, saṃvidhāne tu dukkaṭaṃ;

If a bhikkhu makes an arrangement with a bhikkhuni, it is a dukkaṭa offense;
If he exceeds the boundary of a village unknown as to offenses, it is a pācittiya.

916.

916.

Thullaccayaṃ parikkhitte, gāmasmiṃ paṭhame pade;

It is a thullaccaya offense within the defined area, in the first step in the village;
It is a serious offense in the second, when going to another village.

917.

917.

Paṭicchanne panokāse, bhikkhunī mittasanthavā;

In a concealed place, the bhikkhuni is on friendly terms;
If she stands within arm's reach of a man, it is a pācittiya offense.

918.

918.

Hatthapāsaṃ jahitvāna, sace tiṭṭhati dukkaṭaṃ;

Having left arm's reach, if she stands, it is a dukkaṭa offense;
At the time of sunrise, a second arm's reach.

919.

919.

Hitvā tiṭṭhantiyā tassā, thullaccayamudīritaṃ;

For her, standing having left, a thullaccaya offense is declared;
If she stands having left, it is a saṅghādisesa offense.

920.

920.

Nisinnāya catassova, nipannāyāpi tattakā;

Four for the one sitting, and just as many for the one lying down;
They are of the kind stated before; they should be understood by one skilled in the Vinaya.

921.

921.

Yāvatatiyake vuttā, kati āpattiyo vada?

How many offenses are stated regarding "as long as it takes three times?"
Listen to the three offenses stated regarding "as long as it takes three times."

922.

922.

Phuse pārājikāpattiṃ, ukkhittassānuvattikā;

He incurs a pārājika offense, the follower of one who is expelled;
A saṅghādisesa offense, the follower of one who divides the Sangha.

923.

923.

Anissagge tu pācitti, pāpikāya ca diṭṭhiyā;

A pācittiya offense for non-relinquishment, and for wrong view;
These are the three offenses regarding "as long as it takes three times."

924.

924.

Khādato kati niddiṭṭhā, bhojanappaccayā kati?

How many offenses are specified for eating, how many reasons for eating?
Three offenses for the one eating, five reasons for food.

925.

925.

Thullaccayaṃ manussānaṃ, maṃsaṃ khādati, dukkaṭaṃ;

A thullaccaya offense if one eats human flesh, a dukkaṭa offense;
A pācittiya offense for the remaining kinds of flesh, for eating garlic.

926.

926.

Avassutassa posassa, hatthato hi avassutā;

From the hand of a man not fully ordained, or even by herself not fully ordained;
Having taken any food, all meat is unlawful.

927.

927.

Viññāpetvāna attatthaṃ, gahetvā bhojanampi ca;

Having requested for oneself, and also having taken food,
And having mixed in garlic, consuming it all at once.

928.

928.

Thullaccayañca pācitti, pāṭidesaniyampi ca;

A thullaccaya, a pācittiya, a pāṭidesanīya,
And a dukkaṭa and a serious offense, these are the five offenses.

929.

929.

Olokentassa niddiṭṭhā, kati āpattiyo vada?

How many offenses are specified for looking?
One offense is specified for looking by the Great Seer.

930.

930.

Dukkaṭaṃ rattacittena, aṅgajātaṃ panitthiyā;

A dukkaṭa offense for looking with lustful thoughts at the sexual organ of a woman;
Or looking at the face of one giving alms.

931.

931.

Kati ukkhittakā vuttā, sammāvattanakā kati?

How many suspended bhikkhus are stated, how many reinstatements (sammāvattana)?
Three suspended bhikkhus are stated, forty-three reinstatements.

932.

932.

Adassanappaṭīkamme, āpannāpattiyā duve;

Two for non-seeing and non-atonement for offenses;
One for non-relinquishment and for wrong view.

933.

933.

Kati nāsitakā vuttā, katīnaṃ ekavācikā?

How many destroyed (nāsita) ones are stated, how many for whom one utterance is made?
Three destroyed ones are stated, for three of whom one utterance is made.

934.

934.

Mettiyā dūsako ceva, kaṇṭakoti tayo ime;

The one who harms Mettiyā, the one who hates, and Kaṇṭaka—these three
Are destroyed by loss of status, association, and penalty, respectively.

935.

935.

Ekupajjhāyakeneva, ekenācariyena ca;

By a single preceptor, and by a single teacher,
It is allowable to have two or three announce, it is specified.

936.

936.

Ñattiyā kappanā ceva, tathā vippakatampi ca;

Declaration (ñatti) and procedure (kappanā), and also transgression (vippakata),
And lapse (atītakaraṇa)—these three are the summaries of a kamma.

937.

937.

Ñattiyākappanānāma, ‘‘dadeyya’’ccevamādikā;

Declaration and procedure is, for example, "he should give," etc.;
Transgression would be failure to complete the procedure.

938.

938.

atītakaraṇaṃsiyā;

Lapse would be the expiration of the time limit;
All these kammas are included by these three.

939.

939.

Saṅghe salākagāhena, kammenapi ca kevalaṃ;

The Sangha is divided by taking voting tickets or by a formal act alone;
By these two causes, the Sangha is divided, and not otherwise.

940.

940.

Saṅghabhedakabhikkhussa, tassa pārājikaṃ siyā;

For the bhikkhu who divides the Sangha, it is a pārājika offense;
For the bhikkhus who follow, a thullaccaya offense is declared.

941.

941.

Payuttāyuttavācāya, kati āpattiyo phuse?

How many offenses does one incur by uttering connected and unconnected speech?
One incurs six offenses by uttering connected and unconnected speech.

942.

942.

Ājīvahetu pāpiccho, icchāpakatamānaso;

Desiring evil, with a mind corrupted by desire, for the sake of livelihood,
He is defeated who speaks falsely about an unpossessed superior quality.

943.

943.

Sañcarittaṃ samāpanne, tathā saṅghādisesatā;

One incurs a saṅghādisesa offense for completed acting as a go-between;
One incurs a thullaccaya offense for speaking about who dwells in that monastery.

944.

944.

Viññāpetvā paṇītaṃ tu, bhojanaṃ bhikkhu bhuñjati;

Having made it known, a bhikkhu eats choice food;
For a bhikkhuni, it would be an offense of paṭidesanīya.

945.

945.

Viññāpetvāna sūpaṃ vā, odanaṃ vā anāmayo;

Having made known, a bhikkhu, being sick, eats soup or rice;
For him, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.

946.

946.

Dasasatāni rattīnaṃ, chādetvāpattiyo pana;

Having covered offenses for ten-hundred nights;
Having lived for ten nights, a parivāsika is freed.

947.

947.

Pārājikāni aṭṭheva, tevīsa garukā pana;

Eight indeed are the pārājikās, twenty-three are the garukas;
Two are the aniyatas, spoken by the Buddha, the kinsman of the sun.

948.

948.

Nissaggiyāni vuttāni, dvecattālīsa honti hi;

Forty-two indeed are the nissaggiyas spoken;
All the pācittiyas are one hundred and eighty-eight.

949.

949.

Pāṭidesaniyā vuttā, dvādaseva mahesinā;

Twelve indeed are the paṭidesanīyas spoken by the great sage;
Seventy-five sekhiyas were spoken by the well-trained one.

950.

950.

Paññattāni supaññena, gotamena yasassinā;

These all were established by the wise Gotama, the famous one;
They become half of two-hundred and five.

951.

951.

Yo panetesu vattabbo;

Whatever is to be said about these;
The essential decision;
That has been fully spoken by me;
Everywhere, concisely.

952.

952.

Mayā suṭṭhu vicāretvā, pāḷiaṭṭhakathānayaṃ;

Having well considered the Pāli and commentary way;
Having done this, having made an effort, this should be learned.

953.

953.

Atthe akkharabandhe vā, viññāsassa kamepi vā;

Therefore, doubt should not be made in meaning, arrangement of letters, or order of understanding;
Respect should be made.

954.

954.

Sauttaraṃ yo jānāti;

He who knows the decision of the Vinaya, along with its commentary;
Having freed himself from dependence, he would go as he pleases.

955.

955.

Nissayaṃ dātukāmena, savibhaṅgaṃ samātikaṃ;

For one wishing to give dependence, having made it well-learned, with vibhaṅga and ātika;
Having known it, this should be given.

956.

956.

Imaṃ paṭhati cinteti, suṇāti paripucchati;

He constantly reads this, thinks about it, hears it, questions it;
He causes others to read it, and investigates its meaning.

957.

957.

Yo tassa pana bhikkhussa, atthā vinayanissitā;

Indeed, all the meanings dependent on the Vinaya,
Attend to that bhikkhu, like an amalaka fruit in the hand.

958.

958.

Imaṃ paramamuttaraṃ uttaraṃ;

This is the highest, the best, the best;
A man crosses the ocean of arrogance, the ocean;
Understanding is wisdom for people, wisdom;
He would be one who has gone to the beyond in Vinaya, gone to the beyond.

959.

959.

Ato hi niccaṃ imamuttamaṃ tamaṃ;

Therefore, always this excellent thing;
Having dispelled darkness, he should learn conduct endowed with virtues, beneficial;
Indeed, a man, full of respect and energy;
[Attains] the path that gives all the constituents of happiness.

960.

960.

Vinaye paṭubhāvakare parame;

In the Vinaya, which causes intelligence to arise, which is supreme;
For one desiring skill in the Piṭaka;
By a skillful method, by a skillful ascetic;
This should always be learned.

Nigamanakathā
Concluding Talk

961.

961.

buddhadattena,suddhacittena dhīmatā;

By Buddhadatta, with a pure mind, intelligent;
Wishing for the long duration of the dispensation of the great sage.

962.

962.

Antarenantarāyaṃ tu, yathā siddhimupāgato;

Without obstacles, as it came to accomplishment;
In meaning and arrangement of the text, this unsurpassed Uttara.

963.

963.

Tathā sijjhantu saṅkappā, sattānaṃ dhammasaṃyutā;

Thus, may the intentions of beings connected with Dhamma succeed;
May the king protect the earth rightly, may the god rain in due season.

964.

964.

Yāva tiṭṭhati selindo, yāva cando virocati;

As long as Mount Selinda stands, as long as the moon shines;
So long may the good Dhamma of Gotama, the great sage, stand.

965.

965.

Khantisoraccasosīlya-buddhisaddhādayādayo;

Patience, gentleness, purity, morality, wisdom, faith, compassion, and other qualities;
Are established in whom, like jewels in the ocean.

966.

966.

Vinayācārayuttena, tena sakkacca sādaraṃ;

By him who is endowed with Vinaya conduct, with respect and care;
By Saṅghapāla, the Thera, with a firm mind.

967.

967.

Suciraṭṭhitikāmena, vinayassa mahesino;

Wishing for the long duration of the Vinaya of the great sage;
For the reading of bhikkhus, in the decision of the Vinaya.

968.

968.

uttaraṃnāma nāmato;

Uttara by name;
Having made respect in listening, therefore this should be learned.

969.

969.

Paññāsādhikasaṅkhyāni, navagāthāsatāni hi;

Nine-hundred and fifty verses;
This is the calculation of Uttara, indeed, by the anuṭṭhubha meter.

970.

970.

Gāthā catusahassāni, satañca ūnavīsati;

Four thousand minus twenty verses;
These are said to be the measure, in the decision of the Vinaya.

buddhadattenaracito uttaravinicchayo samattoti.

The Uttara-vinicchaya composed by Buddhadatta is complete.

Uttaravinicchayo niṭṭhito.

The Uttaravinicchaya is finished.